How to Start Page 1 of 6

How to Start
Starts the program from the Start Menu.

1. Confirm that the power to the contour measuring instrument is turned on.
2. Click [Start] on your task bar.
3. And then point to [All Programs].
4. And then poin to [Mitutoyo App Group].
5. And click the icon from the list of programs.
6. When you make the security function effective, the logon screen is displayed.

Enter your user name and password registered in [User Management Utility].

Please refer to [Start and Exit] - [Log on] for details.

Notice:

When the power supply is turned on to the measuring instrument with the [Main Unit Startup System]
operating, the [M0201] message is displayed.

Under such a condition, the measuring instrument doesn't work. Please contact our service center at
once.

Example of Start menu:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh8A9.htm 6/2/2021
How to Start Page 2 of 6

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [How to Exit]

[Start and Exit] - [Log on]

[Start and Exit] - [Main Unit Startup System]

How to Exit
Exits this program.

1. Click [Exit Application] of the [File] menu.

Otherwise, click [Close] command of the control menu.

2. If there is unsaved data, the window that confirms whether to save the measured data is displayed.

i. To save the modifications, click [Yes].

ii. To discard the modifications, click [No].
iii. To continue the operation, click [Cancel].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh8A9.htm 6/2/2021
How to Start Page 3 of 6

Shortcut:

Click [Close] in the title.

Shortcut key: ALT + F4

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [How to Start]

Log on
Allows you to set the security level to limit the function that can be used for each user.

For instance, you can limit the user who can calibrate the measuring instrument and the user who can
edit the measurement procedure.

When you make the security function effective, the Logon screen is displayed.

The [User Information]] dialog box is displayed when the [User Information] command of the [Tool]
menu is clicked, and logon user's information can be confirmed.

Example of Logon Screen:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh8A9.htm 6/2/2021
How to Start Page 4 of 6

a. [User name] --- Enter your user name registered in [User Management Utility].

b. [Password] --- Type your password registered in [User Management Utility].

[User Information] Dialog Box:

a. [User] --- Displays the User Name.

b. [Role group] --- Displays the User's Role Group.

c. [Log on...] --- Logs on.

Displays the Logon Screen.

d. [Log off...] --- Logs off.

e. [Password...] --- Changes the Password. The authority to change the password is necessary.

The [Change Password] dialog box is displayed.

[Change Password] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh8A9.htm 6/2/2021
How to Start Page 5 of 6

a. [Old password] --- Type your existing password.

b. [New password] --- Type an appropriate password.

c. [Confirm new password] --- Retype your new password.

Notice:

The security function is invalid immediately after the installation of this program.

Please refer to the User's Guide of User Management Utility.

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [How to Exit]

Changing Language
Changes the display language.

How To:

1. Click the language command in [Language] menu of [View] menu.

Notice:

Please select display language of FORMTRACEPAK as display language of Layout Edit Program.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh8A9.htm 6/2/2021
How to Start Page 6 of 6

If not, FORMTRACEPAK may not work correctly.

There is a character not correctly displayed according to the language.

See Also

About the [Main Unit Startup System]

When the unexpected vibration is added to the measuring instrument, the [Main Unit Startup System]
prohibits the movement of the measuring instrument.

When you move the measuring instrument, the [Main Unit Startup System] system operates.

This system exists to maintain the performance and the safety of the measuring instrument.

Please refet to the User's Guide(For Hardware).

Notice:

l When the [Main Unit Startup System] operates after turning on the power supply of the
measuring instrument, the [M0202] message is displayed, and you can operate the measuring
instrument only for a certain period.

The [M0201] message is displayed after a certain period passes, and the measuring instrument
becomes impossible operation.

Please contact our service center at once.

l When the power supply is turned on to the measuring instrument with the [Main Unit Startup
System] operating, the [M0201] message is displayed.

Under such a condition, the measuring instrument doesn't work. Please contact our service center
at once.

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [How to Start]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh8A9.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 1 of 23

Operation Screen
Allows you to customize the operation screen to easy-to-use arrangement.

How to Use:

1. To change the window size,

i. Move the cursor to the boundary of the window. The cursor is changed to the size change cursor( / ).
ii. Drag the mouse and change the window size.
2. To change the window size,
i. Drag the window title bar and drop to the docking position.
ii. The window floats when you drop non-docking position.

3. To return the window size and position to the initial state,

i. Click [Arrangement] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.
ii. Arranges all windows.
4. To change the column width of the window title,
i. Hover over the column handle edge that you want to expand. A double-headed arrow( ) appears.
ii. Click to grab the edge of the column and move it left or right to adjust the column width.
5. To arrange the toolbar or toolbox,
i. Click [Arrangement] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.
6. To discard the position of the toolbar when exiting,
i. Click [Do not save Toolbar position upon exiting.] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.
ii. When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the position of the toolbar is not saved.

Name of operation screen each part:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 2 of 23

a. [Title] bar --- Displays the file name of the measuring data.*1)

b. [Standard] toolbar --- Contains buttons that are shortcuts to some commonly used menu items.
c. Part Program Window --- Displays the list of part program.*2)

d. Guidance Window --- Displays the input guidance of the calculation command.
e. Measurement Result Window --- Displays the measurement result of the selection procedure of the part program.*3)
f. Measurement Condition Window --- Displays the setting of the measurement condition*4) and compensation condition*5).
g. [Status] bar --- Displays the guidance and status information.

h. [Focus Mark] --- Displays the triangle mark on the upper left corner of the focused window.
Move your cursor to [Focus Mark]. Displays the view information.

i. Figure Window --- Displays the measurement data and the calculation result.
j. [Stylus Pos] --- Displays the triangular mark that shows the position of the stylus.

k. [Scroll] bar --- Moves the display position on the figure window.
l. [Measurement/Procedure] bar --- Contains buttons that are shortcuts to measurement,part program,condition settings, etc.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 3 of 23

m. Counter --- Displays the various counters.

n. Evaluation Condition Window --- Displays the evaluation condition of the roughness command that selected in the part program.

*1) The measurement data is the measurement points, the measurement results, and the part program.

*2) The part program is the procedure from the measurement to the print.

And the part program contains the compensation condition, calculation procedure, part program run condition.

*3) The measurement result is the result of the calculation from the measurement point.

*4) The measurement condition contains Length, Pitch, Sampling Method, Speed, Tracing Direction, Position, Auto Return, Over-Range, Holding Stylus Position, Vibrator.

*5) The compensation condition contains Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio, Symmetric Compensation, Straightness Compensation, Stylus Radius Compensation, Workpiece
Thermal Compensation.

See Also

Title Bar
Displays the file name of the edited measuring data.

Title Bar:

1. Program Icon --- Displays a icon of this program.

2. [Minimize] button --- Minimizes the window.
3. [Maximize] button --- Maximizes the window.
4. [Restore] button --- Restores a maximized or minimized window to its previous size.
5. [Close] button --- Exits this program.

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [How to Exit]

Standard Toolbar
[Standard] Toolbar contains buttons that are shortcuts to some commonly used menu items.

How to Use:

1. Click [Tool Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the Standard Toolbar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, The Standard Toolbar is displayed.

[Standard] Toolbar:

a. [New] --- Creates a new measured data file.

b. [Open] --- Opens an existing measured data.

Displays the [Open] dialog box. Select the arbitrary measured data file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 4 of 23

c. [Save] --- Overwrites the active measurement data.

The [Save As] dialog box appears when you are not applying the name to the measurement data. Specify a file name.
d. [New N-Parts Part Program] --- Creates new N-Parts Part Program.
e. [Open N-Parts Part Program...] --- Opens a N-Parts Part Program file.
f. [Save N-Parts Part Program...] --- Saves a N-Parts Part Program.
g. [Clear N-Parts Part Program Result] --- Clears a N-Parts Part Program Result.
h. [Print] --- Prints the measurement data.
i. [Undo] --- Reverses the last action you performed.

Notice:Some operation cannot be undone.

j. [Redo] --- [Undo] the last Undo action.

k. [Copy] --- Copies the visible portion of the screen image to the clipboard.
l. [Polar Coordinate Development Display] --- Displays the measurement point in polar coordinates.
m. [Calculation Toolbox] --- Shows or Hides the Calculation Toolbox.
n. [Measurement] --- Terminates the calculation and moves to the measurement.
o. [Calculation] --- Terminates the measurement and moves to the calculation.
p. [Round Magnification] button --- Rounds the display magnification value according to the series of 1,2,5,etc.

Notice: Changes the Vertical/Horizontal magnification regardless of the setting of the [View]-[Fixed Vertical/Horizontal Ratio] command.
q. [Zoom-In] --- Enlarges and displays the specified rectangular area on the screen to the whole figure window.
r. [Zoom-Out] --- Reduces and displays the displayed area on the figure window to the specified rectangular area on the screen.

By dragging, specify a rectangular area on the Figure Window.

To cancel the command, press the [ESC] key or click the [Zoom-In]( [Zoom-Out]) button.
s. [Zoom By Dragging] button --- Zooms in or out the measurement data by dragging up and down on the Figure Window.

Notice: To cancel the mode, click this button or click right button of mouse or press ESC key.

Allows you to zoom in or out similarly by the following operations.

i. Drag up and down with the CTRL key held down.
ii. Or roll the wheel button with the CTRL key held down.
iii. Or press the up and down arrow key with the CTRL key held down.
t. [Zoom By Vertical Moving] button --- Zooms in or out the measurement data by vertical moving.

Notice: To cancel the mode, click this button or click right button of mouse or press ESC key.

Allows you to zoom in or out similarly by the following operations.

i. Drag up and down with the SHIFT key and CTRL key held down.
ii. Or roll the wheel button with the SHIFT key and CTRL key held down.
iii. Or press the up and down arrow key with the SHIFT key and CTRL key held down.
u. [Overall Display] --- Displays all the measurement points in the Figure Window.
v. [Help] --- Displays the Help.
w. [What's this?] --- Displays the context-sensitive Help.

Please refer to [Using Help] for details.

See Also

Display Magnification Bar

By using the [Display Magnification] bar, you can zoom in or out the measurement data of the Figure Window.

How to Use:

1. Click [Display Magnification Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Display Magnification] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Display Magnification] bar is displayed.

[Display Magnification] Bar:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 5 of 23

a. [Horiz Mag] --- Specify the horizontal magnification.

b. [Vert Mag] --- Specify the vertical magnification.

To specify an arbitrary maginification, please select the [Arbitrary Value].

Displays the [Calculation] dialog box. Enter the value of display maginification.

When the check mark of the [View]-[Fixed Vertical/Horizontal Ratio] command is displayed, the other magnification is also changed at the same time.
c. [Fix Ratio] --- The vertical, horizontal ratio is fixed.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Magnification]

Part Program Run Condition Bar

Validates(the toggle button is pressed) or invalidates(the toggle button is not pressed) the function of the measurement procedure.

How to Use:

1. Click [Part Program Run Conditions Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Part Program Run Condition] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Part Program Run Condition] bar is displayed.

[Part Program Run Condition] Bar:

a. [Measurement] --- Executes the measurement or reads from the file the measurement data.
b. [Bestfit] --- Executes the Bestfit.
c. [Data Edit] --- Edits the data.
d. [Calculation] --- Executes the calculation procedure.
e. [Print] --- Prints the page layout.
f. [Output] --- Outputs the results.
g. [EasyStat] --- Outputs the statistical data to EasyStat.

See Also

Part Program Call Bar

Calls the registered part program.

How to Use:

1. Click [Part Program Call Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Part Program Call] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Part Program Call] bar is displayed.

[Part Program Call] Bar:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 6 of 23

How To:

1. Select the registered part program.

2. when the measurement data is edited, the confirming dialog box is displayed.

Notice:

Discards the measurement points and results. Execute the called part program.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Calling Part Program] - [Registering/Calling Part Program]

Run Mode Bar

Switches the run mode.

How to Use:

1. Click [Run mode Toolbar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Run Mode] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Run Mode] bar is displayed.

[Run Mode] Bar:

a. [Single Measurement] --- Switches to Single Measurement Mode.

b. [Teaching] --- Switches to Teaching Mode.
c. [Part Program Run] --- Switches to Part Program Run Mode.
d. [N-Parts Part Program Run] --- Switches to N-Parts Part Program Run Mode.
e. [Step Running] --- Switches the Continuous Run Mode to the Step Run Mode.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Part Program And Calculation Procedure]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

Part Program Run Bar

Contains buttons that are shortcuts to operation of Part Program/N-Parts Part Program.

How to Use:

1. Click [Part Program Run Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Part Program Run] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Part Program Run] bar is displayed.

[Part Program Run] Bar:

--- For Part Program Run Mode.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 7 of 23

--- For N-Parts Part Program Run Mode.

a. [Start] --- Executes Part Program. Executes one step of Part Program when the Run Mode is Step Run Mode.
b. [Start] --- Executes the N-Parts Part Program.
c. [Stop] --- Stops the measurement or Part Proram. *1)

*1)This button is not the emergency stop button. To emergency stop, push the Emergency Stop Button of Joystick Box.

See Also

Part Program Creation Bar

Registers the procedure to Part Program or N-Parts Part Program.

How to Use:

1. Click [Part Program Create Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Part Program Creation] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Part Program Creation] bar is displayed.

[Part Program Creation] Bar:

a. [Register Part Program] --- Registers Part Program to N-Parts Part Program.

b. [Register Loop Start] --- Registers [Loop Start] command to N-Parts Part Program.

c. [Register Loop End] --- Registers [Loop End] command to N-Parts Part Program.

d. [Register Pause] --- Registers [Pause] command.

e. [Register Movement(single axis)] --- Registers [Movement(single axis)] command.

f. [Register Movement] --- Registers [Movement] command.

g. [Register Measurement] --- Registers [Measurement] command.

h. [Register Scale Coordinate Origin Movement] --- Registers [Scale Coordinate Origin Movement] command.

i. [Register Coordinate System Movement] --- Registers [Coordinate System Movement] command.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Part Program And Calculation Procedure]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

Running Mode Display Bar

Displays the current run mode.

How to Use:

1. Click [Part Program Status Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Run Mode Display] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Run Mode Display] bar is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 8 of 23

[Run Mode Display] Bar:

a. [Contour Measurement] --- The Run Mode is Single Measurement Mode (Contour Measurement).
b. [Roughness Measurement] --- The Run Mode is Single Measurement Mode (Roughness Measurement).
c. [Teaching Mode (Contour)] --- The Run Mode is Teaching Mode (Contour Measurement).
d. [Teaching Mode (Roughness)] --- The Run Mode is Teaching Mode (Roughness Measurement).
e. [Repeat] --- The Run Mode is Part Program Running Mode.
f. [N-Parts Repeat] --- The Run Mode is N-Parts Part Program Running Mode.

See Also

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To Single Measurement Mode]

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To Teaching Mode]

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To Part Program Run Mode]

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To N-Parts Part Program Run Mode]

Data History Bar

Registers the measurement data to Data History. Uses the measurement data in Data History.

How to Use:

1. Click [Data History Select Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Data History] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Data History] bar is displayed.

[Data History] Bar:

a. [History File Automatic Saving] --- Saves the History File automatically.
b. [Register To Data History] --- Registers the measurement data to Data History.
c. Data History List --- Select a Data History File from the list.
d. [Previous Item] --- Opens the previous history file.
e. [Next Item] --- Opens the next history file.
f. [Delete the history file] --- Deletes the selected history file.

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Using Data History]

[Customizing] - [Data History]

Status Bar

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 9 of 23

Displays the guidance and status information.

How to Use:

1. Click [Status Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the Status bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Status bar is displayed.

System Status List:

1. [Work Coordinate System] --- The Work Coordinate System of the contour analysis is set.
2. [Needs N more pts.] --- Displays the number of points necessary for the calculation.
3. [Input Point Selection] --- Select one point from two or more intersections.
4. [Calculation Result Selection] --- Select one result from two or more calculation results.
5. [Data Range Selection] --- Select the calculation range(Close Contour).
6. [Now Selecting Contour...] --- Select one contour from two or more contours.
7. [Now Zooming...] --- You are zooming now.
8. [Distance Datum] --- The datum of the distance calculation is set.
9. [Running] --- The calculation procedure or Part Program is executed.
10. [Insert] --- The calculation procedure has been inserted.
11. [Origin Detection] --- The origin detection of each axis of the detector is executed.
12. [Calibration] --- You are calibrating now...
13. [Paragraph n/p] --- Displays the paragraph divide number (p) and the paragraph counter (n).(When printing Paragraph.)
14. [2D] --- You are executing 2D analysis now.
15. [3D] --- You are executing 3D analysis now.
16. [Display Section] --- Displays the Display Section Angle.
17. [MC Org:Nominal val] --- The machine coordinate system of the measuring instrument is not calibrating.
18. [MC Org:Calib val] --- The machine coordinate system of the measuring instrument is calibrating.
19. [Interlock] --- It is interlocked.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Setting Calculation Coordinate System]

Figure Window
Displays the measurement data and the calculation result.

All outlines are displayed in the [All Contour] tab considering that the T1-axis Angle and the B-axis Angle are the same.

How to Use:

1. Allows you to split the Figure Window.

i. To split horizontally, click [Split Horizontally] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Or click [Split Horizontally] button on the lower right corner of the window
ii. To split vertically, click [Split Vertically] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Or click [Split Vertically] button on the lower right corner of the window.
iii. Click [Split By Dragging] button on the lower right corner of the window. And drag to the split position.

To move the split position, drag the border of the split window.

To undo the action, click the same command or button again.

2. Allows you to expand the Figure Window temporarily.

i. Click [Figure Window Expansion] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

To undo the action, click the same command again.

ii. Click [Expand window] button on the lower right corner of the window.

To undo the action, click button while expanding.

3. Click [All Contour Tab] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the [All Contour] tab of the Figure Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [All Contour] tab is displayed.

Figure Window:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 10 of 23

a. Displays the scale to read the range of the measurement point.

Displays Z axis scale in the left end. Displays X axis scale in the upper end.
b. Displays triangular mark in the upper left corner of the focused window.

This triangular mark shows the target window of the scroll operation and the command input.

To change the focus to the next window, press [F6] Function Key.

When you point to the triangular mark, the View Information is displayed as shown in the following figures.

To always display the View Information, push the pin mark.

=>
c. To move the display position of the figure data of the Figure Window,
i. Use the vertical scroll bar([1]), or the horizontal scroll bar([2]), or the arrow button([3]).
ii. Or drag the figure of the Figure Window.
d. Display Data Selection Tab --- Select the tab in each section added to the tab display area. *1) *2)

To select the next tab, press CTRL+TAB key,

or put the cursor on the tab and rotate the mouse wheel.

*1) To expand the display area of the tab, grab and drag box at the right of the tab.

*2) To display the hidden tab, click the arrow button of the left side of the tab.
e. Tab List --- Click [Tab List Display] button on the lower left corner of the window, the tab list is displayed, and select the displayed tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 11 of 23

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Contour]

Part Program Window

Displays the list of part program.

How to Use:

1. Click [Part Program] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the Part Program Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Part Program Window is displayed.

2. To display N-Parts Part Program, click [N-Parts] tab.

3. To display the information of selected the command, click the [INPUT] tab.

Part Program Window([Part Program] tab):

Part Program Window([N-Parts] tab):

Part Program Window([INPUT] tab):

Tip:

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the command outputs the statistical data.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 12 of 23

See Also

Measurement Result Window

Displays the measurement result of Part Program selected with Part Program Window.

How to Use:

1. Click [Meas Result] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the Measurement Reuslt Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Measurement Reuslt Window is displayed.
2. To change the display item of Measurement Result Window,
3. click the pop-up menu command of title.

Displays the result of the command to which the check mark is displayed in Measurement Result Window.
4. To change the order of the item of Measurement Result Window, grab and drag the title to the appropriate position.

5. To change the width of the item of Measurement Result Window, click [Adjust Column Width] command of the pop-up menu of the title.
6. To change the font of Measurement Result Window, click [Font] command of the pop-up menu of the title.

Displays [Font] dialog box. Change the condition of the font.

Measurement Reuslt Window:

Tip:

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the command outputs the statistical data.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Font]

Guidance Window
Displays the input instruction of the calculation command.

How to Use:

1. Click [Guidance] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the Guidance Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Guidance Window is displayed.

Guidance Window:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 13 of 23

Display Guidance:

1. Command History

2. Number of measurement points(Number of measurement points selected by Range Specification)

3. Operation Explanation
4. Error Message

See Also

Overall Display Window

Displays the entire measurement data.

How to Use:

1. Click [Overall Display] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the Overall Display Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Overall Display Window is displayed.

Overall Display Window:

a. Hatching Area --- The hatching area shows the area displayed in the Figure Window.

To change the position of the display area directly, grab and drag the hatching area to the appropriate position.

To zoom in/out the Figure Window, grab and drag the frame of the hatching area.

See Also

Counter
Displays the various counters.

How to Use:

1. Click [Counter...] command of the [View] menu.

Displays the [Counter] dialog box.

2. Set the counter type and the display method.
i. Counter (Coordinate) --- Displays the mouse position(X,Z) of the Calculation Screen.
ii. Counter --- Displays the position(X1,Y,Z1) of the detector on the Measurement Screen. *1)
iii. Option Axis Counter --- Displays the position(Z2,A,B,T1,T2) of Option Axis. *1)
iv. Machine Coordinate Counter --- Displays the position(X,Y,Z) of X1 axis, Y axis(Option), Z1 axis. *1)
v. Work Coordinate Counter --- Displays the position(Xw,Yw,Zw) of X1 axis, Y axis(Option), Z1 axis. *1)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 14 of 23

*1) Set on the Measurement Screen.

[Counter] dialog box(Measurement/Calculation):

a. [Display] --- Displays the Counter (Coordinate) in the Calculation Screen and displays the Counter in the Measurement Screen.
b. [Magnified Display during Meas.] --- Displays the large counter during measurement.
c. [Display Dist. Meter] --- Displays the Distance Meter under Counter (Coordinate).
d. [Color] Group
i. [Yellow] --- Displays the character of the counter in yellow.
ii. [Green] --- Displays the character of the counter in green.
iii. [Windows Color] --- Displays the character of the counter in Windows Color.
e. [Display Method] Group
i. [Normal Counter] --- Displays the normal counter.
ii. [Relative Counter from Peak] --- Displays the relative counter from the peak point. *2)
iii. [Relative Counter from Valley] --- Displays the relative counter from the valley point. *2)

*2) The axis of relative counter is X1, Y, and Z1 axis.

f. [Option Axis Counter] --- Displays the Option Axis Counter.

g. [Display large during meas.] --- Displays the large Option Axis Counter during measurement.
h. [Machine Coord. Counter] --- Displays the Machine Coordinate Counter.
i. [Work Coord. Counter] --- Displays the Work Coordinate Counter.
j. [Display large during meas.] --- Displays the large Machine Coordinate Counter and the large Work Coordinate Counter during measurement.
k. [Color] Group
i. [Yellow] --- Displays the character of the counter in yellow.
ii. [Green] --- Displays the character of the counter in green.
iii. [Windows Color] --- Displays the character of the counter in Windows Color.

Couter Type:

Counter (Coordinate)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 15 of 23

a. X,Z --- Displays the mouse position(X,Z) of the Calculation Screen.

Counter

a. X1,Y,Z1 --- Displays the position of the detector.

Option-Axis Counter

a. Z2,A,B,T1,T2 --- Displays the position of Option Axis.

Machine Coordinate Counter

a. X,Y,Z --- Displays the position of Machine Coordinate of X1/Y(Option)/Z1 axis.

Work Coordinate Counter

a. Xw,Yw,Zw --- Displays the position of Work Coordinate of X1/Y(Option)/Z1 axis.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Measurement]

Measurement Condition Window

Displays the setting value of the measurement condition and compensation condition.

How to Use:

1. Click [Meas. Condition] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the Measurement Condition Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Measurement Condition Window is displayed.

Measurement Condition Window:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 16 of 23

a. [Meas. Condition]/[Comp. Condition] --- Displays the setting value of the main item of the measurement condition and compensation condition.

See Also

Evaluation Condition Window

Displays the evaluation condition of the roughness command that selected in the part program.

Notice:

Displays the evaluation condition of the next measurement command on the measurement screen.

How to Use:

1. Click [Evaluation Condition] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the Evaluation Condition Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Evaluation Condition Window is displayed.

See Also

Analysis Graph Window

Displays the calculated analysis graph or the Parameter Tolerance Result Distribution Graph.

How to Use:

1. Click [Analysis Graph] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the Analysis Graph Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Analysis Graph Window is displayed.
2. Displays the analysis graph selected with Analysis Graph Condition in the tab.
3. In the following cases, the Parameter Tolerance Result Distribution Graph is displayed in the tab.
i. The Roughness Parameter is calculated by [16% Rule] or [Max. Value Rule] or [Failing Rate Specification Rule]
.
ii. The Comparison Result of Roughness Parameter is displayed in detail.

Tip:

For detailed information about the analysis graph, refer to each page of [Analyzing Roughness] - [2D Roughness Analysis] - [Analysis Graph].

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Analysis Graph Condition]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Graph]

3D View Window
Displays the measurement data by 3D.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 17 of 23

How to Use:

1. Click [3D View] command of the [View] - [Window] menu.

Shows or Hides the 3D View Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the 3D View Window is displayed.
2. Drag and rotate the position on the 3D View Window to the appropriate angle.
3. Allows you to change the direction of the display from the pop-up menu.
i. [Plane] --- Displays the figure seen right above.
ii. [Front] --- Displays the figure seen from the front.
iii. [Right] --- Displays the figure seen from the right.
iv. [Left] --- Displays the figure seen from the left.
v. [Back] --- Displays the figure seen from the back.
vi. [Bottom] --- Displays the figure seen from the bottom.
vii. [Isometric Projection] --- Adjusts and displays the crossing angle of the projected axis to 120 degrees.
viii. [Trimetric Projection] --- Adjusts and displays not to equate the crossing angle of the projected axis.
4. To change the Display Magnification, click [Set Z/X Ratio] command from the pop-up menu.

Displays the [Display Magnification Setup] dialog box.

3D View Window:

[Display Magnification Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Z/X Ratio] --- Select the ratio.

To input the arbitrary ratio, select [Arbitrary Value].

See Also

Level Meter
Displays Z axis position of the detector.

How to Use:

1. Click [Level Meter] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the Level Meter.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Level Meter is displayed.
2. To change the range to arbitary value, click [Set arbitrary value in Max./Min.] command of the pop-up menu.
i. Displays the Calculator. Input a maximum value of Range.
ii. Displays the Calculator. Input a minimum value of Range.

Tip: To change either the Range Value, click the Range Value.

3. To change the range value to Max./Min. of the detector(Z1), click [Set Range Value in Max./Min.] command of the pop-up menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 18 of 23

Level Meter:

a. [Level] --- Displays the Z axis postion of the detector by the relative value from Z1 Axis Origine Point/Peak Point/Valley Point according to the display
method of the counter.
b. [Range] --- Displays the range of Z axis of the detector.

See Also

Stylus Position
Displays the triangle mark that shows the stylus position in the Figure Window.

Tip:

Displays the triangular mark with half-transparent background color when the video mode is set to True Color.

How to Use:

1. To switch the operation window when the window is divided, click the window where the stylus position is displayed.
2. Click [Stylus Position] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the Stylus Position.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Stylus Position is displayed.

Stylus Position:

a. Stylus Position --- Matches and displays the Stylus Position in the direction of the stylus.

The top position of Stylus Position shows the position of the coordinate value of Counter.
b. X Axis/Z Axis Scale --- Displays the Stylus Position with blue color when the stylus is outside the Figure Window.

Notice:

The [Stylus Position] command is enabled on the Measurement Screen.

See Also

Measurement/Procedure Bar
Contains buttons that are shortcuts to measurement,part program,condition settings, etc.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 19 of 23

How to Use:

1. Click [Meas/Procedure Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Measurement/Procedure] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Measurement/Procedure] bar is displayed.

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar:

a. [Measure] --- Starts the Single Measurement. (Not Auto-set)

b. [Measure]--- Starts the Single Measurement. (Auto-set)

c. [Measure] --- Starts the measurement and registers the measurement command to Part Program.

d. [Start] --- Execute the Part Program.

Executes one step of Part Program when the Run Mode is Step Running Mode.

e. [Start] --- Executes the N-Parts Part Program.

f. [Stop] --- Stops the measurement or the Part Proram.

Notice: This is not the emergency stop button.

To emergency stop, push the Emergency Stop Button of Joystick Box.

g. [Device] --- Shows or Hides the Device Manual Operation Bar.
h. [Tool] --- Shows or Hides the Measurement Toolbox.
i. [Disp.] --- Shows or Hides the Measurement Condition Bar.

j. [Instr.] --- Sets the Measuring Instrument .

k. [MeasSet] --- Sets the measurement condition.

l. [CompSet] --- Sets the compensation conditions.

m. [Length] --- Sets the measurement length of the measurement condition.
n. [Speed] --- Sets the measurement speed of the measurement condition.
o. [Auto leveling] --- Sets the Auto Leveling of the measurement condition.

Measurement/Procedure Bar(In the detector corresponding to the Range Setting by the switch of the Z1 axis):

o. [Z1 Range] --- Sets the Z1-axis Range.

p. [Auto-set] --- Sets the Auto-set of the measurement condition.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

Manual Operation Bar

Contains buttons that are shortcuts to the function to operate the device manually.

How to Use:

1. Click [Manual Operation Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Manual Operation] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.
2. Or, please click the [Device] button in the[Measurement/Procedure] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 20 of 23

When this button is pressed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.

3. To operate the following device, change the tab.

[XYZ] Tab --- Refer to [Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Driving XYZ Axis].

[Op] Tab --- Refer to [Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Driving Option Axis].

[Goto] Tab --- Refer to [Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Moving to Specified Position].

[Sty] Tab(Contour Detector) --- Refer to [Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Driving Contour Detector].

[Sty] Tab(Roughness Detector) --- Refer to [Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Driving Roughness Detector].

[XYZ] Tab of [Manual Operation] Bar:

a. [Up] --- Moves the stylus for above.

b. [Left] --- Moves the stylus for left.
c. [Right] --- Moves the stylus for right.
d. [Down] --- Moves the stylus for below.

e. [0] --- Sets Z2-axis Counter to 0.

f. [0] --- Sets X1-axis Counter to 0.

g. [0] --- Sets Y-axis Counter to 0.

h. [Forward] --- Moves the Y-axis Table*1) forward.
i. [Backward] --- Moves the Y-axis Table*1) backward.
j. [High] --- Moves at the high speed.
k. [Low] --- Moves at the low speed.

[Op] Tab of [Manual Operation] Bar:

a. [0] --- Sets A-axis Counter to 0.

b. [0] --- Sets B-axis Counter to 0.

c. [A-axis Up] --- Rotates A-axis clockwise.
d. [A-axis Down] --- Rotates A-axis counterclockwise.
e. [B-axis CCW] --- Rotates B-axis counterclockwise.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 21 of 23

f. [B-axis CW] --- Rotates B-axis clockwise.

g. [0] --- Sets T1-axis Counter to 0.
h. [0] --- Sets T2-axis Counter to 0.
i. [T1-axis CW] --- Rotates T1-axis Table clockwise.
j. [T1-axis CCW] --- Rotates T1-axis Table counterclockwise.
k. [T2-axis CW] --- Rotates T2-axis Table clockwise.
l. [T2-axis CCW] --- Rotates T2-axis Table counterclockwise.
m. [ALT CW] --- Rotates Auto-Leveling Table clockwise.
n. [ALT CCW] --- Rotates Auto-Leveling Table counterclockwise.
o. [High] --- Moves at the high speed.
p. [Low] --- Moves at the low speed.

[Goto] Tab of [Manual Operation] Bar:

a. [Direction] --- Select the driving axis.

b. [Relative move.] --- Specifies the movement length as a relative value from the current position.
c. [Absolute move.] --- Specifies the movement length with the counter value.
d. [Move value] --- Input the movement length.
e. [Read] --- Sets the current couter value as the movement length.
f. [Movement] --- Moves the stylus.
g. [High] --- Moves at the high speed.
h. [Low] --- Moves at the low speed.

[Sty] Tab(Contour Detector) of [Manual Operation] Bar:

a. [Up] --- Moving up the stylus.

b. [Hold] --- Holding the stylus middle.
c. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input Z1-axis position holding the stylus.
d. [Down] --- Moving down the stylus.

[Sty] Tab(Roughness Detector) of [Manual Operation] Bar:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 22 of 23

a. [Zero adj.] --- Executes Zero adjustment.

b. [Auto-set] --- Executes Auto-set.
c. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input Auto-set position of Z1-axis.

*1) 3D Measurement Option.

See Also

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

Measurement Toolbox
Contains buttons that are shortcuts to the Measurement Command.

How to Use:

1. Click [Measurement Toolbox] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the Measurement Toolbox.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Measurement Toolbox is displayed.
2. Or, please click the [Tool] button in the[Measurement/Procedure] bar.

When thsi button is pressed, the Measurement Toolbox is displayed.

Measurement Toolbox:

a. [Movement(1-axis)...] --- Moves the stylus to the specified position.

b. [Movement...] --- Moves the stylus to the specified position.
c. [Return] --- Restores the stylus to the measurement start point or X-axis 0-point.
d. [Peak/Valley] --- Detects the peak/valley point.
e. [3-Axial Adj.] --- Executes the 3-Axial Adjustment Calibration.
f. [Square Align.] --- Executes the Squareness Alignment.
g. [Leveling] --- Executes the Leveling.
h. [Ball Meas.] --- Executes the Masterball Measurement.
i. [Align Work Coord. System] --- Aligns the Work Coordinate System.
j. [Rotate Work Coord. System] --- Rotates the T1-axis and aligns the coordinate system to the measurement axis.
k. [Load Coord.] --- Calls the coordinate system from file.
l. [Save Coord.] --- Saves the coordinate system to the file.
m. [Move Coord.(1-axis)] --- Moves the coordinate system(1-axis).
n. [Move Coord.] --- Moves the coordinate system.
o. [Pause] --- Registers [Pause] command.
p. [Ref. Pos.] --- Registers [Register Ref. Position] command.
q. [Stylus exchange] --- Registers [Stylus Exchange] command.
r. [Batch Calibration] --- Executes the batch calibration.
s. [Calibration] --- Executes the calibration.

Tip:

Allows you to customize the Measurement Toolbox.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some functions might not be able to be used.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
Operation Screen Page 23 of 23

See Also

[Customizing] - [Measurement Tool]

Calculation Toolbox
Contains buttons that are shortcuts to specification of calculation object.

How to Use:

1. Click [Calculation Toolbox] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the Calculation Toolbox.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Calculation Toolbox is displayed.
2. When the [Calculation] Toolbox is not displayed, the [Custom] Toolbox is displayed.

Calculation Toolbox:

a. [Point Measurement] --- Determines the point.

b. [Line Measurement] --- Determines the line.
c. [Circle Measurement] --- Determines the circle.
d. [Position/Difference] --- Determines the position or the difference.
e. [Distance/Angle] --- Determines the distance or the angle.
f. [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] --- Sets the Calculation Coordinate System.
g. [Calculation/Stat] --- Performs Arithmetic, and Statistic Calculations.
h. [Display Change] --- Changes the measurement data display.
i. [Edit Measurement Point] --- Edits the measurement point.
j. [Extensions] --- Performs various calculations.
k. [Contour Tolerancing] --- Performs the Contour Tolerancing.
l. [Custom] --- Displays the Custom Toolbox.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Registering Calculation Command]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh804A.htm 6/2/2021
About Driving Axis of Measuring Instrument Page 1 of 5

About Driving Axis of Measuring Instrument

Explains the name of the driving axis of the measuring instrument.

1. X1-axis
2. Detector(Z1-axis)
3. Z2-axis Column
4. Y-axis Table*1)
5. A-axis*2)
6. B-axis *3)

7. T1-axis *4)
8. T2-axis *5)
9. LX/LY-axis Auto Leveling Table*6)

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some axis might not be able to be used.

*1) 3D Measurement Option.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh500E.htm 6/2/2021
About Driving Axis of Measuring Instrument Page 2 of 5

*2) Option Axis.

*3) Option Axis.

*4) Option Axis.

*5) Option Axis.

*6) Auto-Leveling Option.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Driving Measuring Instrument]

Detecting Z1-axis Zero Point

Please detect Z1-axis Zero Point according to the measuring instrument before using the measuring
instrument.

How To:

1. The [Notice of Z-axis Zero Detection] dialog box is displayed, when you need detect Z1-axis
Zero Point.

2. Confirm that there is no obstruction like a workpiece, etc., then please click the [OK] button.

If there is any obstruction, please move the detector with Joystick, etc.

Notice: If the [From the next startup this message will not appear.] check box is checked, the

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh500E.htm 6/2/2021
About Driving Axis of Measuring Instrument Page 3 of 5

[Notice of Z-axis Zero Detection] dialog box will not be displayed anymore at startup.

3. The [Detection of Z1-axis Zero Point] dialog box is displayed, when you need set the detecting
direction of Z1-axis Zero Point.

a. [Detect Upward] --- Detects Z1-axis Zero Point to the upward.

b. [Detect Downward] --- Detects Z1-axis Zero Point to the downward.

Notice: When your measuring instrument model corresponds to the up-down stylus and the
measurement force, the notice is shown.

4. The [Detecting Z-axis zero position now!] dialog box is displayed while detecting Z1-axis Zero
Point.

5. The Z1-axis Zero Point is maintained while the power supply of the measuring instrument is being
turned on.

Therefore, even if this program is restarted, the Z1-axis Zero Point is not detected.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh500E.htm 6/2/2021
About Driving Axis of Measuring Instrument Page 4 of 5

See Also

Detecting the mechanical origin

In the case of your measuring instrument , you need to detect the mechanical origin before using the
measuring instrument.

How To:

1. The [Detection of the Origin] dialog box is displayed, when you need detect the mechanical
origin.

2. Set the axis for detecting the mechanical origin.

The setting need not be changed usually, because the axis that should be detected has already been
selected.

To change the order of the detection axis, refer to [Customizing] - [Machine Information].
3. Confirm that there is no obstruction like a workpiece, etc., then please click the [OK] button.

If there is any obstruction, please move the detector with Joystick, etc.

4. The [Detecting origin now!] dialog box is displayed while detecting the mechanical origin.

5. The mechanical origin is maintained while the power supply of the measuring instrument is being

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh500E.htm 6/2/2021
About Driving Axis of Measuring Instrument Page 5 of 5

turned on.

Therefore, even if this program is restarted, the mechanical origin is not detected.

Notice:
In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Machine Information]

Re-Connecting Measuring Instrument

Re-Connects Measuring Instrument.

How To:

1. When you started this program though the power supply of the measuring instrument is turned off,

or, when you turned off the power supply of the measuring instrument though this program is
starting, you need to re-connect the measuring instrument.

2. Click [Re-Connect Measuring Instrument...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh500E.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 1 of 21

Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector

Changes the kind of Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector.

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

The [Information] tab of the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 2 of 21

a. Information on Arm --- Displays the detailed information about the arm being used.

b. [Change Arm..] --- Changes the arm.

And allows you to define the arm information.

c. Information on Stylus --- Displays the detailed information about the stylus being used.

d. [Change Stylus...] --- Changes the stylus.

And allows you to define the stylus information.

e. Dist. Meter --- Displays the detail information about the running distance of Stylus.

f. Total Meas Dist. --- Total running distance of Stylus.

g. Limit Meas Dist. --- Limitation of the total running distance of Stylus.

When the running distance of Stylus exceeds this value, the character of Distance Meter on
Counter displays in red.

h. [Reset] --- The value of "Total Meas Dist." is reset to Zero.

i. [Balance Adjust] --- Performs Balance Adjust for the current combination of Arm and Stylus.

Once Balance Adjust is performed for the combination of Arm and Stylus, it is not required
henceforth. After Balance Adjust, "Balance has been adjusted" is displayed beside a [Balance
Adjust] button.

Notice: When your measuring instrument model corresponds to the up-down stylus and the
measurement force, [Balance Adjust] button is shown.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the arm information is not displayed as shown in the
following figure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 3 of 21

See Also

Selecting Arm of Contour Detector

Selects the arm of Contour Detector

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

3. Click [Change Arm..] button of the [Information on Arm] group.

Displays the [Arm Selection] dialog box.

4. Select the arm from the arm list.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 4 of 21

5. To define the arm, click [Definition] button.

[Arm Selection] Dialog Box:

a. Arm List --- Displays all arms.

Allows you to display necessary arm in the arm list.

b. [Display Arms Applicable to the Existing Stylus] --- Displays the arm that fits the current
stylus.

c. [Display All Arms] --- Displays all arms.

d. [Definition] --- Defines the arm.

e. [New] --- Defines the new arm.

f. [Delete] --- Deletes the arm.

Notice:

Cannot define and delete the arm that registered when installing.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 5 of 21

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Stylus Exchange Command]

[Customizing] - [Machine Information]

Defining Arm of Contour Detector

Changes the arm information of Contour Detector.

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

3. Click [Change Arm..] button of the [Information on Arm] group.

Displays the [Arm Selection] dialog box.

4. Select the arm from the arm list, and click [Definition] button.

Or click [New] button.

Displays [Defining the Arm] dialog box.

[Defining the Arm] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 6 of 21

a. [Type] --- Select the arm type([Straight arm]/[Eccentric arm]/[Small hole-use arm]).

b. [Arm No.] --- Input [Arm No.] that is displayed in the arm list.

Notice: The value of [Part No.] is not displayed in the list when not inputting.

c. [Part No.] --- Input [Part No.] that is displayed in the arm list.

Notice: The value of [Part No.] is not displayed in the list when not inputting.

d. [Length] --- Input the length.

e. [Tip Height] --- Input the Tip Height.

f. [Eccentric Value] --- Input the Eccentric Value.

g. [Shaft Dia.] --- Input the Shaft Diameter.

Notice:

When your measuring instrument model corresponds to the up-down stylus and the measurement
force, the following dialog is shown.

[Defining the Arm] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 7 of 21

a. [Weight] --- Input the weight of the arm.

b. [Balance] --- Input the balance of the arm.

Notice:

Cannot define and delete the arm that registered when installing.

See Also

Selecting Stylus of Contour Detector

Selects the stylus of Contour Detector

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

3. Click [Change Stylus...] button of the [Information on Stylus] group.

Displays [Stylus Selection] Dialog Box(Selectable Arm).

Displays [Stylus Selection] dialog box(Not Using Arm), when the measuring instrument not

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 8 of 21

using arm.

[Stylus Selection] Dialog Box(Selectable Arm):

a. Stylus List --- Displays all styluses.

Allows you to display necessary stylus in the stylus list.

b. [Display Stylus Applicable to the Existing Arms] --- Displays the stylus that fits the current
arm.

c. [Display All Stylus] --- Displays all styluses.

d. [Definition] --- Defines the stylus.

e. [New] --- Defines the new stylus.

f. [Delete] --- Deletes the stylus.

[Stylus Selection] Dialog Box(Not Using Arm):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 9 of 21

a. Stylus List --- Displays all styluses.

Allows you to display necessary stylus in the stylus list.

b. [Definition] --- Defines the stylus.

c. [New] --- Defines the new stylus.

d. [Delete] --- Deletes the stylus.

Notice:

Cannot define and delete the arm that registered when installing.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Stylus Exchange Command]

[Customizing] - [Machine Information]

Defining Stylus of Contour Detector

Changes the stylus information of Contour Detector.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 10 of 21

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

3. Click [Change Stylus...] button of the [Information on Stylus] group.

Displays the [Stylus Selection] dialog box.

4. Select the stylus from the stylus list, and click [Definition] button.

Or click [New] button.

Displays the [Stylus Information] dialog box.

[Defining the Stylus] Dialog Box:

a. [Type] --- Select the arm type([One-sided cut stylus]/[Intersecting cut stylus]/[Cone stylus]/
[Knife edge stylus]/[Ball stylus]/[Small hole-use stylus]).

b. [Stylus No.] --- Input [Stylus No.] that is displayed in the stylus list.

The value of [Stylus No.] is not displayed in the list when not inputting.

c. [Part No.] --- Input [Part No.] that is displayed in the stylus list.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 11 of 21

The value of [Stylus No.] is not displayed in the list when not inputting.

d. [Tip Height] --- Input the Tip Height.

e. [Tip Angle] --- Input the Tip Angle.

f. [Tip Radius] --- Input the Tip Radius.

g. [Offset X] --- Input the Offset value of X direction.

h. [Offset Z] --- Input the Offset value of Z direction.

Notice:

When your measuring instrument model corresponds to the up-down stylus and the measurement
force, the following dialog is shown.

[Defining the Stylus] Dialog Box:

a. [Weight] --- Input the weight of the stylus.

b. [Balance] --- Input the balance of the stylus.

Notice:

The stylus that registered when installing it cannot define the user, and delete it.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 12 of 21

See Also

Changing Stylus Attachment Direction

Changes the Stylus Attachment Direction.

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Stylus Attachment Direction] tab.

The [Stylus Attachment Direction] tab of the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box:

a. [Standard Attachment] --- Select [Standard Attachment] when the stylus tip is located on the
arm axis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 13 of 21

b. [Reverse Attachment] --- Select [Reverse Attachment] when the stylus tip is located off the arm
axis.

See Also

Changing Measurement Direction of Stylus

Changes the Measurement Direction of Stylus.

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Meas Direction] tab.

The [Meas Direction] tab of the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 14 of 21

a. [Downward] --- The stylus tip is downward.

b. [Upward] --- The stylus tip is upward.

See Also

Changing Stylus of Roughness Detector

Changes the Stylus of Roughness Detector.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 15 of 21

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

The [Information] tab of the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box:

a. [Detector] --- Select the detector being used.

b. [Name] --- Displays the name of the stylus being used.

c. Information on Stylus --- Displays the detailed information about the stylus being used.

d. [Change Stylus...] --- Changes the stylus or defines the stylus information.

e. [Use the Squareness Adaptor] --- Uses the squareness adaptor.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 16 of 21

f. Dist. Meter --- Displays the detail information about the running distance of Stylus.

g. Total Meas Dist. --- Total running distance of Stylus.

h. Limit Meas Dist. --- Limitation of the total running distance of Stylus.

When the running distance of Stylus exceeds this value, the character of Distance Meter on
Counter displays in red.

i. [Reset] --- The value of "Total Meas Dist." is reset to Zero.

See Also

Selecting Stylus of Roughness Detector

Selects the Selecting Stylus of Roughness Detector.

How To:

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

3. Click [Change Stylus...] button of the [Information on Stylus] group.

Displays the [Stylus Selection] dialog box.

[Stylus Information] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 17 of 21

a. Stylus List --- Displays the stylus that can be attached to the current measuring instrument.

Allows you to display necessary stylus in the stylus list.

b. [Definition] --- Defines the stylus.

Notice:

The stylus that registered when installing it cannot define the user, and delete it.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Stylus Exchange Command]

[Customizing] - [Machine Information]

Defining Stylus of Roughness Detector

Changes the stylus information of Roughness Detector.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 18 of 21

1. Click [Set Equipmen] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

3. Click [Change Stylus...] button of the [Information on Stylus] group.

Displays the [Stylus Selection] dialog box.

4. Select the stylus from the stylus list, and click [Definition] button.

Displays the [Stylus Information] dialog box.

[Defining the Stylus] Dialog Box:

a. [Name] --- Enter the name of the stylus.

b. [Arm Length] --- Input the Arm Length of the stylus.

c. [Arm Ratio] --- Input the Arm Ratio of the stylus.

d. [Stylus Projection Length] --- Input the Stylus Projection Length of the stylus.

e. [Stylus Radius] --- Input the Stylus Radius Name of the stylus.

f. [Tip Angle] --- Input the Tip Angle of the stylus.

g. [Reset] --- Resets the definition of the stylus, and restores the initial information.

Notice:

The stylus that registered when installing it cannot define the user, and delete it.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 19 of 21

See Also

Setting Software Limit

To limit range of motion according to the workpiece and tools, set the Software Limit.

How To:

1. Click [Software Limit] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Notice: In the case of your measuring instrument model, this function might not be able to be
used.

Displays the [Software Limit] dialog box.

[Software Limit] Dialog Box:

a. Software Limit List --- Displays the status of the Software Limit of each axis.

Select the axis that sets the Software Limit.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 20 of 21

b. [Min. Value] Group

i. [Set] --- Sets the minimum value of the Software Limit of the selected axis.
ii. [Clear] --- Clears the minimum value of the Software Limit of the selected axis.
c. [Max. Value] Group
i. [Set] --- Sets the maximum value of the Software Limit of the selected axis.
ii. [Clear] --- Clears the maximum value of the Software Limit of the selected axis.
d. [Clear All] --- Clears the all of the Software Limit.

Notice:

Even if this program or measuring instrument is restarted, the Software Limit is maintained.

See Also

Setting Home Position

Sets the home position*1).

How To:

1. Click [Set Home Position...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Home Position] dialog box.

[Home Position] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour Detector Page 21 of 21

a. [Valid] --- Validates the setting of Home Position.

b. [X-axis] --- Input the X axis coordinate value of Home Position.
c. [Y-axis] --- Input the Y axis coordinate value of Home Position.
d. [Z-axis] --- Input the Z axis coordinate value of Home Position.
e. [Read Position] --- Reads the position of machine coordinate system of the current detector.

Notice:

1. Please set the home position with the machine coordinate system.
2. The button may not be available, if the measuring instrument is not supported the CNC function.
3. Even if this program or measuring instrument is restarted, the Home Position is maintained.

*1) Sets the detector escape position with the machine coordinate system. The Home Position doesn't
move by moving the coordinate system.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Counter]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhAB9B.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 1 of 16

Driving XYZ Axis

Drives the X/Y/Z axis.

How To:

1. Click [Manual Operation Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Manual Operation] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.
2. Or, please click the [Device] button in the[Measurement/Procedure] bar.

When this button is pressed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.

3. Click [XYZ] tab.

[XYZ] Tab of [Manual Operation] Bar:

a. [Up] --- Moves the stylus for above.

b. [Left] --- Moves the stylus for left.
c. [Right] --- Moves the stylus for right.
d. [Down] --- Moves the stylus for below.

e. [0] --- Sets Z2-axis Counter to 0.

f. [0] --- Sets X1-axis Counter to 0.

g. [0] --- Sets Y-axis Counter to 0.

h. [Forward] --- Moves the Y-axis Table*1) forward.
i. [Backward] --- Moves the Y-axis Table*1) backward.
j. [High] --- Moves at the high speed.
k. [Low] --- Moves at the low speed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 2 of 16

Notice:

1. In the case of your measuring instrument model, the axis may not be moved when the detector is out of limit.

Please refet to the User's Guide(For Hardware).

2. In the case of your measuring instrument model, when the stylus is locked*2), you cannot use the [Up] button or
[Down] button.

Therefore, please drive after making the stylus free.

3. In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

*1) 3D Measurement Option.

*2) The stylus is fixed to the other side for the direction of the measurement. The stylus is fixed upward when the direction of the
measurement is downward. And the stylus is fixed downward when the direction of the measurement is upward.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

Driving Option Axis

Drives the option axis.

How To:

1. Click [Manual Operation Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Manual Operation] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.
2. Or, please click the [Device] button in the[Measurement/Procedure] bar.

When this button is pressed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.

3. Click [Op] tab.

[Op] Tab of [Manual Operation] Bar:

a. [0] --- Sets A-axis Counter to 0.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 3 of 16

b. [0] --- Sets B-axis Counter to 0.

c. [A-axis Up] --- Rotates A-axis clockwise.
d. [A-axis Down] --- Rotates A-axis counterclockwise.
e. [B-axis CCW] --- Rotates B-axis counterclockwise.
f. [B-axis CW] --- Rotates B-axis clockwise.
g. [0] --- Sets T1-axis Counter to 0.
h. [0] --- Sets T2-axis Counter to 0.
i. [T1-axis CW] --- Rotates T1-axis Table clockwise.
j. [T1-axis CCW] --- Rotates T1-axis Table counterclockwise.
k. [T2-axis CW] --- Rotates T2-axis Table clockwise.
l. [T2-axis CCW] --- Rotates T2-axis Table counterclockwise.
m. [High] --- Moves at the high speed.
n. [Low] --- Moves at the low speed.

Notice:

1. In the case of your measuring instrument model, the axis may not be moved when the detector is out of limit.

Please refet to the User's Guide(For Hardware).

2. In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

Moving to the specified position

Move specifying the position and the movement length.

How To:

1. Click [Manual Operation Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Manual Operation] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.
2. Or, please click the [Device] button in the[Measurement/Procedure] bar.

When this button is pressed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.

3. Click [Goto] tab.

[Goto] Tab of [Manual Operation] Bar:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 4 of 16

a. [Direction] --- Select the driving axis.

b. [Relative move.] --- Specifies the movement length as a relative value from the current position.
c. [Absolute move.] --- Specifies the movement length with the counter value.
d. [Move value] --- Input the movement length.
e. [Read] --- Sets the current couter value as the movement length.
f. [Movement] --- Moves the stylus.
g. [High] --- Moves at the high speed.
h. [Low] --- Moves at the low speed.

Notice:

1. In the case of your measuring instrument model, the movement length might not be able to be specified.

Or, the movement direction may be limited.

2. In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

Driving Contour Detector

Drives the Contour Detector.

How To:

1. Click [Manual Operation Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Manual Operation] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.
2. Or, please click the [Device] button in the[Measurement/Procedure] bar.

When this button is pressed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.

3. Click [Sty] tab.

[Sty] Tab of [Manual Operation] Bar:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 5 of 16

a. [Up] --- Moving up the stylus.

b. [Hold] --- Holding the stylus middle.
c. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input Z1-axis position holding the stylus.
d. [Down] --- Moving down the stylus.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

Driving Roughness Detector

Drives the Roughness Detector.

How To:

1. Click [Manual Operation Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Manual Operation] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.
2. Or, please click the [Device] button in the[Measurement/Procedure] bar.

When this button is pressed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.

3. Click [Sty] tab.

[Sty] Tab of [Manual Operation] Bar:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 6 of 16

a. [Zero adj.] --- Executes Zero adjustment.

b. [Auto-set] --- Executes Auto-set.
c. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input Auto-set position of Z1-axis.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

Using Movement(1-axis) Command

Moves using the Movement(1-axis) Command.

How To:

1. Click [Movement(1-axis)] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Movement(1-axis)] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box.

2. Input the movement direction and movement length.

3. To start movement, click [Start Movement] button.

[Movement(1-axis)] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 7 of 16

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.

b. [Direction] --- Select the movement direction.

Displays the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box(T1-axis/T2-axis), when you select [T1-axis] or [T2-axis].

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the movement direction might be restricted.

c. [Move value] --- Input the movement length.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the movement length might not be able to be specified.

d. [Read Position] --- Sets the Counter as a movement length.

e. [Speed] --- Specify the moving speed.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the movement speed might not be able to be specified.

f. [Relative move.] --- Specifies the movement length as the relative value from the current position.

g. [Absolute move.] --- Specifies the movement length with the Counter value.

h. [Move to Peak] --- Moves to the peak position.

i. [Move to Valley] --- Moves to the valley position.

j. [Consider Arm error] --- Considers the error of the stylus circular movement, and moves to the peak/valley points.

=> =>
Peak point detecting When adjusting the error When not adjusting the error
k. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Moves Ignoring the Accidental Touch.

Allows you to move the stylus at high speed while coming in contact with workpiece.

When you ignore the Accidental Touch during movement, the detector might be damaged due to the mistake of the movement
length etc.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 8 of 16

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the [Ignore Acdt-touch] during movement might not be able to be specified.

l. [Reset] --- Initializes the movement condition.

m. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.

[Movement(1-axis)] Dialog Box(T1-axis/T2-axis):

a. [Clockwise] --- Rotates to the clockwise.

Allows you to specify the direction of the rotation, when the movement axis is T1-axis or T2-axis.
b. [Counterclockwise] --- Rotates to the counterclockwise.

Allows you to specify the direction of the rotation, when the movement axis is T1-axis or T2-axis.
c. [Auto] --- Moves to the direction of short movement length.

Tip:

1. The last Movement(1-axis) condition is set in the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box displayed in Teaching Mode.
2. The Movement(1-axis) can refer to the result of the calculation procedure.

Notice:

1. The Z-axis Gain Adjustment and Arc Compensation*1) are always executed for the value of Counter.

Therefore, neither the movement length of the direction of X1-axis nor the value of Counter might become equal.

And, Z1-axis direction movable range changes by Z-axis Gain Adjustment Rate and Symmetrical Compensation Value of the
compensation condition.

2. In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

*1) Compensates the error due to circular movement of the stylus.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 9 of 16

About Accidental Touch

The Accidental Touch is that the stylus comes in contact with Workpiece at Movement and Auto-Return.
When the Accidental Touch is detected while moving, the device stops operating
When you execute the Movement or Auto-Return in the state of the Accidental Touch, the movement speed is changed in low
speed.
When you select [Ignore Acdt-touch], the stylus came in contact with workpiece and can be moved at specified speed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Movement(1-axis) Command]

[Customizing] - [Machine Information]

Using Movement Command

Moves using the Movement Command.

How To:

1. Click [Movement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Movement] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Movement] dialog box.

2. Input the movement direction and movement length.

3. To start movement, click [Start Movement] button.

[Movement] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 10 of 16

a. [Move to Home Position] --- Moves to the home position.

b. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.

c. [Ref Coord.] --- Select the reference coordinate system.

d. [X1-axis] --- Moves the X1-axis. *1)

Input the length of X1-axis.

e. [Y-axis] --- Moves the Y-axis. *1)

Input the length of Y-axis.

f. [Z2-axis] --- Moves the Z2-axis. *1)

Input the length of Z2-axis.

g. The X1/Y/Z2 axis is common.

i. [Read Position] --- Sets the Counter as a movement length.

ii. [Relative move.] --- Specifies the movement length as the relative value from the current position.
iii. [Absolute move.] --- Specifies the movement length with the Counter value.
iv. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Moves Ignoring the Accidental Touch.

Allows you to move the stylus at high speed while coming in contact with workpiece.

When you ignore the Accidental Touch during movement, the detector might be damaged due to the mistake of the
movement length etc.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the [Ignore Acdt-touch] during movement might not be able to be
specified.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 11 of 16

v. [Speed] --- Changes the movement speed.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the movement speed might not be able to be specified.
h. A-axis is common.

i. [A-axis] --- Moves the A-axis.

ii. [A-axis Move Value] --- Input the amount of the movement of A-axis.
iii. [A-axis Speed] --- Changes the movement speed of the A-axis.
i. T1-axis is common.

i. [T1-axis] --- Moves the T1-axis.

ii. [T1-axis Move Value] --- Input the amount of the movement of T1-axis.
iii. [T1-axis Speed] --- Changes the movement speed of the T1-axis.
iv. [Clockwise](T1-axis) --- Rotates the T1-axis to the clockwise.
v. [Counterclockwise](T1-axis) --- Rotates the T1-axis to the counterclockwise.
vi. [Auto](T1-axis)・ --- Moves to the direction of short movement length.
j. T2-axis is common.

i. [T2-axis] --- Moves the T2-axis.

ii. [T2-axis Move Value] --- Input the amount of the movement of T2-axis.
iii. [T2-axis Speed] --- Changes the movement speed of the T2-axis.
iv. [Clockwise](T2-axis) --- Rotates the T2-axis to the clockwise.
v. [Counterclockwise](T2-axis) --- Rotates the T2-axis to the counterclockwise.
vi. [Auto](T2-axis) --- Moves to the direction of short movement length.
k. [State of Stylus] Group

i. [Move with Height Held] --- Moves the stylus without changing the state.
ii. [Move after Raising] - -- Raises the stylus and moves.
iii. [Move Stylus with Holding at Midpoint] --- Holds the stylus at the middle position and moves.
iv. [Move after down] --- Lowers the stylus and moves.
v. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis Position of the middle holding of the stylus.
l. [Reset] --- Initializes the movement condition.

m. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.

*1) In the case of your measuring instrument model, the X1/Y/Z2-axis can be moved synchronizely. Please refet to the User's Guide
(For Hardware).

Tip:

The Movement(1-axis) can refer to the result of the calculation procedure.

Notice:

The Z-axis Gain Adjustment and Arc Compensation*2) are always executed for the value of Counter.

Therefore, neither the movement length of the direction of X1-axis nor the value of Counter might become equal.

And, Z1-axis direction movable range changes by Z-axis Gain Adjustment Rate and Symmetrical Compensation Value of the
compensation condition.

*2) Compensates the error due to circular movement of the stylus.

About Accidental Touch

The Accidental Touch is that the stylus comes in contact with Workpiece at Movement and Auto-Return.
When the Accidental Touch is detected while moving, the device stops operating

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 12 of 16

When you execute the Movement or Auto-Return in the state of the Accidental Touch, the movement speed is changed in low
speed.
When you select [Ignore Acdt-touch], the stylus came in contact with workpiece and can be moved at specified speed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Movement Command]

[Customizing] - [Machine Information]

Moving by referring calculation result

Allows you to move to the position of the calculation result(ex. Center of Circle) by using the Movement(1-axis) command.

Example of moving to center of circle:

i. Measure shape including Corner R.

ii. Fits in the circle to corner R and moves to the center position of Corner R.

How To:

1. Click [Movement(1-axis)] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Movement(1-axis)] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box.

2. --- Select the movement direction.

3. Click the referring calculation procedure from Part Program, or click the measurement result on the Figure Window.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 13 of 16

4. Sets the measurement result as the movement length.

The calculation procedure that can be referred by the movement direction is as follows.
Direction Calculation Procedure
X1-axis Point, Circle, Reference Position
Y-axis Point, Circle, Reference Position
Z2-axis Point, Circle, Reference Position
Line, Angle, Coordinate System Rotation, Movement by Bestfit,
A-axis
Reference Position
T1-axis XY Coordinate System Rotation, Reference Position
Line, Angle, Coordinate System Rotation, Movement by Bestfit,
θ2軸
Reference Position
Line, Angle, Coordinate System Rotation, Movement by Bestfit,
LX軸
Reference Position
Line, Angle, Coordinate System Rotation, Movement by Bestfit,
LY軸
Reference Position

5. Set the other condition, and click [Start Movement] button.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Reference Position]

[Customizing] - [Machine Information]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 14 of 16

Returning
Returns the measuring instrument.

How To:

1. Click [Return] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Return] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Return] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [Return] button.

[Return] Dialog Box:

a. [Return to Meas Start Position] --- Returns to the measurement start position.

b. [Return to Counter-0 Position] --- Returns to the Counter 0 position.

c. [Y-axis] --- Returns the Y-axis after the 3D measurement.
d. [Speed] --- Changes the speed.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the speed might not be able to be specified.
e. [Escape Z2-axis] --- The Z2-axis escapes.

Input the escape length of Z2-axis.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Before Using Measuring Instrument]

Exchanging Detector

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 15 of 16

Exchange the detector.

How To:

1. Click [Detector exchange] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Detector exchange] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Detector exchange] dialog box.

2. Click the [Start] button.

3. The detector holder enters into the exchanging mode. Replace the detector.

For details, please refer to the user’s manual (hardware guide).

4. When the replacement is complete, click the [Done] button.

[Detector exchange] Dialog Box:(Start)

[Detector exchange] Dialog Box:(Done)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Driving XYZ Axis Page 16 of 16

Notice:

This function may not be available depending on the measuring machine model.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhFFA7.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 1 of 63

Leveling
<Dialog Box>[Leveling] [Detail Settings of 3D-Measurement] [Leveling](Meas Result)

Executes the leveling by using the inclination of workpiece calculated by the pre-measuring*1).

How To:

1. Click [Leveling] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Leveling] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Leveling] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [Leveling] button.

[Leveling] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 2 of 63

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.

b. [3D Measurement] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring.

Notice: In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

c. [3D Detail...] --- Sets the details of the 3D measurement.

Displays the [Detail Settings of 3D-Measurement] dialog box.

d. [X1] --- Input the measurement length of X1-axis.

e. [Y] --- Input the measurement length of Y-axis.

f. [Z1] --- Input the measurement length of Z1-axis.

g. [Auto-set] --- Executes Auto-set.

h. [Measure at Max Speed] --- Sets the measurement speed to maximum.

i. [Perform Auto-return] --- Returns after the pre-measuring.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 3 of 63

j. [Consider X-Y pos error by leveling] --- Considers the error (X1-axis) of Return Position caused by
Leveling.

k. [Speed] --- Changes the movement speed.

l. [Escape Z2-axis] --- The Z2-axis escapes.

Input the escape length of Z2-axis.

m. [Perform Auto-leveling] --- Executes the leveling by using the inclination of workpiece calculated by the
pre-measuring.

n. [Display Measurement Results] --- Displays the [Leveling](Meas Result) dialog box after the pre-
measuring.

o. [Use A(T2)-axis] --- Executes the leveling using by the A-axis or T2-axis.

[Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.

[Detail Settings of 3D-Measurement] Dialog Box:

a. [Perform Push Pull measurement] --- Performs the push pull measurement.

b. [Perform 3-D measurement in 2 lines] --- Performs the 3D measurement (Usually: 3 lines) in 2 lines.

c. [Start Position Centering] --- Sets the Measurement Start Position to the center of the measurement area.

d. [Circular area] --- Sets the measurement area to the circle(Usually: Square).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 4 of 63

e. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Moves Ignoring the Accidental Touch.

Notice: In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

Consider X-Y pos error by leveling:

The adjustment of the error of Return Position caused by Leveling is valid only when using the Leveling
Table.

And set the rotation radius of Leveling Table(Upper surface of table).

[Leveling](Meas Result) Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 5 of 63

a. Gradient from measurement start position to measurement end position

Displays the angle(from -180 deg to +180 deg).

Displays the positive value when the inclination is positive, and displays the negative value when the
inclination is negative.

To perform leveling of the workpiece, when the measurement feed is the pulled direction, set the gradient
to 0 degree.

When the measurement feed is the pushed direction, set the gradient to 180 degree.

b. Adjustment Value for 3-axis Adjustment Table(3-axis Adjustment Table*2)/ Inclining unit*3) )

Displays the Adjustment Value for Leveling by using 3-axis Adjustment Table.

c. Elevation

Displays the difference between the highest and lowest positions on the workpiece.

d. Y-axis Gradient from measurement start position to measurement end position

Displays the angle(from -180 deg to +180 deg).

e. Displays the positive value when the inclination is positive, and displays the negative value when the
inclination is negative.

To perform leveling of the workpiece, set the gradient to 0 degree.

*1) Please execute the pre-measuring for determining the correction angle of Auto-Leveling before the
measurement.

*2) The option equipment of 3-axial Adjustment Calibration, Leveling, Squareness Alignment.

*3) The option equipment of Leveling.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 6 of 63

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Leveling Command]

3-Axial Adjustment Calibration

Setting up the cylinder workpiece to become parallel to X1-axis by using the 3-Axial Adjustment Table.

Notice:

Set up the 3-Axial Adjustment Table correctly. And select [3-axis Adjustment Table] in the Optional Equipment
Settings.

How To:

1. Click [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [3-Axial Adj.] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (1/8)] dialog box.

2. Click [Yes] button.

Displays the [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (2/8)] dialog box.

3. Move the stylus to the position that detecting the 1st point of peak/valley point, and click [Next] button.

Displays the [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (3/8)] dialog box.

4. Please detect the peak and valley.

Click [Next] button after detecting the peak/valley point.

Displays the [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (4/8)] dialog box.

5. Please enter the reading of micrometer of Y-axis to the [Y=] box.

Click [Next] button.

Displays the [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (5/8)] dialog box.

6. Move the stylus to the position that detecting the 2nd point of peak/valley point, and click [Next] button.

Displays the [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (6/8)] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 7 of 63

7. Please detect the peak and valley.

Click [Next] button after detecting the peak/valley point.

Displays the [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (7/8)] dialog box.

8. Please enter the reading of micrometer of Y-axis to the [Y=] box.

Click [Next] button.

Displays the [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (8/8)] dialog box.

9. Please adjust the reading of Y-axis swivel micrometer head to be the same as the swivel compensation.

Please adjust the reading of Z-axis incline micrometer head to be the same as the incline compensation.

Click [End] button.

10. To return to the previous screen, click [Back] button.

To abort the 3-Axial Adjustment Calibration, click [Cancel] button.

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (1/8)] Dialog Box:

Click [Yes] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 8 of 63

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (2/8)] Dialog Box:

Move the stylus to the position that detecting the 1st point of peak/valley point, and click [Next] button.

a. [Left] --- Moves the stylus leftward.

b. [Right] --- Moves the stylus rightward.

c. [Quick Leftward] --- Quickly moves the stylus leftward.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 9 of 63

d. [Quick Rightward] --- Quickly moves the stylus rightward.

e. [Up] --- Moves the stylus upward.

f. [Down] --- Moves the stylus downward.

g. [Quick Upward] --- Quickly moves the stylus upward.

h. [Quick Downward] --- Quickly moves the stylus downward.

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (3/8)] Dialog Box:

Please detect the point (peak/valley point) where Z coordinates value becomes the maximum/minimum by
adjustment of the Y-axis micrometer head.

Outside of Cylinder Workpiece Inside of Cylinder Workpiece

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 10 of 63

Displays the ( ), ( )mark by the amout of Z value changing, and it is as a guide for the detection.

:Inside of Z rise in price

:Z-axis Coordinates Value Uptrend(No change is contained)

:Z-axis Coordinates Value Downtrend(No change is contained)

: Under Z value descent

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (4/8)] Dialog Box:

Please enter the reading of micrometer of Y-axis to the [Y=] box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 11 of 63

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (5/8)] Dialog Box:

Move the stylus to the position that detecting the 2nd point of peak/valley point, and click [Next] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 12 of 63

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (6/8)] Dialog Box:

Please find the point (peak/valley point) where Z coordinates value becomes the maximum/minimum by
adjustment of the Y-axis micrometer head.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 13 of 63

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (7/8)] Dialog Box:

Please enter the reading of micrometer of Y-axis to the [Y=] box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 14 of 63

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration (8/8)] Dialog Box:

Please adjust the reading of Y-axis swivel micrometer head to be the same as the swivel compensation.

Please adjust the reading of Z-axis incline micrometer head to be the same as the incline compensation.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 15 of 63

Setting up the cylinder workpiece to become parallel to X1-axis(3-Axial Adjustment):

Setting up the cylinder workpiece to become parallel to X1-axis by using the 3-Axial Adjustment Table.

Before Adjustment After Adjustment

Calculates the inclination of cylinder workpiece from the 2 peak point of outside (or 2 valley point of inside) of
cylinder workpiece.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 16 of 63

3-axis Adjustment Table:*1)

*1) The option equipment of 3-axial Adjustment Calibration, Leveling, Squareness Alignment.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 17 of 63

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Up Option Equipment]

Squareness Alignment
Setting up the cylinder workpiece to become at right angles to X1-axis by using the 3-Axial Adjustment Table.

Notice:

Set up the 3-Axial Adjustment Table correctly. And select [3-axis Adjustment Table] in the Optional Equipment
Settings.

How To:

1. Click [Squareness Alignment] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Square Align.] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Squareness Alignment(1/7)] dialog box.

2. Move the stylus to the position that detecting the 1st point of peak/valley point, and click [Next] button.

To move to the Y-axis direction, please adjust the micrometer head of Y-axis.

Displays the [Squareness Alignment(2/7)] dialog box.

3. Please detect the peak and valley.

Click [Next] button after detecting the peak/valley point.

Displays the [Squareness Alignment(3/7)] dialog box.

4. Please enter the X1-axis coordinate tp the [X=] box.

Please enter the reading of micrometer of Y-axis to the [Y=] box.

Click [Next] button.

Displays the [Squareness Alignment(4/7)] dialog box.

5. Move the stylus to the position that detecting the 2nd point of peak/valley point, and click [Next] button.

Please move only with the adjustment of the micrometer head of Y-axis.

Displays the [Squareness Alignment(5/7)] dialog box.

6. Please detect the peak and valley.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 18 of 63

Click [Next] button after detecting the peak/valley point.

Displays the [Squareness Alignment(6/7)] dialog box.

7. Please enter the X1-axis coordinate tp the [X=] box.

Please enter the reading of micrometer of Y-axis to the [Y=] box.

Click [Next] button.

Displays the [Squareness Alignment(7/7)] dialog box.

8. Please adjust the reading of Y-axis swivel micrometer head to be the same as the swivel compensation.

Click [End] button.

9. To return to the previous screen, click [Back] button.

To abort the Squareness Alignment, click [Cancel] button.

[Squareness Alignment(1/7)] Dialog Box:

Move the stylus to the position that detecting the 1st point of peak/valley point, and click [Next] button.

To move to the Y-axis direction, please adjust the micrometer head of Y-axis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 19 of 63

[Squareness Alignment(2/7)] Dialog Box:

Moves the detector to the X1-axis direction, and detect the peak and valley.

Outside of Cylinder Workpiece Inside of Cylinder Workpiece

For the method of peak/valley point detection, please refer to [Setting Up Workpiece] - [Detecting Peak/Valley
Point].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 20 of 63

a. [Initialize] --- Discards the detected peak/valley point.

Please detect again.

b. [Counter Reset](<->[Cancel Counter Reset]) --- Resets the Counter of Z1-axis. And Changes [Counter
Reset] button to [Cancel Counter Reset] button.
The [Cancel Counter Reset] button cancel the reset status of Counter of Z1-axis.

c. [Counter] --- Displays the position of the detector.

d. [Peak] --- Displays the detected peak point.

e. [Valley] --- Displays the detected valley point.

[Squareness Alignment(3/7)] Dialog Box:

Please enter the X1-axis coordinate tp the [X=] box.

Please enter the reading of micrometer of Y-axis to the [Y=] box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 21 of 63

a. [X=] --- Input the coordinate of X1-axis.

b. [Y=] --- Input the indicate value of micrometer of Y-axis.

c. [Set counter X val] --- Sets [X1] of Counter to [X=].

d. [Set peak X val] --- Sets [X1] of the peak point to [X=].

e. [Set valley X val] --- Sets [X1] of the valley point to [X=].

[Squareness Alignment(4/7)] Dialog Box:

Move the stylus to the position that detecting the 2nd point of peak/valley point, and click [Next] button.

Please move only with the adjustment of the micrometer head of Y-axis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 22 of 63

[Squareness Alignment(5/7)] Dialog Box:

Moves the detector to the X1-axis direction, and detect the peak and valley.

For the method of peak/valley point detection, please refer to [Setting Up Workpiece] - [Detecting Peak/Valley
Point].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 23 of 63

a. [Initialize] --- Discards the detected peak/valley point.

Please detect again.

b. [Counter Reset](<->[Cancel Counter Reset]) --- Resets the Counter of Z1-axis. And Changes [Counter
Reset] button to [Cancel Counter Reset] button.
The [Cancel Counter Reset] button cancel the reset status of Counter of Z1-axis.

c. [Counter] --- Displays the position of the detector.

d. [Peak] --- Displays the detected peak point.

e. [Valley] --- Displays the detected valley point.

[Squareness Alignment(6/7)] Dialog Box:

Please enter the X1-axis coordinate tp the [X=] box.

Please enter the reading of micrometer of Y-axis to the [Y=] box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 24 of 63

a. [X=] --- Input the coordinate of X1-axis.

b. [Y=] --- Input the indicate value of micrometer of Y-axis.

c. [Set counter X val] --- Sets [X1] of Counter to [X=].

d. [Set peak X val] --- Sets [X1] of the peak point to [X=].

e. [Set valley X val] --- Sets [X1] of the valley point to [X=].

[Squareness Alignment(7/7)] Dialog Box:

Please adjust the reading of Y-axis swivel micrometer head to be the same as the swivel compensation.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 25 of 63

Setting up the cylinder workpiece to become at right angles to X1-axis(Squareness Alignment):

Setting up the cylinder workpiece to become at right angles to X1-axis</a1> by using the 3-Axial Adjustment
Table.

Before Adjustment After Adjustment

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 26 of 63

Calculates the inclination of cylinder workpiece from the 2 peak point of outside (or 2 valley point of inside) of
cylinder workpiece.

Cylinder Workpiece Inside of Cylinder Workpiece

3-axis Adjustment Table:*1)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 27 of 63

*1) The option equipment of 3-axial Adjustment Calibration, Leveling, Squareness Alignment.

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Up Option Equipment]

Detecting Peak/Valley Point

Detecting the peak/valley point of the workpiece.

The detected maximum/minimum coordinate value of Z-axis is the peak/valley point.

How To:

1. Click [Detect Peak/Valley] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Peak/Valley] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

2. Displays the dialog box for confirming the start of the detection.

Click [OK] button.

To abort the [Detect Peak/Valley] command, click [Cancel] button.

3. When the detected peak/valley point already exists, the dialog box that confirms whether to discard the
peak/valley point is displayed.

To discard the peak/valley point, click [Yes] button.

To change the detected peak/valley point, click [No] button.

Displays the [Peak/Valley Being Detected] dialog box.

4. Move the detector by using the Joystick, and detect the peak/valley point.

5. Click [End] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 28 of 63

[Detect Peak/Valley] Dialog Box:

a. [Initialize] --- Discards the detected peak/valley point.

Please detect again.

b. [Counter Reset](<->[Cancel Counter Reset]) --- Resets the Counter of Z1-axis. And Changes [Counter
Reset] button to [Cancel Counter Reset] button.

The [Cancel Counter Reset] button cancel the reset status of Counter of Z1-axis.

c. [Counter] --- Displays the position of the detector.

d. [Peak] --- Displays the detected peak point.

e. [Valley] --- Displays the detected valley point.

Notice:

The detected peak/valley point is discarded when you change the information of the arm or the stylus.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Counter]

[Customizing] - [Peak/Valley Detection]

About Scale Coordinate

Displays the position information of each axis of the measuring instrument.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 29 of 63

Executes the calculation based on the [Scale Coordinate*1)] until the new coordinate system is set.

Allows you to change the Scale Coordinate by using [Alignment] Command.

Or, allows you to initialize the Scale Coordinate by using [0](Counter Reset) button of [Manual Operation Bar].

The Scale Coordinate inclines according to the inclination of the detector(according to the rotation of A-axis).

*1) The Scale Coordinate is the coordinate system of the detector. The Scale Coordinate inclines according to the
inclination of the detector(according to the rotation of A-axis).

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

Move Scale Coordinate Origin

Moves the Scale Coordinate Origin. (Please refer to example of movement of Scale Coordinate Origin)

How To:

1. Click [Scale Coord. Offset] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Scale Coord. Offset] in the [Measurement] toolbox.
Displays [Scale Coord. Offset] dialog box.

2. Allows you to set the position of the calculation result to the origin of the Scale Coordinate.
i. Select the calculation procedure from Part Program Window. Or select the measurement result from
Figure Window.

ii. The movement axis selected in [Movement Direction] decides the calculation procedure that can
be referred.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 30 of 63

Writes the list of the calculation procedure that can be referred for the movement axis as follows.
l [X1-axis] --- Point Measurement/Circle Measurement/Reference Position Command
l [Y-axis] --- Point Measurement/Circle Measurement/Reference Position Command
l [Z2-axis] --- Point Measurement/Circle Measurement/Reference Position Command
l [A-axis] --- Line Measurement/Angle/Rotate Coordinate Axis/Bestfit/Reference Position
Command
l [T1-axis] --- Rotate Coordinate Axis/Reference Position Command
l [T2-axis] --- Line Measurement/Angle/Rotate Coordinate Axis/Bestfit/Reference Position
Command

iii. Sets the movement value to [Move value], and sets the calculation result to new origin.
Please refer to [Example of moving the Scale Coordinate Origin to the position of the calculation
result].

[Scale Coord. Offset] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.

b. [Select axis] --- Changes the movement axis of Scale Coordinate origin.

c. [Reset the movement] --- Resets the movement of Scale Coordinate Origin.

d. [The counter value is adjusted to 0.] --- Sets the current position to Scale Coordinate Origin.

e. [Move value] --- Specifies the movement value and moves to the specified position.
Input the movement value.
Allows you to set the position of the calculation result(ex. center of circle) to Scale Coordinate Origin.

f. [Read Position] --- Sets the current Counter value as the movement length of Scale Coordinate Origin.

g. [User entry when Part Program running] --- Input the movement length of Scale Coordinate Origin

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 31 of 63

when you execute Part Program.

h. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.

Example of Movement of Scale Coordinate Origin:

1. As the example, the Counter value of X1-axis is 10.0mm.

2. When you select [The counter value is adjusted to 0.] , sets the current position to Scale Coordinate
Origin.

Then, the Counter value is 0.0mm.

3. Inputs 10 mm to [Move value] and moves the Scale Coordinate Origin.

Then, the Counter value is -10.0mm.

4. When you select [Reset the movement] , resets the movement of Scale Coordinate Origin.

Then, the Counter value is 10.0mm.

Example of moving the Scale Coordinate Origin to the position of the calculation result

1. As the example, the Counter value of center of Corner R is 10.0mm(X1-axis).

Measure shape including Corner R.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 32 of 63

2. Fits in the circle to corner R of result and calculates.

Selects the calculation result of the circle and sets the center of the circle to the Scale Coordinate Origin.

3. Then, the Counter value of center of corner R is 0.0mm.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Scale Coordinate Offset Command]

About Machine Coordinate System and Work

Coordinate System
Allows you to use Scale Coordinate and Machine Coordinate System*1) and Work Coordinate System*2) in the
measuring instrument of CNC Type.

1. Machine Coordinate System

Allows you to set the edge of Y-axis Table*3) or the center of T1 Table to the origin point of Machine
Coordinate System.

At this time, calculates the movement length between the Scale Coordinate Origin and the origin of
Machine Coordinate System. This movement length is calculated from the parameter of the Granite
Surface Plate or Y-axis/T1-axis Table.

Then, you can use the coordinate value of Machine Coordinate System when you move the measuring

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 33 of 63

instrument by using the movement command.

Allows you to use the Machine Coordinate System in the measuring instrument of CNC Type.

2. Work Coordinate System

The Work Coordinate System is referred at the movement of the measuring instrument.

Allows you to define the Work Coordinate System based on the Machine Coordinate System.

When you don't define the Work Coordinate System, the Work Coordinate System is equal to the

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 34 of 63

Machine Coordinate System.

You can move the Work Coordinate System by using [Alignment] command to an arbitrary position.

The movement of the Work Coordinate System doesn't influence the calculation result.

Allows you to save the Work Coordinate System to the file by using [Save the Work Coordinate
System] command. And allows you to load the Work Coordinate System from the file by using [Load
the Work Coordinate System] command.

To confirm the current information of Work Coordinate System, click [Work Coordinate Information]
command of the [View] menu.

Notice:

Even if you use [New]/[Open] command of the [File] menu, the coordinate system is not initialized.

*1) The Machine Coordinate System is the coordinate system decided by the measuring instrument composition.

*2) The Work Coordinate System is the coordinate system created by using the coordinate system movement
function according to the workpiece.

*3) 3D Measurement Option.

See Also

Setting CNC Function

Sets the conditions of the teaching and the machine coordinate system in the CNC function.

How To:

1. Click [Set CNC condition...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set CNC condition] dialog box.

2. Please set the [Teaching] group.
3. Please set the [Machine Coordinate] group.

[Set CNC condition] Dialog Box(Teaching)(CV/CS):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 35 of 63

a. [Ref Coordinate] --- Select the coordinate system referred in Teaching.

b. [Movement] Group

I. [Speed] --- Specify the moving speed.

i. [Max Speed] --- Sets the XYZ movement speed to maximum.

ii. [Specify speed] --- Specify the XYZ movement speed.

II. [Move A-axis] --- Moves the A-axis.

i. [Max Speed] --- Sets the A-axis movement speed to maximum.

ii. [Specify speed] --- Specify the A-axis movement speed.

III. [Move T1-axis] --- Moves the T1-axis.

i. [Max Speed] --- Sets the T1-axis movement speed to maximum.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 36 of 63

ii. [Specify speed] --- Specify the T1-axis movement speed.

iii. [Clockwise] --- Rotates the T1-axis to the clockwise.

iv. [Counterclockwise] --- Rotates the T1-axis to the counterclockwise.

v. [Auto] --- Sets the rotation direction of T1-axis to automatic.

IV. [Move T2-axis] --- Moves the T2-axis.

i. [Max Speed] --- Sets the T2-axis movement speed to maximum.

ii. [Specify speed] --- Specify the T2-axis movement speed.

iii. [Clockwise] --- Rotates the T2-axis to the clockwise.

iv. [Counterclockwise] --- Rotates the T2-axis to the counterclockwise.

v. [Auto] --- Sets the rotation direction of T2-axis to automatic.

c. [Approach condition] Group

i. [Approach] --- Approaches (Movement).

ii. [Approach speed] --- Input the approach speed.

d. [State of Stylus] Group

i. [Get the status when teaching] --- Sets the stylus condition of Teaching to the stylus condition of
movement.

ii. [Move with Height Held] --- Moves the stylus without changing the state.

iii. [Move after Raising] - -- Raises the stylus and moves.

iv. [Move with Holding at Midpoint] --- Holds the stylus at the middle position and moves.

v. [Move after down] - -- Lowers the stylus and moves.

vi. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis Position of the middle holding of the stylus.

[Set CNC condition] Dialog Box(Teaching)(SV):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 37 of 63

a. [Approach condition] Group

i. [Approach distance] --- Input the approach distance.

b. [Movement(B-axis)] Group

I. [Move B-axis] --- Moves the B-axis.

i. [Max Speed] --- Sets the B-axis movement speed to maximum.

ii. [Specify speed] --- Specify the B-axis movement speed.

[Set CNC condition] Dialog Box(Machine Coordinate System)(CV/CS):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 38 of 63

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 39 of 63

a. [Y-axis Table Position] --- Select the position of Y-axis Table.

b. [Specify Arbitrary value] --- Input the arbitrary position of Y-axis Table.
c. [Origin on the center of the Y(T1)-axis table] --- Sets the center of Y-axis Table to the origin point of
Machine Coordinate System.
d. [MC Origin Adjust Value] --- Adjusts the position of the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point.

When you attach the Y-axis Table or the stylus, adjust the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point.
i. [MC Origin Adjust Value (X)] --- Input the adjustment value of X-axis.
ii. [MC Origin Adjust Value (Y)] --- Input the adjustment value of Y-axis.
iii. [MC Origin Adjust Value (Z)] --- Input the adjustment value of Z-axis.
e. [T1-axis Center Adjust Value] ---Adjusts the rotation center position of the T1-axis.
i. [T1-axis Center Adjust Value (X)] --- Input the adjustment value of X-axis.
ii. [T1-axis Center Adjust Value (Y)] --- Input the adjustment value of Y-axis.
f. [MC Origin value] Group

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 40 of 63

i. [Initialize] --- Initializes the position of the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point.
ii. [Save] --- Saves the position of Machine Coordinate System Origin Point to the file.

Displays the [Save MC Origin data] dialog box.

iii. [Call] --- Loads the position of Machine Coordinate System Origin Point from the file.

Displays the [Load MC Origin data] dialog box.

g. [Angle between X1-axis and Y-axis] --- Input the the angle between X1-axis and Y-axis.

The angle between X1-axis and Y-axis uses to the X1-to-Y axis angle correction.
h. [Leveling Table Turning Radius] --- Input the rotation radius of Leveling Table.

The rotation radius of Leveling Table is used for the error adjustment of Leveling.

[Set CNC condition] Dialog Box(Machine Coordinate System)(SV):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 41 of 63

a. [Length of extension rod] --- Input the length of extension rod.

Example: When you use the 50mm length rod, the protrusion length of detector is 50mm.

Notice:

The button may not be available, if the measuring instrument is not supported the CNC function.

See Also

[Calibrating] - [Measuring the angle between X1-axis and Y-axis]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 42 of 63

Measuring Device Parameter

<Dialog Box>[Device parameter measurement] [Master Ball measurement](Contour Detector) [Results of the master ball
meas.] [Master Ball measurement](Roughness Detector) [Device parameter measurement result](Roughness Detector)

Measures the Master Ball and sets the position of the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point.

Tip:

The Machine Coordinate System Origin Point is defined as the nominal value of the movement length from
Scale Coordinate Origin Point.

However, the position of the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point might cause the error by the position
error of Y-axis Table.

Please measure the device parameter for the exact decision of the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point.

How To:

1. Click [Device parameter measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Displays the [Device parameter measurement] dialog box.

2. Select the calibration measurement method, and click [Next] button.

Displays [Master Ball measurement] Dialog Box(Contour Detector) or [Master Ball measurement]
Dialog Box(Roughness Detector).
3. Set the condition of Master Ball measurement and click [Ball Meas.] button.

Measure the master ball.

4. When the [Display measurement results] is selected, displays [Results of the master ball meas.] dialog
box (Contour Detector) or [Device parameter measurement result] dialog box(Roughness Detector).
5. when you click [OK] button, the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point is updated.

[Device parameter measurement] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 43 of 63

1. [Calibrate the Origin on X-Y Plane] --- Calibrates the position of the Machine Coordinate System
Origin Point.

Measure the master ball once.

2. [Calibrate T1-axis Center] --- Calibrates the center and the inclination of T1-axis.

Measure the 3 places of T1-axis Table and calculates the center coordinate value of the master ball.

Calculates the circle on 3D space from 3 points and calculates the inclination of T1-axis Table from the
circle.
3. [Master Ball Center Coordinates values] --- Input the center coordinate value of the master ball setting
up.

Use this function when you cannot set up the master ball to the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point.
4. [Next] --- Measure the master ball.

[Master Ball measurement] Dialog Box(Contour Detector):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 44 of 63

a. [Measuring method] Group

i. [3D-Measuring] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring.
ii. [Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring] --- Executes the pre-measuring by measuring the Y-axis direction
and the X-axis direction.

3D Measurement(Usually: 3 lines) Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring

b. [X1] --- Input the measurement length of X1-axis.

c. [Y] --- Input the measurement length of Y-axis.
d. [X1 = Y] --- Sets the Y-axis measurement length to the X1-axis measurement length.
e. [Measure at Max Speed] --- Sets the measurement speed to maximum.
f. [Perform Push Pull measurement] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring by the push pull measurement.
g. [Move to the Ball top after meas.] --- Moves to the top position of the measurement result after the pre-
measuring.
h. [Check ball diameters] --- Judges the diameter of the measurement result after the pre-measuring.
i. [Diameter] --- Input the diameter for the judgment of the measurement result.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 45 of 63

When the difference between the diameter of the measurement result and the diameter of the judging
standard is the value within the range of +20% from -20%, the diameter of the measurement result is OK.

Doesn't move to the top position, when the result is NG.

j. [Concave] --- Judges the measurement result as concave.
k. [Checking whether the top position is the range of measurement or not.] --- Judges whether the top
position is within the range of the pre-measurement or not.

When the top position of the measurement result is within the rectangle range of X1-axis and Y-axis, the
top position is OK.

Doesn't move to the top position, when the result is NG.

l. [Counter Reset] --- Sets the top position of the measurement result to Coordinate System Origin Point
after the pre-measuring.

Select the coordinate system after the pre-measuring.

m. [Display measurement results] --- Displays the measurement result after the pre-measuring.

After the pre-measuring, displays [Results of the master ball meas.] dialog box in next figure.

n. [State of Stylus] Group

i. [Move with Height Held] --- Moves the stylus without changing the state.
ii. [Move after Raising] - -- Raises the stylus and moves.
iii. [Move Stylus with Holding at Midpoint] --- Holds the stylus at the middle position and moves.
iv. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis Position of the middle holding of the stylus.
o. [Ball Meas.] --- Executes the Masterball Measurement.

[Master Ball measurement] Dialog Box(Roughness Detector):

Please refer the explanation of [Master Ball measurement] Dialog Box(Contour Detector) for the condition
without the explanation.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 46 of 63

a. [Perform Auto-set] --- Executes Auto-set.

b. [Escape Z2-axis] --- The Z2-axis escapes.

Input the escape length of Z2-axis.

c. [Display measurement results] --- Displays the measurement result after the pre-measuring.

After the pre-measuring, displays [Device parameter measurement result] Dialog Box(Roughness
Detector).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 47 of 63

See Also

Measuring Master Ball

Executes the pre-measuring of the sphered workpiece(Convex/Concave). Then, moves to the top position. And
sets the top position to the coordinate system origin point.

Fits in the sphere to the data of the pre-measuring*1). Then, calculates the top position.

How To:

1. Click [Masterball measure] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Masterball measure] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Ball Meas.] dialog box.

[Ball Meas.] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 48 of 63

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [Measuring method] Group
i. [3D-Measuring] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring.
ii. [Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring] --- Executes the pre-measuring by measuring the Y-axis direction
and the X-axis direction.

3D Measurement(Usually: 3 lines) Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring

c. [X1] --- Input the measurement length of X1-axis.

d. [Y] --- Input the measurement length of Y-axis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 49 of 63

e. [Z1] --- Input the measurement length of Z1-axis.

f. [X1 = Y] --- Sets the Y-axis measurement length to the X1-axis measurement length.
g. [Perform Auto-set] --- Executes Auto-set.
h. [Measure at Max Speed] --- Sets the measurement speed to maximum.
i. [Perform Push Pull measurement] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring by the push pull measurement.
j. [Move to the Ball top after meas.] --- Moves to the top position of the measurement result after the pre-
measuring.
k. [Check ball diameters] --- Judges the diameter of the measurement result after the pre-measuring.
l. [Diameter] --- Input the diameter for the judgment of the measurement result.

When the difference between the diameter of the measurement result and the diameter of the judging
standard is the value within the range of +20% from -20%, the diameter of the measurement result is OK.

Doesn't move to the top position, when the result is NG.

m. [Concave] --- Judges the measurement result as concave.
n. [Checking whether the top position is the range of measurement or not.] --- Judges whether the top
position is within the range of the pre-measurement or not.

When the top position of the measurement result is within the rectangle range of X1-axis and Y-axis, the
top position is OK.

Doesn't move to the top position, when the result is NG.

o. [Counter Reset] --- Sets the top position of the measurement result to Coordinate System Origin Point
after the pre-measuring.

Select the coordinate system after the pre-measuring.

p. [Display measurement results] --- Displays the measurement result after the pre-measuring.

After the pre-measuring, displays [Results of the master ball meas.] dialog box in next figure.

q. [Escape Z2-axis] --- The Z2-axis escapes.

Input the escape length of Z2-axis.

r. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.
s. [Ball Meas.] --- Executes the Masterball Measurement.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 50 of 63

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

*1) Please execute the pre-measuring for determining the correction angle of Auto-Leveling before the
measurement.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Master Ball Measurement Command]

Aligning Work Coordinate System

Calculates the origin point and the inclination of the cylinder workpiece or the rectangular parallelepiped
workpiece by the pre-measuring*1), and moves/rotates the Work Coordinate System.

How To:

1. Click [Align Work Coord. System] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Align Work Coord. System] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Align Work Coord. System] dialog box.

Example of the execution for the rectangular parallelepiped workpiece(1 place in X direction/2 places in
Y direction):

a. Calculates the origin point and the inclination of the workpiece from the reference point(Edge,
Peak/Valley) by the pre-measuring.

b. Moves/rotates the Work Coordinate System by the position of the origin point and the inclination of the
workpiece.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 51 of 63

Example of the execution for the cylinder workpiece(1 place in X direction/2 places in Y direction/T1-
axis):

a. You can set up the workpiece to become parallel to X1-axis by rotating the T1-axis.

[Align Work Coord. System] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 52 of 63

a. [Reference Axis Selection] Group

i. [X-axis : X-dir. x 1, Y-dir. x 2] --- Measure the 1 place of the X1-axis direction and the 2 places of
the Y-axis direction.

ii. [Y-axis : X-dir. x 2, Y-dir. x 1] --- Measure the 2 places of the X1-axis direction and the 1 place of
the Y-axis direction.

iii. [X-axis : Y-dir. x 2] --- Measure the 2 places of the Y-axis direction.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 53 of 63

iv. [Y-axis : X-dir. x 2] --- Measure the 2 places of the X1-axis direction.

v. [X-Origin : X-dir. x 1] --- Measure the 2 places of the X1-axis direction.

vi. [Y-Origin : Y-dir. x 1] --- Measure the 1 place of the Y-axis direction.

b. [Start(Y)] --- Input the measurement start position of the Y-axis direction.

c. [End(Y)] --- Input the measurement end position of the Y-axis direction.

d. [X-interval] --- Input the pitch of the measurement position of the 2 measuring places.

Example of measuring the 2 places of Y-axis direction

Example of measuring the 2 places of X1-axis direction

e. [Start(X)] --- Input the relative distance from the Counter value as the measurement start position.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 54 of 63

f. [End(X)] --- Input the relative distance from the Counter value as the measurement start position.

g. [Ref. point(X)] --- Select the reference point(Edge/Peak/Valley/Peak of Fitting in Circle/Valley of Fitting
in Circle) of the X1-axis direction.

h. [Ref. point(Y)] --- Select the reference point(Edge/Peak/Valley/Peak of Fitting in Circle/Valley of Fitting
in Circle) of the Y-axis direction.

Example of Edge

Calculates the reference line based on the measurement length of 1/4 of the measurement start position,
and sets the Inflection Point (Distance) of the 0.1mm distance as the reference point.

Example of Peak of Fitting in Circle

Fits in the circle to the measurement points, and sets the top point as the reference point.

i. [Meas Condition] Group

i. [Pre-Measurement at Max Speed] --- Sets the pre-measurement speed to maximum.
ii. [Move after Raising] - -- Raises the stylus and moves.
iii. [Move Stylus with Holding at Midpoint] --- Holds the stylus at the middle position and moves.
iv. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis Position of the middle holding of the stylus.
v. [Return to the Start Position] --- Returns the stylus to the start position of the Work Coordinate
System Alignment after the pre-measuring.
vi. [Speed] --- Changes the movement speed.
j. [Processing after Work Coord. System Alignment] Group
i. [Match to the Work Coord. by rotating T1-axis.] --- Sets up the workpiece to become parallel to
the X1-axis by rotating the T1-axis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 55 of 63

ii. [Speed(T1)] --- Change the speed of the T1-axis.

iii. [Re-Measurement and Move to the Origin] --- Moves the stylus to the position of the origin point
of the workpiece after the pre-measuring.
k. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.
l. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
m. [OK] --- Executes the Work Coordinate System Alignment.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

*1) Please execute the pre-measuring for determining the correction angle of Auto-Leveling before the
measurement.

See Also

Moving Work Coordinate System

Moves the Work Coordinate System.

How To:

1. Click [Alignment] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Alignment] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Alignment] dialog box.

[Alignment] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 56 of 63

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [Ref Coord.] --- Select the coordinate system that you want to move.
c. [Reset the movement] --- Resets the movement of the coordinate system.
d. [The counter value is adjusted to 0.] --- Sets the current position to the origin point of the coordinate
system.
e. [Move value] --- Input the movement length of the coordinate system.
f. [Set the coordinate system origin.] --- Moves the origin point of the coordinate system.
g. [X1-axis] --- Input the movement length of X1-axis.
h. [Y-axis] --- Input the movement length of Y-axis.
i. [Z2-axis] --- Input the movement length of Z2-axis.
j. [Read Position] --- Sets the current Couter value as the movement length of the coordinate system.
k. [Rotate the coordinate system] --- Rotates the coordinate system.
l. [Rot. value] --- Input the rotation angle of the coordinate system.
m. [User entry when Part Program running] --- Input the movement length of Scale Coordinate Origin
when you execute Part Program.
n. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 57 of 63

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Coordinate System Movement Command]

Rotating Work Coordinate System by T1-axis

Table Rotation
Rotates the Work Coordinate System by the rotation of T1-axis Table.

How To:

1. Or, click [Rotate Work Coord. System] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Rotate Work Coord. System] dialog box.

2. To rotate T1-axis Table and the Work Coordinate System, input the rotation angle to [Rot. value for T1-
axis].
3. To align the Work Coordinate System to the measurement axis, select [Work Coord is matched to
Meas-dir.].

[Rotate Work Coord. System] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 58 of 63

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [on Work Coord]/[on Scale coord.] --- Displays the information of the current Work Coordinate System
and the position of T1-axis Table.
c. [Rot. value for T1-axis] --- Input the rotation angle of T1-axis.
d. [Work Coord is matched to Meas-dir.] --- Sets the rotation angle for aligning the X-axis of the Work
Coordinate System with the measurement axis.
e. [Rotation Speed] --- Specify the rotation speed of T1-axis Table.
f. [State of Stylus] Group
i. [Move with Height Held] --- Rotates the table without changing the state of the syulus.
ii. [Move after Raising] - -- Raises the stylus and rotates.
iii. [Move with Holding at Midpoint] --- Holds the stylus at the middle position and rotates.
iv. [Move after down] --- Rotates with moving the stylus freely.
v. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis position of the stylus.
g. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers [Rotate Work Coord. System] command to Part Program.

Notice:

Cannot rotate the Work Coordinate System by [Movement(1-axis)] command.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 59 of 63

Rotating/Moving Work Coordinate System by

Calculation Result
Rotates/Moves the Work Coordinate System by the calculation result.

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Set the work coord on X-Y Plane] button in the [Extensions] toolbox.
3. Input the point/circle(center) for determining the reference line.
4. To quit without moving the Work Coordinate System, click [Set the work coord on X-Y Plane]
button.
5. To move the Work Coordinate System, input the point for determining the origin point of the Work
Coordinate System.
6. Rotates/Moves the Work Coordinate System.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

Rotates the X-axis of the Work Coordinate System to become parallel to the reference line.

1. Input the 2 points or more for determining the reference line.

Select the point or the circle(center) by using [Result Selection] button.

When you inputed the 3 points or more by [Multi-Input] button, calculates by the Least-Square
Method.

To quit without moving the Work Coordinate System, click [Set the work coord on X-Y Plane]
button.

2. To move the Work Coordinate System, input the point for lowering the perpendicular line to the reference

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 60 of 63

line.

Sets the foot position of the perpendicular line as the origin point of the Work Coordinate System.

Select the point or the circle(center) by using [Result Selection] button.

Notice:

The Work Coordinate System is referred at the movement of the measuring instrument.

The movement of the Work Coordinate System doesn't influence the calculation result.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Movement Length of Origin Point

2. Z-axis Movement Length of Origin Point
3. Rotation Angle of X-axis

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Moving Work Coordinate System]

Reading Work Coordinate System Information

From File
Reads the Work Coordinate System Information from the file.

How To:

1. Click [Load Coord] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Load the Work Coordinate Setting] dialog box.

[Load the Work Coordinate Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 61 of 63

a. File information --- Displays the created/saved date and the comments.
b. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers the [Load the Work Coordinate Setting] command to Part
Program.
c. [Label Name] --- Input the label name of the [Load the Work Coordinate Setting] command.
d. [Open] --- Reads the Work Coordinate System Information from the specified file.

See Also

Saving Work Coordinate System Information

Saves the Work Coordinate System Information to the file.

How To:

1. Click [Save Coord] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays [Save the Work Coordinate System Setting] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 62 of 63

[Save the Work Coordinate System Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Input Comments] Input the comment.

Enter the comment into the edit box.

b. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers the [Save the Work Coordinate System Setting] command to
Part Program.
c. [Label Name] --- Input the label name of the [Save the Work Coordinate System Setting] command.
d. [Save] --- Saves the Work Coordinate System Information to the specified file.

See Also

Displaying Work Coordinate System Information

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Leveling Page 63 of 63

Displays the Work Coordinate System Information.

How To:

1. Click [Work Coordinate Information] command of the [View] menu.

Displays the [Information on current work coordinate] message box.

2. Displays the following information.
i. The origin coordinate value of the Machine Coordinate System from the origin point of the Work
Coordinate System.
ii. The date and time of the coordinate system setting.

iii. The comment information that set at the time of Work Coordinate System saving.

[Information on current work coordinate] Message Box:

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5902.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 1 of 34

Executing Z-axis Gain Adjustment

To compensate the detecting error by the installation error or the dimensional error of the measuring instrument,
execute the Z-axis Gain Adjustment.

1. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Z Gain Adjustment] dialog box.

2. Select the method of the calibration and click [Next] button.

[Z Gain Adjustment] Dialog Box:

a. [Static Calibration] --- Execute the Static Calibration.

Execute the Leveling of Calibration Gage. And, measure the 1 point of the upper surface and the 1 point of
the lower surface. Then, calculates the step difference and calculates the Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio.

b. [Dynamic Calibration] --- Execute the Dynamic Calibration.

Measure the each 2 points of the upper and the lower surface of Calibration Gage. Then, calculates the step
difference and calculates the Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio.

c. [Specimen Calibration] --- Execute theSpecimen Calibration.

Measure the roughness of Calibration Gage(Roughness Standard). Then, calculates the Z-axis Gain

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 2 of 34

Adjustment Ratio from the roughness result and the nominal value.

Notice: You can use the Specimen Calibration only with the roughness measuring instrument.

d. [Measure] --- Executes the Z-axis Gain Adjustment.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some calibrations might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio]

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Calibration(Z-Gain) Command]

Executing Static Calibration

Adjusts the Z-axis gain by the Static Calibration.

How To:

1. Prepare the Calibration Gage.

2. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Z Gain Adjustment] dialog box.

3. Select [Static Calibration] and click [Measure] button.

Displays the [Calibration Gage] dialog box.

4. Input the Reference Step and click [OK] button.

Displays the [Calibration Gage Leveling] dialog box.

5. Click [Leveling] button.

6. Move the stylus to the measurement start position of the Upper Surface and click [Meas Start] command
of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Meas Start] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 3 of 34

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command.

7. Move the stylus to the measurement start position of the Lower Surface and click [Meas Start] command
of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Meas Start] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command.

8. After the measurement, displays the [Z Gain Adjustment] dialog box (Calibration Result).

To register the calibration result, click [OK] button.

Preparation of the calibration gage:

1. Set up the Leveling Table(If you have the Leveling Table).

2. Set the Calibration Gage on the table.

[Calibration Gage] Dialog Box:

a. [Ref. Step] --- Input the Reference Step.

[Calibration Gage Leveling] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 4 of 34

a. [Set] --- Sets the measurement conditions and the compensation conditions.

b. [Leveling] --- Executes the Leveling.

Upper Surface Measurement:

Move the stylus to the measurement start point of the upper surface and measure.

Lower Surface Measurement:

Move the stylus to the measurement start point of the lower surface and measure.

[Z Gain Adjustment] Dialog Box (Calibration Result):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 5 of 34

a. [Calibration Result] --- Displays the calibration result.

b. [Comment] --- Enter the comment if you need to.

The comments are 40 characters or less.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio]

Executing Dynamic Calibration

Adjusts the Z-axis gain by the Dynamic Calibration.

How To:

1. Prepare the Calibration Gage.

2. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Z Gain Adjustment] dialog box.

3. Select [Dynamic Calibration] and click [Measure] button.

Displays the [Calibration Gage] dialog box.

4. Input the Reference Step and click [OK] button.

5. Move the stylus to the measurement start position of the Dynamic Calibration and click [Meas Start]
command of the [Measurement] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 6 of 34

Or, click [Meas Start] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command.

6. After the measurement, displays the calculation screen.

7. To calculate the step difference from the measurement data, specify the each 2 points of the upper and
lower surface of the measurement data on the Figure Window.
8. After the measurement, displays the [Z Gain Adjustment] dialog box (Calibration Result).

To register the calibration result, click [OK] button.

Preparation of the calibration gage:

1. Set up the Leveling Table(If you have the Leveling Table).

2. Set the Calibration Gage on the table.

[Calibration Gage] Dialog Box:

a. [Ref. Step] --- Input the Reference Step.

Dynamic Calibration:

Move the stylus to the measurement start point of the Dynamic Calibration and measure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 7 of 34

Step Difference Calculation:

To calculate the step difference from the measurement data, specify the each 2 points of the upper and lower
surface of the measurement data on the Figure Window.

1. Click the start point and the end point of the X-axis range(Reference Line) of the Calibration Gage upper
surface on the Figure Window.

2. Click the start point and the end point of the X-axis range(Reference Line) of the Calibration Gage lower
surface on the Figure Window.

[Z Gain Adjustment] Dialog Box (Calibration Result):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 8 of 34

a. [Calibration Result] --- Displays the calibration result.

b. [Comment] --- Enter the comment if you need to.

The comments are 40 characters or less.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio]

Executing Specimen Calibration

<Dialog Box>[Calibration Gage] [Z-axis Gain Adjustment]

Adjusts the Z-axis gain by the Specimen Calibration.

How To:

1. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Z Gain Adjustment] dialog box.

2. Select [Specimen Calibration] and click [Measure] button.

Displays the [Calibration Gage] dialog box.

3. Select the using reference specimen and input the nominal value printed to the reference specimen.

Click [OK] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 9 of 34

4. Displays the Confirmation Message and click [OK] button.

5. Move the stylus to the measurement start point and measure.

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command.

6. After the measurement, displays the [Z Gain Adjustment] dialog box (Calibration Result).

To register the calibration result, click [OK] button.

[Calibration Gage] Dialog Box:

a. [Z Gain Adjustment] --- Select the using reference specimen.

[Roughness Specimen OLDMIX] --- Use the accessory roughness specimen.

[Roughness Specimen ISO] --- Use the roughness specimen based on the ISO standard.

Measure according to the conditionof the roughness specimen(ISO).

Please refer to the manual of the roughness specimen(ISO) for the detail of the measurement condition.

[4-Step Gage] --- Use the 4-Step Gage(Option).

[Step Gage] --- Use the Step Gage(Option).

b. [Nominal value] --- Input the nominal value printed to the reference specimen.

Confirmation Message:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 10 of 34

Specimen Calibration:

1. When you select [Roughness Specimen OLDMIX] or [Roughness Specimen ISO] ,

Measure the reference specimen and calculates the Ra parameter. Then, compares the result with the
nominal value and calculates the Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio.

And sets the conditions of the measurement/analysis of the calibration automatically. Then, move the stylus
to the measurement start position as shown the figure.

The measurement length is 15mm(default) when you use the accessory roughness specimen.

Move the stylus to the starting position in which the measurement ends in the cutter mark.

Click [Meas Start] command of the [Measurement] menu, or click [Meas Start] button
in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

2. When you select [Step Gage] or [4-Step Gage],

Use the system part program for the calculation of the step gage. Calculates the step difference by using the
part program and compares the result with the nominal value and calculates the Z-axis Gain Adjustment
Ratio.

Calls the part program for the calculation of the step difference automatically. Then, move the stylus to the
measurement start position as shown the figure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 11 of 34

The measurement length is 8.8mm(default) when you use the Step Gage or the 4-Step Gage.

Move the stylus to the measurement start position in which the step position becomes about 4mm from the
measurement start position.

When you use the Step Gage, move the stylus to the Start Line of the Step Gage.

After the movement of the stylus, click [Start] button.

Notice:

The following message might be displayed, and the calculation fail. Confirm the measurement start
position and measure again.

The measurement start position might be not correct. please confirm the measurement start position. "

[Z Gain Adjustment] Dialog Box (Calibration Result):

Example of Roughness Specimen Calibration

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 12 of 34

a. [Nominal Value of Step] --- Displays the nominal value of the [Calibration Gage] dialog box.

b. [Meas Value of Step] --- Displays Ra or the step difference

c. [Z-axis Gain Adjust Ratio] --- Displays the Z-axis Gain Adjust Ratio.

d. [Comment] --- Enter the comment if you need to.

The comments are 40 characters or less.

Notice:

You can use the Specimen Calibration only with the roughness measuring instrument.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio]

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Calibration(Z-Gain) Command]

Executing Straightness Compensation

The Straightness Compensation compensates the differences of the detected displacement of the stylus of the X1-
axis/Y-axis.

Saves the compensation data to the the straightness compensation data file as the result of the Straightness
Compensation Measurement.

How To:

1. Prepare the Calibration Gage.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 13 of 34

2. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

3. After the Z-axis Gain Adjustment, click [Next] button.

Displays the [Straightness Comp Measurement] dialog box.

4. To execute the Straightness Compensation Measurement of X1-axis, click [X-axis Meas.] button.

To execute the Straightness Compensation Measurement of Y-axis, click [Y-axis Meas.] button.

5. Move the stylus to the measurement start position and click [Meas Start] command of the [Measurement]
menu.

Or, click [Meas Start] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command.

6. Displays the [Save As] dialog box when the measurement ends.

Please enter an appropriate file name and save the Straightness Compensation Data to the file.

Preparation of the calibration gage:

1. Set up the Leveling Table(If you have the Leveling Table).

2. Set the Calibration Gage on the table.

[Straightness Comp Measurement] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 14 of 34

a. [X-axis Meas.] --- Executes the Straightness Compensation Measurement of Y-axis.

b. [Y-axis Meas.] --- Executes the Straightness Compensation Measurement of Y-axis.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Straightness Compensation Measurement might not be able
to be performed.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing The Condition of Straightness Compensation]

Executing Symmetric Compensation Measurement

There is a little error of Z-axis direction between the correct position and the tip position of the stylus by the
installation error or the dimensional error.

The Symmetric Compensation*1) calculates a little error(Symmetric Compensation Value).

How To:

1. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 15 of 34

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

2. After the Z-axis Gain Adjustment and the Straightness Compensation Measurement, click [Next] button.

Displays the [Symmetric Comp Measurement] dialog box.

3. Select [Angle Method] or [Circle Method] . Then, click [Measure] button.

4. After the measurement, click [Next] button.

[Symmetric Comp Measurement] Dialog Box:

a. [Angle Method] --- Executes the Symmetric Compensation Measurement by using the Angle Method.

Measure the ascending/descending surface by using the Symmetric Calibration Unit.

Then, calculates each angle. And calculates the Symmetric Compensation Value from the difference of the
angle.

There are a lot of measurement procedures of this method. However, you can compensate even if the
measurement range of Z-axis is narrow.

b. [Circle Method] --- Executes the Symmetric Compensation Measurement by using the Circle Method.

Measure by using the hemispherical calibration gage.

Then, specify the 2 measurement points to calculate the Symmetric Compensation Value.

The measurement procedure of this method is few. However, the Z-axis range should be wide.

c. [Measure] --- Starts the Symmetric Compensation Measurement.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 16 of 34

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some calibrations might not be able to be used.

*1) Compensates the installation error of the Arm/Stylus.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing The Condition of Symmetric Compensation]

Executing Symmetric Compensation Measurement

By Angle Method
Executes the Symmetric Compensation Measurement by the Angle Method.

How To:

1. Prepare the Calibration Gage.

2. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

3. After the Z-axis Gain Adjustment and the Straightness Compensation Measurement, click [Next] button.

Displays the [Symmetric Comp Measurement] dialog box.

4. Select [Angle Method] and click [Measure] button.

Displays the [Calibration Gage Leveling] dialog box.

5. To change the measurement condition and the compensation condition before the Leveling, click [Set...]
button.

6. Move the stylus to the measurement start position of the Leveling, and click [Leveling] button.

7. Measures the ascending surface.

Move the stylus to the following measurement start position.

Click [Meas Start] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Measure] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 17 of 34

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command of the [Measurement] menu.

8. After the measurement, shifts the calculation screen, and obtains the angle of ascending surface.

Specify the each 2 points of the ascending/descending surface of the measurement data on the Figure
Window.

9. Displays the [Calibration Gage Leveling] dialog box.

10. Please set the symmetric compensation unit so the titled surface is directed to the right, if viewed from the
front.

11. To change the measurement condition and the compensation condition before the Leveling, click [Set...]
button.

12. Move the stylus to the measurement start position of the Leveling, and click [Leveling] button.

13. Measures the descending surface.

Move the stylus to the measurement start position.

Click [Meas Start] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Measure] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command of the [Measurement] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 18 of 34

14. After the measurement, shifts the calculation screen, and obtains the angle of descending surface.

Specify the each 2 points of the ascending/descending surface of the measurement data on the Figure
Window.

15. Displays the [Symmetric Compensation Measurement] dialog box.

To register the calibration result, click [OK] button.

Preparation of the calibration gage:

1. Set up the Leveling Table(If you have the Leveling Table).

2. Please set the symmetric compensation unit so the titled surface is directed to the left, if viewed from the
front.

[Calibration Gage Leveling] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 19 of 34

a. [Set] --- Sets the measurement condition and the compensation condition.

b. [Leveling] --- Executes the Leveling.

[Symmetric Compensation Measurement] Dialog Box:

a. [Symmetric Comp Value] --- Displays the calibration result.

b. [Comment] --- Enter a comment by using within 40 single-byte characters.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the angle method of symmetric compensation measurement
might not be able to be performed.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing The Condition of Symmetric Compensation]

Executing Symmetric Compensation Measurement

By Circle Method
Executes the Symmetric Compensation Measurement by the Circle Method.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 20 of 34

How To:

1. Prepare the Calibration Gage.

2. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

3. After the Z-axis Gain Adjustment and the Straightness Compensation Measurement, click [Next] button.

Displays the [Symmetric Comp Measurement] dialog box.

4. Select [Circle Method] and click [Measure] button.

5. Move the stylus to the following measurement start position.

Click [Meas Start] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Measure] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command of the [Measurement] menu.

6. Displays the calculation screen after the measurement and calculates the Symmetric Compensation Value
from the measurement data.

Specify the 2 points of the measurement data on the Figure Window to calculate the compensation result.

Notice: Please specify the measurement point as much as possible in the large range as shown in the figure
below. And specify to become right and left and even on the boundary of the top.

7. Displays the [Symmetric Compensation Measurement] dialog box.

To register the calibration result, click [OK] button.

Preparation of the calibration gage:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 21 of 34

1. Set up the Leveling Table(If you have the Leveling Table).

2. Set up the hemispherical calibration gage so that the stylus may pass center of the calibration gage.

[Symmetric Compensation Measurement] Dialog Box:

a. [Symmetric Comp Value] --- Displays the calibration result.

b. [Comment] --- Enter a comment by using within 40 single-byte characters.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the circle method of symmetric compensation measurement
might not be able to be performed.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing The Condition of Symmetric Compensation]

Measuring Stylus Radius

Measure the radius of the using stylus for the high accurate compensation of the stylus radius.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 22 of 34

1. Prepare the Calibration Gage.

2. Click [Calibrate...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

3. After the execution of the Z-axis Gain Adjustment and the Straightness Compensation Measurement and
the Symmetric Compensation Measurement, click [Next] button.

When you use the Contour Detector(CV) or the Dual-purpose Contour/Roughness Detector(CS), displays
the [Stylus Radius Measurement] dialog box.

4. Specify the tolerance of the measured stylus radius.

Set the tolerance by the percentage to official value (100%).

When the radius of the stylus exceeds the tolerance, the warning message is displayed.

5. To measure the stylus radius, [Measure] button.

6. Displays the [Calibration Gage] dialog box after the measurement.

Input the value printed in the calibration gage to [Pin Gage Diameter] .

7. Move the stylus to the measurement start position.

Click [Meas Start] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Measure] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Move to the measurement start position to measure the circular arc part of Calibration Gage (±45° (θ = 90°)
from the apex).

To abort the Calibration, click [Abort Calibration] command of the [Measurement] menu.

8. Displays the calculation screen after the measurement and calculates the stylus radius from the
measurement data.

Specify the 2 measurement points on the Figure Window

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 23 of 34

9. Displays the [Stylus Radius Measurement] dialog box(Calibration Result).

To register the calibration result, click [OK] button.

Preparation of the calibration gage:

Set up the Calibration Gage of the stylus radius measurement.

[Stylus Radius Measurement] Dialog Box:

a. [Upper] --- Specify the upper limit value of the tolerance of the stylus radius.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 24 of 34

b. [Lower] --- Specify the lower limit value of the tolerance of the stylus radius.

c. [Measure] --- Measures the stylus radius.

[Calibration Gage] Dialog Box:

a. [Pin Gage Diameter] --- Input the diameter of Calibration Gage.

[Stylus Radius Measurement] Dialog Box(Calibration Result):

a. [Nominal Value of Stylus Radius] --- Displays the nominal value of the using stylus.

b. [Meas Value of Stylus Radius] --- Displays the result of the stylus radius compensation measurement.

c. [Pin Gage Diameter] --- Displays the value printed in the calibration gage.

d. [Comment] --- Enter the comment if you need to.

The comments are 40 characters or less.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Stylus Radius Measurement might not be able to be

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 25 of 34

performed.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing The Condition of Stylus Radius Compensation]

Executing Batch Calibration

<Dialog Box>[Batch Calibration] [Register Batch Calibration Result] [Z Gain Adjustment] [Symmetric Comp Measurement]
[Stylus Radius Measurement]

Executes the Batch Calibration of the Z Gain Adjustment/Symmetric Comp Measurement/Stylus Radius
Measurement by using accessory calibration kit(as shown below).

Notice:

Please refer to the User's Manual (Hardware Guide) and set up the calibration kit correctly.

How To:

1. Prepare the calibration kit.

2. Click [Batch Calibration] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Batch Calibration] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Batch Calibration] dialog box.

3. Set the condition of the Batch Calibration.

4. Move the stylus tip to the top neighborhood(as shown below) of the master ball. And click [Meas Start]
button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 26 of 34

5. Displays the [Register Batch Calibration Result] dialog box after the measurement.

Allows you to save the result of the each calibration to the calibration history file.

6. To set the calibration result to the compensation condition, click [OK] button.

[Batch Calibration] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 27 of 34

a. [Perform Z Gain Adjustment] --- Executes the Z-axis Gain Adjustment.

Notice: Usually select [Perform Z Gain Adjustment] when you execute the Batch Calibration.
b. [Ref. Step] --- Input the reference step.
c. [Perform Symmetric Comp Measurement] --- Executes the Symmetric Compensation Measurement.

Notice: Usually select [Perform Symmetric Comp Measurement] when you execute the Batch Calibration.
d. [Diameter] --- Input the diameter of the master ball.
e. [Perform stylus radius comp measurement] --- Executes the Stylus Radius Measurement.

Notice: Usually select [Perform stylus radius comp measurement] when you execute the Batch Calibration.

f. [Fixture for stylus radius comp meas] Group

i. [Pin gage] --- Select when using a Pin Gage as a stylus radius comp measurement gage.
ii. [Ball] --- Select when using the master ball as a stylus radius comp measurement.
g. [Diameter] --- Input the diameter of the gage of the stylus radius comp measurement.
h. [Latitude of Measurement Value] Group
i. [Upper Limit] --- Specify the upper limit value of the tolerance. (Assumed that the nominal value of

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 28 of 34

the stylus radius is 100%)

ii. [Lower Limit] --- Specify the lower limit value of the tolerance. (Assumed that the nominal value of
the stylus radius is 100%)

When the result of the stylus radius comp measurement exceeds the tolerance, the warning message will be
displayed.

i. [Erase measured data, after calibration.] --- Clears the measurement data of the calibration after the
calibration.
j. [Displays the compensation measurement data, after calibration.] --- Displays the measurement data
compensated by the result of the calibration after the calibration.

Allows you to confirm the calibration result by using the calculation procedure(Step
Difference,Circle,Polar Coordinate Development,etc...).

Notice:

When your measuring instrument model corresponds to the up-down stylus and the measurement force, the
following dialog is shown.

[Batch Calibration] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 29 of 34

a. [Direction of Calibrated Stylus] --- Select the direction of calibrated stylus.

b. [Pef. Step (for Down Dir.)] --- Input the reference step when the direction of measurement is
downward.
c. [Ref. Step (for Up Dir.)] --- Input the reference step when the direction of measurement is upward.
d. [Perform Stylus Position Offset Measurement] --- Executes the Stylus Position Offset Measurement.

Notice: Usually select [Perform Stylus Position Measurement] when you execute the Batch
Calibration.

[Register Batch Calibration Result] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 30 of 34

a. [Z Gain Adjustment] --- Regist Z Gain Adjustment Ratio.

b. [Symmetric Compensation] --- Regist Symmetric Compensation value.
c. [Stylus Radius] --- Regist Stylus Radius value.
d. [Stylus Position Offset] --- Regist Stylus position offset data.
e. [Comment] --- Enter a comment by using within 40 single-byte characters.
f. [OK] --- Regist the checked calibration result to the compensation condition and quits.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Calibration(Batch calibration) Command]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 31 of 34

Measuring X1Y-axis Angle with Stylus

Measure the Angle Between X1-axis and Y-axis by using the hemispherical calibration gage.

The X1Y-axis Angle is used in the X1Y-axis Angle Compensation of the 3D measurement.

How To:

1. Click [Meas. the Angle between X1-axis and Y-axis ...] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Displays the [Measurement angle between the X1 and Y axes] dialog box.

2. Move the stylus tip to the top neighborhood(as shown below) of the hemispherical calibration gage. And
click [Meas Start] button.

3. Displays the [Angle between the X1 and Y axes] message box after the measurement.

To set the measurement result to the X1Y-axis Angle of the CNC function, click [OK] button.

About the X1Y-axis Angle:

1. Move the Y-axis, and measure the two contours of hemispherical (or more than two contours).
2. The circle is applied to each measurement data, and determines the top position.
3. Calculates the X1Y-axis Angle from the top position of the two sections (or more than two sections).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 32 of 34

[Measurement angle between the X1 and Y axes] Dialog Box:

a. [X1] --- Input the measurement length of X1-axis.

b. [Y] --- Input the measurement length of Y-axis.

c. [Auto-set] --- Auto-setting in the top of the calibration gage.

d. [Z1] --- Input the Z1-axis position in the top of the calibration gage.

e. [Measure at Max Speed] --- Sets the measurement speed to maximum.

f. [Number of Profiles] --- Specify the number of profiles.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 33 of 34

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Measurement angle between X1Y axes might not be able to
be performed.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Setting CNC Functions]

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Change The Condition of X1Y-axis Angle Compensation]

Outputting History of Calibration Result

Outputs the history of the calibration result to the text file.

How To:

1. Click [Output Calibration Result...] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Calibration Result Output] dialog box.

2. Click the button of the calibration result.

3. Displays the [Save As] dialog box.

Enter the file name and click [Save] button.

When you specify the existing file, the history of the calibration result is appended to the file.

[Calibration Result Output] Dialog Box:

a. [Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio] --- Outputs the history of the Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio.

b. [Symmetric Compensation Value] --- Outputs the history of the Symmetric Compensation Value.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Calibrating Page 34 of 34

c. [Stylus Tip Radius] --- Outputs the history of the Stylus Tip Radius.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC894.htm 6/2/2021
Changing To Single Measurement Mode Page 1 of 5

Changing To Single Measurement Mode

Changing to the Single Measurement Mode.

In the Single Measurement Mode, you can repeat the measurement command and analysis command
executed once by using [Measure] button of [Meas/Procedure] bar.

How To:

1. Click [Single Measurement Mode] command in [Mode change] menu of [Part Program] menu.

Or, click [Single Measurement Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.

Notice:

Clears the measurement data when there is measurement data.

Single Measurement Operation:

1. Change to the Single Measurement Mode.

Click [Single Measurement Mode] command in [Mode change] menu of [Part Program] menu.

Or, click [Single Measurement] button in the [Run Mode] bar.

Restores the end condition at the next start when you quit in the Single Measurement Mode.
2. Before the Measurement

Set the measurement condition and the file output condition and the print condition.

To initialize the conditions, click [New] command of the [File] menu.

3. Start the Measurement

Move the stylus to the measurement start position and click [Measure] button of the
[Meas/Procedure] bar.
4. After the Measurement

When you executed the Roughness Measurement, the Roughness Analysis is executed.

To execute the Contour Analysis, change to the calculation screen after the measurement and
append the calculation command to Part Program.

And the file output or print is executed.(If you select it)

5. After the Analysis

Saves the calculation result and the measurement data to the history file when you execute the

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh2A6B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing To Single Measurement Mode Page 2 of 5

following operation.
l Click [Measure] button of the [Meas/Procedure] bar
l Click [Register To Data History] button of the [Data History] bar
l Click [History File Automatic Saving] button of the [Data History] bar
l Change the Run Mode
l Quit this application.

[Run Mode] Bar:

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar:

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Run Mode Display Bar]

Changing To Teaching Mode

Changing to the Teaching Mode.

In the Teaching Mode, you can create the Part Program including plural measurement command and
plural analysis command. Then, you can repeat the Part Program in the Part Program Run Mode.

And you can create the N-Parts Part Program including plural Part Program. Then, you can repeat the N-
Parts Part Program in the N-Parts Part Program Run Mode.

How To:

1. Click [Teaching Mode] command in [Mode change] menu of [Part Program] menu.

Or, click [Teaching Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh2A6B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing To Single Measurement Mode Page 3 of 5

[Run Mode] Bar:

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar:

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Run Mode Display Bar]

[Processing The Part Program]

[Processing The N-Parts Part Program]

Changing To Part Program Run Mode

Changing to the Part Program Run Mode.

Executes the step-running or runs the Part Program that was created in the Teaching Mode.

How To:

1. Click [Repeat Mode] command in [Mode change] menu of [Part Program] menu.

Or, click [Repeat Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.

2. To execute the Step-Running of the Part Program, click [Step Run Mode] command of the [Part
Program] menu and display the check mark of the command.

Or, push the [Step Run Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh2A6B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing To Single Measurement Mode Page 4 of 5

Notice:

Cannot change to Part Program Run Mode, when you don't create the Part Program.

[Run Mode] Bar:

(Mode is the Run)

(Mode is the Step-Running)

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar:

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Run Mode Display Bar]

[Processing The Part Program]

Changing To N-Parts Part Program Run Mode

Changing to the N-Parts Part Program Run Mode.

Executes the step-running or runs the N-Parts Part Program that was created in the Teaching Mode.

How To:

1. Click [N-Parts Part Program Run Mode] command in [Mode change] menu of [Part Program]
menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh2A6B.htm 6/2/2021
Changing To Single Measurement Mode Page 5 of 5

Or, click [N-Parts Part Program Run Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.
2. To execute the Step-Running of the Part Program, click [Step Run Mode] command of the [Part
Program] menu and display the check mark of the command.

Or, push the [Step Run Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.

Notice:

Cannot change to N-Parts Part Program Run Mode, when you don't create the N-Parts Part Program.

[Run Mode] Bar:

(Mode is the Run)

(Mode is the Step-Running)

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar:

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Run Mode Display Bar]

[Processing The N-Parts Part Program]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh2A6B.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 1 of 51

About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement

Allows you to change from the Contour Measurement to the Roughness Measurement by using the menu. And allows you to append the
roughness measurement command the contour measurement command in the Part Program.

Roughness Measurement:

1. To execute the Roughness Measurement, set the measurement condition and the evaluation condition.

2. To measure with the appropriate measurement condition, select the appropriate Roughness Standard.

3. When the Roughness Measurement is ended, the roughness analysis is executed automatically according to the evaluation
condition.

4. When the Roughness Measurement is executed, the measurement command and the roughness analysis command is added to the
Part Program.

5. Allows you to evaluate the measurement profile of the Roughness Measurement by using the calculation procedure of the contour
measurement.

Contour Measurement:

1. To execute the Contour Measurement, set the measurement condition.

2. When the Contour Measurement is executed, the measurement command is added to the Part Program.

3. To calculate, add the calculation procedure to the Part Program.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Roughness Measurement might not be able to be performed.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting The Roughness Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting The Contour Measurement Condition.]

[Analyzing Roughness]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 2 of 51

[Analyzing Contour]

Measuring
Executes the measurement.

How To:

1. Display the measurement screen.

Click [Back to Screen of Measure] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Measure] in the [Standard] toolbox.
2. Set the Run Mode.
i. To change to the Single Measurement Mode, click [Single Measurement Mode] command in the [Mode change] menu of
the [Part Program] menu or click [Single Measurement Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.
ii. To change to the Teaching Mode, click [Teaching Mode] command in the [Mode change] menu of the [Part Program] menu
or click [Teaching Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.
3. Change the Measurement Mode.
i. To change to the Contour Measurement Mode, click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.
ii. To change to the Roughness Measurement Mode, click [Roughness Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

You can confirm the measurement mode in the [Run Mode Display] bar.

Notice: In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Roughness Measurement might not be able to be performed.

4. Set the measurement condition.

Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Measurement Condition] dialog box and set the measurement condition.

5. To change the Display Magnification of the Figure Window interlocking to the measurement length and the measurement range of
the measurement condition,

click [Interlock to the measurement condition] command of the [View] menu.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Figure Window interlocks to the measurement condition and is
displayed.
6. Click [Meas Start] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Measure] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

(This button changes to [Measure] button in the Teaching Mode. )

When you start the measurement, the Figure Window is displayed according to the measurement condition.
7. To abort the measurement, execute either of the following operation.
i. Push an arbitrary key.
ii. Click [Stop] command of the [Measurement] menu.

iii. Click [Stop] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Tip: Allows you to change the operation when you abort the measurement. Please refer to [Customizing] - [Measurement
Abortion] for the detail.

8. To change to the Calculation Screen, click [End] command of the [Measurement] menu,

Or, [Calculation] button of the [Standard] toolbar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 3 of 51

Tip: Allows you to display the Calculation Screen automatically after the measurement. Please refer to [Customizing] -
[Measurement] for the dettail.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Measurement Abortion]

[Customizing] - [Measurement]

Setting Roughness Measurement Condition

Sets the Roughness Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Roughness Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click each tab and set the condition.
a. [General] Tab --- Set the condition of the measurement and the analysis.

b. [Parameter] Tab --- Set the condition of the Roughness Parameter.

c. [Analysis Graph] Tab --- Set the condition of the Analysis Graph.
d. [Special Measurement] Tab --- Set the condition of the special measurement(Auto-Notch, etc...).
e. [3D Measurement] --- Change to 3D Measurement Mode.

Please remove the check when shifting into 2D measurement mode.

f. [Set Standard] --- Set the Roughness Standard.

The [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 4 of 51

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some operations might not be able to be worked.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Setting Roughness Standard]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Evaluation Condition]

Setting 2D Roughness Measurement Condition

Sets the 2D Roughness Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Roughness Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Measurement Condition] dialog box(SV/CS).

3. Click [General] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 5 of 51

[Measurement Condition] Dialog Box [General] Tab (SV):

a. [Define The Profiles] --- Sets the evaluation condition(Kind of Profile/Sampling Length/etc...) and measures.

Executes only the measurement, when you don't select [Define The Profiles].
b. [Evaluation] Group
I. [Multiple Profile Selection] --- Combines and sets the plural evaluation profiles.

Notice: Cannot set this condition by [Evaluation Condition] command in the [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of the
[Edit] menu.

The type of the combination is limited by the selected Roughness Standard.

And the combination become invalid when there is at least one invalid profile in the combination profiles combined in the
Roughness Standard setting.

lStandard Combination of the 2 Profiles Combination of the 3 Profiles

P - R/RLS/WC/WCA P - R - WC
PLS - R/RLS/WC/WCA PLS - R - WC
OLDMIX
R - WC/WCA PLS - RLS - WC
RMOTIF - WMOTIF
JIS1982 P_OLDJIS - R_OLDJIS -
P_ISO - R_ISO P_ISO - R_ISO - W_ISO
P_ISO - W_ISO
ISO1997
R_ISO - W_ISO
RMOTIF_ISO - WMOTIF_ISO
P_J01 - R_J01 P_J01 - R_J01 - W_J01
P_J01-W_J01
JIS2001
R_J01 - W_J01

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 6 of 51

RMOTIF_J01 - WMOTIF_J01
P_VDA - R_VDA PLS_VDA - RLS_VDA - W_VDA
VDA PLS_VDA - RLS_VDA
RLS_VDA - W_VDA

II. [Kind of Profile] --- Select the kind of the evaluation profile or the combination profiles.

Please refer to [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Assessed Profile and Mean Line] - [Assessed Profile] - [Assessed profile]
for the kind of the evaluation profile.
III. [No of Evltn] --- Input the number of the evaluation section(nLm).
IV. [Smplg Length] --- Select the Sampling length( Le ).

Tip:

When you select [Standard] in the [Smplg Length], you can select the standard value of the Sampling Length based on the
Roughness Standard by the [Sampling length] dialog box. (Except OLDMIX)

Notice: In the case of the selected Roughness Standard or evaluation profile, the [Standard] might not be able to be used.
V. [No of Smplg ] --- Input the number of the sections( nLe ).
VI. [Pitch] --- Input the pitch( pitch ).

The pitch is set automatically to optimal value when you change the Evaluation Length.
VII. [Evltn Length] --- Displays the Evaluation Length( Lm ).
VIII. [Mean Line Compensation] --- Executes the Mean Line Compensation at the time of the parameter calculation.

You can select [Mean Line Compensation] when the kind of the evaluation profile is R/RLS/WCA/WEA/E.

Always executes the compensation when the kind of the evaluation profile is P/PLS/WC/WE/DF.

Please refer to [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Assessed Profile and Mean Line] - [Mean Line (Base Line)] for the Mean
Line.
IX. Set the Cutoff value.
i. Ls: Removes the short-wavelength ingredient. (PLS/RLS/etc...)
ii. Lc: Removes the sinuosity ingredient. (R/RLS/etc...)
iii. fh: Removes the roughness ingredient. (WC/WCA/etc...)
iv. fl: Removes the sinuosity ingredient . (WCA/WEA/DF/etc...)
v. r: Removes the roughness ingredient. (WE/WEA/E/etc...)
X. [Kind of Filter] --- Select the kind of the Filter.

Please refer to [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Assessed Profile and Mean Line] - [Filter] - [Filter] - [Filter types] for the
Filter.
XI. [Pre-Travel] --- Specify the Pre-Travel Length( Lst ).
i. [Auto] --- Sets the optimal value based on the Roughness Standard.
ii. [Fixed] --- Input an arbitrary value.

The Pre-Travel Length is fixed to the value always set regardless of the standard or the cutoff value.
iii. [No] --- Doesn't set the Pre-Travel.
XII. [Post-Travel] --- Specify the Post-Travel Length( Lro ).
i. [Auto] --- Sets the optimal value based on the Roughness Standard.
ii. [Fixed] --- Input an arbitrary value.

The Pre-Travel Length is fixed to the value always set regardless of the standard or the cutoff value.
iii. [No]・・・Doesn't set the Post-Travel.
XIII. [Compensation] --- Set the method of data compensation.
i. [OFF] --- Doesn't compensate the data.
ii. [Inclination] --- Fits in the line and compensates. (All, Both, Front, Back)
iii. [R-Curve] --- Fits in the circle and compensates.
iv. [Ellipse Curve] --- Fits in the Ellipse Curve and compensates.
v. [Parabolic Curve] --- Fits in the Parabolic Curve and compensates.
vi. [Hyperbolic Curve] --- Fits in the Hyperbolic Curve and compensates.
vii. [Polynomial] --- Fits in the Polynomial and compensates. (Auto, 2nd - 7th order)
viii. [Conic Curve] --- Fits in the Conic Curve and compensates.
c. [Measurement] Group
i. [Meas Length] --- Displays the measurement length( L ).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 7 of 51

Input an arbitrary value, when you don't select [Define The Profiles].
ii. [Pitch] --- Displays the measurement pitch( pitch ).

Input an arbitrary value, when you don't select [Define The Profiles].
iii. [Number of Points] --- Displays the number of points per measurement length.( N ).
iv. [Measurement Axis] --- Select the measurement axis.
v. [Speed] --- Select the measurement speed.
vi. [Perform Pre-Measurement at Max Speed] --- Gives priority to the measurement time more than the accuracy of the Pre-
Measurement.
vii. [Auto-Leveling] --- Executes the Auto-Leveling.

Please refer to [Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling].

viii. [Use alpha axis] --- Executes the Auto-Leveling by using A-axis.
d. [Range] Group
i. [Auto-Range] --- Validates the Auto-Range.

Sets the optimal range after the Pre-Measurement when you validate the Auto-Range.
ii. [Range] --- Select the measurement range.
e. [Over Range] Group
i. [Continue] --- Continues the measurement without the interruption when the measurement become the Over-Range during
measurement.
ii. [Abort] --- Aborts the measurement when the measurement become the Over-Range during measurement.
f. [Measurement Start Method] Group
i. [Perform Auto-set] --- Executes the Auto-set at the time of the measurement start.

Starts the measurement without moving the stylus when the [Perform Auto-set] is not selected.
ii. [Auto-Stylus] --- Validates the Auto-Stylus.
iii. [Stylus Start Position] --- Set the stylus position at the time of the measurement start.
g. [Measurement Axis Escape] Group
i. [Not Escape] --- Doesn't move the stylus after the measurement.
ii. [Return] --- Moves the stylus to the measurement start position after the measurement..
iii. [Speed] --- Specify the speed of the Auto-return.
iv. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Moves Ignoring the Accidental Touch at the time of the Auto-return.
h. [Column Escape] Group
i. [Move Length] --- Input the relative length from the measurement end position after the measurement.
ii. [Manual Escape at Pre-Measurement]・ --- Moves the column by the manual operation after the Pre-Measurement.
i. [Drawing Legend] --- Sets the evaluating conditions according to the inspection conditions described with legends on working
drawings.
j. [3D Measurement] --- Sets the 3D Roughness Measurement Condition.

[Measurement Condition] Dialog Box [General] Tab (CS):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 8 of 51

a. [Range] Group
i. [Range] --- Select the measurement range.
b. [Stylus Status] Group
i. [Return with Stylus Height Held] --- Returns the stylus without changing its condition.
ii. [Return with Stylus Raising] --- Returns the stylus after rising.
iii. [Return with Stylus Holding at Midpoint] --- Return the stylus with the holding at midpoint condition.
iv. [Z1-axis Pos.]・ --- Changes the stylus position at the time of the return.

[Sampling length] Dialog Box:

a. Parameter --- Select the parameter to set the standard value of the sampling length.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 9 of 51

The parameter type changes depending on the standard.

b. Sampling length --- Select the standard value of the sampling length from the list.

[Drawing Legend] Dialog Box:

Evaluating conditions to be set easily according to the inspection conditions described with legends on working drawings.

a. [Upper／Lower] --- Select the upper limit or the lower limit.

b. Sets the Cutoff length and Sampling length.
i. Low-pass Filter Cutoff length.
ii. High-pass Filter Cutoff Length or Sampling length.

Tip:

When you select [Standard] in the [Smplg Length], you can select the standard value of the Sampling Length based on the
Roughness Standard by the [Sampling length] dialog box. (Except OLDMIX)

Notice: In the case of the selected Roughness Standard or evaluation profile, the [Standard] might not be able to be used.

c. [Parameter] --- Select the parameter to be calculated on the parameter list.

d. [nle] --- Input the number of the evaluation section(nLm).
e. [Tolerance Rule] --- Select the tolerance comparison rule of the selected parameter.
i. [16% Rule] --- Executes the tolerance comparison by 16% Rule.

Executes the tolerance comparison by each Sampling Length. And when the ratio of NG exceeds 16%, the judgment is NG.
ii. [Max. Value Rule] --- Executes the tolerance comparison by Max Rule.

Executes the tolerance comparison by each Sampling Length. And when as much as one Sampling Length of NG exists, NG
is judged.
f. [Tolerance] --- Enter the upper limit or the lower limit accrding to a. [Upper／Lower].

Notice:

The following two standards can be set by entering drawing legends: JIS2001 and ISO1997.
If [Multiple Profile Selection] is checked, cannot set evaluating conditions by entering Drawing legends.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 10 of 51

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some operations might not be able to be worked.

See Also

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]

Setting 3D Roughness Measurement Condition

Sets the 3D Roughness Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Roughness Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Select [3D Measurement].

Displays the [Measurement Condition] dialog box(SV/CS) of the 3D Roughness Measurement.

4. Click [General] tab.

[Measurement Condition] Dialog Box [General] Tab (SV):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 11 of 51

a. [Measurement] Group
i. [Number of Meas] --- Input the number of the measuring profile.
ii. [Meas Length] --- Input the measurement length( L ).
iii. [Pitch] --- Input the measurement pitch( pitch ).
iv. [Number of Points] --- Displays the number of points per measurement length(N ).
v. [Measurement Axis] --- Select the measurement axis.
vi. [Speed] --- Select the measurement speed.
vii. [Perform Pre-Measurement at Max Speed] --- Gives priority to the measurement time more than the accuracy of the Pre-
Measurement.
viii. [Auto-leveling] --- Executes the Auto-Leveling.

Please refer to [Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling].

ix. [Y-Axis Meas Lg] --- Displays the measurement length of Y-axis.
x. [Y-Axis Pitch] --- Input the measurement pitch of Y-axis.
xi. [Y-Axis Pre-Travel] --- Executes the Pre-Travel(0.1mm) to remove the mechanical posture change of Y-axis Table.
xii. [Perform Auto-set] --- Executes the Auto-set at the time of the measurement start.

Starts the measurement without moving the stylus when the [Perform Auto-set] is not selected.
xiii. [Stylus Start Position] --- Set the stylus position at the time of the measurement start.
xiv. [Range] --- Select the measurement range.
b. [Measurement method] Group
i. [Pull measurement] --- Executes the pull measurement(from leftward to rightward) in all section.

To give priority to accuracy, select the pull measurement.

ii. [Push pull measurement*1)] --- Repeats the pull measurement(from leftward to rightward) and the push measurement(from
rightward to leftward).

The moved distance of the stylus can be shortened. To give priority to time, select the push-pull measurement.
c. [Over Range] Group
i. [Continue] --- Continues the measurement without the interruption when the measurement become the Over-Range during
measurement.
ii. [Abort] --- Aborts the measurement when the measurement become the Over-Range during measurement.
d. [Measurement Axis Escape] Group
i. [Not Escape] --- Doesn't move the stylus after the measurement.
ii. [Return] --- Moves the stylus to the measurement start position after the measurement.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 12 of 51

iii. [Speed] --- Specify the speed of the Auto-return.

iv. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Moves Ignoring the Accidental Touch at the time of the Auto-return.
e. [Column Escape] Group
i. [Move Length] --- Input the relative length from the measurement end position after the measurement.

[Measurement Condition] Dialog Box [General] Tab (CS):

a. [Stylus Status] Group

i. [Return with Stylus Height Held] --- Returns the stylus without changing its condition.
ii. [Return with Stylus Raising] --- Returns the stylus after rising.
iii. [Return with Stylus Holding at Midpoint] --- Return the stylus with the holding at midpoint condition.
iv. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Changes the stylus position at the time of the return.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some operations might not be able to be worked.

*1) The moved distance of the stylus can be shortened when you execute the 3D measurement. To give priority to time, select the push-
pull measurement.

See Also

Setting 2D Roughness Special Measurement Condition

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 13 of 51

Sets the 2D Roughness Special Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Roughness Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Measurement Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Special Measurement] tab.

The [Special Measurement] Tab of [Measurement Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Auto-Notch] Group

The Auto-Notch function invalidates data that exceeds the set level.

You can invalidate the neighborhood of the Auto-Notch data, when you set the [Addition Data]. This function is effective in the
measurement of the hole etc.

i. [Smooth Connection] --- Removes the invalid data in the filter calculation and connects the dividing data.

Aligns the mean line of each data and connects each data.
ii. [Perform Auto-Notch of (+)Data] --- Invalidates the data of the positive side automatically.

[Perform Auto-Notch of (-)Data] --- Invalidates the data of the negative side automatically.
iii. [Cutting Level] --- Input the level of [Auto-Notch].
iv. [Cutting Level is Set to the Range] --- Sets the measurement range value to the level of [Auto-Notch].
v. [Addition Data] --- Input the added invalid length.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 14 of 51

vi. [Number of Points] --- Sets the number of points to the [Addition Data].
vii. [Length] --- Sets the length to the [Addition Data].
b. [R-Surface Automatic Measurement] Group

Decides the measurement start position from the result of the Pre-Measurement automatically.

Move the stylus to the neighborhood of the peak/valley point of the R-Surface.

i. [Off] --- Doesn't execute the [R-Surface Automatic Measurement].

ii. [Convex R-Surface] --- Executes the Convex R-Surface Automatic Measurement.
iii. [Concave R-Surface] --- Executes the Concave R-Surface Automatic Measurement.
c. [Tracking Measurement] Group

You can measure the workpiece of the long large measurement range by using the Tracking Measurement function.

Moves the Z2-axis synchronously according to the shape of workpiece.

The measurement accuracy is limited by the accuracy of the Z2-axis.

i. [Perform Tracing Measurement] --- Executes the Tracking Measurement

d. [XY Measurement] Group

Measures by using Y-axis.

You can measure to diagonal direction by using X-axis and Y-axis together.

i. [Only X-axis] --- Measures by using only X-axis.

ii. [Only Y-axis] --- Measures by using only Y-axis.
iii. [X-Y axis] --- Measures by using X-axis and Y-axis together.
iv. [Angle from X-axis] --- Input the angle from the X-axis in order to decide the direction of the diagonal measurement.
e. [3D Measurement] --- Sets the 3D Roughness Measurement Condition.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some operations might not be able to be worked.

See Also

Setting 3D Roughness Special Measurement Condition

Sets the 3D Roughness Special Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Roughness Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Measurement Condition] dialog box.

3. Select [3D Measurement].

Displays the [Measurement Condition] dialog box of the 3D Roughness Measurement.

4. Click [Special Measurement] tabタブ.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 15 of 51

The [Special Measurement] Tab of [Measurement Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Auto-Notch] Group

The Auto-Notch function invalidates data that exceeds the set level.

You can invalidate the neighborhood of the Auto-Notch data, when you set the [Addition Data]. This function is effective in the
measurement of the hole etc.

i. [Perform Auto-Notch of (+)Data] --- Invalidates the data of the positive side automatically.

[Perform Auto-Notch of (-)Data] --- Invalidates the data of the negative side automatically.
ii. [Cutting Level] --- Input the level of [Auto-Notch].
iii. [Cutting Level is Set to the Range] --- Sets the measurement range value to the level of [Auto-Notch].
iv. [Addition Data] --- Input the added invalid length.
v. [Number of Points] --- Sets the number of points to the [Addition Data].
vi. [Length] --- Sets the length to the [Addition Data].
b. [Tracking Measurement] Group

You can measure the workpiece of the long large measurement range by using the Tracking Measurement function.

Moves the Z2-axis synchronously according to the shape of workpiece.

The measurement accuracy is limited by the accuracy of the Z2-axis.

i. [Perform Tracing Measurement] --- Executes the Tracking Measurement

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some operations might not be able to be worked.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 16 of 51

See Also

Setting Contour Measurement Condition

Sets the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click each tab and set the condition.

a. [Option] Tab --- Set the measurement option.

b. [Meas Length] Tab --- Set the measurement length.

c. [Sampling Method] Tab --- Set the Sampling Method.
d. [Meas Pitch] Tab --- Set the measurement pitch.
e. [Measuring Speed] Tab --- Set the measurement speed.

f. [Tracking Direction] Tab --- Set the tracing direction.

g. [Measuring Magnification] Tab --- Set the measurement magnification.
h. [Meas Range] Tab --- Set the measurement range.
i. [Meas Position] Tab --- Set the measurement start position.
j. [Auto-return] Tab --- Set the condition of Auto-return.
k. [Over-Range] Tab --- Set the operation of the Over-Range.
l. [Vibrator] Tab --- Set the condition of Vibrator.
m. [3D Measurement] Tab --- Set the condition of 3D measurement.
n. [Measurement Direction] Tab --- Set the 3D measurement direction.
o. [Auto-leveling] Tab --- Set the condition of Auto-leveling.
p. [Display] Tab --- Set the display condition.
q. [Stylus protection function] Tab --- Set the stylus protection function.
r. [Intermediate hold measurement] Tab --- Set the intermediate hold measurement.

The [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 17 of 51

Tip:

The last measurement condition is set in the [Meas Condition] dialog box displayed in Teaching Mode.

Please refer to [Customizing] - [Machine Information] for deletion of the last measurement condition.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some items might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Machine Information]

Setting Option of Contour Measurement Condition

Set the measurement option of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Option] tab.

The [Option] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 18 of 51

a. [Perform Z2-axis Scanning Measurement] --- Executes the Z2-axis Tracking Measurement*1).

Z1-axis Measurement Z2-axis Tracking Measurement

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Z2-axis Tracking Measurement might not be able to be used.

And cannot execute the Auto-return when you select the Z2-axis Tracking Measurement.

When performing Z2-axis tracking measurement in the Y-axis direction,make sure to reduce measurement speed.

b. [X1-axis] --- Selects the X1-axis as the measurement axis.

c. [Y-axis] --- Selects the Y-axis as the measurement axis.

Notice: In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Y-axis might not be able to be specified for the measurement axis.
d. [X1 and Y-axis] --- Selects the X1-Y axis as the measurement axis.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the [X1-Y axis] might not be able to be specified for the measurement axis when
you don't select the Z2-axis Tracking Measurement.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the [X1-Y axis] might not be able to be specified for the measurement axis.
e. [Ref Coord] --- Select the Reference Coordinate System.
f. [Z1+Z2] --- Switch between Z1-axis display and Z1+Z2-axis display.

Notice:

When the [Perform Z2-axis Scanning Measurement] is checked, the [Z1+Z2] is automatically checked.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the [Z1+Z2] might not be able to be specified.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 19 of 51

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some items might not be able to be used.

*1) This is the measuring method to trace the shape so that the value of the Z1-axis(Detector) may become 0. Please use this measuring
method when the Z-axis measurement range of the workpiece is larger than the measurement range of Z1-axis.

See Also

Changing Measurement Length of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the measurement length of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Meas Length] tab.

The [Meas Length] Tab of the [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Meas direction] --- Select the measurement direction for the measurement length input.
b. [by Angle] --- Input the measurement length and the angle. (Please see following figure)

Input the length when you don't select [by Angle].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 20 of 51

[Meas direction] = [X1-Y axis] Meas. Length Meas. Length and Angle

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the [X1-Y axis] might not be able to be specified for the measurement axis.

c. [Meas Length] --- Input the measurement length.

Allows you to change the measurement length by using the Slider.

Tip:

To measure in the direction where the Counter indicates the negative value, input the negative value as the measurement length.

Executes the pull measurement when the measurement length of X1-axis is positive value.

Executes the push measurement when the measurement length of X1-axis is negative value.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the negative value might not be able to be input for the measurement length.

The input value is omitted below minimum value.

d. [Chng St Pos] --- Moves the stylus to the setting position.
e. [Set Start Pos] --- Sets the Counter value to the measurement start position.

When the measurement length is the unknown, you can set the measurement length from the Counter value of the measurement
start/end position.

Move the stylus to the measurement start position and click [Set Start Pos] button.

f. [Set End Pos] --- Sets the Counter value to the measurement end position.

Move the stylus to the measurement end position and click <f11><b12>[Set End Pos] button</b12></f11>.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 21 of 51

g. [Set Length] --- Sets the measurement length calculated from the measurement start/end position.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some items might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Measurement]

Changing Sampling Method of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the sampling method of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Sampling Method] tab.

The [Sampling Method] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 22 of 51

a. [X-axis Pitch*1)] --- Samples at constant intervals.

b. [Line Segment Pitch*2)] --- Samples by the constant distance.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the sampling method might not be able to be changed.

*1) Gets the data at the constant intervals while measuring at the constant speed. The measurement time can be shortened.

*2) Gets the data every time the constant distance is moved. You can get the data by the constant density according to the change of the
shape.

See Also

Changing Measurement Pitch of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the measurement pitch of the Contour Measurement Condition.

Notice:

l In the model in which the measuring magnification can be modified, the measurement pitch may differ according to the X1-axis
measuring magnification.

Change the X1-axis measuring magnification when you cannot find the measurement pitch that you want.

l In the model that cannot modify the measuring magnification, the applicable measurement pitch may differ according to the
measuring speed and sampling method.

Change this setting when you cannot find the measurement pitch that you want.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 23 of 51

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box(CS).

3. Click [Meas Pitch] tab.

The [Meas Pitch] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Meas pitch] --- Specify the measurement pitch.

Allows you to change the measurement pitch by using the Slider.

The input value is omitted below minimum value.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the slider might not be able to be used.

The [Meas Pitch] Tab of the [Meas Condition] Dialog Box(CS):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 24 of 51

a. [Measure detailed surface roughness] --- Executes the roughness measurement.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the roughness measurement might not be able to be executed when the
measurement speed is fast.

b. [Rough Pitch] --- Input the measurement pitch of the roughness measurement.

The input value is omitted below minimum value.

c. [Cutoff value] --- Select the cutoff value of the roughness measurement.

The roughness measurement pitch is set to the appropriate value when you select the cutoff value.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some items might not be able to be used.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the roughness measurement might not be able to be executed.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Slider]

Changing Measurement Speed of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the measurement speed of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 25 of 51

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Measuring Speed] tab.

The [Measuring Speed] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Meas. speed] --- Specify the measurement speed.

In the case of the measuring instrument model to be able to change the measurement magnification, the measurement speed that
can be set according to the measurement magnification of the X1 axis might be different.

Change the X1-axis measuring magnification when you cannot find the measurement speed that you want.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the measuring speed might not be able to be changed.

See Also

Changing Tracing Direction of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the tracing direction of the Contour Measurement Condition.

Notice:

When the [Tracing Direction] tab is displayed, you cannot change the Tracing Direction according to the sign of the measurement length.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 26 of 51

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Tracing Direction] tab.

The [Tracing Direction] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Pull] --- Moves the stylus from leftward to rightward.

b. [Push] --- Moves the stylus from rightward to leftward.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the tracing direction might not be able to be changed.

See Also

Changing Measuring Magnification of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the measuring magnification of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 27 of 51

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Measuring Magnification] tab.

The [Measuring Magnification] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [X1-axis Mag] --- Specify the measuring magnification of the X1-axis.

b. [Z1-axis Mag] --- Specify the measuring magnification of the Z1-axis.

Notice:

Depending on the measuring instrument model, it may not be possible to modify the measuring magnification.

See Also

Changing Measurement Range of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the measurement range of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Meas Range] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 28 of 51

The [Meas Range] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Z1-axis Meas Range] --- Select the measurement range of Z1-axis.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the measurement range might not be able to be changed.

See Also

Changing Measurement Position of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the measurement position of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Meas Position] tab.

The [Meas Position] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 29 of 51

a. [Set Position] --- Select the axis to set the movement condition for the measurement start position.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the axis might not be able to be selected.

b. [Set the coordinate value] --- Moves to the specified measurement start position.

Input the measurement start position.

Allows you to change the measurement start position by using the Slider.

c. [Read Position] --- Sets the counter to the measurement start position.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the measurement start position might not be able to be set .

See Also

[Customizing] - [Measurement]

Changing Auto-Return of Contour Measurement Condition

Changes the Auto-Return *1) of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Auto-return] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 30 of 51

The [Auto-return] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Disable Auto-return] --- Not executes the Auto-return.

b. [Return to Meas Start Position] --- Returns to the measurement start position after the measurement.
c. [Return to Counter-0 Position] --- Returns to the position in which the Counter value becomes 0.
d. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Moves Ignoring the Accidental Touch at the time of the Auto-return.
e. [Speed] --- Specify the speed of the Auto-return.
f. [Escape Z2-axis] --- The Z2-sxis escapes.

Input the escape length of Z2-axis.

*1) This is the operation of returning to the specified position automatically after the measurement. You can set the measurement start
position or the Counter 0 position to the return position.

See Also

Changing Over-Range of Contour Measurement Condition

Set the operation for the Over-Range*1).

Notice:

In the model that can modify the measuring magnification, the Z1-axis measurement range may differ according to the Z1-axis measuring
magnification.

Change the measuring magnification of the Z1-axis when the Over-Range occurs frequently.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 31 of 51

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Over-Range] tab.

The [Over-Range] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Abort] --- Aborts the measurement when the Over-Range occurred.

b. [Continue] --- Continues the measurement when the Over-Range occurred.

However, when the stylus exceeded the limit of the measurement instrument, aborts the measurement.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Over-Range condition might not be able to be changed.

*1) This is the status of exceeding the measurement range of Z-axis.

See Also

Changing Vibrator of Contour Measurement Condition

Changes the Vibrator *1) of the Contour Measurement Condition.

You can measure even the rough surface workpiece by using the Vibrator(Vibrates the stylus).

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 32 of 51

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Vibrator] tab.

The [Vibrator] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Use Vibrator] --- Uses the Vibrator.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Vibrator might not be able to be used.

*1) This is the switch to trace the rough surface by vibrating the arm/stylus.

See Also

Changing 3D Measurement Condition of Contour

Measurement Condition
Changes the 3D Measurement Condition of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [3D Measurement] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 33 of 51

The [3D Measurement] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [3D Meas.] --- Executes the 3D Measurement.

b. [Start Position Centering] --- Sets the measurement start position to the center position.

Example of [Start Position Centering] Selection

Example of [Start Position Centering] Non-Selection

c. [Number of Profiles] --- Specify the number of profiles.
d. [Measuring Interval] --- Input the Measuring Interval.
e. [Width] --- Displays the measurement width.

Example of [Number of Profiles] and[Y-axis Pitch]

f. [Movement Direction] --- Select the direction.
g. [Clockwise] --- Rotates T2-axis Table clockwise.
h. [Counterclockwise] --- Rotates T2-axis Table counterclockwise.
i. [Circular area] --- Sets the measurement area to the circle.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 34 of 51

[Circular area]/[Start Position Centering] Selection(Right) and Non-Selection(Left)

j. [Y-axis Pre-Travel] --- Executes the Pre-Travel of Y-axis(of 3D Measurement by X1-Y axis) at the time of the measuring start.
k. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Moves to the measurement start position ignoring the Accidental Touch.
l. [Speed] --- Specify the moving speed.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the 3D measurement might not be able to be executed.

And some items might not be able to be set.

See Also

Changing 3D Measurement Direction of Contour Measurement

Condition
Changes the 3D measurement direction of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Measurement Direction] tab.

The [Measurement Direction] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 35 of 51

a. [Pull Measurement] --- Measures to the direction selected in the [Tracing Direction] tab.
b. [Push Pull Measurement] --- Measures in both the push direction and pull direction.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the 3D measurement might not be able to be executed.

See Also

Changing Auto-Leveling of Contour Measurement Condition

Changes the Auto-Leveling*1) of the Contour Measurement Condition.

Executes the measurement after the pre-measuring and the Auto-Leveling, when you execute the Auto-Leveling.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Auto-leveling] tab.

The [Auto-leveling] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 36 of 51

a. [Perform Auto-leveling] --- Executes the Auto-Leveling.

b. [Perform Pre-Meas. at Current Meas Speed] --- Executes the pre-measurement by the measurement speed.
c. [Perform Pre-Meas. at Max Speed] --- Sets the pre-measurement speed to maximum.
d. [Use A(T2)-axis] --- Executes the Leveling by using the A-axis or T2-axis.
e. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Executes the Auto-Return of the pre-measurement ignoring the Accidental Touch.
f. [Return] --- Specify the speed of the Auto-return.
g. [Escape Z2-axis] --- The Z2-axis escapes.

Input the escape length of Z2-axis.

*1) Leveling the measurement range automatically by using the Auto-Leveling Table.

See Also

Changing Display Method of Contour Measurement Condition

Changes the display method of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Display] tab.

The [Display] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 37 of 51

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [Number] --- Input the number of repetition for shifting the measurement data.
When you input the shift value, display shifting at the measurement. )
c. [Horizontal shift value] --- Input the horizontal shift value.
d. [Vertical shift value] --- Input the vertical shift value.

Tip:

When you measure the same part two or more times, you can display shifting to vertical direction for non-double displaying.

See Also

Changing Measurement Force of Contour Measurement

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 38 of 51

Condition
Changes the measurement force of the Contour Measurement Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Meas. Force] tab.

The [Meas. Force] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [ALPHA angle] --- Input the ALPHA angle.

b. [Measurement Force] --- Input the measurement force.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this function might not be available.

See Also

Changing Stylus Protection Function

Change the status of the stylus protection function.

Using the stylus protection function, the impact placed on the stylus can be reduced by detecting the stylus fall speed and deceleration.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 39 of 51

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command in the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Stylus protection function] tab.

The [Stylus protection function] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Use the stylus protection function] --- Enables the stylus protection.

Notice:

This function may not be available depending on the measuring machine model.

See Also

Changing Measurement Holding at Stylus Midpoint

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 40 of 51

Change the status of measurement holding at the stylus midpoint in the contour measurement condition.

Using the midpoint holding measurement, the measurement can be performed while the stylus is held at its midpoint to prevent the stylus
from falling off.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [Set Meas. Condition...] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Intermediate hold measurement] tab.

The [Intermediate hold measurement] Tab of [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Intermediate hold measurement] --- Executes measurement holding the stylus at its midpoint.

Notice:

This function may not be available depending on the measuring machine model.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 41 of 51

See Also

Setting Compensation Condition

Sets the compensation condition of the measurement.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

2. Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.
3. Click each tab and set the condition.
a. [Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio] Tab --- Select the Z-axis gain adjustment ratio registered by the calibration.

b. [Symmetric Compensation] Tab --- Set the Symmetric Compensation Condition.

c. [Stylus Radius Compensation] Tab --- Set the Stylus Radius Compensation Condition.
d. [Straightness Compensation(X1-axis)] Tab --- Set the Straightness Compensation Condition of X1-axis.
e. [Straightness Compensation(Y-axis)] タブ --- Set the Straightness Compensation Condition of Y-axis.
f. [Workpiece Thermal Compensation] Tab --- Set the Workpiece Thermal Compensation Condition.
g. [Workpiece Thermal Compensation] Tab --- Define the expansion coefficient for the Workpiece Thermal Compensation.
h. [Polar Reversal] Tab --- Set the Polar Reversal Condition of the measurement data.
i. [X1-to-Y axis angle correction] Tab --- Set the Polar Reversal Condition of the 3D measurement data.

[Comp Condition] Dialog Box:

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some items might not be able to be used.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 42 of 51

Changing Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio

Selects the Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio registered by the calibration.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio] tab.

3. Select the measurement value of Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio and click [OK] button.
4. To delete the registered Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio,

Click [Delete] command in the pop-up menu of Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio.

The [Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio] Tab of [Comp Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Z Gain Adj Ratio] --- Displays the measurement value of Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio.

b. List --- Displays the list of Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio.

Please execute the Z-axis Gain Adjustment when the Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio is not displayed in the list.
c. [OK] --- Compensates by the selected Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Z-axis Gain Adjustment]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 43 of 51

Changing Symmetric Compensation Condition

Changes the Symmetric Compensation Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [Symmetric Compensation] tab.

The [Symmetric Compensation] Tab of [Comp Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Perform Symmetric Comp] --- Executes the Symmetric Compensation.

b. Compensation Value --- Displays the Symmetric Compensation value measured by using the current arm/stylus.

Please execute the Symmetric Compensation when the Symmetric Compensation value is not displayed in the list.

When you change the arm/stylus, the Symmetric Compensation value is invalidated. Please execute the Symmetric Compensation
Measurement again.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Symmetric Compensation might not be able to be set.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 44 of 51

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Symmetric Compensation Measurement] - [Executing Symmetric
Compensation Measurement]

Changing Stylus Radius Compensation Condition

Changes the condition of the Stylus Radius Compensation*1).

Notice:

Please always execute the Stylus Radius Compensation, when you execute the Contour Tolerancing of the measurement data.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [Stylus Radius Compensation] tab.
3. Select the measurement value of the stylus radius and click [OK] button.
4. To delete the registered stylus radius,

Click [Delete] command in the pop-up menu of the stylus radius.

The [Stylus Radius Compensation] Tab of [Comp Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Perform Stylus Radius Comp] --- Executes theStylus Radius Compensation.

b. [Measured Data] --- Compensates by the measured value selected from the measured value list of the stylus radius.

Please execute the Stylus Radius Measurement when the stylus radius value is not displayed in the list.
c. [Nominal Data] --- Compensates by the Nominal Value of the stylus radius.
d. [Arbitrary Data] --- Compensates by the arbitrary value of the stylus radius.

Input the arbitrary value of the Stylus Radius.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 45 of 51

e. List --- Displays the list of registered stylus radius value.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the stylus radius compensation might not be able to be set.

*1) Compensates the error caused by the curvature in the stylus tip.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Measuring Stylus Radius]

Changing Straightness Compensation Condition

Changes the Straightness Compensation Condition.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [Symmetric Compensation] tab.

3. To set the Straightness Compensation of X1-axis, click [Straightness Compensation(X1-axis)] tab.

To set the Straightness Compensation of Y-axis, click [Straightness Compensation(Y-axis)] tab.

The [Straightness Compensation(X1-axis)] Tab of [Comp Condition] Dialog Box:(Y-axis is also similar)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 46 of 51

a. [Perform Straightness Comp.(X1-axis)] --- Executes the Straightness Compensation of X1-axis.

b. [Interrupt to Correct Meas Pt within Range] --- Aborts the measurement and compensates only the measurement data of the
useful range, when the Straightness Compensation Data exceeded the useful range and measured.
c. [Continue without Correcting All Meas Pts] --- Continues the measurement and does not compensate the measurement data,
when the Straightness Compensation Data exceeded the useful range and measured.

d. [File Name] --- Displays the file name of the Straightness Compensation Data.

Please execute the Straightness Compensation Measurement when the Straightness Compensation file does not exist.
e. [Traceable Range] --- Displays the useful range of the Straightness Compensation Data.
f. [Select...] --- Select the Straightness Compensation File.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Straightness Compensation]

Changing Workpiece Thermal Compensation Condition

Changes the condition of the Workpiece Thermal Compensation*1).

Notice:

To compensate the thermal compensation of the workpiece to high accuracy, set up the temperature sensor correctly.

Please refer to the User's Manual (Hardware Guide) for the setup method of the temperature sensor.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [Workpiece Thermal Compensation] tab.
3. To define the Expansion Coefficient for the Workpiece Thermal Compensation, click [Definition] button.

Displays [Expansion Coefficient Selection] dialog box.

4. To define the new Expansion Coefficient, click [New] button.

To edit the registered Expansion Coefficient, select the Expansion Coefficient from the list and click [Definition] button.

Displays the [Defining the Expansion Coefficient] dialog box.

The [Workpiece Thermal Compensation] Tab of [Comp Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 47 of 51

a. [Perform Workpiece Thermal Comp] --- Executes the Workpiece Thermal Compensation.

b. [Name / Expansion Coefficient(u/K)] --- Select the Expansion Coefficient of the workpiece.

Thermal expansion and shrinking of the workpiece can be compensated by using the workpiece temperature and expansion
coefficient so that the measured value becomes close to that of the workpiece at 20℃
c. [Definition] --- Defines the Expansion Coefficient of the workpiece.
d. [Use Sensor 1&2 (Mean Value)] --- Uses the mean value of the Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 as the temperature of the workpiece.
e. [Use Sensor 1] --- Uses the value of the Sensor 1 as the temperature of the workpiece.
f. [Use Sensor 2] --- Uses the value of the Sensor 2 as the temperature of the workpiece.
g. [Specify the Value] --- Uses an arbitrary value as the temperature of the workpiece.

Input the temperature of the workpiece.

h. [at each contour] --- Input the workpiece temperature at each contour when executing the 3D measurement.

[Expansion Coefficient Selection] Dialog Box:

a. Expansion Coefficient --- Displays the list of the registered Expansion Coefficient.

b. [New] --- Define the new Expansion Coefficient.

c. [Definition] --- Edit the defined Expansion Coefficient.
d. [Delete] --- Delete the selected Expansion Coefficient.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 48 of 51

[Defining the Expansion Coefficient] Dialog Box:

a. [Name] --- Enter the workpiece name.

b. [Expansion coefficient] --- Input the Expansion Coefficient.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the Workpiece Thermal Compensation might not be able to be set.

*1) This function compensates the error caused by the thermal expansion by calculating from the workpiece temperature(20 degrees) and
Expansion Coefficient.

See Also

Changing Polar Reversal Condition

Changes the condition of the Polar Reversal*1).

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [Polar Reversal] tab.

The [Polar Reversal] Tab of [Comp Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 49 of 51

a. [Reverse the measured data polarity.] --- Reverses the polarity of the measurement data.

*1) This function reverses the polarity of the Z-axis value of the measurement data.

See Also

Changing X1-to-Y Axis Angle Correction Condition

Changes the condition of X1-to-Y Axis Angle Correction.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [X1-to-Y axis angle correction] tab.

The [X1-to-Y axis angle correction] Tab of [Comp Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 50 of 51

a. [Perform X1-to-Y axis angle correction of 3D measurement data] --- Corrects the angle between X1-axis and Y-axis of the 3D
measurement data.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the X1-to-Y Axis Angle Correction might not be able to be set.

See Also

[Calibrating] - [Measuring the angle between X1-axis and Y-axis]

Changing Stylus Position Compensation Condition

Changes the condition of the Stylus Position Compensation*1).

Notice:

Please always execute the Stylus Position Compensation, when you use Up-down stylus.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comp. Condition...] of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click [CompSet] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [Stylus Position Compensation] tab.

3. Select the stylus position compensation and click [OK] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement Page 51 of 51

The [Stylus Position Compensation] Tab of [Comp Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Perform Stylus position compensation] --- Executes the Stylus Position Compensation.
When the stylus position Y-axis compensation is applied, the Y-axis table move option at the time of switching the stylus up/down
will become available.

b. List --- Displays the list of registered stylus position compensation value.
When the stylus position Y-axis compensation is applied, the Y-axis compensation data will be displayed as well.

Please execute the Stylus Position Offset Measurement when the stylus position compensation value is not displayed in the list.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the stylus position compensation might not be able to be set.

*1) Compensates the gap of position between the upward stylus and the downward stylus.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Measuring Stylus Radius]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh704E.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 1 of 267

About Roughness Analysis

To execute the Roughness Analysis, set the condition below.

Roughness Standard

Set the condition of the Roughness Standard.

Please refer to [Analyzing Roughness] - [Setting Roughness Standard] for the detail.

Evaluation Condition

Set the condition of the Evaluation Profile.

Please refer to [Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Evaluation Condition] for the detail of the Evaluation Condition.

The measurement length is changed by Sampling Length and the number of Sampling Length.

Please refer to [Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] for the detail of the measurement
condition.

Parameter Condition

Set the condition of the Parameter Calculation.

Please refer to [Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Parameter Condition of Roughness Analysis] for the detail.

Analysis Graph Condition

Set the condition of the Analysis Graph Calculation.

Please refer to [Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Analysis Graph Condition of Roughness Analysis] for the detail.

Calculation Method

Set the non-standard condition and the original processing condition.

Please refer to [Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Calculation Method of Roughness Analysis] for the detail.

See Also

[Measuring] - [About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Analyzing N-Section Roughness]

Setting Roughness Standard

Sets the Roughness Standard.

To set the standard at the time of the new measurement:

1. Click [Roughness Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measurement Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Set Standard] button.

Displays the [Standard Setup] dialog box.

To change the standard of the command of the measured roughness analysis:

1. Click [Roughness Standard...] command in the [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of the [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Roughness Standard...] command in the pop-up menu of the roughness analysis command.

Displays the [Roughness Stabdard Change] dialog box.

[Standard Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 2 of 267

a. [Standard] --- Select the standard.

Clears all the evaluation profiles and calculates the standard evaluation profile from the measurement profile again, when you changed the roughness
standard.
i. [OLDMIX] --- Allows you to execute the roughness analysis compatible with SURFPAK of the previous version.
ii. [JIS1994] --- Allows you to execute the roughness analysis in accordance with JIS standard of 1994.
iii. [ISO1997] --- Allows you to execute the roughness analysis in accordance with ISO standard of 1997.
iv. [ANSI] --- Allows you to execute the roughness analysis in accordance with ASME B46.1-2002 of U.S.A Standard.
v. [JIS1982] --- Allows you to execute the roughness analysis in accordance with JIS standard of 1982.
vi. [JIS2001] --- Allows you to execute the roughness analysis in accordance with JIS standard of 2001. *1)

The JIS 2001 Standard is translating ISO4287 issued in 1997 and has changed neither a technical content nor the standard table style.
vii. [VDA] --- Allows you to execute the roughness analysis in accordance with VDA2007 of VDA.
b. [Kind of Profile] --- Select the kind of evaluation profile used in the measurement condition setup and the evaluation condition setup and the evaluation
section setup.
c. [Set to the default] --- Sets the selected evaluation profile to the default evaluation profile.
d. [Set All] --- Selects all items of [Parameter]/[Graph]/[Filter] group.
e. [Can All] --- Sets all items of [Parameter]/[Graph]/[Filter] group to non-selection.
f. [Filter] Group --- Select the filter used in the measurement condition setup and the evaluation condition setup.

Set to the evaluation profile selected in the [Kind of Profile].

g. [Graph] Group --- Select the analysis graph used in the Analysis Graph Setup.

Set to the evaluation profile selected in the [Kind of Profile].

h. [Parameter] Group --- Set the [Set]/[Stat]/[Sheet] of the parameter used in the Parameter Setup.
i. [Set](Left) --- Change the display/non-display used in the Parameter Setup.
ii. [Stat](Center) --- Change the default selection status of the statistics output.
iii. [Sheet](Right) --- Change the default selection status of the summary sheet output.

Set to the evaluation profile selected in the [Kind of Profile].

i. [Set All] --- The [Set] of all parameters is turned on.

j. [Can All] --- The [Set] of all parameters is turned off.
k. [Set All Stat] --- The [Stat] of all parameters is turned on.
l. [Can All Stat] --- The [Stat] of all parameters is turned off.
m. [Set All Sheet] --- The [Sheet] of all parameters is turned on.
n. [Can All Sheet] --- The [Sheet] of all parameters is turned off.
o. [Greek Character Setup] --- Set the greek character used in the Parameter Setup.

Displays the [Greek Character Setup] dialog box.

[Greek Character Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 3 of 267

a. [Delta] --- Set the character of greek capital letter Delta.

b. [Lambda] --- Set the character of greek letter Lambda.
c. [Small Delta] --- Set the character of greek small letter Delta.

[Roughness Standard Change] Dialog Box:

a. [Standard] --- Select the standard.

Clears all the evaluation profiles displays the [Evaluation Section Setup] dialog box, when you changed the roughness standard.

*1)

The following point is different from Roughness Standard ISO1997 of SURFPAK.

1. Profile Name

"_ ISO" was attached to the profile name in Roughness Standard ISO1997 of SURFPAK. However, "_ J01" attaches in JIS2001.

Example: R_ISO -> R_J01

2. Ten Points Average Height RzJIS

The Rz parameter calculation method of Roughness Standard ISO1997 of SURFPAK is different from Rz parameter of OLDMIX/JIS1982/JIS1994.

The Rz parameter of JIS2001 is the same as ISO1997. However, the calculation method(Ten Points Average Height) of the old JIS Standard is installed as
RzJIS.

(Ten Points Average Height of SURFPAK was calculated by the use of RzJIS. )

Tip:

Please refer to [Analyzing Roughness] - [About 2D Roughness Analysis] for the detail of 2D Roughness Analysis.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition]

Changing Evaluation Condition of Roughness Analysis

Sets the evaluation condition of the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

Please refer to [Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] for the detail of setting of evaluation
condition at the time of the new measurement.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 4 of 267

How To:

1. Select the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Evaluation Condition] command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Evaluation Condition] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Evaluation Condition] dialog box.

3. To change the parameter condition and analysis graph condition from the pop-up menu, display the [Evaluation Condition] dialog box and click each tab.

The [General] Tab of [Evaluation Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [Kind of Profile] --- Select the kind of evaluation profile.

b. [Smplg Length(le)] --- Displays the sampling length( Le ). >*1)
c. [No of Smplg(nle)] --- Displays the number of sampling length( nLe ). *1)
d. [Pitch] --- Displays the pitch( pitch ). *1)
e. [Evltn Length] --- Displays the Evaluation Length( Lm ).
f. [Mean Line Compensation] --- Executes the Mean Line Compensation at the time of the parameter calculation.

You can select [Mean Line Compensation] when the kind of the evaluation profile is R/RLS/WCA/WEA/E.

Always executes the compensation when the kind of the evaluation profile is P/PLS/WC/WE/DF.

Please refer to [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Assessed Profile and Mean Line] - [Mean Line (Base Line)] for the Mean Line.
g. Set the next cutoff value.
i. [Ls] --- Removes the short-wavelength ingredient. (PLS/RLS etc.)
ii. [Lc] --- Removes the sinuosity ingredient. (R/RLS etc.)
iii. [fh] --- Removes the roughness ingredient. (WC/WCA etc.)
iv. [fl] --- Removes the sinuosity ingredient. (WCA/WEA/DF etc.)
v. [r] --- Removes the roughness ingredient. (WE/WEA/E/ etc.)
h. [Kind of Filter] --- Select the kind of the Filter.
i. [Pre-Travel] --- Displays the Pre-Travel Length( Lst ). *1)
j. [Post-Travel] --- Displays the Post-Travel Length( Lro ). *1)
k. [Smooth Connection] --- Removes the invalid data in the filter calculation and connects the dividing data.

Aligns the mean line of each data and connects each data.
l. [Chg Eval Sec] --- Changes the evaluation section. (Case of multiple evaluation section)

*1) Click [Evaluation Section] command in [Roughness Profile] menu of [Edit] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 5 of 267

Tip:

Please refer to [Analyzing Roughness] - [About 2D Roughness Analysis] for the detail of 2D Roughness Analysis.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition]

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Changing Evaluation Condition of Roughness Analysis]

Changing Parameter Condition of Roughness Analysis

Changes the parameter condition of roughness analysis.

How To:

1. Select the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Parameter Condition] command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Parameter Condition] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Parameter] tab of [Evaluation Condition] dialog box.

The [Parameter] Tab of [Evaluation Condition] Dialog Box:

a. Select the parameter that you want to calculate.

i. [Calc](Left) --- Calculates the selected parameter.

In the case of non-selection, the [Stat]/[Sheet]/[Tol] is invalidated.

ii. [Stat](Center-Left) --- Outputs the parameter result to the statistics file.
iii. [Sheet](Center-Right) --- Outputs the parameter result to Parameter Sum Table.
iv. [Tol](Right) --- Executes the tolerancing.

Click [Set Tol] button and Set the tolerancing condition.

b. [Chg Eval Sec] --- Changes the evaluation section. (Case of multiple evaluation section)

c. [Common] --- Sets the same condition for all evaluation section.

Notice:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 6 of 267

By the kind of profile, the same condition might not be able to be set.

d. [Set All] --- The [Calc]/[Stat]/[Sheet]/[Tol] of all parameters is turned on.

e. [Can All] --- The [Calc]/[Stat]/[Sheet]/[Tol] of all parameters is turned off.
f. [Set All Calc] --- The [Calc] of all parameters is turned on.
g. [Can All Calc] --- The [Calc] of all parameters is turned off.
h. [Set All Stat] --- The [Stat] of all parameters is turned on.
i. [Can All Stat] --- The [Stat] of all parameters is turned off.
j. [Set All Sheet] --- The [Sheet] of all parameters is turned on.
k. [Can All Sheet] --- The [Sheet] of all parameters is turned off.
l. [Set All Tol] --- The [Tol] of all parameters is turned on.
m. [Can All Tol] --- The [Tol] of all parameters is turned off.
n. [Set Tol] --- Set the tolerancing condition.

Displays the [Tolerance Comparison] dialog box.

o. [Set Calc Def] --- Set the calculation condition of each parameter.

Displays the [Parameter Condition Setup] dialog box.

See Also

Changing Analysis Graph Condition of Roughness Analysis

Changes the analysis graph condition of roughness analysis.

How To:

1. Select the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Analysis Graph Condition] command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Analysis Graph Condition] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Analysis Graph] tab of [Evaluation Condition] dialog box.

The [Analysis Graph] Tab of [Evaluation Condition] Dialog Box:

a. Graph Type --- Select the graph that you want to calculate.
b. [Chg Eval Sec] --- Changes the evaluation section. (Case of multiple evaluation section)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 7 of 267

c. [Common] --- Sets the same condition for all evaluation section.

Notice:

By the kind of profile, the same condition might not be able to be set.

d. [Set All] --- Selects all graphs.

e. [Can All] Sets all graphs to non-selection.
f. [Set Calc Def] --- Set the calculation condition of each graph.

See Also

Changing Calculation Method of Roughness Analysis

Changes the calculation method of roughness analysis.

Tip:

Usually, the roughness parameter is calculated in accordance with the definition of the standard.

However, allows you to calculate by using non-standard condition or the original condition.

How To:

1. Click [Roughness Calculation Method] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Calculation Method Setup] dialog box.

[Calculation Method Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [OK] --- Sets the same condition to all roughness analysis commands and calculates all commands again.
b. [Mean Line Compensation Range] --- Select the range of Mean Line Compensation used by calculating the filter and the parameter.

Please refer to [About Mean Line Compensation Range] below.

[Include Pre/Post-Travel] --- Compensates all data including Pre-Travel and Post-Travel.

[Don't include Pre/Post-Travel] --- Compensates the evaluation range not including Pre-Travel and Post-Travel.

c. [Auto Pre-Travel/Post-Travel] --- Select whether to generate Pre/Post-Travel in the filter processing automatically.

Generates the shortfall points by using the peripheral data, when Pre-Travel and Post-Travel are shorter than Cutoff Length.

[Generate automatically] --- Generates Pre/Post-Travel automatically.

[Don't generate automatically] --- Not generates Pre/Post-Travel automatically.

d. [All Section Tolerance Method] --- Select the tolerance range of 16% rule or Max rule in the result of all section.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 8 of 267

[By the result of each section] --- Calculates tolerance by using the parameter result of all evaluation section.

[By the result of each Sampling Length] --- Calculates tolerance by using the parameter result of each Sampling Length of all evaluation section.

e. [Process of measurement point shortfall] --- Allows you to generate the evaluation profile adding invalid data that corresponds to the shortfall(ex. No
Pre/Post-Travel Measurement).

[Calculate without change] --- Adds invalid data that corresponds to the shortfall.

[Calculate without change] --- Calculates without adding invalid data.

When you select this, the calculation error might occur.

About Mean Line Compensation Range:

The Mean Line Compensation defines the mean line in the profile after the filter.

This is different from Trend Compensation.

The following differences exist in the case of the evaluation range and the case of all data.

1. Example of calculation of mean line for the evaluation range(L:Mean Line, W: Evaluation Range)

2. Example of calculation of mean line for all data including Pre/Post-Travel(L:Mean Line, W: Evaluation Range)

See Also

Changing Calculation Condition of Roughness Parameter

Changes the calculation condition of roughness parameter.

How To:

1. Select the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Parameter Condition] command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Parameter Condition] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Parameter] tab of [Evaluation Condition] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 9 of 267

3. Click [Set Calc Def] button.

Displays the [Parameter Condition Setup] dialog box.

4. Click the tab that you want to set.
i. [Rc,Rci,Rcmax] Tab (OLDMIX)
ii. [Rz,Rzi] Tab (OLDMIX)

[Rz] Tab (JIS1982,JIS1994)

[RzJIS] Tab (JIS2001)

iii. [R3z,R3zi,R3y] Tab (OLDMIX)
iv. [Sm,Smi,Smmax,Pc,Pci,Pcmax] Tab (OLDMIX)

[RSm,RPc,RPc(1/cm),RPc(1/E)] Tab (ANSI)

[Sm,Pc,Pc(1/cm),Pc(1/E)] Tab (JIS1994)

v. [Rc,RSm] Tab (ISO1997,JIS2001,VDA)
vi. [HSC(1/cm),HSC(1/E)] Tab (OLDMIX)
vii. [plateau] Tab (OLDMIX)
viii. [mr] Tab (OLDMIX,JIS1994)

[tp] Tab (ANSI)

[Rmr(c)] Tab (ISO1997,JIS2001,VDA)

ix. [mrd] Tab (OLDMIX)

[Rmr] Tab (ISO1997,JIS2001,VDA)

x. [dc] Tab (OLDMIX)

[Htp] Tab (ANSI)

[Rdc] Tab (ISO1997,JIS2001,VDA)

xi. [Vo(um3/um2),Vo(mm3/cm2)] Tab (OLDMIX)
xii. [mrb] Tab (OLDMIX)
xiii. [PcU(1/cm),PcL(1/cm)] Tab (OLDMIX)
xiv. [PPI] Tab(OLDMIX)
xv. [Integrate Motif] Tab

Example of [Rc,Rci,Rcmax] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

a. [Ry * 10% or More] --- Calculates including Peak/Valley of less than 10%.

Example of [Rz,Rzi] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

Example of [Rz] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(JIS1982,JIS1994)

Example of [RzJIS] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(JIS2001)

The following figure is the example of [Rz,Rzi](OLDMIX).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 10 of 267

a. [Ry * 10% or More] --- Calculates including Peak/Valley of less than 10%.
b. [Doesn't calculate, if peak/valley is less than 5] --- Doesn't calculate, if peak/valley is less than 5.

Example of [R3z,R3zi,R3y] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

a. [Ry * 10% or More] --- Calculates including Peak/Valley of less than 10%.

Example of [Sm,Smi,Smmax,Pc,Pci,Pcmax] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

Example of [PPI] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

Example of [RSm,RPc,RPc(1/cm),RPc(1/E)] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(ANSI)

Example of [Sm,Pc,Pc(1/cm),Pc(1/E)] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(JIS1994)

The following figure is the example of [Sm,Smi,Smmax,Pc,Pci,Pcmax](OLDMIX).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 11 of 267

a. [Count level] --- Input the level in order to decide the Peak/Valley of Peak Count. If [Upper / lower evenness] is checked, the upper level and the lower level
are equal. If it is unchecked, specify the upper(+) level and the lower(-) level individually.
b. [Upper/lower evenness] --- The upper level and the lower level are equal.
c. [Length] --- Specify the count level by length from the mean line.
d. [Ry by Percentage Value] --- Specify the count level by percentage(0-50) of Ry value from the mean line.

Example of [Rc,RSm] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(ISO1997,JIS2001,VDA)

The following figure is the example of [Rc,RSm](JIS2001).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 12 of 267

a. [Definition of minimum height of profile element] --- Specify the level in order to decide Peak/Valley of Peak Count by percentage(0-50) of Rz value.
b. [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] --- Restricts height of peak and depth of valley by [Definition of minimum height of profile element].
c. [Upper and lower evenness] --- The upper level and the lower level are equal. If it is unchecked, specify the upper(+) level and the lower(-) level
individually.
d. [Definition of width of profile element] --- Sets the definition of minimum width of profile element to 1% or more of Sampling Length.

Example of [HSC(1/cm),HSC(1/E)] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 13 of 267

a. [Count level] --- Input the level in order to decide the Peak/Valley of Peak Count.
b. [Length] --- Specify the count level by length from the mean line.
c. [Ry by Percentage Value] --- Specify the count level by percentage(0-50) of Ry value from the mean line.
d. [More than 1% of reference length] --- The distance between the adjacent convexities must be more than 1% of the reference length.
e. [Base Reference] --- Specify the count level by length from the mean line.

Input the positive number for the plus side from the mean line and input the negative value for the minus side from the mean line.

Or, input the length or the percentage of Ry value according to [Method].

f. [Peak Reference] --- Specify the count level by depth from the highest point of the measurement profile.

Input the arbitrary depth or the percentage of Ry value according to [Method].

g. [Rt by Percentage Value] --- Specify the count level by percentage(0-50) of Rt value from the mean line.
h. [More than 1% of evaluation length] --- The distance between the adjacent convexities must be more than 1% of the evaluation length.

Example of [plateau] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

a. [plateau0-9] --- Allows you to calculate 10 plateaus.

b. [Reference Line] --- Specify the value of Reference Line by percentage.
c. [Slice Line] --- Specify the value of Slice Line by percentage.
d. [Set All] --- Selects all parameters.
e. [Can All] --- Sets all parameters to non-selection.

Example of [mr] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX,JIS1994)

Example of [tp] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(ANSI)

Example of [Rmr(c)] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(ISO1997,JIS2001,VDA)

The following figure is the example of [mr](OLDMIX).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 14 of 267

a. [Slice Level] --- Input the level of Slice Line.

Calculates the length of the base in the part that exceeded this level by using Slice Line.
b. [Length] --- Specify the slice level by length from the mean line.
c. [Rt by Percentage Value] --- Specify the slice level by percentage(0-50) of Rt value from the mean line.
d. [Base Reference] --- Specify the slice level by length from the mean line.

Input the positive number for the plus side from the mean line and input the negative value for the minus side from the mean line.

Or, input the length or the percentage of Rt value according to [Method].

e. [Peak Reference] --- Specify the slice level by depth from the highest point of the measurement profile.

Input the arbitrary depth or the percentage of Rt value according to [Method].

f. [Bottom Reference] --- Specify the slice level by depth from the lowest point of the measurement profile.

Input the arbitrary depth or the percentage of Rt value according to [Method].

Example of [mrd] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

Example of [Rmr] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(ISO1997,JIS2001,VDA)

The following figure is the example of [mrd](OLDMIX).

a. [Reference Line - mr value] --- Input the level of Reference Line.

b. [Slice Line Spacing] --- Input the spacing in order to calculate mr value.(even intervals)
c. [Slice Line] --- Select and Input the value of slice line in order to calculate mr value.(arbitrary length)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 15 of 267

Example of [dc] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

Example of [Htp] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(ANSI)

Example of [Rdc] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(ISO1997,JIS2001,VDA)

The following figure is the example of [dc](OLDMIX).

a. [Reference Line - mr value] --- Input the level of Reference Line.

b. [Slice line - mr value] --- Input the slice level for Reference Line.

Example of [Vo(um3/um2),Vo(mm3/cm2)] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

a. [Reference Line - mr value] --- Input the level of Reference Line.

b. [Depth(Reference - Slice)] --- Input the slice level for Reference Line.

Example of [mrb] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 16 of 267

a. [Reference Line - mr value] --- Input the level of Reference Line.

b. [Depth(Reference - Slice)] --- Input the slice level for Reference Line.

Example of [PcU(1/cm),PcL(1/cm)] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:(OLDMIX)

a. [Count level] --- Input the level in order to decide the Peak/Valley of Peak Count.
b. [Length] --- Specify the count level by length from the mean line.
c. [Rt by Percentage Value] --- Specify the count level by percentage(0-50) of Rt value from the mean line.
d. [More than 1% of reference length] --- The distance between the adjacent convexities must be more than 1% of the reference length.
e. [Base Reference] --- Specify the count level by length from the mean line.

Input the positive number for the plus side from the mean line and input the negative value for the minus side from the mean line.

Or, input the length or the percentage of Rt value according to [Method].

f. [Peak Reference] --- Specify the count level by depth from the highest point of the measurement profile.

Input the arbitrary depth or the percentage of Rt value according to [Method].

g. [Bottom Reference] --- Specify the count level by depth from the lowest point of the measurement profile.

Input the arbitrary depth or the percentage of Rt value according to [Method].

h. [mr Reference] --- Specify the reference level by mr value.

Input the positive number for the plus side from the mean line and input the negative value for the minus side from the mean line.

Input the arbitrary depth or the percentage of Rt value according to [Method].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 17 of 267

i. [mr value] --- Input the level of Reference Line.

Example of [Integrate Motif] Tab of [Parameter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Conform] --- Conforms to ISO12085 Annex-A.

b. [Doesn't conform] --- Doesn't conform to ISO12085 Annex-A.

See Also

Changing Tolerance Comparison Condition of Roughness Parameter

Changes the tolerance comparison condition of roughness parameter

The tolerance comparison condition is different according to the Tolerance Rule(Excluding Standard Deviation Rule/Standard Deviation Rule).

How To:

1. Select the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Parameter Condition] command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Parameter Condition] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Parameter] tab of [Evaluation Condition] dialog box.

3. To execute the tolerance comparison, select [Calc](Left) and [Tol](Right) of the parameter.
4. Click [Set Tol] button.

Displays the [Tolerance Comparison] dialog box(Excluding Standard Deviation Rule/Standard Deviation Rule).

Example of [Tolerance Comparison] Dialog Box(Excluding Standard Deviation Rule):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 18 of 267

a. [Parameter] --- Select the parameter that sets the tolerance comparison condition.
b. [Method] --- Click [Upper/Lower] or [Design/Tolerance] displayed in [Method] of [Parameter] and select the tolerance method.

When you click the display item of [Method], the [Upper/Lower] and [Design/Tolerance] change alternately.

[Upper/Lower] --- Set the upper value and the lower value by the absolute value.

[Design/Tolerance] --- Set the tolerance by the relative value from the design value.

Tip: Allows you to execute the tolerance comparison only of the upper bound or the lower bound according to the setting status of [Upper]/[Lower].

c. [Lower] --- Set the check box and input the value of [Lower Limit]/[Lower Tolerance].

[Lower Limit] --- Input the Lower Limit by the absolute value. (Case of [Upper/Lower])

[Lower Tolerance] --- Input the lower tolerance value. (Case of [Design/Tolerance])

d. [Upper] --- Set the check box and input the value of [Upper Limit]/[Upper Tolerance].

[Upper Limit] --- Input the Upper Limit by the absolute value. (Case of [Upper/Lower])

[Upper Tolerance] --- Input the upper tolerance value. (Case of [Design/Tolerance])

e. [Design Value] --- Input the design value of the tolerance value. (Case of [Design/Tolerance])
f. [Tolerance Rule] --- Select the tolerance comparison rule of the selected parameter.
i. [16% Rule] --- Executes the tolerance comparison by 16% Rule.

Executes the tolerance comparison by each Sampling Length. And when the ratio of NG exceeds 16%, the judgment is NG.
ii. [Standard Deviation Rule] --- Executes the tolerance comparison by the Standard Deviation Rule.

Calculates the average value(μ) and standard deviation(σ) of parameter result of each Sampling Length.

The [Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit] is compared with [μ+nσ(μ-nσ)](n=1,2,3) and OK/NG is judged.

This rule is equal to 16% rule of ISO4288 in the purpose and the effect. The result is almost corresponding if there are a lot of numbers of Sampling
Length.

Please refer to example of [Tolerance Comparison] Dialog Box(Standard Deviation Rule).

iii. [Max Rule] --- Executes the tolerance comparison by Max Rule.

Executes the tolerance comparison by each Sampling Length. And when as much as one Sampling Length of NG exists, NG is judged.
iv. [Average Rule] --- Executes the tolerance comparison by Average Rule.

The [Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit] is compared with the parameter result and OK/NG is judged.
v. [Failure Rate Specification Rule] --- Executes the tolerance comparison by Failure Rate Specification Rule.

Allows you to set the arbitrary failing rate in 16% Rule.

[Lower Limit Failure Rate] --- Input the failure rate of Lower Limit. (Case of Failure Rate Specification Rule)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 19 of 267

[Upper Limit Failure Rate] --- Input the failure rate of Upper Limit. (Case of Failure Rate Specification Rule)

g. [Display the Detail of Tolerance Result] --- Displays the detail result of tolerance comparison in parameter result.

You can set directly to parameter result list.

h. [Set to All Parameter] --- Sets the tolerance comparison rule to all parameters.

Notice:

A few parameter might not be able to be set.

Example of [Tolerance Comparison] Dialog Box(Standard Deviation Rule):

a. [Lower Value] --- Specify the coefficient [n] of Standard Deviation due to comparison of the Lower Limit.
b. [Upper Value] --- Specify the coefficient [n] of Standard Deviation due to comparison of the Upper Limit.
c. [Standard Deviation] --- Select the calculation formula due to calculation of standard deviation.

See Also

Changing Analysis Graph Calculation Condition of Roughness Analysis

Changes the analysis graph calculation condition.

How To:

1. Select the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Analysis Graph Condition] command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Analysis Graph Condition] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Analysis Graph] tab of [Evaluation Condition] dialog box.

3. Click [Set Calc Def] button.

Displays the [Analysis Graph Condition Setup] dialog box.

4. Click the tab that you want to set.
i. [ADC,BAC,ADCBAC] Tab
ii. [Power Spectrum] Tab
iii. [Auto-Correlation] Tab
iv. [Walsh Power Spectrum] Tab
v. [Local Peak Distribution] Tab
vi. [Slope Distribution] Tab

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 20 of 267

vii. [Parameter Distribution] Tab

Example of [ADC,BAC,ADCBAC] Tab of [Analysis Graph Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Depth] --- Displays the vertical axis by depth from the highest point of the measurement profile.
b. [Depth Rate] --- Displays the vertical axis by percentage of Rt value and depth from the highest point of the measurement profile.
c. [Distribution Length] --- Displays the horizontal axis by Amplitude Distribution Length.
d. [Distribution Rate] --- Displays the horizontal axis by percentage of evaluation length and amplitude distribution length.
e. [Load Length] --- Displays the horizontal axis by Load Length.
f. [mr Value] --- Displays the horizontal axis by percentage of evaluation length and Load Length.
g. [Load Length and Distribution Length] --- Displays the horizontal axis of ADC graph by Amplitude Distribution Length. Displays the horizontal axis of
BAC graph by Load Length.
h. [mr and Distribution Rate] --- Displays the horizontal axis of ADC graph by percentage of evaluation length and Amplitude Distribution Length.

Or, Displays the horizontal axis of BAC graph by percentage of evaluation length and Load Length.

Example of [Power Spectrum] Tab of [Analysis Graph Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Window Function Type] --- Select the Window Function.

b. [Amplitude^2/2] --- Displays the vertical axis by power value.
c. [%] --- Displays the vertical axis by percentage of power value.
d. [dB] --- Displays the vertical axis by 10Log10(power value/Max power value). (Max power value is 0dB. )
e. [Amplitude] --- Displays the vertical axis by amplitude of power value(corresponding amplitude of sin wave or cos wave).
f. [Frequency] --- Displays the horizontal axis by number of wave per unit length(corresponding reciprocal number of wavelength).
g. [Wavelength] --- Displays the horizontal axis by length per cycle.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 21 of 267

Example of [Auto-Correlation] Tab of [Analysis Graph Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Window Function Type] --- Select the Window Function.

Example of [Walsh Power Spectrum] Tab of [Analysis Graph Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Amplitude^2/2] --- Displays the vertical axis by power value.

b. [%] --- Displays the vertical axis by percentage of power value.
c. [dB] --- Displays the vertical axis by 10Log10(power value/Max power value). (Max power value is 0dB. )
d. [Amplitude] --- Displays the vertical axis by amplitude of power value(corresponding amplitude of sin wave or cos wave).
e. [Sequency] --- Displays the horizontal axis by number of wave per unit length(corresponding reciprocal number of wavelength).
f. [Wavelength] --- Displays the horizontal axis by length per cycle.

Example of [Local Peak Distribution] Tab of [Analysis Graph Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 22 of 267

a. [Depth] --- Displays the vertical axis by depth from the highest point of the measurement profile.
b. [Depth Rate] --- Displays the vertical axis by percentage of Rt value and depth from the highest point of the measurement profile.

Example of [Slope Distribution] Tab of [Analysis Graph Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Sampling Points] --- Input the distance due to calculation of inclination angle.

Example of [Parameter Distribution] Tab of [Analysis Graph Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 23 of 267

a. [Parameter] --- Select the calculated parameter.

b. [Evaluating Span] --- Input the processing unit length.
c. [Shift Length] --- Input the shift length.

The [Evaluating Span] shifts [Shift length] and calculates the parameter and repeats.

See Also

Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis

Sets the evaluation section of roughness analysis.

By using Evaluation Section Setup, you can add the evaluation section to the arbitrary position on the measurement profile.

And you can delete the unnecessary evaluation section.

How To:

1. Click [Evaluation Section] command in [Roughness Profile] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Evaluation Section] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Evaluation Section Setup] dialog box.

2. Add the evaluation section.
i. Set the condition of [New Sect Cond] Group.
ii. Set the position of evaluation section.
l By Mouse --- Move the mouse cursor on the curve and click arbitrary position.
l Specify Position --- Set the start position to [Start] and click [X:Value] button.
3. Allows you to delete the evaluation section.
l Select the deleted evaluation section from the list.
l Click [Delete] button.
l To delete all evaluation sections, click [Delete All] button.

Example of [Evaluation Section Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 24 of 267

a. [Measurement Profile] --- Displays the measurement profile except Pre/Post-Travel.

Displays the setting evaluation section by hatching.

b. [List] --- Displays the list of condition of evaluation section.
c. [By Mouse] --- Allows you to zoom in/out.

[Zoom-In] --- Enlarges and displays the specified rectangular area on the window to the whole window.

[Zoom-Out] --- Reduces and displays the displayed area on the window to the specified rectangular area on the window.

[Overall Display] --- Displays all the measurement points.

[X:Free Width] --- Changes from zoom operation to the addition mode of evaluation section.

d. [Specify Position] --- Specify the start position.

[Start] --- Input the start position of addition section by the coordinate of measurement data.

[X:Value] --- Adds the section to the specified start position.

e. [New Sect Cond] --- Set the condition of addition evaluation section.

[Kind of Profile] --- Select the kind of profile.

[Le] --- Specify the Sampling Length( Le) of evaluation section.

[Nle] --- Input the number(nLe ) of Sampling Length of evaluation section.

f. [Delete] --- Deletes the selected evaluation section of the list.

And you can delete the selected section by [DELETE] key.

g. [Delete All] --- Deletes all evaluation sections.

See Also

Executing Compensation of Roughness Analysis

Executes the compensation of roughness analysis.

How To:

1. Click [Data Compensation] command in [Roughness Profile] menu of [Edit] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 25 of 267

Or, click [Data Compensation] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Data Compensation Setup] dialog box.

2. Set the compensation condition.
l Select the compensation method and [Applying Range].
l When you selected [R Curve], input [Rad](Radius).
l When you selected [Polynominal] , select [No].
3. When you selected [Free Range] of [Applying Range], specify the applying range by the following method.
l By Mouse --- Click the start position of the profile, and drag the mouse to the end position.
l Specify Position --- Set the start position and the end position to [Specify Position], click [X:Value] button.
4. Click [Try] button.

Displays the compensation profile and compensation result.

5. Allows you to delete the Applying Range.
l Select the Applying Range from the list.
l Click [Delete] button.
l Click [Delete All] button to delete the Applying Range.

Example of [Data Compensation Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Change of Profile] --- Change to the profile that you want to set.
b. [Measurement Profile] --- Displays the measurement profile except Pre/Post-Travel.
c. [Compensation Profile] --- Displays the compensation profile.

When you select the [Off], the compensation profile is the same as the measurement profile.
d. [Applying Range List] --- Displays the coodinate of the Applying Range.
e. [Compensation Result] --- Displays the compensation result.

The result is the coefficient of compensation expression and Applying Error(Root Mean Square).
f. [Compensation Method] --- Select the compensation method.

Please refer to [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Data Compensation] - [Compensation Process] - [The compensation of data] for the detail.
l [R Curve] --- Input the radius to [Rad].

l [Polynominal] --- Select [No].

When you select [Auto], set the best No automatically.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 26 of 267

g. [Applying Range] --- Select the Applying Range.

l [Both Ends] --- Both Ends of measurement profile(Inclination Only)
l [First Half] --- First Half of measurement profile(Inclination Only)
l [Latter Half] --- Latter Half of measurement profile(Inclination Only)
l [All] --- All Data of measurement profile.
l [Free Range] --- Allows you to set the arbitrary range.
h. [By Mouse] --- Allows you to zoom in/out.

[Zoom-In] --- Enlarges and displays the specified rectangular area on the window to the whole window.

[Zoom-Out] --- Reduces and displays the displayed area on the window to the specified rectangular area on the window.

[Overall Display] --- Displays all the measurement points.

[X:Free Width] --- Changes from zoom operation to the addition mode of evaluation section.

i. [Specify Position] --- Specify the start position.

[Start] --- Input the start position of addition section by the coordinate of measurement data.

[End] --- Input the end position of addition section by the coordinate of measurement data.

[X:Value] --- Adds the section to the specified start position.

j. [Try] --- Try the compensation by the setting condition.

Displays the result of compensation to [Compensation Profile] and [Compensation Result].

k. [Delete] --- Deletes the Applying Range selected in Applying Range List.

And you can delete the selected range by [DELETE] key.

l. [Delete All] --- Deletes all Applying Ranges.

See Also

Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis

Allows you to delete the abnormal data to not influence the parameter calculation.

How To:

1. Click [Data Deletion] command in [Roughness Profile] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Data Deletion] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Data Deletion Setup] dialog box.

2. Specify the deleting range.

Specify the deleting range by the following method.

The deleting data is displayed by the different color.

l X Range Deletion By Mouse --- Click [X:Free Width] button and click the start position of profile and drag the mouse to the end position.
l Deletion of Z Level Above By Mouse --- Click [Upper Z Level] button, click the Z position of profile.
l Deletion of Z Level Below By Mouse --- Click [Lower Z Level] button, click the Z position of profile.
l X Range Deletion By the specification of X coordinate --- Input the start position and the end position to [Specify X Position], click [X:Value]
button.
l X Range Deletion By the specification of Z coordinate --- Input the Z position to [Specidy Z Position], click [Upper Z Level] button or [Lower Z
Level] button.
3. Allows you to cancel the deletion range.
l Select the deletion range from the list.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 27 of 267

l Click [Delete] button.

l To delete all ranges, click [Delete All] button.

[Data Deletion Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Evaluation Profile] --- Displays the evaluation profile of the deletion target.
b. [Deletion Range List] --- Displays the list of the deletion range.
c. [by Mouse] --- Zoom In/Out. Specify the deletion range.

[Zoom-In] --- Enlarges and displays the specified rectangular area on the window to the whole window.

[Zoom-Out] --- Reduces and displays the displayed area on the window to the specified rectangular area on the window.

[Overall Display] --- Displays all the measurement points.

[X:Free Width] --- Changes from zoom operation to the deletion mode of X range. (Vertical Cursor)

[Upper Z Level] --- Changes the mode to the deletion mode of Z Level Above. (Horizontal Cursor)

[Lower Z Level] --- Changes the mode to the deletion mode of Z Level Below. (Horizontal Cursor)

d. [Specify X Position] --- Specify the start position and end position of X range by numerical value.

[Start] --- Input the start position by the coordinate value of profile.

[End] --- Input the end position by the coordinate value of profile.

[X:Value] --- Adds the deletion range to the specified position.

e. [Specify Z Position] --- Specify the start position and end position of Z range by numerical value.

[Start] --- Input the Z position by the coordinate value of profile.

[Upper Z Level] --- Sets the above of Z level to the deletion range.

[Lower Z Level] --- Sets the below of Z level to the deletion range.

f. [Delete] --- Deletes the deletion range selected in the list.

And you can delete the selected range by [DELETE] key.

g. [Delete All] --- Deletes all deletion ranges.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 28 of 267

Executing Data Connection of Roughness Analysis

Connects the arbitrary range of profile to generate one measurement profile.

Notice:

When you execute the Data Connection, all evaluation section is deleted.

Because the evaluation section might not be able to be created by shortening of the measurement profile.

Please save the result of measurement before execution of Data Connection.

How To:

1. Click [Data Connection] command in [Roughness Profile] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Data Connection] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Data Connection Setup] dialog box.

2. Set the connection condition.
3. Specify the connecting range.

Specify the connecting range by the following method.

l X Range Specification By Mouse --- Click [X:Free Width] button and click the start position of profile and drag the mouse to the end position.
l X Range Specification By the specification of X coordinate --- Input the start position and the end position to [Specify Position], click [X:Value]
button.
4. Click [Try] button.

Displays the connected profile.

5. Allows you to cancel the connecting range.

l Select the connecting range that you want to delete from the list.
l Click [Delete] button.
l To delete all ranges, click [Delete All] button.

[Data Connection Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Measurement Profile] --- Displays the measurement profile except Pre/Post-Travel.

b. [Connection Profile] --- Displays the connection profile.
c. [Connection Range List] --- Displays the coordinates of connection range.
d. [Method] --- Select the connection method.

[Average] --- Executes the inclination compensation for each connection range and connects.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 29 of 267

[Usual] --- Connects the measurement profile.

e. [By Mouse] --- Allows you to zoom in/out.

[Zoom-In] --- Enlarges and displays the specified rectangular area on the window to the whole window.

[Zoom-Out] --- Reduces and displays the displayed area on the window to the specified rectangular area on the window.

[Overall Display] --- Displays all the measurement points.

[X:Free Width] --- Changes from zoom operation to the addition mode of connection range.

f. [Specify Position] --- Specify the start position and end position of X range by numerical value.

[Start] --- Input the start position of connection range by the coordinate of measurement data.

[End] --- Input the end position of connection section by the coordinate of measurement data.

[X:Value] --- Adds the connection range to the specified position.

g. [Try] --- Try the connection by the setting condition.

Displays the connecting profile to [Connection Profile].

h. [Delete] --- Deletes the range selected in connecting range List.

And you can delete the selected range by [DELETE] key.

i. [Delete All] --- Deletes all connection ranges.

See Also

Changing Result Displaying of Roughness Parameter

Changes the result displaying of roughness parameter.

How To:

1. To change the result displaying of roughness parameter, click [All-sections Result] command in the pop-up menu of the parameter.

In the All-Section-Result-Displaying of roughness parameter*1), the Usual Displaying and All-Section-Result-Displaying*1) change alternately.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, All-Section-Result*1) is displayed.
2. To change the tolerance comparison result displaying of roughness parameter, click [Comparison Result Details] command of the [View] menu.

Or, click [Comparison Result Details] command in the pop-up menu of the parameter.

In the tolerance comparison result displaying of roughness parameter, Detail Displaying and Usual Displaying change alternately.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the detail result of tolerance comparison is displayed.

Example of Detail Displaying(All-Section-Result using the result of each Sampling Length):

In the All-Section-Result, the value of parameter result is not displayed.

To display the value/judgment of parameter result of all Sampling Length, change to the detail displaying.

And the Number of sampling length/Mean Value/Max. Value/Min. Value/Standard Deviation is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 30 of 267

Example of Usual Displaying of Tolerance Comparison Result:

a. [Meas Cont] --- Displays the parameter name and the icon of tolerance comparison result.

b. [Meas Value] --- Displays the value of parameter result.

The error number might be displayed.

To confirm the error message, click the error number.

c. [Judgment] --- Displays the OK/NG and tolerance comparison rule.

i. Case of 16% Rule --- OK(16%) NG(16%)

ii. Case of Max Rule --- OK (max) NG(max)

iii. Case of Specification Rule of Failure Rate --- OK(25-10%) NG(15-10%)

The numerical value in parentheses is the Lower Limit Failure Rate and the Upper Limit Failure Rate.

iv. Case of Standard Deviation --- OK(sd) NG(sd)

v. Case of Compatibility Rule --- OK NG

d. [Result] --- Displays the addition information of tolerance comparison result.

i. Case of 16% Rule --- Displays the number of all Sampling Length and the number of NG.

When the Upper Limit Value or Lower Limit Value is invalid, either value is displayed.

ii. Case of Max. Rule --- Displays the maximum value of result of each Sampling Length.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 31 of 267

iii. Case of Specification Rule of Failure Rate --- Displays the number of all Sampling Length and the number of NG.

The numerical value in parentheses is the Lower Limit Failure Rate and the Upper Limit Failure Rate.

iv. Case of Compatibility Rule --- Displays the difference between parameter result and tolerance value when the judgment is NG.

e. [U Tol][L Tol] --- Displays the tolerance value of [Tolerance Comparison] dialog box.

In the Specification Rule of Failure Rate, the Upper Limit Failure Rate and Upper Limit Failure Rate is displayed.

Example of Detail Displaying of Tolerance Comparison Result:

a. Parameter Value of Each Sampling Length and Tolerance Comparison Result

b. Number of Sampling Length
c. Mean Value/Max. Value/Min. Value/Standard Deviation

*1)

About All-Section-Result:

The All-Section-Result is the result that calculated the parameter result of all evaluation section in the roughness analysis command and compared.

In the tolerance comparison calculation of All-Section-Result, the tolerance comparison condition in the first section is applied to all sections.

In the [Calculation Method Setup] dialog box, select [By the result of each section] or [By the result of each Sampling Length].

Please refer to [Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Calculation Method of Roughness Analysis].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 32 of 267

See Also

Displaying Auxiliary Line of Roughness Parameter

Displays the parameter auxiliary line of roughness analysis command.

How To:

1. Click [Display Auxiliary Line] command of the [View] menu.

Or, click [Display Auxiliary Line] command in the pop-up menu of Figure Window/Analysis Graph Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the auxiliary line is displayed.

2. Click the parameter in the Measurement Reuslt Window.

Displays the auxiliary line of the selected parameter to the Figure Window and Analysis Graph Window.

Example of Auxiliary Line of Ry Parameter

Example of Auxiliary Line of Rz Parameter

Example of Auxiliary Line of Motif Parameter

Example of Auxiliary Line of BAC Graph

3. In the parameter auxiliary line of the tolerance comparison result calculated by 16% Rule/Max. Rule/Specification Rule of Failure Rate, the following
information is displayed.
1. Display of Sampling Length of NG --- When you select the parameter-result, the Sampling Length of NG is displayed filling.

2. Display of Each Sampling Length --- When you select the result of each Sampling Length, the Sampling Length is displayed filling.
3. Display of Max Sampling Length --- When you select the maximum value of the parameter result, the Sampling Length is displayed filling.
4. Display of Min Sampling Length --- When you select the minimum value of the parameter result, the Sampling Length is displayed filling.

Example of Auxiliary Line of Ry Parameter:

a. Mean Line

b. Upper Line

c. Lower Line
d. Separator

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 33 of 267

Example of Auxiliary Line of Rz Parameter:

a. Peak Point
b. Valley Point

Example of Auxiliary Line of Motif Parameter:

a. Envelope Line
b. Motif Depth
c. Motif Length

Example of Auxiliary Line of BAC Graph:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 34 of 267

a. Depth Position
b. Load Length Value

Example of Sampling Length of NG

Example of Display of Each Sampling Length

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 35 of 267

Example of Display of Max Sampling Length

Example of Display of Min Sampling Length

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 36 of 267

Tip:

Please refer to [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Parameter] - [Displayed Additional Figures] or the explanation of each parameter.

See Also

[About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Parameter] - [Displayed Additional Figures]

Reading Value of Profile/Graph of Roughness Analysis

Reads the value of profile/graph of roughness analysis.

How To:

1. Click [Vertical Reading]/[Horizontal Reading] command of the [View] - [Read] menu.

Or, click [Vertical Reading]/[Horizontal Reading] command in the pop-up menu of Figure Window/Analysis Graph Window.

2. Read the value referring to the following operation example.

Example of Horizontal Reading of Profile

Example of Horizontal Reading of Analysis Graph

Example of Horizontal Reading of Profile:

Tip:

The operating method of Vertical Reading is the same as Horizontal Reading though the mouse cursor changes into the horizontal cursor.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 37 of 267

1. Move the mouse cursor to Figure Window.

Changes the mouse cursor into the vertical cursor. Displays the value of the horizontal/vertical position.
2. Move the cursor to reading position.
3. Displays the value of the intersection of the vertical cursor and profile, when you click the left button of the mouse.

Notice:

The value of the horizontal axis of profile that is the nearest the clicked position is displayed.
4. Then, move the mouse cursor and click left button again. Displays the difference between the clicked position and the last position. (Refer to the figure
below)
5. To cancel the reading operation, press the ESC key or execute the other command.

Example of Horizontal Reading of Analysis Graph:

Tip:

The operating method of Vertical Reading is the same as Horizontal Reading though the mouse cursor changes into the horizontal cursor.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 38 of 267

1. Move the mouse cursor to Analysis Graph Window.

Changes the mouse cursor into the vertical cursor.

2. Move the cursor to reading position.

3. Displays the value of the intersection of the vertical cursor and graph, when you click the left button of the mouse.

Notice:

The value of the horizontal axis of graph data that is the nearest the clicked position is displayed.
4. Then, move the mouse cursor and click left button again. Displays the difference between the clicked position and the last position. (Refer to the figure
below)
5. Then, move the mouse cursor and click left button again. Deletes the Reading Result, and displays new Reading Result.
6. To cancel the reading operation, press the ESC key or execute the other command.

See Also

Outputting Parameter Sum Table of Roughness Analysis

Outputs the parameter sum table of roughness analysis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 39 of 267

How To:

1. Select the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Parameter Condition] command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Parameter Condition] command in the pop-up menu of roughness analysis command selected in Part Program Window.

Displays the [Parameter] tab of [Evaluation Condition] dialog box.

3. When you set the parameter condition, turn on [Calc](Left) and [Sheet](Center Right) of the parameter that you want to output to the Parameter
Sum Table.

You can output the calculation results of the parameter by Table Format.

4. You can print the Parameter Sum Table by using the System Layout Printing.

Please refer to [Printing] - [Printing By System Layout Printing] for the detail of System Layout Printing.

5. You can print the Parameter Sum Table by pasting to page layout.

Please refer to [Printing] - [Printing By Page Layout] for the method of pasting to layout.

6. You can paste the Parameter Sum Table to the clipboard.

Please refer to [Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard].

Example of Outputting of Parameter Sum Table:

a. Outputting the parameter result of all evaluation section in the roughness analysis command.
b. Outputtting the parameter result selected in the parameter condition.
c. Outputting the average value of the parameter.

See Also

[Printing] - [Printing By System Layout Printing]

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

Outputting Data of Roughness Analysis Graph

Outputting Data of Roughness Analysis Graph.

How To:

1. Select the tab of graph kind to output data.

2. Click [Output Data] command in in the pop-up menu of Analysis Graph Window.

3. Displays the [Save As] dialog box. Enter the appropriate file name and save to the file.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 40 of 267

Measurement Length/Evaluation Length/Sampling Length

The relation of Measurement Length/Evaluation Length/Sampling Length is shown below.

Measurement Start Position(St): "St" is Measurement Start Position.

Measurement End Position(End): "End" is Measurement End Position.

Sampling Length(Le): "Le" is Sampling Length.

Number of Sampling Lengths(nLe): "nLe" is number of sampling lengths.

Evaluation Length(Lm): "Lm" is sampling lengths of n piece consecutive.

Number of Evaluation Section(nLm): "nLm" is number of Evaluation Length.

Pre-Travel(Lst): "Lst" is Pre-Travel Length of Evaluation Length.

Post-Travel(Lro): "Lro" is Post-Travel Length of Evaluation Length.

Measurement Length(L): "L" is Lm+Lst+Lro.

Evaluation length(Lm)/Measurement length (L)/Number of Points(N)are calculated by the following expressions each.

a. Lm = Le * nLe
b. L = Lm * nLm + Lst + Lro
c. N = L / pitch

The pitch is Measurement Pitch.

See Also

Assessed profile
Description of the written contents about an assessed profile

Standard : It is the standard name set up on [Set standard] dialog box.

Assessed profile : It is the profile name used by the standards etc.
Identification : It is the identification character used by this software.
Description : It is description of a assessed profile.
Cutoff setup : It is a required cutoff setup.
Mean line : It is a base line. For more information, refer to [Mean Line (Base
Line)].

See also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting 2D Roughness Measurement Condition]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 41 of 267

Primary profile : P
Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Primary profile
Identification P
A profile that results from the intersection of a measurement
surface by a plane normal to the mean plane. However, it
Description generally represents an primary profile that is obtained
directly by the detector of the Surface Roughness Measuring
Machine tracing over the work piece surface.
Cutoff setup Nothing
Mean line P mode

See also

Primary profile : PLS

Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Primary profile( s)
Identification PLS
For evaluating the work piece surface with an appropriate
parameter, it is efficient to provide a limit on shorter
Description wavelengths with the use of a cutoff filter s so that
unnecessary minute wavelength components can be removed
from the profile.
Cutoff setup s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Mean line P mode

See also

Roughness profile : R
Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Roughness profile
Identification R
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed
its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness
Description
components") through filtering. Filters used for this purpose
are called high-pass filters.
Cutoff setup c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line R mode (NO mode when the setup of a mean line is OFF.)

See also

Roughness profile : RLS

Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Roughness profile( s)
Identification RLS

A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed

its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 42 of 267

components"). Uses a cutoff filter s for removing

Description unnecessary minute wavelength components, and also sets a
limit on shorter wavelengths.
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line R mode (NO mode when the setup of a mean line is OFF.)

See also

Filtered waviness profile : WC

Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Filtered waviness profile
Identification WC
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has shorter
wavelength components (called "roughness components")
Description
removed through filtering. Filters used for this purpose are
called low-pass filters.
Cutoff setup fh: Remove the roughness components.
Mean line P mode

See also

Filtered center line waviness profile : WCA

Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Filtered center line waviness profile
Identification WCA
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has its shorter
wavelength (called "roughness components") and longer
wavelength components (called "waviness components")
Description removed through filtering, leaving the mid-band components
for evaluation. Filters used for this purpose are called band-
pass filters, and combine a low-pass filter and a high-pass
filter.
fh: Remove the roughness components.
Cutoff setup
fl: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line R mode (NO mode when the setup of a mean line is OFF.)

See also

Rolling circle waviness profile : WE

Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Rolling circle waviness profile
Identification WE
A locus (curve) *1made by the center of a circle with a given
Description radius that is traced by rolling over the work piece surface.
This circle is called the rolling circle.
Cutoff setup r: Remove the roughness components.
Mean line P mode

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 43 of 267

*1 In actual measurements a stylus for rolling circle waviness (with a spherical stylus tip) can be used in place of the rolling circle for tracing, or the locus
(curve) of the center line of the circle will be obtained through calculation with the primary profile data and the radius of the rolling circle.

See also

Rolling circle center line waviness profile : WEA

Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Rolling circle center line waviness profile
Identification WEA
A profile resulting from a rolling circle waviness profile that
Description has its longer wavelength components (called "waviness
components") removed through filtering.
r: Remove the roughness components.
Cutoff setup
fl: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line R mode (NO mode when the setup of a mean line is OFF.)

See also

Envelope residual profile : E

Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile Envelope residual profile
Identification E
A profile made by the residual (deviation) of a calculated
Description
rolling circle waviness profile from the primary profile.
Cutoff setup r : Remove the waviness components.
Mean line R mode (NO mode when the setup of a mean line is OFF.)

a: Rolling circle, b: Locus of the rolling circle, c: Envelope residual profile

Envelope residual profile

See also

DIN4776 profile : DF
Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile DIN4776 profile
Identification DF
If a work piece surface has significantly deep valleys

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 44 of 267

randomly dispersed through a relatively shallow undulation,

it is not easy to determine the appropriate position of the
mean line for evaluating the surface texture of the work piece
Description
because of the effects of such deep valleys. This DIN
standard will provide a means to eliminate this effect to some
extent.
Cutoff setup fl: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line R mode

<1> Obtain the primary mean line from the measured data.

Primary mean line

<2> Remove the valleys below the primary mean line.

Removing the deep valleys

<3> Obtain the secondary mean line using the data of <2>.

Secondary mean line

<4> Compensate for the original measured data by referring to the secondary mean line.

Measured data compensation

See also

SEP1941 profile : WSEP

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 45 of 267

Standard OLDMIX
Assessed profile SEP1941 profile
Identification WSEP
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has its shorter
wavelength (called "roughness components") and longer
wavelength components (called "waviness components")
Description removed through filtering, leaving the mid-band components
for evaluation. Filters used for this purpose are called band-
pass filters, and combine a low-pass filter and a high-pass
filter. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.

Cutoff setup c: Remove the roughness components.

f: Remove the waviness components.

Mean line A mode

See also

Roughness profile(JIS1994) : R_JIS

Standard JIS1994
Assessed profile Roughness profile(JIS1994)
Identification R_JIS
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed
its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness
Description
components") through filtering. Filters used for this purpose
are called high-pass filters. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
Cutoff setup c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

Roughness profile(JIS1994) : RLS_JIS

Standard JIS1994
Assessed profile Roughness profile( s)
Identification RLS_JIS
For evaluating the work piece surface with an appropriate
parameter, it is efficient to provide a limit on shorter
Description wavelengths with the use of a cutoff filter s so that
unnecessary minute wavelength components can be removed
from the profile. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

Primary profile(ISO1997) : P_ISO

Standard ISO1997

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 46 of 267

Assessed profile Primary profile

Identification P_ISO
For evaluating the work piece surface with an appropriate
parameter, it is efficient to provide a limit on shorter
Description wavelengths with the use of a cutoff filter s so that
unnecessary minute wavelength components can be removed
from the profile. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
Cutoff setup s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Mean line P mode

See also

Roughness profile : R_ISO

Standard ISO1997
Assessed profile Roughness profile
Identification R_ISO
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed
its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness
Description components"). Uses a cutoff filter s for removing
unnecessary minute wavelength components, and also sets a
limit on shorter wavelengths.
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

Waviness profile : W_ISO

Standard ISO1997
Assessed profile Waviness profile
Identification W_ISO
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has its shorter
wavelength (called "roughness components") and longer
wavelength components (called "waviness components")
Description removed through filtering, leaving the mid-band components
for evaluation. Filters used for this purpose are called band-
pass filters, and combine a low-pass filter and a high-pass
filter. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
c: Remove the roughness components.
Cutoff setup
f: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

ISO13565 profile : DF_ISO

Standard ISO1997
Assessed profile ISO13565 profile
Identification DF_ISO

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 47 of 267

If a work piece surface has significantly deep valleys

randomly dispersed through a relatively shallow undulation,
it is not easy to determine the appropriate position of the
Description mean line for evaluating the surface texture of the work piece
because of the effects of such deep valleys. This DIN
standard will provide a means to eliminate this effect to some
extent. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths. (It is used for
obtaining the primary profile.)
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

<1> Obtain the primary profile from the measured data. Obtain the primary mean line from the primary profile.

Primary mean line

<2> Remove the valleys below the primary mean line.

Removing the deep valleys

<3> Obtain the secondary mean line using the data of <2>

Secondary mean line

<4> Compensate for the original measured data by referring to the secondary mean line.

Measured data compensation

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 48 of 267

Roughness profile : R_ANSI

Standard ANSI
Assessed profile Roughness profile
Identification R_ANSI
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed
its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness
Description components"). Uses a cutoff filter s for removing
unnecessary minute wavelength components, and also sets a
limit on shorter wavelengths.
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

Waviness profile : W_ANSI

Standard ANSI
Assessed profile Waviness profile
Identification W_ANSI
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has its shorter
wavelength (called "roughness components") and longer
wavelength components (called "waviness components")
Description removed through filtering, leaving the mid-band components
for evaluation. Filters used for this purpose are called band-
pass filters, and combine a low-pass filter and a high-pass
filter. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
sw: Remove the roughness components.
Cutoff setup
cw: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

Primary profile(JIS1982) : P_OLDJIS

Standard JIS1982
Assessed profile Primary profile(JIS1982)
Identification P_OLDJIS
A profile that results from the intersection of a measurement
surface by a plane normal to the mean plane. However, it
Description generally represents an primary profile that is obtained
directly by the detector of the Surface Roughness Measuring
Machine tracing over the work piece surface.
Cutoff setup Nothing
Mean line P mode

See also

Roughness profile(JIS1982) : R_OLDJIS

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 49 of 267

Standard JIS1982
Assessed profile Roughness profile(JIS1982)
Identification R_OLDJIS
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed
its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness
Description
components") through filtering. Filters used for this purpose
are called high-pass filters.
Cutoff setup c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line R mode (NO mode when the setup of a mean line is OFF.)

See also

Primary profile : P_J01

Standard JIS2001
Assessed profile Primary profile
Identification P_J01
For evaluating the work piece surface with an appropriate
parameter, it is efficient to provide a limit on shorter
Description wavelengths with the use of a cutoff filter s so that
unnecessary minute wavelength components can be removed
from the profile. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
Cutoff setup s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Mean line P mode

See also

Roughness profile : R_J01

Standard JIS2001
Assessed profile Roughness profile
Identification R_J01
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed
its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness
Description components"). Uses a cutoff filter s for removing
unnecessary minute wavelength components, and also sets a
limit on shorter wavelengths.
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

Waviness profile : W_J01

Standard JIS2001
Assessed profile Waviness profile
Identification W_J01
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has its shorter
wavelength (called "roughness components") and longer
Description
wavelength components (called "waviness components")
removed through filtering, leaving the mid-band components

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 50 of 267

for evaluation. Filters used for this purpose are called band-
pass filters, and combine a low-pass filter and a high-pass
filter. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
c: Remove the roughness components.
Cutoff setup
f: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

ISO13565 profile : DF_J01

Standard JIS2001
Assessed profile ISO13565 profile
Identification DF_J01
If a work piece surface has significantly deep valleys
randomly dispersed through a relatively shallow undulation,
it is not easy to determine the appropriate position of the
Description mean line for evaluating the surface texture of the work piece
because of the effects of such deep valleys. This DIN
standard will provide a means to eliminate this effect to some
extent. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths. (It is used for
obtaining the primary profile.)
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

<1> Obtain the primary profile from the measured data. Obtain the primary mean line from the primary profile.

Primary mean line

<2> Remove the valleys below the primary mean line.

Removing the deep valleys

<3> Obtain the secondary mean line using the data of <2>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 51 of 267

Secondary mean line

<4> Compensate for the original measured data by referring to the secondary mean line.

Measured data compensation

See also

Primary profile : P_VDA

Standard VDA
Assessed profile Primary profile
Identification P_VDA
A profile that results from the intersection of a measurement
surface by a plane normal to the mean plane. However, it
Description generally represents an primary profile that is obtained
directly by the detector of the Surface Roughness Measuring
Machine tracing over the work piece surface.
Cutoff setup -
Mean line P mode

See also

Primary profile : PLS_VDA

Standard VDA
Assessed profile Primary profile
Identification PLS_VDA
For evaluating the work piece surface with an appropriate
parameter, it is efficient to provide a limit on shorter
Description wavelengths with the use of a cutoff filter s so that
unnecessary minute wavelength components can be removed
from the profile. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
Cutoff setup s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Mean line P mode

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 52 of 267

Roughness profile : R_VDA

Standard VDA
Assessed profile Roughness profile
Identification R_VDA
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed
its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness
Description components"). Uses a cutoff filter s for removing
unnecessary minute wavelength components, and also sets a
limit on shorter wavelengths.
Cutoff setup c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See also

Roughness profile : RLS_VDA

Standard VDA
Assessed profile Roughness profile( s)
Identification RLS_VDA
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has removed
its components with longer wavelengths (called "waviness
components"). It is efficient to provide a limit on shorter
Description
wavelengths with the use of a cutoff filter s so that
unnecessary minute wavelength components can be removed
from the profile.
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

See Also

Waviness profile : W_VDA

Standard VDA
Assessed profile Waviness profile
Identification W_VDA
A profile resulting from a primary profile that has its shorter
wavelength (called "roughness components") and longer
wavelength components (called "waviness components")
Description removed through filtering, leaving the mid-band components
for evaluation. Filters used for this purpose are called band-
pass filters, and combine a low-pass filter and a high-pass
filter. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
c: Remove the roughness components.
Cutoff setup
f: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 53 of 267

See also

ISO13565 profile : DF_VDA

Standard VDA
Assessed profile ISO13565 profile
Identification DF_VDA
If a work piece surface has significantly deep valleys
randomly dispersed through a relatively shallow undulation,
it is not easy to determine the appropriate position of the
Description mean line for evaluating the surface texture of the work piece
because of the effects of such deep valleys. This DIN
standard will provide a means to eliminate this effect to some
extent. (Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths. (It is used for
obtaining the primary profile.)
Cutoff setup
c: Remove the waviness components.
Mean line NO mode

<1> Obtain the primary profile from the measured data. Obtain the primary mean line from the primary profile.

Primary mean line

<2> Remove the valleys below the primary mean line.

Removing the deep valleys

<3> Obtain the secondary mean line using the data of <2>

Secondary mean line

<4> Compensate for the original measured data by referring to the secondary mean line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 54 of 267

Measured data compensation

See also

Dominant Waviness profile : WD_VDA

Standard VDA
Assessed profile Dominant Waviness profile
Identification WD_VDA (Option)
The dominant waviness profile WD is derived from the
primary profile. Influences of the roughness and shape are
eliminated using the zero bandpass method.
The zero bandpass filter is a bandpass filter with a nominal
bandwidth of zero. In this particular case, the wavelength
Description
limit of the low-pass filter is equal to the wavelength limit of
the high-pass filter.
The dominant wavelength is a period length in the horizontal
direction, for which the wavelength characteristics in the
vertical direction are dominant.
Cutoff setup -
Mean line NO mode

See also

Dominant Waviness profile : WDLS_VDA

Standard VDA
Assessed profile Dominant Waviness profile ( s)
Identification WDLS_VDA (Option)
The dominant waviness profile WD is derived from the
primary profile. Influences of the roughness and shape are
eliminated using the zero bandpass method.
The zero bandpass filter is a bandpass filter with a nominal
bandwidth of zero. In this particular case, the wavelength
limit of the low-pass filter is equal to the wavelength limit of
the high-pass filter.
Description
The dominant wavelength is a period length in the horizontal
direction, for which the wavelength characteristics in the
vertical direction are dominant.
It is efficient to provide a limit on shorter wavelengths with
the use of a cutoff filter s so that unnecessary minute
wavelength components can be removed from the profile.
(Only Gaussian filter is applied.)
Cutoff setup s: Remove unnecessary shorter wavelengths.
Mean line NO mode

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 55 of 267

Mean Line (Base Line)

The mean line is a reference line for calculation of the parameters of an assessed profile. The following 4 types of mean lines are available.

NO mode The straight line which is set to “Y= 0” to the assessed profile
after filter processing.
A mode The straight line which is set to “Y= Average value” to the
assessed profile after filter processing.
P mode The straight line from which sum-of-squares of the deviation to
the profile is minimal within each sampling length.
R mode The straight line from which sum-of-squares of the deviation to
the profile is minimal within each evaluation length.

a: Mean line, b: Evaluation length : ln

Mean line (NO mode), Mean line (A mode)

a: Mean line, b: Sampling length : ln

Mean line (P mode)

a: Mean line, b: Evaluation length : ln

Mean line (R mode)

See also

Filter types
The following 6 types of filters are available.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 56 of 267

Phase Amplitude transmittance at

Filter name Amplitude characteristic
characteristic the cutoff wavelength
2CR 75 2CR 75%
2CR 50 2CR 50%
2CRPC 75 2CR linear 75%
2CRPC 50 2CR linear 50%
Gaussian Gaussian linear 50%
non-linear
Robust Spline non-linear non-linear

(linear) (50%)

Each of the filter characteristics will be explained below. The attenuation characteristic of each filter will be represented by that of a high-pass filter.

See also

2CR 75
This has the same attenuation characteristic as a pair of C-R circuits with an identical time constant are connected in series. The attenuation
characteristic is -12dB/oct and the amplitude transmittance at the cutoff value is 75%, as shown in the following figure.

a: Amplitude transmittance (%) b: Amplitude transmittance (dB)

Attenuation characteristic of 2CR 75 filter

Attenuation characteristic:

See also

2CR 50
This has the same attenuation characteristic as a pair of C-R circuits with an identical time constant are connected in series. The attenuation
characteristic is -12dB/oct and the amplitude transmittance at the cutoff value is 50%, as shown in the following figure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 57 of 267

a: Amplitude transmittance (%) b: Amplitude transmittance (dB)

Attenuation characteristic of 2CR 50 filter

Attenuation characteristic :

See also

2CRPC 75
This is s phase corrected type with the same amplitude characteristic as 2CR 75. This has the same attenuation characteristic as a pair of C-R circuits
with an identical time constant are connected in series. The attenuation characteristic is -12dB/oct and the amplitude transmittance at the cutoff value is
75%, as shown in the following figure.

a: Amplitude transmittance (%) b: Amplitude transmittance (dB)

Attenuation characteristic of 2CRPC 75 filter

Attenuation characteristic :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 58 of 267

See also

2CRPC 50
This is s phase corrected type with the same amplitude characteristic as 2CR 50. This has the same attenuation characteristic as a pair of C-R circuits
with an identical time constant are connected in series. The attenuation characteristic is -12dB/oct and the amplitude transmittance at the cutoff value is
50%, as shown in the following figure.

a: Amplitude transmittance (%) b: Amplitude transmittance (dB)

Attenuation characteristic of 2CRPC 50 filter

Attenuation characteristic :

See also

Gaussian
The attenuation characteristic is approximately -11.6dB/oct and the amplitude transmittance at the cutoff value is 50%. The attenuation characteristic is
shown in the following figure.

a: Amplitude transmittance (%) b: Amplitude transmittance (dB)

Attenuation characteristic of Gaussian filter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 59 of 267

Attenuation characteristic :

where

The use of this filter creates a simple addition :

Primary profile = Roughness profile + Waviness profile

Therefore, the low-pass filter is characterized by :

Attenuation characteristic :

See also

Robust Spline
The transfer function of the robust spline filter can not be given because this filter is a non-linear filter. The algorithm of the robust spline filter is based
on the weighted spline filter. Therefore, the output of the Robust Spline Filter is the same as that of the Spline Filter for an outlier free input data.

Notes: Robust Spline filter is the stage currently examined by each standard. For this reason, At standard except OLDMIX of this program, it cannot be
used at the default. When using Robust Spline filter except OLDMIX, it needs to set up on [Set Standard] dialog box.

The transfer function of the spline filter is given by the following formula.

where,

This filter is a phase compensation filter and its gain at the cutoff wave-length is 50%.

The amplitude characteristic and phase characteristic are shown in the following figures.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 60 of 267

See also

Robust Gaussian Regression Filter

Currently, the filter used to evaluate surface characteristics is generally a Gaussian filter. However, there are several cases in which a Gaussian filter
causes problems.
For example, when a roughness curve is desired from a surface structure such as a plateau with a Gaussian filter, the obtained shape shows features such
as rises on both sides of deep data.

Several improvements for addressing this type of characteristic have been proposed, but a robust Gaussian regression filter is one the filter that retains
characteristics similar to a Gaussian filter while addressing problems such as the one above.
Refer to the following ISO standard for the definition of the robust Gaussian regression filter.

ISO 16610-31:2016 Geometrical product specifications (GPS) -- Filtration -- Part 31: Robust profile filters: Gaussian regression filters

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 61 of 267

See also

Phase corrected filters

Output waveforms passing through the general 2CR filters may be distorted due to phase deviations that vary with each wavelength.

The following figures show the response of a low-pass filter to the square wave input and that of a high-pass filter.

Input signal (square wave)

2CRPC (phase corrected type) 2CR (no phase corrected)

Case of a low-pass filter

2CRPC (phase corrected type) 2CR (no phase corrected)

Case of a high-pass filter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 62 of 267

See also

Difference of filter characteristics

Difference in amplitude transmittance of 2CR type (and 2CRPC) at the cutoff value
Both are the same type of filters, except with different cutoff values. The difference between the two is shown in the following figures.

a: Amplitude transmittance (%)

Difference in cutoff values of the filters

a: Amplitude transmittance (%)

Comparison of two filters at the same cutoff value

Amplitude characteristic of 2CR and Gaussian filters

The difference in amplitude characteristic between a 2CR filter and a Gaussian filter is shown in the following figures.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 63 of 267

a: Amplitude transmittance (%)

2CR 75 vs. Gaussian

a: Amplitude transmittance (%)

2CR 50 vs. Gaussian

Amplitude characteristic of Spline and Gaussian filters

The difference in amplitude characteristic between a Spline filter and a Gaussian dilter is shown in the following figures.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 64 of 267

See also

Standards of filters
The following table lists the correspondence between the filter types and their standards.

JIS ISO ANSI/ASME DIN

B0601-1982
2CR 75 B0610-1987 3274-1975 B46.1-1985 4762
B0651-1976
2CR 50
2CRPC 50
2CRPC 75
Gaussian B0601-1994 11562-1996 B46-1-1995 4777
Rolling circle B0610

See also

Start-up and finish lengths

In addition to a marginal length, which is also required for the equipment itself, a start-up and finish lengths are required for data filtering.

The following table shows the need for start-up and finish lengths, depending on the filter types.

Filter types vs. need for start-up and finish lengths

Filter type Start-up length Finish length

2CR Necessary Not necessary
2CRPC Necessary Necessary
Gaussian Necessary Necessary
Rolling circle Not necessary Not necessary
Robust Spline Not necessary Not necessary

If the start-up and finish lengths are not set in the evaluation condition setup, the start-up and finish lengths will be automatically created for filtering,
assuming that the measuring surface has similar surface conditions.

The start-up and finish lengths required for filter calculation is identical to the truncated length of the filter's weight function at the end of an evaluation
length. The start-up and finish lengths are generally assumed to be the cutoff length (1.0 c) for the conventional 2CR filter.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 65 of 267

a: Area ratio = 0.4% c: Sampling length

b: Start-up length d: Evaluation length

With the weight function of the Gaussian filter, the function value at the position 0.5 c from the center is approximately 2.8% (4.3% for 2CR filter) of
the maximum weight. The weight function area ratio of the Gaussian filter is approximately 0.4% (2.1% for 2CR filter). The error due to truncation of
the weight function is actually so small that the Gaussian filter's start-up and finish lengths can be set to 0.5 c with minimum adverse effects. (To obtain
the same condition with the 2CR filter, approximately 0.77 c of start-up and finish lengths are required.)

See also

What is the data compensation ?

When measuring/analyzing the surface etc. with curvature, the compensation of data is needed as a preprocessing of the parameter calculation etc. In
general, it is a processing called "Trend Removal" for removing the waviness of work. Even the waviness of longer wavelength that couldn't remove with
the filter can remove it by this data compensation. In the data compensation, the user selects a suitable trend profile for the surface shape of work. The
position and the coefficient of the trend profile are decided to fit best for the section profile, and the rest error that got as a result shall be the after
compensation data. The example of removing the trend for a work of R-surface is shown in the figure below.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 66 of 267

(A): Trend, (B): Piece of Work

Attention)

(1)When an abnormal value is included in the measurement data, the trend profile is not appropriately calculated by the abnormal value. Please delete
abnormal data beforehand.

(2)Be careful to do compensation because the proper compensation is not done if the profile is greatly different from actual data.

(3)If the fitting area of trend profile is smaller than the evaluation area (area of compensation), the calculated trend profile might be inadequate for the
whole of evaluation area. The fitting area and the evaluation area must be corresponding usually.

See also

The compensation of data.

The trend profile that becomes the reference line of the compensation is calculated section profile by the least squares method. Data compensation is
performed as a coordinate difference of the Z direction of calculated trend profile and section profile.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 67 of 267

(A): Section profile, (B): Trend profile.

See also

Line (Slope Compensation)

Formula:

The [a] and [b] are calculated by the least squares method.

To calculate the trend profile, set the fitting target as follows.

(1)Whole: All data Both ends:

(2)Two points of both ends.

(3)First half: The data of the part in the first half against all data.

(4)Last half: The data of the part in the latter half against all data.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 68 of 267

However, the target of the evaluation area (area of compensation) is all data.

See also

Circle (R Compensation)

Formula:

The [r] and center of a circle are calculated by the least squares method.

See also

Ellipse

Formula:

The [a], [b] and parallelism distance, rotation distance are calculated by the least squares method.

See also

Parabolic

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 69 of 267

Formula:

The [a] and parallelism distance, rotation distance are calculated by the least squares method.

See also

Hyperbolic

Formula:

The [a], [b] and parallelism distance, rotation distance are calculated by the least squares method.

See also

Conic Profile (Conic Auto Compensation)

Formula:

The [k], [r] and parallelism distance, rotation distance are calculated by the least squares method.

(The conic profile is a profile that becomes Ellipse/Parabolic/Hyperbolic depending on the value of [k] and [r].)

The sum total of the rest error of the above-mentioned ellipse, the parabolic, and the hyperbolic becomes equivalent to the doing compensation by the
minimum one if this is selected.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 70 of 267

See also

Polynomial Profile

Formula:

The are calculated by the least squares method.

See also

Polynomial Profile (Polynomial Auto Compensation)

Formula:

The are calculated by the least squares method.

If this is selected, the degree of the profile is decided automatically.

See also

Parameter Notation
The name of parameters is provided by the standard. By some standard, there are also some to which the first 1 character of the parameter name is
changed with the profile type. This item describes the string of each parameter name. Each parameter is expressed with the string indicated in this section
by the [Parameter condition setup] dialog box or the parameter results list. The string in double quotation mark "" is the notation used in the [Parameter
condition setup] dialog box. The string in () is the notation used in the parameter results list, and only when it differs from the notation used on a
[Parameter condition setup] dialog box, it is indicated.

Example)

Parameter notation "Pa","Ra","Wa"*1

It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation

· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 71 of 267

figures · Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter
value)
Profiles which can select
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
this parameter

See also

Description
The contents of obtaining the parameter are described.

Example)

Parameter notation "Pa","Ra","Wa"*1

It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter
value)
Profiles which can select
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
this parameter

See also

Methods of Parameter Calculation

Generally, if obtaining various parameters from the measured profile, the appropriate calculation is performed on each sampling length included in the
evaluation length, then the calculation results are averaged to yield a final parameter value. However, the calculation method changes with parameters.
The following 4 types of the calculation method are available.

MEAN type This is performed on each sampling length included in the

evaluation length, then the calculation result is averaged to
yield a final parameter value.
EACH type This is performed on each sampling length included in the
evaluation length, then each calculation result is a final
parameter value. (More than one parameter value is
obtained.)
MAX type This is performed on each sampling length included in the
evaluation length, then the maximum calculation result in
them is a final parameter value.
ALL type This is performed on the whole evaluation length, then the
calculation result is a final parameter value.

Example)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 72 of 267

Parameter notation "Pa","Ra","Wa"*1

It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter
value)
Profiles which can select
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
this parameter

See also

Required Conditions for Calculation

Depending on the parameter, the condition setup may be required for calculation. For example, "Peak/valley definition", "Slice level", etc. This section
describes the conditions.

Example)

Parameter notation "PSm","RSm","WSm"*1

A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the width Xs*2 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (PSm and WSm are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *3
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *4
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *3

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *3
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
RSm: mean width of the profile elements [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 73 of 267

Displayed Additional Figures

To make the parameter calculation results more intelligible, SURFPAK-SV displays the figures used for calculating the parameters, such as a line and a
point, on the profile or the graph. Available additional figures are listed in the following table.

The base line used for calculation of the parameter is displayed on the
Mean line
profile which obtained the parameter.
When the parameter is calculated on each sampling length included in the
Partition line evaluation length, respectively, the partition position of each section is
displayed on the profile which obtained the parameter.
The position, such as the mean height of the peak used in the process
Upper line which calculates the parameter, are displayed on the profile which
obtained the parameter.
The position, such as the mean depth of the valley used in the process
Lower line which calculates the parameter, are displayed on the profile which
obtained the parameter.
The point of the peak used in the process which calculates the parameter
Highest point of peak
is displayed on the profile which obtained the parameter.
The point of the valley used in the process which calculates the parameter
Lowest point of valley
is displayed on the profile which obtained the parameter.
The depth position, the profile bearing length value, etc. which were used
Additional figure for
in the process which calculates the parameter are displayed on the BAC
BAC
graph which obtained the parameter.

a: Partition line, b: Mean line

"Mean line" and "Partition lines" (P mode)

a: Partition line, b: Mean line

"Mean line" and "partition lines" (R mode)

a: Upper line, b: Lower line,

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 74 of 267

c: Results of parameter calculation

"Upper line" and "lower line" (Rc in P mode)

a: Upper line, b: Lower line,

c: Results of parameter calculation

"Upper line" and "lower line" (Rc in R mode)

a: Highest point of peak, b: Lowest point of valley

"Highest point of peak" and "lowest point of valley"

a: Depth, b: Profile bearing length

"Additional figure for BAC"

See also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Display Method] - [Displaying Auxiliary Line of Roughness Parameter]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 75 of 267

Profile Which Can Select The Parameter

The profile type which can be selected changes with standard selections. Furthermore, the parameter type which can be selected also changes with profile
types. In this section, the discernment names of the profile this parameter can make selection possible are enumerated.

Example)

Parameter notation "Pa","Ra","Wa"*1

It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can select
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
this parameter

See also

Standards Which Applies The Parameter

The standard of roughness is provided by JIS, ISO, ANSI, etc. A difference is in the profile and the parameter which are applied by each standard. In this
section, the standard for which each parameter is fitted is described.

Example)

Parameter notation "Pa","Ra","Wa"*1

It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter
value)
Profiles which can select
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
this parameter

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 76 of 267

Ra : Arithmetical mean deviation of the profile

Parameter notation "Ra"
Ra is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
R/R_JIS/RLS/RLS_JIS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Ra: [JIS:B 0601-1994]
Standards which
Ra: [JIS:B 0601-1982]
applies this parameter
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]

See also

Rai(Ra1, Ra2, Ra3...) : Arithmetical mean deviation of the profile

Parameter notation "Rai"("Ra1", "Ra2", "Ra3"...)
Ra is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Ra: [JIS:B 0601-1994]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Ra: [JIS:B 0601-1982]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 77 of 267

See also

Ramax : Arithmetical mean deviation of the profile

Parameter notation "Ramax"
Ra is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
Ra: [JIS:B 0601-1982]
applies this parameter

See also

Rq : Root-mean-square deviation of the profile

Parameter notation "Rq"
Rq is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions -

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 78 of 267

for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
Rq: root-mean-square deviation of the profile[ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

See also

Rqi(Rq1, Rq2, Rq3...) : Root-mean-square deviation of the profile

Parameter notation "Rqi"("Rq1", "Rq2", "Rq3"...)
Rq is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 79 of 267

Rqmax : Root-mean-square deviation of the profile

Parameter notation "Rqmax"
Rq is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Sk : Skewness of the profile

Parameter notation "Sk"
Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward
direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile, Sk, is given by the following formula.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
Sk: skewness of the profile[ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 80 of 267

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

Ski(Sk1, Sk2, Sk3...) : Skewness of the profile

Parameter notation "Ski"("Sk1", "Sk2", "Sk3"...)
Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward
direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile, Sk, is given by the following formula.
Description

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a : Mean line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 81 of 267

b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

Skmax : Skewness of the profile

Parameter notation "Skmax"
Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward
direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile, Sk, is given by the following formula.
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

Ku : Kurtosis of the profile

Parameter notation "Ku"
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile, Ku, is given

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 82 of 267

by the following formula.

Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Kui(Ku1, Ku2, Ku3...) : Kurtosis of the profile

Parameter notation "Kui" ("Ku1", "Ku2", "Ku3"...)
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile, Ku, is given
by the following formula.
Description

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 83 of 267

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Kumax : Kurtosis of the profile

Parameter notation "Kumax"
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile, Ku, is given
by the following formula.
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 84 of 267

e : Square wave

See also

Rp : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Rp"
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line.
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
Rp: maximum profile peak height[ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

See also

Rpi(Rp1, Rp2, Rp3...) : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Rpi" ("Rp1", "Rp2", "Rp3"...)
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line.
Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Rpmax : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Rpmax"
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line.
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 85 of 267

Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figure
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Rv : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Rv"
Rv is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line.
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
Rv: maximum profile valley depth[ISO:4287-1984]
this parameter

See also

Rvi(Rv1, Rv2, Rv3...) : Maximum profile valley

Parameter notation "Rvi"("Rv1", "Rv2", "Rv3"...)
Rv is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line.
Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 86 of 267

See also

Rvmax : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Rvmax"
Rv is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line.
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

See also

Ry : Maximum height of the profile

Parameter notation "Ry"
Ry is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/R_JIS/RLS/RLS_JIS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Ry: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Ry: maximum height of the profile[ISO:4287-1984]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 87 of 267

See also

Ryi(Ry1, Ry2, Ry3...) : Maximum height of the profile

Parameter notation "Ryi"("Ry1", "Ry2", "Ry3"...)
Ry is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
Ry: [JIS:B0601-1994]
applies this parameter

See also

RyDIN : Maximum peak-to-valley height

Parameter notation "RyDIN"
Ry is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 88 of 267

Standards which
Maximum two point height of the profile[DIN4768-1990]
applies this parameter

See also

RzDIN : Ten point height of irregularities

Parameter notation "RzDIN"
Rz is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
Rz:DIN ten point height of irregularities [DIN4768-1990]
applies this parameter

* This parameter is the same definition as "Ry".

See also

Rt : Total height of the profile

Parameter notation "Rt"

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 89 of 267

Rt is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)
figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Rti(Rt1, Rt2, Rt3...) : Total height of the profile

Parameter notation "Rti"("Rt1", "Rt2", "Rt3"...)
Rt is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Ry: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Rmax: [JIS:B0601-1982]

* This parameter serves as the same definition as "Ryi".

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 90 of 267

See also

Rc : Mean height of profile irregularities

Parameter notation "Rc"
Let the deviation of the highest peak*1from the mean line
be Yp, and let the deviation of the deepest valley*1from
the mean line be Yv. Total the arithmetic means of Yp's
and Yv's as Rc.

Description

However, when the total of Yp differs from the total of

Yv, the smaller one of a total is calculated as n.
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for · The definition of the highest peak and the deepest
calculation valley (10% or more of Ry or not) *1
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the
figures
arithmetic mean of Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the absolute
value of the arithmetic mean of Yv)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
Rp: mean height of profile irregularities[ISO:4287-1984]
this parameter

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 91 of 267

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile

c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

See also

Rci(Rc1, Rc2, Rc3...) : Mean height of profile irregularities

Parameter notation "Rci"("Rc1", "Rc2", "Rc3"...)
Let the deviation of the highest peak*1from the mean line
be Yp, and let the deviation of the deepest valley*1from
the mean line be Yv. Total the arithmetic means of Yp's
and Yv's as Rc.

Description

However, when the total of Yp differs from the total of

Yv, the smaller one of a total is calculated as n.
Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions for · The definition of the highest peak and the deepest
calculation valley (10% or more of Ry or not) *1
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the
figures
arithmetic mean of Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the absolute
value of the arithmetic mean of Yv)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 92 of 267

See also

Rcmax : Mean height of profile irregularities

Parameter notation "Rcmax"
Let the deviation of the highest peak*1from the mean line
be Yp, and let the deviation of the deepest valley*1from
the mean line be Yv. Total the arithmetic means of Yp's
and Yv's as Rc.

Description

However, when the total of Yp differs from the total of

Yv, the smaller one of a total is calculated as n.
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions for · The definition of the highest peak and the deepest
calculation valley (10% or more of Ry or not) *1
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the
figures
arithmetic mean of Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the absolute
value of the arithmetic mean of Yv)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

See also

Rz : Ten point height of irregularities

Parameter notation "Rz"

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 93 of 267

A total of two means which are the average height of the five
highest peaks*1and the average depth of the five deepest valleys*1,
measured by each line tangent to a peak or valley and parallel to the
Description mean line.

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· The definition of the highest peak and the deepest valley (10% or
more of Ry or not) *1
Required conditions
for calculation · The number of the highest peaks and the deepest valleys, which
average (Setting whether the calculation is executed when the
number is less than 5)
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Highest point of peak

· Lowest point of valley

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/R_JIS/RLS/RLS_JIS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1982]
applies this parameter
Rz: ten point height of irregularities[ISO:4287-1984]

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 94 of 267

See also

Rzi(Rz1, Rz2, Rz3...) : Ten point height of irregularities

Parameter notation "Rzi"("Rz1", "Rz2", "Rz3"...)
A total of two means which are the average height of the five
highest peaks*1and the average depth of the five deepest valleys*1,
measured by each line tangent to a peak or valley and parallel to the
Description mean line.

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
· The definition of the highest peak and the deepest valley (10% or
more of Ry or not) *1
Required conditions
for calculation · The number of the highest peaks and the deepest valleys, which
average (Setting whether the calculation is executed when the
number is less than 5)
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Highest point of peak

· Lowest point of valley

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1982]

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 95 of 267

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

See also

R3z : Mean peak-to-valley height

Parameter notation "R3z"
A total of two means which are the height of the third highest
Description peak*1and the depth of the third deepest valley*1, measured by each
line tangent to a peak or valley and parallel to the mean line.
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions · The definition of the highest peak and the deepest valley (10% or
for calculation more of Ry or not) *1
· Mean line

· The pause line of the section

Displayed additional
figures
· Highest point of peak

· Lowest point of valley

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

See also

R3zi(R3z1, R3z2, R3z3...) : Mean peak-to-valley height

Parameter notation "R3zi"("R3z1", "R3z2", "R3z3"...)

Description A total of two means which are the height of the third highest
peak*1and the depth of the third deepest valley*1, measured by each

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 96 of 267

line tangent to a peak or valley and parallel to the mean line.

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions · The definition of the highest peak and the deepest valley (10% or
for calculation more of Ry or not) *1
· Mean line

· The pause line of the section

Displayed additional
figures
· Highest point of peak

· Lowest point of valley

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

See also

R3y : Maximum peak-to-valley height

Parameter notation "R3y"
A total of two means which are the height of the third highest
Description peak*1and the depth of the third deepest valley*1, measured by each
line tangent to a peak or valley and parallel to the mean line.
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions · The definition of the highest peak and the deepest valley (10% or
for calculation more of Ry or not) *1
· Mean line

· The pause line of the section

Displayed additional
figures
· Highest point of peak

· Lowest point of valley

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 97 of 267

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

See also

Sm : Mean spacing of the profile irregularities

Parameter notation "Sm"
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". The
arithmetical mean of the length of this peak and valley pair (cycle)
Description *1is called Sm.

It is the reciprocal of the "Pc" value.

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Sm: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Sm: mean spacing of profile irregularities [ISO:4287-1984]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 98 of 267

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 99 of 267

See also

Smi(Sm1, Sm2, Sm3...) : Mean spacing of the profile irregularities

Parameter notation "Smi"("Sm1", "Sm2", "Sm3"...)
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". The
arithmetical mean of the length of this peak and valley pair (cycle)
Description *1is called Sm.

It is the reciprocal of the "Pc" value.

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 100 of 267

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

Smmax : Mean spacing of the profile irregularities

Parameter notation "Smmax"
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". The
arithmetical mean of the length of this peak and valley pair (cycle)
Description *1is called Sm.

It is the reciprocal of the "Pc" value.

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 101 of 267

select this parameter P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF

Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 102 of 267

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

Pc : Peak count (Profile peak density)

Parameter notation "Pc"
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
Description level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle)*1is counted as one peak, and the number of
peaks per centimeter or inch is called the "peak count Pc".
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
D: profile peak density[ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 103 of 267

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

Pci(Pc1, Pc2, Pc3...):Peak count (Profile peak density)

Parameter notation "Pci"("Pc1", "Pc2", "Pc3"...)
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
Description level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle)*1is counted as on peak, and the number of
peaks per centimeter or inch is called Pc.
Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 104 of 267

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 105 of 267

See also

Pcmax : Peak count (Profile peak density)

Parameter notation "Pcmax"
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
Description level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle)*1is counted as on peak, and the number of
peaks per centimeter or inch is called Pc.
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 106 of 267

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

S : Mean spacing of local peaks of the profile

Parameter notation "S"
This is the arithmetic mean of peak-to-peak distances (Si) of the
local peaks*1.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
S: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which
applies this parameter
S: mean spacing of local peaks of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 107 of 267

*1: If an upward convex portion of a profile has concavities on both sides, the highest point of the convex is called a local peak. However, if the distance
(in the sampling direction) between the adjacent convexities is less than 1% of the sampling length l, or if the depth of the concavities is less than 10% of
Ry, the convex portion does not qualify as a local peak.

a: More than 10% of Ry d: More than 1% of le

b: More than 1% of le e: More than 10% of Ry
c: Local peak

Local peak

See also

HSC(1/cm) : High spot count

Parameter notation "HSC(1/cm)"
On the profile provide a line*1which is parallel to and located
above the mean line. A profile peak that projects above the line and
Description has a local peak*2 is called a "peak for high spot count". The
number of these peaks per centimeter or inch is called the "high
spot count HSC"
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (= count level)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 108 of 267

a: Count level, b: Peak reference, c: Base reference

There are two methods of setting the count level: the peak reference method and
base reference method.
· Peak reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the top line of the highest
profile peak. The depth from the profile peak can be set either as a percentage
of the Ry value, or as a depth value.
· Base reference
The count level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance
from the mean line can be set either as a percentage of the Ry value, or as a
depth value. Therefore, if located above the mean line, the count level has a
positive value, and if located below the mean line, it has a negative value.

*1 This parallel line to the mean line is called a "count level".

*2 If an upward convex portion of a profile has concavities on both sides, the
highest point of the convex is called a local peak. However, if the distance (in
the sampling direction) between the adjacent convexities is less than 1% of the
sampling length l, or if the depth of the concavities is less than 10% of Ry, the
convex portion does not qualify as a local peak.

However, the start position and the end position of the section are treated as a
local peak, even if it is not the highest point, if it meets the only height condition
with adjacent concavities in the section.

a: More than 10% of Ry d: More than 1% of le

b: More than 1% of le e: More than 10% of Ry
c: Local peak

Local peak

See also

HSC(1/inch) : High spot count

Parameter notation "HSC(1/inch)"
On the profile provide a line*1which is parallel to and located
above the mean line. A profile peak that projects above the line and
Description has a local peak*2 is called a "peak for high spot count". The
number of these peaks per centimeter or inch is called the "high
spot count HSC"

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 109 of 267

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (= count level)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a: Count level, b: Peak reference, c: Base reference

There are two methods of setting the count level: the peak reference method and
base reference method.
· Peak reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the top line of the highest
profile peak. The depth from the profile peak can be set either as a percentage
of the Ry value, or as a depth value.
· Base reference
The count level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance
from the mean line can be set either as a percentage of the Ry value, or as a
depth value. Therefore, if located above the mean line, the count level has a
positive value, and if located below the mean line, it has a negative value.

*1 This parallel line to the mean line is called a "count level".

*2 If an upward convex portion of a profile has concavities on both sides, the
highest point of the convex is called a local peak. However, if the distance (in
the sampling direction) between the adjacent convexities is less than 1% of the
sampling length l, or if the depth of the concavities is less than 10% of Ry, the
convex portion does not qualify as a local peak.

However, the start position and the end position of the section are treated as a
local peak, even if it is not the highest point, if it meets the only height condition
with adjacent concavities in the section.

a: More than 10% of Ry d: More than 1% of le

b: More than 1% of le e: More than 10% of Ry
c: Local peak

Local peak

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 110 of 267

See also

da : Arithmetical mean slope of the profile

Parameter notation "da"
Divide the profile into sections at a predetermined interval x
along the horizontal axis, and obtain the inclination of a line that
connects the start point and the end point of the profile in each
section. The arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the
Description inclination is called the arithmetical mean slope of the profile, a.

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
a: arithmetical mean slope of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

a: Yi, b: X

Calculation of a slope

See also

dq : Root-mean-square slope of the profile

Parameter notation "dq"
Divide the profile into sections at a predetermined interval x
along the horizontal axis, and obtain the inclination of a line that
connects the start point and the end point of the profile in each
section. Obtain the mean value of squared inclinations, and take the
square root of the mean to yield the root-mean-square slope of the
Description profile, q.

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 111 of 267

· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
q: root-mean-square slope of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

a: Yi, b: X

Calculation of a slope

See also

dqi(dq1, dq2, dq3...) : Root-mean-square slope of the profile

Parameter notation "dqi"("dq1", "dq2", "dq3"...)
Divide the profile into sections at a predetermined interval x
along the horizontal axis, and obtain the inclination of a line that
connects the start point and the end point of the profile in each
section. Obtain the mean value of squared inclinations, and take the
square root of the mean to yield the root-mean-square slope of the
Description profile, q.

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a: Yi, b: X

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 112 of 267

Calculation of a slope

See also

dqmax : Root-mean-square slope of the profile

Parameter notation "dqmax"
Divide the profile into sections at a predetermined interval x
along the horizontal axis, and obtain the inclination of a line that
connects the start point and the end point of the profile in each
section. Obtain the mean value of squared inclinations, and take the
square root of the mean to yield the root-mean-square slope of the
Description profile, q.

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

a: Yi, b: X

Calculation of a slope

See also

La : Average wavelength of the profile

Parameter notation "La"
a is an average wavelength that can be calculated from a using
the following formula.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation

Displayed additional · Mean line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 113 of 267

figures · Partition line

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
a: average wavelength of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

See also

Lq : Root-mean-square wavelength of the profile

Parameter notation "Lq"
q is a mean wavelength that can be calculated from q using the
following formula.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
q: root-mean-square wavelength of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

See also

Lo : Developed profile length

Parameter notation "Lo"
If a profile has developed into a line without profile irregularities,
the line length Lo is given by the following formula.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions -
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Rk : Core roughness depth

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 114 of 267

Parameter notation "Rk"

On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination.
Description
Let the intersections of this line and the mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines
be C and D, respectively. The difference of the ordinate values (i.e.
slice levels) of C and D is called the "core roughness depth", Rk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Rk : [DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Rk : core roughness depth[ISO:13565-2 -1984]

See also

Rpk : The reduced peak height

Parameter notation "Rpk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I.
Determine point J on the mr = 0 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments CH and CI and curve HI is equal to that of triangle
CHJ. The distance between points C and J is Rpk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Rpk:[DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Rpk: reduced peak height[ISO:13565-2 -1996]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 115 of 267

See also

Rvk : The reduced valley depth

Parameter notation "Rvk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F.
Determine point G on the mr = 100 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments DE and DF and curve EF is equal to that of triangle
DEG. The distance between points D and G is Rvk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Rvk:[DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Rvk: reduced valley depth[ISO:13565-2 -1996]

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 116 of 267

Mr1 : Material ratio 1

Parameter notation "Mr1"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
Description mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.

On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H.
The mr value of point H is Mr1.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Mr1:[DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Mr1:material portion[ISO:13565-2 -1996]

See also

Mr2 : Material ratio 2

Parameter notation "Mr2"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
Description mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.

On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E.
The mr value of point E is Mr2.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Mr2:[DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Mr2:material portion[ISO:13565-2 -1996]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 117 of 267

See also

A1 : Peak area
Parameter notation "A1"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I.
Determine point J on the mr = 0 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments CH and CI and curve HI is equal to that of triangle
CHJ. The area of triangle CHJ is A1.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
A1:[DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
applies this parameter
A1:peak area[ISO:13565-2 -1996]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 118 of 267

See also

A2 : Valley area
Parameter notation "A2"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F.
Determine point G on the mr = 100 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments DE and DF and curve EF is equal to that of triangle
DEG. The area of triangle DEG is A2.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
A2:[DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
applies this parameter
A2:valley area[ISO:13565-2 -1996]

See also

plateau : Plateau ratio

Parameter notation "plateau"
Provide a reference line and a slice line using their mr value. The
depth in micrometers of the slice line from the reference line is
called the "plateau ratio". A maximum of 10 pairs of reference lines
Description
and slice lines can be set as required between 0% and 100% (in 1%
increments). If the slice line is located higher than the reference
line, the plateau ratio will be negative; if lower, it will be positive.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 119 of 267

applies this parameter -

See also

mr : Profile bearing length ratio

Parameter notation "mr"
On the profile provide a line*1which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
Description percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
· Slice level (the rate to Rt or the length) *1
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Mr:[DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
applies this parameter
tp: profile bearing length ratio[ISO:4287-1984]

*1: This line, parallel to the mean line, is called a "slice line", and its position is called a "slice level".

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 120 of 267

There are two methods of setting the count level: the peak reference method and
base reference method.
· Peak reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the top line of the highest
profile peak. The depth from the profile peak can be set either as a percentage
of the Rt value, or as a depth value.
· Base reference
The count level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance
from the mean line can be set either as a percentage of the Rt value, or as a
depth value. Therefore, if located above the mean line, the count level has a
positive value, and if located below the mean line, it has a negative value.

See also

mr (all) : Profile bearing length ratio

Parameter notation "mr (all)"("mra")
On the profile provide a line*1which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).
Description

Provide 19 slice lines between the highest peak and the deepest
valley*2of the profile at an interval of 5% (5, 10, 15, ...95%) of the
Rt value. As a result, 19 mr values will be obtained.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

*1: This line, parallel to the mean line, is called a "slice line", and its position is called a "slice level".

*2: This is called "peak reference".

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 121 of 267

mrd : Material profile of the ratio

Parameter notation "mrd"
On the profile provide a line*1which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Description

Let a slice line whose mr value falls between 0% and 99% (in 1%
increments) be the reference line*2, and provide more slice lines in
constant increments (in micrometers) below the reference line. mr
values at each slice level are referred to as mrd values.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value)
for calculation
· Spacing between slice lines (C in the following figure)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

*1: This parallel line segment is called cutting line, and the position of a cutting line is called cutting level.

*2: This slice line is called a reference line.

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

a : Reference line
b : Reference mr value

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 122 of 267

See also

dc : Material profile of the ratio

Parameter notation "dc"
A mr value that can be determined by both a reference line*1and a
slice line. The depth of the slice line from the reference line is
Description called . Therefore, if the slice line is located higher than the
reference line, the value will be negative, and if lower, it will be
positive.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value)
for calculation
· Slice line value (mr value)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

*1: This slice line is called a reference line.

See also

dc (all) : Material profile of the ratio

Parameter notation "dc (all)"("dca")
A mr value that can be determined by both a reference line*1and a
slice line. The depth of the slice line from the reference line is
called . Therefore, if the slice line is located higher than the
reference line, the value will be negative, and if lower, it will be
Description positive.

Set the slice line, which has a mr value at 5%, as the reference line,
and provide more slice lines at 5% increments (5, 10, 15, ...95%).
values at each slice level are referred to as (all) value.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

*1: This slice line is called a reference line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 123 of 267

a : Reference line

See also

Vo(um3/um2)[Mr2] : The oil retention volume

Parameter notation "Vo(um3/um2)[Mr2]"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) let the area below the slice line,
which has a mr value at Mr2, and above the BAC be S. Vo is
calculated from S using the following formula.

Also, it is calculated from Mr2 and Rvk using the following

formula.
Description

In the case which considers the assessed profile and the slice line as
the three dimensional surfaces, this parameter is the volume of
the concavity below the slice plane per its unit area .
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 124 of 267

a : Slice line

See also

Vo(mm3/cm2)[Mr2] : The oil retention volume

Parameter notation "Vo(mm3/cm2)[Mr2]"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) let the area below the slice line,
which has a mr value at Mr2, and above the BAC be S. Vo is
calculated from S using the following formula.

Also, it is calculated from Mr2 and Rvk using the following

Description formula.

In the case which considers the assessed profile and the slice line as
the three dimensional surfaces, this parameter is the volume
of the concavity below the slice plane per its unit area .
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 125 of 267

a : Slice line

See also

Vo(um3/um2) : The oil retention volume

Parameter notation "Vo(um3/um2)"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) let the area below the slice line
and above the BAC be S. Vo is calculated from S using the
following formula.

Description

In the case which considers the assessed profile and the slice line as
the three dimensional surfaces, this parameter is the volume
of the concavity below the slice plane per its unit area .
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value) *1
for calculation
· The depth from the reference line to the slice line
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

*1: This reference line is used as a reference height when providing a slice line.

a : Depth from the reference line to the slice line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 126 of 267

b : Slice line
c : Reference mr value (%)

See also

Vo(mm3/cm2) : The oil retention volume

Parameter notation "Vo(mm3/cm2)"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) let the area below the slice line
and above the BAC be S. Vo is calculated from S using the
following formula.

Description

In the case which considers the assessed profile and the slice line as
the three dimensional surfaces, this parameter is the volume
of the concavity below the slice plane per its unit area .
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value) *1
for calculation
· The depth from the reference line to the slice line
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

*1: This reference line is used as a reference height when providing a slice line.

a : Depth from the reference line to the slice line

b : Slice line
c : Reference mr value (%)

See also

PcU(1/cm) : Upper Crossing Count

Parameter notation "PcU(1/cm)"

On the profile provide a line*1 which is parallel to and

Description located above the mean line. A profile peak that projects
above the line and has a local peak*2 called a "crossing

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 127 of 267

count". The number of these peaks per centimeter or inch

is called the "Pcu".
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
· Count level *1
calculation
· Average
Displayed additional
· Peak point
figures
· Upper level line(=Count level)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

a: Count level, b: Peak reference, c: Base reference, d: Bottom reference, e: mr reference

There are four methods of setting the count level: the peak reference, the base
reference, the bottom reference and the mr reference.
Peak reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the top line of the highest
profile peak. The depth from the profile peak can be set either as a percentage
of the Rt value, or as a depth value.
Base reference
The count level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance
from the mean line can be set either as a percentage of the Rt value, or as a
depth value. Therefore, if located above the mean line, the count level has a
positive value, and if located below the mean line, it has a negative value.

Bottom reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the low line of deepest profile
valley. The depth from the profile valley can be set either as a percentage of the
Rt value, or as a depth value.
mr reference
The reference line is specified by the mr value. The distance from the depth can
be set either as a percentage of the Rt value, or as a depth value. Therefore, if
located above the mean line, the count level has a positive value, and if located
below the mean line,. it has a negative value.
*1 This parallel line to the mean line is called a "count level".
*2 If an upward convex portion of a profile has concavities on both sides, the
highest point of the convex is called a local peak..

However, if the distance (in the sampling direction) between the adjacent
convexities is less than 1% of the sampling length l, or if the depth of the
concavities is less than 10% of Rt, the convex portion does not qualify as a local
peak.

a: More than 10% of Rt d: More than 1% of le

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 128 of 267

b: More than 1% of le e: More than 10% of Rt

c: Local peak
Local peak

See also

PcL(1/cm) : Lower Crossing Count

Parameter notation "PcL(1/cm)"
On the profile provide a line*1 which is parallel to and
located above the mean line. A profile valley that projects
Description dropping below the line and has a local valley*2 called a
"crossing count". The number of these valleys per
centimeter or inch is called the "PcL".
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
calculation · Count level *1

· Average
Displayed additional
figures · Valley point

· Upper level line(=Count level)

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

a: Count level, b: Peak reference, c: Base reference, d: Bottom reference, e: mr reference

There are four methods of setting the count level: the peak reference, the base
reference, the bottom reference and the mr reference.
Peak reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the top line of the highest
profile peak. The depth from the profile peak can be set either as a percentage
of the Rt value, or as a depth value.
Base reference
The count level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance
from the mean line can be set either as a percentage of the Rt value, or as a
depth value. Therefore, if located above the mean line, the count level has a
positive value, and if located below the mean line, it has a negative value.

Bottom reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the low line of deepest profile
valley. The depth from the profile valley can be set either as a percentage of the
Rt value, or as a depth value.
mr reference
The reference line is specified by the mr value. The distance from the depth can
be set either as a percentage of the Rt value, or as a depth value. Therefore, if
located above the mean line, the count level has a positive value, and if located
below the mean line,. it has a negative value.
*1 This parallel line to the mean line is called a "count level".
*2
If an downward concave portion of a profile has convexities on both sides, the
deepest point of the concave is called a local valley.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 129 of 267

However, if the distance (in the sampling direction) between the adjacent
concavities is less than 1% of the sampling length l, or if the depth of the
convexities is less than 10% of Rt, the concave portion does not qualify as a local
valley.

a: More than 10% of Rt d: More than 1% of le

b: More than 1% of le e: More than 10% of Rt
c: Local peak
Local valley

See also

PPI : peak density PPI

Parameter notation "PPI"
On the profile provide two lines*1 which are parallel to
the mean line and located above and below the mean line
at an equal distance (called "count level"). A peak
projecting above the upper count level is called a "peak
Description for peak count", and a valley dropping below the lower
count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle) is counted as one peak, and the
number of peaks per 25.4mm is called the "peak count
PPI".(Peaks per 1inch)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
l Count level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
calculation
l Mean Line
l Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead
Displayed additional
zone above the mean line)
figures
l Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead
zone below the mean line)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/RLS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
[SAE : SAE J911 JUN86]
this parameter

a: Dead zone b: Count level

*2: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line. The
distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming that the Ry
value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value (um).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 130 of 267

<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the dead
zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the intersections of the
profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is defined as the first one
cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the dead
zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the intersections of the
profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is also defined as the first
one cycle.

<1>Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2>Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See Also

Wsa : Arithmetic mean of waviness

Parameter notation "Wsa"
Wsa is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
l Mean Line
Displayed additional
l Upper line (the height from the mean line = the
figures
parameter value)
Profiles which can
WSEP
select this parameter
Standards which applies
[Wsa: Arithmetic mean of waviness[SEP 1941-2012]
this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 131 of 267

See Also

Ra : Arithmetical mean deviation of the profile

Parameter notation "Ra"
Ra is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/R_JIS/RLS/RLS_JIS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Ra: [JIS:B 0601-1994]
Standards which
Ra: [JIS:B 0601-1982]
applies this parameter
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile[ISO:4287-1984]

See also

Ry : Maximum height of the profile

Parameter notation "Ry"
Ry is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 132 of 267

· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/R_JIS/RLS/RLS_JIS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Ry: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which
applies this parameter
Ry: maximum height of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]

See also

Rz : Ten point height of irregularities

Parameter notation "Rz"
A total of two means which are the average height of the five
highest peaks*1and the average depth of the five deepest valleys*1,
measured by each line tangent to a peak or valley and parallel to the
Description mean line.

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· The definition of the highest peak and the deepest valley (10% or
more of Ry or not) *1
Required conditions
for calculation · The number of the highest peaks and the deepest valleys, which
average (Setting whether the calculation is executed when the
number is less than 5)
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Highest point of peak

· Lowest point of valley

Profiles which can
P/PLS/R/R_JIS/RLS/RLS_JIS/WC/WCA/WE/WEA/E/DF
select this parameter
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1982]
applies this parameter
Rz: ten point height of irregularities [ISO:4287-1984]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 133 of 267

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

See also

S : Mean spacing of local peaks of the profile

Parameter notation "S"
This is the arithmetic mean of peak-to-peak distances (Si) of the
local peaks*1.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
R_JIS/RLS_JIS
select this parameter
Standards which
S: [JIS:B 0601-1994]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 134 of 267

*1: If an upward convex portion of a profile has concavities on both sides, the highest point of the convex is called a local peak. However, if the distance
(in the sampling direction) between the adjacent convexities is less than 1% of the sampling length l, or if the depth of the concavities is less than 10% of
Ry, the convex portion does not qualify as a local peak.

a: More than 10% of Ry d: More than 1% of le

b: More than 1% of le e: More than 10% of Ry
c: Local peak

Local peak

See also

Sm : Mean spacing of the profile irregularities

Parameter notation "Sm"
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". The
arithmetical mean of the length of this peak and valley pair (cycle)
Description *1is called Sm.

It is the reciprocal of the "Pc" value.

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
R_JIS/RLS_JIS
select this parameter
Standards which
Sm: [JIS:B 0601-1994]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 135 of 267

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 136 of 267

See also

Pc : Peak count (Profile peak density)

Parameter notation "Pc"
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
Description level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle)*1is counted as one peak, and the number of
peaks per evaluation length is called the "peak count Pc".
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
R_JIS/RLS_JIS
select this parameter
Standards which
Pc: [JIS:B 0601-1994]
applies this parameter

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 137 of 267

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

Pc(1/cm) : Peak count (Profile peak density)

Parameter notation "Pc(1/cm)"
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
Description level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle)*1is counted as one peak, and the number of
peaks per centimeter is called the "peak count Pc".
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
R_JIS/RLS_JIS
select this parameter
Standards which
Pc: [JIS:B 0601-1994]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 138 of 267

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 139 of 267

See also

Pc(1/inch) : Peak count (Profile peak density)

Parameter notation "Pc(1/inch)"
On the profile provide two lines which are parallel to the mean line
and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
Description level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle)*1is counted as one peak, and the number of
peaks per inch is called the "peak count Pc".
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Ry or the length) *1
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
figures
the mean line)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
R_JIS/RLS_JIS
select this parameter
Standards which
Pc: [JIS:B 0601-1994]
applies this parameter

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*1: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Ry value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 140 of 267

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

mr : Profile bearing length ratio

Parameter notation "mr"
On the profile provide a line*1which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
Description percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
· Slice level (the rate to Rt or the length) *1
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
R_JIS/RLS_JIS
select this parameter
mr: [DIN4776-1990]
Standards which
tp: profile bearing length ratio [ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter
mr: [JIS:B 0601-1994]

*1: This line, parallel to the mean line, is called a "slice line", and its position is called a "slice level".

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 141 of 267

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

See also

Ra : Arithmetical mean deviation

Parameter notation "Pa","Ra","Wa"*1
It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-
Standards which
1997], [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
applies this parameter
Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

See also

Ramax : Arithmetical mean deviation

Parameter notation "Pamax","Ramax","Wamax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 142 of 267

"Pa1max","Ra1max","Wa1max")*2
It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-
1997], [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
Standards which
Jul.,2003]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rq : Root mean square deviation

Parameter notation "Pq","Rq","Wq"*1
It is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pq and Wq are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rq: root mean square deviation of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997], [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
Jul.,2003]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 143 of 267

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

See also

Rqmax : Root mean square deviation

Parameter notation "Pqmax","Rqmax","Wqmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pq1max","Rq1max","Wq1max")*2
It is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pq and Wq are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rq: root mean square deviation of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997], [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 144 of 267

See also

Rsk : Skewness
Parameter notation "Psk","Rsk","Wsk"*1
Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward
direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile is given by the following formula. (Psk and Wsk are defined
Description similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rsk: swewness of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-1997], [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

ak.CHM::/RESOURCE/ICON/Link3.JPG">See also

Rskmax : Skewness
Parameter notation "Pskmax","Rskmax","Wskmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Psk1max","Rsk1max","Wsk1max")*2
Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward
direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 145 of 267

profile is given by the following formula. (Psk and Wsk are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rsk: swewness of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-1997], [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

Rku : Kurtosis
Parameter notation "Pku","Rku","Wku"*1
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile is given by
the following formula. (Pku and Wku are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 146 of 267

select this parameter P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DFVDA

Standards which Rku: kurtosis of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-1997], [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Rkumax : Kurtosis
Parameter notation "Pkumax","Rkumax","Wkumax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pku1max","Rku1max","Wku1max")*2
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile is given by
the following formula. (Pku and Wku are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rku: kurtosis of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-1997], [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 147 of 267

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Rp : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Pp","Rp","Wp"*1
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Pp and Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rp: maximum profile peak height[ISO:4287-1997], [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

See also

Rpmax : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Ppmax","Rpmax","Wpmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pp1max","Rp1max", "Wp1max")*2
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Pp and Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation

· Mean line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 148 of 267

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
PP_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rp: maximum profile peak height[ISO:4287-1997], [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rv : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Pv","Rv","Wv"*1
It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is the depth of
Description
the lowest point of the profile from the mean line. (Pv and
Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the parameter
value)
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rv: maximum profile valley depth[ISO:4287-1997],
applies this parameter [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

See also

Rvmax : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Pvmax","Rvmax","Wvmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pv1max","Rv1max", "Wv1max")*2
It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is the depth of
Description
the lowest point of the profile from the mean line. (Pv and
Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the parameter
value)
Profiles which can P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 149 of 267

select this parameter

Standards which Rv: maximum profile valley depth[ISO:4287-1997] ,
applies this [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
parameter Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rz : Maximum height of profile

Parameter notation "Pz","Rz","Wz"*1
Rz is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pz and Wz
are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rz: maximum height of profile[ISO:4287-1997] , [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

See also

Rmax : Maximum height of profile

Parameter notation "Pmax","Rmax","Wmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"P1max","R1max", "W1max")*2

Description Ry is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pmax and
Wmax are defined similarly.)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 150 of 267

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
applies this parameter Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDAor PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rt : Total height of profile

Parameter notation "Pt","Rt","Wt"*1
Rt is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pt and Wt
are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)
figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rt: total height of profile[ISO:4287-1997] , [VDA2005 Jul.,2002],
applies this parameter [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 151 of 267

See also

Rc : Mean height of profile elements

Parameter notation "Pc","Rc","Wc"*1
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the height Zt*2 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (Pc and Wc are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *3
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *4
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *3

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *3
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
Rc: mean height of profile elements [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*3:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 152 of 267

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*4: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

Rcmax : Mean height of profile elements

Parameter notation "Pcmax","Rcmax","Wcmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pc1max","Rc1max", "Wc1max")*2
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the height Zt*3 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (Pc and Wc are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *4
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *5
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *4

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *4
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
Rc: mean height of profile elements [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*4:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 153 of 267

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*5: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

RSm : Mean width of the profile elements

Parameter notation "PSm","RSm","WSm"*1
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the width Xs*2 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (PSm and WSm are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *3
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *4
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *3

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *3
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which RSm: mean width of the profile elements[ISO:4287-1997] ,
applies this parameter [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*3:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*4: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 154 of 267

See also

RSmmax : Mean width of the profile elements

Parameter notation "PSmmax","RSmmax","WSmmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"PSm1max","RSm1max", "WSm1max")*2
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the width Xs*3 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (PSm and WSm are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *4
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *5
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *4

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *4
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which RSm: mean width of the profile elements[ISO:4287-1997] ,
applies this parameter [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds, when P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA are chosen.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*4:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*5: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 155 of 267

See also

Rdq : Root mean square slope

Parameter notation "Pdq", "Rdq", "Wdq" *1
The local slope dZ/dX*2 is calculated with the data points which
included three front points and three back points to all the measured
data points on the profile. Let the square root of the arithmetical
mean of the squares of the local slopes be this parameter value.
Description (P q and W q are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which R q: root mean square slope of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997] , [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: The local slope dZi/dX of the i-th point on the profile is calculated using seven points from the i-3rd to the i+3rd.

See also

Rdqmax : Root mean square slope

Parameter notation "Pdqmax", "Rdqmax", "Wdqmax" *1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pdqmax","Rdqmax", "Wdqmax")*2
The local slope dZ/dX*3 is calculated with the data points which
included three front points and three back points to all the measured
data points on the profile. Let the square root of the arithmetical
mean of the squares of the local slopes be this parameter value.
Description (P q and W q are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 156 of 267

calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which R q: root mean square slope of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997] , [VDA2005 Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007
Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: The local slope dZi/dX of the i-th point on the profile is calculated using seven points from the i-3rd to the i+3rd.

See also

Rk : Core roughness depth

Parameter notation "Rk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination.
Description
Let the intersections of this line and the mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines
be C and D, respectively. The difference of the ordinate values (i.e.
slice levels) of C and D is called the "core roughness depth", Rk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rk：core roughness depth[ISO:13565-2 -1996] , [VDA2006
applies this parameter Jul.,2003]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 157 of 267

See also

Rpk : Reduced peak height

Parameter notation "Rpk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I.
Determine point J on the mr = 0 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments CH and CI and curve HI is equal to that of triangle
CHJ. The distance between points C and J is Rpk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rpk：reduced peak height[ISO:13565-2 -1996] , [VDA2006
applies this parameter Jul.,2003]

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 158 of 267

Rvk : Reduced valley depth

Parameter notation "Rvk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F.
Determine point G on the mr = 100 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments DE and DF and curve EF is equal to that of triangle
DEG. The distance between points D and G is Rvk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rvk：reduced valley depth[ISO:13565-2 -1996] , [VDA2006
applies this parameter Jul.,2003]

See also

Mr1 : Material portion

Parameter notation "Mr1"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
Description mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.

On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H.
The mr value of point H is Mr1.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Mr1：material portion[ISO:13565-2 -1996] , [VDA2006
applies this parameter Jul.,2003]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 159 of 267

See also

Mr2 : Material portion

Parameter notation "Mr2"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
Description mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.

On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E.
The mr value of point E is Mr2.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Mr2：material portion[ISO:13565-2 -1996] , [VDA2006
applies this parameter Jul.,2003]

See also

A1 : Peak area

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 160 of 267

Parameter notation "A1"

On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I.
Determine point J on the mr = 0 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments CH and CI and curve HI is equal to that of triangle
CHJ. The area of triangle CHJ is A1.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
AA1：peak area[ISO:13565-2 -1996] , [VDA2006 Jul.,2003]
applies this parameter

See also

A2 : Valley area
Parameter notation "A2"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F.
Determine point G on the mr = 100 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments DE and DF and curve EF is equal to that of triangle
DEG. The area of triangle DEG is A2.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
A2：valley area[ISO:13565-2 -1996] , [VDA2006 Jul.,2003]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 161 of 267

See also

Rmr(c) : Material ratio of the profile

Parameter notation "Pmr(c)","Rmr(c)","Wmr(c)"*1
On the profile provide a line*2which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
Description percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
· Slice level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rmr(c)：material ratio of the profile[ISO:4287-1997], [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: This line, parallel to the mean line, is called a "slice line", and its position is called a "slice level".

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

There are two methods of setting the count level: the peak reference method and
base reference method.
· Peak reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the top line of the highest

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 162 of 267

profile peak. The depth from the profile peak can be set either as a percentage
(between 0% and 50%) of the Rt value, or as a depth value.
· Base reference
The count level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance
from the mean line can be set either as a percentage (between 0% and 50%) of
the Rt value, or as a depth value. Therefore, if located above the mean line, the
count level has a positive value, and if located below the mean line, it has a
negative value.

See also

Rmr : Relative material ratio

Parameter notation "Pmr","Rmr","Wmr"*1
On the profile provide a line*2which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Description

Let a slice line whose mr value falls between 0% and 99% (in 1%
increments) be the reference line*3, and provide more slice lines in
constant increments (in micrometers) below the reference line. mr
values at each slice level are referred to as this parameter values.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value)
for calculation
· Spacing between slice lines (C in the following figure)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DFVDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rmr：relative material ratio[ISO:4287-1997] , [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA or PLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: This parallel line segment is called cutting line, and the position of a cutting line is called cutting level.

*3: This slice line is called a reference line.

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 163 of 267

a : Reference line
b : Reference mr value

See also

Rdc : Profile section height difference

Parameter notation "Pdeltac", "Rdeltac", "Wdeltac" *1
A mr value that can be determined by both a reference line*2and a
slice line. The depth of the slice line from the reference line is
Description called . Therefore, if the slice line is located higher than the
reference line, the value will be negative, and if lower, it will be
positive.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value)
for calculation
· Slice line value (mr value)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Rdc：profie section height difference[ISO:4287-1997] , [VDA2005
applies this parameter Jul.,2002], [VDA2006 Jul.,2003], [VDA2007 Jul.,2003]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA orPLS_VDA, R_VDA or RLS_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: This slice line is called a reference line.

See also

Wst : Waviness slope

Parameter notation "Wst"
Wst is calculated from the waviness profile.
For the calculation, a window with a constant width of 0.5 mm is
shifted from the profile start to the profile
end by the step width of the profile point spacing. For each step, the
absolute value of the relevant profile
Description height difference of the first profile point to the last profile point of
the evaluated window is calculated. The
profile points in between are disregarded. The Wst value results
from the maximum value of all profile height differences
calculated.
Wst is indicated in um.
Method of parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 164 of 267

calculation ALL type

Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
-
figures
Profiles which can
W_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which Mercedes-Benz Engineering Standar Category 31 MBN 31 007-12
applies this parameter Edition:2009-04

See also

Rpkx
Parameter notation "Rpkx"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I. The
distance between points C and I is Rpkx.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 165 of 267

See also

Rvkx
Parameter notation "Rvkx"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F. The
distance between points D and F is Rvkx.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_VDA/PLS_VDA/R_VDA/RLS_VDA/W_VDA/DF_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Rvv Rlam Rhon

@

See Also

WDSm : Horizontal waviness parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 166 of 267

Parameter notation "WDSm"

Dominant wavelength which is identfied in the amplitude spectrum.
It is generally corresponds to the mean width of the profile element
Description of the WD profile.

(Option)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
Validity Range
for calculation
Displayed additional
-
figures
Profiles which can
WD_VDA/WDLS_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
[VDA2007 Feb.,2007]
applies this parameter

See also

WDt : Total profile height

Parameter notation "WDt"
The total height WDt of the waviness profiles WD is the vertical
differences between the highest and lowest point within the
Description evaluation length..

(Option)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
-
figures
Profiles which can
WD_VDA/WDLS_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
[VDA2007 Feb.,2007]
applies this parameter

See also

WDc : Mean height of profile elements

Parameter notation "WDc"

A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile

element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
Description called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
arithmetical mean of the height Zi of all profile elements be this
parameter value.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 167 of 267

(Option)

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
-
figures
Profiles which can
WD_VDA/WDLS_VDA
select this parameter
Standards which
[VDA2007 Feb.,2007]
applies this parameter

See also

Ra : Roughness average
Parameter notation "Ra","Wa"*1
It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Wa are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Ra: roughness average[ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] , [ANSI :
applies this parameter ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 168 of 267

See also

Rq : Root mean square roughness

Parameter notation "Rq","Wq"*1
It is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Wq are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rq: root mean square roughness [ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

Rsk : Skewness
Parameter notation "Rsk","Wsk"*1
Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward
direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile is given by the following formula. (Wsk are defined
Description similarly.)

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 169 of 267

Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Mean line
figures
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rsk: swewness[ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] , [ANSI : ASME
applies this parameter B46.1-2002 ]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

Rku : Kurtosis
Parameter notation "Rku","Wku"*1
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile is given by
the following formula. (Wku are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Mean line
figures
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rku: kurtosis [ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995], [ANSI : ASME B46.1-
applies this parameter 2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 170 of 267

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Rp : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Rp","Wp"*1
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rp: maximum profile peak height[ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

Rpi : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Rpi","Wpi"*1

("Rp1", "Rp2", "Rp3"..., "Wp1", "Wp2", "Wp3"...) *1

Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation

Displayed additional
· Mean line
figures
· Partition line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 171 of 267

· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rp: maximum profile peak height[ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

Rpm : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Rpm","Wpm"*1
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figure
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rp: maximum profile peak height[ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

Rv : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Rv","Wv"*1
It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line. (Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures · Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which applies Rv: maximum profile valley depth[ANSI : ASME B46.1-
this parameter 1995] , [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 172 of 267

Rvi : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Rvi","Wvi"*1

("Rv1", "Rv2", "Rv3"..., "Wv1", "Wv2", "Wv3"...) *1

It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line. (Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which applies Rv: maximum profile valley depth [ANSI : ASME
this parameter B46.1-1995] , [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

Rvm : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Rvm","Wvm"*1
It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line. (Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which applies Rv: maximum profile valley depth [ANSI : ASME
this parameter B46.1-1995] , [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

Rmax : Maximum roughness depth

Parameter notation "Rmax","Wmax"*1

It is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
Description
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Wmax are
defined similarly.)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 173 of 267

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rmax: maximum roughness depth [ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

Rz : Average maximum height of the profile

Parameter notation "Rz","Wz"*1
It is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Wz are
defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rz: average maximum height of the profile [ANSI : ASME B46.1-
applies this parameter 1995] , [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 174 of 267

See also

Rti : Maximum height of the profile

Parameter notation "Rti","Wti"*1

("Rt1", "Rt2", "Rt3"..., "Wt1", "Wt2", "Wt3"...) *1

It is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Wti are
defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
EACH type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rti: maximum height of the profile [ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

Rt : Maximum height of the profile

Parameter notation "Rt","Wt"*1
It is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Wt are
defined similarly.)
Description

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 175 of 267

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)
figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Rt: maximum height of the profile [ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

See also

RSm : Mean width of the profile elements

Parameter notation "RSm","WSm"*1
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the width Xs*2 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (PSm and WSm are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *3
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *4
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *3

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *3
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which RRSm: mean spacing of profile irregularities [ANSI : ASME
applies this parameter B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI, and W_ANSI.

*2: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 176 of 267

a: Mean line

*3:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*4: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

RPc : Peak density

Parameter notation "RPc","WPc"*1
On the profile provide two lines*2which are parallel to the mean
line and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
Description
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle) is counted as one peak, and the number of
peaks per evaluation length is called the "peak count Pc". (WPc are
defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
for calculation
· Mean line

· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
Displayed additional
the mean line)
figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Pc: peak density RSm: mean spacing of profile irregularities
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 177 of 267

*2: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Rt value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value ( ).When the W_SNSI is selected, specifies by the length or
the ratio to Wt.

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

RPc(1/cm): Peak Density

Parameter notation "RPc(1/cm)","WPc(1/cm)"*1

On the profile provide two lines*2which are parallel to

the mean line and located above and below the mean line
at an equal distance (called "count level"). A peak
projecting above the upper count level is called a "peak

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 178 of 267

for peak count", and a valley dropping below the lower

count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle) is counted as one peak, and the
Description
number of peaks per 1cm length is called the "peak count
RPc(1/cm)". (WPc(1/cm) are defined similarly.) (WPc are
defined similarly)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
l Count level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
calculation
l Mean Line
l Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead
Displayed additional
zone above the mean line)
figures
l Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead
zone below the mean line)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which applies Pc: peak density[ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] , [ANSI :
this parameter ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

a: Dead zone b: Count level

*2: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line. The
distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming that the Rt
value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value (um). When the W_SNSI is selected, specifies by the length or the ratio to Wt.

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the dead
zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the intersections of the
profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is defined as the first one
cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the dead
zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the intersections of the
profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is also defined as the first
one cycle.

<1>Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2>Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 179 of 267

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See Also

RPc(1/E): peak density

Parameter notation "RPc(1/E)","WPc(1/E)"*1
On the profile provide two lines*2which are parallel to
the mean line and located above and below the mean line
at an equal distance (called "count level"). A peak
projecting above the upper count level is called a "peak
Description for peak count", and a valley dropping below the lower
count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle) is counted as one peak, and the
number of peaks per 25.4mm is called the "peak count
RPc(1/E)". (WPc are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
l Count level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
calculation
l Mean Line
l Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead
Displayed additional
zone above the mean line)
figures
l Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead
zone below the mean line)
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which applies Pc: peak density[ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] , [ANSI :
this parameter ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

a: Dead zone b: Count level

*2: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line. The
distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming that the Rt
value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value (um). When the W_SNSI is selected, specifies by the length or the ratio to Wt.

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the dead
zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the intersections of the
profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is defined as the first one
cycle.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 180 of 267

<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the dead
zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the intersections of the
profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is also defined as the first
one cycle.

<1>Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2>Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See Also

Rda : Average absolute slope

Parameter notation "Rda", "Wda" *1
The local slope dZ/dX*2 is calculated with the data points which
included three front points and three back points to all the measured
data points on the profile. Let the square root of the arithmetical
mean of the squares of the local slopes be this parameter value.
Description (W a are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Mean line
figures
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which a: avarage absolute slope[ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] , [ANSI :
applies this parameter ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

*2: The local slope dZi/dX of the i-th point on the profile is calculated using seven points from the i-3rd to the i+3rd.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 181 of 267

See also

Rdq : Root mean square slope

Parameter notation "Rdq", "Wdq" *1
The local slope dZ/dX*2 is calculated with the data points which
included three front points and three back points to all the measured
data points on the profile. Let the square root of the arithmetical
mean of the squares of the local slopes be this parameter value.
Description (Wq are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Mean line
figures
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which q: average absolute slope [ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] , [ANSI :
applies this parameter ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting R_ANSI and W_ANSI.

*2: The local slope dZi/dX of the i-th point on the profile is calculated using seven points from the i-3rd to the i+3rd.

See also

tp : Profile bearing length ratio

Parameter notation "tp"

On the profile provide a line*1which is parallel to the mean line.

Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 182 of 267

of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
Description the tp value at the slice line position (slice level).

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
· Slice level (the rate to Rt or the length) *1
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which tp: profile bearing length ratio [ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: This line, parallel to the mean line, is called a "slice line", and its position is called a "slice level".
When the W_SNSI is selected, specifies by the length or the ratio to Wt.

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

There are two methods of setting the count level: the peak reference method and
base reference method.
· Peak reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the top line of the highest
profile peak. The depth from the profile peak can be set either as a percentage
(between 0% and 50%) of the Rt value, or as a depth value.
· Base reference
The count level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance
from the mean line can be set either as a percentage (between 0% and 50%) of
the Ry value, or as a depth value. Therefore, if located above the mean line,
the count level has a positive value, and if located below the mean line, it has a
negative value.

See also

Htp : Profile bearing length ratio

Parameter notation "Htp"
A tp value that can be determined by both a reference line*1and a
slice line. The depth of the slice line from the reference line is
Description called Htp. Therefore, if the slice line is located higher than the
reference line, the Htp value will be negative, and if lower, it will
be positive.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (tp value)
for calculation
· Slice line value (tp value)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 183 of 267

Profiles which can

R_ANSI/W_ANSI
select this parameter
Standards which Htp: profile bearing length ratio [ANSI : ASME B46.1-1995] ,
applies this parameter [ANSI : ASME B46.1-2002]

*1: This slice line is called a reference line.

See also

Ra : Arithmetical mean deviation of the profile

Parameter notation "Ra"
Ra is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
R_OLDJIS
select this parameter
Standards which
Ra: [JIS:B 0601-1982]
applies this parameter

See also

Rmax : Maximum height of the profile

Parameter notation "Rmax"
Rmax is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean
line and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line.
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation

· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 184 of 267

figures · Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P_OLDJIS
select this parameter
Standards which
Rmax: [JIS:B0601-1982]
applies this parameter

See also

Rz : Ten point height of irregularities

Parameter notation "Rz"
A total of two means which are the average height of the five
highest peaks*1and the average depth of the five deepest valleys*1,
measured by each line tangent to a peak or valley and parallel to the
Description mean line.

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
The definition of the highest peak and the deepest valley (10% or
Required conditions more of Rmax or not) *1 The number of the highest peaks and the
for calculation deepest valleys, which average (Setting whether the calculation is
executed when the number is less than 5)
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Highest point of peak

· Lowest point of valley

Profiles which can
P_OLDJIS
select this parameter
Standards which
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1982]
applies this parameter

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 185 of 267

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Rmax f: More than 10% of Rmax

See also

Ra : Arithmetical mean deviation

Parameter notation "Pa","Ra","Wa"*1
It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984],
applies this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 186 of 267

Ramax : Arithmetical mean deviation

Parameter notation "Pamax","Ramax","Wamax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pa1max","Ra1max","Wa1max")*2
It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984],
applies this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rq : Root mean square deviation

Parameter notation "Pq","Rq","Wq"*1
It is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pq and Wq are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 187 of 267

select this parameter

Standards which Rq: root mean square deviation of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997], [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

See also

="#000000"> See also

Rqmax : Root mean square deviation

Parameter notation "Pqmax","Rqmax","Wqmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pq1max","Rq1max","Wq1max")*2
It is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pq and Wq are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rq: root mean square deviation of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997] , [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 188 of 267

See also

Rsk : Skewness
Parameter notation "Psk","Rsk","Wsk"*1
Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward
direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile is given by the following formula. (Psk and Wsk are defined
Description similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rsk: skewness of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-1997] ,
applies this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

ame="Last"> See also

Rskmax : Skewness
Parameter notation "Pskmax","Rskmax","Wskmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Psk1max","Rsk1max","Wsk1max")*2

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 189 of 267

Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward

direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile is given by the following formula. (Psk and Wsk are defined
Description similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which Rsk: skewness of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-1997] ,
applies this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

Rku : Kurtosis
Parameter notation "Pku","Rku","Wku"*1
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile is given by
the following formula. (Pku and Wku are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
figures · Mean line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 190 of 267

· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rku: kurtosis of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Rkumax : Kurtosis
Parameter notation "Pkumax","Rkumax","Wkumax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pku1max","Rku1max","Wku1max")*2
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile is given by
the following formula. (Pku and Wku are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rku: kurtosis of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 191 of 267

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Rp : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Pp","Rp","Wp"*1
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Pp and Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rp: maximum profile peak height [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

See also

Rpmax : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Ppmax","Rpmax","Wpmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pp1max","Rp1max", "Wp1max")*2
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Pp and Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation

· Mean line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 192 of 267

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rp: maximum profile peak height [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rv : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Pv","Rv","Wv"*1
It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line. (Pv and Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which applies Rv: maximum profile valley depth [ISO:4287-1997] ,
this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

See also

Rvmax : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Pvmax","Rvmax","Wvmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pv1max","Rv1max", "Wv1max")*2
It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line. (Pv and Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 193 of 267

Standards which applies Rv: maximum profile valley depth [ISO:4287-1997] ,

this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rz : Maximum height of profile

Parameter notation "Pz","Rz","Wz"*1
Rz is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pz and Wz
are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rz: maximum height of profile [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

See also

Rzmax : Maximum height of profile

Parameter notation "Pzmax","Rzmax","Wzmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pz1max","Rz1max", "Wz1max")*2
Ry is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pz and Wz
are defined similarly.)
Description

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 194 of 267

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rz: maximum height of profile [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rt : Total height of profile

Parameter notation "Pt","Rt","Wt"*1
Rt is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pt and Wt
are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)
figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
Rt: total height of profile [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-2001]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 195 of 267

See also

Rc : Mean height of profile elements

Parameter notation "Pc","Rc","Wc"*1
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the height Zt*2 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (Pc and Wc are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *3
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *4
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *3

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *3
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rc: mean height of profile elements [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*3:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 196 of 267

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*4: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

Rcmax : Mean height of profile elements

Parameter notation "Pcmax","Rcmax","Wcmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pc1max","Rc1max", "Wc1max")*2
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the height Zt*3 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (Pc and Wc are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *4
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *5
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *4

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *4
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Rc: mean height of profile elements [ISO:4287-1997] , [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_VDA, R_VDA or DF_VDA, and W_VDA.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*4:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 197 of 267

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*5: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

RPc : Peak count number

Parameter notation "PPc","RPc","WPc"*1
On the profile provide two lines*2which are parallel to the mean
line and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
Description
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle) is counted as one peak, and the number of
peaks per 10mm length is called the "peak count RPc)". (PPc,WPc
are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
for calculation
· Mean line

· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
Displayed additional
the mean line)
figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01
select this parameter
Standards which Pc: peak count number [ISO:4287-1997 Amd 1.2009] [JIS:B0601-
applies this parameter 2013]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 and W_J01.

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*2: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Rt value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value (um). When the W_J01 is selected, specifies by the length or the
ratio to Wt.

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 198 of 267

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

RSm : Mean width of the profile elements

Parameter notation "PSm","RSm","WSm"*1
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the width Xs*2 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (PSm and WSm are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *3
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *4
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *3

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *3

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 199 of 267

Profiles which can

P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which RSm: mean width of the profile elements [ISO:4287-1997] ,
applies this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*3:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*4: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

RSmmax : Mean width of the profile elements

Parameter notation "PSmmax","RSmmax","WSmmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"PSm1max","RSm1max", "WSm1max")*2
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the width Xs*3 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (PSm and WSm are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *4
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *5
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *4

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *4
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 200 of 267

Standards which RSm: mean width of the profile elements [ISO:4287-1997] ,

applies this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds, when P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01 are chosen.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*4:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*5: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

Rdq : Root mean square slope

Parameter notation "Pdq", "Rdq", "Wdq" *1
The local slope dZ/dX*2 is calculated with the data points which
included three front points and three back points to all the measured
data points on the profile. Let the square root of the arithmetical
mean of the squares of the local slopes be this parameter value.
Description (P q and W q are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which R q: root mean square slope of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997] , [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: The local slope dZi/dX of the i-th point on the profile is calculated using seven points from the i-3rd to the i+3rd.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 201 of 267

See also

Rdqmax : Root mean square slope

Parameter notation "Pdqmax", "Rdqmax", "Wdqmax" *1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pdqmax","Rdqmax", "Wdqmax")*2
The local slope dZ/dX*3 is calculated with the data points which
included three front points and three back points to all the measured
data points on the profile. Let the square root of the arithmetical
mean of the squares of the local slopes be this parameter value.
Description (P q and W q are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which R q: root mean square slope of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997] , [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: The local slope dZi/dX of the i-th point on the profile is calculated using seven points from the i-3rd to the i+3rd.

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 202 of 267

Rk : Core roughness depth

Parameter notation "Rk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination.
Description
Let the intersections of this line and the mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines
be C and D, respectively. The difference of the ordinate values (i.e.
slice levels) of C and D is called the "core roughness depth", Rk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
Rk: core roughness depth [ISO:13565-2-1996] , [JIS:B0601-2001]
applies this parameter

See also

Rpk : Reduced peak height

Parameter notation "Rpk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I.
Determine point J on the mr = 0 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments CH and CI and curve HI is equal to that of triangle
CHJ. The distance between points C and J is Rpk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
Rpk: reduced peak height [ISO:13565-2-1996] , [JIS:B0601-2001]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 203 of 267

See also

Rvk : Reduced valley depth

Parameter notation "Rvk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F.
Determine point G on the mr = 100 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments DE and DF and curve EF is equal to that of triangle
DEG. The distance between points D and G is Rvk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
Rvk: reduced valley depth [ISO:13565-2-1996] , [JIS:B0601-2001]
applies this parameter

See also

Mr1 : Material portion

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 204 of 267

Parameter notation "Mr1"

On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
Description mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.

On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H.
The mr value of point H is Mr1.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
Mr1: material portion [ISO:13565-2-1996], [JIS:B0671-2]
applies this parameter

See also

Mr2 : Material portion

Parameter notation "Mr2"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
Description mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.

On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E.
The mr value of point E is Mr2.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
Mr2: material portion [ISO:13565-2-1996] , [JIS:B0671-2]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 205 of 267

See also

A1 : Peak area
Parameter notation "A1"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I.
Determine point J on the mr = 0 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments CH and CI and curve HI is equal to that of triangle
CHJ. The area of triangle CHJ is A1.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
A1: peak area [ISO:13565-2-1996] , [JIS:B0671-2]
applies this parameter

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 206 of 267

A2 : Valley area
Parameter notation "A2"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F.
Determine point G on the mr = 100 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments DE and DF and curve EF is equal to that of triangle
DEG. The area of triangle DEG is A2.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
A2: valley area [ISO:13565-2-1996] , [JIS:B0671-2]
applies this parameter

See also

Rmr(c) : Material ratio of the profile

Parameter notation "Pmr(c)","Rmr(c)","Wmr(c)"*1
On the profile provide a line*2which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
Description percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
· Slice level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 207 of 267

Standards which Rmr(c): material ratio of the profile [ISO:4287-1997] ,[JIS:B0671-

applies this parameter 2]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: This line, parallel to the mean line, is called a "slice line", and its position is called a "slice level".

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

See also

Rmr : Relative material ratio

Parameter notation "Pmr","Rmr","Wmr"*1
On the profile provide a line*2which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Description

Let a slice line whose mr value falls between 0% and 99% (in 1%
increments) be the reference line*3, and provide more slice lines in
constant increments (in micrometers) below the reference line. mr
values at each slice level are referred to as this parameter values.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value)
for calculation
· Spacing between slice lines (C in the following figure)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which
Rmr: relative material ratio [ISO:4287-1997] ,[JIS:B0671-2]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: This parallel line segment is called cutting line, and the position of a cutting line is called cutting level.

*3: This slice line is called a reference line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 208 of 267

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

a : Reference line
b : Reference mr value

See also

Rdc : Profile section height difference

Parameter notation "Pdc", "Rdc", "Wdc" *1
A mr value that can be determined by both a reference line*2and a
slice line. The depth of the slice line from the reference line is
Description called . Therefore, if the slice line is located higher than the
reference line, the value will be negative, and if lower, it will be
positive.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value)
for calculation
· Slice line value (mr value)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Standards which R : profile section height difference [ISO:4287-1997] ,
applies this parameter [JIS:B0601-2001]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*2: This slice line is called a reference line.

See also

RzJIS : Ten point height of irregularities

Parameter notation "PzJIS","RzJIS","WzJIS"

Description A total of two means which are the average height of the
five highest peaks*1and the average depth of the five
deepest valleys*1, measured by each line tangent to a
peak or valley and parallel to the mean line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 209 of 267

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· The definition of the highest peak and the deepest
valley (10% or more of Ry or not) *1
Required conditions for
calculation · The number of the highest peaks and the deepest
valleys, which average (Setting whether the calculation is
executed when the number is less than 5)
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Highest point of peak

· Lowest point of valley

Profiles which can
P_J01/R_J01/W_J01/DF_J01
select this parameter
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1994]
Standards which applies
Rz: [JIS:B0601-1982]
this parameter
Rz: ten point height of irregularities[ISO:4287-1984]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_J01, R_J01 or DF_J01, and W_J01.

*1: When a profile is sliced by its mean line, the portion that projects upward (convex) from the mean line is called the "profile peak", and that which
projects downward (concave) is called the "profile valley". The highest point of each profile peak is called the "highest peak", and the deepest point of
each profile valley is called the "deepest valley".

a: Highest peak of profile d: Profile valley

b: Profile peak e: Deepest valley of profile
c: More than 10% of Ry f: More than 10% of Ry

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 210 of 267

Rpq : Root-mean-square height in plateau region

Parameter notation "Ppq","Rpq"
Rq (root-mean-square height), irregular waveform
component generating the plateau region of the
Description measurement curve.
This is determined by the slope of the regression line
assigned to the BAC plateau region (normal probability).
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
· Plateau region setting *1
calculation
Displayed additional
· Auxiliary figure for BAC (normal probability) *2
figures
Profiles which can ISO1997: P_ISO,DF_ISO
select this parameter JIS2001: P_J01,DF_J01
VDA2002: P_VDA,DF_VDA
Standards which applies slope of a linear regression performed throgh the plateau
this parameter region[ISO:13565-3:1998], [JIS:B0671-3]

*1: Two methods are available for plateau region setting as follows:
(1) Automatic determination in accordance with the technique described in the standards
(2) Direct designation of upper/lower limits (mr value) of the region
In (2) above, the upper limit value is referred to as UPL (upper plateau limit) and the lower limit value is referred to as LPL (lower plateau limit).

*2: The BAC auxiliary figure is displayed as follows:

See also

Rvq : Root-mean-square height in valley region

Parameter notation "Pvq","Rvq"
Rq (root-mean-square height), irregular waveform
component generating the valley region of the
Description measurement curve.
This is determined by the slope of the regression line
assigned to the BAC valley region (normal probability).
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
· Valley region setting *1
calculation
Displayed additional
· Auxiliary figure for BAC (normal probability) *2
figures
Profiles which can ISO1997: P_ISO,DF_ISO
select this parameter JIS2001: P_J01,DF_J01
VDA2002: P_VDA,DF_VDA

Standards which applies slope of a linear regression performed throgh the valley

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 211 of 267

this parameter region[ISO 13565-3:1998], [JIS:B0671-3]

*1: Two methods are available for valley region setting as follows:
(1) Automatic determination in accordance with the technique described in the standards.
(2) Direct designation of upper/lower limits (mr value) of the region.
In (2) above, the upper limit value is referred to as UVL (upper valley limit) and the lower limit value is referred to as LVL (lower valley limit).

*2: The BAC auxiliary figure is displayed as follows:

See also

Rmq : Displacement point from plateau region to valley region

Parameter notation "Pmq","Rmq"
This is the load length ratio at the intersection point
between the regression line assigned to the plateau region
Description
and the regression line assigned to the BAC valley region
(normal probability).
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
· Plateau and valley region setting *1
calculation
Displayed additional
· Auxiliary figure for BAC (normal probability) *2
figures
Profiles which can ISO1997: P_ISO,DF_ISO
select this parameter JIS2001: P_J01,DF_J01
VDA2002: P_VDA,DF_VDA
Standards which applies relative material ratio at the plateau to valley intersection
this parameter [ISO 13565-3:1998], [JIS:B0671-3]

*1: Two methods are available for plateau and valley region setting as follows:
(1) Automatic determination in accordance with the technique described in the standards.
(2) Direct designation of upper/lower limits (mr value) of each region.
In (2) above, the upper limit value of the plateau region is referred to as UPL (upper plateau limit), the lower limit value of the plateau region is LPL
(lower plateau limit), the upper limit of the valley region is referred to as UVL (upper valley limit), and the lower limit value of the valley region is LVL
(lower valley limit).

*2: The BAC auxiliary figure is displayed as follows:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 212 of 267

See also

Ra : Arithmetical mean deviation

Parameter notation "Pa","Ra","Wa"*1
It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

See also

Ramax : Arithmetical mean deviation

Parameter notation

"Pamax","Ramax","Wamax"*1

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 213 of 267

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pa1max","Ra1max","Wa1max")*2
It is the arithmetical mean of the absolute values of the profile
deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pa and Wa are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Ra: arithmetical mean deviation of the profile [ISO:4287-1984]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rq : Root mean square deviation

Parameter notation "Pq","Rq","Wq"*1
It is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pq and Wq are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which Rq: root mean square deviation of the assessed profile[ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 214 of 267

See also

t color="#000000"> See also

Rqmax : Root mean square deviation

Parameter notation "Pqmax","Rqmax","Wqmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pq1max","Rq1max","Wq1max")*2
It is the square root of the arithmetical mean of the squares of
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. (Pq and Wq are defined
similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which Rq: root mean square deviation of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 215 of 267

Rsk : Skewness
Parameter notation "Psk","Rsk","Wsk"*1
Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward
direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile is given by the following formula. (Psk and Wsk are defined
Description similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rsk: skewness of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

te> ame="Last"> See also

Rskmax : Skewness
Parameter notation "Pskmax","Rskmax","Wskmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Psk1max","Rsk1max","Wsk1max")*2

Description Represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward

direction of an amplitude distribution curve. The skewness of a
profile is given by the following formula. (Psk and Wsk are defined
similarly.)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 216 of 267

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rsk: skewness of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

a : Mean line
b : Assessed profile
c : Amplitude distribution curve
d : Abrasion resistance : large
e : Abrasion resistance : small

See also

Rku : Kurtosis
Parameter notation "Pku","Rku","Wku"*1
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile is given by
the following formula. (Pku and Wku are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rku: kurtosis of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 217 of 267

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Rkumax : Kurtosis
Parameter notation "Pkumax","Rkumax","Wkumax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pku1max","Rku1max","Wku1max")*2
Represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an
amplitude distribution curve. The kurtosis of a profile is given by
the following formula. (Pku and Wku are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rku: kurtosis of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 218 of 267

a : Large
b : Small
c : Triangular wave
d : Sine wave
e : Square wave

See also

Rp : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Pp","Rp","Wp"*1
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Pp and Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Partition line
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rp: maximum profile peak height [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

See also

Rpmax : Maximum profile peak height

Parameter notation "Ppmax","Rpmax","Wpmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pp1max","Rp1max", "Wp1max")*2
Rp is the maximum value of the profile deviations (Yi) from the
Description mean line. That is, it is the height of the highest point of the profile
from the mean line. (Pp and Wp are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation

· Mean line

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 219 of 267

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rp: maximum profile peak height [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rv : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Pv","Rv","Wv"*1
It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line. (Pv and Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which applies
Rv: maximum profile valley depth [ISO:4287-1997]
this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

See also

Rvmax : Maximum profile valley depth

Parameter notation "Pvmax","Rvmax","Wvmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pv1max","Rv1max", "Wv1max")*2
It is the absolute value of the minimum value of the
profile deviations (Yi) from the mean line. That is, it is
Description
the depth of the lowest point of the profile from the mean
line. (Pv and Wv are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
· Mean line

Displayed additional · Partition line

figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the
parameter value)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 220 of 267

Standards which applies

Rv: maximum profile valley depth [ISO:4287-1997]
this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rz : Maximum height of profile

Parameter notation "Pz","Rz","Wz"*1
Rz is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pz and Wz
are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rz: maximum height of profile [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

See also

Rzmax : Maximum height of profile

Parameter notation "Pzmax","Rzmax","Wzmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pz1max","Rz1max", "Wz1max")*2
Ry is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pz and Wz
are defined similarly.)
Description

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 221 of 267

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
figures
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)

Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rz: maximum height of profile [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

See also

Rt : Total height of profile

Parameter notation "Pt","Rt","Wt"*1
Rt is the sum of height Yp of the highest point from the mean line
and of depth Yv of the lowest point from the mean line. (Pt and Wt
are defined similarly.)
Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = Yp)
figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = Yv)
Profiles which can
_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rt: total height of profile [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 222 of 267

See also

Rc : Mean height of profile elements

Parameter notation "Pc","Rc","Wc"*1
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the height Zt*2 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (Pc and Wc are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *3
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *4
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *3

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *3
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rc: mean height of profile elements [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*3:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 223 of 267

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*4: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

Rcmax : Mean height of profile elements

Parameter notation "Pcmax","Rcmax","Wcmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pc1max","Rc1max", "Wc1max")*2
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the height Zt*3 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (Pc and Wc are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *4
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *5
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *4

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *4
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rc: mean height of profile elements [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*4:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 224 of 267

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*5: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

RPc : Peak count number

Parameter notation "PPc","RPc","WPc"*1
On the profile provide two lines*2which are parallel to the mean
line and located above and below the mean line at an equal distance
(called "count level"). A peak projecting above the upper count
level is called a "peak for peak count", and a valley dropping below
Description
the lower count level is called a "valley for peak count". This peak
and valley pair (cycle) is counted as one peak, and the number of
peaks per 10mm length is called the "peak count RPc)". (PPc,WPc
are defined similarly.)
Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
· Count level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
for calculation
· Mean line

· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the dead zone above
Displayed additional
the mean line)
figures
· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the dead zone below
the mean line)
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Pc: peak count number [ISO:4287-1997 Amd 1.2009]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO and W_ISO.

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

*2: Two lines (known as count levels) that are parallel to the base line are drawn at equal distances above and below the mean line.
The distance of each cutting level from the mean line should be set as a percentage (%) value (between 0 and 50%), assuming
that the Rt value is 100%, or with an appropriate numeric value (um). When the W_ISO is selected, specifies by the length or the
ratio to Wt.

The area between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone.
Determining the first peak-valley cycle
<1> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, below the mean line. After exceeding the dead zone, the data drops below the
dead zone at least once, and now is above the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data exceeds the dead zone, is
defined as the first one cycle.
<2> Where the profile data is, in the beginning, above the mean line. After dropping below the dead zone, the data exceeds the
dead zone at least once, and now is below the dead zone. In the above series of events, the interval between the
intersections of the profile and mean line, immediately after which each piece of profile data drops below the dead zone, is
also defined as the first one cycle.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 225 of 267

<1> Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

<2> Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead zone

See also

RSm : Mean width of the profile elements

Parameter notation "PSm","RSm","WSm"*1
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the width Xs*2 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (PSm and WSm are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *3
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *4
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *3

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *3

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 226 of 267

Profiles which can

P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
RSm: mean width of the profile elements [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*3:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*4: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

RSmmax : Mean width of the profile elements

Parameter notation "PSmmax","RSmmax","WSmmax"*1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"PSm1max","RSm1max", "WSm1max")*2
A peak projecting above the profile is called a "peak for profile
element", and a valley dropping below the lower count level is
called a "valley for profile element", and this peak and valley pair
which appears continuously is called "profile element". Let the
Description arithmetical mean of the width Xs*3 of all profile elements be this
parameter value. (PSm and WSm are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
· Definition of the height of the profile element (the rate to Rz) *4
Required conditions
for calculation · Definition of the width of the profile element (more than 1% of
the sampling length or not) *5
· Mean line

· Partition line
Displayed additional
· Upper line (the height from the mean line = the minimum value
figures
above the mean line) *4

· Lower line (the depth from the mean line = the minimum value
below the mean line) *4
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 227 of 267

Standards which
RSm: mean width of the profile elements [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds, when P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO are chosen.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: As shown in the following figure, the peak and valley pair is one profile element.

a: Mean line

*4:

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zp and Zv shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile
element, and it is excepted from the calculation. A portion projecting above the mean line is called the positive portion, and a portion
dropping below the mean line is called the negative portion.

When [Restriction to the Peak and Valley] is not selected by the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup

The minimum value of Zt shown in the above figure is set. The element which does not fulfill this condition is not used as a profile element,
and it is excepted from the calculation.

*5: Let the minimum value of Xs shown in the above figure be 1% of the sampling length, and the element which does not fulfill this condition is not used
as a profile element, and it is excepted from the calculation.

See also

Rdq : Root mean square slope

Parameter notation "Pdq", "Rdq", "Wdq" *1
The local slope dZ/dX*2 is calculated with the data points which
included three front points and three back points to all the measured
data points on the profile. Let the square root of the arithmetical
mean of the squares of the local slopes be this parameter value.
Description (P q and W q are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MEAN type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which R q: root mean square slope of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: The local slope dZi/dX of the i-th point on the profile is calculated using seven points from the i-3rd to the i+3rd.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 228 of 267

See also

Rdqmax : Root mean square slope

Parameter notation "Pdqmax", "Rdqmax", "Wdqmax" *1

(Example in case a sampling length number is except 5:

"Pdqmax","Rdqmax", "Wdqmax")*2
The local slope dZ/dX*3 is calculated with the data points which
included three front points and three back points to all the measured
data points on the profile. Let the square root of the arithmetical
mean of the squares of the local slopes be this parameter value.
Description (P q and W q are defined similarly.)

Method of parameter
MAX type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
· Mean line
Displayed additional
figures
· Partition line
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which R q: root mean square slope of the assessed profile [ISO:4287-
applies this parameter 1997]

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: Only when the sampling length number used for the calculation is not 5, the sampling length number is attached before character string "max". This
example means that the sampling length number used for the calculation is 1.

*3: The local slope dZi/dX of the i-th point on the profile is calculated using seven points from the i-3rd to the i+3rd.

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 229 of 267

Rk : Core roughness depth

Parameter notation "Rk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination.
Description
Let the intersections of this line and the mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines
be C and D, respectively. The difference of the ordinate values (i.e.
slice levels) of C and D is called the "core roughness depth", Rk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rk: core roughness depth [ISO:13565-2-1996]
applies this parameter

See also

Rpk : Reduced peak height

Parameter notation "Rpk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I.
Determine point J on the mr = 0 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments CH and CI and curve HI is equal to that of triangle
CHJ. The distance between points C and J is Rpk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rpk: reduced peak height [ISO:13565-2-1996]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 230 of 267

See also

Rvk : Reduced valley depth

Parameter notation "Rvk"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F.
Determine point G on the mr = 100 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments DE and DF and curve EF is equal to that of triangle
DEG. The distance between points D and G is Rvk.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rvk: reduced valley depth [ISO:13565-2-1996]
applies this parameter

See also

Mr1 : Material portion

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 231 of 267

Parameter notation "Mr1"

On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
Description mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.

On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H.
The mr value of point H is Mr1.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Mr1: material portion [ISO:13565-2-1996]
applies this parameter

See also

Mr2 : Material portion

Parameter notation "Mr2"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
Description mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.

On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E.
The mr value of point E is Mr2.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Mr2: material portion [ISO:13565-2-1996]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 232 of 267

See also

A1 : Peak area
Parameter notation "A1"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I.
Determine point J on the mr = 0 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments CH and CI and curve HI is equal to that of triangle
CHJ. The area of triangle CHJ is A1.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
A1: peak area [ISO:13565-2-1996]
applies this parameter

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 233 of 267

A2 : Valley area
Parameter notation "A2"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F.
Determine point G on the mr = 100 line so that an area enclosed by
line segments DE and DF and curve EF is equal to that of triangle
DEG. The area of triangle DEG is A2.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
A2: valley area [ISO:13565-2-1996]
applies this parameter

See also

Rmr(c) : Material ratio of the profile

Parameter notation "Pmr(c)","Rmr(c)","Wmr(c)"*1
On the profile provide a line*2which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
Description percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
· Slice level (the rate to Rt or the length) *2
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 234 of 267

Standards which
Rmr(c): material ratio of the profile [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: This line, parallel to the mean line, is called a "slice line", and its position is called a "slice level".

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

There are two methods of setting the count level: the peak reference method and
base reference method.
· Peak reference
The count level is specified by the depth from the top line of the highest
profile peak. The depth from the profile peak can be set either as a percentage
(between 0% and 50%) of the Rt value, or as a depth value.
· Base reference
The count level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance
from the mean line can be set either as a percentage (between 0% and 50%) of
the Rt value, or as a depth value. Therefore, if located above the mean line, the
count level has a positive value, and if located below the mean line, it has a
negative value.

See also

Rmr : Relative material ratio

Parameter notation "Pmr","Rmr","Wmr"*1
On the profile provide a line*2which is parallel to the mean line.
Obtain the total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines
of profile peaks that are projecting above the slice line, i.e. lengths
between the intersections of the slice line and profile. Use a
percentage(%) of the total length to the evaluation length to express
the mr value at the slice line position (slice level).

Description

Let a slice line whose mr value falls between 0% and 99% (in 1%
increments) be the reference line*3, and provide more slice lines in
constant increments (in micrometers) below the reference line. mr
values at each slice level are referred to as this parameter values.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value)
for calculation
· Spacing between slice lines (C in the following figure)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
Rmr: relative material ratio [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 235 of 267

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: This parallel line segment is called cutting line, and the position of a cutting line is called cutting level.

*3: This slice line is called a reference line.

a : Slice level
b : Evaluation length ln

a : Reference line
b : Reference mr value

See also

Rdc : Profile section height difference

Parameter notation "Pdeltac", "Rdeltac", "Wdeltac" *1
A mr value that can be determined by both a reference line*2and a
slice line. The depth of the slice line from the reference line is
Description called . Therefore, if the slice line is located higher than the
reference line, the value will be negative, and if lower, it will be
positive.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions · Reference line value (mr value)
for calculation
· Slice line value (mr value)
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
R : profile section height difference [ISO:4287-1997]
applies this parameter

*1: Each corresponds to the notation when selecting P_ISO, R_ISO or DF_ISO, and W_ISO.

*2: This slice line is called a reference line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 236 of 267

See also

Rpq : Root-mean-square height in plateau region

Parameter notation "Ppq","Rpq"
Rq (root-mean-square height), irregular waveform
component generating the plateau region of the
Description measurement curve.
This is determined by the slope of the regression line
assigned to the BAC plateau region (normal probability).
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
· Plateau region setting *1
calculation
Displayed additional
· Auxiliary figure for BAC (normal probability) *2
figures
Profiles which can ISO1997: P_ISO,DF_ISO
select this parameter JIS2001: P_J01,DF_J01
VDA2002: P_VDA,DF_VDA
Standards which applies slope of a linear regression performed throgh the plateau
this parameter region[ISO:13565-3:1998], [JIS:B0671-3]

*1: Two methods are available for plateau region setting as follows:
(1) Automatic determination in accordance with the technique described in the standards
(2) Direct designation of upper/lower limits (mr value) of the region
In (2) above, the upper limit value is referred to as UPL (upper plateau limit) and the lower limit value is referred to as LPL (lower plateau limit).

*2: The BAC auxiliary figure is displayed as follows:

See also

Rvq : Root-mean-square height in valley region

Parameter notation "Pvq","Rvq"
Rq (root-mean-square height), irregular waveform
component generating the valley region of the
Description measurement curve.
This is determined by the slope of the regression line
assigned to the BAC valley region (normal probability).
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
· Valley region setting *1
calculation
Displayed additional

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 237 of 267

figures · Auxiliary figure for BAC (normal probability) *2

Profiles which can ISO1997: P_ISO,DF_ISO
select this parameter JIS2001: P_J01,DF_J01
VDA2002: P_VDA,DF_VDA
Standards which applies slope of a linear regression performed throgh the valley
this parameter region[ISO 13565-3:1998], [JIS:B0671-3]

*1: Two methods are available for valley region setting as follows:
(1) Automatic determination in accordance with the technique described in the standards.
(2) Direct designation of upper/lower limits (mr value) of the region.
In (2) above, the upper limit value is referred to as UVL (upper valley limit) and the lower limit value is referred to as LVL (lower valley limit).

*2: The BAC auxiliary figure is displayed as follows:

See also

Rmq : Displacement point from plateau region to valley region

Parameter notation "Pmq","Rmq"
This is the load length ratio at the intersection point
between the regression line assigned to the plateau region
Description
and the regression line assigned to the BAC valley region
(normal probability).
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
· Plateau and valley region setting *1
calculation
Displayed additional
· Auxiliary figure for BAC (normal probability) *2
figures
Profiles which can ISO1997: P_ISO,DF_ISO
select this parameter JIS2001: P_J01,DF_J01
VDA2002: P_VDA,DF_VDA
Standards which applies relative material ratio at the plateau to valley intersection
this parameter [ISO 13565-3:1998], [JIS:B0671-3]

*1: Two methods are available for plateau and valley region setting as follows:
(1) Automatic determination in accordance with the technique described in the standards.
(2) Direct designation of upper/lower limits (mr value) of each region.
In (2) above, the upper limit value of the plateau region is referred to as UPL (upper plateau limit), the lower limit value of the plateau region is LPL
(lower plateau limit), the upper limit of the valley region is referred to as UVL (upper valley limit), and the lower limit value of the valley region is LVL
(lower valley limit).

*2: The BAC auxiliary figure is displayed as follows:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 238 of 267

See also

Rpkx
Parameter notation "Rpkx"
On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point C be H,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 0 line, be I. The
distance between points C and I is Rpkx.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Rvkx

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 239 of 267

Parameter notation "Rvkx"

On the BAC (bearing area curve) determine a line which passes
through two points (A, B), with mr values that differ by 40%, and
has a minimum inclination. Let the intersections of this line and the
mr = 0 and mr = 100 lines be C and D, respectively.
Description
On the BAC let a point which has the same height as point D be E,
and let the intersection of the BAC and the mr = 100 line, be F. The
distance between points D and F is Rvkx.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Additional figure to BAC
figures
Profiles which can
P_ISO/R_ISO/W_ISO/DF_ISO
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Rvv Rlam Rhon

See Also

Parameter Tolerance Method

This software adopts "16% rule" and "Max. value rule" of ISO4288:1996 and JIS B0633:2001 as the tolerance method of a parameter. Moreover it
corresponds to the "Specification Rule of Failure rate" which extended the 16% rule.

Explanation of each rule

16% Rule

If the probability that the measurement value exceeding it will occur is high when average value + 1sigma is made into a upper limit, it

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 240 of 267

will consider as a failure. (It is by the point of view which also includes the variation in the measurement value by the place on the work
surface in tolerance.)

In this software, when the rate of a failure exceeds 16% by using the parameter value for every sections as a specimen, it considers as a
failure.

Standard Deviation Rule

Calculates the average value(μ) and standard deviation(σ) of parameter result of each Sampling Length.

The [Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit] is compared with [μ+nσ(μ-nσ)](n=1,2,3) and OK/NG is judged.

This rule is equal to 16% rule of ISO4288 in the purpose and the effect. The result is almost corresponding if there are a lot of numbers
of Sampling Length.

Max. Value Rule

When the specification value is exceeding at least one of the measurement value of each section, it means a failure.

Average Rule

Compares with the parameter value and the size of an upper (lower) limit value.

Specification Rule of Failure rate

It is a tolerance rule which specifies failure rate other than 16%.

The relation of the distribution of measurement value and 16% rule, Max. value rule

a --- Distribution of measurement value

A --- Average value

B --- Upper limit in 16% rule

C --- Upper limit in Max. value rule

The upper (lower) limit value of tolerance can specify any tolerance method, respectively.

Please determine a upper (lower) limit uniquely in consideration of the variation by the place of a measurement subject.

Explanation of a result display

Depending on the selected parameter result to a 16% rule, a maximum value rule and a specification rule of failure rate, NG section is displayed on
profile display area by the color.

Moreover, when the detail result is displayed, the figure corresponding to the detail result of each selected parameter is interlocked, and displayed by
color.

Explanation of a tolerance result distribution

When "16% rule", "Max. value rule" or "specification rule of failure rate" is chosen for the tolerance method, displays the graph of a parameter tolerance result
distribution on a graph display domain.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 241 of 267

P--- Parameter name: The name of the parameter displayed now.

a--- Histogram: The frequency distribution of a specimen is expressed with a figure bar graph.

b--- Gaussian distribution curve: The Gaussian distribution calculated from standard deviation and average is expressed as a curve.

A--- Average value (u): The arithmetic average value of a specimen.

B--- u+ : A value larger 1sigma than average value of a specimen.

C--- u- : A value smaller 1sigma than average value of a specimen.

D--- U limit: Upper limit value of 16% rule or maximum value rule.

E--- L limit: Lower limit value of 16% rule or maximum value rule.

The purpose of a display

1. Allows to grasp variation of a specimen intuitively.

2. Allows to see whether the distribution of a specimen follows the normal distribution.

3. Allows to see what position relation a distribution of a specimen has with a upper lower limit of tolerance.

Notes

Since a histogram cannot express the state of a distribution when there are few specimens (the number of the sections), please refer to a
Gaussian distribution curve.

See also

Parameter Calculation Result

Parameter Condition Setup

Parameters Related with Motif

The motif method is a French standard for evaluating surface roughness. It was adopted also as an ISO standard (ISO 12085-1996) in 1996.

Generally, when waviness components are removed from a profile using filters, the profile is subjected to distortion. One method to remove waviness
components from a profile without distorting it is by the motif method .

With this method , a profile is divided into units called "motifs" which are based on the wavelength of a component to be removed, and parameters to
evaluate the profile are calculated from each motif.

The following will briefly describe the methods of obtaining the motif parameters.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 242 of 267

See also

How to Obtain Roughness Motifs

With the following procedure, obtain the roughness motif .

1. Obtain the minimum height (Hmin) of peak height, In order to eliminate very small irregularities influence.

Evaluation data is divided into the length of the half of the maximum length of a roughness motif A. By this range, the difference of
maximum and the minimum value is obtained about each range, and it considers as the height of the minimum of the average value 5%.

n: The number of sections which can secure the set length

2. Obtain the highest point of peak and the lowest point of valley to the whole evaluation length.

The peek and valley should have a height difference of Hmin or greater. The deepest point between two peaks is the valley. Obtain the
highest point of peak and the lowest point of valley to the whole evaluation length.

P : Peak V : Valley

A motif consists of the section between two peaks.

A motif is expressed with following length and the following depth.

Length measured in the transverse direction of a cross-sectional curve (motif length ARi)

The depth from two the highest point of peaks measured in the direction of length to the lowest point of valley (motif depth Hj
and Hj+1)

It is depth T of the shallower one among the motif depth of two pieces (it is considered that case Hj+1 of a lower figure is T.).

3. Compose a roughness motif by comparing an adjacent motif.

There are the following four conditions as composite conditions. Composition is performed only when the whole of this condition is filled.
This operation is repeated and is performed until it stops performing composition.

(Conditions 1) It leaves the higher one among adjoining mountains. (When the height of a central mountain is higher than a mountain on
either side, it does not compound)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 243 of 267

Uncombinable pattern Combinable pattern

(Conditions 2) Motif length after compounding should not exceed the maximum length of a motif.

Value of ARi after combination <= A

(Conditions 3) They are two or more motif height T1 and T before motif height T after compounding joining together.

Uncombinable pattern Combinable pattern

(Conditions 4) It is 60% or less of motif height T after one one of the central motif depth compounding.

Uncombinable pattern Combinable pattern

4. It is conspicuous and correct the height (depth) of the high summit of the mountain and the deep bottom of a valley.

Average value of the coarseness motif which composition completed to the motif depth And a standard deviation is calculated.

Average value of the motif depth The standard deviation of the motif depth

Maximum H is calculated from the above-mentioned formula. The summit of the mountain or the bottom of a valley of the motif depth
deeper than this H is transposed to the level of H.

In a lower figure, Z j+1 corrected to Z j+1'.

Correction of a high mountain Correction of a deep valley

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 244 of 267

5. Calculate the parameter defined by the coarseness motif.

Notes 1. A part of parameter has what is calculated before processing 4.

See also

How to Obtain Waviness Motifs

With the following procedure, obtain the waviness motif .

1. Obtain the roughness motif .

2. Only the highest point of peak of a roughness motif is connected, obtain a upper envelope line.

3. Perform operations similar to the method of obtaining the highest point of peak and the lowest point of valley by the roughness motif ,and obtain a
waviness motif to a upper envelope line.

4. Compared an adjacent waviness motif and compose a waviness motif.

Composite conditions are the same as that of a roughness motif except the maximum length of a motif serves as B .

5. The parameter defined by the waviness motif is calculated.

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 245 of 267

How to Calculate Motif Parameters

In this program, the parameter of a total of 15 kinds of 8 kinds of roughness motif parameters and 7 kinds of waviness motif parameters is calculable also
including the parameter specified in ISO 12085-1996.

Please refer to the following clauses how to calculate parameters.

Roughness Motif Parameters

Rx : Maximum depth of profile irregularity

AR : Mean spacing of roughness motifs

R : Mean depth of roughness motifs

NR : Number of roughness motifs

NCRX

CPM

SR : Standard deviation of the depths of roughness motifs

SAR :Standard deviation of the spacing of roughness motifs

Waviness Motif Parameters

Wx : Maximum depth of waviness

AW : Mean spacing of waviness motifs

W : Mean depth of waviness motifs

Wte : Total depth of waviness

NW : Number of waviness motifs

SW : Standard deviation of the depths of waviness motifs

SAW : Standard deviation of the spacing of waviness motifs

See also

Rx : Maximum depth of profile irregularity

Parameter notation "Rx"
Maximum of the roughness-motif depth Hj for which it asked
Description
with evaluation length
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
RMOTIF/RMOTIF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
Rx: maximum depth of profile irregularity [ISO 12085-1996]
this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 246 of 267

See also

AR : Mean spacing of roughness motifs

Parameter notation "AR"
Arithmetic average value of the roughness-motif length ARi for
which it asked in evaluation length is AR

Description

n: The number of roughness motifs (equal to the number of

ARi)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
RMOTIF/RMOTIF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
AR: mean spacing of roughness motifs[ISO:12085-1996]
this parameter

See also

R : Mean depth of roughness motifs

Parameter notation "R"
Arithmetic average value of the roughness-motif depth Hj for
which it asked in evaluation length is R..

Description

m: The number of Hj (several n twice as many [ as this ] m= 2n

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 247 of 267

of a coarseness motif)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
RMOTIF/RMOTIF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
R: mean depth of roughness motifs [ISO: 12085-1996]
this parameter

See also

NR : Number of roughness motifs

Parameter notation "NR"
The number of the roughness motifs for which it asked with the
Description
whole evaluation length is NR.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
RMOTIF
this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

See also

NCRX
Parameter notation "NCRX"
The number of the vertex of depth extracted before coarseness
Description
motif composition is NCRX.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 248 of 267

Required conditions for

-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
RMOTIF
this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

See also

CPM
Parameter notation "CPM"
The number of averages of the valley per roughness motif is
CPM.

Description

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
RMOTIF
this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

See also

SR : Standard deviation of the depths of roughness motifs

Parameter notation "SR"
The standard deviation of the roughness-motif depth Hj for
which it asked with evaluation length is SR.

Description

m: The number of Hj (several n twice as many [ as this ] m= 2n

of a coarseness motif)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
RMOTIF
this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 249 of 267

See also

SAR :Standard deviation of the spacing of roughness motifs

Parameter notation "SAR"
The standard deviation of the roughness-motif length ARi for
which it asked with evaluation length is SAR.

Description

n: The number of roughness motifs

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions
-
for calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can
RMOTIF
select this parameter
Standards which
-
applies this parameter

See also

Wx : Maximum depth of waviness

Parameter notation "Wx"
The maximum of the depth HWj of the waviness motif for
Description
which it asked with evaluation length is Wx.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Waviness motif
figures
Profiles which can select

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 250 of 267

this parameter WMOTIF/WMOTIF_ISO

Standards which applies
Wx: maximum depth of waviness[ISO:12085-1996]
this parameter

See also

AW : Mean spacing of waviness motifs

Parameter notation "AW"
The arithmetic average value of the length AWi of the waviness
motif for which it asked with evaluation length is AW.

Description

m: The number of HWj (several n twice as many [ as this ] m=

2n of a sinuosity motif)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Waviness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
WMOTIF/WMOTIF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
AW: mean spacing of waviness motifs [ISO 12085-1996]
this parameter

See also

W : Mean depth of waviness motifs

Parameter notation "W"

Description

The arithmetic average value of the depth HWj of the waviness

motif for which it asked with evaluation length is W .

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 251 of 267

m: The number of HWj (several n twice as many [ as this ] m=

2n of a sinuosity motif)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Waviness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
WMOTIF/WMOTIF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
W: mean depth of waviness motifs [ISO 12085-1996]
this parameter

See also

Wte : Total depth of waviness

Parameter notation "Wte"
The direction distance of length between the highest point of a
Description
upper envelope line and the minimum point is Wte.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Roughness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
WMOTIF/WMOTIF_ISO
this parameter
Standards which applies
Wte: total depth of waviness [ISO 12085-1996]
this parameter

See also

NW : Number of waviness motifs

Parameter notation "NW"

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 252 of 267

The number of the waviness motifs for which it asked with the
Description
whole evaluation length is NW.
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Waviness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
WMOTIF
this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

See also

SW : Standard deviation of the depths of waviness motifs

Parameter notation "SW"
The standard deviation of the waviness motif depth HWj for
which it asked with evaluation length is SW.

Description

m: The number of HWj (several n twice as many [ as this ] m=

2n of a sinuosity motif)
Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Waviness motif
figures
Profiles which can select
WMOTIF
this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 253 of 267

SAW : Standard deviation of the spacing of waviness motifs

Parameter notation "SAW"
The standard deviation of the waviness motif length AWi for
which it asked with evaluation length is SAW.

Description

n: The number of waviness motifs

Method of parameter
ALL type
calculation
Required conditions for
-
calculation
Displayed additional
· Waviness motif
figures
Profiles which can
WMOTIF
select this parameter
Standards which applies
-
this parameter

See also

Motif Recommendation Measurement Conditions

The recommendation measurement conditions at the time of evaluating a motif are shown below. (ISO 12085-1996)

Roughness motif Waviness motif Measurement s Maximum radius at

Evaluation length
maximum length maximum length length the tip of Stylus
(mm) ( ) ( )
A(mm) B(mm) (mm)
0.02 0.1 0.64 0.64 2.5 2 0.5
0.1 0.5 3.2 3.2 2.5 2 0.5
0.5 2.5 16 16 8 5 1
2.5 12.5 80 80 25 10 2

When there are especially no directions, standard values are A = 0.5mm and B = 2.5mm.

Notes : In this program, s is automatically determined from the value of roughness-motif maximum length A .

See also

Accordance with ISO 12085-1996(JIS B0631) Annex-A

Allows you to calculate according to the regulation of ISO 12085-1996(JIS B0631) Annex-A.

Please set [ISO12085 Annex-A] conditions as [Base] on the calculation condition of the parameter condition setup.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 254 of 267

Please choose [No base] not to be based on Annex-A.

See also

ADC Graph
Provide a slice line which is parallel to the mean line on the profile within the evaluation length. Provide another slice line below the first slice line distant
by a unit distance*1. Provide lengths of the line which projected the profile between two slice lines on the second slice line, in each section (black section in
the following figure). The total length is called the "amplitude distribution length".

If the ordinate represents the depths*2of the slice line and the abscissa represents the amplitude distributions at each slice line depth, an ADC (amplitude
distribution curve) is created.

*1: It is defined as 1% of Rt value (the height from the highest point to the lowest point within the evaluation length).

*2: It is the depth of from the highest point of the profile within the evaluation length, the median of the depth of two slice lines is adopted
as the ordinate.

A: Depth ( ), B: Amplitude distribution rate (%)

C: Slice line, D: Unit distance

Method of obtaining the amplitude distribution graph

There are the following types of the ordinate and the abscissa of this graph.

Ordinate

Depth

The depth from the highest point of the profile

Depth rate

The percent (%) of the depth from the highest point of the profile to Rt value

Abscissa

Distribution length

The amplitude distribution length

Distribution rate

The percent (%) of the amplitude distribution length to the entire evaluation length

See also

BAC Graph
On the profile provide a slice line which is parallel to the mean line. The total length of line segments, which are the bottom lines of profile peaks (black
section in the following figure) that are projecting above the slice line, is called the "bearing length".

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 255 of 267

On the profile within the evaluation length, provide slice lines in constant increments. If the bearing lengths at each slice level are plotted in the abscissa
and the values (the depth of the slice line) of the slice levels are plotted in the ordinate, a BAC (bearing area curve) will result.

A: A: Depth ( )

A: Depth, B: Slice line

Method of obtaining the bearing area graph

There are the following types of the ordinate and the abscissa of this graph.

Ordinate

Depth

The depth from the highest point of the profile

Depth rate

The percent (%) of the depth from the highest point of the profile to Rt value

Abscissa

Bearing length

mr value

The percent (%) of the bearing length to the entire evaluation length

See also

ADCBAC Graph
The graph which displayed ADC graph and BAC graph in piles is called ADCBAC graph.

There are the following types of the ordinate and the abscissa of this graph.

Ordinate

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 256 of 267

Depth

The depth from the highest point of the profile

Depth rate

The percent (%) of the depth from the highest point of the profile to Rt value

Abscissa

Bearing length & distribution length

The ADC graph is created by plotting the amplitude distribution lengths. The BAC graph is displayed by
plotting the bearing lengths.

mr value & distribution rate

The ADC graph is created by plotting the percents (%) of the amplitude distribution length to the entire
evaluation length. The BAC graph is displayed by plotting the percents (%) of the bearing length to the entire
evaluation length.

See also

ADC graph

BAC graph

Power Spectrum Graph

A power spectrum analysis investigates about what frequency component is contained in the profile how much. As this means, the method using the
Fourier transform is known well. Since the Fourier transform performs the expansion which used the trigonometric function system as the basic function,
it is not suitable for the analysis of the waveform which has discontinuous points fundamentally. Moreover, if the sampled data are finite even if it is the
continuous waveform, since it assumes that the profile is repeated infinitely, the joint is discontinuous. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce this effect using
the window function*1.

a: Power spectrum [ ^2], b: Frequency [C/mm]

There are the following types of the ordinate and the abscissa of this graph.

Ordinate

1. (Amplitude^2)/2: Power value which is the square of the amplitude (strictly, since the triangular function system is used as the basic
function, the power value is equivalent to the half of the power for each of the sine or cosine component.)

2. dB: It is expressed with 10Log10(power value / maximum power value), and the maximum power is 0dB.

3. %: It is expressed with the percentage to the maximum power, and the maximum power is 100%.

4. Amplitude: Amplitude changed from the power value (it is equivalent to the amplitude of the sine or cosine component.)

Abscissa

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 257 of 267

1. Frequency: Number of waves per unit length (it is equivalent to the reciprocal of the wavelength.)

2. Wavelength: Length per cycle

*1: Window function

Performing the Fourier transform to the finite data is equivalent to applying the box type window function on the infinite data.
Consequently, the power spectrum will be distorted because the spectrum window has the large negative skirt. Reducing this distortion and
minimizing the difference between the true spectrum and the result obtained by the Fourier transform is the purpose of the window
function, and various window functions are proposed. Generally speaking, the Hamming window is suitable for the case where some
wavelength components contained in the profile are close, and the Hanning or Blackman window is suitable for the case where it is
necessary to detect even the very small wavelength component which is not close. The cosine window produces the cosine taper to each end
of the data in the rectangle window, and the Bartlett window is the simple approximation of various windowing functions. The following
types of window functions are available.

1. Rectangle

2. Bartlett (triangle)

3. Hanning

4. Hamming

5. Cosine taper (cosine)

6. Blackman

See also

Auto-correlation Graph
An auto-correlation is well used as a means to investigate whether the variation of the profile data has strong periodicity. A power spectrum and an auto-
correlation are the relations between the Fourier transform and the inverse transformation each other in the formula of Wiener-Khinchine, analyze the
wave from the viewpoint of the spatial frequency field and the spatial field, respectively, and it is known that these representations are equivalent. The
correlation function represents the degree of consistency between two points apart from a definite distance on the entire profile. If a height (depth)
appears again in a definite distance, the value of the correlation function will be 1. The correlation function is obtained like a power spectrum using the
Fourier transform. Since the Fourier transform performs the expansion which used the trigonometric function system as the basic function, it is not
suitable for the analysis of the waveform which has discontinuous points fundamentally. Moreover, if the sampled data are finite even if it is the
continuous waveform, since it assumes that the profile is repeated infinitely, the joint is discontinuous. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce this effect using
the window function*1.

In order to distinguish from the auto-correlation function based on the Walsh transform, it is also called the arithmetic auto-correlation function.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 258 of 267

a: Distance [mm]

*1: Window function

Performing the Fourier transform to the finite data is equivalent to applying the box type window function on the infinite data.
Consequently, the power spectrum will be distorted because the spectrum window has the large negative skirt. Reducing this distortion and
minimizing the difference between the true spectrum and the result obtained by the Fourier transform is the purpose of the window
function, and various window functions are proposed. Generally speaking, the Hamming window is suitable for the case where some
wavelength components contained in the profile are close, and the Hanning or Blackman window is suitable for the case where it is
necessary to detect even the very small wavelength component which is not close. The cosine window produces the cosine taper to each end
of the data in the rectangle window, and the Bartlett window is the simple approximation of various windowing functions. The following
types of window functions are available.

1. Rectangle

2. Bartlett (triangle)

3. Hanning

4. Hamming

5. Cosine taper (cosine)

6. Blackman

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 259 of 267

Walsh Power Spectrum Graph

A power spectrum analysis investigates about what frequency component is contained in the profile how much. The characteristic of this analysis is using
not the Fourier transform known well but the Walsh transform. The Walsh transform performs the expansion which used the orthogonal function system
called Walsh function system *1 as the basic function, has discontinuous points in itself, and it is suitable for the analysis of the digital data or the
discontinuous waveforms. The spatial sequency *1 is used as the quantity corresponding to the frequency in the power spectrum analysis using the
Fourier transform.

a: Power spectrum [ ^2], b: Spatial sequency [c/mm]

There are the following types of the ordinate and the abscissa of this graph.

Ordinate

1. Amplitude^2: Power value which is the square of the amplitude

2. dB: It is expressed with 10Log10(power value / maximum power value), and the maximum power is 0dB.

3. %: It is expressed with the percentage to the maximum power, and the maximum power is 100%.

4. Amplitude: Amplitude changed from the power value

Abscissa

1. Spatial sequency *1: Number of waves per unit length (half of the mean number of times to which the wave intersects 0. it is equivalent to
the reciprocal of the wavelength.)

2. Wavelength: Length per cycle

*1: Walsh function system and spatial sequency

In the Walsh function system, it is impossible to define the frequency like that in the trigonometric function system which is the basic
function of a Fourier analysis. Then, the quantity (Zps: Zero cross per second) called sequency (the number of the repetition) which
extended the definition of the frequency is introduced. On this program, the spatial sequency (Zero cross per mm) equivalent to the
reciprocal of the wavelength is used instead of the sequency.

Spatial sequency

= Number of times to which the wave crosses the coordinate axis up and down

= Half of the mean number of times to which the wave intersects 0

Spatial sequency = 0

Spatial sequency = 1

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 260 of 267

Spatial sequency = 1

See also

Walsh Auto-correlation Graph

An auto-correlation is well used as a means to investigate whether the variation of the profile data has strong periodicity. A Walsh power spectrum and a
Walsh auto-correlation are the relations between the Walsh transform and the inverse transformation each other in the formula of Wiener-Khinchine,
analyze the wave from the viewpoint of the spatial frequency field and the spatial field, respectively, and it is known that these representations are
equivalent. The correlation function is obtained like a Walsh power spectrum using the Walsh transform. The Walsh transform performs the expansion
which used the orthogonal function system called Walsh function system *1 as the basic function, has discontinuous points in itself, and it is suitable for
the analysis of the digital data or the discontinuous waveforms.

In order to distinguish from the auto-correlation function based on the Fourier transform, it is also called the logic auto-correlation function.

a: Distance [mm]

*1: Walsh function system

Spatial sequency = 0

Spatial sequency = 1

Spatial sequency = 1

See also

Profile Peak Height Distribution Graph

Provide lines parallel to the mean line at constant spacing (difference in height) on the profile. Count the number of local peaks*1 at each slice level, and
convert it to that per 1mm of height difference. If the number of local peaks (peaks/mm) between levels are plotted on the abscissa and if heights are
plotted on the ordinate, a local peak distribution graph of the profile is generated.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 261 of 267

a: Depth [ ], b: Local peak density [peaks/mm]

There are the following types of the ordinate of this graph.

Ordinate

1. Depth: The depth from the highest point of the profile

2. Depth ratio: The percent (%) of the depth from the highest point of the profile to Rt value

*1: If an upward convex portion of a profile has concavities on both sides, the highest point of the convex is called a local peak.

See also

Slope Distribution Graph

Divide the profile within the evaluation length into sections at a constant width and obtain the angle of inclination of a line that connects the start point
and end point of the profile in each section. If the ordinate represents the percent (%) of slope distributions and the abscissa represents angles, a slope
distribution graph is created.

a: Distribution rate [%], b: Slope angle [ ]

The number of sampling points (spacing represented by the number of points) used to obtain the slope angle can be determined by the user. The
permissible range of this setting is given by the following formula.

1 <= Spacing (number of points) <= 0.01 X (evaluation length / sampling pitch)

Assume that the evaluation length is 4.0mm and the sampling pitch is 0.001mm, up to 40 points can be set. If the number of sampling points is 1, all the
data points are used, and if the number of sampling points is 2, every other point will be selected to form a pair of points for calculating the slope.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 262 of 267

See also

Parameter Distribution Graph

To obtain the continuous distribution of a roughness parameter, set an processing span with a definite length, shorter than the evaluation length of the
profile, and shift it at a predetermined length along the sampling direction in order to calculate the parameter value at each position. If the distance in the
shift direction is plotted on the abscissa and if the parameter values are plotted on the ordinate, a parameter distribution graph of the profile is generated.

a: Ra[ ], b: Distance [mm]

An outline of the parameter distribution graph generation process is given below.

R: Parameter, A: Evaluation length (mm), B: Distance,

a, b, c and d are the processing span numbers.

Outline of parameter distribution graph

Parameters that can be specified: Only one of the following 7 parameters can be specified at a time.

Ra, Rq, Sk, Ku, Rp, Rv, Rt

Processing span: A processing span is a unit section in the evaluation length for calculating the parameter. The length of this section is called the
"processing span length".

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 263 of 267

There is the following limit.

dx X 25 <= Processing span length <= (Evaluation length / 4)

Shift length: The length to move (shift) the processing span in the x-axis direction.

There is the following limit.

dx X 12 <= Shift length <= (Processing span length)

The relationship between a processing span and the shift length is as follows.

A: Evaluation length (mm), B: Processing span a, C: Processing span b, D: Processing span c, E: Shift length (mm), F: Processing span length (mm)

Processing span and shift length

See also

Determining Ra
Standard cutoff values and evaluation lengths if determining Ra
Minimum value of
Ra range Cutoff value( c) mm
evaluation lengths (ln) mm
(0.006)<Ra 0.02 0.08 0.4
0.02<Ra 0.1 0.25 1.25
0.1<Ra 2.0 0.8 4
2.0<Ra 10.0 2.5 12.5
10.0<Ra 80.0 8 40

See also

Determining Ry
Standard sampling lengths if determining Ry
Minimum value of
Ry range Sampling lengths (l) mm
evaluation lengths (ln) mm
0.025<Ry 0.10 0.08 0.4
0.10<Ry 0.50 0.25 1.25
0.50<Ry 10.0 0.8 4
10.0<Ry 50.0 2.5 12.5

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 264 of 267

50.0<Ry 200.0 8 40

See also

Determining Rz
Standard sampling lengths if determining Rz
Minimum value of
Rz range Sampling lengths (l) mm
evaluation lengths (ln) mm
0.025<Rz 0.10 0.08 0.4
0.10<Rz 0.50 0.25 1.25
0.50<Rz 10.0 0.8 4
10.0<Rz 50.0 2.5 12.5
50.0<Rz 200.0 8 40

See also

Determining Sm
Standard sampling lengths and standard evaluation lengths if determining Sm
Minimum value of
Sm range mm Sampling lengths (l) mm
evaluation lengths (ln) mm
0.013<Sm 0.04 0.08 0.4
0.04<Sm 0.13 0.25 1.25
0.13<Sm 0.4 0.8 4
0.4<Sm 1.3 2.5 12.5
1.3<Sm 4.0 8 40

See also

Determining S
Standard sampling lengths and standard evaluation lengths if determining S
Minimum value of
S range Sampling lengths (l) mm
evaluation lengths (ln) mm
0.013<S 0.04 0.08 0.4
0.04<S 0.13 0.25 1.25
0.13<S 0.4 0.8 4
0.4<S 1.3 2.5 12.5
1.3<S 4.0 8 40

See also

Determining Ra

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 265 of 267

Standard cutoff values and evaluation lengths if determining Ra

Minimum value of
Ra range Cutoff value( c) mm
evaluation lengths (ln) mm
Ra 12.5 0.8 2.4
12.5<Ra 100 2.5 7.5

See also

Determining Ry
Standard sampling lengths values if determining Ry
Ry range Sampling lengths (l) mm
Ry 0.8 0.25
0.8<Ry 6.3 0.8
6.3<Ry 25 2.5
25<Ry 100 8
100<Ry 400 25

See also

Determining Rz
Standard sampling lengths values if determining Rz
Rz range Sampling lengths (l) mm
Rz 0.8 0.25
0.8<Rz 6.3 0.8
6.3<Rz 25 2.5
25<Rz 100 8
100<Rz 400 25

See also

Modification from JIS1982 to JIS1994

Current JIS (B0601-1994) Old JIS (B0601-1982)

Ra : Arithmetical mean deviation of profile

Ry : maximum height of profile

Ra : Arithmetical mean deviation of profile
Rz : Ten point height of irregularities
Parameters defined by JIS
Rmax : Maximum height of profile (Ry)
standard
Sm : Mean spacing of profile irregularities
Rz : Ten point height of irregularities
S : Mean spacing of local peaks of profile

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 266 of 267

tp : Profile bearing length ratio

All parameters are obtained from a Ra : Obtained from roughness profile
roughness profile. (The waviness
Assessed profile component is eliminated through the Rmax : Obtained from primary profile
phase-compensation type high-pass filter.)
Rz : Obtained from primary profile
The mean line is the waviness component The mean line is determined so that the sum
(waviness profile) obtained from the of the squares of profile deviation from the
primary profile by using the phase- mean line is minimized. (mean line
compensation type low-pass filter. compensation is performed.)
Mean line (base line)
Mean line compensation (linear profile
compensation by least squares mean line)
is not performed.
Phase-compensation type with 50% 2CR characteristic filter with 75% amplitude
Low-pass filter amplitude transmittance at the cutoff length transmittance at the cutoff length (2CR 75
(Gaussian filter). filter).
Standard cutoff length and
evaluation length for Determining Ra Determining Ra
obtaining Ra.
Standard sampling length Determining Ry Determining Ry
and evaluation length for
obtaining Rz and Ry. Determining Rz Determining Rz
The parameters determined within the
Ra : Obtained form the evaluation length
evaluation length , including the multiple
which is at least 3 times the cutoff length.
Obtaining the roughness sampling lengths. Five sampling lengths
parameters are specified to determine a parameter.
Rmax, Rz : Obtained form the sampling
evaluation value form the arithmetic mean
length.
of values in each sampling length.

See also

Determining Ra,Rq,Rsk,Rdq, etc of non-periodic profiles

Roughness sampling lengths for the measurement of Ra,Rq,Rsk,Rku,R q,and curves and related
parameters for non-periodic profiles (for example ground profiles)
Roughness sampling length Roughness evaluation
Ra (lr) mm length (ln) mm
(0.006)<Ra 0.02 0.08 0.4
0.02<Ra 0.1 0.25 1.25
0.1<Ra 2.0 0.8 4
2<Ra 10 2.5 12.5
10<Ra 80 8 40

See also

Determining Rz,Ry,Rp,Rc,Rt of Non-Periodic Profiles

Roughness sampling lengths for the measurement of Rz,Rv,Rp,Rc and Rt of non-periodic profiles (for
example ground profiles)
Roughness sampling length Roughness evaluation
Rz (lr) mm length (ln) mm
(0.025)<Rz 0.1 0.08 0.4
0.1<Rz 0.5 0.25 1.25
0.5<Rz 10 0.8 4
10<Rz 50 2.5 12.5
50<Rz 200 8 40

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
About Roughness Analysis Page 267 of 267

See also

Determining RSm and Evaluating Periodic Profiles

Roughness sampling length for the measurement of R-parameters of periodic profiles, and RSm of
periodic and non-periodic profiles
Roughness sampling length Roughness evaluation
RSm (lr) mm length (ln) mm
0.013<RSm 0.04 0.08 0.4
0.04<RSm 0.13 0.25 1.25
0.13<RSm 0.4 0.8 4
0.4<RSm 1.3 2.5 12.5
1.3<RSm 4 8 40

See also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBF63.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 1 of 139

Setting Calculation Coordinates System

Set the calculation coordinates system on the scale coordinates system in order to execute the Contour Analysis.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] toolbox.

2. Set the origin point of the calculation coordinates system by [Origin Setup] button of [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] toolbox.
3. Rotate the calculation coordinates system by [Rotation] button of [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] toolbox.
4. This calculation coordinates system is used to display the coordinate value of measurement result and decide the reference position of calculation
procedure.
5. When the calculation coordinates system is set, [Calc Coord.] is displayed in Status Bar.

Tip:

Before the movement(rotation) of the calculation coordinates system, the origin point of calculation coordinates system is the 0 point of the Counter.

Example of Measurement Result Display

The coordinate value and coordinate difference is displayed by the value of calculation coordinates system.

Move(Rotate) the calculation coordinates system according to the reference of workpiece before calculating the measurement result.

The mouse position displayed in the Counter is displayed by the value of calculation coordinates system.

Also, the 0 point of the X-axis(Z-axis) scale shows the origin point of the calculation coordinates system. And the grid is displayed on the origin point of
calculation coordinates system.

Decision of Reference Position of Calculation Procedure

Decide the reference position in order to execute the calculation procedure.

The reference position is decided depending on the coordinate value from the origin point of calculation coordinates system moved(rotated) at the first time.

Also, the reference position of inserted calculation procedure is the reference position just before insertion position.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Status Bar]

Registering Calculation Command

Registers the calculation command.

How To:

1. Select the calculation command in [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation Command] toolbox of the selected calculation command.

2. To memorize the operation of [Designation] toolbox and [Input] toolbox,

click [Memorize [Designation]/[Input] Toolbox Operation] command of the [Tool] menu.

When there is a check mark at the side of this command name, the operation is memorized.

When the check mark of the menu command is not displayed, the last operate button is selected.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 2 of 139

Notice: When you click the button different from the memorized button, the memory is canceled and the default button is selected.
3. Select the calculation command of [Calculation Command] toolbox.

Displays the [Designation] toolbox.

4. Select the data specification method of [Designation] toolbox. *1)

Displays the [Input] toolbox.

5. Select the input method of [Input] toolbox. *1)

You can input two or more data by using [Multi-Input] button of [Input] toolbox.

Notice: This button might not be able to be used depending on the calculation command.
6. Input the data of calculation command.
i. To undo the last input operation, click [Undo] command of the [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Undo] button of [Standard] toolbar .

Notice:

When you execute the following operation, you can not redo by [Undo] command.

l When you selected other calculation command

l When you specified other input method
l When you executed one or less calculation command
7. To redo the last cancel operation, click [Redo] command of the [Edit] menu.

Or, [Redo] button of [Standard] toolbar.

8. Please refer to the following example.

ex.1) Example of X Range Specification by [Line] Command

ex.2) Example of End of X Range Specification by [Line] Command

l Displays the [Calculation] dialog box after the input end.

Set the condition of calculation command.

Notice:

This dialog box might not be displayed depending on the calculation command.

To show or hide the [Calculation] dialog box, set the condition of the [Measurement Result Output Condition Setup] dialog box.
l Execute from No.3 or No.4 process, when you want to repeat the same calculation command.

Execute from No.2 process, when you want to execute other calculation command.
l To cancel after all the operations are ended, click [Cancel] button of [Calculation] dialog box.
l Delete the command by using [Delete Calculation] command of the [Edit] menu.

Example of X Range Specification by [Line] Command:

1. Click [X-Range Specification] button of [Designation] toolbox.

2. Input the start position of X range.

Displays the vertical cursor as shown in the figure below.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 3 of 139

3. When you click [Undo] button of [Standard] toolbar, the vertical cursor is deleted.

Example of End of X Range Specification by [Line] Command:

1. Click [Multi-Input] button of [Input] toolbox.

2. Input two ranges of X.
3. When you click [Undo] button of [Standard] toolbar, the second select range is deleted.

Deletes the two vertical cursor as shown in the figure below.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Standard Toolbar]

[Operation Screen] - [Calculation Toolbox]

Using Custom Toolbox

Allows you to register the calculation command used well.

How To:

1. Click [Custom Toolbox Settings] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize Calculation Command] dialog box. And register the calculation command.
2. To display the custom toolbox, click [Custom] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 4 of 139

Displays the [Custom] toolbox.

[Customize Calculation Command] Dialog Box:

a. [Available Buttons] --- Displays the calculation command that added to the custom toolbox.
b. [->] --- Move to [Customized Buttons] list the calculation command selected in [Available Buttons] list.

Or, double-click the calculation command of [Available Buttons] list.

c. [<-] --- Restores to [Available Buttons] list the calculation command selected in [Customized Buttons] list.

Or, double-click the calculation command of [Customized Buttons] list.

The restored command is deleted from [Custom] toolbar and Custom toolbox.
d. [Customized Buttons] --- The buttons in the list is displayed in Custom toolbar and Custom toolbox.

[Custom] Toolbox:

Notice:

When the [Calculation] toolbox is not displayed, the [Custom] toolbox is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Custom Toolbar]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 5 of 139

Designation Toolbox
Select the designation method of input data.

[Designation] Toolbox:

1. [Point Entry] --- Input a point. *1)

2. [Meas Point Selection] --- Input one point of the measurement point that is the nearest the input position. *1)
3. [X Value Specification] --- Input the coordinate value on the polyline of the measurement point in the input X axis value. *1) *2) *3)
4. [Z Value Specification] --- Input the coordinate value on the polyline of the measurement point in the input Z axis value. *1) *2) *3)
5. [X Range Specification] --- Input the X range. *4) *5)
6. [Z Range Specification] --- Input the Z range. *4) *5)
7. [Rectangular Specification] --- Input the rectangle range. *4)

When you specify by mouse, click the upper(lower) left corner of rectangle. And drag to the lower(upper) right corner.

To cancel the operation, click ESC key.

8. [All Data Specification] --- Specifies all measurement points as the target of calculation.

When there are multiple contours, select one of them.

9. [Result Selection] --- Select the measurement rsult or input the value of measurement result.*6)
10. [X-axis Specification] --- Select the X axis.
11. [Z-axis Specification] --- Select the Z axis.
12. [Measured Point Range Specification] --- Select the measurement points. *4) *5)

*1) Input the point by [Mouse Entry] button or [Key Entry] button of [Input] toolbox.

*2) Cannot specify the difference contour position when there are two or more contours.

*3) Select one when there are two or more input positions.

*4) Input the point by [Result Entry] button or [Mouse Entry] button or [Key Entry] button of [Input] toolbox.

*5) When you use the [Result Entry] button or [Mouse Entry] button, input the both ends point within the range continuously.

*6) Input the point by [Result Entry] button or [Key Entry] button of [Input] toolbox.

Tip:

About memorizing the button operation

The memorized button of [Designation] toolbox is selected automatically.

However, The [All Data Specification]/ [X-axis Specification]/ [Z-axis Specification] button is not selected automatically.

Please refer to [Analyzing Contour] - [Registering Calculation Command].

Notice:

The some button might not be able to be used depending on the executing calculation command.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 6 of 139

See Also

User Indication Toolbox

Allows you to select the target contour of calculation when there are two or more contours.

Also, allows you to repeat the calculation command added to Part Program Window.

[User Indication] Toolbox:

1. [All]*1) --- Selects all contours as the target of the calculation or selects all the measurement points within the range.

Also, when two or more intersections was calculated as the result, selects all intersections as the result.

2. [Determination]*1) --- Executes the calculation using the contour selected by [Previous Contour] or [Next Contour].

3. [Previous Contour]*1) --- Selects the measurement points of the previous contour as the target of calculation.

4. [Next Contour]*1) --- Selects the measurement points of the next contour as the target of calculation.

5. [Repeat Command] --- Repeats the calculation command executed already.

Displays the [Calculation Command Repeat Setup] dialog box.

i. You can save the repeated calculation command to the file..
ii. You can load from the file and execute the repeated calculation command.

*1) This becomes effective when there are two or more contours.

[Calculation Command Repeat Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Repeat calc commands] --- Displays the repeated calculation commands.

At the first time, the calculation command executed at the end is displayed.

To add the calculation command, click the measurement result of Figure Window or click the calculation command of Part Program Window.
b. [Run Mode] --- The [Batch] is the same operation as Batch Run Mode. And [Step] is the same operation as Step Run Mode.
i. [Batch] --- Executes the calculation command by specified repeat number and shift amount.
ii. [Step] --- Execute the calculation command step by step.
c. [X] --- Input the shift amount of X-axis.
d. [Z] --- Input the shift amount of Z-axis.
e. [# of Repeats] --- Input the repeat number.
f. [Execute] --- Executes the repetition of calculation command.
g. [Save] --- Saves the repeated calculation commands to the specified file.
i. Displays the [Save As] dialog box.
ii. Specify the file name or select the existing file.

Loads from the file and executes the repeated calculation command:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 7 of 139

1. Click [Execute Saved Repeat Command] command of [Calculating Procedure] menu.

Displays the [Open] dialog box.

2. Select the file saved the repeated calculation commands.

Adds the repeated calculation commands to the calculation procedure, waits for the input of the step run execution.
3. Click [Repeat Command] button of [User Indication] toolbox.

Displays the repeated calculation commands in the [Calculation Command Repeat Setup] dialog box.
4. Set the repeat number and shift amount. And click [Execute] button.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Command File]

Input Toolbox
Changes the input method of data.

[Input] Toolbox:

1. [Result Entry] --- Input the measurement result as data of the calculation command.

Click the figure or label on the Figure Window, or click the measurement result of Result Window.

2. [Mouse Entry] --- Input the position by using mouse.

Move the mouse cursor to the input position and click the left button.

3. [Key Entry] --- Input the value by [Calculator] dialog box.

4. [Multi-Input] --- You can input the data more than the minimal number.

When you selected this button, the calculation is not executed even if the number of data is filled.

When you want to quit the input, click [Multi-Input] button again.

Tip:

About memorizing the button operation

The memorized button of [Input] toolbox is selected automatically.

Doesn't memorize the first [Key Entry] button operation in order to not display the [Calculator] dialog box when you selected the calculation
command.

Therefore, please select the button manually, when the first memorized button of [Input] toolbox is [Key Entry] button.

Please refer to [Analyzing Contour] - [Registering Calculation Command].

[Calculator] Dialog Box(Example):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 8 of 139

1. Please click the area to enter a numeric value.

Input the value of the polar coordinates by [R/P] button.

2. Input the numeric value by [0] ~ [9] button.

i. Input a decimal point by [.](period) button.

ii. Reverse the sign of the numerical value by [+/-] button.

iii. Cancel the input value by [C] button.

3. Fix the input value by [OK] button.

4. Please click one of the following operators when using the results of the operation.

i. [+] Addition

ii. [-] Subtraction

iii. [×] Multiplication

iv. [÷] Division

v. [√] Square root

5. Please enter the numeric value by the method similar to 2.

6. Click [=] button.

7. To clear all, click [AC] button.

Notice:

Some tool buttons might not be able to be used depending on the active calculation command or the data specification method.

See Also

Calculation Dialog Box

Set the condition of calculation command.

How To:

1. Register the calculation command and input the data.

Displays the [Calculation] dialog box.

2. Set the condition of each tab.
i. [Display] Tab --- Select the display item of the measurement result.
ii. [Display Option] Tab --- Set the color/line type/line width of the measurement result.
iii. [Dimension/Label] Tab --- Change the display method of the dimension and Label.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 9 of 139

iv. [Tolerancing] Tab --- Set the nominal value and the tolerance value.
v. [Calculation] Tab --- Allows you to change to the waiting status for the input while the part program is executing.
vi. [Measured Point] Tab --- Select the process of the measured points after the [Filter]/[Polar Coordinate Development] command.
3. You can set the default condition of the [Calculation] dialog box.

Please refer to each page of [Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation].
4. To show/hide the [Calculation] dialog box, set the condition by [Measurement Result Output Condition Setup] command of the [Measurement]
menu.

[Display] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Measurement Result Display] --- Displays the measurement result.

b. [Measurement Result Items] Group

i. [Statistic](Left) --- Registers the measurement result as the statistics data.

(Displays the check mark to the result in Part Program Window and Measurement Result Window.)
ii. [Figure](Center) --- Displays the measurement result in Figure Window.
iii. [List](Right) --- Displays the measurement result to Measurement Result Window.
c. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in the list.

[Display Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Display Color] --- Select the display color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

b. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.

c. [Line Width] --- Specify the line width or point size.

[Dimension/Label] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 10 of 139

a. [Dimension/Label Display] --- Displays the dimension and label.

b. [Display Method] Group
i. [Simple Display] --- Displays by simple style.
ii. [Dimension Display] --- Displays the dimension and label.
c. [Type] --- Select the type of the dimension display.
d. [Calculation Results Geometric Display Method] Group
i. [Infinite Line or Circle] --- The line is displayed by the infinity length, and the circle is displayed in complete circle.
ii. [Line Segment or Circular Arc] --- The line is displayed by the segment of the specified range. And the circle is displayed by the circular arc.

[Tolerancing] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Set Tolerance] --- Set the nominal value and tolerance value.

Displays the [Tolerance Setup] dialog box.

b. [Display Tolerance] --- Displays the current setting value by the permissible dimension limit.

[Tolerance Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Item] --- Select the output item in order to set the nominal value and tolerance value.
b. [Use Nominal Value] --- Executes the tolerance comparison by using the nominal value.
c. [Nominal Value] --- Input the nominal value.
d. [Tolerancing on + Side] --- Executes the tolerance comparison on + side.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 11 of 139

e. [Upper Tolerance]/[Max. Tol Limit] --- Input the upper tolerance or upper limit.
f. [Tolerancing on - Side] --- Executes the tolerance comparison on - side.
g. [Lower Tolerance]/[Min. Tol Limit] --- Input the lower tolerance or lower limit.

[Calculation] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [When Batch Run] --- Changes to the waiting status for the input, when you execute the Batch Run.
b. [When Step Run] --- Changes to the waiting status for the input, when you execute the Step Run.

To continue here during the execution of Step Run, do not select this.

[Measured Point] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Overwrite Exist Contour] --- Overwrites the existing measurement points.

b. [Addition as a New Contour] --- Adds as the new contour without the change of the measurement point.

The added contour is displayed in the new tab.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of Measurement Result]

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Changing Calculation Condition of Calculation Procedure]

Changing Calculation Method

<Dialog Box> [Calculation Method Setup] [Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method Setup] [Rz Condition] [Contour Trend Compensation Setup] [Aspheric
Expression Setup]

Changes the calculation method.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 12 of 139

How To:

1. Click [Set Calculation Method] command of the [Settings] - [Contour Calc Settings] menu.

Displays the [Calculation Method Setup] dialog box.

2. To set the calculation method of the Pseudo Roughness Parameter, click [Pseudo Roughness Param.] button.

Displays the [Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method Setup] dialog box.

Please refer to

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [About Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method] - [Explanation of
Pseudo Roughness Parameter /Rz Condition]

and

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [About Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method] - [Definition of Pseudo
Roughness Parameter]

for the detail of Pseudo Roughness Parameter.

3. To set the trend compensation of the contour, click [Contour Trend Compensation] button.

Displays the [Contour Trend Compensation Setup] dialog box.

[Calculation Method Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Line] Group
i. [LS : Least Square Method] --- Calculates by Least Square Method*2).
ii. [MZ : Minimum Zone Method] --- Calculates by Minimum Zone Method*2).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 13 of 139

b. [Circle] Group
i. [LSC : Least Square Method] --- Calculates by Least Square Method*2).
ii. [MZC : Min Zone Center Method] --- Calculates by Min Zone Center Method*2).
iii. [MCC : Min Circumscribed Cir Method] --- Calculates by Minimum Circumscribed Circle Center Method.
iv. [MIC : Max Inscribed Cir Method] --- Calculates by Maximum Inscribed Circle Center Method.
c. [Style of Circle] Group
i. [Circle] --- Calculates the circle.
ii. [Circumscribed circle] --- Calculates the circumscribed circle.
iii. [Inscribed circle] --- Calculates the inscribed circle.
d. [Circle(fix radius or center)] Group
i. [Radius] --- Input the radius.
ii. [Center] --- Input the center coordinates.
e. [Circle Dropping] Group
i. [-Z Direction] --- Sets the dropping direction to the minus(-) direction of Z-axis.
ii. [+Z Direction] --- Sets the dropping direction to the plus(+) direction of Z-axis.
f. [Tangent Circle] Group
i. [Min/Max Z Value] --- Calculates the circle of Z-axis Min(-Z) or Z-axis Max(+Z).
ii. [Max Center Angle] --- Calculates the circle of Max Center Angle.
g. [Calc Tangent Circle(Smoothing)] Group
i. [Doesn't smooth Meas Points] --- Calculates the circle without smoothing the measurement points.
ii. [Smooth Meas Points] --- Calculates the smoothing circle.
h. [Remove Abnormal Points] Group
i. [Remove] --- Removes the abnormal points by using Robust Estimation Method*1).
Notice: Case of [Auto Circle/line Conversion] does not apply.
ii. [Default Value(3 Sigma)] --- Set the data range of removal of abnormal points by Robust Estimation Method*1) to default value.
iii. [Effective range] --- --- Select the data range of removal of abnormal points by Robust Estimation Method*1).
i. [Groove Width] Group
i. [X Direction] --- Set the measurement direction of Groove Width to X-axis direction.
ii. [Z Direction] --- Set the measurement direction of Groove Width to Z-axis direction.
j. [Pitch Direction] Group
i. [Distance] --- Calculates the distance between intersections.
ii. [Dir. of Line through Intersections] --- Calculates the distance to the line that connected intersections.
iii. [X Direction] --- Calculates the distance of X-axis.
k. [Position Judgment Method] Group
i. [Up/down(Z Dir) Judgment] --- Judges in the vertical direction.
ii. [Trans(X Dir) Judgment] --- Judges in the right and left.
l. [Kind of Conic Curve] --- Select the kind of conic curve.
m. [Alignment Method] Group
i. [Shift the Measurement Data] --- Shifts the measurement data when the Bestfit is executed.
ii. [Shift the Nominal Data] --- Shifts the nominal data when the Bestfit is executed.
n. [Pseudo Roughness Parameter] --- Set the calculation method of Pseudo Roughness Parameter.

Displays the [Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method Setup] dialog box.
o. [Contour Trend Compensation] --- Set the trend compensation method of the contour.

Displays the [Contour Trend Compensation Setup] dialog box.

p. [Aspheric Option] --- Set the aspheric expression of Aspheric Analysis by using Nominal Data Creation Utility.

Displays the [Aspheric Expression Setup] dialog box.

[Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Definition] --- Select [OLDMIX] or [Revised].

b. [Profile] --- Select the profile to execute the filter process.
c. [Cutoff value] --- Specify the cutoff value of the profile except [P] profile.
d. [Filter] --- Select [Gaussian] or [2CR-PC] or [2CR] in the filter.
e. [Compensation] --- Select [No comp.] or [Mean line].
f. [Rz Condition] --- Set the calculation condition of Rz(Ten points average height) of OLDMIX.

Displays the [Rz Condition] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 14 of 139

g. [mr slice level] --- Input the slice level(Depth from the highest point of the measurement profile) for mr value by percentage(0%-100%) of maximum
height and depth.
h. [Sm count level] --- Input the count level(For calculating the peak or valley in the peak count, set 2 lines parallel to the mean line. The slice level is the
distance from these 2 lines to the mean line.) by the percentage (0 to 50 %) against the maximum height of the profile.

[Rz Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [More than 10 % of Ry value] --- Only the peaks/valleys having height/depth more than 10% of those of maximum height/depth are regarded as
peaks/valleys.
b. [Even if the value is less than 10 % of the Ry] --- The peak and valley are irrelevant to Ry.
c. [Calculating the mean value by 5 data points] --- Calculates the mean value by 5 peaks/valleys.

If the number of points of the peak and height is less than 5, it is treated as an error and the measurement result will not be outputted.
d. [Calculating the mean value with the current data points] --- Even if there are less than 5 peak or valley data points, the mean value can be
calculated with the current data points.

[Contour Trend Compensation Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Compensation] --- Select the compensaion method of the measurement points.

[Aspheric Expression Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [K mode] --- The Aspheric Expression use [K].

b. [K+1 mode] --- The Aspheric Expression use [K+1].

Please refer to User's Manual of Nominal Data Creation Utility.

*1)

About Robust Estimation Method:

Please refer to the following document for Robust Estimation Method.

[J.W.Tukey : Introduction to Today’s Data Analysis, Proceedings of the Conference on Critical Evaluation of Chemical and Physical Structural

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 15 of 139

Information, E.R.Lide,Jr. and M.A.Paul, eds., National Academy of Sciences, Washing-ton(1974), pp.3-14.]

*2)

About Least Square Method and Minimum Zone Center Method

The minimum zone center method provides a smaller calculated value of a geometric tolerance than the least square method does.

Also, the minimum zone center method is subject to the influence of data acquisition on the result and, therefore, it requires a wide, even range and many
pieces of data for a calculation object.

The difference in result caused by the calculation method used is as follows.

Least Square Method Minimum Zone

Center Method
Line calculation Least square line MIN - MAX line

(line calculation by specifying

the range)
Straightness Minimum distance between the Minimum Zone
least squares line and its Center Method
parallel line that bound with the
all measured points.
Circle calculation Least square circle MIN - MAX circle

(circle calculation by specifying

the range)
Roundness Minimum difference between Minimum Zone
the radii of inscribed and Center Method
circumscribed circles
concentric with the least
squares circle.

MIN - MAX line:

It is a line which is parallel to the two lines creating the Minimum Zone for straightness calculation and has an equal distance from them.

MIN - MAX circle:

It is a circle which is concentric with the two circles creating the Minimum Zone for roundness calculation and has a mean radius of them.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [About Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method] - [Explanation of Pseudo
Roughness Parameter /Rz Condition]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [About Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method] - [Definition of Pseudo
Roughness Parameter]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Calculating Pseudo Roughness Parameter]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 16 of 139

Explanation of Pseudo Roughness Parameter /Rz Condition

Explains the setting condition of Pseudo Roughness Parameter and Rz Condition.

Condition Contents
1. [OLDMIX]: OLDMIX is a definition to make a data compatibility with the Mitutoyo measuring machine
that was produced before 1994.
1 Definition
2. [Revised]: Revised is a definition to take standards such as ISO (1996 or later), JIS B0601 (1994), etc. into
account.

1. P No filtering

2. P(Ls) Performs low-pass filtering with wavelength Ls.

3. R Performs high-pass filtering with wavelength Lc.

2 Profile
4. R(Ls) Performs high-pass filtering with wavelength Ls and low-pass filtering with wavelength Ls.

5. W Performs low-pass filtering with wavelength Lc.

Lc and Ls are determined in the cutoff value setting.

Ls is determined by Lc;Ls=Lc/300.
If the number of data points per Ls is 5 or less, Ls filtering will not be performed.

1. [Evaluation length]: A value almost equal to the length of the [measured profile] is set automatically.
2. [Auto setting]: The cutoff value will be set automatically.
l As the initial value, a value that is the maximum but not over the evaluation length from the values
of 0.08, 0.25, 0.8, 2.5, 8.0 will be set.

l After calculating parameter value, if the relation between cutoff value and Ra value is out of the
range in the list below, change the cutoff value and recalculate.

Cutoff value パラメータRa value

[0.08]: Ra <= 0.02
[0.25]: 0.02 ＜ Ra <= 0.1
[0.8]: 0.1 ＜ Ra <= 2.0
[2.5]: 2.0 ＜ Ra <= 10.0
3 Cutoff [8.0]: 10.0 ＜ Ra <= 80.0

Notice:
If there becomes less than 10 data points per cutoff value after changing, the recalculation will not
be performed.
In the same manner, if Ls is specified and the data points per Ls length becomes less than 5 data
points, the recalculation will not be performed.

Examle)

1. If the evaluation length (specified data range) is 1.5 mm, cutoff value Lc is set 0.8 mm as the initial value.

2. If the calculated Ra is 0.05 mm, the cutoff value Lc will be changed to 0.25 mm and recalculated.

3. But, if the data pitch is 0.05 mm, it becomes only 5 data points per 0.25 mm (cutoff value), therefore
recalculation will not be performed.

1. Gaussian: Gaussian filter

4 Filter

2. 2CR-PC: phase compensation type 2CR filter

This is the phase compensation type filter. Its damping characteristic is the same as that of a pair of same
time-constant C-R circuits in series.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 17 of 139

where H(L): damping characteristic Lc: cutoff wave length L: wave length

1. No compensation: Current z=0 level to be as the mean line.

5 Compensation 2. Mean line compensation: Use a calculated least-squares line on the obtained data as the mean line.

Highest peak / Deepest valley

1. [Peak]: The parts over the mean line (convex parts)

2. [Valley]: The parts lower the mean line (concave parts)
3. [Highest peak]: The highest points of each peak
4. [Deepest valley]: The deepest points of each valley

6 Rz Condition

a. Highest peak in the measured profile

b. Peaks in the measured profile
c. More than 10% of the Ry
d. Valleys in the measured profile
e. Deepest valley in measured profile
f. More than 10% of the Ry

When calculating the mr value, the slice level is represented by the percentage (0 to 100 %), which is the depth
7 mr slice level
from the highest peak of the profile against the maximum height of the profile.
For calculating the peak or valley in the peak count, set 2 lines parallel to the mean line. The Sm count level is
the distance from these 2 lines to the mean line.

1. [Peak of the peak count]: On the measured profile, set 2 lines which are parallel to the mean line and are
drawn at equal distances above (+) and below (-) the mean line. The part over the upper line is treated as
8 Sm count level
the "Peak of the peak count".

2. [Valley of the peak count]: On the measured profile, set 2 lines which are parallel to the mean line and are
drawn at equal distances above (+) and below (-) the mean line. The part below the lower line is treated as
the "Valley of the peak count".

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 18 of 139

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Calculating Pseudo Roughness Parameter]

Definition of Pseudo Roughness Parameter

Result Symbol
P R W
Parameter Description Definition
P(Ls) R(Ls)
Ra Arithmetic mean deviation of the profile OLDMIX Pa Ra Wa
Ra is the arithmetic mean deviation of the absolute values of the
distances (Yi) from the mean line to the profile. Revised

Rp Maximum profile peak height OLDMIX Pp Rp Wp

Rp is the maximum value of the distances (Yi) from the mean line
to the profile peak. That is, the maximum peak height of the Revised
profile from the mean line.

Rv Maximum profile valley depth OLDMIX Pv Rv Wv

Rv is the absolute value of the minimum value of the distance
(Yi) from the mean line to the profile. That is, the deepest depth Revised
of the profile from the mean line.

Ry Maximum height of the profile OLDMIX Py Ry Wy

Rz is the sum of the maximum peak height (Yp) and the deepest
valley depth (Yv).

Rz Maximum height of the profile Revised Pz Rz Wz

Rz is the sum of the maximum peak height (Yp) and the deepest
valley depth (Yv).
Rz Ten-point height of irregularities OLDMIX Pz Rz Wz
Rz is the difference between the average height of the five highest
peaks from the mean line and the average depth of the five deepest
valleys from the mean line.

Rq Root-mean-square deviation of the profile OLDMIX Pq Rq Wq

Rq is the root-mean-square sum of distances (Yi) from the mean line
to the profile. Revised

Sm Mean spacing of profile irregularities. OLDMIX P-Sm Sm W-Sm

Sm is equal to the mean wavelength of the peak-valley*1 cycles. (For
Revised
deciding the first peak-valley cycle.*2)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 19 of 139

S Mean spacing of local peaks of the profile OLDMIX P-S S W-S

S is equal to the mean of peak-to-peak distances (Si) of the local
peaks*3. Revised

mr Material ratio of the profile. OLDMIX P-mr mr W-mr

mr is the ratio of the bearing length to the evaluation length. It is
represented in percentage. The bearing length is the sum of section Revised
lengths obtained by cutting the profile with a line (slice level) drawn
parallel to the mean line at a given level.

*1: Peak/valley of the peak count

a: Dead zone, b: Count level

l The range between the two count levels is referred to as the dead zone(Figure - a).

l The two count levels are set at equal distances above and below the mean line.

The distance should be set as a percentage value (between 0 to 50 %), assuming the maximum height of the profile is 100 %. (Standard value is 10 % of
Ry.)

l The two lines(Figure - b) drawn parallel to the mean line in the figure are known as count levels.

l The peak/valley where this count level(dead zone) was exceeded is called peak/valley of the peak count.

l The peak/valley of the peak count is retrieved from the first measurement start point within the range of the calculation, and retrieved one by one.

*2: Determining the peak-valley cycle

In the measurement point within the range to calculate Pseudo Roughness Parameter, the cycle of Sm is different in the case of the retrieval from Peak and the
case of the retrieval from Valley.

Peak-valley cycle starting with peak

1. In the case where data that is lower than the average line exists first(OLDMIX)

In the case where data that is lower than Dead Zone of the valley side exists first(Revised)

2. After data that exceeds Dead Zone of the peak side,

3. there is data that exceeds Dead Zone of the valley side again,
and, there is data that exceeds Dead Zone of the peak side.

4. The intersection(immediately before the position of first exceeding Dead Zone of peak side) at the average line is the start point at one cycle.

5. The intersection(immediately before the position of last exceeding Dead Zone of peak side) at the average line is the end point at one cycle.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 20 of 139

In OLDMIX(a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead Zone) In Revised(a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead Zone)

Peak-valley cycle starting with valley

1. In the case where data that is upper than the average line exists first(OLDMIX)

In the case where data that is upper than Dead Zone of the peak side exists first(Revised)

2. After data that exceeds Dead Zone of the valley side,

3. there is data that exceeds Dead Zone of the peak side again,
and, there is data that exceeds Dead Zone of the valley side.

4. The intersection(immediately before the position of first exceeding Dead Zone of valley side) at the average line is the start point at one cycle.

5. The intersection(immediately before the position of last exceeding Dead Zone of valley side) at the average line is the end point at one cycle.

In OLDMIX(a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead Zone) In Revised(a: Cycle 1, b: Cycle 2, c: Dead Zone)

*3: S Local Peaks

Condition of S Local Peaks

l The Local Valley more than minimum depth(Maximum height/10) exists sideward both.

h1,h2 => Ry/10

l The interval with adjoined S Local Peak(Candidate) is more than minimum value(Evaluation length/100).

S1,S2 => Evaluation length/100

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 21 of 139

Tip:

The lowest point between adjoined S Local Peak is called S Local Valley.

Notice:

In the case of OLDMIX, the minimum value(S1 or S2) of intervals is not considered at both ends of the evaluation length.

However, the [Evaluation Length] is the length of the calculation range that the user selected.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Calculating Pseudo Roughness Parameter]

Changing Output Condition of Measurement Result

Changes the output condition of the measurement result.

How To:

1. Click [Set Output] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Measurement Result Output Condition Setup] dialog box.

2. Click the tab of each output item.

[Measurement Result Output Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Statistic](Left) --- Registers the measurement result as the statistics data.

(Displays the check mark to the result in Part Program Window and Measurement Result Window.)
b. [Figure](Center) --- Displays the measurement result in Figure Window.
c. [List](Right) --- Displays the measurement result to Measurement Result Window.
d. [Displays calculation dialog box] --- Displays the Calculation dialog box, when the calculation command is registered.
e. [Modifies Existing Data] --- Existing data is changed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 22 of 139

See Also

Changing Range Specification Mode

Changes the range specification mode.

How To:

1. Click [Set Range Specification Mode] command of the [Settings] - [Contour Calc Settings] menu.

Displays the [Range Specification Mode Setup] dialog box.

[Range Specification Mode Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Select Specific Contour] --- Select one contour from two or more contours.

b. [Use All Contour] ---Selects all contours.

c. [One Result for Each Contour] --- Calculates the result for each contour.
d. [One Result for All Contour] --- Calculates the result for all contours.
e. [Use Nominal Data]・・・Use Nominal Data.

Notice:

When you specify the range for two or more contours, select the contours appropriately in order to calculate the correct result.

Next figure is an example when circle is calculated specifying the range by [X-Range Specification] command for two contours.

Similar attention is necessary also in [Z-Range Specification] command or [Rectangular Specification] command.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 23 of 139

See Also

Setting Automatic Circle/Line Conversion

Set the condition of Automatic Circle/Line Conversion.

How To:

1. Click [Set Automatic Circle/Line Conversion] command of the [Settings] - [Contour Calc Settings] menu.

Displays the [Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Setup] dialog box.

2. To set the detail condition, click [Detail Setup] button.

Displays the [Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Detail Setup] dialog box.

[Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Method 1] --- To judge that the element is a circle or line, the radius of curvature is used.
b. [Method 2] --- To judge that the element is a circle or line, the tolerance limit of circle/line is used.

Judges the circle or line by tolerance without using the radius of curvature.
c. [Tolerance Limit] --- Input the tolerance limit.

Distance between the line and measurement point reaches this value or less.

When the error value more than this value is generated, the element becomes [Error Element].
d. [Radius of Curvature for] --- Input the radius of curvature.

The radius of curvature is a reference value to be used to judge that the element is a circle or line.

Specify the value of twice the radius of the maximum circle that exists in the measurement point.
e. [Tolerance(Line)] --- Input the tolerance of the line.

Distance between the line and measurement point reaches this value or less.
f. [Tolerance(Circle)] ---Input the tolerance of the circle.

Distance between the circle and measurement point reaches this value or less.
g. [Detail Setup] --- Set the detail condition.

Displays the [Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Detail Setup] dialog box.

[Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Detail Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 24 of 139

a. [Auto] --- Judges the circle/line changing the applying number automatically.

Error Element is reduced.

b. [Manual] --- Specify the applying number.
c. [Points in] --- Input the most small measurement point in the block to be converted.

First of all, the measurement points of this number is applied. If Error Element is not generated, the number of points is increased. And calculates
continuously.
d. [Number of Trials] --- Input the number of times.
e. [Joins the Generated Circles/Lines] --- The element is extended as the adjoined element is consecutive.

When there is no intersection, the element is added and connected.

Sets the element tip position to the position in which the distance between the element and the measurement point is minimized, when the intersection
processing is not executed.
f. [Maximum Distance for Joining] --- Input the maximum distance between the intersection and the measurement point in the intersection processing.

The intersection doesn't exist when the distance exceeds this value.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Executing Automatic Circle/Line Conversion]

Setting Fairing Condition

Set the condition of Fairing.

How To:

1. Click [Set Fairing Condition] command of the [Settings] - [Contour Calc Settings] menu.

Displays the [Default Setting for Fairing Conditions] dialog box.

2. To set the detail condition, click [Detail Setup] button.

Displays the [Fairing Detail Setup] dialog box.

[Default Setting for Fairing Conditions] Dialog Box:

a. [Auto(Data Pitch x 20)] --- Calculates the typical element length automatically.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 25 of 139

b. [Set a Value] --- Set the arbitrary value.

c. [Detail Setup] --- Set the detail condition.

Displays the [Fairing Detail Setup] dialog box.

[Fairing Detail Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Default value (3 Sigma)] --- Use the default value as Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method.
b. [Set a Value] --- Select the Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method.

To set the arbitrary value, select [Arbitrary value].

c. [Default value (Typical element length * 4)] --- Use the default value as Cutoff Value for Moving Average.
d. [Set a Value] --- Input the Cutoff Value for Moving Average.

Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method:

In a polygonal line fitting calculation the effect of abnormal points is automatically eliminated with the robust estimation method.

The group of remaining measured points excluding the points eliminated with the robust estimation method can be assumed to have an approximate normal
distribution.

Also, the threshold is set so as to determine the final fitting geometry using only the measured points within the specific range for the group of remaining
measured points that are assumed to have a normal distribution.

The threshold is set on the basis of standard deviation to be determined from the group of measured points excluding abnormal points.

Cutoff Value for Moving Average:

When measured points are grouped under small sections with a constant length, each dividing position is determined using the result of two-dimensional
moving average filter processing for the measured points, that is expressed as the following formula.

This is because of suppressing the effect of noises included in the measured points and preventing the number of measured points belonging to a small section
from being greatly unbalanced.

This cutoff value of the two-dimensional moving average filter is set as a dividing position.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Smoothing Measurement Point]

Setting Filter Condition

Set the Filter condition.

How To:

1. Click [Set Filter Conditions] command of the [Settings] - [Contour Calc Settings] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 26 of 139

Displays the [Filter Condition Setup] dialog box.

[Filter Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Type] --- Select the filter type.

b. [Method] --- Select the calculation method(Gaussian/2CR-PC/Rolling circle/Spline/Robust Spline).
c. [Auto calc] --- Sets the length of way(sum total of the distance between measurement points) to the cutoff value.
d. [Specify] --- Specify the arbitrary value.
e. [Cutoff value] --- Input the cutoff value.

i. You cannot set a value that is longer than the length of the measurement data.
ii. In the case of Gaussian/2CR-PC/Rolling circle, the measurement point in ten points or more is necessary for one cutoff length.
iii. In the case of Spline/Robust Spline, the measurement point in five points or more is necessary for one cutoff length.

Notice:

1. The filter processing might transform shape.

2. After processing of Constant Pitch, the filter processing is executed. Therefore, the number of measurement points might change before and after the
filter processing.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Executing Filter Processing]

Setting Polar Coordinate Development

Set the condition of Polar Coordinate Development.

How To:

1. Click [Settings for Polar Coordinate Development] command of the [Settings] - [Contour Calc Settings] menu.

Displays the [Polar Coordinate Development Option] dialog box.

[Polar Coordinate Development Option] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 27 of 139

a. [Display Orientation] --- Select the orientation of Polar Coordinate Development.

i. --- The counterclockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of increasing radius vector is displayed as
the vertical axis positive direction.

ii. --- The clockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of increasing radius vector is displayed as the
vertical axis positive direction.

iii. --- The counterclockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of decreasing radius vector is displayed as
the vertical axis positive direction.

iv. --- The clockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of decreasing radius vector is displayed as the
vertical axis positive direction.

Please refer to [Processing Results] - [Changing Polar Coordinate Development Display].

b. [Display horizontal direction as an angle] --- Displays the horizontal axis as the angle.

c. [Origin direction after expand] --- Select the angle on the circumference of the standard circle that is the origin position of a horizontal axis.

d. [Using meas data not expanded for calculation] --- All measurement points are calculated.

The display after development doesn't change.

Tip: Places other than the range of development are displayed by a light blue background.

e. [Display from 0 degrees] --- The meas data is displayed within the range from 0 to 360 degrees.

f. [Overwrite Exist Contour] --- Overwrites the existing measurement points.

g. [Addition as a New Contour] --- Adds as the new contour without the change of the measurement point.

The added contour is displayed in the new tab.

[DataEdit] Tab:

When you select [Addition as a New Contour] of [Measured Point Processing], the measurement points added by [Polar Coordinate Development] command
is displayed in [DataEdit] tab.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Executing Polar Coordinate Development]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Polar Coordinate Development Display]

Setting Minimum T1 Angle Difference

Set minimum θ1 angule difference to judge the different section to be the same section.

1. Click [Set Display Section] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Section Select Settings] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 28 of 139

[Section Select Settings] Dialog Box:

a. [Minimum T1 Angle Difference] --- Input the Angle Difference of T1.

Judges the same section if θ1 angule difference between sections is below minimum T1 angule difference.

The input angle is the range from 0.001° to 5°.

b. [Use the same coordinate system on all sections.] --- Uses the same coordinate system in all sections.

It is necessary to calculate the coordinate system of each section. Therefore, this condition is not recommended.

Notice: You must use this function for interchangeability.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Contour]

Selecting Contour of 3D Measurement

Select the analyzing contour from the contours measured by 3D.

How To:

1. Click [Select Contour to Analyze] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Contour Selection Setup] dialog box.

[Contour Selection Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [No. of Total Contour] --- Displays the total number of all contours.

The total number is the same as the [Number of Profiles] of 3D Measurement.

b. [Contour No. Analyze] --- Select the analyzing contour.

See Also

Displaying Calculation Result in Real Time

Calculate [Point Measurement], [Line Measurement], [Circle Measurement], [Position/Difference], [Distance/Angle], using the mouse position data, and
display the results. Also, the operation in the [Calculation] dialog box is applied in the measurement results in real time.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 29 of 139

The calculation results will be displayed in the calculation result diagram and dimension display in the Figure Window, and in the Measurement Result
Window.

How To:

1. Click [Real time display] command of [View] menu.

See Also

Point Measurement Toolbox

Execute the point measurement command.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Point Measurement] toolbox.

[Point Measurement] Toolbox:

1. [Point] --- Calculates the point.

2. [Peak] --- Calculates the point of the maximum value of Z-axis.
3. [Valley] --- Calculates the point of the minimum value of Z-axis.
4. [Tangent Point] --- Calculates the tangent point.
5. [Perpendicular Line Foot] --- Calculates the perpendicular line foot.
6. [Intersection] --- Calculates the intersection.
7. [Bisector Point] --- Calculates the bisector point.
8. [Inflection Point (Distance)] --- Calculates the point of the specified distance from the base line.
9. [Inflection Point (Angle)] --- Calculates the point that exists at the position of the specified angle from the base line.
10. [Inflection Point (Angle Variation)] --- Calculates the point that exists at the position of the amount of the specified angle change from the base
line.
11. [Calling a point] --- Calculates the past measurement result again with the present coordinate system.

See Also

Calculating Point
Calculates the point.

Calculates the average point when two or more input data exists.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Point] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input the data of one point or more.

Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 30 of 139

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input the measurement result of the point(point or circle).

Input a point by [Point Entry]/ [Measured Point Selection]/ [X Value Specification]/ [Z Value Specification]/ [Result Selection]
of [Specification] toolbox.

Or,

Input the point by [X Range Specification]/ [Z Range Specification]/ [Rectangular Specification]/ [All Data Specification]/
[Measured Point Range Specification] of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Allows you to use [Multi-Input].

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Peak Point

Calculates the point by which the value of the specified coordinate axis becomes the maximum within the specified range.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Peak] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input the calculation range.

Input the data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.
4. Select the coordinate axis(Detecting Direction) in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 31 of 139

Example of Selecting [Z Dir] in [Calculation Option] Tab

1. Input the point within the range by [X Range Specification]/ [Z Range Specification]/ [Measured Point Range Specification] of
[Specification] toolbox.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Peak/Valley point detecting Direction] Group

i. [Z-Direction] --- Calculates the point of the maximum value of Z-axis.
ii. [X-Direction] --- Calculates the point of the maximum value of X-axis.
iii. [R-Direction] --- Calculates the point of the maximum value of R Direction.

The R direction is the direction where the direction away from the origin point of the coordinate system and the R value becomes bigger.
b. [Peak Point] Group
i. [Maximum distant point] --- The result is the one with the highest absolute value for both the peak point and the bottom point.

Notice: If "R-Direction" is selected for "Peak/Valley point detecting Direction", it will not be applied.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 32 of 139

Calculating Valley Point

Calculates the point by which the value of the specified coordinate axis becomes the minimum within the specified range.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Valley] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.

3. Input the calculation range.

Input the data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.
4. Select the coordinate axis(Detecting Direction) in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

Example of Selecting [Z Dir] in [Calculation Option] Tab

1. Input the point within the range by [X Range Specification]/ [Z Range Specification]/ [Measured Point Range Specification] of
[Specification] toolbox.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Z Dir] --- Calculates the point of the minimum value of Z-axis.

b. [X Dir] --- Calculates the point of the minimum value of X-axis.
c. [R Dir] --- Calculates the point of the minimum value of R Direction.

The R direction is the direction where the direction away from the origin point of the coordinate system and the R value becomes bigger.

Measurement Result:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 33 of 139

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Contact Point

Calculates the contact point between point and circle, or between circles.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Contact Point] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.
3. Select the measurement result of point or circle.

The input order is not related.

When two or more measurement results exist, the demand of the selection is displayed.

Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection of Point and Circle:

1. Input a point.

2. Select a circle.

Example of Measurement Result Selection of Circle and Circle:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 34 of 139

1. Select a circle.

2. Select a circle.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)

3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Perpendicular Line Foot

Calculates the perpendicular line foot.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Perpendicular Line Foot] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.
3. Select the measurement result of the point and select the measurement result of the line or circle.

The input order is not related.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 35 of 139

1. Input a point.

2. Select the line or circle.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)

3. Distance from Origin Point(L)

4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)

5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Intersection
Calculates the Intersection.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Intersection] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input the necessary data to calculate the intersection below.
i. Intersection of Line and Line/X-axis and Line/Z-axis and Line
ii. Intersection of Line and Circle/Line and Circle/X-axis and Circle/Z-axis and Circle
iii. Intersection of Circle and Circle
iv. Intersection of Line and Line by the input of four points
v. Intersection of Line and Polyline of measurement points
vi. Intersection of Circle and Polyline of measurement point

Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

When two or more measurement results exist, the demand of the selection is displayed.

Tip:

When you use [Multi-Input], You can calculate the intersection of multiple figures in the command operation of once.

Example of Measurement Result Selection of Intersection of Line and Line/X-axis and Line/Z-axis and Line:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 36 of 139

Input the Line/Coordinates Axis.

1. Input Method of Line

i. Select the measurement result of Line by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
ii. Or, specify the calculation range of Line by clicking [X Range Specification] button or [Measured Point Range Specification] button
of [Specification] toolbox.

Notice:

Calculates the least square line by using the measurement point within the specified range.

The calculated least square line is not displayed.

2. Input Method of Coordinates Axis

Click [X-axis Specification] button or [Z-axis Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Tip:

The input order is not related.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

Intersection of Line and Circle/Line and Circle/X-axis and Circle/Z-axis and Circle

Input the Line/Circle/Coordinates Axis.

1. Input Method of Line

Select the measurement result of Line by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Input Method of Coordinates Axis

Click [X-axis Specification] button or [Z-axis Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

3. Input Method of Circle

Select the measurement result of Circle by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Tip:

The input order is not related.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 37 of 139

Intersection of Circle and Circle

Input the two circle.

1. Input Method of Circle

Select the measurement result of Circle by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Intersection of Line and Line by the input of four points

Input two points for No.1 Line and two points for No.2 Line.

1. Input Method of Point

i. Select the measurement result of Line by clicking [Point Entry] button of [Specification] toolbox.
ii. Select the measurement point by clicking [Meas Point Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
iii. Input the value of X-axis by clicking [X-Value Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.
iv. Input the value of Z-axis by clicking [Z-Value Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Intersection of Line and Polyline of measurement points

Input the measurement point and the line.

1. Input Method of Line

Select the measurement result of Line by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Input Method of Measurement Point

Click [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 38 of 139

Intersection of Circle and Polyline of measurement point

Input the measurement point and the circle.

1. Input Method of Circle

Select the measurement result of Circle by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Input Method of Measurement Point

Click [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Midpoint
Calculates the midpoint.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Bisector Point] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input the necessary data to calculate the midpoint below.
i. Midpoint between points, or between point and center point of circle, or between center points of circle
ii. Midpoint of the shortest segment from point(center of circle) to line
iii. Point, at which the X-axis or Z-axis coordinate value is the center in the specified range, on the line obtained by straight connecting the measured
points.
iv. Point, at which the X-axis coordinate value is the center in the measured points, on the line obtained by straight connecting the measured points.

Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

When two or more measurement results exist, the demand of the selection is displayed.

4. Select the coordinate axis(Detecting Direction) in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 39 of 139

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

Midpoint between points, or between point and center point of circle, or between center points of circle

Input the point or circle.

1. Input Method of Point

Select the measurement result of Point by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Input Method of Circle

Select the measurement result of Circle by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Tip:

The input order is not related.

Midpoint of the shortest segment from point(center of circle) to line

Input the point(or circle) and line.

1. Input Method of Point

Select the measurement result of Point by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Input Method of Circle

Select the measurement result of Circle by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
3. Input Method of Line

Select the measurement result of Line by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Tip:

The input order is not related.

Point, at which the X-axis or Z-axis coordinate value is the center in the specified range, on the line obtained by straight connecting the measured
points.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 40 of 139

Specify the range.

1. Input Method of Range

Specify the range by clicking [X Range Specification]/ [Z Range Specification]/ [Measured Point Range Specification] of
[Specification] toolbox.

Notice:

When there are multiple contours, the midpoint of each contours is calculated.

Point, at which the X-axis coordinate value is the center in the measured points, on the line obtained by straight connecting the measured points.

Click [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Notice:

When there are multiple contours, the midpoint of each contours is calculated.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [X-Direction] --- Calculates the midpoint of X-axis.

b. [Z-Direction] --- Calculates the midpoint of Z-axis.

Measurement Result:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 41 of 139

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Inflection Point(Distance)

Calculates the point separated from the datum line at the specified distance.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Inflection Point(Distance)] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Specify the range for calculating the datum line.

Specify the range by clicking [X Range Specification] button or [Measured Point Range Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Specify for the range of calculating the inflection points not to intersect with the range of calculating the datum line.

Specify the range by clicking [X Range Specification] button or [Measured Point Range Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Notice:

Calculates the inflection points sequentially from the point, the X-axis coordinate value which is nearest the range of calculating the datum line.
3. Specify the distance from the datum line.

Input the measurement result of distance by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Measurement Result:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 42 of 139

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)
6. Distance from Datum Line

See Also

Calculating Inflection Point(Angle)

Determine the first point(Inflection Point) separated from the datum line at a given angle.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Inflection Point(Angle)] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.

3. Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Specify the range for calculating the datum line.

Specify the range by clicking [X Range Specification] button or [Measured Point Range Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Specify for the range of calculating the inflection points not to intersect with the range of calculating the datum line.

Specify the range by clicking [X Range Specification] button or [Measured Point Range Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Notice : Calculates the inflection points sequentially from the point, the X-axis coordinate value which is nearest the range of calculating the datum line.

3. Specify the pitch of the measured points.

Calculate the angle with respect to the datum line, using the line connecting the point to be calculated with the measured point separated by this pitch.

Input the measurement result of distance by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
4. Specify the angle with the datum line.

Input the measurement result of angle by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Notice: Specify an angle within a range between -90 degree and +90 degree.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 43 of 139

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)
6. Angle with Datum Line

See Also

Calculating Inflection Point(Angle Difference)

Calculates the point at the specified angle with the datum line

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Inflection Point(Angle Difference)] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.

3. Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Specify the range for calculating the datum line.

Specify the range by clicking [X Range Specification] button or [Measured Point Range Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.
2. Specify for the range of calculating the inflection points not to intersect with the range of calculating the datum line.

Specify the range by clicking [X Range Specification] button or [Measured Point Range Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Notice : Calculates the inflection points sequentially from the point, the X-axis coordinate value which is nearest the range of calculating the datum line.

3. Specify the pitch of the measured points.

An angle difference is calculated using the tangent line between the line connecting the measured point to be calculated with the measured point
separated by this pitch and the point immediately before that to be calculated.

Input the measurement result of distance by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.
4. Specify the angle difference.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 44 of 139

Input the measurement result of angle by clicking [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Notice: Specify an angle within a range between -90 degree and +90 degree.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)
6. Angle Difference

See Also

Re-calculating Point Measurement Result of Call

Calls the measurement result of point and calculates by the current coordinates system and adds as the result of new calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Click [Point Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Calling a point] button of [Point Measurement] toolbox.
3. Select the result of point measurement on the Figure Window.

Or, click the calculation procedure in the Part Program Window.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

2. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)

3. Distance from Origin Point(L)
4. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
5. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 45 of 139

See Also

Line Measurement Toolbox

Calculates the line.

How To:

1. Click [Line Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Line Measurement] toolbox.

[Line Measurement] Toolbox:

1. [Line] --- Calculates the line.

2. [Tangent Line] --- Calculates the tangent line.
3. [Perpendicular] --- Calculates the perpendicular.
4. [Parallel Line] --- Calculates the parallel line.
5. [Bisector Line] --- Calculates the bisector line.
6. [Oblique Line] --- Calculates the oblique line.
7. [Call Line] --- Recalculates the result of line measurement using the current coordinates system.

See Also

Calculating Line
Calculates the line.

How To:

1. Click [Line Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Line Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Line] button of [Line Measurement] toolbox.

3. Input two measurement results or more in the following order.

4. When you calculate the line by Least Square Method, select [Least Square Method] in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

Or, when you calculate the line by Minimum Zone Center Method, select [Min Zone Method] in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input a point.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 46 of 139

Input a point by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value Specification] / [Result
Selection] button.

Or, input the points within the specified range by [X Range Specification] / [Z Range Specification] / [Rectangular Specification] /
[All Data Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification].

The selectable measurement result is the point(point or circle).

You can input the multiple data by using [Multi-Input] button.

2. Repeat the point input by the similar method.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [LS : Least Square Method] --- Calculates by Least Square Method.

b. [MZ：Minimum Zone Method] --- Calculates by Minimum Zone Method.
c. [Remove Abnormal Point] --- Removes the abnormal points by using Robust Estimation Method.

Notice: Case of [Auto Circle/line Conversion] does not apply.

d. [To set the range of effective data] --- Specify the effective data range of removal of abnormal points by Robust Estimation Method.
e. [Default(3 Sigma)] ---Set the data range of removal of abnormal points by Robust Estimation Method.
f. [Eff. Data Range] --- Select the effective data range for Robust Estimation Method.

About Least Square Method and Minimum Zone Center Method:

The least squares method is not subject to the influence of data acquisition on the result than the minimum zone center method.

The minimum zone center method provides a smaller calculated value of a geometric tolerance than the least squares method does. However the minimum
zone center method is subject to the influence of data acquisition on the result.

An enough density is necessary for data. Moreover, data should exist as evenly as possible.

About Robust Estimation Method:

Please refer to the following document for Robust Estimation Method.

[J.W.Tukey : Introduction to Today’s Data Analysis, Proceedings of the Conference on Critical Evaluation of Chemical and Physical Structural
Information, E.R.Lide,Jr. and M.A.Paul, eds., National Academy of Sciences, Washing-ton(1974), pp.3-14.]

Measurement Result:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 47 of 139

1. Distance from Origin Point(L)

2. Line inclination(C) ---Angle from X-axis(from -90 degree to +90 degree)

3. Straightness(ST) --- Outputs the straightness when three measurement results or more are input.

4. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Tangent Line

Calculates the tangent line between point and circle or between circles.

How To:

1. Click [Line Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Line Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Tangent Line] button of [Line Measurement] toolbox.

3. Input two measurement results of point or circle.

The input order is not related.

When two or more measurement results exist, the demand of the selection is displayed.

Input method for calculating the tangent line from point and circle:

1. Input a point.

2. Select a circle.

Input method for calculating the tangent line from two circles:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 48 of 139

1. Select a circle.

2. Select a circle.

Measurement Result:

1. Distance from Origin Point(L)

2. Line inclination(C) ---Angle from X-axis(from -90 degree to +90 degree)

3. Straightness(ST) --- Outputs the straightness when three measurement results or more are input.

4. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Perpendicular
Calculates the line at which the distance between point and line or point and circle is minimized.

How To:

1. Click [Line Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Line Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Perpendicular] button of [Line Measurement] toolbox.

3. Select the measurement result of the point and select the measurement result of the line or circle.

The input order is not related.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 49 of 139

1. Input a point.

2. Select the line or circle.

Measurement Result:

1. Distance from Origin Point(L)

2. Line inclination(C) ---Angle from X-axis(from -90 degree to +90 degree)

3. Straightness(ST) --- Outputs the straightness when three measurement results or more are input.

4. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Parallel Line

Calculates the line which passes through the specified point and parallel to the specified line or coordinate axis.

How To:

1. Click [Line Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Line Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Parallel Line] button of [Line Measurement] toolbox.

3. Input two measurement results in the following order.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 50 of 139

1. Select the line by clicking [Result Selection] button.

Or, click [X-axis Specification] / [Z-axis Specification] button.

2. Input the point(point or circle).

Measurement Result:

1. Distance from Origin Point(L)

2. Line inclination(C) ---Angle from X-axis(from -90 degree to +90 degree)

3. Straightness(ST) --- Outputs the straightness when three measurement results or more are input.

4. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Bisector Line

Calculates the bisector line perpendicular to the line segment at which the distance between points or point and line is minimized.

Or, calculates the bisector line of the angle given by two lines.

How To:

1. Click [Line Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Line Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Bisector Line] button of [Line Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input the necessary data to calculate the Bisector Line below.
i. Case of calculating the bisector line perpendicular to the line segment at which the distance between points or point and line is minimized.
ii. Case of calculating the bisector line of the angle given by two lines.

Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

The input order is not related.

When two or more measurement results exist, the demand of the selection is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 51 of 139

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

Case of calculating the bisector line perpendicular to the line segment at which the distance between points or point and line is minimized.

1. Input a point.

2. Select the point or line.

Case of calculating the bisector line of the angle given by two lines.

1. Select the line.

2. Select the line.

Measurement Result:

1. Distance from Origin Point(L)

2. Line inclination(C) ---Angle from X-axis(from -90 degree to +90 degree)

3. Straightness(ST) --- Outputs the straightness when three measurement results or more are input.

4. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Oblique Line

Specify the point on which the line will pass through and an angle from the X-axis and calculates the line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 52 of 139

How To:

1. Click [Line Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Line Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Oblique Line] button of [Line Measurement] toolbox.

3. Input two measurement results of point and angle in the following order.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input a point.

Then the line that passes this point will be calculated.

2. Input the angle from the X-axis in the coordinate system.

Measurement Result:

1. Distance from Origin Point(L)

2. Line inclination(C) ---Angle from X-axis(from -90 degree to +90 degree)

3. Straightness(ST) --- Outputs the straightness when three measurement results or more are input.

4. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Re-calculating Line Measurement Result of Call

Re-calculates the result of circle measurement by using the current coordinates system, and adds as the result of new calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Click [Line Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Line Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Call Line] button of [Line Measurement] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 53 of 139

3. Select the result of line measurement on the Figure Window.

Or, click the calculation procedure in the Part Program Window.

Measurement Result:

1. Distance from Origin Point(L)

2. Line inclination(C) ---Angle from X-axis(from -90 degree to +90 degree)

3. Straightness(ST) --- Outputs the straightness when three measurement results or more are input.

4. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Circle Measurement Toolbox

Calculates the circle.

How To:

1. Click [Circle Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle Measurement] toolbox.

[Circle Measurement] Toolbox:

1. [Circle] --- Calculates the circle.

2. [Circle (Center, Radius)] --- Calculates the circle by specifying the center and radius.

3. [Circle (2 Points)] --- Calculates the circle by specifying two points on the circumference.

4. [Tangent Circle] --- Calculates the circle which is tangential with two lines.

5. [Tangent Circle (Meas Point)] --- Calculates the circle tangential to measured points.

6. [Circle(radius or center fixed)] ---Calculates the circle by fixing the position of the radius or the center.

7. [Calling a circle] --- Re-calculates the result of circle measurement by using the current coordinates system, and adds as the result of new
calculation procedure.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 54 of 139

Calculating Circle
Calculates the circle.

How To:

1. Click [Circle Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Circle] button of [Circle Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input three measurement results or more in the following order.
4. Set the calculation method in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
i. Case of selection of [LSC:Least Square Method] and [Inscribed]

The center of the circle calculated with LSC doesn't move. And, the calculation data is all positioned outside of the circle. And, Circle that the
radius is the maximum is calculated.
ii. Case of selection of [LSC:Least Square Method] and [Circumscribed]

The center of the circle calculated with LSC doesn't move. And, the calculation data is all positioned inside of the circle. And, Circle that the
radius is the minimum is calculated.
iii. Case of selection of [MZC:Min Zone Method] and [Inscribed]

Calculates the circles that minimizes the zone between two circles. And, selects a circle of the small radius as the result.
iv. Case of selection of [MZC:Min Zone Method] and [Circumscribed]

Calculates the circles that minimizes the zone between two circles. And, selects a circle of the large radius as the result.
v. Case of selection of [MZC:Min Zone Method] and [Cir]

Calculates the circles that minimizes the zone between two circles. And, calculates a concentric circle of the average radius of two circles as the
result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input a point.
i. Input the point(point or circle) by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value
Specification] / [Result Selection] button.
ii. Or, input a point(point or circle) within the specified range by [X Range Specification] / [Z Range Specification] / [All Data
Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification] button.
2. Repeat the point input by the similar method.
3. Repeat the point input by the similar method.
4. You can input the multiple points by using [Multi-Input] button.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 55 of 139

a. [Geometric Calc Method for Circle] Group

i. [LSC:Least Square Method] --- Calculates by Least Square Method.
ii. [MZC:Min Zone Method] --- Calculates by Minimum Zone Method.
iii. [MCC : Min Circumscribed Cir Method] --- Calculates by Minimum Circumscribed Circle Center Method.
iv. [MIC : Max Inscribed Cir Method] --- Calculates by Maximum Inscribed Circle Center Method.
b. [Style of Circle] Group
i. [Circle] --- Calculates the circle.
ii. [Circumscribed circle] --- Calculates the circumscribed circle.
iii. [Inscribed circle] --- Calculates the inscribed circle.
c. [Remove Abnormal Point] Group
i. [Remove Abnormal Point] --- Removes the abnormal points by using Robust Estimation Method.

Notice: Case of [Auto Circle/line Conversion] does not apply.

ii. [To set the range of effective data] --- Specify the effective data range of removal of abnormal points by Robust Estimation Method.
iii. [Default(3 Sigma)] ---Set the data range of removal of abnormal points by Robust Estimation Method.
iv. [Eff. Data Range] --- Select the effective data range for Robust Estimation Method.

About Least Square Method and Minimum Zone Center Method:

The least squares method is not subject to the influence of data acquisition on the result than the minimum zone center method.

The minimum zone center method provides a smaller calculated value of a geometric tolerance than the least squares method does. However the minimum
zone center method is subject to the influence of data acquisition on the result.

An enough density is necessary for data. Moreover, data should exist as evenly as possible.

About Robust Estimation Method:

Please refer to the following document for Robust Estimation Method.

[J.W.Tukey : Introduction to Today’s Data Analysis, Proceedings of the Conference on Critical Evaluation of Chemical and Physical Structural
Information, E.R.Lide,Jr. and M.A.Paul, eds., National Academy of Sciences, Washing-ton(1974), pp.3-14.]

Measurement Result:

1. Radius(R)
2. Diameter(D)
3. Roundness(RN)
4. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)
5. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
6. Distance from Origin Point(L)
7. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
8. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 56 of 139

Notice:

Outputs the roundness when four points or more are input.

However, Roundness is not output for the inscribed circle and circumscribed circle.

See Also

Calculating Circle (Center, Radius)

Calculates the circle by specifying the center and radius.

How To:

1. Click [Circle Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Circle (Center, Radius)] button of [Circle Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input two measurement results in the following order.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input a point(point or circle) to become a center of circle.

2. Input a distance to become a radius of circle by [Result Entry] button or [Key Entry] button.

Measurement Result:

1. Radius(R)

2. Diameter(D)

3. Roundness(RN)

4. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

5. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)

6. Distance from Origin Point(L)

7. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 57 of 139

8. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

Notice:

Outputs the roundness when four points or more are input.

However, Roundness is not output for the inscribed circle and circumscribed circle.

See Also

Calculating Circle (2 Points)

Calculates a circle of which the diameter is the distance between two specified points.

How To:

1. Click [Circle Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Circle (2 Points)] button of [Circle Measurement] toolbox.
3. Select the measurement result of point or circle.

The input order is not related.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input the point(point or circle).

2. Input the point(point or circle).

Measurement Result:

1. Radius(R)

2. Diameter(D)

3. Roundness(RN)

4. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 58 of 139

5. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)

6. Distance from Origin Point(L)

7. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)

8. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

Notice:

Outputs the roundness when four points or more are input.

However, Roundness is not output for the inscribed circle and circumscribed circle.

See Also

Calculating Tangent Circle

Calculates a circle that is tangent to two lines.

How To:

1. Click [Circle Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Tangent Circle] button of [Circle Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input three measurement results in the following order.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Select the line.

2. Select the line.

3. Specify the radius of tangent circle.

Select the distance by [Result Selection] button.

Or, Input the value of radius by [Key Entry] button.

Measurement Result:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 59 of 139

1. Radius of Tangent Circle

2. Diameter of Tangent Circle

3. X-axis and Z-axis coordinate values of the contact point

4. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

5. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)

6. Distance from Origin Point(L)

7. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)

8. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Tangent Circle (Meas Point)

Calculates a circle that is tangent to measurement points.

How To:

1. Click [Circle Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Tangent Circle (Meas Point)] button of [Circle Measurement] toolbox.
3. Input two measurement results in the following order.

Select one when two or more measurement results exist.

4. Set the calculation method in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
i. Select [Min/Max Z Value] of [Tangent Circle] in order to calculate the tangent circle that Z-axis coordinates value of the center position is
minimum or the maximum.
ii. Select [Max Center Angle] of [Tangent Circle] in order to calculate the tangent circle of which the angle of center of the contact point is
maximum.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Specify the radius of tangent circle.

2. Select the distance by [Result Selection] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 60 of 139

Or, Input the value of radius by [Key Entry] button.

3. Specify the range or the X position for calculating the tangent circle.

Input the point(point or circle) within the range by [X Range Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification] button.

Specify the X position of circle by [X Value Specification] button.

When X position is specified, the position of the tangent circle is the first position in which the circle touches the measurement point by moving the
circle to the direction of the Z-axis.
4. You can input ranges up to two by [Multi-Input] button.

When you select [Smooth Meas Points] in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box,

Input the two ranges including each line to smooth the V groove like the following examples correctly.

Notice:

When the range to cross the multiple contours is specified, the tangent circle is calculated on each contour.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [-Z Direction] --- Tangent Circle(measurement point) is moved to a negative side of Z-axis.
b. [+Z Direction] --- Tangent Circle(measurement point) is moved to a positive side of Z-axis.
c. [Min/Max Z Value] --- Calculates the tangent circle(measurement point) of Z-axis Min(-Z)/Max(+Z) value.
d. [Max Center Angle] --- Calculates the circle of Max Center Angle.
e. [Use Meas Points as they are] --- Calculates the Tangent Circle(Meas Point) without not smoothing the measurement points.
f. [Smooth Meas Points] --- Calculates the Tangent Circle(Meas Point) by smoothing.

About Smoothing:

You can perform the smoothing by fitting the circle or line to the measurement points

The range of smoothing is the range of Tangent Circle(Meas Point) command.

You can specify the ranges up to two, and the circle or line fits each range.

When two or more shape(Line+Circle+Line in ex.1) is included within one range, you do not obtain a correct result.

Please set the range so that one shape is included within the range. Or, please set two ranges.

ex.1) The range is set for R groove so that one circle is included.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 61 of 139

ex.2) Two ranges are set for the R groove with drain so as not to contain the oil drain.

ex.3) Two ranges are set for the V groove so as to contain each line.

Measurement Result:

1. Radius of Tangent Circle

2. Diameter of Tangent Circle
3. Center Angle between contact points(0-180)
4. X-axis and Z-axis coordinate values of the contact point
5. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)
6. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
7. Distance from Origin Point(L)
8. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
9. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

See Also

Calculating Circle(Fixed Radius or Center)

Calculates the circle by fixing the radius or the center position.

How To:

1. Click [Circle Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Circle(radius or center fixed)] button of [Circle Measurement] toolbox.
3. Select the measurement result of Circle. Or, Input the radius or the center coordinates value.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 62 of 139

Example of selection of measurement result in the case of calculating by fixing the center position of the selected circle from measurement result:

1. Click [Calculation Result Selection] button of [Designation] toolbox.

2. Select a circle from the calculation result.

Example of selection of measurement result in the case of calculating by inputting the radius or the center:

1. Click [Key Entry] button of [Input] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle(radius or center fixed)] dialog box.

2. Input the radius or the center coordinates.

[Circle(radius or center fixed)] Dialog Box:

a. [Radius] --- Calculates the circle by fixing the radius.

b. [Radius] --- Input the value of radius.

c. [Cir center] --- Calculates the circle by fixing the center coordinates.

d. [X-Coord] --- Input the X coordinates value of the center.

e. [Z-Coord] --- Input the Z coordinates value of the center.

Measurement Result:

1. Radius(R)

2. Diameter(D)

3. Roundness(RN)

4. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 63 of 139

5. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)

6. Distance from Origin Point(L)

7. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)

8. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

Notice:

Outputs the roundness when four points or more are input.

However, Roundness is not output for the inscribed circle and circumscribed circle.

Tip:

When the circle is calculated by [Circle] button, the circle is calculated on the condition that three parameters(radius/X coordinates value/Z coordinates
value) are unknowns.

When the circle is calculated by [Circle(radius or center fixed)] button, the circle is calculated on the condition that two parameters(X coordinates
value/Z coordinates value) are unknowns, or the circle is calculated on the condition that the radius parameters is unknown.

See Also

Re-calculating Circle Measurement Result of Call

Re-calculates the result of circle measurement by using the current coordinates system, and adds as the result of new calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Click [Circle Measurement] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Circle Measurement] toolbox.

2. Click [Calling a circle] button of [Circle Measurement] toolbox.
3. Select the result of circle measurement on the Figure Window.

Or, click the calculation procedure in the Part Program Window.

Measurement Result:

1. Radius(R)
2. Diameter(D)
3. Roundness(RN)
4. X-axis Coordinates Value(X)
5. Z-axis Coordinates Value(Z)
6. Distance from Origin Point(L)
7. CCW Angle from X-axis(A)(0-360)
8. Distance from Distance datum(Case to set Distance datum)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 64 of 139

See Also

Position/Difference Toolbox
Calculates the position or the coordinate difference.

How To:

1. Click [Position/Difference] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Position/Difference] toolbox.

[Position/Difference] Toolbox:

1. [Coordinate Difference] --- Calculates the coordinate difference.

2. [Position Judgment] --- Judges the position of the point to the line or circle.

See Also

Calculating Coordinate Difference

Calculates the coordinate difference between two points.

How To:

1. Click [Position/Difference] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Position/Difference] toolbox.

2. Click [Coordinate Difference] button of [Position/Difference] toolbox.

3. Input two measurement results.

The input order is not related.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input the point(point or circle).

2. Input the point(point or circle).

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis coordinate difference(XD) --- Calculates the absolute value of the X-axis coordinate difference.
2. Z-axis coordinate difference(ZD) --- Calculates the absolute value of the Z-axis coordinate difference.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 65 of 139

3. Radius vector difference(LD) --- Calculates the absolute value of a radius vector difference from the origin.
4. Angle difference(AD) --- the absolute value of an angle difference counterclockwise from the X-axis.(0 degree - 180 degree)

See Also

Judging Position
Judges the position of the point to the line.

Or, judges whether the position of the point is inside or outside of the circle.

How To:

1. Click [Position/Difference] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Position/Difference] toolbox.

2. Click [Position Judgment] button of [Position/Difference] toolbox.

3. Input two measurement results in the following order.

4. Select the method of Position Judgment in [Calc Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input the point to judge the position.

Input the point by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value Specification] button.

Or, input the point by [Result Selection] button.

2. To judge the position, input the reference geometric data(line or circle).

Notice: When you select the circle for the reference geometric data, the calculation option is not displayed.

[Calc Option] Tab of [Position Judgment] Dialog Box:

a. [Up/Down (Z-Dir) Judgment] --- Judges whether the point resides on the upper or lower side of the line.
b. [Trans (X-Dir) Judgment] --- Judges whether the point resides on the left or right side of the line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 66 of 139

Measurement Result:

1. The X-axis coordinate value of the point

2. The Z-axis coordinate value of the point

3. Judgment Result

I. Case of selecting the line(as the reference geometric data) and [Up/Down (Z-Dir) Judgment].

i. Point resides on the + Z side with respect to the line = 1.0

ii. Point resides on the line = 0.0

iii. Point resides on the - Z side with respect to the line =-1.0

II. Case of selecting the line(as the reference geometric data) and [Trans (X-Dir) Judgment].

i. Point resides on the + X side with respect to the line = 1.0

ii. Point resides on the line = 0.0

iii. Point resides on the - X side with respect to the line =-1.0

III. Case of selecting the circle.

i. Point resides inside the circle = 1.0

ii. Point resides on the circumference = 0.0

iii. Point resides outside the circle =-1.0

See Also

Distance/Angle Toolbox
Calculates the distance and the angle.

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

[Distance/Angle] Toolbox:

1. [Distance] --- Calculates the distance.

2. [Distance Reference] --- Set the distance reference of the distance calculation.
3. [Step] --- Calculates the step.
4. [Groove] --- Calculates the groove width or groove depth.
5. [Pitch] --- Calculates the pitch.
6. [Pitch (between Centers)] --- Calculates the pitch between centers of circles.
7. [Angle] --- Calculates the angle.
8. [Journey] --- Calculates the total distance between adjacent points.

See Also

Calculating Distance
Calculates the distance.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 67 of 139

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

2. Click [Distance] button of [Distance/Angle] toolbox.
3. Input two measurement results referring to the example of selecting the following.

The input order is not related.

i. Example of selection of point and point. or point and line
ii. Example of selection of point and circle. or line and circle
iii. Example of selection of circle and circle

Example of selection of point and point. or point and line:

1. Select the point.

2. Select the point or line.

Measurement result of distance between point and point, or between point and line:

1. The minimum distance between point and point, or between point and line(LC)

Example of selection of point and circle. or line and circle:

1. Select the point or line.

2. Select a circle.

Measurement result of distance between point and circle, or between line and circle:

1. The minimum distance between point/line and the center of circle(LC)

2. The minimum distance between point/line and the center(LS) --- LC - Radius2
3. The maximum distance between point/line and the center(LL) --- LC + Radius2

Example of selection of circle and circle:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 68 of 139

1. Select a circle.
2. Select a circle.

Measurement result of distance between circle and circle:

1. The distance between the centers of two circles (LC)

2. The minimum distance between two circles(LS) --- LC - Radius1 - Radius2
3. The maximum distance between two circles(LL) --- LC + Radius1 + Radius2

See Also

Setting Distance Reference

Set the distance reference of the distance calculation.

When you calculate the point/line/circle after setting the distance reference, the distance from the distance reference is calculated as the measurement result.

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

2. Click [Distance Reference] button of [Distance/Angle] toolbox.
3. Switches the setting status of the distance reference.

Displays the setting status of the distance reference in [Status] bar.

4. Select a measurement result referring to the following example of selection, when the distance reference is set.
i. Example of measurement result selection when distance reference is a point
ii. Example of measurement result selection when distance reference is a line

Example of measurement result selection when distance reference is a point:

1. Input the point of distance reference.

Input the point(point or circle) by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value Specification] /
[Result Selection] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 69 of 139

Measurement result when distance reference is a point:

1. X-axis coordinate value of point of distance reference

2. Z-axis coordinate value of point of distance reference

Example of measurement result selection when distance reference is a line:

1. Input the line of distance reference.

Input the line by [Result Selection] button.

Measurement result when distance reference is a line:

1. The distance from the origin point

2. The line inclination --- The angle from the X-axis(from -90 degree to +90 degree)

See Also

Calculating Step
Calculates the step.

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

2. Click [Step] button of [Distance/Angle] toolbox.
3. Input two measurement results in the following order.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Specify the range to calculate the reference line by inputting the measurement result of point(point or circle).

2. Specify the calculation position or the calculation range of the step.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 70 of 139

i. Calculation Position of the Step --- Input the point by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] /
[Z Value Specification] button.

ii. Calculation Range --- Input the calculation range by [X Range Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification] button.

Measurement Result:

1. The minimum distance from the reference line, when you input the calculation position(input the point in No.2)

The mean distance from the reference line, when you input the calculation range(input the range in No.2)

2. the maximum distance from the reference line

3. the minimum distances from the reference line

See Also

Calculating Groove Width/Depth

Calculates the groove width or the groove depth.

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

2. Click [Groove] button of [Distance/Angle] toolbox.
3. Input two measurement results.

The input order is not related.

4. Select [Groove Dimension Direction] in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box as follows.

i. To calculate the groove width, select [X Direction] of [Groove Dimension Direction].

ii. To calculate the groove depth, select [Z Direction] of [Groove Dimension Direction].

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input a point of groove edge.

Input a point by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value Specification] button.

2. Repeat the point input by the similar method.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 71 of 139

a. [X Direction] --- Calculates the groove width.

b. [Z Direction] --- Calculates the groove depth.

Measurement Result:

1. Groove Width(ZX) --- The absolute value of difference of X-axis coordinate value.

2. Groove Depth(ZZ) --- The absolute value of difference of Z-axis coordinate value.

See Also

Calculating Pitch
Calculates the pitch

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

2. Click [Pitch] button of [Distance/Angle] toolbox.
3. Input the measurement result so that the intersection is calculated two points or more referring to the example.
i. Example of selection of the measurement result to calculate the intersection by inputting the point or the line
ii. Example of selection of the measurement result to specify the line by the batch in order to calculate the intersection
4. Select the direction in [Calc Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box in order to calculate the pitch.
l [Distance] --- Calculates the distance between intersections.
l [Translating Direction of Line through Intersection] --- Calculates the distance of the direction of the line that is fited to the intersections.
l [X Direction] --- Calculates the distance of X-axis.

Example of selection of the measurement result to calculate the intersection by inputting the point or the line:

Fig.1 Fig.2

1. Input two points or the line in order to decide the first line.
l Input two points(point or circle) by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value
Specification] button. (No1,2 of Fig.1)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 72 of 139

l Input the calculation range of the line by [X Range Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification] button. (No.1 of Fig.2)
2. Input two points or the line in order to decide the second line.
l Input two points(point or circle) by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value
Specification] button. (No.3,4 of Fig.1)
l Input the calculation range of the line by [X Range Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification] button. (No.2 of Fig.2)
3. Input the point or the line to decide two straight lines to calculate the intersection of the second point.
4. In addition, input the point or the line to add the intersection continuously.
5. When you end the input of the point or the line, click [Pitch] button.

Calculates the pitch by using the input intersections.

Example of selection of the measurement result to specify the line by the batch in order to calculate the intersection:

1. Click [Rectangular Specification] button.

2. Specify the range(No.1 of Fig) so that two or more lines to calculate the intersection are included.

Notice: Specify the range to cross the line from which the intersection is calculated.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Distance] --- Calculates the distance between intersections.

b. [Translating Direction of Line through Intersection] --- Calculates the distance of the direction of the line that is fited to the intersections.
c. [X Direction] --- Calculates the distance of X-axis.

Measurement Result:

1. Pitch between the intersections

2. Number of intersections
3. Mean Pitch
4. Maximum Picth
5. Minimum Pitch

See Also

Calculating Pitch(Circle Center)

Calculates the pitch between centers of circles.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 73 of 139

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

2. Click [Pitch (Circle Center)] button of [Distance/Angle] toolbox.
3. Input the measurement result so that the center of circle is calculated two points or more referring to the example.
4. Select the direction in [Calc Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box in order to calculate the pitch.
l [Distance] --- Calculates the distance between intersections.
l [Translating Direction of Line through Intersection] --- Calculates the distance of the direction of the line that is fited to the intersections.
l [X Direction] --- Calculates the distance of X-axis.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input the measurement result to get the center of circle.

l Input the point or the circle by clicking [Result Selection] button as the center of circle.
l Input the calculation range of the circle by clicking [X Range Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification] button.
2. Input the measurement result continuously to get the center of the circle of the second point.
3. To continue the addition of center of circle, input the measurement result continuously.
4. When you end the input of the center of circle, click [Pitch (Circle Center)] button.

Calculates the pitch between centers of circles by using the input points.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Distance] --- Calculates the distance between intersections.

b. [Translating Direction of Line through Intersection] --- Calculates the distance of the direction of the line that is fited to the intersections.
c. [X Direction] --- Calculates the distance of X-axis.

Measurement Result:

1. Pitch(Circle Center)
2. Number of circle centers
3. Mean Pitch
4. Maximum Picth
5. Minimum Pitch

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 74 of 139

See Also

Calculating Angle
Calculates the angle between two lines.

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

2. Click [Angle] button of [Distance/Angle] toolbox.
3. Input the measurement result to decide two lines that calculate an angle referring to the example.
4. Displays the request of selection of the measurement result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

Fig.1 Fig.2

1. Input the first line.

l Input Method 1 --- Select the line by clicking [Result Entry] button. (No.1 of Fig.1)

Or, Select the coordinate axis by clicking [X Value Specification] / [Z Value Specification] button. (No.1 of Fig.1)
l Input Method 2 --- Specify the calculation range of the line by clicking [X Range Specification] / [Measured Point Range
Specification] button (No.1 of Fig.1)

The selectable measurement result is the point(point or circle).

l Input Method 3 --- Input two points for the decision of the line by clicking [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value
Specification] / [Z Value Specification] button. (No.1,2 of Fig.2)
2. Input the second line in the similar way as the method of inputting the first line.

Measurement Result:

1. Angle between two lines(from 0 degree to 180 degree)

See Also

Calculating Journey
Calculates the total distance between adjacent points.

How To:

1. Click [Distance/Angle] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

2. Click [Journey] button of [Distance/Angle] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 75 of 139

3. Input the measurement point of two points or more.

Example of Measurement Point Selection:

Specify the calculation range while pushing [Measured Point Range Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Measurement Result:

1. Total distance between adjacent points in a specified range

2. Start Point and End Point
3. Number of measured points inside the range

See Also

Calculation Coordinate System Setup Toolbox

Sets the Calculation Coordinates System.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] toolbox.

Calculation Coordinate System Setup Toolbox:

1. [Origin Setup] --- Sets the origin point of the calculation coordinates system.

2. [Rotation] --- Rotates the calculation coordinates system.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Setting Calculation Coordinate System]

Setting Calculation Coordinates System Origin Point

Moves the origin point of the coordinates system.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] toolbox.

2. Click [Origin Setup] button of [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] toolbox.
3. Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 76 of 139

Example of selection of measurement result in the case of setting the new coordinates system origin point

Example of selection of measurement result in the case of moving parallel the coordinates system origin point

Example of selection of measurement result in the case of setting the new coordinates system origin point:

1. Input a point.

Input the point by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] button.

Or, select the point(point or circle) by [Result Selection] button.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Movement Length of Origin Point

2. Z-axis Movement Length of Origin Point

Example of selection of measurement result in the case of moving parallel the coordinates system origin point:

1. Specify the movement direction.

Click [X-axis Specification] / [Z-axis Specification] button.

2. Input the moving destination in the coordinates system origin point.

Input the point by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] button.

Or, select the point(point or circle) by [Result Selection] button.

Measurement Result:

1. X-axis Movement Length of Origin Point

or

Z-axis Movement Length of Origin Point

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 77 of 139

Rotating Calculation Coordinates System

Rotates the coordinates system.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] toolbox.

2. Click [Rotation] button of [Calculation Coordinate System Setup] toolbox.
3. Input data according to the example of selecting the measurement result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Specify the rotating coordinate axis.

Click [X-axis Specification] / [Z-axis Specification] button.

2. specify the rotation destination of the coordinates system by either of the following method.
i. Rotates the coordinate axis to the position in which the input point passes on the axis.

Input the point by [Point Entry] / [Measured Point Selection] button.

Or, select the point(point or circle) by [Result Selection] button.

ii. Rotates the coordinate axis until becoming parallel in the input line.

Select the line by [Result Selection] button.

iii. Specify the rotation angle.

Select the angle by [Result Selection] button.

Or, Input the rotation angle(from -90 degree to 90 degree) by [Key Entry] button.

Measurement Result:

1. Rotation Angle
2. X-axis Coordinates Value(The coordinates system before the rotation)*1)
3. Z-axis Coordinates Value(The coordinates system before the rotation)*1)

*1) The coordinate value of the measurement result is displayed by the value of the coordinates system before the rotation.

See Also

Calculation/Stat Toolbox
Executes Arithmetic, and Statistic Calculations.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 78 of 139

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

[Calculation/Stat] Toolbox:

1. [Addition] --- Executes the addition.

2. [Subtraction] --- Executes the subtraction.

3. [Multiplication] --- Executes the multiplication.

4. [Division] --- Executes the division.

5. [Absolute Value] --- Calculates the absolute value.

6. [Square Root] --- Calculates the square root.

7. [Min. Value] --- Calculates the minimum value of the registered data.

8. [Max. Value] --- Calculates the maximum value of the registered data.

9. [Mean] --- Calculates the average value of the registered data.

10. [Total Sum] --- Calculates the sum total of the registered data.

11. [Standard Deviation] --- Calculates the standard deviation of which the population parameter is the number of registered data.

12. [Unbiased Standard Deviation] --- Calculates the standard deviation of which the population parameter is the number that is only one fewer than
the number of registered data.

13. [Data Registration] --- Registers the data of the statistic calculation.

14. [Data Deletion] --- Clears the registered data.

See Also

Executing Addition
Executes the addition.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Addition] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

3. Input an augend.

4. Input an addenf(adding value).

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 79 of 139

1. Input an augend.

i. Select the measurement result by clicking [Result Selection] button.

When there are multiple items in the measurement result, the calculation dialog box is displayed in order to select one item.

ii. Or, input the numeric value by clicking [Key Entry] button.

2. Input an addend(In the method similar to the input of augend).

Example of Calculation Dialog Box:

a. [Result] --- Displays the label name of the selected measurement result.

b. [Item] --- Displays the measurement contents.

c. [Value] --- Displays the value of the measurement content.

d. [Formula] --- Displays the calculation formula.

e. List --- Select the item in the measurement contents.

Notice:

When you select the measurement result([Angle],[Distance(Point/Point)],[Area]) that includes only one result, the calculation dialog box is not displayed.

And you cannot set the calculation dialog box of the four basic operations to non-display.

Measurement Result:

1. Addition Result

2. Augend

3. Addend

See Also

Executing Subtraction
Executes the subtraction.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 80 of 139

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Subtraction] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

3. Input a minuend.

4. Input a subtrahend.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input a minuend.

i. Select the measurement result by clicking [Result Selection] button.

When there are multiple items in the measurement result, the calculation dialog box is displayed in order to select one item.

ii. Or, input the numeric value by clicking [Key Entry] button.

2. Input a subtrahend(In the method similar to the input of minuend).

Example of Calculation Dialog Box:

a. [Result] --- Displays the label name of the selected measurement result.

b. [Item] --- Displays the measurement contents.

c. [Value] --- Displays the value of the measurement content.

d. [Formula] --- Displays the calculation formula.

e. List --- Select the item in the measurement contents.

Notice:

When you select the measurement result([Angle],[Distance(Point/Point)],[Area]) that includes only one result, the calculation dialog box is not displayed.

And you cannot set the calculation dialog box of the four basic operations to non-display.

Measurement Result:

1. Subtraction Result

2. Minuend

3. Subtrahend

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 81 of 139

Executing Multiplication
Executes the multiplication.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Multiplication] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
3. Input a multiplicand.

4. Input a multiplier.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input a multiplicand.

i. Select the measurement result by clicking [Result Selection] button.

When there are multiple items in the measurement result, the calculation dialog box is displayed in order to select one item.

ii. Or, input the numeric value by clicking [Key Entry] button.

2. Input a multiplier(In the method similar to the input of multiplicand).

Example of Calculation Dialog Box:

a. [Result] --- Displays the label name of the selected measurement result.

b. [Item] --- Displays the measurement contents.

c. [Value] --- Displays the value of the measurement content.

d. [Formula] --- Displays the calculation formula.

e. List --- Select the item in the measurement contents.

Notice:

When you select the measurement result([Angle],[Distance(Point/Point)],[Area]) that includes only one result, the calculation dialog box is not displayed.

And you cannot set the calculation dialog box of the four basic operations to non-display.

Measurement Result:

1. Multiplication Result

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 82 of 139

2. Multiplicand

3. Multiplier

See Also

Executing Division
Executes the division.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Division] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
3. Input a dividend.

4. Input a divisor.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Input a dividend.

i. Select the measurement result by clicking [Result Selection] button.

When there are multiple items in the measurement result, the calculation dialog box is displayed in order to select one item.

ii. Or, input the numeric value by clicking [Key Entry] button.

2. Input a divisor(In the method similar to the input of dividend).

Example of Calculation Dialog Box:

a. [Result] --- Displays the label name of the selected measurement result.

b. [Item] --- Displays the measurement contents.

c. [Value] --- Displays the value of the measurement content.

d. [Formula] --- Displays the calculation formula.

e. List --- Select the item in the measurement contents.

Notice:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 83 of 139

When you select the measurement result([Angle],[Distance(Point/Point)],[Area]) that includes only one result, the calculation dialog box is not displayed.

And you cannot set the calculation dialog box of the four basic operations to non-display.

Measurement Result:

1. Division Result

2. Dividend

3. Divisor

See Also

Calculating Absolute Value

Calculates the absolute value.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Absolute Value] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
3. Input a measurement result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Select the measurement result by clicking [Result Selection] button.

When there are multiple items in the measurement result, the calculation dialog box is displayed in order to select one item.

2. Or, input the numeric value by clicking [Key Entry] button.

Example of Calculation Dialog Box:

a. [Result] --- Displays the label name of the selected measurement result.

b. [Item] --- Displays the measurement contents.

c. [Value] --- Displays the value of the measurement content.

d. [Formula] --- Displays the calculation formula.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 84 of 139

e. List --- Select the item in the measurement contents.

Notice:

When you select the measurement result([Angle],[Distance(Point/Point)],[Area]) that includes only one result, the calculation dialog box is not displayed.

And you cannot set the calculation dialog box of the four basic operations to non-display.

Measurement Result:

1. Absolute Value

2. Input Result

See Also

Calculating Square Root

Calculates the square root.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Square Root] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
3. Input a measurement result.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

1. Select the measurement result by clicking [Result Selection] button.

When there are multiple items in the measurement result, the calculation dialog box is displayed in order to select one item.

2. Or, input the numeric value by clicking [Key Entry] button.

Example of Calculation Dialog Box:

a. [Result] --- Displays the label name of the selected measurement result.

b. [Item] --- Displays the measurement contents.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 85 of 139

c. [Value] --- Displays the value of the measurement content.

d. [Formula] --- Displays the calculation formula.

e. List --- Select the item in the measurement contents.

Notice:

When you select the measurement result([Angle],[Distance(Point/Point)],[Area]) that includes only one result, the calculation dialog box is not displayed.

And you cannot set the calculation dialog box of the four basic operations to non-display.

Measurement Result:

1. Square Root

2. Input Result

See Also

Calculating Minimum Value

Calculates the minimum value of the registered data.

How To:

1. Register the calculating data by [Data Registration] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

3. Click [Min. Value] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
4. Calculates the minimum value of the registered data.

Measurement Result:

1. Minimum Value
2. Number of datas(n)

See Also

Calculating Maximum Value

Calculates the maximum value of the registered data.

How To:

1. Register the calculating data by [Data Registration] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

3. Click [Max. Value] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
4. Calculates the maximum value of the registered data.

Measurement Result:

1. Maximum Value

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 86 of 139

2. Number of datas(n)

See Also

Calculating Average Value

Calculates the average value of the registered data.

How To:

1. Register the calculating data by [Data Registration] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

3. Click [Mean] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
4. Calculates the average value of the registered data.

Measurement Result:

1. Average Value
2. Number of datas(n)

See Also

Calculating Sum Total

Calculates the sum total of the registered data.

How To:

1. Register the calculating data by [Data Registration] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

3. Click [Total Sum] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
4. Calculates the sum total of the registered data.

Measurement Result:

1. Sum Total
2. Number of datas(n)

See Also

Calculating Standard Deviation

Calculates the standard deviation of which the population parameter is the number of registered data.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 87 of 139

How To:

1. Register the calculating data by [Data Registration] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

3. Click [Standard Deviation] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
4. Calculates the standard deviation of which the population parameter is the number of registered data.

Measurement Result:

1. Standard Deviation(Population Parameter=n)

2. Number of datas(n)

See Also

Calculating Unbiased Standard Deviation

Calculates the standard deviation of which the population parameter is the number that is only one fewer than the number of registereddata.

How To:

1. Register the calculating data by [Data Registration] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

3. Click [Unbiased Standard Deviation] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
4. Calculates the standard deviation of which the population parameter is the number that is only one fewer than the number of registered data.

Measurement Result:

1. Standard Deviation(Population Parameter=n-1)

2. Number of datas(n)

See Also

Registering Data
Registers the data of the statistic calculation.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Data Registration] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.
3. 測定çµæžœã‚’入力ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„

Register the data to calculate [Min. Value] / [Max.Value] / [Mean] / [Total Sum] / [Standard Deviation] / [Unbiased
Standard Deviation].
4. To clear the registered data, click [Data Deletion] button.

Example of Measurement Result Selection:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 88 of 139

1. Select the measurement result by clicking [Result Selection] button.

When there are multiple items in the measurement result, the calculation dialog box is displayed in order to select one item.

2. Or, input the numeric value by clicking [Key Entry] button.

Example of Calculation Dialog Box:

a. [Result] --- Displays the label name of the selected measurement result.

b. [Item] --- Displays the measurement contents.

c. [Value] --- Displays the value of the measurement content.

d. [Formula] --- Displays the calculation formula.

e. List --- Select the item in the measurement contents.

Notice:

When you select the measurement result([Angle],[Distance(Point/Point)],[Area]) that includes only one result, the calculation dialog box is not displayed.

And you cannot set the calculation dialog box of the four basic operations to non-display.

See Also

Clearing Data
Clears the registered data.

How To:

1. Click [Calculation/Stat] button [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

2. Click [Data Deletion] button of [Calculation/Stat] toolbox.

Clears the data to calculate [Min. Value] / [Max.Value] / [Mean] / [Total Sum] / [Standard Deviation] / [Unbiased
Standard Deviation].

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 89 of 139

Display Change Toolbox

Changes the display of the measurement data.

How To:

1. Click [Display Change] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Display Change] toolbox.

[Display Change] Toolbox:

1. [Zoom in] --- Zooms in.

2. [Zoom out] --- Zooms out.

3. [Label Name Change] --- Changes the label name.

4. [Label Position Change] --- Changes the display position of label and dimension.

5. [Dimension Style Change] --- Changes the dimension style.

See Also

Zoom In
Zoom in on the display on the Figure Window.

How To:

1. Click [Display Change] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Display Change] toolbox.

2. Click [Zoom in] button of [Display Change] toolbox.

3. Specify the rectangular area on the Figure Window.

The specified rectangular area is enlarged so that it fits inside the Figure Window.

To cancel the operation, press ESC key.

4. To specify the display magnification, click [Key Entry] button.

Tip:

You can zoom in by using [Display Magnification] bar.

See Also

Zoom out
Zoom out on the display on the Figure Window.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 90 of 139

How To:

1. Click [Display Change] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Display Change] toolbox.

2. Click [Zoom out] button of [Display Change] toolbox.

3. Specify the rectangular area on the Figure Window.

The current display area on the Figure Window is reduced so that it fits inside the specified rectangular area.

To cancel the operation, press ESC key.

4. To specify the display magnification, click [Key Entry] button.

Tip:

You can zoom out by using [Display Magnification] bar.

See Also

Changing Label Name

Changes the label name of the measurement result.

How To:

1. Click [Display Change] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Display Change] toolbox.

2. Click [Label Name Change] button of [Display Change] toolbox.

3. Click the measurement result on the Part Program Window.

4. Input the label name.

5. To cancel the operation, press ESC key.

See Also

Changes the label display position of the measurement result.

Changes the label display position of the measurement result.

How To:

1. Click [Display Change] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Display Change] toolbox.

2. Click [Label Position Change] button of [Display Change] toolbox.

3. Drag the measurement result on the Figure Window.

Notice:

When the display style of the dimension and label is simple display, the label and numeric value cannot move independently.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 91 of 139

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Dimension/Label]

Changing Dimension Style

Changes the dimension style of the measurement result.

How To:

1. Click [Display Change] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Display Change] toolbox.

2. Click [Dimension Style] button of [Display Change] toolbox.
3. Click the value of the measurement result on the Figure Window.

Displays the [Dimension Display Change] dialog box.

Example of [Dimension Display Change] Dialog Box:

a. [Dimension Display] --- Displays the dimension by the standard style.

b. [Leader Line Display] --- Displays only the leader line and the dimension value.
c. [No Display Dimension Line] --- Displays only the dimension value.
d. [Display the Value Horizontally] --- Displays the dimension value horizontally.
e. [Display Cir Dim. Horizontally Using the Broke Leader Line] --- The dimension value outside of the circle is horizontally displayed with the
dimension line of the polyline.
f. [Value Position] --- Select the display position of the dimension value.

Notice:

When the display style of the dimension is simple display, the label and numeric value cannot be moved independently.

When the display style of the dimension is simple display, the dimension display cannot be changed.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Dimension/Label]

Measurement Point Edit Toolbox

Edits the measurement points.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 92 of 139

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

[Edits Measured Points] Toolbox:

1. [Deleting Measured Points] --- Deletes the measurement points.

2. [Translating measured Points] --- Moves the measurement points horizontally or vertically.
3. [Rotating Measured Points] --- Rotates the measurement points.
4. [Inverting Measured Points] --- Inverts the measurement points horizontally or vertically.
5. [Aligning Measured Points] --- Aligns two measurement points.
6. [Joining Measured Points] --- Joins two measurement points.
7. [Dividing a Measured Points] --- Divides the measurements point into two parts.
8. [Projecting Measured Points] --- Compacts the measurement points in the horizontal direction for the specified angle.
9. [Offsetting Measured Points] --- Moves the measurement points only to the specified distance.
10. [Fits Measured Points to Geometric Result] --- Fits the measurement points to geometric result(Circle/Line). (Fitting)
11. [Fairing] --- Smoothing the measurement points. (Smoothing)
12. [Filtering] --- Filtering the measurement points.
13. [Polar Coordinate] --- Displays the polar coordinate development.
14. [Existence direction] --- Specifies the direction where the entity of work exists for the measurement point.
15. [Import the Measurement Points] --- Imports the measurement point.

See Also

Deleting Measurement Points

Deletes the measurement points.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Deleting Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

3. Select the data specification method of [Designation] toolbox.

a. Allows you to delete one point by using [Point Entry] button.

b. Allows you to delete all the points within the range of specification by using either of [X Range Specification] / [Z Range
Specification] / [Rectangular Specification] / [All Data Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification] button.

4. Specify the range or the point of the measurement points to delete.

Example of deleting of the abnormal data by [X Range Specification]:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 93 of 139

The Abnormal Data The Deleting Range Specification The Deleting Result

See Also

Moving Measurement Points

Moves the measurement points.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Translating measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

Case of Measurement Result Selection:

3. Select the measurement result of point/circle by [Result Selection] button.

4. Input the point or circle of the moving destination.

Case of Measurement Point Selection:

Allows you to move parallel(or rotate or reverse) by dragging the selected measurement point.

3. Select the measurement point by [Meas Point Selection] button.

4. Displays the [Shifting a measurement point] dialog box.

[Shifting a measurement point] Dialog Box:

a. [Horizontal] --- Specify the horizontal movement length.

b. [Vertical] --- Specify the vertical movement length.
c. [Rotation] --- Specify the rotation angle.
d. [Left 90° Rotation] --- Rotates CCW by 90 degree.
e. [Right 90° Rotation] --- Rotates CW by 90 degree.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 94 of 139

f. [Invert] --- Reverses the measurement point like the specular.

g. [Clear] --- Restores the measurement point to former position.
h. [Horizontal] --- Detects the specified position in the horizontal direction of other measurement points while you are dragging the measurement point.
The position that can be specified is the coordinate system origin point or start point/end point or peak/valley point. In addition, allows you to choose
two or more positions from these.
i. [Vertical] --- Detects the specified position in the vertyical direction of other measurement points while you are dragging the measurement point. The
position that can be specified is the coordinate system origin point or start point/end point or peak/valley point. In addition, allows you to choose two or
more positions from these.
j. [Origin] --- Detects the position where the coordinate system origin point is corresponding.
k. [Init/Term] --- Detects the position where start point/end point is corresponding.
l. [Peak/Valley] --- Detects the position where peak point/valley point is corresponding.

Notice:

The point, the line, and the circle moves with the measurement point.

See Also

Rotating Measurement Points

Rotates the measurement points.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Rotating Measured Points ] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

3. Select the center of rotation.(ex: Point_1)

Specify the point or circle of the measurement result.

4. Select the rotating measurement result.(ex: Point_2)

Or, click [All Data Specification] button.

5. Select the measurement result to match the direction.(ex: Point_3)

When the point(point or circle) is selected, the line direction where the center of the rotation was connected with this point is the corresponding
direction.

When the line is selected, the line direction is the corresponding direction.

In the example, the line where Point_1 was connected with Point_2 is rotated to become the same direction as the line where Point_1 was connected
with Point_3.

6. When you select [All Data Specification] button in Step.4, select the measurement result of angle.

Or, Input the angle by clicking [Key Entry] button of [Input] toolbox.

Example of Rotation:

The line where Point_1 was connected with Point_2 is rotated to become the same direction as the line where Point_1 was connected with Point_3.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 95 of 139

Notice:

The point, the line, and the circle moves with the measurement point.

See Also

Inverting Measurement Points

Inverts the measurement points in the vertical or horizontal direction.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Inverting Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. When there are multiple contours, click the inverting contour in the Figure Window.

Or, click [All Data Specification] button.

When you click [All Data Specification] button, all contours is inverted.

4. Specify the rotating coordinate axis.

5. Click [X-axis Specification] or [Z-axis Specification] button of [Designation] toolbox.

6. The specified contour is inverted based on the specified axis.

Example of Inverting of Measurement Points:

Notice:

The point, the line, and the circle moves with the measurement point.

See Also

Aligning Measurement Points

Aligns two measurement points.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Aligning Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 96 of 139

3. Select the measurement result (1) of calculation from moving measurement points(a).

4. Select the measurement result (1) of calculation from measurement points(b) of the movement destination.

5. Select the measurement result (2) of calculation from moving measurement points(a).

6. Select the measurement result (4) of calculation from measurement points(b) of the movement destination.

Fits the position as the measurement result(1) is corresponding to the result(2). And moves so that the result(2) and the result(4) is approaching most.

For instance, in the following example, moves to match Point_1 to Point_2 and rotates so that Line_1 become the same as the angle of Line_2.

Combination of the measurement results:

1. Aligning of Point/Circle(1) and Point/Circle(3), Aligning of Point/Circle(2) and Point/Circle(4)

Rotates so that two points specified next approach most after overlapping two points specified first.
2. Aligning of Point/Circle(1) and Point/Circle(3), Aligning of Line(2) and Line(4)

Rotates so that two lines approach most after overlapping two points specified first.
3. Aligning of Line(1) and Line(3), Aligning of Line(2) and Line(4)

Rotates so that two points specified next approach most after overlapping two lines specified first.

See Also

Joining Two Measurement Points

Joins two measurement points.

Please refer to [Example of Joining of Two Measurement Points].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 97 of 139

This function is used to analyze the multiple measurement data as one measurement data.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Jointing Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Select two measurement points.

Select one point of each measurement points by [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value Specification] button
of [Specification] toolbox.

Or, specify the range of the rectangle by [Rectangular Specification] button so that all or parts of two measurement points are included.

Tip: Two points selected with the [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value Specification] button are jointed in the
selected order. *1
4. The candidate of connection point is displayed.

The connection point is generated to the position in which two measurement points approach.

Select and cancel the unnecessary connection point.

To add the connection point, click the additional position(neighborhood) of the connection point.

The connection point is added to the position in which two measurement points are adjacent most near the clicked position.

Add or delete the connection point so that it is similar to the real form of the workpiece.
5. Connects two measurement points by clicking [Joining Measured Points] button.

The joint of measured points is replaced at the connection point.

If there is no connection point, only the joining process is performed.*1.

Tip: Joined measured points can be handled as one point even if physically isolated.

Example of Joining of Two Measurement Points:

1. Click [Measured Point Selection] button.

2. Select the measurement point in the left end of the measurement points of left side. (Fig.a)
3. Select the measurement point in the right end of the measurement points of right side. (Fig.a)
4. The connection point candidate is displayed. (Fig.b)
5. Click [Jointing Measured Points] button.

The joint of measured points is replaced at the connection point. (図c)

(a) (b) (c)

About the connection points:

The connected shape is different as shown in the figure below according to how to choose the connection point(Connected Point).

Add or delete the connection point so that it is similar to the real form of the workpiece.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 98 of 139

Example of Joining of Multiple Measurement Points:

There is shape that cannot be measured at a time like the workpiece of the figure below.

For this case, change the setup of workpiece, and measure it two times or more. And, connect the measurement points.

The example is shown as follows.

1. By using [Translating measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox, move the measurement points in order to connect.

2. By using [Deleting Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox, delete the unnecessary measurement points.

3. Create the point(Point_1,Point_2) or the line(Line_1,Line_2) to fit position.

By using [Aligning Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox, fit the position of the measurement point.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 99 of 139

4. By using [Jointing Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox, connect the measurement points.

See Also

Dividing Measurement Points

Divides the measurement point into two parts.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Dividing Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Specify the measurement point(a) by clicking the point on the Figure Window.

Specify two points at the closed curve.

4. Specify the measurement point(b) including the measurement point(a).

5. The measurement point is divided. The point from measurement point(a) to measurement point(b) becomes another measurement point.

Example of dividing the measurement points:

The measurement point is separated by two at the position of the (a) point.

See Also

Projecting Measurement Points

Compacts the measurement points in the horizontal direction for the specified angle.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 100 of 139

2. Click [Project Measured Points ] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

3. Click [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

4. Select the measurement result of the angle by [Result Entry] button.

Or, Input the angle by clicking [Key Entry] button of [Input] toolbox.

See Also

Offsetting Measurement Points

Moves the measurement points to the position on constant distance.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Offset Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Click [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

4. Select the measurement result of the distance by [Result Entry] button.

Or, Input the distance by clicking [Key Entry] button of [Input] toolbox.

Example of offset of the measurement point:

See Also

Fitting Measurement Points

Fits the measurement point to geometric result(Circle/Line).

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Fits Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Select the measurement result by [Result Selection] button of [Specification] toolbox.

When you do not select the measurement result, the measurement result that is the nearest the measurement point within the range of specification is
automatically selected.

4. Select the range of measurement point by clicking [Measured Point Range Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.
5. The measurement point moves to the position of the perpendicular foot to the line or the circle.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 101 of 139

Example of moving the measurement point:

See Also

Smoothing Measurement Points

Fairing processing is the function to fit a polygonal line, which has multiple nodal points, with measured points.(Fairing).

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Fairing Measured Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Click [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Select the range of measurement point by clicking [Measured Point Range Specification] button.
4. To set the condition of Fairing, click [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
5. To set the detail condition of Fairing, click [Detail Setting] button.

Displays the [Detail Setup for Fairing] dialog box.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Typical element length] --- Input the length of element.

This length is standard length of the segment of the polygonal line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 102 of 139

b. [Detail Setting] --- Set the detail conditions.

Displays the [Detail Setup for Fairing] dialog box.

[Detail Setup for Fairing] Dialog Box:

a. [Default value (3 Sigma)] --- Use the default value as Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method.
b. [Set a Value] --- Select the Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method.

To set the arbitrary value, select [Arbitrary value].

c. [Default value (Typical element length * 4)] --- Use the default value as Cutoff Value for Moving Average.
d. [Set a Value] --- Input the Cutoff Value for Moving Average.

About Fairing Processing:

1. The measurement point is divided into the element.

2. The first two elements are targeted.
3. The polygonal line with one node is fitted to the measurement point in two elements.
4. The node of this polygonal line becomes the starting point of the following polygonal line.
5. Only one moves in the element of the target, and the processing of 3-5 is repeated.
6. When the processing ends for all elements, the polygonal line is decided.

->

[1]Segment [2]Node [3]Meas. point [4]Start point [5]Ray

Tip:

In the polygonal line fitting calculation, the effect of abnormal points is automatically eliminated with the robust estimation method.

Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method:

In a polygonal line fitting calculation the effect of abnormal points is automatically eliminated with the robust estimation method.

The group of remaining measured points excluding the points eliminated with the robust estimation method can be assumed to have an approximate normal
distribution.

Also, the threshold is set so as to determine the final fitting geometry using only the measured points within the specific range for the group of remaining
measured points that are assumed to have a normal distribution.

The threshold is set on the basis of standard deviation to be determined from the group of measured points excluding abnormal points.

Cutoff Value for Moving Average:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 103 of 139

When measured points are grouped under small sections with a constant length, each dividing position is determined using the result of two-dimensional
moving average filter processing for the measured points, that is expressed as the following formula.

This is because of suppressing the effect of noises included in the measured points and preventing the number of measured points belonging to a small section
from being greatly unbalanced.

This cutoff value of the two-dimensional moving average filter is set as a dividing position.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Fairing Condition]

Filtering Measurement Points

Filtering the measurement points.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Filtering] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Click [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.
4. To set the condition of Filter, click [Filter settings] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
5. Filtering the entire contour.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Type] --- Select the filter type.

b. [Method] --- Select the calculation method.
Select from Gaussian, 2CR-PC, Rolling Circle, Spline, Robust Spline.
c. [Auto calc] --- Sets the length(sum total of the distance between measurement points/100.0) to the cutoff value.
d. [Specify] --- Specify the arbitrary value.
e. [Cut off] --- Input the cutoff value.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Filter Condition]

Displaying Polar Coordinate Development

With the center of the circle that is determined from the measured point taken to be the origin of the polar coordinate system, the measured point on the
circumference develops along the X axis of a Cartesian coordinate system.

Polar coordinates express the position of the measured point using the distance r (radius vector) from the origin and the angle theta (angle of deviation) that it

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 104 of 139

makes from a fixed straight line whose starting point is the origin.

In the polar coordinate development display, the angle of deviation theta and radius vector r are displayed in a horizontal axis and vertical axis for each.

The [0] of the horizontal axis are the direction of three o'clock of the former figure. The scale of the horizontal axis is the same as that of the circumferential
length of the circle.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Polar Coordinate] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. When there is the standard circle that calculated from the measurement point, select by [Calculation Result Selection] button of [Designation]
toolbox.

Specify the measurement point for determining the circle of polar coordinate development in the Figure Window.
4. To set the condition of Polar Coordinate Development, click [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Display Orientation] --- Select the orientation of Polar Coordinate Development.

i. --- The counterclockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of increasing radius vector is displayed as
the vertical axis positive direction.

ii. --- The clockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of increasing radius vector is displayed as the
vertical axis positive direction.

iii. --- The counterclockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of decreasing radius vector is displayed as
the vertical axis positive direction.

iv. --- The clockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of decreasing radius vector is displayed as the
vertical axis positive direction.

Please refer to [Processing Results] - [Changing Polar Coordinate Development Display].

b. [Display horizontal direction as an angle] --- Displays the horizontal axis as the angle.
c. [Origin direction after expand] --- Select the angle on the circumference of the standard circle that is the origin position of a horizontal axis.
d. [Using meas data not expanded for calculation] --- All measurement points are calculated.

The display after development doesn't change.

Tip: Places other than the range of development are displayed by a light blue background.
e. [Display from 0 degrees] --- The meas data is displayed within the range from 0 to 360 degrees.

Tip:

Depending on the display orientation select button, the direction of right and left or up and down of after developing is changed.

To maintain the up/down/right/left positional relationship before and after the display, select the next button depending on the position of the origin of the
polar coordinate system (center of the circle).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 105 of 139

1. Bottom of the profile line --- button

2. Top of the profile line --- button

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Polar Coordinate Development]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Polar Coordinate Development Display]

Specifying Workpiece Entity Side

Specify the entity side of workpiece(Inside/Outside of Data).

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Existence direction of work] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Select the measurement points by clicking [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.
4. Specify the substance side of workpiece by [Point Entry] button of [Specification] toolbox.

Or, specify the calculation result(point/circle) by <i16> <f17><b18>[Result Selection] button</b18></f17>.

Notice:

This setting changes the direction of [Model-based best fit] and the condition of [Outside Tolerance]/[Inside Tolerance] in Bestfit of Contour Tolerance.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Measurement Point]

Importing Measurement Points

Imports the measurement points.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Import the Measurement Points] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

Displays the [Import the Measurement Points] dialog box.

[Import the Measurement Points] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 106 of 139

a. [Data File] Group

b. [Data File] --- Imports the measurement points from the specified file.

Displays the [Read the measured points] dialog box by clicking [Reference] button and select the file.

c. [Re-Load the file when Part Program running.] --- Imports the measurement points from the specified file, when Part Program is executed.

When you do not select this button, the measurement point imported by this menu is always used.

d. [Data History] --- Imports the measurement points from Data History.

e. [This file] --- Imports the measurement points from this file.

f. List --- Displays the information of the measurement points of the selected file.

Select the data to import.

g. [Add a new section] --- Imports the measurement points to new Display Section(Tab).

When you do not select this button, imports to the current Display Section(Tab).

h. [Displays the preview on the figure window] --- Displays the measurement points to Figure Window.

See Also

Extensions Toolbox
Executes the extension functions.

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 107 of 139

[Extensions] Toolbox:

1. [Area] --- Calculates the area.

2. [Auto Circle/Line Conversion] --- Converts the measurement points to the combination of circle and line automatically.
3. [Conic] --- Determines the conic curve.
4. [Pseudo roughness parameter] --- Calculates the pseudo roughness parameter.
5. [Roughness Analysis] --- Performs the roughness analysis.
6. [N-Section Roughness Analysis] --- Calculates the roughness parameter of N-Section.
7. [Re-Meas and Analysis Roughness] --- Re-measures the specified range to execute the roughness analysis.
8. [Set the work coord on X-Y Plane] --- Sets the work coordinate system on X-Y Plane.

See Also

Calculating Area
Calculates the are.

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [Area] button of [Extensions] toolbox.
3. Input the measurement result referring to the example.

Example of Area of One Contour And Line

Example of Area of One Closed Contour

Example of Area of Multiple Contours

Example of Area of One Contour And Line:

1. Specify the range for calculating the area.

The selectable measurement result is the point(point or circle).

2. Specify the lines where the closed region for calculating the area is formed.

Allows you to select two lines in maximums by clicking [Multi-Input] button.

3. Input one point in the close area.

Input the point by [Point Entry] button. Or, select the point by [Result Selection] button.

Example of Area of One Closed Contour:

1. Specify the close contour for calculating the area by [All Data Specification] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 108 of 139

Tip:

To select one from multiple close contours, select by [Next Contour] / [Previous Contour] button and click [Determination] button of [User
Indication] toolbox.

Example of Area of Multiple Contours:

1. Specify the multiple contours for calculating the area.

The selectable measurement result is the point(point or circle).

2. Select the contour of the reference of the area calculation.

To select one from multiple close contours, select by [Next Contour] / [Previous Contour] button and click [Determination] button of
<a0>[User Indication] toolbox</a0>.
3. Click [All Data Specification] button.

The contours that forms the closed region is automatically selected.

4. Input one point in the close area.

Input the point by [Point Entry] button. Or, select the point by [Result Selection] button.

Measurement Result:

1. The area of closed region

See Also

Converting Circle/Line Automatically

Converts the measurement point to the combination of circle and line. (Please refer to [About the automatic circle/line conversion]. )

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [Auto Circle/Line Conversion] button of [Extensions] toolbox.
3. Specify the range for converting circle/line.
4. To set the condition of conversion, click [Auto Circle/Line Conversion] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
5. To set the detail condition, click [Detail Setup] button.

Displays the [Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Detail Setup] dialog box.

[Auto Circle/Line Conversion] Tab of Calculation Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 109 of 139

a. [Method 1] --- To judge that the element is a circle or line, the radius of curvature is used.
b. [Method 2] --- To judge that the element is a circle or line, the tolerance limit of circle/line is used.

Judges the circle or line by tolerance without using the radius of curvature.
c. [Tolerance Limit] --- Input the tolerance limit.

Distance between the line and measurement point reaches this value or less.

When the error value more than this value is generated, the element becomes [Error Element].
d. [Radius of Curvature for] --- Input the radius of curvature.

The radius of curvature is a reference value to be used to judge that the element is a circle or line.

Specify the value of twice the radius of the maximum circle that exists in the measurement point.
e. [Tolerance(Line)] --- Input the tolerance of the line.

Distance between the line and measurement point reaches this value or less.
f. [Tolerance(Circle)] ---Input the tolerance of the circle.

Distance between the circle and measurement point reaches this value or less.
g. [Detail Setup] --- Set the detail condition.

Displays the [Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Detail Setup] dialog box.

[Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Detail Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Auto] --- Judges the circle/line changing the applying number automatically.

Error Element is reduced.

b. [Manual] --- Specify the applying number.
c. [Points in] --- Input the most small measurement point in the block to be converted.

First of all, the measurement points of this number is applied. If Error Element is not generated, the number of points is increased. And calculates
continuously.
d. [Times of Trial] --- Input the number of times.
e. [Joints the Generated Circles/Lines] --- The element is extended as the adjoined element is consecutive.

When there is no intersection, the element is added and connected.

Sets the element tip position to the position in which the distance between the element and the measurement point is minimized, when the intersection

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 110 of 139

processing is not executed.

f. [Maximum Distance for Joining] --- Input the maximum distance between the intersection and the measurement point in the intersection processing.

The intersection doesn't exist when the distance exceeds this value.

About the automatic circle/line conversion:

1. The measurement points are converted to the circle or line from the first point in block of points set with the [Points in Conversion Block].

When you set [Points in Conversion Block] to "Automatic", the conversion is simulated by changing the number of points in the conversion block from
3 to 30.
2. Checks the error (distance) between the generated circle/line and the measurement points in the first block.
3. If the error exceeds the tolerance limit set, the conversion for the block will be completed as the generated circle/line is "Error Element".

Note that "Error Element" is frequently generated if [Points in Conversion Block] is increased and [Tolerance Limit ] is reduced when you set [Points in
Conversion Block] to "Manual".

When you set [Points in Conversion Block] to "Automatic", selects the calculation result within the tolerance limit and selects the calculation result in
which the result of [Points in Conversion Block] is largest.
4. If the error is within the tolerance limit, the applying range is extended by one point.
5. Reconverts the measured points including extended portion.
6. Repeats the operation of 4-5 until the error exceeds the tolerance limit. (Max. Repeat Number=[Times of Trial Conversion])
7. The result is the element immediately before the error exceeds the tolerance limit.
8. Repeats the operation of 1-7 with the start point that is the end point of the measurement point of the result.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Automatic Circle/Line Conversion]

Converting To Conic Curve

Converts the measurement point to the conic curve.

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [Conic] button of [Extensions] toolbox.
3. Specify the range for converting to conic curve.
4. Select the type of curve by [Type of Conic Curve] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

Select the type of conic curve.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Ellipse] --- Calculates the ellipse.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 111 of 139

b. [Hyperbola] --- Calculates the hyperbola.

c. [Parabola] --- Calculates the parabola.

Measurement Result:

Results are coefficients in both of the canonical form and standard form.

1. The canonical form of conic curve

Supplementation: The value in the current coordinates system is calculated.

2. Ellipse

3. Hyperbola

4. Parabola

Notice:

When you specify the calculation range using measurement points, please include six or more measurement points in the calculation range.

See Also

Calculating Pseudo Roughness Parameter

Calculating the pseudo roughness parameter from the measurement points.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 112 of 139

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [Pseudo roughness parameter] button of [Extensions] toolbox.
3. Specify the range for calculating the roughness parameters.
4. To set the calculation method of pseudo roughness parameter, click [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Definition] --- Select [OLDMIX] or [Revised].

b. [Profile] --- Select the profile to execute the filter process.
c. [Cutoff value] --- Specify the cutoff value of the profile except [P] profile.
d. [Filter] --- Select [Gaussian] or [2CR-PC] or [2CR] in the filter.
e. [Compensation] --- Select [No comp.] or [Mean line].
f. [Rz Condition] --- Set the calculation condition of Rz(Ten points average height) of OLDMIX.

Displays the [Rz Condition] dialog box.

g. [mr slice level] --- Input the slice level(Depth from the highest point of the measurement profile) for mr value by percentage(0%-100%) of maximum
height and depth.
h. [Sm count level] --- Input the count level(For calculating the peak or valley in the peak count, set 2 lines parallel to the mean line. The slice level is the
distance from these 2 lines to the mean line.) by the percentage (0 to 50 %) against the maximum height of the profile.

[Rz Condition] Dialog Box:

a. [More than 10 % of Ry value] --- Only the peaks/valleys having height/depth more than 10% of those of maximum height/depth are regarded as
peaks/valleys.
b. [Even if the value is less than 10 % of the Ry] --- The peak and valley are irrelevant to Ry.
c. [Calculating the mean value by 5 data points] --- Calculates the mean value by 5 peaks/valleys.

If the number of points of the peak and height is less than 5, it is treated as an error and the measurement result will not be outputted.
d. [Calculating the mean value with the current data points] --- Even if there are less than 5 peak or valley data points, the mean value can be
calculated with the current data points.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 113 of 139

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [About Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method] - [Explanation of Pseudo
Roughness Parameter /Rz Condition]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [About Pseudo Roughness Parameter Calculation Method] - [Definition of Pseudo
Roughness Parameter]

Analyzing Roughness
Analyzes the roughness.

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [Roughness Analysis] button of [Extensions] toolbox.
3. Specify the range for calculating the roughness parameters.
4. Select the compensation method(Mean Line/R-surface/No comp.) of roughness parameter in [Compensation Method] tab of Calculation Dialog Box

When you select [Mean Line], rotates on the plane of X-Z.

When you select [R-surface], the least square circle is calculated by using the measurement point within the specified calculation range. And, the
measurement point is developed based on the circle.

[Calculation Option] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Compensation] --- Select the compensaion method of the measurement points.

b. [Specified range length] --- Displays the length specified on the measurement points.

Notice:

The measurement point that can be executed the roughness analysis is the point measured in the following way.

1. The measurement point measured by Surface Roughness Detector

2. The measurement point measured by Dual-purpose Surface Roughness/Form Detector with the condition of [Measure detailed surface roughness.]

See Also

Analyzing N-Section Roughness

Executes the roughness analysis N-section together.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 114 of 139

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [N-Section Roughness Analysis] button of [Extensions] toolbox.

Displays the [Select SurfAnalysis for N-Section] dialog box.

3. Add/Delete the Surface Roughness Analysis Command.

i. When you click [N-Section Roughness Analysis] button, selects all surface roughness analysis commands in Part Program.
ii. To add a command, click a surface roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

When the clicked command has already been added, the command is deleted.
iii. Two commands or more are necessary to execute the analysis.
iv. The calculation condition of each surface roughness analysis command doesn't influence the calculation result of the [N-Section Roughness
Analysis] command.

To set the condition of [N-Section Roughness Analysis] command, click the command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu.

4. Executes [N-Section Roughness Analysis] command by [OK] button.

[Select SurfAnalysis for N-Section] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- Displays the [Roughness Analysis] command.

b. [↑]/[↓] --- Change the target.

c. [Delete] --- Delete the selected [Roughness Analysis] command.

d. [OK] --- Executes the N-Section Roughness Analysis.

Measurement Result:

The result[1] of each command is output.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 115 of 139

See Also

Re-measuring Roughness
Re-measuring the specified range to execute the roughness analysis.

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [Re-Meas and Analysis Roughness] button of [Extensions] toolbox.

Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

3. Set the measurement condition of roughness analysis.
4. Next, specify the measurement position in the following way.

i. Changes the display of the scale coordinate.

ii. Displays two vertical cursors(the width of measurement length in [Meas Condition] dialog box).
iii. Specify the measurement position on the Figure Window.

iv. To change the measurement condition at this time, click [Re-Meas and Analysis Roughness] button of [Extensions] toolbox.

5. Displays the measurement screen after specification of the measurement position.

Displays the [Move to the position of re-meas.] dialog box.

6. Click [Re-Measurement] button.

Moving and measuring and analyzing.

[Move to the position of re-meas.] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 116 of 139

Tip:

In Re-measuring Roughness, there is the following advantages.

1. You can decrease the measurement time and the data size.

You measure first by the pitch of contour analysis, and you can re-measure roughness afterwards.

2. You can decide the range of the roughness analysis accurately.

You can specify the range of the roughness measurement from the contour analysis result.

See Also

Contour Tolerancing Toolbox

Executes the contour tolerancing.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Tolerancing] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Contour Tolerancing] toolbox.

[Contour Tolerancing] Toolbox:

1. [Perform Bestfit] --- Performs the bestfit of the measurement point and the nominal data.
2. [Perform Contour Tolerancing] --- Performs the contour tolerancing.
3. [Bestfit Configuration] --- Changes the target of Bestfit.
4. [Read Error Value] --- Reads error value of the arbitrary position of comparison result.
5. [Load Nominal Data] --- Reads the nominal data.
6. [Creates Nominal Data] --- Creates the nominal data from the existing measurement point.

See Also

Executing Bestfit
Calculates the position in which the measurement point overlaps with Nominal data best.

Allows you to remove the influence by the difference of the coordinates system.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 117 of 139

How To:

1. Click [Contour Tolerancing] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Perform Bestfit] button of [Contour Tolerancing] toolbox.
3. Specify the target measurement points of Bestfit by either of of [Specification] toolbox.
4. Set the calculation method in [Bestfit] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

[Bestfit] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

1. [Sign rep method] Group

i. [Ref nominal data] --- Moves the measurement points based on the nominal data.
ii. [Ref mes data] --- Moves the nominal data based on the measurement points.

2. [Proximate Pt Limit] Group

i. [All Points] --- All the Bestfit points are assumed to be objectives of calculation.

ii. [Nominal Line] --- The objectives of calculation are the best-fit points that are proximate to the measurement curve and consistent with the feet
of perpendicular lines from each best-fit point to the measurement curve.

iii. [End Point] --- From the best-fit points, the objectives of calculation are the points proximate to the measurement curve and inconsistent with the
feet of perpendicular lines from each best-fit point, or a perpendicular line can not be drawn.

3. [Parameter] --- Designate an appropriate parameter for obtaining a position and angle to reduce the residual in the Bestfit calculation.

4. [Model-based best fit] --- Calculate so that all the measurement points may become the inside or outside of the nominal data.

5. [Barycenter alignment] --- Aligns the measurement points to the Bestfit reference data before performing Bestfit.

This function is effective when the data range of the measurement point and the Nominal data is the same and away.

6. [Calculation Method] --- Select the best fit calculation method.

i. [Standard] --- Move so that the square of the distance from the nominal points to the measurement points is minimized.

ii. [LS] --- Move so that the square of the distance from the measurement points to the nominal points is minimized.

iii. [MIN-MAX] --- Moves so that the difference between the absolute value of the maximum and minimum distance from the measurement points to
the nominal points is minimized.
It can be set when the nominal data is "Tolerance curve data".

7. [Specify Nominal Data] --- Select the nominal data.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 118 of 139

Notice:

When the Bestfit is performed by using the part of the nominal data, the state of the part is maintained.

Only the calculated measurement data enters the range of the tolerance.

Tip:

The result of the expectation might not be obtained when the measurement point and the nominal data are extremely away.

For this case, move or rotate the measurement point and bring the measurement points close to the nominal data.

See Also

Executing Contour Tolerancing

Executes the comparison calculation of the nominal data and the measurement data.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Tolerancing] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Perform Contour Tolerancing] button of [Contour Tolerancing] toolbox.
3. Specify the target measurement points of Bestfit by either of of [Specification] toolbox.
4. Set the calculation method in [Contour Tolerancing] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
5. Click [OK] button to execute the Contour Tolerancing.
6. To change the condition of the error display, click [Error Display] command of [View] menu.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Error Display] is displayed.
i. To change the error magnification, drag the line of the tolerance area to become appropriate width.
ii. To display the Color Stripe, click [Color Stripe Display] command of [View] menu.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Color Stripe is displayed.
7. To confirm the Contour Tolerancing Result, click [Contour Tol Result] command of [View] menu.

Displays the [Contour Tolerancing Result] dialog box.

[Contour Tolerancing] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

1. [Performs Contour Tolerancing] --- Performs the contour tolerancing.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 119 of 139

2. [Specify Nominal Data] --- Select the nominal data.

3. [Tolerancing Direction] --- Specify the base points for tolerancing.
The base points are generally nominal data, but measured data is selectable.
4. [From nominal data to measured data] --- Tolerance from each point on nominal data to measured data.
5. [From measured data to nominal data] --- Tolerance from each point on measured data to nominal data.
6. [End points are not checked for tolerancing] --- The end points of point sequence of specified tolerancing targets (generally, measured data) are
excluded from tolerancing targets.
This option prevents end points becoming tolerancing targets of many nominal points, when nominal data is bigger than measured data.
7. [Developed Error Display] --- Displays the error development.
The nominal data is developed on the horizon, and the segment of the color and length corresponding to the error margin value is displayed vertically.
The error margin from the nominal value becomes clear though the shape of the nominal data is lost.
8. [Result removal based on error value] --- It is possible to remove an unnecessary results of contour tolerancing.
9. [Detail Setup] --- Set the detail condition.
Displays the [Contour Tolerancing Result Removal based on error value] dialog box.

[Contour Tolerancing Result Removal based on error value] Dialog Box:

1. [Standard deviation] --- When a standard deviation is below the reference level, a result isn't removed.
If the standard deviation of the error is sufficiently small, it is considered that there is no unnecessary result with an extremely large error value.
When a standard deviation of an error is small sufficiently.
If the standard deviation of the error is less than the [Threshold value (user input value)], do not make the following decision of [Error margin] (do
nothing).
The level value to be set is a conceptual, non-dimensional quantity.
Acceptable value for “threshold value” is 0.-100
2. [Error margin] --- Removes the result of a matching point where the error value exceeds the [Error margin].
If the difference between the error value of each point and the average value of the error is greater than the [Error margin(User input value)], it will be
removed.
The level value to be set is a conceptual, non-dimensional quantity.
Acceptable value for “threshold value” is 0.-100.

Measurement Result:

1. [# of +NG] --- Number of out tolerance data in outside

2. [# of -NG] --- Number of out tolerance data in inside
3. [Mean error] --- Mean value of the errors
4. [Std dev err] --- Standard deviation of the errors
5. [Max error] --- Maximum value of the errors
6. [Max error(X)] --- Maximum value of the X direction errors
7. [Max error(Z)] --- Maximum value of the Z direction errors
8. [Min error] --- Minimum value of the errors
9. [Min error(X)] --- Minimum value of the X direction errors
10. [Min error(Z)] --- Minimum value of the Z direction errors
11. [Mean error(abs)] --- Mean of the absolute errors
12. [Std dev err(abs)] --- Standard deviation of the absolute errors
13. [Max error(abs)] --- Maximum value of the absolute errors
14. [Max error(abs X)] --- Maximum value of the absolute X direction errors
15. [Max error(abs Z)] --- Maximum value of the absolute Z direction errors
16. [Min error(abs)] --- Minimum value of the absolute errors
17. [Min error(abs X)] --- Minimum value of the absolute errors
18. [Min error(abs Z)] --- Minimum value of the absolute X direction errors
19. [Profile of a line] --- Double value of maximum value of the absolute errors

[Contour Tolerancing Result] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 120 of 139

1. [Comparison Result] --- Displays the tolerance comparison result.

2. [Statistic] --- Displays the statistic of the olerance comparison result.
3. [Element Information] --- Displays the nominal data.
4. Menu of [Contour Tolerancing Result] Dialog Box --- Click the icon on the title bar.

Menu of [Contour Tolerancing Result] Dialog Box:

1. [Displays by Cartesian coordinate system] --- Display the nominal point position in the cartesian coordinates system.
2. [Displays by Polar coordinate system] --- Display the nominal point position in the cartesian coordinates system.
3. [Displays the Error by the Absolute Value] --- The statistic of the absolute value of the error is displayed.
4. [Save As] --- Saves the tolerance judgment result to the file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 121 of 139

Tip:

The [Error] and [Tolerance Result] of the nominal point without comparison destination becomes the blank.

And, the [Design point position] is a value of the nominal value coordinates system.

The movement amount from the nominal reference coordinate system to the nominal value coordinate system can be confirmed with the [Element
Information] button.

The movement amount from the evaluation coordinate system to the nominal standard coordinate system is displayed in [Movement range] of [Nominal data].

Notice:

When the inside and outside of the nominal data is not correctly set, the correct contour tolerance judgment result is not calculated.

Please refer to [Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Specifying Workpiece Entity Side].

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Specifying Workpiece Entity Side]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Tolerance Judgment Result]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Contour Tolerance Judgment Result]

Changing Bestfit Target Point

Allows you to change the nominal point used for the Bestfit, and specify the position in which weight is applied by the Bestfit.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Tolerancing] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Bestfit Configuration] button of [Contour Tolerancing] toolbox.
3. Displays the [Changes Bestfit Points] dialog box.
4. Select [Addition] or [Delete].

To add the nominal point that applies weight by the Bestfit, enter the small value to [Allowable deviation].

5. Select the nominal point by each of of [Designation] toolbox.

[Changes Bestfit Points] Dialog Box:

1. [Addition] --- Changes the selected nominal point into the point used for the Bestfit.

2. [Allowable deviation] --- Enter the small value for the nominal point that applies weight by the Bestfit.

3. [Delete] --- Changes the selected nominal point into the point not used for the Bestfit.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 122 of 139

See Also

Displaying Balloon
Displays the balloon of the tolerance result.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Tolerancing] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Read Error Value] button of [Contour Tolerancing] toolbox.
3. Drag the nominal point at the position in which the balloon is displayed. *1)
4. To change the position of the balloon, drag the balloon to the new display position. *1)
5. To delete the balloon, click the balloon and click [Close] button.

1) To cancel the operation, click the right button or press ESC key.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Contour Tolerance Judgment] - [Contour Tolerancing Toolbox]

Reading Nominal Data

Reads the nominal data file(.DE2).

How To:

1. Click [Contour Tolerancing] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Load Nominal Data] button of [Contour Tolerancing] toolbox.

Displays the dialog box in order to open the nominal data file.
3. Select the nominal data file and click [Open] button.
4. Set the change method in [Changes Nominal Data] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

To read the nominal data file, click [OK] button.

[Changes Nominal Data] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

1. [Element] --- Select the element to which parameters are changed.

Nominal data is handled as one element for each set of nominal data coordinates.
2. [Change] --- The nominal data file under the selection is changed.
3. [Permissible Deviation] --- Input the tolerance limit value.
4. [Direction] --- Select the tolerance comparison direction.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 123 of 139

5. [Reversing of inside and outside] --- The entity side of workpiece is reversed.

See Also

Creating Nominal Data

Creates the nominal data from the existing measurement point.(Refer to [Sampling method in measurement point])

Contour tolerancing of another measurement point can be performed by using the made nominal data.

How To:

1. Click [Contour Tolerancing] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

2. Click [Creates Nominal Data] button of [Contour Tolerancing] toolbox.
3. Specify the target measurement points that will be converted to the nominal data by either of of [Designation] toolbox.

4. Set the change method in [Creation of Nominal Data] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

Click [OK] button to convert the measurement data to the nominal data.

[Creation of Nominal Data] Tab of [Calculation] Dialog Box:

1. [Permissible Deviation] --- Input the tolerance limit value.

2. [Division Pitch] --- Specify the interval between nominal data points to generate the nominal data.
3. [Pitch Type] --- Select a constant pitch pattern to generate the nominal data.
4. [Direction] --- Select the tolerancing direction.

Sampling method in measurement point:

The point on the measurement data curve is sampled so that the distance between the
adjacent two points will be constant.
When the measurement curve is open, both end points become samples, too.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 124 of 139

Chord length constant pitch

The point on the measurement data curve is sampled so that the sampling interval of X-axis
direction will be constant in the point where the tangential direction is suitable for the X-
axis direction.
The point on the measurement data curve is sampled so that the sampling interval of Z-axis
direction will be constant in the point where the tangential direction is suitable for Z-axis
direction.
When the measurement curve is open, both end points become samples, too.

Axis Direction(Constant pitch on variable axis)

The point on the measurement curve is sampled so that the angle that the adjacent two
points and the origin of the polar coordinate will be constant.
When the measurement curve is open, both end points become samples, too.

Angle(Angle constant pitch)

Tolerancing Direction:

Nominal direction

First obtain a point on the measurement curve that is proximate to the corresponding
nominal data point in the tolerancing plane. If the corresponding nominal data point
actually exists in the direction of the normal line from this point, this normal line is
employed as the tolerancing direction.
The minimum distance from the nominal point P to measurement curve C becomes an error
value.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 125 of 139

Nominal data points in the nominal data file have each tolerancing direction vector defined.
So, errors can be calculated from the nominal data points in the direction of these vectors.

Vector direction

First obtain tolerancing points that exist on lines starting from the nominal data point and
extending in each direction of the 2 coordinate axes in the tolerancing plane. Then extend
normal lines from these tolerancing points. The tolerancing direction can be determined as
a normal direction, whichever aligns proximate with one of the two coordinate axes.
In the point where the normal direction is suitable for the direction of the nominal
coordinate system Z-axis, it performed tolerancing with the direction of the Z-axis of the
nominal coordinate system.
In the point where the normal direction is suitable for the direction of the nominal
coordinate system X-axis, it performed tolerancing with the direction of the X-axis of the
nominal coordinate system.
Automatic change

X-axis direction The tolerancing direction is determined as the X-axis direction of the rectangular
coordinate system, which is specified as the nominal data coordinate system.

Z-axis direction The tolerancing direction is determined as the Z-axis direction of the rectangular coordinate
system, which is specified as the nominal data coordinate system.

Origin direction

The tolerancing direction will be determined as the direction of each line that connects each
nominal data point and the origin of the polar coordinate system.
The difference of the radius vector of the point on the nominal point and the measurement
curve becomes an error value.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 126 of 139

See Also

Creating Nominal Data File

Create the nominal data file by Nominal Data Creation Utility.

How To:

1. Click [Nominal Data Creation] command of the [Tool] menu.

2. Execute the Nominal Data Creation Utility.

Allows you to create the nominal data file from the file of various forms(IGES/DXF/Measurement Data/Aspheric Shape Data/Text).

Notice:

Please refer to User's Manual of Nominal Data Creation Utility.

See Also

Saving Nominal Data

Saves the nominal data to the file.

How To:

1. Click [Output Nominal Data] command of the [Tool] menu.

2. When there is multiple nominal data, displays the [Output Nominal Data] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 127 of 139

3. Select the nominal data.

4. [Coord value notation] Group

i. [XY Coord System] --- Represents the point series of Nominal Data using XZ coordinate system.
ii. [Polar Coord System] --- Represents the point series of Nominal Data using polar coordinate system.

5. Displays the [Nominal Data File(*.DE2)Create] dialog box.

Input the nominal data file name and click [Save] button.

See Also

Outputting Tolerance Judgment Result

Outputs the tolerance judgment result to the file.

How To:

1. Click [Output Test Contours Result Details] command of the [Tool] menu.
2. Input the appropriate file name and save the result.

Tip: Allows you to output the specific contour tolerance comparison result to the file in the [Contour Tolerancing Result] dialog box

See Also

How To Generate Nominal Data

A figure might be drawn with the local coordinate system(X-Y) besides the coordinate system to the entire workpiece(X0-Y0).

The coordinate system of the entire workpiece is called the Nominal Reference Coordinate System. The local coordinate system is called the Nominal
Coordinate System. The nominal point position and tolerance comparison direction vector is written by using the nominal coordinate system.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 128 of 139

The tolerance value is specified with the nominal point position(C), the contour outside permissible value(A), and the contour outside permissible value(B).

You judge whether the measurement data exists inside or outside by using the point on the permissible region when the tolerance band width is not constant.

The points on the permissible region is called the Tolerance Profile.

See Also

Nominal Data File Format

The Nominal data file(.DE2) format is as follows.

*FILE: File name. Common data.

*DATA: Data type.
*DIRE: Shows the tolerancing direction.
*UNIT: Unit system.
*TOLE: Positional tolerance.
*WTOL: Width tolerance.
*TRAN: SIFT=Δx Δz Shows the order and amount of translation / rotation from the design reference coordinate axis. Data from the first nominal
ROTZ=θz data coordinate system.
Matrix to convert nominal data into that of a design reference coordinate system. (the first element)
*TMAT: x1 x2
y1 y2
t1 t2

*LTYP: Line type.

TOLE: Tolerance of local position.
WTOL: Tolerance of local width.
*DTYP: Flag indicating how to provide nominal data coordinates.
DIRE: Flag indicating how to provide tolerancing direction.
*NUMB: n number of nominal data points.

b p1x p1z rd1 v1x v1z w1 Nominal data, tolerancing direction vector and permissible deviation.
b p2x p2z rd2 v2x v2z w2
:
b pnx pny rdn vnx vny wn
*TRAN: SIFT=Δx Δz Data from the second nominal
ROTZ=θz data coordinate system.
(the second element)
*TMAT x1 x2
y1 y2
t1 t2

*LTYP: Line type.

TOLE: Tolerance of local position.
WTOL: Tolerance of local width.
*DTYP: Flag indicating how to provide nominal data coordinates.

: :
: :

l Keywords should begin in the first column, and data should be after the fifth column.

l Records with an asterisk ("*") at the right of the sign must be specified.

l Real numbers should be specified to a maximum of between 5 and 11 decimal places. Two values must be delimited by a comma (",") or a
space (" ").

l Positive tolerance values or tolerancing direction flags included in the coordinate data for each nominal data point have precedence over

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 129 of 139

those specified in the common data section. However, values in the common data section will be used without modification, unless
specified.

l The amount of rotation is represented in degrees and is not limited in range.

l Nominal data is handled as one element for each set of nominal data coordinates.

The detail of each record is as follows.

Keyword Description
FILE: Data file name.
DATA: Data type is specified by the following.
2DPLANE: Nominal value and tolerance limit value.
TOLECRV: Tolerance curve data.
DIRE: Type of tolerancing direction is specified by the following. Refer to [Tolerancing Direction] about the detail.
FREE: Nominal direction.
VECTOR: Vector direction specified for each piece of nominal data point.
AUTO: Either of two axes on the nominal coordinate system.
X-AXIS: X-axis direction on the nominal coordinate system.
Y-AXIS: Z-axis direction on the nominal coordinate system.
S-RADIUS: Direction toward from the origin of the nominal coordinate system to the nominal data.
UNIT: Unit system is specified by the following.
MM: mm
MICRON: um
TOLE: When specified 2DPLANE for DATA:, tolerance of position to be specified for in-tolerance and out-tolerance, in this order. A
positive value should be specified both for the in-tolerance and out-tolerance settings.

When specified TOLCRV for DATA:, it specifies it as follows.

When the nominal data is out-tolerancing curve, it is described 1.0 and 0.0 in TOLE.
When the nominal data is in-tolerancing curve, it is described 1.0 and 0.0 in TOLE.
WTOL: Tolerance of width. To be specified for in-tolerance and out-tolerance, in this order. A positive value should be specified both for
the in-tolerance and out-tolerance settings.
(*)Not used for contour tolerancing of Formtracepak.
TRAN: Specifies the order and value of translation(Δx, Δz) / rotating angle θz from the design reference coordinate axis.
Translation of the origin (SIFT)
Rotation about the Z axis (ROTZ)
These should be designated in the application order. That is, SIFT = is previously described when rotating after the translation,
and ROTZ = is described previously when translating after it rotates.
Zero should be specified even if no translation/rotation is attempted.
About the coordinate system, refer to [How To Generate Nominal Data].
TMAT: Matrix to convert nominal data into that for a design reference coordinate system. The content should not conflict with the
TRAN values.

(Px Pz 1) (x1 x2 0) = (Qx Qz 1)

(z1 z2 0)
(t1 t2 1)

where
(Px, Pz):Point coordinates on the nominal data coordinate system.
(Qx, Qz):Point coordinates on the design reference coordinate system.
(x1, x2):Vector in the direction of the 1st axis.
(z1, z2):Vector in the direction of the 2nd axis.
(t1, t2):Vector to the position of the origin.
Line type of the nominal data.
LTYP: FIGURE: Contour data.

DTYP: Type of coordinate representing nominal data point is specified by the following.
XY: XZ coordinate system.
RA: polar coordinate system.

Type of coordinate representing nominal data point.

XY: Represents the point series on the XZ plane using the XZ coordinate system. (When specified XY for DTYP:)
Represented as b Pix Piz Rdi Vix Viz Wi

RA: Represents the point series on the XZ plane using the RA (polar) coordinate system. (When specified RA for DTYP:)
Represented as b Pir Pia Rdi Vix Viz Wi

where
:"b" is the best-fit symbol. If this position (the sixth column) has a "b", this point is used for the best-fit calculation. It
b
is not used if the column is left blank.
Pix :X-value of the nominal data point on the nominal coordinate system.
Piz :Z-value of the nominal data point on the nominal coordinate system.
Pir :The absolute value of a radius vector difference from the origin on the nominal coordinate system.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 130 of 139

:The counterclockwise angle from the X-axis of the nominal coordinate system. (Ria must be represented in degrees.
Ria
(0 to 360))
:Represents the nominal value of the width at the nominal data point (dummy data).
Rdi
Rdi must always be specified (even if it is not used for contour tolerancing of Formtracepak.)
:X-component of tolerancing direction vector.
Vix
Specify it by the value of the nominal coordinate system only at DIRE:VECTOR.
:Z-component of tolerancing direction vector.
Viz
Specify it by the value of the nominal coordinate system only at DIRE:VECTOR.
: Represents an allowable deviation in best-fit processing (Wi > 0.0).
Wi
If small, the weight of the best-fit is large.
If large, the weight of the best-fit is small. (Weight of best-fit = 1/allowable deviation)
It is calculated as 1.0 when omitting it.
NUMB: Number of nominal data points

[Example of nominal data file]

FILE: SPM
DATA: 2DPLANE
DIRE: VECTOR
UNIT MM
TOLE 0.01, 0.01
WTOL: 0.2 , 0.3
TRAN SIFT= 0.0, 0.0
ROTZ= 0.0
TMAT 1.0, 0.0
0.0, 1.0
0.0, 0.0
LTYP: FIGURE
DTYP: XY
DIRE: VECTOR
NUMB:9
B 11.67433 5.00000 0.00000 0.15962 0.39370 1.00000
B 11.23537 5.92086 0.00000 0.15362 0.46621 1.00000
B 10.72391 6.80351 0.00000 0.14663 0.53571 1.00000
B 10.14326 7.64227 0.00000 0.13869 0.60175 1.00000
B 9.49716 8.43172 0.00000 0.12986 0.66392 1.00000
B 8.78979 9.16677 0.00000 0.12018 0.72179 1.00000
B 8.02570 9.84267 0.00000 0.10974 0.77501 1.00000
B 7.20983 10.45506 0.00000 0.09858 0.82323 1.00000
B 6.34744 11.00000 0.00000 0.04582 0.86614 1.00000

See Also

Contour Tolerance Result File Format

The contour tolerance result file format is as follows.

FILE: File name

DATA: Data type
UNITï: Unit System
MOVE: SIFT=Δx Shows the order and amount of translation/rotation from the tolerancing plane coordinate system to the nominal data coordinate system.
Δy
ROTZ=θz
TRAN: SIFT=Δx Shows the order and amount of translation/rotation from the design reference coordinate system to the nominal data coordinate system.
Δy
ROTZ=θz
TMAT: Matrix to convert nominal data into design reference coordinate system data.
x1 x2
z1 z2
t1 t2

LTYP: Line type of nominal data.

TOLE: Tolerance at local position (In-tolerance and Out-tolerance)
WTOL: Tolerance of width at local position (In-tolerance and Out-tolerance)
DIRE: Flag that shows Tolerancing direction at local position.
NUMB: n number of nominal data points.

STAT: NO Title1 Title2 ERROR RESULT

1 p1x p1z val1 error1 result1 Tolerancing result
2 p2x p2z val2 error2 result2

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 131 of 139

：
n pnx pnz valn errorn resultn

ABS SIGN
AVE.: Mean value of error (absolute value) AVE.: Mean value of error
DISP: Dispersion of error (absolute value) DISP: Dispersion of error
MAX.:Maximum error value (absolute value) (+)or(-) MAX.:Maximum error value
MIN.: Minimum error value (absolute value) (+)or(-) MIN.: Minimum error value

TRAN: SIFT=Δx
Δy
ROTZ=θz
TMAT
x1 x2
z1 z2
t1 t2

LTYP: Line type of nominal data

TOLE: Tolerance at local position (In-tolerance and Out-tolerance)
WTOL: Tolerance of width at local position (In-tolerance and Out-tolerance)

: :
: :

l The items without description are the same as the contents of the nominal data file. Refer to [Nominal Data File Format].

l The unit of angle is a degree.

l When output Multiple Results, Below the FILE:Key word repeated about the number of results.

l (+)/(-) of Maximum/Minimum error shows that it is out/in-side of the nominal data point.

With the contour tolerancing judgment result data, the titles and information of the points will be described as follows, depending on the values of "DIRE:".

Title1 Title2 ERROR RESULT

Nominal direction NOMINAL POINT(X,Z) NORMAL VECTOR ERROR RESULT

(DIRE:FREE) Pix, Piz Vix, Viz Error Judgment Result

Vector direction NOMINAL POINT(X,Z) VERIFICATION VECTOR ERROR RESULT

(DIRE:VECTOR) Pix, Piz Vix, Viz Error Judgment Result

NOMINAL POINT(X,Z) AXIS ACTUAL(X|Z) ERROR RESULT

Automatic change
(DIRE:AUTO) Tolerancing point value
Pix, Piz Toleramcing axis name Error Judgment Result
(X or Z coordinates)
NOMINAL POINT(X,Z) ACTUAL(X) ERROR RESULT
X-axis direction
(DIRE:X-AXIS) Tolerancing point value
Pix, Piz Error Judgment Result
(X coordinates)
NOMINAL POINT(R,A) ACTUAL(Z) ERROR RESULT
Z-axis direction
(DIRE:Y-AXIS) Tolerancing point value
Pir, Pia Error Judgment Result
(Z coordinates)
NOMINAL POINT(X,Z) ACTUAL(R) ERROR RESULT
In the direction of the origin
(DIRE:S-RADIUS) Tolerancing point value
Pix, Piz Error Judgment Result
(Distance to origin)

where
Pix: X-coordinate value of nominal data point on the nominal coordinate system
Piz: Z-coordinate value of nominal data point on the nominal coordinate system
Pir: The absolute value of a radius vector difference from the origin on the nominal coordinate system
Ria: The counterclockwise angle from the X-axis of the nominal coordinate system. (where Ria is displayed in
degrees (0 to 360))
Vix:X-component of tolerancing direction vector on the nominal coordinate system
Viz:Z-component of tolerancing direction vector on the nominal coordinate system

Tolerancing point values(X/Z coordinate, Distance to origin) are represented in the nominal data coordinate system.
Coordinate axis name is “X:(Y:)”. Tolerancing judgment is performed in the direction X(Z)-axis of the nominal coordinate system.

Tolerancing judgment results are followings.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 132 of 139

Symbols to represent judgment if the data is in or out of the tolerance zone and its position.

NG/OUT: Out of the tolerance zone, Out-side of the nominal data point.
Z1/OUT-Z4/OUT: Within the tolerance zone, Out-side of the nominal data point.
More distant area from the nominal data is shown by growing of the number.
Z1/IN-Z4/IN: Within the tolerance zone, In-side of the nominal data point.
More distant area from the nominal data is shown by growing of the number.
NG/IN: Out of the tolerance zone, In-side of the nominal data point.

About the level of each area of the error, refer to [Changing Display Condition of Tolerance Judgment Result].
The [Error] and [Tolerance Result] of the nominal point without comparison destination becomes the blank.

[Example of contour tolerance result file]

FILE: BL4 0.00000, 0.00000

DATA: 2DPLANE 0.00000
MOVE: SIFT=
ROTZ=
TRAN: ROTZ= 0.00000
SIFT= 0.00000, 90.24600
TMAT: 1.00000, 0.00000
0.00000, 1.00000
0.00000, 90.24600
LTYP: FIGURE
TOLE: 0.12700, 0.12700
WTOL: 0.57000, 0.57000
DIRE: FREE
NUMB: 19
NOMINAL POINT(X,Y) NORMAL VECTOR ERROR RESULT
1 -17.24300, -63.92300, -1.45493 0.08214 -0.04267 Z2/IN
2 -17.13110, -63.95280, 0.32326 -1.33235 0.02174 Z1/OUT
3 -16.89260, -63.91800, 0.42627 -1.28624 0.02992 Z1/OUT

:
STAT: ABS. SIGN
AVE:0.88207E-01 AVE:0.22518E-01
DISP:0.49478E-02 DISP0.12373E-01
MAX:0.28179E+00(-) MAX:0.27942E+00
MIN:0.45892E-02(+) MIN:-0.28179E+00

See Also

Changing For New Calculation

Allows you to execute the new calculation by discarding(or maintaining) the edit result of the measurement point.

When you discard the edit result of the measurement point, you can add the compensation.

Tip:

l The measurement point is compensated according to the compensation condition immediately after the measurement.

When [Change Meas Points] command is used, the measurement point is similarly compensated according to the compensation condition.
l The error caused by a circular arc movement of the stylus is always compensated.

How To:

1. Click [Change Meas Points] command of [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Change Meas Points] dialog box.

2. After the setting ends, the message to confirm the discarding of the measurement result might be displayed.

[Change Meas Points] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 133 of 139

a. [Save the result of the measured points edits] --- Allows you to execute the new calculation by maintaining the edit result of the measurement point.
b. [Restore the state just after measurement.] --- Allows you to execute the new calculation by discarding the edit result of the measurement point.
c. [Compensation After Restoration] --- Select the compensation to add.
d. [Set] --- Sets the condition of the compensation added.

Displays the [Comp Condition Setup] dialog box.

Notice:

When the Stylus Radius Compensation is performed at the time of the measurement, you can not add the compensation.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing The Condition of Stylus Radius Compensation]

Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points

Moves the measurement point to the position and angle in where the error between the measurement point and Bestfit Reference Data is minimized.

As a result, errors due to misalignment of the workpeice at measuring are minimized for calculating the measurement results.

About Bestfit:

The bestfit function will calculate distance between the measured points and given reference data, then adjust the measured coordinate system to the reference
coordinate system so that sum of the square of the distance is minimized.

[1]Measured Points/[2]Bestfit Reference Data/[3]Bestfit/[4]Reference Coordinate System/[5]Measurement Coordinate System

Tip: The [Measurement Coordinate System] is corresponding to Scale Coordinate System of Measuring Machine.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 134 of 139

1. Click [Bestfit] command in [Meas Points] menu of [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Bestfit Measured Points] dialog box.

2. Select the [No] of Bestfit from the list and set the condition.

Allows you to execute the Bestfit up to five times or less.

Tip: To execute the Bestfit at the time of Part Program running, Set the condition by [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command of [Settings] menu.

[Bestfit Measured Points] Dialog Box:

a. [No] --- Select the Bestfit condition.

b. [Set] --- Executes the Bestfit.

Bestfit ends when the following conditions consist.

i. (Variation of SUM value) < (1 + SUM value ) x EPS1
where EPS1=M/100,000.000

ii. (Variation of positions) < EPS2

where EPS2 = 1/1,000,000

In the above relationship, "SUM" denotes square harmony of the error and "M" denotes the number of best-fit points.
c. [Proximate Pt Limit] --- Select the restricting condition that defines the objective point from among the Bestfit points.
i. [All Points] --- All the Bestfit points are assumed to be objectives of calculation.

ii. [Nominal Line] --- The objectives of calculation are the best-fit points that are proximate to the measurement curve and consistent with the feet
of perpendicular lines from each best-fit point to the measurement curve.

iii. [End Point ] --- From the best-fit points, the objectives of calculation are the points proximate to the measurement curve and inconsistent with the
feet of perpendicular lines from each best-fit point, or a perpendicular line can not be drawn.
d. [Parameter] --- Select the movement direction of Bestfit.

Allows you to specify the movement direction by combining the X-axis direction/Z-axis direction/direction of rotation.
e. [Barycenter alignment] --- Aligns the Measured points to the Bestfit reference data before performing Bestfit.
f. [OK] --- Executes the Bestfit.

Movement Direction of Bestfit:

1. X-axis direction(X parameter) and Z-axis direction(Z parameter)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 135 of 139

2. Rotation around origin point(A parameter)

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Bestfit]

Preparing Bestfit Reference Data

Allows you to prepare the Bestfit Reference Data by the following two methods.

1. Reads the measurement points of the measurement data file as the Bestfit Reference Data.
2. Registers the present measurement points.

Reading from the measurement data file:

1. Click [Load Bestfit Reference Data] of the [File] menu.

Displays the [Read the Bestfit Reference Data.] dialog box.

2. Select the measurement data file.

Registering the present measurement points:

1. Click [Set Current Meas. Points As a Bestfit Reference Data] of the [File] menu.

Deleting the Bestfit Reference Data:

1. Click [Delete Bestfit Reference Data] of the [File] menu.

Discards the Bestfit Reference Data.

Showing or Hiding the Bestfit Reference Data:

1. Click [Display Bestfit Reference Data] of the [View] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 136 of 139

Shows or Hides the Bestfit Reference Data.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Bestfit Reference Data is displayed.

Tip:

l The Bestfit Reference Data is saved to the measurement data file(*.fpk).

l When the measurement data file is opened, the saved Bestfit Reference data is read.

See Also

Displaying Bestfit Calculation Result

Displays the calculation result of Bestfit.

1. Click [Show Bestfit Calculation Result] command of the [View] menu.

Displays the [Bestfit Calculation Results] dialog box.

[Bestfit Calculation Results] Dialog Box:

Displays the following information.

(1st Time) 1st process of Bestfit.

[1] Result of the 1st bestfit calculation.
The amount and the order of the translation to the coordinate after Bestfit from the
Shift Value DX DZ
coordinate before Bestfit.
Rotation Value RZ
Trans Matrix X1 X2 Matrix of conversion to the coordinate after Bestfit from the coordinate before Bestfit.
Z1
T1
Sum of the
products of the
square of errors SUM Sum of the products of the square of errors of the Bestfit points.
of the Bestfit
points.
[2] Same as …

Number of times the bestfit calculation repeated. This number may be smaller than the
No. of iteration N
value specified in the dialog box.
(2nd Time) Same as …

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 137 of 139

See Also

Changing Scale of Measurement Points

Allows you to zoom in or out of the measurement points by the specified magnification.

How To:

1. Click [Scaling] command in [Meas Points] menu of [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Scale of Meas Points] dialog box.

2. After the setting ends, the message to confirm the discarding of the measurement result might be displayed.

[Scale of Meas Points] Dialog Box:

a. [Mag Rate] --- Specify the magnification value.

See Also

Filtering Measurement Points

Performs low-pass filtering of the measurement points.

How To:

1. Click [Filtering] command in [Meas Points] menu of [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Filtering the measurement point] dialog box.

2. After the setting ends, the message to confirm the discarding of the measurement result might be displayed.

[Filtering the measurement point] Dialog Box:

a. [Filter type] --- Select the filter type.

Select from Gaussian, 2CR-PC, Rolling Circle, Spline, Robust Spline.

b. [Cutoff] --- Input the curoff value.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 138 of 139

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Filter Condition]

Smoothing Measurement Points

The measurement points are smoothed with the fairing method.

How To:

1. Click [Fairing] command in [Meas Points] menu of [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Fairing Setup] dialog box.

2. To set the detail condition, click [Detail Setup] button.

Displays the [Detail Setup for Fairing] dialog box.

[Fairing Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Typical element length] --- Input the length of element.

This length is standard length of the segment of the polygonal line.

b. [Detail Setting] --- Set the detail conditions.

Displays the [Fairing Detail Setup] dialog box.

[Detail Setup for Fairing] Dialog Box:

a. [Default value (3 Sigma)] --- Use the default value as Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method.
b. [Set a Value] --- Select the Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method.

To set the arbitrary value, select [Arbitrary value].

c. [Default value (Typical element length * 4)] --- Use the default value as Cutoff Value for Moving Average.
d. [Set a Value] --- Input the Cutoff Value for Moving Average.

About Fairing Processing:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Calculation Coordinates System Page 139 of 139

1. The measurement point is divided into the element.

2. The first two elements are targeted.
3. The polygonal line with one node is fitted to the measurement point in two elements.
4. The node of this polygonal line becomes the starting point of the following polygonal line.
5. Only one moves in the element of the target, and the processing of 3-5 is repeated.
6. When the processing ends for all elements, the polygonal line is decided.

->

[1]Segment [2]Node [3]Meas. point [4]Start point [5]Ray

Tip:

In the polygonal line fitting calculation, the effect of abnormal points is automatically eliminated with the robust estimation method.

Effective Data Range for Robust Estimation Method:

In a polygonal line fitting calculation the effect of abnormal points is automatically eliminated with the robust estimation method.

The group of remaining measured points excluding the points eliminated with the robust estimation method can be assumed to have an approximate normal
distribution.

Also, the threshold is set so as to determine the final fitting geometry using only the measured points within the specific range for the group of remaining
measured points that are assumed to have a normal distribution.

The threshold is set on the basis of standard deviation to be determined from the group of measured points excluding abnormal points.

Cutoff Value for Moving Average:

When measured points are grouped under small sections with a constant length, each dividing position is determined using the result of two-dimensional
moving average filter processing for the measured points, that is expressed as the following formula.

This is because of suppressing the effect of noises included in the measured points and preventing the number of measured points belonging to a small section
from being greatly unbalanced.

This cutoff value of the two-dimensional moving average filter is set as a dividing position.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Fairing Condition]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh39D9.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 1 of 56

Changing Display Section

Select one of the display sections.

How To:

1. Click [Select Display Section] command of the [View] menu.

Displays the [Section Select] dialog box.

2. Select the display section.

[Section Select] Dialog Box:

a. [Section angle to display<Label>] --- Select the display section from the section angle list on X-Y plane.

Tip:

For Display Data Selection Tab or the selection method of section by using tab list, please refer to [Operation Screen] - [Figure Window].

See Also

Changing Display Magnification

Changes the display magnification of the figure window.

1. Allows you to change the display magnification by the following variety method.

I. Zoom In By Mouse
II. Zoom Out By Mouse
III. Auto Magnification
IV. Fixed Vertical/Horizontal Ratio
V. Input Magnification

Zoom In By Mouse:

1. Click [Zoom-In] command of the [View] menu.

Or, click the [Display Change] button in the [Calculation] toolbox, and click the [Zoom-in] button in the [Display Change] toolbox.

2. Drag the mouse and specify the area that you want to display on the Figure Window by rectangular.

3. Zooms in to fit the specified area into Figure Window.

Zoom Out By Mouse:

1. Click [Zoom-Out] command of the [View] menu.

Or, click the [Display Change] button in the [Calculation] toolbox, and click the [Zoom-out] button in the [Display Change] toolbox.

2. Drag the mouse, and specify the area that you want to reduce to fit on Figure Window by rectangular.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 2 of 56

3. Zooms out to fit the Figure Window into the specified area.

Auto Magnification:

1. Click [Zoom to Fit] command of the [View] menu.

2. All measurement points are displayed to fit into Figure Window.

Fixed Vertical/Horizontal Ratio:

1. Click [Fixed Vertical/Horizontal Ratio] command of the [View] menu.

2. When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the vertical and horizontal ratio is fixed.

Input Magnification:

1. Click [Change Display Scale] command of the [View] menu.

2. Displays the [Display Magnification Setup] dialog box.

3. Set the display magnification value.

[Display Magnification Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [X] --- Enter the display magnification value of horizontal direction.

b. [Z] --- Enter the display magnification value of verticcl direction.

c. [Fix Z/X Ratio] --- Set the display magnification with the vertical/horizontal ratio fixed.

d. [Fix X Magnification] --- The display magnification of horizontal direction is fixed.

e. [Fix Z Magnification] --- The display magnification of vertical direction is fixed.

f. [Z/X] --- Select the vertical/horizontal ratio.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Display Magnification Bar]

Displaying Other Tab Data

Displays the data of other tab.

You can execute when the Figure Window is displayed with the window horizontally/vertically split.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 3 of 56

1. When the Figure Window is splitting horizontally or vertically, click either of the window in order to display the data of other tab.
2. Click the name of the tab in the [Display Data] of the [View] menu.

The data of the specified tab is displayed in the window clicked by No.1.
3. Or, click [Display Data] command of the [View] - [Display Data] menu.

Displays the [Display Data] dialog box.

Select the display tab.

4. If you want to release the data of other tab and to display former data,

click [Release] command of the [View] - [Display Data] menu.

[Display Data] Dialog Box:

See Also

Displaying Polar Coordinate Development

With the center of the circle that is determined from the measured point taken to be the origin of the polar coordinate system, the measured point on the
circumference develops along the X axis of a Cartesian coordinate system.

Polar coordinates express the position of the measured point using the distance r (radius vector) from the origin and the angle theta (angle of deviation) that
it makes from a fixed straight line whose starting point is the origin.

In the polar coordinate development display, the angle of deviation theta and radius vector r are displayed in a horizontal axis and vertical axis for each.

The [0] of the horizontal axis are the direction of three o'clock of the former figure. The scale of the horizontal axis is the same as that of the circumferential
length of the circle.

How To:

1. Change to Calculation Screen. ([End] command of the [Measurement] menu)

2. Calculate the circle from the measurement points.
3. Click [Polar Coordinate Development] command of the [View] menu.
Or, click [Polar Coordinate Development] button in the [Standard] toolbar.

Displays the [Polar Coordinate Development Display] dialog box. *1)

4. Specify two measurement points on Figure Window, and select the range to develop. *2)
5. Select the result of circle measurement that becomes the origin point of the polar coordinates from Figure Window or Part Program Window.

When there is only one circle, the circle is selected automatically.

6. To recalculate the circle when the polar coordinate development is displayed, input the Circle Measurement Command.
i. Input one point by [Measured Point Selection] / [X Value Specification] / [Z Value Specification] button.

Or, input the range by [X Range Specification] / [Measured Point Range Specification] button.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 4 of 56

You can input the multiple data by using [Multi-Input] button.

ii. Displays the [Calculation] dialog box.

Set the calculation condition.

Notice: To display dialog box when executing the calculation command, check [Displays calculation dialog box] in the [Measurement Result
Output Condition Setup] dialog box.
iii. The Circle Measurement Command is added to Part Program.

The added command is the last circle measurement command that recalculated while displaying the Polar Coordinate Development Display.
7. To calculate other command, change the measurement points by either of the following method.
l Perform the Polar Coordinate Development of the measurement points by [Polar Coordinate] button of [Edits Measured Points]
toolbox.
l Save the measurement data file while displaying the Polar Coordinate Development Display by using [Polar Coordinate Development]
command of the [View] menu.

When you open the measurement data file, you can perform the contour analysis to the saved measurement points.
8. To end the Polar Coordinate Development Display, click [Polar Coordinate Development] command of the [View] menu,

Or, click [Polar Coordinate Development] button of the [Standard] toolbar.

*1) When [Do not open this dialog box during display] has been selected in [Set Polar Coordinate Development...] command of the [Settings] menu,
the [Polar Coordinate Development Display] dialog box is not displayed.

*2) When [Polar Coordinate Development Display] dialog box is not displayed, all measurement points are automatically selected.

[Polar Coordinate Development Display] Dialog Box:

a. --- The counterclockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of increasing radius vector is displayed
as the vertical axis positive direction.

b. --- The clockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of increasing radius vector is displayed as the
vertical axis positive direction.

c. --- The counterclockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of decreasing radius vector is displayed
as the vertical axis positive direction.

d. --- The clockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of decreasing radius vector is displayed as the
vertical axis positive direction.
e. [Specify display range] --- Specifies the range of the measurement points and performs the Polar Coordinate Development.
f. [Do not open this dialog box during display] --- [Polar Coordinate Development Display] dialog box is not displayed.
g. [Display horizontal direction as an angle] --- Displays the horizontal axis as the angle.

The scale bar and grid is displayed with the angle.

Notice:

You cannot register the Polar Coordinate Development Display to Part Program.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 5 of 56

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Executing Polar Coordinate Development]

Changing Polar Coordinate Development Display

Changes the orientation of the Polar Coordinate Development Display. Or displays the horizontal axis of the Polar Coordinate Development
Display with the angle.

1. To end the Polar Coordinate Development Display, click [Polar Coordinate Development] command of the [View] menu,

or click [Polar Coordinate Development] button in the [Standard] toolbar.

2. Click [Set Polar Coordinate Development] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Polar Coordinate Development Display] dialog box.

3. To change the orientation of the Polar Coordinate Development, select the orientation of the polar coordinate development in [Display
Orientation].

The orientation after the development is changed according to the specified orientation.

To maintain the positional relationship before and after the development,

l click the upper right button when the origin point(Circle Center) of Polar Coordinate is under the curve,
l click the lower left button when the origin point(Circle Center) of Polar Coordinate is in the upper part of the curve.
4. To display the horizontal axis with the angle, select [Display horizontal direction as an angle].

[Polar Coordinate Development Display] Dialog Box:

a. --- The counterclockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of increasing radius vector is displayed
as the vertical axis positive direction.

b. --- The clockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of increasing radius vector is displayed as the
vertical axis positive direction.

c. --- The counterclockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of decreasing radius vector is displayed
as the vertical axis positive direction.

d. --- The clockwise is displayed as the horizontal axis positive direction, and the direction of decreasing radius vector is displayed as the
vertical axis positive direction.
e. [Specify display range] --- Specifies the range of the measurement points and performs the Polar Coordinate Development.
f. [Do not open this dialog box during display] --- [Polar Coordinate Development Display] dialog box is not displayed.
g. [Display horizontal direction as an angle] --- Displays the horizontal axis as the angle.

The scale bar and grid is displayed with the angle.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Executing Polar Coordinate Development]

Pasting Analysis Result

Pastes the analysis result into Figure Window.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 6 of 56

How To:

1. Click [Paste] command*1) in [Insert Meas Result] menu of [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Pastes the Measurement Result] dialog box.

Select the measurement result. The result is pasted on Figure Window.

2. To delete the pasted measurement result.

i. Select the pasted measurement result on Figure Window.

ii. Click [Delete] command*1) in [Insert Meas Result] menu of [Edit] menu.
3. To change to the transparent background.

i. Select the pasted measurement result on Figure Window.

ii. Click [Transparent] command*1) in [Insert Meas Result] menu of [Edit] menu.

When the background is transparent, the background is changed to the untransparent background by this command.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the transparent background is displayed.

*1) You cannot use this command in the [Measurement] tab and [All Contour] tab.

[Pastes the Measurement Result] Dialog Box:

See Also

Changing The Pasted Measurement Condition

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style, Item Selection, Background) of the pasted measurement condition.

How To:

1. Select the pasted measurement condition on Figure Window.

2. Click [Properties] command in [Insert Meas Result] menu of the [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted measurement condition.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style] or [Item selection] or [Background].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted measurement condition.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 7 of 56

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. Contour No. --- Select the contour number.

b. [Displays the title] --- Displays the title.

Input the title.

c. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 8 of 56

a. Contour No. --- Select the contour number.

b. [Number of rows] --- Change the number of rows.
c. [Display of frame] --- Displays the frame.
d. [Display of ruled line] --- Displays the ruled line.
e. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.
f. [Color] --- Specify the line color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

g. [Size] --- Select the line thickness.
h. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Item selection] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 9 of 56

a. Contour No. --- Select the contour number.

b. Item --- Select the item.

[Background] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 10 of 56

a. Contour No. --- Select the contour number.

b. [Display of background] --- Paints out the background.
c. [Style] --- Change the style of painting out.
d. [Option] --- Change the style of pattern coating.
e. [Color] --- Change the background color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

See Also

Changing The Pasted Evaluation Condition

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style, Item Selection, Background) of the pasted evaluation condition.

How To:

1. Select the pasted evaluation condition on Figure Window.

2. Click [Properties] command in [Insert Meas Result] menu of the [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted evaluation condition.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style] or [Item selection] or [Background].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted evaluation condition.

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Displays the title] --- Displays the title.

Input the title.

b. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 11 of 56

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Number of rows] --- Change the number of rows.

b. [Display of frame] --- Displays the frame.
c. [Display of ruled line] --- Displays the ruled line.
d. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.
e. [Color] --- Specify the line color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

f. [Size] --- Select the line thickness.
g. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Item selection] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 12 of 56

a. Item --- Select the item.

[Background] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 13 of 56

a. [Display of background] --- Paints out the background.

b. [Style] --- Change the style of painting out.
c. [Option] --- Change the style of pattern coating.
d. [Color] --- Change the background color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

See Also

Changing The Pasted Measurement Result Geometric Data

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style, Background, Display Range) of the pasted measurement geometric data.

Allows you to change the display range of the pasted geometric data in [Display range] tab.

How To:

1. Select the pasted measurement geometric data on Figure Window.

2. Click [Properties] command in [Insert Meas Result] menu of the [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted measurement geometric data.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style] or [Background] or [Display range].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted measurement geometric data.

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 14 of 56

a. [Displays the title] --- Displays the title.

Input the title.

b. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

c. [Displays the mag rate] --- Displays the mag rate.
d. [Displays the Error rate] --- Displays the error rate

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Output Result Geometry Same as CRT] --- Displays the same screen as Figure Window.
b. [Displays the scale mark] --- Displays the scale mark .
c. [Displays a numeric value and a large scale] --- Displays the large scale mark and the numeric value.
d. [Displays only the figure] --- Hides the scale mark and the numeric value.
e. [Displays Length/cm] --- Displays Length/cm.
f. [Display of frame] --- Displays the frame.
g. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.
h. Displays the [Color] dialog box.
i. [Size] --- Select the line thickness.
j. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Background] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 15 of 56

a. [Display of background] --- Paints out the background.

b. [Style] --- Change the style of painting out.
c. [Option] --- Change the style of pattern coating.
d. [Color] --- Change the background color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

[Display range] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 16 of 56

a. [Magnification] --- Specify the magnification of the vertical axis.

Specify the magnification.

b. [Position of Origin] --- Specify the origin point of the vertical axis.

[Top] --- Sets the origin point of the vertical axis to the top.

[Center] --- Sets the origin point of the vertical axis to the center.

[Bottom] --- Sets the origin point of the vertical axis to the bottom.
c. [Data range] --- Specify the data range of the vertical axis.

[Length] --- Input the length of the vertical axis.

[Init pt] --- Input the start point of the vertical axis.

[Term pt] --- Input the end point of the vertical axis.
d. [Magnification] --- Specify the magnification of the horizontal axis.

Specify the magnification.

e. [Position of Origin] --- Specify the origin point of the horizontal axis.

[Left] --- Sets the origin point of the horizontal axis to the left.

[Center] --- Sets the origin point of the horizontal axis to the center.

[Right] --- Sets the origin point of the horizontal axis to the right.
f. [Data range] --- Specify the data range of the horizontal axis.

[Length] --- Input the length of the horizontal axis.

[Init pt] --- Input the start point of the horizontal axis.

[Term pt] --- Input the end point of the horizontal axis.
g. [Use series of 1,2,5] --- Allows you to select the magnification value from the series of 1,2,5,etc.
h. [Doesn't change the Vert/horiz ratio] --- Allows you to change the display magnification with the vertical/horizontal ratio maintained.
i. [Displays the whole] --- Displays all measurement points by using the current display condition.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 17 of 56

j. [Zoom in] --- Zoom in.

k. [Zoom out] --- Zoom out.

l. [Whole View] --- Displays all measurement points.

m. [Display Position] --- Drag and move the display position.

n. [Display Center] --- Specify the display center position by clicking.

See Also

Changing The Pasted Measurement Result

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style, Item Selection, Background) of the pasted measurement result.

How To:

1. Select the pasted measurement result on Figure Window.

2. Click [Properties] command in [Insert Meas Result] menu of the [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted measurement result.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style] or [Item selection] or [Background].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted measurement result.

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 18 of 56

a. [Displays the title] --- Displays the title.

Input the title.

b. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Number of rows] --- Change the number of rows.

b. [Display of frame] --- Displays the frame.
c. [Display of ruled line] --- Displays the ruled line.
d. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.
e. [Color] --- Specify the line color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

f. [Size] --- Select the line thickness.
g. [Changes the color by the output comparison result] --- Uses the display color determined according to the tolerance comparison result.
h. [Displays the symbol] --- Displays the symbol to the measurement result.
i. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Item selection] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 19 of 56

a. [Sets the output target arbitrarily] --- Displays the item selected from the list.
b. [Targets the specified statistic output dimension] --- Displays the dimension specified as the statistic output.
c. [Outputs only the dimension of the OutTol] --- Displays the dimension of out-of-tolerance.
d. Item --- Select the item.

[Background] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 20 of 56

a. [Display of background] --- Paints out the background.

b. [Style] --- Change the style of painting out.
c. [Option] --- Change the style of pattern coating.
d. [Color] --- Change the background color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

See Also

Changing The Pasted Property

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style, Item Selection, Background) of the pasted property.

How To:

1. Select the pasted property on Figure Window.

2. Click [Properties] command in [Insert Meas Result] menu of the [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted property.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style] or [Item selection] or [Background].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted property.

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 21 of 56

a. [Displays the title] --- Displays the title.

Input the title.

b. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 22 of 56

a. [Number of rows] --- Change the number of rows.

b. [Display of frame] --- Displays the frame.
c. [Display of ruled line] --- Displays the ruled line.
d. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.
e. [Color] --- Specify the line color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

f. [Size] --- Select the line thickness.
g. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Item selection] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 23 of 56

a. Item --- Select the item.

[Background] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 24 of 56

a. [Display of background] --- Paints out the background.

b. [Style] --- Change the style of painting out.
c. [Option] --- Change the style of pattern coating.
d. [Color] --- Change the background color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

See Also

Changing The Pasted Measurement Data

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style, Item Selection, Background) of the pasted measurement points(Text).

Specify the range of the measurement points in [Item selection].

How To:

1. Select the pasted measurement points data on Figure Window.

2. Click [Properties] command in [Insert Meas Result] menu of the [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted measurement points data.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style] or [Item selection] or [Background].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted measurement points data.

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Displays the title] --- Displays the title.

Input the title.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 25 of 56

b. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Number of rows] --- Change the number of rows.

b. [Display of frame] --- Displays the frame.
c. [Display of ruled line] --- Displays the ruled line.
d. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.
e. [Color] --- Specify the line color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

f. [Size] --- Select the line thickness.
g. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Item selection] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 26 of 56

a. [Init pt] --- Input the start point of the vertical axis.
b. [Term pt] --- Input the end point of the vertical axis.
c. [Init pt] --- Input the start point of the horizontal axis.
d. [Term pt] --- Input the end point of the horizontal axis.

e. [Zoom in] --- Zoom in.

Please refer to [Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Display] - [Zoom In].

f. [Zoom out] --- Zoom out.

Please refer to [Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Display] - [Zoom out].

g. [Whole View] --- Displays all measurement points.

h. [Display Position] --- Drag and move the display position.

Notice:

You cannot use this command in the [Measurement] tab and [All Contour] tab.

When the Measurement Data cannot be displayed by expanding the display range of data, the lower side becomes as follows.

[Background] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 27 of 56

a. [Display of background] --- Paints out the background.

b. [Style] --- Change the style of painting out.
c. [Option] --- Change the style of pattern coating.
d. [Color] --- Change the background color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

See Also

Changing The Pasted Parameter Sum Table

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style, Item Selection, Background) of the pasted parameter sum table.

How To:

1. Select the pasted parameter sum table on Figure Window.

2. Click [Properties] command in [Insert Meas Result] menu of the [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted parameter sum table.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style] or [Item selection] or [Background].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted parameter sum table.

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 28 of 56

a. [Displays the title] --- Displays the title.

Input the title.

b. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 29 of 56

a. [Number of rows] --- Change the number of rows.

b. [Display of frame] --- Displays the frame.
c. [Display of ruled line] --- Displays the ruled line.
d. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.
e. [Color] --- Specify the line color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

f. [Size] --- Select the line thickness.
g. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Item selection] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 30 of 56

a. Item --- Select the item.

[Background] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 31 of 56

a. [Display of background] --- Paints out the background.

b. [Style] --- Change the style of painting out.
c. [Option] --- Change the style of pattern coating.
d. [Color] --- Change the background color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

See Also

Changing The Pasted Graph

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style, Background, Display Range) of the pasted graph.

Allows you to change the display range of the pasted graph in [Display range] tab.

How To:

1. Select the pasted graph on Figure Window.

2. Click [Properties] command in [Insert Meas Result] menu of the [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted graph.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style] or [Background] or [Display range].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted graph.

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 32 of 56

a. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Display of frame] --- Displays the frame.

b. [Line Type] --- Select the line type.
c. Displays the [Color] dialog box.
d. [Size] --- Select the line thickness.
e. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Background] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 33 of 56

a. [Display of background] --- Paints out the background.

b. [Style] --- Change the style of painting out.
c. [Option] --- Change the style of pattern coating.
d. [Color] --- Change the background color.

Displays the [Color] dialog box.

[Display range] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 34 of 56

<Vertical axis>

a. [Data range] --- Specify the data range of the vertical axis.
b. [Length] --- Displays the length of the vertical axis.
c. [Init pt] --- Input the start point of the vertical axis.
d. [Term pt] --- Input the end point of the vertical axis.
e. [Display Size] --- Specify the display size of the vertical axis.

<Horizontal axis>

e. [Data range] --- Specify the data range of the horizontal axis.
f. [Length] --- Displays the length of the horizontal axis.
g. [Init pt] --- Input the start point of the horizontal axis.
h. [Term pt] --- Input the end point of the horizontal axis.
i. [Display Size] --- Specify the display size of the horizontal axis.

j. [Zoom in] --- Zoom in.

k. [Zoom out] --- Zoom out.

l. [Whole View] --- Displays whole of graph.

m. [Display Position] --- Drag and move the display position.

n. <f0><b1>[Display Center]</b1></f0> --- Specify the display center position by clicking.

See Also

Changing The Pasted Statistic Result List

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 35 of 56

Change the attribute(Title, Display Style) of the pasted statistic result list.

How To:

1. Select the pasted statistic result list on the layout edit program.
2. Click [Properties] command of the [Edit] menu.
Or, click [Properties] command in the pop-up menu of the pasted statistic result list.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box *1)

3. Click [Title] or [Display Style].

*1) Or, double-click the pasted statistic result list.

[Title] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Displays the title] --- Displays the title.

Input the title.

b. [Font settings] --- Change the font of the title.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

[Display Style] of [Attribute Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 36 of 56

a. [Font settings] --- Change the font.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Measurement Result

Changes the display condition of measurement result.

How To:

1. Click [Set Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box.

2. Click [Meas. Result] tab.

[Meas. Result] Tab of [Display Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 37 of 56

a. Measurement Results --- Displays the selected measurement result in Figure Window.

b. [Color] --- Select the display color of the measurement result.

c. [Type] --- Select the line type or filled pattern of the measurement result.

d. [Size/Width] --- Select the width of the lines and size of the dots of the measurement result.

e. [Display Color] --- Specify the color of the dimension and label.

f. [Type of Dimension Line] --- Select the type of the dimension line.

g. [Thickness of Dimension Line] --- Select the thickness of the dimension line.

h. [Standard Setup] --- Restores to the default setting.

i. [Modifies] --- Existing data is changed.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Tolerance Judgment Result

Changes the display condition of tolerance judgment result.

How To:

1. Click [Set Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box.

2. Click [Tolerancing Result Display] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 38 of 56

Allows you to change the level and the color of each area of the error that divided into 10 steps.

[Tolerancing Result Display] Tab of [Display Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [If Tolerancing Is Performed] Group

i. [Color] --- Select the color of the tolerance result.
ii. [Mark] --- Select the mark of the tolerance result.
iii. [Percent (%) Tolerance] --- Input the division level in percent.

Sets the nominal value to 0%, and sets the maximum tolerance and minimum tolerance to 100%.
iv. [Tol. Band] --- Displays the tolerance band.
v. [Auto settings] --- Sets the color consecutive from the upper bound to the lower bound automatically.
b. [If Tolerancing Is Not Performed] --- Select the display color of the unprocessing of the tolerance comparison.
c. [Dimensional Datum] --- Performs the tolerance comparison judgment by applying the upper limit in the far position and the lower limit in
the near position with reference to the origin point of the coordinate system.
d. [Coord. Datum] --- Performs the tolerance comparison judgment by applying the upper limit in the positive direction and the lower limit in
the negative direction with reference to the origin point of the coordinate system.

This button can be selected only for the item that the object of the tolerance comparison judgment can become the negative value.
e. [Judge by displayed digit] --- Performs the tolerance comparison judgment with the displayed value.

When you don't select this button, the tolerance comparison judgment is performed by using the numeric value inside the system.

The result might be different depending on the influence of rounding.

For the setup method of number of digits after the decimal point, please refer to [Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] -
[Changing Display Condition of Numerical Value/Unit].
f. [Standard Setup] --- Restores to the default setting.
g. [Modifies] --- Existing data is changed.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 39 of 56

Changing Display Condition of Dimension/Label

Changes the display condition of dimension/label.

How To:

1. Click [Set Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box.

2. Click [Dimension/Label] tab.

[Dimension/Label] Tab of [Display Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Dimension/Label Display] --- Displays the dimension and label.

b. [Simple Display] --- Displays the dimension by the simple method.
c. [Dimension Display] --- Displays the dimension and label.
d. [Type] --- Select the display type(only dimension or only label or both).
e. [Font Setup] --- Changes the font of the dimension and the label.
f. [Position of Value] --- Select the position of the dimension for the dimension line
g. [Display the Value Horizontally] --- Displays the value of dimension horizontally.
h. [Display Circle Dimension Horizontally using the broke leader line] --- The dimension line of the diameter of the circle is made to the broken
line, and the value is displayed horizontally.

i. [Display the unit of length] --- Displays the length dimension with unit.

j. [Display the minus sign] --- Displays the measurement result with the minus sign.

k. [Dimensional Arrow] Group

i. [Apply Arrow] --- Displays the arrow to the dimension line.

ii. [Size] --- Specify the size of the arrow tip.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 40 of 56

iii. [Angle] --- Specify the angle of the arrow tip.

l. [Set Label Name...] --- Allows you to change the label name. *1)

Displays the [Default Setting of Label Name Setup] dialog box.

m. [Result Item...] --- Allows you to change the name of the measurement result and display the symbol to the value.

Displays the [Result Item] dialog box.

n. [Label Position...] --- Allows you to change the display position of the label.

Displays the [Label Display Position Setting] dialog box.

o. [Modifies] --- Existing data is changed.

*1)The change is reflected in current data.

[Default Setting of Label Name Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Measuring Result] --- Select the measurement result from the list. Or select the result by using spin button.
b. [List] --- Displays the list of the label name for each type of the measurement result.
c. [Label Name] --- Change the label name.
d. [Std Setup...] --- Restores to the default setting.

All label names are restored to the initial setting.

[Result Item] Dialog Box:

a. [List] --- Select the the measurement result.

b. [Kind of Evaluation] --- Select the evaluation item.
c. [Change Result Item Name] --- Enter the name of the measurement result.
d. [Sub. Symbol] --- Select the display position of the dimension symbol.

When you select [No symbol], the dimension symbol will not be displayed.
e. [Symbol] --- Select the dimension symbol.
f. [Standard Setup] --- Restores to the default setting.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 41 of 56

[Label Display Position Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Label positions linked to the calculated results] --- Displays the label and the dimension according to the display position of the
measurement result.

If you don't select this, the label and the dimension is displayed at the position specified by the teaching operation.
b. [Based on measurement point coordinates] --- The label and the dimension is displayed at the position that synchronizes with the movement
and the rotation.
c. [Based on calculation coordinates] --- The label and the dimension is displayed at the position that synchronizes with the movement of the
measurement result.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Input Option

Changes the display condition of the input option.

How To:

1. Click [Set Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box.

2. Click [Input Option] tab.

[Input Option] Tab of [Display Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 42 of 56

a. [Multiple Option Status Color Display] --- Select the color of [Non-selection] and [Selection] of the selection candidate's display color.
b. [Display Input Mark] Group
i. [Display] --- Displays the mark of the input position.
ii. [Color] --- Select the color of mark of the input position.
iii. [Mark] --- Select the type of mark of the input position.
c. [Modifies] --- Existing data is changed.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Measurement Result Geometric Data

Changes the display condition of measurement result geometric data.

How To:

1. Click [Set Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box.

2. Click [Geometric Display Option] tab.

[Geometric Display Option] Tab of [Display Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 43 of 56

a. [Display Infinite Line or Circle] --- The line is displayed by the infinitely long line and the circle is displayed by the complete circle.
b. [Display in the Range of Meas Points Specified when Calc] --- The line is displayed by the segment and the circle is displayed by the arc.
c. [Display Meas Points on Top] --- You can see the measurement points when the measurement points overlaps with the geometric data.
d. [Display Meas Results Geometry on Top] --- You can see the geometric data when the geometric data overlaps with the measurement points.
e. [Invalid Area] --- Displays the invalid area.

Select the color and display method of the invalid area.

f. [Modifies] --- Existing data is changed.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Measurement Point

Changes the display condition of measurement point.

How To:

1. Click [Set Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box.

2. Click [Display Meas. Point] tab.

[Display Meas. Point] Tab of [Display Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 44 of 56

a. [Setting for entire meas.] --- Set all contours to the same condition.
b. [Color] --- Select the display color of the measurement points.

c. [Type] --- Select the line type or the filled pattern of the measurement points.

d. [Size/Width] --- Select the width of the lines and size of the dots of the measurement points.

e. [Display Meas Point] Group

i. [Point Display] --- Displays the measurement points using the dots.
ii. [Poly-Line Display] --- Displays using polyline.
f. [Standard Setup] --- Restores to the default setting.
g. [Setting for each contour] --- Sets individual condition for each contour.
h. [Currently existing Meas Point] --- Sets the color and the style of the displaying contour.

Displays [Detail setting for each contour] dialog box and set the display condition for each contour.
i. [Default setting for Display Info] --- Sets the default condition of the contour that is measured.

Displays [Detail setting for each contour] dialog box and set the display condition for each measured contour.
j. [Invalid Data] Group
i. [Display] ---Display the part not used for the roughness analysis calculation. (The Deleting Part By User or The Over-Range)
ii. [Color] --- Select the display color of the invalid data.

iii. [Type] --- Select the line type or filled pattern of invalid data.

iv. [Size/Width] --- Select the width of the lines and size of the dots of invalid data.

v. [Standard Setup] --- Restores to the default setting.

k. [Both sides of the data] Group
i. [Display] --- Displays the inside and outside of data.

Displays the workpiece side of data using the gradation.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 45 of 56

ii. [Length] --- Input the display length of the workpiece side.
l. [Sets the H-axis start position to 0] --- Sets the horizontal start position of the roughness evaluation profile to [0](Zero).
m. [Modifies] --- Existing data is changed.

[Detail setting for each contour] Dialog Box:

a. [Display] --- Displays the selected contour in Figure Window.

b. [Color] --- Select the display color.

c. [type] --- Select the line type or filled pattern.

d. [Size/Width] --- Select the width of the lines and size of the dots.

e. [Display Meas Point] Group

i. [Point Display] --- Displays the measurement points using the dots.
ii. [Poly-Line Display] --- Displays using polyline.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Specifying Workpiece Entity Side]

Changing Display Condition of Contour Tolerance Judgment Result

Changes the display condition of the contour tolerance judgment result.

How To:

1. Click [Set Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box.

2. Click [Contour Tolerancing Conditions] tab.

[Contour Tolerancing Conditions] Tab of [Display Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 46 of 56

a. [Nominal Data] --- Displays the nominal data and the Bestfit target to Figure Window.

Specify the display color, type and size.

Select the size of Bestfit target.

b. [Tolerance Band] --- Displays the tolerance bands to Figure Window.

Specify the display color, type and size.

And specify the magnification of the tolerance band.

c. [Error Curve] --- Displays the error curve to Figure Window.

Specify the type and thickness of line.

d. [Max] --- Displays the max position of tolerancing judgment to Figure Window.

Specify the display color, type and size.

e. [Min] --- Displays the min position of tolerancing judgment to Figure Window.

Specify the display color, type and size.

f. [Number of flyout displaying after test contours] --- Input the number of the balloon of the contour tolerance result.

i. [IN/OUT] --- Displays the balloons of the specified number to the inside or outside.
g. [Fix flyouts] --- Flyouts are displayed at the same position after part program execution.

h. [Method of Error Development] Group

i. [X-axis] --- Displays the development display making intervals of X-axis constant.
ii. [Chord] --- Displays the development display making distance between two adjoined points constant.
i. [Nominal Data Tolerancing] Group
i. [Absolute] --- Uses the absolute value.
ii. [Signed] --- Uses the numerical value with sign.
iii. [XY Coord System] --- Uses the coordinate value of X-Y coordinate system.
iv. [Polar Coord System] --- Uses the coordinate value of polar coordinate system.
j. [Flyout display item] Group
i. [Title] --- The title is included in the flyout.
ii. [Error value] --- Appends the error value to the balloon of contour tolerance result.
iii. [Permissible Deviation] --- Appends the permissible Deviation to the balloon of contour tolerance result.
iv. [Admission decision] --- Appends the judgment result to the balloon of contour tolerance result.
k. [Modifies] --- Existing data is changed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 47 of 56

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing]

Changing Display Condition of Auxiliary Line

Changes the display condition of the auxiliary line.

How To:

1. Click [Set Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box.

2. Click [Display Auxiliary Line] tab.

[Display Auxiliary Line] Tab of [Display Setup] Dialog Box:

a. Auxiliary Line --- Displays the selected auxiliary line in Figure Window.
b. [Color] --- Select the display color of the auxiliary line.
c. [Type] --- Select the type of the auxiliary line.
d. [Size/Width] --- Select the width of the lines and size of the dots of the measurement result.
e. [Standard Setup] --- Restores to the default setting.
f. [Modifies] --- Existing data is changed.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Display Method] - [Displaying Auxiliary Line of Roughness Parameter]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 48 of 56

Changing Display Condition of Grid

Changes the display condition of grid.

How To:

1. Click [Data Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display settings of data] dialog box.

2. Click [Grid] tab.

[Grid] Tab of [Display settings of data] Dialog Box:

a. [Apply to current figure only] --- The displaying tab of Figure Window is changed.
b. [Rectangular grid] Group
i. [Display] --- Displays the rectangular grid.
ii. [Display Color] --- Select the display color of the rectangular grid.
iii. [Line Type] --- Select the line type of the rectangular grid.
iv. [Line Width] --- Select the thickness of the rectangular grid.
v. [Auto setting] --- Sets the grid pitch automatically.

To use this selection, set the grid size reference criterion to the measurement data reference.
l [Wide] --- Sets the grid pitch to wide.
l [Medium] --- Sets the grid pitch to medium.
l [Narrow] --- Sets the grid pitch to narrow.
vi. [Pitch] --- Specify the display pitch of the rectangular grid line.
l [X] --- Input the grid pitch of the horizontal direction.
l [Z] --- Input the grid pitch of the vertical direction.
vii. [Display interval] --- Input the number of grid line.
l [X] --- Specify the number of the horizontal grid line.
l [Z] --- Specify the number of the vertical grid line.
viii. [Align Location Point to Grid] --- Aligns the mouse input on the grid.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 49 of 56

Allows you to use this selection in the rectangular grid.

ix. [Display 2nd Grid] --- Displays 2nd grid.

[Detail setting] --- Sets the display conditions of the 2nd grid.

Please refer to [2nd Grid Setting] (Rectangular Grid).

c. [Polar grid] Group
i. [Display] --- Displays the polar grid.
ii. [Display Color] --- Select the display color of the polar grid.
iii. [Line Type] --- Select the line type of the polar grid.
iv. [Line Width] --- Select the thickness of the polar grid.
v. [Pitch] --- Specify the pitch of the polar grid.
l [θ] --- Select the angle that radially divides equally the circumference (360 degree).
l [R] --- Input the pitch for circle grid.
vi. [Display 2nd Grid] --- Displays 2nd grid.

[Detail setting] --- Sets the display conditions of the 2nd grid.

Please refer to [2nd Grid Setting] (Polar Grid) below.

d. [Grid size reference criterion] Group
i. [Fixed scale according Meas points] --- Displays the grid by the measurement data reference.

In this method, the pitch of grid is changed according to the display magnification of window.
ii. [Fixed scale according display] --- Displays the grid according to the screen or the output form.

In this method, the pitch of grid is not changed accoording to the display magnification of window.
e. [Reference Axis Selection] Group
i. [Display] --- Displays the reference axis.
ii. [Display Color] --- Select the display color of the reference axis.
iii. [Line Type] --- Select the line type of the reference axis.
iv. [Line Width] --- Select the thickness of the reference axis.

[2nd Grid Setting] (Rectangular grid)

The 2nd grid is the additional grid line that divides equally between grids.

a. [Pitch] --- Specify the pitch of the 2nd grid.

i. [X] --- Specify the divide number of the horizontal direction of the 2nd grid.
ii. [Z] --- Specify the divide number of the vertical direction of the 2nd grid.
b. [Color] --- Select the display color of the 2nd grid.
c. [Line Type] --- Select the line type of the 2nd grid.
d. [Line Width] --- Select the line thickness of the 2nd grid.

[2nd Grid Setting] (Polar Grid)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 50 of 56

a. [Pitch] --- Specify the pitch of the 2nd grid.

i. [θ] --- Specify the divide number that radially divides equally the circumference (360 degree).
ii. [R] --- Specify the divide number for circle grid.
b. [Color] --- Select the display color of the 2nd grid.
c. [Line Type] --- Select the line type of the 2nd grid.
d. [Line Width] --- Select the line thickness of the 2nd grid.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Automatic Magnification

Changes the display condition of automatic magnification.

How To:

1. Click [Data Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display settings of data] dialog box.

2. Click [Settings for Zoom to Fit] tab.

[Settings for Zoom to Fit] Tab of [Display settings of data] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 51 of 56

a. [Apply to current figure only] --- The displaying tab of Figure Window is changed.
b. [Vertical] Group
i. [Top Margin] --- Specify the ratio of the upper space of Figure Window.
ii. [Bottom Margin] --- Specify the ratio of the lower space of Figure Window.
iii. [Position of Origin] --- Select the origin position of vertical direction.
iv. [Use ratio series of 1, 2, 5] ---Uses the display magnification of 1,2,5,etc. series.
v. [Fix Z-Magnification] ---Fix the vertical magnification in specified value.
c. [Horizontal] Group
i. [Left Margin] --- Specify the ratio of the left space of Figure Window.
ii. [Right Margin] --- Specify the ratio of the right space of Figure Window.
iii. [Position of Origin] --- Select the origin position of vertical direction.
iv. [Use ratio series of 1, 2, 5] ---Uses the display magnification of 1,2,5,etc. series.
v. [Fix X-Magnification] ---Fix the horizontal magnification in specified value.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Numerical Value/Unit

Changes the display condition of the numerical value and unit.

How To:

1. Click [Data Display] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display settings of data] dialog box.

2. Click [Numeric Notation Setup] tab.

[Numeric Notation Setup] Tab of [Display settings of data] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 52 of 56

a. [Apply to current figure only] --- The displaying tab of Figure Window is changed.
b. [Unit of Length:X] Group
i. [mm] --- Sets the unit of length of X-axis direction to [mm].
ii. [μm] --- Sets the unit of length of X-axis direction to [um].
iii. [# of Decimal Digits] --- Specify the number of decimals.
c. [Unit of Angle] Group
i. [DEG(Decimal)] --- The angle unit is set to decimal system.
ii. [DEG(DM&S)] --- The angle unit is set to 60 notation.
iii. [RAD] --- The angle unit is set to [Radisn].
iv. [# of Decimal Digits] --- Specify the number of decimals.
d. [Other units] Group
i. [# of Decimal Digits] --- Specify the number of decimals.
e. [Use the X-axis unit for the Z-axis] --- The unit of Z-axis direction becomes same as the unit of X-axis direction.
f. [Unit of Length:Z] Group
i. [mm] --- Sets the unit of length of Z-axis direction to [mm].
ii. [μm] --- Sets the unit of length of Z-axis direction to [um].
iii. [# of Decimal Digits] --- Specify the number of decimals.
g. [Individual setting] --- select the axis to match the unit(Distance/Area/Conic Curve/Pseudo Roughness Parameter/Geometrical Tolerance Limit).
h. [Unit of Temperature] Group
i. [Celsius] --- Sets the unit of temperature to celsius. *1)
ii. [Fahrenheit] --- Sets the unit of temperature to fahrenheit. *1)
iii. [# of Decimal Digits] --- Specify the number of decimals.

*1) Depending on the measuring instrument model, the setting of the thermal compensation cannot be displayed.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Graph

Changes the display condition of the analysis graph.

Please refer to "Example of ADCBAC Graph" and "Example of BAC Graph" for the display result of the graph.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 53 of 56

How To:

1. [Graph Display...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display settings of graph] dialog box.

2. Click [Graph] tab.

[Graph] Tab of [Display settings of graph] Dialog Box:

a. [Graph Data] Group

i. [First data] --- Set the color and line type and line width of the first data.

All most of graph has only the first data.

ii. [Second data] --- Set the color and line type and line width of the second data.

The BAC data of ADCBAC graph is the first data. *1)

The ADC data of ADCBAC graph is the second data. *1)

iii. [Standard settings] --- Sets the condition to standard settings.
b. [Auxiliary Line] Group

i. [Parameter auxiliary line] --- Set the color and line type and line width of the parameter auxiliary line. *2)
ii. [Area] --- Set the filled color and filled type of the area of BAC graph. *2)
iii. [Standard settings] --- Sets the condition to standard settings.
c. [# of Decimal Digits] Group

i. [Vertical] --- Set the the number of decimals of vertical line.

ii. [Horizontal] --- Set the the number of decimals of horizontal line.
d. [Apply Current Graph] --- Apply the condition only to current graph.

Example of ADCBAC Graph:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 54 of 56

a. First data --- Displays the first(main) data of graph.

b. Second data --- Displays the second(sub) data.

This is displayed by the graph.

c. Grid --- Displays the grid.

d. 2nd Grid --- Displays the grid of half pitch.

Example of BAC Graph:

a. Parameter auxiliary line --- Displays the auxiliary line of parameter.

b. Area --- Displays the area of parameter auxiliary line.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Graph Grid

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 55 of 56

Changes the display condition of the grid of the analysis graph.

How To:

1. [Graph Display...] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Display settings of graph] dialog box.

2. Click [Grid] tab.

[Grid] Tab of [Display settings of graph] Dialog Box:

a. [Display] --- Displays the rectangular grid.

b. [Display Color] --- Select the display color of the rectangular grid.
c. [Line Type] --- Select the line type of the rectangular grid.
d. [Line Width] --- Select the thickness of the rectangular grid.
e. [Pitch] --- Specify the display pitch of the rectangular grid line.
l [X] --- Input the grid pitch of the horizontal direction.
l [Z] --- Input the grid pitch of the vertical direction.
f. [Display 2nd Grid] --- Displays 2nd grid.

[Detail setting] --- Sets the display conditions of the 2nd grid.

Please refer to [2nd Grid Settings] below.

g. [Graph paper grid] --- Displays the graph paper grid.

The graph paper grid is a grid whose horizontal and vertical pitch is 1cm.

[2nd Grid Settings] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
Changing Display Section Page 56 of 56

a. [Color] --- Select the display color of the 2nd grid.

b. [Line Type] --- Select the line type of the 2nd grid.
c. [Line Width] --- Select the line thickness of the 2nd grid.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh3715.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 1 of 67

About Part Program And Calculation Procedure

The Part Program automatically processes the command from the measurement to the result output.

And the Calculation Procedure is including the calculation command of Part Program and the coordinate system setup
command, etc.

Allows you to recycle the calculation procedure by reading the calculation procedure from the measurement data file and by
changing the calculation condition of each command.

The Part Program Processing:

1. Acquires measurement points from the instrument.

Or reads the measurement point data from the file.

2. Performs the Bestfit calculation.
3. Edits the measurement points.
4. Executes the calculation procedure.

Allows you to abort the Part Program. *1)

5. Prints the results.

Allows you to abort the Part Program. *1)

6. Outputs the results to the file.

*1) To abort the Part Program at the calculation procedure and the printing, set the Run Condition.

Tip:

l You can easily call the Part Program from [Part Program Call] Bar by registering the measurement data file as Part
Program.
l You can easily validate(Pressed the toggle button) or invalidate(Not pressed the toggle button) the function of Part
Program by [Part Program Run Conditions] Bar.
l You can immediately stop the Part Program by [Meas/Procedure] Bar.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Calculation Procedure]

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Print]

Creating New Part Program

Creates new Part Program.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 2 of 67

1. Click [New] command of the [File] menu.

Or, click [New] button in the [Standard] toolbar.

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Creating New Measurement Data]

Saving Part Program

Saves Part Program to the measurement data file.

How To:

1. To overwrite Part Program, click [Save] command of the [File] menu.

Or, click [Save] button in the [Standard] toolbar.

i. When the measurement data is saved for the first time, the [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

Input the appropriate file name and save the current measurement data to the file.
ii. Allows you to display the dialog box to confirm the overwriting when the data is overwrited.
2. To change the save location, click [Save As...] command of the [File] menu.
i. Displays the [Save As] dialog box.
ii. Input the appropriate file name and save the result.
3. Input the comment information by [Entering Comments] dialog box displayed at this time.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Confirmation For File Save]

Registering Movement(1-axis) Command

Registers the movement(1-axis) command.

How To:

1. Click [Register Movement for 1-axis] command of the [Part Program] menu.
Or, click [Register movement(1-axis)] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

Displays the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

Registers the movement(1-axis) command.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 3 of 67

Notice:

The instrument does not move even if registering the movement(1-axis) command.

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement(1-axis) Command]

Registering Movement Command

Registers the movement command.

How To:

1. Click [Register Movement] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Or, click [Register a Movement] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

Displays the [Regist Movement] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

Registers the movement command.

Notice:

The instrument does not move even if registering the movement command.

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement Command]

Registering Measurement Command

Registers the measurement command.

How To:

1. Click [Register Measurement] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Or, click [Register Meas.] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 4 of 67

Notice:

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

About N-Section Measurement

You can easily create the procedure that measures the multiple sections by setting the easy condition of [Register N-Section
Measurement] command.

The Part Program that is able to be created is two procedures below.

1. N-Section Measurement

2. N-Sections Measurement of Column Direction

N-Section Measurement:

The procedure is registered automatically by setting the condition by [N Sections Measurement] tab of [Set Measurement
Condition] dialog box.

The procedure repeats the operation of measurement and escape and movement for X-axis only.

Explanation of N-Section Measurement Oparation

1. Executes Auto-set.

2. Executes the measurement.

3. Executes the escape.

4. Moves to the next start position.

5. Returns to the start position of the first measurement.

The measurement procedure is automatically registered as shown in the following figures.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 5 of 67

Explanation of the measurement procedure.

a. Memorizes the first measurement start position.

This position is the position to return at last time.

b. Performs the first measurement.

This command is including the operation of Auto-set and escape.

c. Performs the roughness analysis command of the first measurement.

d. Performs the second measurement.

This command is including the operation of Auto-set and escape and the movement to the start position.

e. Returns to the memorized position at that first time.

Notice:

The registered procedure might be different according to setting of the condition.

N-Sections Measurement of Column Direction:

To register the procedure automatically, set the condition of [[N Sections Meas of the Column Direction] tab of [Set
Measurement Condition] dialog box.

The registered procedure repeats N-Section Measurement while moving the column axis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 6 of 67

Explanation of Oparation of N-Section Measurement of Column Direction.

1. Moves the X-axis to the measurement start position.

2. Performs N-Section Measurement.

3. Moves the X-axis.

4. Moves the column axis. And repeats No.1-4.

5. Returns the column axis and X-axis after all measurement end.

X : Measurement start position

The measurement procedure is automatically registered as shown in the following figures.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 7 of 67

Explanation of the measurement procedure.

a. Memorizes the measurement start position of the first block.

This position is the position to return at last time.

b. Moves to the measurement start position.

c. Performs the measurement(N-Section Measurement) of the first block.

d. Performs the roughness analysis command of the first measurement.

e. Moves the X-axis.

f. Moves the column axis.

g. Returns the column axis and X-axis after all measurement end.

Notice:

The registered procedure might be different according to setting of the condition.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 8 of 67

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program]−[Registering N-Sections Measurement] −[Registering N-Sections
Measurement]

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program]−[Registering N-Sections Measurement] −[Registering N-Sections
Measurement of Column Direction]

Registering N-Sections Measurement

Registers the procedure of N-sections measurement to Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Register N-Section Measurement] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Set Measurement Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [General] tab.
3. Set 2 or more to [Number of Meas].
4. Click [N Sections Measurement] tab.

[N Sections Measurement] Tab of [Set Measurement Condition] Dialog Box:(Example of setting)

a. [Start Position] --- Input the measurement start position of each section.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 9 of 67

The measurement start position of the first section has to be 0(Zero).

To the start position after the second section, set the relative amount from the start position of the first section.
b. [End Position] --- Displays the end position of each section.

The end position is the value that added the measurement length to the start position.
c. [Column Escape] --- Input the column escape length of each section.
d. [Auto-leveling Kind] Group
i. [Off] --- Set the Auto-Leveling of all section to the OFF.
ii. [Each Section] --- Set the Auto-Leveling of each section.

Click each [Auto-leveling] of the list and set ON or OFF.

Performs preparatory measurement and main measurement at each section.

iii. [One Specific Section] --- Performs the Auto-Leveling of the selected section.

Click only one [Auto-leveling] of the list and set ON or OFF.

Other [Auto-leveling] is set to OFF.

Performs the preparatory measurement of the selected section. And performs the Auto-Leveling. After that, all
sections is measured.
e. [Pause] --- Select the pause in the start position of each section.

When you select ON, the procedure pauses before starting the measurement. At this time, you can change the start
position by moving the instrument.
f. [All Pause On] --- Sets the pause of all sections to ON.
g. [All Pause Off] --- Sets the pause of all sections to OFF.
h. [All Meas Start Positions Sets as Default] --- Restores the measurement start position to default settings.

See Also

Registering N-Sections Measurement of Column

Direction
Registers the procedure of N-sections measurement of column direction to Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Register N-Section Measurement] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Set Measurement Condition] dialog box.

2. Click [General] tab.
3. Click [N Sections Meas of the Column Direction] tab.

[N Sections Meas of the Column Direction] Tab of [Set Measurement Condition] Dialog Box:(Example of Setting)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 10 of 67

a. [Perform N Sections Meas of the Column Direction] --- Performs N-Section Measurement of Column Direction.
b. [Number of Sections] --- Input the number of sections of column direction.
c. [Return X-Axis] --- Returns the measurement axis after all measurement end. (No.6 of Fig.)
d. [Display Message] Group
i. [before X-Axis Move to Meas Start Position (2nd Section or Later)] --- Displays the confirming message
before starting of the measurement axis movement(Red Arrow of Fig.).
ii. [before Start Measurement] --- Displays the confirming message before starting of the Auto-set(Blue Arrow
of Fig.).
iii. [before Column Movement after Measurement] --- Displays the confirming message before starting of the
column movement(Green Arrow of Fig.).
e. [3-x] --- Set the measurement axis movement amount(No.3 of Fig.) to the cell of each section.
f. [4-x] --- Set the measurement axis movement amount(No.4 of Fig.) after the measurement to the cell of each section.
g. [5-x] --- Set the column axis movement amount(No.5 of Fig.) after the measurement to the cell of each section.
h. [5-3] --- Set the movement amount(No.5-3 of Fig.) of the last section as the return amount of column.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 11 of 67

See Also

Registering Stylus Exchange Command

Registers the stylus exchange command to Part Program.

Allows you to exchange the stylus while Part Program is running. At the time of exchanging the stylus, Part Program is
paused and the information of the stylus exchanging is displayed.

After the stylus exchanging, the compensation condition of the exchanged stylus is set.

How To:

1. Click [Register Stylus Change] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Or, click [Register Stylus Change] button in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Stylus exchange] dialog box.

2. Click [Information] tab.

Change the arm and stylus.

3. Click [Display] tab.

Enter the message that is displayed at the time of the stylus exchanging.

[Information] Tab of [Stylus exchange] Dialog Box:

a. [Change Arm] --- Changes the arm.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 12 of 67

Displays the [Arm Selection] dialog box.

b. [Change Stylus] --- Changes the Stylus of Contour Detector or the Stylus of Roughness Detector.

Displays the [Stylus Selection] dialog box.

[Display] Tab of [Stylus exchange] Dialog Box:

c. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
d. [Message when stopping] --- Enter the message that is displayed at the time of the stylus exchanging.

Notice:

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

Even if it changes [Z-axis Gain Adjustment Ratio], [Symmetric Compensation] and [Stylus Radius Compensation], after the
stylus exchanging, the compensation condition of the exchanged stylus was last selected, is set.

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Selecting Arm of Contour Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Selecting Stylus of Contour Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Roughness Detector] - [Selecting Stylus of Roughness Detector]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 13 of 67

Registering Leveling Command

Registers the leveling command.

How To:

1. Click [Register Leveling] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Register Leveling] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The Leveling Command is registered to Part Program.

Notice:

The Leveling is not executed even if executing [Register Leveling] command.

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

Registering Master Ball Measurement Command

Registers the master ball measurement command.

How To:

1. Click [Register Master Ball measurement] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Register Master Ball measurement] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The [Master ball measure] Command is registered to Part Program.

Notice:

The Master Ball measurement is not executed even if executing [Register Master Ball measurement] command.

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 14 of 67

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Measuring Master Ball]

Registering Calibration(Z-Gain) Command

Registers the calibration(Z-Gain) command.

How To:

1. Click [Register Calibration(Z-Gain)...] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Registering a Z-axis Gain Calibration] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The Calibration (Z-axis Gain) Command is registered to Part Program.

[Registering a Z-axis Gain Calibration] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [Z Gain Adjustment] --- Select the using reference specimen.

[Roughness Specimen OLDMIX] --- Uses the accessory roughness specimen.

[Roughness Specimen ISO] --- Use the roughness specimen based on the ISO standard.

Measure according to the conditionof the roughness specimen(ISO).

Please refer to the manual of the roughness specimen(ISO) for the detail of the measurement condition.

[4-Step Gage] --- Use the 4-Step Gage(Option).

[Step Gage] --- Use the Step Gage(Option).

c. [Nominal value] --- Input the nominal value printed to the reference specimen.

Notice:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 15 of 67

The calibration is not executed even if executing [Register Calibration(Z-Gain)...] command.

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Z-axis Gain Adjustment] - [Executing Z-axis Gain
Adjustment]

Registering Calibration(Batch Calibration) Command

Registers the calibration(Batch Calibration) command.

How To:

1. Click [Register Calibration(Batch calibration)...] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Register Batch Calibration Measurement] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The Calibration (Batch calibration) is registered to Part Program.

[Register Batch Calibration Measurement] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 16 of 67

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [Perform Z Gain Adjustment] --- Executes the Z-axis Gain Adjustment.

Notice: Usually select [Perform Z Gain Adjustment] when you execute the Batch Calibration.
c. [Ref. Step] --- Input the reference step.
d. [Perform Symmetric Comp Measurement] --- Executes the Symmetric Compensation Measurement.

Notice: Usually select [Perform Symmetric Comp Measurement] when you execute the Batch Calibration.
e. [Diameter] --- Input the diameter of the master ball.
f. [Perform stylus radius measurement] --- Executes the Stylus Radius Measurement.

Notice: Usually select [Perform stylus radius measurement] when you execute the Batch Calibration.
g. [Fixture for stylus radius meas] Group
i. [Pin gauge] --- When you use the Pin Gage(Stylus Radius Measurement Gage), select [Pin gauge].
ii. [Ball] --- When you use the master ball(Stylus Radius Measurement Gage), select [Ball].
h. [Diameter] --- Input the diameter of the gage of the stylus radius measurement.
i. [Latitude of Measurement Value] Group
i. [Upper Limit] --- Specify the upper limit value of the tolerance. (Assumed that the nominal value of the stylus
radius is 100%)
ii. [Lower Limit] --- Specify the lower limit value of the tolerance. (Assumed that the nominal value of the stylus
radius is 100%)

When the stylus radius exceeds the tolerance, the warning message is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 17 of 67

j. [Erase measured data, after calibration.] --- Clears the measurement data of the calibration after the calibration.
k. [Displays the compensation measurement data, after calibration.] --- Displays the measurement data compensated
by the result of the calibration after the calibration.

Allows you to confirm the calibration result by using the calculation procedure(Step Difference,Circle,Polar
Coordinate Development,etc...).

Notice:

The Batch Calibration is not executed even if executing [Register Calibration(Batch calibration)...] command.

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Executing Batch Calibration]

Registering Reference Position Command

Registers the reference position command to Part Program.

Allows you to set the Counter value as the calculation result by executing the reference position command at the time of
executing Part Program.

You can refer this value as the calculation result of movement(1-axis) command or movement command.

How To:

1. Click [Register Ref. Position] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Ref. Position] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The reference position command is registered to Part Program.

[Ref. Position] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 18 of 67

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [Ignore the shift of coord system] --- Ignores the movement of the coordinate system.
c. [X1/Y/Z1/Z2/A/B/T1/T2-axis] --- Select the axis of the Counter value that is displayed in the Measurement Reuslt
Window.
d. [Disp All] --- Displays all axes in the Measurement Reuslt Window.
e. [Hide All] --- Hides all axes displayed in the Measurement Reuslt Window.

Notice:

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Moving by referring calculation result]

Registering Scale Coordinate Offset Command

Registers the scale coordinate offset command to Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Register Scale Coord offset...] command of the [Part Program] menu.
Or, click [Register Scale Coord offset...] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

Displays the [Register Scale Coord Offset] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The [Scale coord offset] Command is registered to Part Program.

Notice:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 19 of 67

The movement of the scale coordinate origin point is not executed even if executing [Register Scale Coord offset...]
command.

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Move Scale Coordinate Origin]

Registering Coordinates System Movement Command

Registers thecoordinates system movement command.

How To:

1. To register [Move Coord. System] command to Part Program, select [Part Program] Tab of [Part Program] window.

To register [Move Coord. System] command to N-Parts Part Program, select [N-Parts] Tab of [Part Program]
window.
2. Click [Register Move Coord. System] command of the [Part Program] menu.
Or, click [Register Move Coord. System] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

Displays the [Register Move Coord. System] dialog box.

3. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The [Move Coord. System] command is registered to Part Program.

Notice:

The [Move Coord. System] command is not executed even if executing [Register Move Coord. System] command.

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Moving Work Coordinate System]

Registering Pause Command

Registers the pause command to Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Register Pause] command of the [Part Program] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 20 of 67

Or, click [Register Pause] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

Displays the [Pause Setup] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The pause command is registered to Part Program.

3. When Part Program stop at the pause command, displays the [Pause] dialog box.

Ex.1) The Pause With Displaying Message

Ex.2) The Pause During Specified Time

Ex.3) The Pause With Displaying Message And Picture

Ex.4) The Pause And Open File

[Pause Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.

b. [Pause Message] --- Enter the message that is displayed at the time of pausing Part Program.

c. [Displays the picture] --- Displays the picture file at the time of pausing Part Program.

Specify the picture file.

i. [Ref Full-Path] --- Specify the picture file name by the absolute path.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 21 of 67

ii. [Reference] --- Select the picture file name.

d. [No pause during calculation procedure execution] --- Doesn't pause during calculation procedure execution.

e. [Continue after specified time] --- Continues Part Program after the specified time passes.

Input a pause time.

f. [The dialog is not closed with 'Enter'] --- Prevents only by pressing the Enter key from continuing the dialog
displayed at the time of a stop.

g. [Open file at pause execution] --- Opens the file at the time of pausing Part Program.

i. [File Name] --- Enter the file name.

ii. [Ref Full-Path] --- Specify the file name by the absolute path.

iii. [Browse...] --- Select the file.

iv. [Do not display pause dialogue] --- Doesn't display the pause dialog box.

v. [Pause until the file closes] --- Pauses until closing the file.
Notice:
If you are executing the application before to run part program, you cannot use the [Pause until the file closes]
to the application.

The Pause With Displaying Message:

a. [Continue] --- Continues Part Program.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 22 of 67

b. [Abort] --- Terminates Part Program.

The Pause During Specified Time:

a. [Lapsed time] --- Continues Part Program automatically after the specified time passes.

The Pause With Displaying Message And Picture:

The Pause And Open File:

Opens the arbitrary file(Ex. Document File etc...) and stops.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 23 of 67

Registering Automatic Magnification Display Command

Registers the automatic magnification display command to Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Register Zoom to Fit] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Part Program Window:(Example)

Tip:

Performs the function of [Zoom to Fit] button in [Display Magnification] bar at the time of running Part Program.

The setting of [Fix lengthwise and breadthwise] command of the [View] menu is reflected at the time of running Part
Program.

Notice:

The Figure Window is not changed by executing [Register Zoom to Fit] command.

See Also

[Operation Screen] − [Display Magnification Bar]

Creating Part Program By Using Remote Box

Creates Part Program by using the remote box(Joystick Box).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 24 of 67

How To:

1. Registering Movement Command

i. Move the stylus by using Joystick Box.

ii. Push [GOTO] button of Remote Box.

Set Counter value when the [GOTO] button is pushed as the movement amount of each axis.
iii. Set other movement condition by [Teaching] group of [Set CNC condition] dialog box.
2. Registering Measurement Command

i. Move the stylus by using Joystick Box.

ii. Push [GOTO] button of Remote Box.

When [Approach] of [Set CNC condition] dialog box is selected, the movement command until Approach
Position is registered automatically.
iii. Displays the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

Set the measurement condition.

iv. Push [ENTER COND.] button of Remote Box.

The measurement command(measurement data is none) is registered to Part Program.

v. When you need the measurement data in order to create the calculation procedure, push [MEASSTEP.] button
of Remote Box.

Measures by the condition of the registered measurement command.

3. Deleting the registered measurement/movement command

i. Push [CANCEL] button of Remote Box.

The command registered immediately before is deleted.

About Approach Position:

The Approach Position is the position in which the approach distance was subtracted from measurement start position.

In the Contour Detector, the approach distance cannot be set because the contour detector does not touch the workpiece by
lifting the stylus.

In the Roughness Detector, the Auto-set is executed at the approach position when the approach distance is set.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the approach distance might not be able to be specified.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 25 of 67

Notice:

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Setting CNC Functions]

Registering Detector Exchange Command

Registers the detector Exchange command to Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Register Detector exchange...] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Register Detector exchange] dialog box.

2. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

The detector exchange command is registered to Part Program.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

The detector cannot be replaced even if registering [Detector Exchange] command.

Both commands of [Detector Exchange] and [Register Detector Exchange] must be operated in teaching mode. Any other
modes could not be supported.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 26 of 67

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Replace the detector]

Creating New Calculation Procedure

Creates the new calculation procedure without deleting the measurement points.

How To:

1. To create newly by deleting all calculation procedures including the measurement command,

click [New Measuring and Calculating Procedure] command in [New Calculation Procedure] menu of
[Calculation Procedure] menu.

2. To create newly by deleting only the calculation command except the measurement command,

click [New Calculating Procedure] command in [New Calculation Procedure] menu of [Calculation Procedure]
menu.

Notice:

Please confirm that the measurement and movement command does not refer the result of the calculation command.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Creating New Part Program]

Inserting Calculation Procedure

Inserts the calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Select the calculation procedure from Part Program Window. Or select the measurement result on Figure Window.

The calculation procedure is inserted before the selected procedure.

2. Click [Insert Calculation] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu.

Or, click [Insert Calculation] command in the pop-up menu of the selected calculation procedure.

3. Execute the calculation command.

4. After the calculation procedure inserting, click [End Calculation Insertion] command in [Calculation Procedure]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 27 of 67

menu of [Edit] menu.

See Also

Deleting Calculation Procedure

Deletes the calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Select the calculation procedure from Part Program Window. Or select the measurement result on Figure Window.

The selected calculation procedure is deleted.

2. Click [Delete Calculation] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Delete Calculation] command in the pop-up menu of the selected calculation procedure.

Displays the [Items to be deleted] dialog box.

3. To add the deleted calculation procedure, perform the first operation.

Tip: You can cancel the selection by clicking the added calculation procedure.

[Items to be deleted] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- The calculation procedure(measurement result) of the selected item is displayed emphatically in
Part Program Window and Figure Window.

b. [up][down] --- Change the selected item.

c. [OK] --- Deletes the calculation procedure listed in the [Label Name] list box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 28 of 67

Notice:

The calculation procedure using the result of the deleted calculation procedure is deleted.

See Also

Compacting Calculation Procedure

Deletes the calculation unrelated to the measurement results to compact the calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Click [Optimize Calculation] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Items that remain after optimization] dialog box.

2. Select the calculation procedure from Part Program Window. Or select the measurement result on Figure Window.

The selected calculation procedure is added.

3. To add the calculation procedure, perform the second operation.

Tip: You can cancel the selection by clicking the added calculation procedure.

4. Click the [OK] button to display the [Items to be deleted due to optimization] dialog box.

Tip: You cannot add or cancel the deleted calculation procedure.

5. Click the [OK] button to delete the calculation procedure.

[Items that remain after optimization] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- The calculation procedure(measurement result) of the selected item is displayed emphatically in
Part Program Window and Figure Window.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 29 of 67

b. [up][down] --- Change the selected item.

[Items to be deleted due to optimization] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- The calculation procedure(measurement result) of the selected item is displayed emphatically in
Part Program Window and Figure Window.

b. [up][down] --- Change the selected item.

c. [OK] --- Deletes the calculation procedure listed in the [Label Name] list box.

Notice:

The calculation procedure using the result of the remained calculation procedure is not deleted.

See Also

Changing Calculation Condition of Calculation

Procedure
Changes the calculation condition of the calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Select the calculation procedure from Part Program Window. Or select the measurement result on Figure Window.

2. Click [Change Calculation] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Change Calculation] command in the pop-up menu of the selected calculation procedure.

Displays the [Calculation] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 30 of 67

3. Change the calculation condition and the display condition.

See Also

Changing Measurement Condition of Measurement

Command
Changes the measurement condition of Measurement Command.

How To:

1. Select the measurement command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Change Meas Condition...] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Change Measurement Condition...] command in the pop-up menu of the selected measurement command.

3. When you selected the contour measurement command, the [Meas Condition] dialog box of the contour
measurement is displayed.
4. When you selected the roughness measurement command, the [Set Measurement Condition] dialog box is displayed
as following.

When you use the measurement machine of [SV Series], please refer to [Set Measurement Condition] dialog box
(SV).

When you use the measurement machine of [CS Series], please refer to [Set Measurement Condition] dialog box
(CS).

In [Change Meas Condition...] command of the roughness measurement, the item is limited in order to prevent the
impossible calculation that occurs by changing the measurement length and pitch.
5. Change the measurement condition.

[Set Measurement Condition] Dialog Box (SV):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 31 of 67

a. [Measurement] Group
i. [Meas Length] --- Displays the measurement length( L ).
ii. [Pitch] --- Displays the measurement pitch( pitch ).
iii. [Number of Points] --- Displays the number of points per measurement length.( N ).
iv. [Measurement Axis] --- Displays the measurement axis.
v. [Speed] --- Select the measurement speed.
vi. [Perform Pre-Measurement at Max Speed] --- Gives priority to the measurement time more than the
accuracy of the Pre-Measurement.
vii. [Auto-Leveling] --- Executes the Auto-Leveling.

Please refer to [Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling].

viii. [Use alpha axis] --- Executes the Auto-Leveling by using A-axis.
b. [Range] Group
i. [Auto-Range] --- Validates the Auto-Range.

Sets the optimal range after the Pre-Measurement when you validate the Auto-Range.
ii. [Range] --- Select the measurement range.
c. [Over Range] Group
i. [Continue] --- Continues the measurement without the interruption when the measurement becomes the Over-
Range during measurement.
ii. [Abort] --- Aborts the measurement when the measurement becomes the Over-Range during measurement.
d. [Measurement Start Method] Group
i. [Perform Auto-set] --- Executes the Auto-set at the time of the measurement start.

Starts the measurement without moving the stylus when the [Perform Auto-set] is not selected.
ii. [Auto-Stylus] --- Validates the Auto-Stylus.
iii. [Stylus Start Position] --- Sets the stylus position at the time of the measurement start.
e. [Measurement Axis Escape] Group
i. [Not Escape] --- Doesn't move the stylus after the measurement.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 32 of 67

ii. [Return] --- Moves the stylus to the measurement start position after the measurement.
iii. [Speed] --- Specify the speed of the Auto-return.
iv. [Ignore Acdt-touch] --- Moves Ignoring the Accidental Touch at the time of the Auto-return.
f. [Column Escape] Group
i. [Move Length] --- Input the relative length from the measurement end position after the measurement.
ii. [Manual Escape at Pre-Measurement] --- Moves the column by the manual operation after the Pre-
Measurement.

[Set Measurement Condition] Dialog Box (CS):

a. [Range] Group
i. [Range] --- Select the measurement range.
b. [Stylus Status] Group
i. [Return with Stylus Height Held] --- Returns the stylus without changing its condition.
ii. [Return with Stylus Raising] --- Returns the stylus after rising.
iii. [Return with Stylus Holding at Midpoint] --- Return the stylus with the holding at midpoint condition.
iv. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Changes the stylus position at the time of the return.

Notice:

Allows you to execute this command in Measurement Screen.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, some operations might not be able to be worked.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 33 of 67

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting 2D Roughness Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition]

Changing Compensation Condition of Measurement

Command
Changes the compensation condition of Measurement Command.

How To:

1. Select the measurement command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Change Comp Condition...] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Change Compensation Condition...] command in the pop-up menu of the selected command.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box.

Notice:

Allows you to execute this command in Measurement Screen.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition]

Changing Movement Condition of Movement Command

Changes the movement condition of Movement Command.

How To:

1. Select the movement command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Change Movement Condition...] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Change Movement Condition...] command in the pop-up menu of the selected command.

Displays the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box or [Regist Movement] dialog box.

Notice:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 34 of 67

Allows you to execute this command in Measurement Screen.

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement(1-axis) Command]

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement Command]

Changing Evaluation Condition of Roughness Analysis

Command
Changes the evaluation condition of Roughness Analysis Command.

How To:

1. Select the roughness analysis command in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Evaluation Condition...] command in [Roughness Analysis Condition] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Changes Evaluation Condition] command in the pop-up menu of the selected command.

Displays the [Evaluation Condition] dialog box.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Evaluation Condition]

Displaying By Calculation Procedure Condition

Updates the Figure Window by using the Display Condition of the selected calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Select the calculation procedure in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Call display condition] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Call display condition] command in the pop-up menu of the selected calculation procedure.
3. To automatically update the Figure Window by using the display condition of the selected calculation procedure,

click [Interlock to the command selection] command of the [View] menu.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Figure Window interlocks to the selection of the
calculation procedure and is displayed.

About Display Condition:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 35 of 67

The display condition of Figure Window(Max. 4 parts) is memorized.

You can always change by [Changes display condition] command of the [Edit] menu.

The Figure Window is updated by the display condition memorized by the following operation.

a. During measurement(Part Program Running)

b. During movement(Part Program Running)
c. Pausing in order to waiting the input(Part Program Running)
d. Changing Part Program
e. Selecting the command of Part Program Window(The check mark is displayed on [Interlock to the command
selection] command of [View] menu)
f. Executing [Call display condition] command of [Edit] menu.

The Center Position And Vertical/Horizontal Magnification in Figure Window That Not Divide:

a. Horiz --- The horizontal magnification of Figure Window.

b. Vert --- The vertical magnification of Figure Window.
c. Center Position --- The coordinate value of the center position of Figure Window.

The Center Position And Vertical/Horizontal Magnification in Figure Window That Divided to 4 Windows:

d. [Horiz(UL)] --- The horizontal magnification of Figure Window(Upper Left).

e. [Vert(UL)] --- The vertical magnification of Figure Window(Upper Left).
f. [Center Position(UL)] --- The coordinate value of the center position of Figure Window(Upper Left).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 36 of 67

The Setup of the Center Position And Magnification of Figure Window:

a. [Auto Ratio] --- Adjusts automatically the magnification and the center position in order to display all measurement
data in Figure Window.
b. [No change] --- Displays Figure Window without changing the magnification and the center position.
c. [Settings] --- Displays Figure Window by using the memorized magnification and the memorized center position.

See Also

Changing Display Condition of Part Program

Change the Display Condition of each command in Part Program.

How To:

1. Select the command in Part Program Window.

2. To set the display condition of the divided Figure Window, divide the Figure Window beforehand.
3. Click [Set the Display Condition] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Set the Display Condition] command in the pop-up menu of the selected command.

Displays the [Set the Display Condition] dialog box.

4. To update by the dividing condition of current Figure Window, click [Sets the current display condition] button.
5. To restore the dividing condition that is set to the command, click [Initial State] button.
6. When the Figure Window is divided horizontally(Upper And Lower), set the upper condition and the lower condition.

When the Figure Window is divided vertically(Left And Right), set the left condition and the right condition.

When the Figure Window is divided to 4 windows, set all conditions.

[Set the Display Condition] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 37 of 67

a. [Auto Ratio] --- Adjusts automatically the magnification and the center position in order to display all measurement
data in Figure Window.
b. [No change] --- Displays Figure Window without changing the magnification and the center position.
c. [Settings] --- Specify the magnification and the center position.
i. [Horiz] --- Select the horizontal magnification.
ii. [Vert] --- Select the vertical magnification.
iii. [Center Position(Horiz)] --- Input the horizontal coordinate value of the center position.
iv. [Center Position(Vert)] --- Input the vertical coordinate value of the center position.
d. [Set the current display condition] --- Updates by the display condition of current Figure Window.
e. [Initial State] --- Restores the condition that is set to the command.

The Horizontal(Upper And Lower) Dividing:

Set the upper display condition and the lower display condition.

The Vertical(Left And Right) Dividing:

Set the left display condition and the right display condition.

The Horizontal And Vertical(4 Windows) Dividing:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 38 of 67

Set all display condition.

Notice:

Allows you to execute the display condition change command of Part Program in Teaching mode.

Allows you to execute the display condition change command of the measurement command in Measurement Screen.

See Also

Append 3D Analysis
Formtracepak-PRO is executed.
Only when Formtracepak-PRO is installed, this menu is displayed.

How To:

1. Select the 3D measurement in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Append 3D Analysis...] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Append 3D Analysis...] command in the pop-up menu of the selected command.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 39 of 67

See Also

Append 3D Roughness Analysis

Formtracepak-PRO is executed.
Only when Formtracepak-PRO is installed, this menu is displayed.

How To:

1. Select the 3D measurement in Part Program Window.

2. Click [Append 3D Roughness Analysis...] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Append 3D Roughness Analysis...] command in the pop-up menu of the selected command.

See Also

Changing Input Value of Calculation Command

Change the input value, such as the range of the measurement points or other command’s calculation results.

How To:

1. Select the calculation procedure from Part Program Window. Or select the measurement result on Figure Window.

2. Click [Change Calculation] command in [Calculation Procedure] menu of [Edit] menu,

Or, click [Change Calculation] command in the pop-up menu of the selected calculation procedure.

Displays the [Calculation] dialog box.

3. Click the [Change input] button of the [Calculation] dialog box.

4. Displays the [Change input] dialog box.

Selects the [INPUT] tab of the [Part Program] window.

Displays the [Position change] handle in the [Figure] window.

5. Change the entered value by changing the values in the [INPUT] tab and operating the [Position change] handle.

6. Click the [OK] button of the [Change input] dialog box to complete the changing operation. Or, click the [Cancel]
button to cancel the change.

Displays the [Calculation] dialog box.

[Change input] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 40 of 67

a. [Re-entry] --- Enables re-inputting the value.The method of specifying the measuring points can be changed.After re-
inputting, the value changing operation can be resumed.
b. [OK] --- Exits the value changing operation.The changed value will be applied.
c. [Cancel] --- Exits the value changing operation.The changed value will be discarded.

[INPUT] tab:

[Position change] handle:

a. [Mouse entry] --- Drag one of the [Position change] handles directly.

b. [Key input] --- Select an item to change in the [INPUT] tab, and click [Key input] in the [Input] tool box.

c. [Measurement result entry] --- Select an item to change in the [INPUT] tab, and click [Result entry] in the
[Input] tool box. Since the [Part Program] window changes to the [Part Program] tab, the tool can be selected in
the Part Program tree.To cancel entering, click [Result entry] again.

d. [Switching the input method] --- The input method can be changed according to the method selected in the
[Designation] tool box. Select an item to change in the [INPUT] tab, and select a method in the [Input] tool box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 41 of 67

See Also

Reading Calculation Procedure From File

Reads the calculation procedure from the file.

How To:

1. Click [Read Calculation from File...] command of the [Calculation Procedure] menu.

Displays the [Read Calculation] dialog box.

2. Select the file including the calculation procedure that should be read.

3. When there is a calculation procedure in the data currently used, the message box is displayed in order to confirm
discarding of the calculation procedure.

See Also

Reading Part Program From File

Reads the Part Program from the file.

How To:

1. Click [Read Part Program from the file...] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Displays the file selection dialog box.

2. Select the file including the measurement procedure that should be read.
3. When the connected measuring instrument and the measuring instrument that specified for Part Program are different,
the [Confirmation of Meas Instrument] dialog box is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 42 of 67

You cannot execute the Part Program.

Please confirm the connected measuring instrument and terminate the reading process of Part Program.

Tip:

To perform the Part Program without using the measuring machine, select [Use measured data file] in [Measurement] tab of
[Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Measurement]

Registering/Calling Part Program

Call the registered Part Program or the registered N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Registers or deletes Part Program or N-Parts Part Program.

i. To register Part Program or N-Parts Part Program, click [Register/Delete Part Program...] command in the
[Part Program] menu.

Displays the [Register/Delete Part Program] dialog box.

ii. Enter the Part Program file(FPK file) name or the N-Parts Part Program file(FPP file) name,

or select the Part Program file or the N-Parts Part Program file by clicking [Browse] button.

Tip: Select the file type in [Open] dialog box.

iii. To delete the registered Part Program or N-Parts Part Program, select the procedure and click [Delete] button.
2. Registers/Calls the Part Program or N-Parts Part Program.
i. To call the Part Program or the N-Parts Part Program, click [Call Part Program...] command in the [Part
Program] menu.

Displays the [Call Part Program] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 43 of 67

Select the procedure and click [OK] button.

Tip:

You can easily call the procedure by selecting Part Program or N-Parts Part Program in Part Program Call Bar.

[Register/Delete Part Program] Dialog Box:

a. [Run Condition Title] --- Specify the file name to register or delete.

b. [Browse] --- Select the file to register or delete.

c. [Comments] --- Enter the comment.

To insert the Carriage Return/Line Feed in the comment, press [Ctrl] key and [Enter] key at the same time.
d. List --- Displays the list of registered Part Program.

Click a procedure. Then the file name and the comment is displayed.

e. [Register] --- Register the specified file.

f. [Delete] --- Delete the specified file.

[Call Part Program] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 44 of 67

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Call Bar]

Executing Calculation Procedure

Executes the calculation procedure.

How To:

1. Click [Run Calculation] command of the [Calculation Procedure] menu.

Executes the current calculation procedure.

2. To stop the running of the calculation procedure, click [Cancel Calculation Run] command in the [Calculation
Procedure] menu,

or, click [Stop] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

Notice: This command is executed after the step currently in progress has been completed.

Shortcut:

Keyboard: CTRL+F5

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 45 of 67

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Calculation Procedure]

[Customizing] - [Part program]

Executing Command File

Executes the calculation commands saved in the file by [Repeat Command] button of [User Indication] toolbox.

How To:

1. Click [Execute Saved Repeat Command] command of [Calculating Procedure] menu.

Displays the [Call Command File] dialog box.

Notice:

The command file includes the commands executed at a time.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [User Indication Toolbox]

Executing Part Program

Executes Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Run Part Program] command of the [Part Program] menu.

or, click [Start] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

2. To stop the Part Program, click [Stop] command of the [Measurement] menu,

or, click [Stop] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

To stop the measurement without stopping the running of Part Program, please refer to [Customizing] - [Measurement
Abortion].
3. Displays the state before the running after Part Program end. *1)

For instance, if the [All Contours] tab has been displayed before the measurement procedure is executed, all sections
can be confirmed at once after execution ends.
4. When the restart of the measurement procedure is permitted, the message box confirming the termination of Part

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 46 of 67

Program is displayed.

i. [Yes] --- Terminates the part program.

ii. [No] --- Pauses the part program.
iii. [Cancel] --- Continues the part program without pausing.

*1) The called Part Program is the state that saved at the last.

Notice: Allows you to execute [Run Part Program] command in Repeat Mode.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Measurement Abortion]

[Customizing] - [Part program]

Executing Step Run of Part Program

Executes Step Run of Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Step Run Mode] command of the [Part Program] menu.

or, click [Step Run Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the mode is Step Run Mode.
2. Click [Run Part Program] command of the [Part Program] menu.

or, click [Start] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

The Part Program is executed by one step. Then Part Program stops.
3. To continue the Step Run, click [Run Part Program] command of the [Part Program] menu,

or, click [Start] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

4. To change to the Batch Run Mode, click [Step Run Mode] command of the [Part Program] menu,

or, click [Step Run Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 47 of 67

The check mark of the menu command disappears and the mode is changed to the Batch Run Mode.

Notice:

Allows you to execute [Step Run Mode] command in Repeat Mode.

See Also

Setting Run Condition About Measurement

Sets Run Condition about measurement.

How To:

1. Click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Click [Measurement] tab.

The [Measurement] Tab of the [Set run condition of the Part Program] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 48 of 67

a. [Perform Measurement] --- Executes the measurement in Part Program. *1)

When you don't select this option, the measurement points under the edit are used.

At this time, if Part Program is executed without measurement point, the error occurs.
b. [Use Instrument] --- Uses the instrument to acquire the measured points.
c. [Use measured data file] --- Acquires the measurement points from a file.
d. [Contour #] --- Specify the order number of the measurement command to which the measurement
instruments/measurement condition/compensation condition is displayed.
e. [Measuring Instrument] --- Displays the machine information of the measurement command(selected by [Contour
#]).
f. [Meas Condition] --- Displays the measurement condition of the measurement command(selected by [Contour #]).
g. [Comp Condition] --- Displays the compensation condition of the measurement command(selected by [Contour #]).
h. [Do not confirm Arm and Stylus] --- Does not confirm the arm/stylus at the time of executing of Part Program.

When you setup the arm/stylus different from the condition of Part Program, the measurement might not be executed
as intended.

*1) The check mark is displayed on [Perform Measurement] command of [Settings] menu.

And the [Measure] button in [Part Program Run Conditions] bar is pushed down.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 49 of 67

See Also

Setting Run Condition About Bestfit

Sets Run Condition about Bestfit.

How To:

1. Click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Click [Bestfit] tab.

The [Bestfit] Tab of the [Set run condition of the Part Program] Dialog Box:

a. [Perform Bestfit] --- Executes the Bestfit in Part Program. *1)

b. [No] --- Select the Bestfit condition.
c. [Set] --- Executes the Bestfit.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 50 of 67

Bestfit ends when the following conditions consist.

i. (Variation of SUM value) < (1 + SUM value ) x EPS1
where EPS1=M/100,000.000

ii. (Variation of positions)<EPS2

where EPS2=1/1,000,000
In the above relationship, "SUM" denotes square harmony of the error and "M" denotes the number of best-fit points.

d. [Proximate Pt Limit] --- Select the restricting condition that defines the objective point from among the Bestfit
points.
e. [All Points] --- All the Bestfit points are assumed to be objectives of calculation.

f. [Nominal Line] --- The objectives of calculation are the best-fit points that are proximate to the measurement curve
and consistent with the feet of perpendicular lines from each best-fit point to the measurement curve.

g. [End Point ] --- From the best-fit points, the objectives of calculation are the points proximate to the measurement
curve and inconsistent with the feet of perpendicular lines from each best-fit point, or a perpendicular line can not be
drawn.
h. [No. of Iteration] --- Enter the maximum number of calculation times to obtain the position and angle that reduces the
residual of the Bestfit calculation to a minimum.

When reaching the maximum repetition frequency, the Bestfit calculation is ended.
i. [Parameter] --- Select the movement direction of Bestfit.

Allows you to specify the movement direction by combining the X-axis direction/Z-axis direction/direction of
rotation.
j. [Barycenter alignment] --- Aligns the Measured points to the Bestfit reference data before performing Bestfit.
k. [OK] --- Executes the Bestfit.

Movement Direction of Bestfit:

1. X-axis direction(X parameter) and Z-axis direction(Z parameter)

2. Rotation around origin point(A parameter)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 51 of 67

*1) The check mark is displayed on [Perform Bestfit] command of [Settings] menu.

And the [Bestfit] button in [Part Program Run Conditions] bar is pushed down.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points]

Setting Run Condition About Data Edit

Sets Run Condition about Data Edit.

How To:

1. Click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Click [Data edit] tab.

The [Data edit] Tab of the [Set run condition of the Part Program] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 52 of 67

a. [Edit Data] --- Executes the Data Edit in Part Program. *1)
b. [Mag] --- Enter the magnification rate to enlarge or reduce the measurement points.

*1) The check mark is displayed on [Perform Edit the Data] command of [Settings] menu.

And the [Edit] button in [Part Program Run Conditions] bar is pushed down.

See Also

Setting Run Condition About Calculation Procedure

Sets Run Condition about Calculation Procedure.

How To:

1. Click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Click [Calculation] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 53 of 67

The [Calculation] Tab of the [Set run condition of the Part Program] Dialog Box:

a. [Calculation] --- Executes the calculation procedure in Part Program. *1)

b. [Step Run] --- Executes by Step Run Mode.
c. [Batch Run] --- Executes by Batch Run Mode.

However, Part Program stops in the location where the input waiting was specified.
d. [Numeric Entry at Exec.] --- Performs numeric entry again at execution.
e. [PCS setup for Batch Run] Group
i. [Determine PCS origin] --- Ends alignment of the reference point after the part coordinate system origin has
been set.
ii. [Align PCS axis] --- Ends alignment of the reference point after the part coordinate system has rotated.
iii. [Perform Determine PCS origin/axis] --- Ends alignment of the reference point after the origin setup and
rotation of the part coordinate system has been performed.
iv. [Skip PCS setup] --- Does not execute the alignment of the reference point.
f. [Repeat setup] Group
i. [# of Repeats] --- Enter the number of repetitions.
ii. [Shift in X-axis] --- Input the movement amount of X-axis direction in Work Coordinate System.
iii. [Shift in Z-axis] --- Input the movement amount of Z-axis direction in Work Coordinate System.
g. [Error Processing] Group
i. [Terminate] --- Cancels execution of the calculation procedure.

However, Part Program is continued.

ii. [Re-entry] --- Enter data again in the parts where an error occurred.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 54 of 67

However, in the case of an error unrelated to the data input, select either End or Skip.
iii. [Continue Run] --- Skips the part where an error occurred and restarts from the next step.
iv. [Select during Run] --- Select error treatment if an error occurs.
h. [Interrupt Dialog Display Condition] Group*2)
i. [Not interrupted] --- The interrupt dialog box is not displayed.
ii. [Interrupted if all results are OK] --- Displays the Interrupt dialog box if all results of tolerance judgment are
OK.
iii. [Interrupted if any result is NG] --- Displays the Interrupt dialog box if any tolerance judgment result is NG.
iv. [Always interrupted] --- Always displays the Interrupt dialog box.

*1) The check mark is displayed on [Perform Calculation] command of [Settings] menu.

And the [Calc.] button in [Part Program Run Conditions] bar is pushed down.

*2) Allows you to decide the interrupt of calculation procedure by the result of tolerance comparison or allows you to print
after the confirmation of the result in the screen, when you selected the display of the interrupt dialog box.

The example of the interrupt dialog box is shown as follows.

Example(By Tolerance Comparison Judgment Result):

a. [Continue] --- Continues the Part Program execution.

b. [Quit] --- Quits the Part Program execution.

See Also

Setting Run Condition About Print

Sets Run Condition about print.

How To:

1. Click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Click [Print] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 55 of 67

The [Print] Tab of the [Set run condition of the Part Program] Dialog Box:

a. [Print] --- Executes the print in Part Program. *1)

b. [Layout] Group
i. [Use system layout] --- Uses the system layout.
ii. [Detailed Settings] --- Sets the output condition of the system layout.

Displays the [System Layout] dialog box.

iii. [Use default Template] --- Uses the default layout template.
iv. [Use the specified layout file] --- Prints by specifying a layout file.
v. [Layout File Name] --- Enter the layout file name with the full path.
vi. [Browse...] --- Select the layout file.
vii. [Preview and Detail Setup] --- Confirm the layout file of [Layout File Name].

Displays the [Layout Settings] dialog box.

c. [Select output] Group
i. [Print on the form] --- Outputs to printer.
ii. [Print to the file] --- Outputs to the file.
iii. [Kind of File] --- Select the kind of file to output.
iv. [Enter name after calculation] --- Input the file name at the time of printing.
v. [Assign name automatically] --- The file name is automatically named.
vi. [Folder name] --- Enter the folder name.
vii. [Browse...] --- Select the folder.
viii. [First character of file] --- Enter the first character of the file name.
ix. [Detail Setup] --- Set the condition of automatically naming the file name.

Displays the [Setting the details of automatic file naming] dialog box.
x. [Same name as result output file] --- The output file name is set to the same file name as the result file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 56 of 67

d. [Error Processing] Group

i. [Abort forcibly] --- Aborts the execution of the calculation procedure when an error occurs.
ii. [Continue run] --- Skips over the location where the error has occurred and restarts the execution from the next
step.
iii. [Select during run] --- Select the processing when an error occurs.
e. [Interrupt Dialog Display Condition] Group
i. [Not interrupted] --- The interrupt dialog box is not displayed before the printing at the time of Part Program
running.
ii. [Always interrupted] --- The interrupt dialog box is displayed before the printing at the time of Part Program
running.

Displays the [LoutEditS] dialog box.

*1) The check mark is displayed on [Perform Print the results] command of [Settings] menu.

And the [Print] button in [Part Program Run Conditions] bar is pushed down.

[Setting the details of automatic file naming] Dialog Box:

The automatic file name is composed of the character string which is generated from these selected items in the comment
list and the following character string.

The character which can not be used as a file name will be replaced with “_(underbar)”

1. [Generate 7 characters] --- Seven characters are generated automatically.

2. [Use data and time] --- Generates the file name with date and time the file was made automatically.
3. [Specify the Serial No] --- The serial number is added to the file name.
4. [Serial No] --- Enter the beginning value of the serial number.
The serial No. counts up by 1 every time the measurement procedure is executed..
5. [Use File Name + date and time] --- Date and time is added to the measured data file name.
Can be specified only if ［Use measured data file］has been selected on Measurement page.

Tip:

File Name = [Specified First Character + Generated Seven Characters + Date(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS) + Serial No. +
Extension].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 57 of 67

YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Date, HH = Time(24H), MM = Minutes, SS = Sec.

[LoutEditS] Dialog Box:

a. [Continue] --- Continues the Part Program execution.

b. [Quit] --- Aborts the Part Program running without printing.
c. [Print cancel] --- Cancels the printing and aborts the Part Program running.

See Also

[Printing] - [Setting Print Condition]

Setting Run Condition About Result Output

Sets Run Condition about Result Output.

How To:

1. Click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Click [Measurement] tab.

The [Outputs the results] Tab of the [Set run condition of the Part Program] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 58 of 67

a. [Output Results] --- Executes the result output in Part Program. *1)
b. [File Output] Group
i. [FORMPAK File] --- Outputs the measurement data file.
ii. [Output Calculation Results(ASCII)] --- Outputs the calculation results by using the ASCII Format.
iii. [Output Measured Point Data(Text)] --- Outputs the measurement data by using the Text Format.
Select the kind of the measurement data to output by using the Text Format.
iv. [Output by Meas. Coordinate Sys.] --- Outputs the measured data in the measurement coordinate system
(scale coordinate system of the measuring instrument) when output data in the text file.
v. [Output by Max. Accuracy] --- Outputs the maximum accuracy measured data when output data in the text
file.
vi. [Constant Pitch] --- Converts the measurement points into the constant pitch.
vii. [Output Comparison Result] --- Outputs the tolerance comparison result.
viii. [Output Measured Point Data(Aspherical)] --- Outputs to the file for Aspheric Surface Optimizing Program
(Option).*2)
ix. [Statistical File(CSV)] --- Outputs the statistic data by using the CSV Format.

To set the detail condition, click [Detail Setup] button.

Displays the [Specifying the details of the statistic file] dialog box.
x. [Roughness Evaluation Profile (Text)] --- Outputs the roughness evaluation profile data by using the Text

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 59 of 67

Format.

To set the detail condition, click [Detail Setup] button.

Displays the [Detail setting of the roughness evaluation profile savings] dialog box.
c. [File name setting] Group
i. [Enter name after calculation] --- Enetr a file name during output of the results.
ii. [Assign name automatically] --- The file name is automatically named.
iii. [Folder name] --- Enter the folder name.

To select the folder, click [Browse] button.

iv. [First character of file] --- Enter the first character of the result output file name.

[Detail Setup] --- Set the detail condition.

Displays the [Setting the details of automatic file naming] dialog box.
v. [Fixed name] --- Specifies a preset file name when the results are output. If the specified file name already
exists, the data will be overwritten.
vi. [File Name] --- Specify the result output file name. To select an existing file name, click [Browse] button.
d. [Outputting to MeasurLink] Group
i. [Output to MeasurLink] --- Outputs the measurement result to MeasureLink.
ii. [Use the Part Program name as inspection routine name] --- Make the inspection routine name to be same as
measurement procedure name.
iii. [Specify the inspection routine name] --- Specify the inspection routine name.
iv. [Insp routine] --- Enter the inspection routine name.

Beforehand, create the inspection routine name by [Create MeasurLink header] command of [Tool] menu.

*1) The check mark is displayed on [Perform Output the results] command of [Settings] menu.

And the [Output] button in [Part Program Run Conditions] bar is pushed down.

*2) Please refer to the Help of Aspheric Surface Optimizing Program(Option).

[Specifying the details of the statistic file] Dialog Box:

a. [Specify CSV file name] --- Specify the statistic file name.

When you don't specify the file name, the file name of [File name setting] group is used.
b. [File name] --- Enter the statistic file name.
c. [Browse] --- Select the file.
d. [Append] --- Appends the measurement result to the existing statistic file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 60 of 67

e. [Overwrite] --- Overwrites the measurement result.

[Detail setting of the roughness evaluation profile savings] Dialog Box:

a. [Formpak DAT Format] --- Outputs the neasurement result by using the DAT Format.
b. [Old Surfpak CSV format] --- Outputs the measurement result by using the CSV Format of SURFPAK.
c. [Max precision] --- Outputs by the maximum accuracy.

When you don't select this option, the result output according to the unit condition.

[Setting the details of automatic file naming] Dialog Box:

The automatic file name is composed of the character string which is generated from these selected items in the comment
list and the following character string.

The character which can not be used as a file name will be replaced with “_(underbar)”

1. [Generate 7 characters] --- Seven characters are generated automatically.

2. [Use data and time] --- Generates the file name with date and time the file was made automatically.
3. [Specify the Serial No] --- The serial number is added to the file name.
4. [Serial No] --- Enter the beginning value of the serial number.
The serial No. counts up by 1 every time the measurement procedure is executed.
5. [Use File Name + date and time] --- Date and time is added to the measured data file name.
Can be specified only if ［Use measured data file］has been selected on Measurement page.

Tip:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 61 of 67

File Name = [Specified First Character + Generated Seven Characters + Date(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS) + Serial No. +
Extension].

YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Date, HH = Time(24H), MM = Minutes, SS = Sec.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Measurement Point]

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data]

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R) System]

Setting Run Condition About EasyStat

Sets Run Condition about EasyStat.

How To:

1. Click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Click [EasyStat] tab.

The [EasyStat] Tab of the [Set run condition of the Part Program] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 62 of 67

a. [Register to EasyStat] --- Registers the statistic data to the EasyStat.

b. [EasyStat File] --- Specify the EasyStat file to which the statistic data is registered.

c. [Reference] --- Select the file.

See Also

[Using EasyStat]

Setting Run Condition About

Preprocessing/Postprocessing
Sets Run Condition about Preprocessing/Postprocessing.

How To:

1. Click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command in the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Click [Process before start / after end] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 63 of 67

The [Process before start / after end] Tab of the [Set run condition of the Part Program] Dialog Box:

a. [Input Comments] --- Input the comment before beginning of Part Program running.

Input the comment before saving of file when you don't select this option.

b. [No execution without Comment Input] --- When you select [Input Comments] and don't input the comment, Part
Program is not executed.

If the input box is blank, the comment is not input.

c. [Repeat run of the Part Program after end] --- Repeats Part Program.

Please refer to Note of Part Program Repeating.

d. [Notify by sound at the end of part pro.] --- Notifies by using sound at the time of Part Program ending.

e. [Sound Setup] --- Set the sound.

Displays the [Sound Setup] dialog box.

[Sound Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 64 of 67

a. [Default Sound] --- Uses the default sound.

Select the kind of sound.

b. [WAV File] --- Specify the WAV file.

Specify the sound file of WAV Format.

c. [Play] --- Play the specified sound file.

This button is changed to [Stop] button.

To stop the playing of the sound, click [Stop] button.

d. [Browse] --- Select the sound file.

Note of Part Program Repeating:

Please note the following matter when you selected [Repeat run of the Part Program after end] of [Process before start / after
end] tab.

1. When [Perform Measurement] of [Measurement] tab is selected.

i. When [Use Instrument] of [Measurement] tab is selected.

l After Part Program ending, the measurement result is discarded and the measurement screen is displayed
and Part Program is stopped.

l When you execute Part Program again, Part Program is started from the measurement.

Tip: Allows you to repeat the measurement of multiple workpiece by clicking [Start] button of
[Meas/Procedure] bar.

ii. When [Use measured data file] of [Measurement] tab is selected.

l After Part Program ending, the measurement result is discarded and the measurement screen is displayed
and the [Read the measured points] dialog box is displayed.

l You can abort the repeating of Part Program by clicking [Cancel] button.

Tip: Use this option when you want to repeat the calculation procedure for multiple measurement data
file measured in the past.

2. When [Perform Measurement] of [Measurement] tab is not selected.

After Part Program ending, the measurement result is discarded and the measurement screen is displayed and Part

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 65 of 67

Program is stopped.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Input Comment]

Setting Comment
Set the item of the comment and the input method.

The [Input Comment] is performed according to the item and the input method that specified by this function.

Tip:

Comments is used for the file ID information and print information.

To set the comment of N-Parts Part Program, please refer to [Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Comment of N-
Parts Part Program].

How To:

1. Click [Set Comment...] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Comment Setup] dialog box.

[Comment Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 66 of 67

a. List --- Displays the list of comment items.

Select an item to be set.

b. [Use as a comment] --- Uses a selected item as a comment.
c. [Display]/[First Value] --- Enter the fixed character string of text in the [Display] box.

Enter the initial value of auto count in the [First Value] box.

d. [Item Name] --- Enter the new item name. Select by button the comment of which the item name is changed.
e. [Kind] --- Select text or integer.

You cannot change the item of [Title] - [Serial number].

f. [Type] --- Select count up or count down.
g. [Auto] --- Automatically count up or count down.
h. [Fix] --- Use a fixed string.

When entering comments, you can not enter a string.

i. [Enter in succession] --- When entering comments, enter the string or integer.

Tip:

l When the comment is the integer.

To count up or count down automatically, select [Auto].

When you selected the integer of [Kind], this button is selected automatically.

l When the comment is the string.

To fix the comment at the time of the comment input, select [Fix].

To enter arbitrary string at the time of the comment input, select [Enter in succession].

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Comment of N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Setting Measurement Data Property]

Input Comment
Input the comment.

To set the comment of N-Parts Part Program, please refer to [Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Comment of N-
Parts Part Program].

How To:

1. Click [Input Comment...] command in the [File] menu.

Displays the [Entering Comments] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
About Part Program And Calculation Procedure Page 67 of 67

2. And when you performed the following operation, the [Entering Comments] dialog box is displayed.

i. Input the comment as ID information at the time of the file saving.

ii. Input the comment as ID information of Part Program before the Part Program running or after the Part Program
ending.

For the detailed information, please refer to the [Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run
Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Preprocessing/Postprocessing].

[Entering Comments] Dialog Box:

a. [Item] --- Change an item.

The selectable item is the item of which [Enter in succession] was selected.
b. [Display] --- Enter the comment.
c. [Preview] --- Displays all comments.

The item of [Title]-[Revision No.] is common with the property of the file.
d. [Next] --- Enter the next comment.

This button is changed to [End] button at the time of the last comment.

Notice:

At this time, you can set the item to which [Enter in succession] of [Setting Comment] was selected.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Input Comment of N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
Preprocessing/Postprocessing]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA242.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 1 of 20

Creating N-Parts Part Program

Creates N-Parts Part Program.

Allows you to execute multiple Part Program collectively at a time(Ex.1).

Allows you to repeat Part Program by using Loop Function(Ex.2) or Step & Repeat Function(Ex.3).

How To:

1. Click the [N-Parts] tab of the [Part Program] window.

2. To create new N-Parts Part Program, click [New N-Parts] command of the [File] menu,

Or, click [New N-Parts] button in the [Standard] Toolbar.

3. Register Part Program to N-Parts Part Program. ([Register part program] command of the [Part
Program] menu)
4. To repeat Part Program, register Loop Start/Loop End Command to N-Parts Part Program.

([Register Loop Start] command of the [Part Program] menu/[Register Loop End] command
of the [Part Program] menu)
5. Allows you to register the following command to N-Parts Part Program.
i. Scale Coordinate Offset Command ([Register Scale Coord offset] command of the [Part
Program] menu)
ii. Coordinates System Movement Command ([Register Move Coord. System] command of
the [Part Program] menu)
iii. Pause Command ([Register Pause] command of the [Part Program] menu)

Ex.1) Batch Run of Multiple Part Program

Allows you to collectively execute multiple Part Program that registered to N-Parts tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 2 of 20

Ex.2) Repeating Part Program by Using Loop Function

Repeats Part Program until [Loop End] command(or [END]) from [Loop Start] command by
specified number of times.

1. When the [Loop Start] command is registered in the first of N-Parts Part Program, all Part
Program to the last Part Program([END]) is repeated by specified number of times.

When you set the loop number to 2 times. Part Program1->Part Program2->Part Program1->Part
Program2.

2. When the [Loop End] command is registered in N-Parts Part Program, Part Program until [Loop
End] command from [Loop Start] command is repeated by specified number of times.

When you set the loop number to 2 times. Part Program1->Part Program1->Part Program2->Part
Program2.

3. Allows you to register [Loop Start] command after [Loop Start] command.

When you set the loop number to 2 times. Part Program1->Part Program2->Part Program2->Part
Program1->Part Program2->Part Program2.

Ex.3) Repeating Part Program by Using Step & Repeat Function

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 3 of 20

In Step & Repeat*1), the coordinate system is moved according to the Step Condition by each [Loop
Start] command.

When the measurement end position is different from the measurement start position immediately after
[Loop Start] command, move to the measurement start position.

<Example> The same Part Program is executed to each workpiece by using the Step & Repeat
Function.

1. Loop Start(Does not move the coordinate system at the first time)

2. Part Program(The measurement of the first workpiece)

The movement to the measurement start position should be registered to Part Program.

3. Loop Start(After the second times, the coordinate system is moved by the Step Condition)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 4 of 20

4. Part Program(The Measurement of the second workpiece)

The movement to the measurement start position should be registered to Part Program.

*1) By registering to N-Parts Part Program, the coordinate system movement and the executing of Part
Program until Loop End from Loop Start is repeated by specified number of times.

See Also

Processing N-Parts Part Program

Allows you to save the created N-Parts Part Program to N-Part Part Program File(FPP File).

The following information is saved to N-Parts Part Program File.

1. The registered Part Program Information

2. Judgment Result of Part Program
3. The Information of Measurement Data File output by executing of Part Program
4. The comment information of N-Parts Part Program

Notice: Does not save the information registered to [Part Program] tab of Part Program Window.

How To:

1. To save to N-Parts Part Program File, click [Save Part Program for N-Parts] command of the
[File] menu,

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 5 of 20

or, click the [Save Part Program for N-Parts] button in the [Standard] Toolbar.

Displays the [Save the N-Parts Part Program] dialog box. And specify the file name.

2. To open N-Parts Part Program File, click [Open Part Program for N-Parts] command of the
[File] menu,

or, click the [Open Part Program for N-Parts] button in the [Standard] Toolbar.

Displays the [Open the N-Parts Part Program] dialog box. And select the file.

Tip:

You can easily call the N-Parts Part Program File by registering.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Calling Part Program] - [Registering and Calling Part Program]

Registering Part Program

Registers Part Program to N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Click the [N-Parts] tab of the [Part Program] window.

2. Click [Register Move Coord. System] command of the [Part Program] menu.
Or, click [Register Part Program to N-Parts] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

Displays the [Regist Part Program] dialog box.

[Regist Part Program] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 6 of 20

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in N-Parts Part Program tree.
b. [Part Program] --- Enter the Part Program file name.
c. [Browse] --- Select the file.
d. [Ref. Full-Path] --- Specify the file name by the absolute path.
In the following cases, please check the [Ref. Full-Path].
i. When Part Program (*.fpk file) exists in separate folder.
ii. When the folder in which the Part Program (*.fpk file) exists differs from the folder which
saves N-Parts Part Program (*.fpp file).

Notice:

Allows you to execute this command in Teaching mode.

See Also

Registering Loop Start/Loop End Command

Registers Loop Start Command/Loop End Command to N-Parts Part Program.

Please refer to [Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program] for the loop of N-
Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Click the [N-Parts] tab of the [Part Program] window.

2. To register the Loop Start Command, click [Register Loop Start] command of the [Part
Program] menu,

or, click [Register Loop Start] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 7 of 20

Displays the [Loop Start] dialog box.

3. To register the Loop End Command, click [Register Loop End] command of the [Part Program]
menu,

or, click [Register Loop End] button in the [Part Program Create] bar.

Displays the [Loop End] dialog box.

[Loop Start] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in N-Parts Part Program tree.
b. [Number of] --- Specify the number of Loops.
c. [Step & Repeat] --- Measures a lot of arranged workpiece by using the Step & Repeat Function.
d. [Step] --- Set the Step Condition.

Displays the [Set the step value] dialog box.

[Set the step value] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 8 of 20

a. [Set the coordinate system origin] --- Performs X, Y, and Z-axis coordinate system translation.
b. [Ref Coordinate] --- Displays the referred coordinate system at the time of moving.

Notice: The referred coordinate system in Step & Repeat Function is changed by the run condition
of N-Parts Part Program.

Please refer to [Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part
Program] - [Setting Run Condition About Measurement of N-Parts Part Program] for the detail.
c. [X1-axis step] --- Input the step value of X1-axis.
d. [Y-axis step] --- Input the step value of Y-axis.
e. [Z2-axis step] --- Input the step value of Z2-axis.
f. [T1-axis offset] --- Performs T1-axis coordinate system translation.

Input the step value of T1-axis.

[Loop End] Dialog Box:

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in N-Parts Part Program tree.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 9 of 20

Notice:

Allows you to execute [Register Loop Start] command and [Register Loop End] command in Teaching
mode.

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run
Condition About Measurement of N-Parts Part Program]

Editing N-Parts Part Program

Edits N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Click the [N-Parts] tab of the [Part Program] window.

2. Changes N-Parts Part Program.
i. Select N-Parts Part Program from the tree of N-Parts Part Program.
ii. Click [Edit] command in [N-Parts.] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Edit Part Program for N-Parts] command in the pop-up menu of the selected
part program.
iii. Displays the dialog box according to the selected N-Parts Part Program.

Please refer to [Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program] for the
detail of each dialog box.
3. Deletes N-Parts Part Program.
i. Select N-Parts Part Program from the tree of N-Parts Part Program.
ii. Click [Delete] command in [N-Parts.] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Delete Part Program for N-Parts] command in the pop-up menu of the selected
part program.
4. Inserts N-Parts Part Program.
i. Select N-Parts Part Program from the tree of N-Parts Part Program.

The N-Parts Part Program is inserted before the selected N-Parts Part program.
ii. Click [Insert the Part Program in N-Parts] command in [N-Parts.] menu of [Edit] menu,

or, click [Insert Part Program for N-Parts] command in the pop-up menu of the selected
part program.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 10 of 20

iii. The state is changed to the state of inserting of N-Parts Part Program. Register Part Program
or the command.
iv. Click [End the Insertion Part Program in N-Parts] command in [N-Parts.] menu of
[Edit] menu,

or, click [End the Insertion Part Program in N-Parts] command in the pop-up menu of
the selected part program.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

Run N-Parts Part Program

Executes N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Chang to N-Parts Part Program Run Mode.

i. Click [N-Parts Part Program Run Mode] command in [Mode change] menu of [Part
Program] menu.

Or, click [N-Parts Part Program Run Mode] button in the [Run Mode] bar.
2. Execute Step Run(or Batch Run) of N-Parts Part Program.
i. Click [N-Parts Part Program Run Mode] command of the [Part Program] menu. The
check mark is displayed(or not displayed) on the command.
ii. Or, click [Step Run Mode] button in [Run Mode] bar. The button is pressed(or not
pressed).
3. Call N-Parts Part Program.
i. To call the registered N-Parts Part Program, select the procedure in [Part Program Call] bar.

Or, use [Register/Delete Part Program] command of the [Part Program] menu.
4. Execute N-Parts Part Program.
i. Click [Run Part Program for N-Parts] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Or, click [Run Part Program for N-Parts] button in the

[Meas/Procedure] bar.
5. Stop N-Parts Part Program.
i. Click [Stop] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Stop] button in the [Meas/Procedure] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 11 of 20

ii. When the restart of Part Program is permitted, the message box confirming the termination
of Part Program is displayed.

a. [Yes] --- Terminates Part Program.

b. [No] --- Pauses Part Program.
c. [Cancel] --- Continues Part Program.
6. Clear the result of N-Parts Part Program.
i. Click [Clear N-Parts Part Program Run] command of the [Part Program] menu.

Or, click the [Discards N-Parts result] button in the [Standard] Toolbar.

Clears the result of [Part Program] (OK/NG and Part Program Result File Name) in [N-
Parts] tab of Part Program Window.

See Also

[Customizing] - [Part program]

Setting Run Condition About Measurement of

N-Parts Part Program
Sets Run Condition about the measurement of N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Set run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] dialog box.
2. Click [Measurement] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 12 of 20

The [Measurement] Tab of the [Run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] Dialog Box:

a. [Ref. Coordinate] --- Changes the coordinate system to be referenced by the loop function (Step
& Repeat).

The reference coordinate system is set only for Step & Repeat of N-Parts Part Program.

Please refer to [Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program].
b. [Move to Home Position after end] --- Moves to the home position after the end of N-Parts Part
Program.
c. [Speed] --- Changes the movement speed.
d. [Move Stylus with Height Held] --- Moves the stylus without changing its condition.
e. [Move after Raising] - -- Moves the stylus after raising.
f. [Move Stylus with Holding at Midpoint] --- Moves after changing the stylus to the holding at
midpoint condition.
g. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis Position of the middle holding of the stylus.
h. [Moves to the head of the next program automatically.] --- When an error occurs, control
moves to the next Part Program automatically.
i. [Processing is selected at execution time.] --- When an error occurs, operator select the action
from several options after an error message.

Following dialog box is displayed when an error occurs in case of [Processing is selected at execution
time].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 13 of 20

a. [Retry] --- Go to the head of current Part Program, and continue the execution of the N-Parts Part
Program.
b. [Next Program] --- Go to the next Part Program, and continue the execution of the N-Parts Part
Program.
c. [Abort] --- Cancel the execution of the N-Parts Part Program.

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Home Position]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Run N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run
Condition About Result Output of N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run
Condition About Part Program Result Output of N-Parts Part Program]

Setting Run Condition About Result Output of

N-Parts Part Program
Sets Run Condition about the result output of N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Set run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] dialog box.
2. Click [Outputs the results of N-Parts] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 14 of 20

The [Outputs the results of N-Parts] Tab of the [Run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts]
Dialog Box:

a. [FORMPAK File of N-Parts(FPP)] --- Outputs N-Parts Part Program Result File.
b. [Statistical File of N-Parts] --- Outputs N-Parts Part Program Statistic File.
c. [Detail Setup] --- Set the detail condition of N-Parts Part Program Statistic File.

Displays the [Specifying the details of the statistic file] dialog box.
d. [Assign name automatically] --- The file name is automatically named.

Notice: When you don't select this option, the input dialog box is displayed at the time of running
of N-Parts Part Program.
e. [Folder name] --- Specify the folder to save N-Parts Part Program Result File.
f. [Browse] --- Select the folder.
g. [First character of file] --- Enter the first character of the file name.
h. [Generate 7 characters] --- The file name is named at random.

File Name = [First character of file] + <7 characters>(When [Generate 7 characters] is ON).
i. [Use date and time] --- The file name is named by using Date and Time.

File Name = [First character of file] + <Year and Date and Time>(When [Use data and time] is
ON).
j. [Serial number] --- The file name is named by using the serial number.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 15 of 20

File Name = [First character of file] + <serial number>(When [Specify the Serial No] is ON).
k. [Serial number] --- Enter the beginning value of the serial number.
l. [Output to MeasurLink] --- Outputs to MeasurLink.
m. [Use the Part Program name as inspection routine name] --- The inspection routine name uses
same name as Part Program.
n. [Specify the inspection routine name] --- Specify the inspection routine name.
o. [Insp routine] --- Enter the inspection routine name.

Notice: The inspection routine should be created by the [Create MeasurLink header for N-Parts]
in the [Tool] menu, before executing N-Parts Part Program.

[Specifying the details of the statistic file] Dialog Box:

a. [Specify CSV file name] --- Specify the file name of N-Parts Part Program Statistic File.
b. [File name] --- Enter the file name of N-Parts Part Program Statistic File.
c. [Browse] --- Specify the file.
d. [Append] --- Adds the data to the specified N-Parts Part Program Statistic File.
e. [Overwrite] --- Overwrites the data on the specified N-Parts Part Program Statistic File.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Run N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run
Condition About Measurement of N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run
Condition About Part Program Result Output of N-Parts Part Program]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 16 of 20

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R) System]

Setting Run Condition About Part Program

Result Output of N-Parts Part Program
Sets Run Condition about Part Program Result Output of N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Set run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] dialog box.
2. Click [N-Parts result output] tab.

The [N-Parts result output] tab of the [Run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] dialog box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 17 of 20

a. [Specify folder name for N-Parts result output] --- Specify the folder to output Part Program
Result File.
b. [Folder Name] --- Enter the folder name to save Part Program Result File.
c. [Browse] --- Select the folder.

Notice:

When you select [Specify folder name for N-Parts result output], the result output folder of [Set Run
Conditions of Part Program] command in the [Settings] menu is ignored.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Run N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run
Condition About Measurement of N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run
Condition About Result Output of N-Parts Part Program]

Setting Comment of N-Parts Part Program

Sets the comment of N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Set Comment for N-Parts] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set Comment for N-Parts] dialog box.

i. Set the condition, and click [OK] button.

[Set Comment for N-Parts] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 18 of 20

a. List --- Displays the list of comment items.

Select an item to be set.

b. [Use as a comment] --- Uses a selected item as a comment.
c. [Display]/[First Value] --- Enter the fixed character string in [Display].

Enter the initial value of auto count in [First Value].

d. [Item Name] --- Enter the new item name. Select by button the comment of which the item
name is changed.
e. [Kind] --- Select text or integer.

You cannot change the item of [Title] - [Revision No.].

f. [Type] --- Select count up or count down.
g. [Auto] --- Automatically count up or count down.
h. [Fix] --- Use a fixed string.

You can not input a string at the time of the comment input.
i. [Enter in succession] --- Input the string or integer at the time of the comment input.

Tip:

l When the comment is the integer.

To count up or count down automatically, select [Auto].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 19 of 20

When you selected the integer of [Kind], this button is selected automatically.

l When the comment is the string.

To fix the comment at the time of the comment input, select [Fix].

To input arbitrary string at the time of the comment input, select [Enter in succession].

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Comment]

[Processing Part Program] - [Input Comment]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Input Comment of N-Parts Part Program]

Input Comment of N-Parts Part Program

Input the comment of N-Parts Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Input Comment for N-Parts] command of [File] menu.

Displays the [Input Comment for N-Parts] dialog box.

2. And the [Input Comment for N-Parts] dialog box is displayed at the time of the file save.

Input the comment as ID information of N-Parts Part Program.

[Input Comment for N-Parts] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Creating N-Parts Part Program Page 20 of 20

a. [Item] --- Change an item.

The selectable item is the item of which [Enter in succession] was selected.
b. [Display] --- Enter the comment.
c. [Preview] --- Displays all comments.

The item of [Title]-[Revision No.] is common with the property of the file.
d. [Next] --- Enter the next comment.

This button is changed to [End] button at the time of the last comment.

Notice:

At this time, you can set the item to which [Enter in succession] of [Setting Comment of N-Parts Part
Program] was selected.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Comment]

[Processing Part Program] - [Input Comment]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Comment of N-Parts Part Program]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh1A80.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 1 of 10

Setting Print Condition

Set the print condition.

How To:

1. Click [Page Setup] command of the [Layout] menu.

Displays the [Page Layout] dialog box.

2. Select the layout.
3. Select the output destination.
4. Change the option if necessary.

[Page Layout] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 2 of 10

a. [Use system layout] --- Prints by using System Layout.

b. [Detailed Settings] --- Set the print condition of System Layout.
c. [Use default Template] --- Prints by using the default layout template.
d. [Specify and Print Layout File] --- Prints by specifying the arbitrary layout file.

Input the layout file name.

e. [Reference] --- Select a layout file.
f. [Preview and Detail Setup] --- Confirm the layout.

Displays the [Layout Settings] dialog box.

g. [Print on the form] --- Prints on the form.
h. [Print to the file] --- Prints to the file.
i. [Kind of File] --- Select the kind of file.
j. [Do not view layout program after paste to layout data] --- Does not display Layout Edit Program after
pasting the item.
k. [Changes a layout whenever another measurement opened] --- Uses the layout file that is set in the
measurement data file.
l. [Use this layout when new measurement starts] --- Specify the layout to use at the time of the new creation.

i. [Use system layout] --- Uses System Layout.

ii. [Use default Template] --- Uses the default template.
iii. [Specify and Print Layout File] --- Uses the specified layout file.

Select the layout file by clicking [Reference] button.

To confirm the layout, click [Preview and Detail Setup] button.

Displays the [Layout Settings] dialog box.

m. [Reset] --- The Item sizes/attributes of Layout Output is returned to the default settings.

About System Layout:

When you use the page layout, you can print the best output result by using the free layout function.

However, to create the page layout, you had to be skilled in the operation and make the plan of the print.

When you use System Layout, the item is arranged automatic and best, and printed. Therefore, everyone can easily
print a high-quality result.

And when you edit the page layout that is printed by using System Layout, you can change to the best output result.

[Layout Settings] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 3 of 10

a. Displays the print item.

Selects each item to display the item information.

b. [Up] --- Displays the previous page.
c. [Down] --- Displays the next page.
d. [Information on the selected item] --- The information of the item selected on the preview is displayed.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition]−[Setting Run Condition About Print]

Printing By System Layout Printing

Prints by using System Layout.

How To:

1. Click [Page Setup] command of the [Layout] menu.

Displays the [Page Layout] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 4 of 10

Tip: Allows you to set by [Print] tab of [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Select [Use system layout].
3. Click [Detailed Settings] button.

Displays the [System Layout] dialog box.

4. Set the condition of each print item.
i. In [Text] tab, the title string and font of the print item is set.
ii. In [Option] tab, the content of the print item is set.
iii. In [Figure] tab, the size and magnification is set.
5. Click [Print] command of the [Layout] menu.

Or, print by executing Part Program.

i. While printing, the [Printing...] dialog box is displayed, and the page number of the printing page is
displayed.
ii. To cancel the printing, click [Cancel] button.

[Text] Tab of [System Layout] Dialog Box:

a. [Print item] --- Select the item to print.

b. [Title] --- Enter the title string.

c. [Font] --- Change the font condition.

Select the condition from the list in [Font], and click [Set] button.

Displays [Font] dialog box. Change the font condition.

d. [Reset] --- Restores [Text] tab to the initial state.

[Option] in [Meas Result Geo Data] of [System Layout] Dialog Box(Example):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 5 of 10

a. [Display the title] --- Prints the title.

b. [Makes same display as screen] --- Prints the same result as the screen.

c. [Display of background] --- Prints the background.

Notice:

Set the condition to other items similarly.(Please refer to the following example for [Header].)

[Option] in [Header] of [System Layout] Dialog Box(Example):

a. [Print only the 1st page] --- Prints the Header only on the first page.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 6 of 10

b. [Picture Files] --- Prints the picture on the header.

Select the picture file to print.

c. [Date] --- Prints the date on the header.

Select the date format from the list.

[Figure] in [Meas Result Geo Data] of [System Layout] Dialog Box:

a. [Height] --- Input the height of the print item.

b. [Width] --- Input the width of the print item.

c. [AUTO] --- Calculates the width of the print item automatically.

d. [Curve Settings] --- Specify the height and width of the profile display area except the blank space(Grid
Frame Area).

e. [Vert Mag] --- Select the vertical magnification.

To set the best magnification automatically, Select [AUTO].

f. [Horiz Mag] --- Select the horizontal magnification.

To set the best magnification automatically, Select [AUTO].

g. [Use ratio series of 1, 2, 5] --- Select the magnification from the list of series of 1, 2, 5, etc.

h. [Fix Lengthwise and Breadthwise] --- The vertical, horizontal ratio is fixed.

i. [Print the display area] --- Prints the area that is displayed in Figure Window.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 7 of 10

j. [Reset] --- Restores [Figure] tab to the initial state.

Notice:

The condition that can be set might be different by each print item.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition]−[Setting Run Condition About Print]

Printing By Page Layout

Prints by the page layout.

How To:

1. Click [Page Setup] command of the [Layout] menu.

Displays the [Page Layout] dialog box.

Tip: Allows you to set by [Print] tab of [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
2. Select [Specify and Print Layout File].
3. Select the layout file by clicking [Reference] button.
4. To confirm the layout, click [Preview and Detail Setup] button.

Displays the [Layout Settings] dialog box.

5. Click [Print] command of the [Layout] menu.

Or, print by executing Part Program.

i. While printing, the [Printing...] dialog box is displayed, and the page number of the printing page is
displayed.
ii. To cancel the printing, click [Cancel] button.

Shortcut:

Keyboard: CTRL+P

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition]−[Setting Run Condition About Print]

Creating Page Layout

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 8 of 10

Creates the page layout.

How To:

1. Click [Layout] command of the [Layout] menu.

Initiates the Layout Edit Program.

2. Paste the item from the insert item bar of Layout Edit Program.
i. Drag the item and drop to the layout screen.
ii. Click [Paste] command of the pop-up menu of the item.

Tip: Allows you to paste the item by each command in [Paste to Layout] menu of the [Layout] menu. *1)
l [Property] --- Pastes the comment.
l [Measurement Condition] --- Pastes the measurement condition.

l [Measured Data] --- Pastes the coordinate value(X/Z) of the measurement points.
*2)
l [Meas Result Geo Data] --- Pastes the measurement figure displayed on Figure Window.
l [Measured Result] --- Pastes the measurement results displayed on Measurement Result Window.
l [Evaluation Condition] --- Pastes the evaluation condition of the roughness analysis command
displayed on Evaluation Condition Window.
l [Graph] --- Pastes the graph displayed on Analysis Graph Window.
l [Parameter Summary Sheet] --- Pastes Parameter Sum Table.
l [Meas Data List] --- Pastes the coordinate value list(X/Z) of the measurement points to two or more

pages. *2)
l [Meas Result List] --- Pastes the list of all measurement results to two or more pages.
3. Change the position and the size of the item in the layout screen of Layout Edit Program.

The attribute information of the selected item is displayed in Attribute Information Window of Layout Edit
Program.
4. Save the layout file of Layout Edit Program.
5. Allows you to confirm the layout file name.

The layout file name is displayed in [Layout] menu.

When the layout file is not opened, the [Layout Information] is displayed.

*1) Please refer to Help of Layout Edit Program.

*2) Allows you to specify the range of the measurement points that is pasted by using [Item selection] of [Attribute
Setting] dialog box.

Example of Layout Edit Program :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 9 of 10

See Also

Printing By Paragraph Layout

Prints by the paragraph layout.

How To:

1. Set the paragraph condition of Layout Edit Program.

i. Click [Set Paragraph] command of the [File] menu.

Displays the [Paragraph Setup] dialog box.

ii. Specify the number of division.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Setting Print Condition Page 10 of 10

2. Paste the item to the paragraph area.

3. Save the layout file of Layout Edit Program.
4. Print by using the saved page layout.
5. To print forcibly while processing the paragraph, click [Force Print] command of the [Layout] menu.

The paragraph counter is reset.

6. To skip the paragraph without printing, click [Paragraph Skip] command of the [Layout] menu.

Does not print on the skipped block.

Prints automatically when the paragraph counter becomes the same as the number of division.
7. To skip back the paragraph, click [Paragraph Back Skip] command of the [Layout] menu.
8. To reset the paragraph, click [Reset Paragraph Counter] command of the [Layout] menu.

The paragraph counter is reset.

Tip:

Displays the paragraph counter on the [Status] bar.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6014.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 1 of 12

Displaying EasyStat
Displays EasyStat.

How To:

1. Click [Displays EasyStat] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [EasyStat] dialog box.

[EasyStat] Dialog Box:

a. [Result] Tab --- Totals the calculation result.

Allows you to change the group of the statistic data,

and to change the output item.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 2 of 12

b. [Data] Tab ---Displays the list of the registered statistic data at the time of Part Program running.

Allows you to delete the data.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
EasyStat]

Displaying Statistic Result of EasyStat

Displays the statistic result of EasyStat.

How To:

1. Click [Displays EasyStat] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [EasyStat] dialog box.

2. Click [Result] tab.

3. To paste the result of the selected statistic group to the page layout, click [Pastes to Layout]
command of the pop-up menu of the statistic group.

4. To paste all results of the selected statistic group to the page layout, click [Pastes all data to
Layout] command of the pop-up menu of the statistic group.

5. To output the result of the selected statistic group to the text file(CSV Format), click [Exports to
CSV] command of the pop-up menu of the statistic group.

6. To output the result of all statistic groups to the text file(CSV Format), click [Exports all data to
CSV] command of the pop-up menu of the statistic group.

[Result] Tab of [EasyStat] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 3 of 12

a. [Statistic File] --- Displays the name of the selected statistic file.

b. [Statistic Group] --- Displays the list of the statistic group that is set by the statistic condition.

Click a statistic result to display the details.

The statistic group name(Meas Cont, etc.) differs depending on the statistic condition.

c. [Statistic Result] --- Displays the statistic result of the selected statistic group.

Allows you to change the display item by [Display Item Setup].

d. [Statistic Condition Setup] --- Set the group of the statistic calculation.

Displays the [Statistics conditions] dialog box.

e. [Display Item Setup] --- Set the output item of the statistic result.

Displays the [Outputs item setting] dialog box.

f. [Statistic File Setup] --- Select the statistic file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 4 of 12

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
EasyStat]

Displaying Statistic Data of EasyStat

Displays the statistic data of EasyStat.

How To:

1. Click [Displays EasyStat] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [EasyStat] dialog box.

2. Click [Data] tab.

3. To output the selected statistic data to the text file(CSV Format), click [Exports to CSV]
command of the pop-up menu of the statistic data list.

4. To output all statistic datas to the text file(CSV Format), click [Exports all data to CSV]
command of the pop-up menu of the statistic data list.

5. To delete the selected statistic data, click [Invalidate] command of the pop-up menu of the
statistic data list.

6. To delete all statistic datas, click [Invalidate All] command of the pop-up menu of the statistic
data list.

7. To delete the selected measurement contents, click [Invalidate] command of the pop-up menu of
the measurement contents list.

[Data] Tab of [EasyStat] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 5 of 12

a. [Statistic File] --- Displays the name of the selected statistic file.

b. [Statistic Data List] --- Displays the list of the registered statistic data.

Click a statistic data to display the measurement contents.

c. [Measurement Content List] --- Displays the measurement contents of the selected statistic data.

Click a measurement content to display the details.

d. [Measurement Content Details] --- Displays the detailed information of the selected
measurement content.

e. [Statistic File Setup] --- Select the statistic file.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
EasyStat]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 6 of 12

Setting Statistic Condition of EasyStat

Sets the statistic condition of EasyStat.

How To:

1. Click [Displays EasyStat] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [EasyStat] dialog box.

2. Click [Result] tab.

3. Click [Statistic Condition Setup] button.

Displays the [Statistics conditions] dialog box.

4. Set Teaching group.

Example of Grouping of Same Comment

Example of Grouping of Each Measurement Content

Example of Grouping of Same Kind Measurement Content

Example of Grouping of Each Evaluation Profile(Roughness Analysis Command)

[Statistics conditions] Dialog Box:

a. [Comment for statistics] --- Select the comment to group the statistic data.

b. [Each measurement content] --- Performs the grouping of each measurement content.
c. [Each evaluation profile(Roughness analysis)] --- Performs the grouping of each evaluation
profile.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 7 of 12

Example of Grouping of Same Comment:

a. [Lot No.] --- Performs the grouping of the statistic data of the same Lot Number in the comment.

Example of Grouping of Each Measurement Content:(Select [Each measurement content])

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 8 of 12

a. [Meas Cont] --- Performs the grouping of each measurement content(Peak Point is not same
group as Point).

Roughness Analysis is not same group as other Roughness Analysis. And Peak Point is not same
group as Point.

Example of Grouping of Same Kind Measurement Content:(Does not select [Each measurement
content])

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 9 of 12

a. [Meas Cont] --- Performs the grouping of each measurement content of same kind.

Roughness Analysis is same group as other Roughness Analysis. And Peak Point is same group as
Point.

Example of Grouping of Each Evaluation Profile(Roughness Analysis Command):

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 10 of 12

a. [Meas Cont] --- For instance, two R curves of the roughness analysis command are divided into
separate group.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
EasyStat]

Setting Output Item of EasyStat

Sets the output item of the statistic result of EasyStat.

How To:

1. Click [Displays EasyStat] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [EasyStat] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 11 of 12

2. Click [Result] tab.

3. Click [Display Item Setup] button.

[Outputs item setting] Dialog Box:

a. List --- Select the output item of the statistic result.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
EasyStat]

Setting Statistic File

Sets the statistic file of EasyStat.

How To:

1. Click [Displays EasyStat] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [EasyStat] dialog box.

2. Click [Statistic File Setup] button.

Displays the [Open] dialog box. Select the statistic file(esf).

Notice:

This statistic file is same as the file of [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Displaying EasyStat Page 12 of 12

And this file name is set into [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
EasyStat]

Registering Data to EasyStat

Registers the data to EasyStat(Part Program Run Mode or Single Mode)

Register the data to EasyStat by using either of the following three methods.

How To:

1. Click [Register to EasyStat] command of the [Settings] menu.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the data is registered to EasyStat.
2. Or, click [EasyStat] button in the [Part Program Run Conditions] bar.

When thsi button is pressed, the the data is registered to EasyStat.

3. Or, click [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command of [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box.
i. Click the [EasyStat] tab.
ii. Select [Register to EasyStat].

Notice:

Does not display automatically [EasyStat] dialog box at the time of registering to EasyStat.

To display [EasyStat] dialog box, click [Displays EasyStat] command of the [Tool] menu.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
EasyStat]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhA54B.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 1 of 10

Creating New Measurement Data

Creates new measurement data.

How To:

1. Confirm that the power to the contour measuring instrument is turned on.

2. Click [New] command of the [File] menu.

Creates a new measurement data file.

Also, creates a new Part Program.

Tip:

Beforehand by setting [Title] of [Property] command of the [File] menu,

the file name of a new measuring data can be determined.

Shortcut:

[Standard] Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+N

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Creating New Part Program]

Saving Measurement Data

Saves the measurement data to the file.

How To:

1. To overwrite Part Program, click [Save] command of the [File] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 2 of 10

Or, click [Save] button in the [Standard] toolbar.

i. When the measurement data is saved for the first time, the [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

Input the appropriate file name and save the current measurement data to the file.
ii. Allows you to display the dialog box to confirm the overwriting when the data is overwrited.
2. To change the save location, click [Save As...] command of the [File] menu.
i. Displays the [Save As] dialog box.
ii. Input the appropriate file name and save the result.
3. Input the comment information by [Entering Comments] dialog box displayed at this time.

Tip:

Also, the part program is saved to the measurement data file.

Shortcut:

Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+S

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Saving Part Program]

[Customizing] - [Confirmation For File Save]

Opening Measurement Data

Opens the measurement data.

How To:

1. Click [Open] command of the [File] menu.

Displays the [Open] dialog box. Select a measured data file and click [Open] button.
2. Or, click a file name displayed at the bottom of the [File] menu.

The most recently used files are displayed in the [File] menu.

Allows you to change the maximum number of the most recently used file that is displayed in the
[File] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 3 of 10

Tip:

When the FPK file of the FORMTRACPAK/FORMPAK before V5.0 including contour tolerancing is
opened, the contents of Tolerancing procedure file(.mrt) and Nominal data file(.de2) is automatically
converted into the calculation procedure of FORMTARCPAK V5(Provided that, balloon display of contour
tolerancing results are not converted).
When the tolerancing procedure file(*.mrt) or nominal data file(*.de2) is not found ,please specify the place
where the file actually exists.

・When the tolerancing procedure file(*.mrt) is not found.

Select [OK] button to specify the file, or select [CANCEL] button to annul the content on contour
tolerancing.

・When the nominal data file(*.de2) is not found.

Select [OK] button to specify the file, or select [CANCEL] button to annul the content on contour
tolerancing.

Tip:

To create a new measured data file, use [New] command in the [File] menu.

Shortcut:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 4 of 10

Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+O

See Also

[Customizing] - [Recently Used File List]

Setting Measurement Data Property

Sets the property of the measurement data.

How To:

1. Click [Property] command of the [File] menu.

Displays the [Property] dialog box.

2. Displays the creating information of the measurement data file in [File Description] tab.

Allows you to change [Created By]/[Title]/[Subtitle].

3. Displays the creation date and the update information in [Detailed Information] tab.

[File Description] Tab of [Property] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 5 of 10

a. [Created By] --- Enter the name of the file creator.

b. [Comment] --- Displays the comments.

c. [Title] --- Enter the title.

The title is used as the file name of the measurement data created by [New] command of the [File]
menu.
d. [Subtitle] --- Enter the sub-title.
e. [Page Layout] --- Displays the name of the layout file.

[Detailed Information] Tab of [Property] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 6 of 10

a. [Created Date Time] --- Displays the date and time when the file was saved at the first time.

b. [Revision Date Time] --- Displays the data and time when the file was saved last.

c. [Revised by] --- Displays the name of the person who updated the file.

d. [Revised No.] --- Displays the number of times the file has been saved.

e. [Meas #] --- Displays the number of measurements in the file.

f. [Meas Point #] --- Displays the number of measured points in the file.

g. [Part Prog#] --- Displays the number of calculation procedure in the file.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Input Comment]

[Printing] - [Setting Print Condition]

Using Data History

The History File of 30 measurement data can be registered to [Data History Select] bar in the maximum.
You can call the History File at any time.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 7 of 10

How To:

1. Opens the measurement data from Data History.

i. Select the arbitrary History File from Data History File List.

Displays the following information in Data History.

a. [No.] --- The serial number from the latest history file (01~30).

b. [Date/Time start] --- The measured date or the history saving date.
c. [Others] --- Number of measurements, number of measurement points, number of Part
Programs.

ii. Allows you to select the previous history file by [Previous Item] button and select the next
history file by [Next Item] button.

Please refer to [Notice].

2. Registers the measurement data in Data History.

Notice:An oldest history file is deleted when the history file is registered exceeding the maximum
number(30).
i. Click [History File Saving] button.
ii. To save automatically, press [History file automatic saving] button.
iii. The history file is saved automatically by the following operation.
l Executing Part Program

l Opening Measurement Data

*1)

l Measuring
*1)

l Creating New Measurement Data

*1)

l Changing to the mode excluding Single Measurement Mode

*1)

l Terminating this application

*1)

*1) --- Allows you to save only in Single Measurement Mode.

3. Deletes the history file in Data History.

i. Click [Delete the history file] button.

Notice:

The Attention of History File Opening

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 8 of 10

1. When you open the history file that was saved by Single Measurement Mode, the mode is changed to
Single Measurement Mode.

2. In Single Measurement Mode, when you open the history file that was saved by the mode other than
Single Measurement Mode, the following process is performed.

i. Deletes the oldest history file. (When the number of registration exceeds 30)
ii. Registers the measurement data to Data History.
iii. Changes the mode to the measurement mode of the selected history file.
3. To select the oldest history file in Single Measurement Mode while the measurement data is edited,
perform the following operation.
i. Save the edited measurement data.
ii. Select the oldest history file from the [Data History Select] bar.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Importing Measurement Points]

[Customizing] - [Data History]

Reading Measurement Point

Reading the measurement point from the file.

How To:

1. Save the measurement data to the file beforehand.

2. To delete the measurement points before reading the current measurement points,

Click [New Measured Points] command of the [File] menu.

3. Click [Read Measured Points from File] command of the [File] menu.
4. Displays the [Read the measured points] dialog box.
5. Select the kind of file from [Kind of File] .
i. FORMPAK Files(FPK)
ii. Measurement points output file(DAT)
iii. Measured profile curve file(FMC)
iv. Nominal Data File(DE2)
v. Contour Data(MES) *1)
vi. SJ-300/400 measured profile curve file(SMB)
vii. SJ-500 measured profile curve file(BIN)
6. Select a file and click [Open] button. *2) *3)

*1) Use as the contour data of Contour Tolerancing Utility.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 9 of 10

*2) If there are calculation results, the message to confirm the discarding of the calculation results is
displayed.

*3) If there are measurement points, the message to confirm the discarding or adding of the measurement
points is displayed.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Importing Measurement Points]

Opening SURFPAK Result File

Opens SURFPAK result file.

How To:

1. Click [Open the old Surfpak result file] command of the [File] menu.

Displays the [Open the old Surfpak result file] dialog box.

2. Select the SURFPAK result file(S2D).

3. When one measurement profile has been saving, the following process is performed.
i. Changes the mode to Roughness Single Mode.
ii. Creates one Measurement Command(Ex:[a]) and one Roughness Analysis Command(Ex:[b]).

4. When two or more measurement profiles have been saving(N-Section Measurement), the
following process is performed.
i. Change the mode to Teaching Mode.
ii. Creates the Roughness Analysis Command(Ex:[c]) for each measurement command.
iii. The measuring instrument operation of return etc. is developed in Part Program as the
movement command(Ex:[d]).
iv. Adds the N-Section Roughness Analysis Command(Ex:[e]) at the end.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Creating New Measurement Data Page 10 of 10

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering N-Sections Measurement] - [About N-
Section Measurement]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhEC08.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 1 of 37

Measurement
Customize the operation of Measurement Screen.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Measurement] tab.

[Measurement] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 2 of 37

a. [The program moves to calculation after measurement.] --- Displays the calculation screen
automatically after the measurement end. *1)
b. [Calc will not start until [Exit Measurement] is selected.] --- Does not display the calculation
screen automatically after the measurement end.
c. [Display Counter] --- Displays the Counter during measurement.
d. [Skip value] --- Input the thinning out interval of measurement point.

*1) Does not display the calculation screen at the time of Part Program running.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 3 of 37

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Counter]

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

Instruments
Customize the information of the instruments.*1)

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Instruments] tab.

3. To initialize the measurement condition and movement condition and calibration condition and
CNC condition, click [Initialize Measurement/Movement Conditions] button.
4. To specify the order of the axis of the origin detection, click [The Origin Designation Order
setup] button.

Displays the [Set Origin Designation Order] dialog box.

Specify the number in order of the axis that performs the origin detection.
5. To select the arm displayed in [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box, click [Defining the
Arm] button.

Displays the [Arm Info Display Setting] dialog box.

6. To select the stylus displayed in [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box, click [Stylus
Information] button or click [Stylus Roughness Information] button.

Displays the [Stylus Info Display Setting] dialog box.

[Instruments] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 4 of 37

a. [Initialize Meas/Move Cond] --- Initializes the measurement condition and movement condition
and calibration condition and CNC condition.
b. [The Origin Order setup] --- Specify the order of the axis of the origin detection.

Displays the [Set Origin Designation Order] Dialog Box] dialog box.
c. [Display message] --- Set alarm message for calibration.

d. [Defining the Arm] --- Select the arm displayed in [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box.

Displays the [Arm Info Display Setting] dialog box.

e. [Stylus Information] --- Select the stylus displayed in [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog
box.

Displays the [Stylus Info Display Setting] dialog box.

f. [Stylus Roughness Information] --- Select the roughness stylus displayed in [Measuring
Instrument Property] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 5 of 37

Displays the [Stylus Info Display Setting] dialog box.

g. [Display in light color] --- Arm/stylus of non-selection is gray displayed.

h. [Not Display] --- Arm/stylus of non-selection is not displayed.

[Set Origin Designation Order] Dialog Box:

a. [Axis] --- Specify the number in order of the axis that performs the origin detection.

The axis not connected to the measuring instrument is disregarded.

When the same number is set, the origin point is detected in order of the Z2-axis, A-axis, B-axis,
X1-axis, Y-axis, T1-axis, T2-axis, and X2-axis.

Example: Z2-axis -> X1-axis -> Y-axis

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 6 of 37

[Arm Info Display Setting] Dialog Box:

a. [Name] --- Select the arm to display.

b. [Hide All] --- Does not display all arms.
c. [Disp All] --- Displays all arms.

[Stylus Info Display Setting] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 7 of 37

a. [Name] --- Select the stylus to display.

b. [Hide All] --- Does not display all stylus.
c. [Disp All] --- Displays all stylus.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

*1) Arm, Stylus, Stylus Attachment Direction, Optional Equipment

See Also

[Before Using Measuring Instrument] - Detecting the mechanical origin

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour

Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Roughness Detector] - [Changing Stylus of Roughness

Detector]

Measurement Abortion
Customize the operation of the Measurement Abortion.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 8 of 37

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Measurement Abortion] tab.

[Measurement Abortion] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

a. [Aborts the Part Program] --- Stops the Part Program at the time of aborting of the
measurement.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 9 of 37

When the Part Program is not stopped, the calculation procedure is executed. *1)
b. [Displays the Confirmation Message] --- Displays the message box to confirm the discarding of
the measurement points at the time of aborting of the measurement. *2)
c. [Discards Measured Data] --- Discards the measurement points at the time of aborting of the
measurement. *1) *2)
d. [Cancels Measured Data Discard.] --- Does not discard the measurement points at the time of
aborting of the measurement.
e. [Displays the Confirmation Message] --- Displays the message box to confirm the executing of
Auto Return at the time of aborting of the measurement. *3)

f. [Performs auto-return] --- Executes the Auto Return at the time of aborting of the measurement.
*3)

g. [Disable Auto-return] --- Does not execute the Auto Return at the time of aborting of the
measurement. *3)

*1) When the Part Program is not stopped at the time of aborting of the measurement, the calculation
error might occur by discarding the measurement points.

*2) When the Part Program was stopped by the measuring machine, the measurement points are not
discarded.

*3) Set the Auto-return of the measurement condition to ON.

When the Part Program was stopped by the measuring machine, the confirming message is not
displayed.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting 2D Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Auto-Return of Contour

Measurement Condition]

Measurement Tool
Customize [Manual Operation] bar and [Measurement] toolbox.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 10 of 37

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Measurement Tool] tab.

[Measurement Tool] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

a. [Shows Reset button] --- Displays [Reset] button in [Manual Operation] bar.
b. [Shows Stylus buttons] --- Displays [Stylus] button in [Manual Operation] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 11 of 37

c. Buttons in Measurement Toolbox --- Select the button to display in [Measurement] toolbox.
d. [Disp All] --- Displays all buttons.
e. [Hide All] --- Does not display all buttons.
f. Meas Toolbox Width(Number of buttons) --- Select the width of [Measurement] toolbox.
i. [Auto] --- Uses the width of [Measurement/Procedure] bar.
ii. [2]...[6] --- Displays the buttons of specified number.
iii. [Free] --- Displays by state of the row.

See Also

Button Size
Customize the button size of toolbar and toolbox.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Button Size] tab.

[Button Size] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 12 of 37

a. [Use the large buttons from next time] --- Displays the large button at the next time.
b. [Display the text on the button of the tool bar] --- Displays the button name in tool bar.
c. [Display the text on the button of the tool box] --- Displays the button name in toolbox.

See Also

Slider
Customize the operation of the slider.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 13 of 37

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Slider] tab.

[Slider] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

a. [Specify the movement to be obtained when the slider area in the window is clicked by the

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 14 of 37

mouse.] --- Specify the change amount of the mouse operation of the slider.
b. [Specify the movement to be obtained when a direction key is pressed on the keyboard] ---
Specify the change amount of the arrow key operation of the slider.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Length of Contour

Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Pitch of Contour

Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Position of Contour

Measurement Condition]

Text data output

Customize the measurement point output.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Text data output] tab.

[Text data output] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 15 of 37

a. [Select extension] --- Select the extension of the file.

See Also

Confirmation For File Save

Allows you to confirm the overwriting of measurement data.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 16 of 37

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Confirmation for file save] tab.

[Confirmation for file save] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

a. [Confirm when overwrite the file] --- Displays the confirming message box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 17 of 37

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Saving Measurement Data]

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Saving Part Program]

Font Settings
Changes the font of Measurement Result Window.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Font settings] tab.

[Font settings] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 18 of 37

a. [Font settings] --- Change the font of Measurement Result Window.

Displays the [Font] dialog box.

See Also

Sound Settings
Customize sound during measurement.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 19 of 37

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Sound settings] tab.

[Sound settings] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

a. [Notify by sound in Measuring] --- Enable the sound effect during measurement.
b. [Sound Setup...] --- Setup the sound.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 20 of 37

Displays the [Sound Setup] dialog box.

[Sound Setup] Dialog Box:

a. [Default Sound] --- Specify the default sound.

b. [WAV File] --- Specify the sound file.

Click [Browse] button to displays the [Specify WAV file] dialog box.
Select the WAV file.
Only WAV file is available.

See Also

Data History
Customize the operation of Data History.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Data History] tab.

[Data History] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 21 of 37

a. [Uses the history file automatic savings.] --- Saves the History File automatically to Data
History.

b. [Imports the previous history file when a single mode starts.] --- Opens a History File at the
time of starting of this program.

c. [The execution result of the part program is saved in the history file.] --- Saves the result of
Part Program execution to History File.

d. [Hide the keywords as history file information.] --- Does not display the keyword.
e. [Clear the history file.] --- Clears all History Files.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 22 of 37

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Using Data History]

3D Display
Customize the 3D display.

Select a software tool to be started after completing 3D measurement and when clicking the [Append 3D
Analysis] command.

FORMTRACEPAK-PRO ,MCubeMap or MSURF-I is available as the tool.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [3D Display] tab.

[3D Display] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 23 of 37

a. [Perform 3D Realtime Display when Measuring.] --- Displays the measurement data during 3D
measurement.
b. [Disable Re-drawing of figure display window] --- Does not update the 3D Realtime Display.
*1)
c. [3D Roughness Analysis Tool] Group --- The items of [3D analysis tool], which are installed
FORMTRACEPAK, MCubeMap and/or MSURF-I, are available selecting.

*1)

The measurement data before the Stylus Radius Compensation is executed is displayed in 3D Realtime
Display during measurement of one line.

The measurement data to which Stylus Radius Compensation was executed is displayed after the

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 24 of 37

measurement.

The processing time can be shortened by selecting [Disable Re-drawing of figure display window].

When [Disable Re-drawing of figure display window] is selected, all data is overwrited. However, after
all measurements end, the compensated measurement data is correctly displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Figure Window]

Part Program
Customize the operation of Part Program.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Part program] tab.

[Part program] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 25 of 37

a. [After interrupts, Part program can re-start] --- Allows you to restart Part Program.
b. [After interrupts, Part program can't re-start] --- The restart of Part Program is prohibited.
c. [Not display.] --- Does not display the confirming message after the execution of Part Program.
d. [Display at the center of the screen.] --- The confirming message is displayed at the center of
screen after the execution of Part Program.
e. [Display at the same position which closed at last time.] --- The confirming message is
displayed at the previous position after the execution of Part Program.
f. [Shift to the teaching mode after the run of the part program ends.] --- The mode is changed
to Teaching Mode after the execution of Part Program.
g. [Shift to the measure mode after the run of the part program ends.] --- Displays the
measurement screen after the execution of Part Program.

When Part Program restarts:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 26 of 37

When the [Cancel Calculation Run] command in the [Calculation Procedure] menu is clicked during
the execution of Part Program,the confirming message box is displayed.

a. [Yes] --- The execution of part program is aborted.

b. [No] --- Pause the execution of part program.
c. [Cancel] --- Re-Start the execution of part program.

When the restart of Part Program is prohibited:

When the [Cancel Calculation Run] command in the [Calculation Procedure] menu is clicked during
the execution of Part Program,the confirming message box is displayed.

a. [OK] --- Part Program is aborted.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Calculation Procedure]

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program]

Using Item Number

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 27 of 37

The order number(Max. 10 digit) is added to each command output to the CSV file.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Item number] tab.

[Item number] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 28 of 37

a. [Use Item number] --- The order number(Max. 10 digit) is added to each command output to the
CSV file.

Supplementation : You can control calculational result by using item number.

See Also

Recently Used File List

Change the number of file displayed to Recently Used File List.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Recently Used File List] tab.

[Recently Used File List] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 29 of 37

a. [Recently used file list] --- Specify the number of file displayed to Recently Used File List.

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Opening Measurement Data]

Peak/Valley Detection
Set the method of Peak/Valley Detection(Peak/Valley Detection Method).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 30 of 37

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Peak/Valley Detection] tab.

[Peak/Valley Detection] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

a. [Updates no peak/valley point.] --- The point detected at the first is used.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 31 of 37

Peak/Valley Detection Method:

Move the detector by using the Joystick, and detect the peak/valley point.

The Peak/Valley point is detected as follows by the detection method.

i. When the point detected at the first is used.

ii. When the point detected at the first is not used.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Detecting Peak/Valley Point]

Print
Customize the print.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 32 of 37

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Print] tab.

[Print] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

a. [Judge automatically] --- Prints according to the kind of the printer.

b. [Output by color] --- Prints in color. *1)
c. [Output by black and white] --- Prints in Black and White. *1)

*1) Select these options when the printer type cannot be detected.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 33 of 37

See Also

Help
Customize the display method of Help.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Help] tab.

[Help] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 34 of 37

a. [automatically display] --- Displays the help information of the calculation command
automatically.

See Also

Stylus Radius Compensation

Customize the method of the Stylus Radius Compensation.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 35 of 37

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Stylus Radius Compensation] tab.

[Stylus Radius Compensation] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

a. [High-speed algorithm] --- Performs the Stylus Radius Compensation using the high-speed
algorithm. *1)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 36 of 37

*1) In the high speed algorithm, the movement direction of the measurement point is calculated using
polynomial to the measurement point neighborhood.

The position of the measurement point might become abnormal in the corner part. But the measurement
point can be compensated very well by using the stylus with the small radius.

When you don't use the high-speed algorithm, first of all, the whole of the measurement points are
approximated in the line and the arc. And then, the measurement points are moved and divided.

Long processing time is necessary. However, even when the corner part is measured with the stylus with
large radius like the ball stylus, the stable measurement points are calculated.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Measuring Stylus Radius]

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing The Condition of Stylus Radius

Compensation]

Serial port
Change the serial port of the machine connection.

How To:

1. Click [Customize] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box.

2. Click [Serial port] tab.

[Serial port] Tab of [Customize] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Measurement Page 37 of 37

a. [Port] --- Select the port to connect the measuring machine.

Notice:

Allows you to select this option when you are connecting the measuring machine by the serial port.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh34E9.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 1 of 13

Using Clipboard
Allows you to copy the measurement result to clipboard in order to use the result in other application.

And allows you to paste onto Figure Window the object data that created by other application and
copied to clipboard.

How To:

1. Click [Copy] command of the [Edit] menu, or enter CTRL Key + C Key.

The object data in Figure Window is copied to clipboard.

2. Or click each command in [Copy to Clipboard] menu of [Layout] menu.

a. [Property] --- Pastes the comment. *1)

b. [Measurement Condition] --- Pastes the measurement condition. *1)

c. [Measurement Data] --- Pastes the coordinate value(X/Z) of the measurement point. *1)

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Specify the range of the measurement points in
[Item Selection].

d. [Measurement Figure] --- Pastes the measurement figure displayed on Figure Window.

e. [Measurement Results] --- Pastes the measurement result displayed in Measurement

Result Window. *1)

f. [Evaluation Condition] --- Pastes the evaluation condition of Roughness Analysis

Command displayed in Evaluation Condition Window. *1)

g. [Graph] --- Pastes the Roughness Analysis Graph displayed in Analysis Graph Window.

h. [Parameter Summary Sheet] --- Pastes the Parameter Summary Sheet. *1)

3. To paste the clipboard data, click [Paste] command of the [Edit] menu,

or, enter CTRL Key + V Key.

Allows you to move the pasted object data by dragging. And allows you to change the size by
dragging the size mark.
4. To delete the pasted object data, click the object data in Figure Window,

and click [Cut] command.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 2 of 13

Or, enter CTRL Key + X Key.

The cut object data is copied to clipboard.

*1) The object data is copied by Text Format and Picture (Enhanced Metafile) Format.

Select the format by [Paste Special] command of the [Edit] menu of other application.

See Also

Inserting Object
Inserts the object data of other application to Figure Window.

How To:

1. Create the object data, and insert to Figure Window.

i. Click [Object] command of the [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Insert Object] dialog box.

ii. Select the object in [Object Type].
iii. To create new object, select [Create New].
iv. To create from the file, click [Create from File].
v. To display the insert object as the icon, select [Display As Icon].
vi. To create the object data, click [OK] button.

For the method of the object creation, please refer to Help of the using application.
2. Arrange the insert object data on Figure Window.
i. To move the insert object data, drag the object data on Figure Window.
ii. To change the size of the object data, drag the size mark of the selected object data on
Figure Window.
3. You can change the link of the object data.
i. Select the object data on Figure Window.
ii. Click [Links] command of the [Edit] menu.

Displays the [Links] dialog box.

4. You can operate the object data.
i. Select the object data on Figure Window.
ii. The operation command of the object data is displayed in menu of object of the [Edit]
menu.

Please refer to Help of the application of the insert object for the detail of each command.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 3 of 13

[Insert Object] Dialog Box:

a. [Object Type] --- Select the insert object.

b. [Create New] --- Creates the new object.
c. [Create from File] --- Creates the object from the file.
d. [Display As Icon] --- Inserts the object to Figure Window as the icon.

[Links] Dialog Box:

a. [Automatic] --- When the link file of the inserted object has been changed, the link object is
updated automatically.
b. [Manual] --- Updates the link object data by clicking [Update Now] button.
c. [Update Now] --- Updates the link object data.
d. [Open Source] --- Edit the link object data by the application.
e. [Change Source] --- Specify the link file by the file selection dialog box.
f. [Break Link] --- Breaks the link and releases the object from the application.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 4 of 13

See Also

Sending Measurement Data By E-Mail

Sends the measurement data by e-mail.

How To:

1. Click [Send] command of the [File] menu.

Your e-mail application is started. And the e-mail that attached the measurement data is created.
2. Complete and send the e-mail.

Notice:

To send the measurement data, the mail system that is compatible with MAPI (Messaging Application
Programming Interface) is necessary.

See Also

Outputting Measurement Point

Outputs the measurement point to the file.

How To:

1. Click [Output Meas Data] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Meas Data Output] dialog box.

2. Set the output condition and click [OK] button.
3. Displays the [Save As] dialog box.

Input the appropriate file name and save to the file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 5 of 13

[Meas Data Output] Dialog Box:

a. [Text File] --- Output to Text File.

i. [Constant pitch] --- Converts the measurement points into the constant pitch.
ii. [Max precision] --- Outputs the numerical value by the maximum precision.
b. [Contour Data File] --- Output to Contour Data File of Nominal Data Creation Utility. *1)
c. [Aspherical Data File] --- Output to Aspherical Data File of Aspheric Surface Optimizing
Program(Option).*1)
d. [DXF Data File] --- Output to DXF Data File.
e. [IGES Data File] --- Output to IGES Data File.
f. [Data for contour analysis] --- Output the contour analysis data.
g. [Data for Surface Roughness] --- Output the surface roughness analysis data.
h. [2D data] --- Output the 2D data.

The [Contour No.] is displayed the number of the contour selected by using [Select Contour to
Analyze] command of [Settings] menu.
i. [3D data] --- Output the 3D data.
i. [Ignore stylus offset] --- Output the measurement points that is not performed the Stylus
Radius Compensation.
ii. [Data skip(X-dir)] --- Thins out the measurement points in each line.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 6 of 13

iii. [Skip value] --- Select the value of thinning out of the measurement points.

*1) Please refer to Help of each program.

Text Format:

2D Data

1. Unit --- When the unit of X direction and Z(Y) direction is different, the unit characters that
separated by blank character is output.
2. Number of points
3. Coordinate value --- The coordinate value is output only as for the number of data.

Example:

mm um

2200

0.0000, 0.08

0.0040, 0.13

0.0080, 0.35

0.0120, 0.53

0.0160, 0.54

0.0200, 0.50

0.0240, 0.68

(The rest is omitted.)

3D Data

1. Unit --- When the unit of X direction and Y direction and Z direction is different, the unit
characters that separated by blank character is output.
2. Number of points
3. Coordinate value --- The coordinate value is output only as for the number of data.
4. The No.1-3 is repeated only as for the number of section.

Example:

mm um mm

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 7 of 13

2200

0.0000, 0.08, 1.00

0.0040, 0.13, 1.00

0.0080, 0.35, 1.00

0.0120, 0.53, 1.00

0.0160, 0.54, 1.00

0.0200, 0.50, 1.00

0.0240, 0.68, 1.00

(omission at the following)

0.0240, 0.70, 1.00

mm um mm

1200

0.0000, 1.08, 1.00

0.0040, 1.13, 1.00

0.0080, 1.35, 1.00

0.0120, 1.53, 1.00

0.0160, 1.54, 1.00

0.0200, 1.50, 1.00

0.0240, 1.68, 1.00

(omission at the following)

Notice:

Set the output unit system and the number of digits by the [Unit Setup] menu.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Selecting Contour of 3D

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 8 of 13

Measurement]

Outputting Measurement Result

Outputs the measurement result to the text file.

How To:

1. Click [Output Calc Result] command of the [Tool] menu.

2. Displays [Calc Result Output] dialog box.

Input the appropriate file name and save to the file.

See Also

Outputting Statistic Data

Outputs the statistic data.

How To:

1. Click [Create Statistic File] command of the [Tool] menu.

2. Displays the [Save As] dialog box.

Input the appropriate file name and save to the file.

3. When the output file already exists, the [Confirming the data addition] dialog box is displayed.
i. To append the result to the end of the file, click [Append] button.
ii. To overwrite the result to the file, click [Overwrite] button.
4. Outputs the statistic data by K3 Format (CSV Format) .

K3 Format(CSV Format):

The statistic data is output in the following order.

1. The comment is ouput.

2. The title displayed in Measurement Result Window is output in the following order.
a. Calculation Command Type
b. Label Name

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 9 of 13

c. Measurement Content[Meas Cont]

d. Delimiter(Start)
e. Measurement Value[Meas Value]
f. Delimiter(End)
g. Nominal Value[Nom Value]
h. Error
i. Upper Tolerance Limit[U Tol]
j. Lower Tolerance Limit[L Tol]
k. Out-of-Tolerance Value[Out Tol]
l. Tolerance Judgment Result[TolRslt]
m. Judgment[Judg]
n. Unit
o. Time Stamp(Statistic Result Output Start Time)

The evaluation condition is output in the order of the evaluation condition window after
"Time Stamp", if the measurement result is a roughness parameter.

3. The measurement result of each measurement command is output in the order displayed in Part
Program Window.

Output Example:

"Title","Sample"

"Created Date/Time","2016/12/13 11:35:06"

"Reversed Date","2016/12/13 11:35:30"

"Revision No.","1"

"Date/Time start","2016/12/13 11:35:11"

"Date/Time end","2016/12/13 11:35:12"

"",""," Meas Cont",""," Meas Value",""," Nom Value"," Error"," U Tol"," L Tol"," Out
Tol","TolRslt","Judg","Unit","2016/12/13 11:35:50"

"Circle(Range)","Circle_1","Center (X)","", 108.2917,"",,,,,,"","","mm","2016/12/13 11:35:50"

"Circle(Range)","Circle_1","Center (Z)","", -1.0478,"",,,,,,"","","mm","2016/12/13 11:35:50"

"Circle(Range)","Circle_1","Radius Vector","", 108.2967,"",,,,,,"","","mm","2016/12/13 11:35:50"

"Circle(Range)","Circle_1","Angle","", 359.4456,"",,,,,,"","","°","2016/12/13 11:35:50"

"Circle(Range)","Circle_1","Diameter","", 3.6022,"",,,,,,"","","mm","2016/12/13 11:35:50"

"Circle(Range)","Circle_1","Radius","", 1.8011,"",,,,,,"","","mm","2016/12/13 11:35:50"

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 10 of 13

"Circle(Range)","Circle_1","Roundness","", 0.0472,"",,,,,,"","","mm","2016/12/13 11:35:50"

Output Example 2:

"",""," Meas Cont",""," Meas Value",""," Nom Value"," Error"," U Tol"," L Tol"," Out
Tol","TolRslt","Judg","Unit","2016/12/13 13:52:01","","Standard","Kind of Profile:","Smplg Length
(le):","No of Smplg(nle):","λc","λs","Kind of Filter:","Evltn Length(lm):","Pre-Travel:","Post-
Travel:","Smooth Connection","Compensation:"

"Roughness 2D","Roughness_1","Ra",,"0.8943",,"","","1.0000","0.0000","","","NG","um","2016/12/13
13:52:01","","ISO1997","R_ISO","0.8","5","0.8","0.0025","Gaussian","4.0","0.4","0.4","Off","Off"

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of

Measurement Result]

Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R)

System
Outputs the statistic data to MeasurLink(R) System.

How To:

1. To connect MeasurLink, click [Connect MeasurLink] command of the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click [Create MeasurLink header] command of the [Tool] menu. *1)

When the mode is N-Parts Part Program mode, click [Create MeasurLink header for N-
Parts] command of the [Tool] menu.
3. The command name and label name and tolerance information of statistic data is output to
MeasurLink.
4. Click [Output MeasurLink data] command of the [Tool] menu.

When the mode is N-Parts Part Program mode, click [Output MeasurLink data for N-Parts]
command of the [Tool] menu.
5. Displays the [Send Data to MeasurLink] dialog box.

Enter the inspection routine name.

6. Appends the measurement result to the inspection routine. *2)
7. To disconnect MeasurLink, click [Disconnect MeasurLink] command of the [Measurement]
menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 11 of 13

*1) When you already have been creating the MeasurLink header information, you need not create the
header again.

*2) Please match the relation of the measurement result to the header information.

[Send Data to MeasurLink] Dialog Box:

a. [Inspection Routine] --- Enter the inspection routine name.

See Also

Outputting Measurement Data to CAD System

Outputs the measurement data, the result geometry, the dimensions, the labels, and etc. to the readable
file by the external CAD system.

How To:

1. Click [CAD Export] command of the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [CAD Export] dialog box.

2. Set the output condition.

[CAD Export] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 12 of 13

a. [IGES] --- Output by IGES(Initial Graphic Exchange Specification) Format. *1)

b. [DXF] --- Output by DXF(Drawing Interchange File) Format. *2)
c. [Measured Point] --- Output the measurement points.
d. [Result Geometry] --- Output the result geometry.
e. [Dimension / Label] --- Output the dimension and the label.
f. [Poly-line Output] --- Converts the measurement data to the polyline data.
g. [Point Data] --- Converts the measurement data to the point data.

*1) IGES(Version5) is the standard CAD export format which is established to exchange the data with
different CAD systems.

*2) DXF(DXF R13J) is the drawing format of the AutoCAD®.

Notice:

Depending on the version of DXF/IGES of your CAD system, your CAD System might not be able to
be read the DXF file or IGES file that converted by this function.

The output element supports the line, the circle, the ellipse, the point, the text, and the color information.

See Also

Adding optional software

Optional software can be added.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Using Clipboard Page 13 of 13

How To:

1. Click [Add options] command of the [Tool] menu.

For detailed information, refer to the operation manual of each optional software.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh66F5.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 1 of 13

Using MCubeMap
This chapter describes the operations to be performed in 3D analysis using MCubeMap. When MCubeMap has been
installed, the system can perform the following operations.

1. The system automatically starts up MCubeMap upon completion of 3D measurement.

2. The system runs the registered MCubeMap in the background during execution of a measurement procedure
and updates a 3D analysis result.

3. The system displays a MCubeMap 3D analysis result on the Layout Editor.

4. The system allows the user to start MCubeMap and perform 3D analysis operation.

See Also

[Customizing] - [3D Display]

Automatic Execution of 3D Analysis after 3D

Measurement
The system automatically starts up MCubeMap upon completion of 3D measurement. MCubeMap operation differs
depending on whether the system is in the Continuous Run mode or Step Run mode in the Teaching mode or Repeat
mode.

See Also

[Using MCubeMap] - [Automatic Execution of 3D Analysis after 3D Measurement] - [3D measurement in Teaching
mode]

[Using MCubeMap] - [Automatic Execution of 3D Analysis after 3D Measurement] - [Step Run mode in Repeat
mode]

[Using MCubeMap] - [Automatic Execution of 3D Analysis after 3D Measurement] - [Continuous Run mode in
Repeat mode]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 2 of 13

3D measurement in Teaching mode

After completion of 3D measurement, the MCubeMap dialog appears in a state where 3D measurement data has been
loaded.

While the MCubeMap dialog appears, other operations in FORMTRACEPAK cannot be made.

See Also

Step Run mode in Repeat mode

After completion of 3D measurement, the MCubeMap dialog appears in a state where the most-recently registered
3D analysis contents have been rewritten to new 3D measurement data.

While the MCubeMap dialog appears, other operations in FORMTRACEPAK cannot be made.

See Also

Continuous Run mode in Repeat mode

After completion of 3D measurement, no MCubeMap dialog appears, but MCubeMap runs in the background.

The most-recently registered 3D analysis contents are rewritten to new 3D measurement data, automatically
executing 3D analysis.

See Also

Part Program Window Operation

The system allows the user to add, edit or delete 3D analysis data from the Part Program Window tree.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 3 of 13

[Using MCubeMap] - [Part Program Window Operation] - [Editing 3D analysis data (after starting MCubeMap)]

[Using MCubeMap] - [Part Program Window Operation] - [Adding 3D analysis data (after starting MCubeMap)]

Editing 3D analysis data (after starting MCubeMap)

Click the [Open Result of 3D Roughness Analysis…] command in the pop-up menu that appears by selecting
Measure <Meas_＃> from the Part Program list. Then, MCubeMap starts in a state where the 3D analysis conditions
for the most recent 3D measurement of the selected menu have been reflected.

After that, you can edit the 3D analysis contents of MCubeMap. (This edited 3D analysis information is stored in
memory.)

See Also

Adding 3D analysis data (after starting MCubeMap)

Click the [Append 3D Analysis…] command in a pop-up menu that appears by selecting a menu from the Part
Program Window tree. Then, MCubeMap starts in a state where the most recent 3D measurement data has been
loaded. After that, you can perform 3D analysis operation.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 4 of 13

Upon completion of MCubeMap 3D analysis operation, an MCubeMap command menu is appended to the Part
Program tree.

The label name goes to “MCubeMap_#”. # is distributed starting with 1 in order of MCubeMap 3D analysis setup.

See Also

Layout Editor and 3D Analysis

When creating a report with the Layout Editor, you can use a MCubeMap 3D analysis result.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 5 of 13

If a 3D analysis result is updated, a report that has been created using the analysis result will be automatically
updated.

In this case, tree-structured information on MCubeMap analysis is appended to the Element tree.

See Also

[Using MCubeMap] - [Layout Editor and 3D Analysis] - [Element tree display]

[Using MCubeMap] - [Layout Editor and 3D Analysis] - [Displaying 3D analysis result]

[Using MCubeMap] - [Layout Editor and 3D Analysis] - [Properties of 3D analysis result]

Element tree display

The existing (FORMTRACEPAK-PRO) 3D analysis results differ from the contents of each element analysis tree
displayed in MCubeMap.

· 3D measurement icon display using MCubeMap

· Operator & Analysis display commands with a tree structure

FORMTRACEPAK Part Program tree

MCubeMap_1 analysis tree displayed in MCubeMap

MCubeMap_2 analysis tree displayed in MCubeMap

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 6 of 13

Element tree display in Layout Editor

Notice: Even if failed to acquire MCubeMap tree information, the system continues processing without display of
any error message.
The Operator & Analysis display tree will not appear.

Notice: While the MCubeMap dialog is opened, click the [Refresh] command in the pop-up menu of an element tree
displayed in the Layout Editor. Then, MCubeMap will doubly start up.
Since MCubeMap is not allowed to start more than once at a time, the system displays the following error message
and aborts update processing of the element tree of MCubeMap.
If this is the case, other trees not related to MCubeMap are updated..

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 7 of 13

See Also

Displaying 3D analysis result

On the Layout Editor window drag & drop an analysis tree from the Element tree to display the 3D analysis result
image as one of the contents of a report.

Trees that you can drag and drop are those of analysis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 8 of 13

See Also

Properties of 3D analysis result

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 9 of 13

You can control whether to display the title of a 3D analysis result image that has been displayed in a report. Click a
3D analysis result displayed on the Layout Editor window, then the Attribute Setting dialog will appear.

Notice: A 3D analysis result cannot be edited. In that case, edit the analysis result directly with MCubeMap and then
layout it in place.

To display this Attribute Setting dialog, double-click the displayed 3D analysis result or click the [Properties…]
command from the pop-up menu of the 3D analysis result. (This operation is identical to the usual operation on the
Layout Editor window.) In this Attribute Setting dialog you can set whether to display or hide the title of a 3D
analysis result and perform font settings. The contents of this operation conform to the display specifications of a
result figure on the Layout Editor window.

See Also

Starting Up MCubeMap

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 10 of 13

When MCubeMap has been installed, the [MCubeMap] command will appear in the [Tool] menu. Click this
[MCubeMap] command to start up MCubeMap.

See Also

[Using MCubeMap] - [Starting Up MCubeMap] - [Details on MCubeMap dialog]

[Using MCubeMap] - [Starting Up MCubeMap] - [Returning to FORMTRACEPAK (Exiting MCubeMap)]

Details on MCubeMap dialog

The MCubeMap dialog appears as shown in the following figure. While the MCubeMap dialog appears, other
operations in FORMTRACEPAK cannot be made.

MCubeMap is started with 3D-measured information loaded (with 3D measurement data displayed in the
MCubeMap tree). One 3D measurement corresponds to a studiable node (one piece of 3D measurement data) in the
“MCubeMap” tree structure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 11 of 13

See Also

Returning to FORMTRACEPAK (Exiting

MCubeMap)
Either of the following two methods is available to exit the MCubeMap dialog.

· Click the [Cancel] button ([ X ] button) at the upper right corner of the dialog.

· Click the [Exit] command from the [File] menu in the MCubeMap dialog.

If any changed information has not been saved when exiting the dialog, the following message will be displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 12 of 13

See Also

About Dongle
If the dongle (protection key) is not recognized, the following error message will appear upon startup of MCubeMap.
Make sure that the dongle is properly connected, and then click on the [Retry] button.

Otherwise FORMTRACEPAK will not exit even if the [Exit] button is clicked.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
Measuring Page 13 of 13

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh99EC.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 1 of 93

[New] Command( [File] Menu)

Create new measurement data.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+N

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Creating New Measurement Data]

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Opening Measurement Data]

[Open] Command( [File] Menu)

Open an existing measured data file.

Displays the [Open] dialog box. Select a measured data file.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+O

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Opening Measurement Data]

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Creating New Measurement Data]

[Save] Command( [File] Menu)

The file of the current measured data is saved without changing the file name and save location.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 2 of 93

To save the newly created measured data for the first time, the [Save As...] dialog box is displayed, then
give an appropriate file name to the current measured data and save it.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+S

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Saving Measurement Data]

[Save As] Command( [File] Menu)

Save the measured data file by changing the file name and the directory.

Displays the [Save As] dialog box. Save the measured data by changing the file name and the directory.

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Saving Measurement Data]

[Open the old Surfpak result file] Command

( [File] Menu)
Open a SURFPAK result file.

Displays the [Open the old Surfpak result file] dialog box. Select a SURFPAK result file.

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Opening SURFPAK Result File]

[New Measured Points] Command( [File]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 3 of 93

Menu)
Discard the present measurement points.

After executing this command, perform the new measurement or read the measurement points from the
measured data file.

To save the present measuring point, click [Save] command or [Save As] command.

Shortcut

Keyboard : CTRL+SHIFT+N

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Reading Measurement Point]

[Read Measured Points from File] Command

( [File] Menu)
Read and append the measured points from the measured data file.

Displays the [Read the measured points] dialog box. Select a measured data file.

Allows you to perform same Part Program or calculation procedure for the different measured point by
using this command.

To save the present measuring point, click [Save] command or [Save As] command.

Shortcut

Keyboard : CTRL+SHIFT+M

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Reading Measurement Point]

[Save Measured Points of the Polar Coordinate

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 4 of 93

Development] Command( [File] Menu)

Save the measured data to the file in order to perform the command excluding the circle command by
using the Polar Coordinate Development Data.

Displays the [Save As] dialog box. Save the Polar Coordinate Development Data by changing the file
name and the directory.

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Saving Measurement Data]

[Delete Bestfit Reference Data] Command

( [File] Menu)
Delete the Bestfit Reference Data registered by [Load Bestfit Reference Data] Command or [Set Current
Meas. Points As a Bestfit Reference Data] Command.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Preparing Bestfit Reference Data]

[Load Bestfit Reference Data] Command( [File]

Menu)
Read the measurement points of the measurement data file as the Bestfit Reference Data.

Displays the [Read the Bestfit Reference Data.] dialog box. Select a measured data file.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Preparing Bestfit Reference Data]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 5 of 93

[Set Current Meas. Points As a Bestfit

Reference Data] Command( [File] Menu)
Register the present measurement points.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Preparing Bestfit Reference Data]

[New N-Parts] Command( [File] Menu)

Create new N-Parts Part Program.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar :

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Processing N-Parts Part Program]

[Open Part Program for N-Parts] Command

( [File] Menu)
Open N-Parts Part Program File.

Displays the [Open the N-Parts Part Program] dialog box. Select a N-Parts Part Program File.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 6 of 93

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Processing N-Parts Part Program]

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Creating N-Parts Part Program]

[Save Part Program for N-Parts] Command

( [File] Menu)
Save a N-Parts Part Program File by changing the file name and the directory.

Displays the [Save the N-Parts Part Program] dialog box. Save N-Parts Part Program File by changing
the file name and the directory.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar :

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Processing N-Parts Part Program]

[Send] Command( [File] Menu)

Send the measurement data by e-mail.

The window for the mail to which the current measured data is to be attached is displayed. Complete the
e-mail by inputting [To] and [Subject] and other fields and the message.

Click [Send] button.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Sending Measurement Data By E-Mail]

[Input Comment] Command( [File] Menu)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 7 of 93

Input the comment of Part Program.

Displays the [Entering Comments] dialog box. Input the comment.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Input Comment]

[Property] Command( [File] Menu)

Input the information to Property in order to identify the measured data file easily.

Allows you to set the title and creator name and the sub title.

The created date time and modified date time and Part Prog Number etc. is set automatically by the
system.

See Also

[Processing Measurement Data] - [Setting Measurement Data Property]

[Input Comment for N-Parts] Command( [File]

Menu)
Input the comment of N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Input Comment for N-Parts] dialog box. Input the comment.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Input Comment of N-Parts Part Program]

[Most Recent File] Command( [File] Menu)

The most recently used files are displayed in the [File] menu. You can open the measured data file from
this list.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 8 of 93

See Also

[Customizing] - [Recently Used File List]

[Exit Application] Command( [File] Menu)

Exit this program.

Otherwise, click [Close] command of the control menu.

If there is unsaved data, the window that confirms whether to save the measured data is displayed.

Shortcut

By Mouse: Click Close button([X] button) on the window title bar.

Keyboard: ALT+F4

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [How to Exit]

[Undo] Command( [Edit] Menu)

When the calculation range is inputted at the time of executing the calculation command, the last
operation is canceled.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+Z

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 9 of 93

[Analyzing Contour] - [Registering Calculation Command]

[Redo] Command( [Edit] Menu)

When the calculation range is inputted at the time of executing the calculation command, the last cancel
operation is performed again.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+A

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Registering Calculation Command]

[Cut] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Copies the selected object to clipboard and deletes the object.

Shortcut

Keyboard: CTRL+X

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Copy] Command( [Edit] Menu)

The object data in Figure Window is copied to clipboard.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

Keyboard: CTRL+C

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 10 of 93

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Paste] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Insert the object data in clipboard to Figure Window.

Shortcut

Keyboard: CTRL+V

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Change Meas Points] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Change the measurement point in order to calculate newly.

Calculates newly remaining the edited measurement point. Or, restores the measurement point of the
state of immediately after the obtaining.

You can select the execution of Stylus Radius Compensation.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing For New Calculation]

[Bestfit] Command( [Edit] Menu)

The bestfit function will calculate distance between the measured points and given reference data, then
adjust the measured coordinate system to the reference coordinate system so that sum of the square of
the distance is minimized.

Displays the [Bestfit Measured Points] dialog box. Set the Bestfit condition.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 11 of 93

Click [OK] button to perform Bestfit.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Performing Bestfit of

Measurement Points]

[Scaling] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Zoom in or out of the measurement points by the specified magnification.

Displays the [Scale of Meas Points] dialog box.Specify the magnification value.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Scale of Measurement Points]

[Filtering] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Perform low-pass filtering of the measurement points.

Displays the [Filter Condition Setup] dialog box.Set the Filter condition.

Message: WC0001

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Filtering Measurement Points]

[Fairing] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Smoothing the measurement points by using the Fairing Method.

Displays the [Fairing Setup] dialog box. Set the condition of Fairing.

Message: WC0001

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 12 of 93

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Smoothing Measurement Points]

[Evaluation Section] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Add the evaluation section to the arbitrary position(except Pre/Post-Travel) on the measurement profile
by setting the kind of profile and the sampling length and the number of sampling lengths.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing Data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

[Data Compensation] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Perform the data compensation by specifying the arbitrary applying range.

You can confirm the compensation result visually by trying the compensation.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing Data] - [Executing Compensation of Roughness Analysis]

[Data Deletion] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Delete the abnormal data to not influence the parameter calculation.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing Data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[Data Connection] Command( [Edit] Menu)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 13 of 93

Connect the arbitrary range of profile to generate one measurement profile.

You can confirm the connecting result visually by trying the connection.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing Data] - [Executing Data Connection of Roughness Analysis]

[Evaluation Condition] Command( [Edit]

Menu)
Change the evaluation condition of measured roughness analysis command

selected in Part Program Window.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Evaluation Condition of Roughness Analysis]

[Parameter Condition] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Change the parameter condition of measured roughness analysis command

selected in Part Program Window.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Parameter Condition of Roughness Analysis]

[Analysis Graph Condition] Command( [Edit]

Menu)
Change the graph condition of measured roughness analysis command

selected in Part Program Window.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 14 of 93

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Analysis Graph Condition of Roughness Analysis]

[Roughness Standard] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Change the standard of measured roughness analysis command

selected in Part Program Window.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Setting Roughness Standard]

[Change Calculation] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Change the calculation condition of the calculation procedure.

Displays the [Calculation] dialog box. Change the calculation condition and the display condition.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Changing Calculation Condition of Calculation
Procedure]

[Change Movement Condition] Command

( [Edit] Menu)
Change the movement condition of Movement Command.

Displays the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box. Change the movement condition.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 15 of 93

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Changing Movement Condition of Movement
Command]

[Change Measurement Condition] Command

( [Edit] Menu)
Change the measurement condition of Measurement Command.

Displays the [Measurement Condition] dialog box. Set the measurement condition.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Changing Measurement Condition of

Measurement Command]

[Change Compensation Condition] Command

( [Edit] Menu)
Change the compensation condition of Measurement Command.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box. Change the compensation condition.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Changing Compensation Condition of

Measurement Command]

[Append 3D Analysis] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Formtracepak-PRO is executed.

Only when Formtracepak-PRO is installed, this menu is displayed.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 16 of 93

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Append 3D Analysis]

[Append 3D Roughness Analysis] Command

( [Edit] Menu)
Formtracepak-PRO is executed.

Only when Formtracepak-PRO is installed, this menu is displayed.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Append 3D Roughness Analysis]

[Delete Calculation] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Delete the unnecessary calculation procedure.

Displays the [Items to be deleted] dialog box. Delete the unnecessary calculation procedure.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Deleting Calculation Procedure]

[Insert Calculation] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Insert the new calculation procedure.

Execute the calculation command and insert the calculation procedure.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Inserting Calculation Procedure]

[Optimize Calculation] Command( [Edit]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 17 of 93

Menu)
Delete the calculation unrelated to the measurement results to compact the calculation procedure.

The execution time of the calculation procedure can be shortened.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Compacting Calculation Procedure]

[Set the Display Condition] Command( [Edit]

Menu)
Change the display condition of each command in Part Program.

Displays the [Set the Display Condition] dialog box. Set the display condition of Figure Window.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Changing Display Condition of Part Program]

[Call display condition] Command( [Edit]

Menu)
Updates the Figure Window by using the display condiion of the selected calculation procedure.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Displaying By Calculation Procedure Condition]

[Edit] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Edit N-Parts Part Program.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 18 of 93

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Editing N-Parts Part Program]

[Delete] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Delete the unnecessary N-Parts Part Program.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Editing N-Parts Part Program]

[Insert] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Insert new N-Parts Part Program.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Editing N-Parts Part Program]

[Paste] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Paste the measurement result into Figure Window.

Displays the [Pastes the Measurement Result] dialog box. Select the measurement result.

You cannot use this command in the [Measurement] tab and [All Contour] tab.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Pasting Analysis Result]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 19 of 93

[Delete] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Delete the specified measurement result.

You cannot use this command in the [Measurement] tab and [All Contour] tab.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing The Pasted Analysis Result Properties] - [Changing The Pasted
Measurement Result]

[Properties] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Change the attribute of the pasted measurement result.

The item of the attribute is different depending on the kind of the pasted measurement result.

You cannot use this command in the [Measurement] tab and [All Contour] tab.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing The Pasted Analysis Result Properties] - [Changing The Pasted
Measurement Result]

[Transparent] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Switch between the transparent or untransparent of the measurement result pasted on Figure Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the background is transparent.

You cannot use this command in the [Measurement] tab and [All Contour] tab.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing The Pasted Analysis Result Properties] - [Changing The Pasted
Measurement Result]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 20 of 93

[Object] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Insert the object.

Displays the [Insert Object] dialog box. Insert the object.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Inserting Object]

[Links] Command( [Edit] Menu)

Change the link information of the selected object.

Displays the [Links] dialog box. Change the link.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Inserting Object]

[OLE Object] Command( [Edit] Menu)

The operation command of the object data is displayed.

To cancel the operation of the object, click Tab or Part Program Window.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Inserting Object]

[Change Display Scale] Command( [View]

Menu)
Change the display magnification of Figure Window.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 21 of 93

Displays the [Display Magnification Setup] dialog box. Set the display magnification value.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Magnification]

[Zoom-In] Command( [View] Menu)

Enlarge and display the specified rectangular area on the window to the whole window.

Zooms in to fit the specified area into Figure Window.

To cancel the operation, press ESC key.

To cancel the command, click [Zoom-In] Command again.

Shortcut

[Display Magnification] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Magnification]

[Zoom-Out] Command( [View] Menu)

Reduce and display the displayed area on the window to the specified rectangular area on the window.

Zooms out to fit Figure Window into the specified area.

To cancel the operation, press ESC key.

To cancel the command, click [Zoom-Out] Command again.

Shortcut

[Display Magnification] Bar :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 22 of 93

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Magnification]

[Zoom to Fit] Command( [View] Menu)

All measurement points are displayed to fit into Figure Window.

Shortcut

[Display Magnification] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Magnification]

[Fix lengthwise and breadthwise] Command

( [View] Menu)
The vertical and horizontal ratio is fixed.

When the vertical and horizontal ratio is fixed, the magnification is calculated automatically.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the vertical and horizontal ratio is fixed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Display Magnification Bar]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Magnification]

[Interlock to the command selection] Command

( [View] Menu)
Update the Figure Window by using the Display Condiion of the selected calculation procedure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 23 of 93

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Figure Window interlocks to the
measurement condition and is displayed.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Displaying By Calculation Procedure Condition]

[Interlock to the measurement condition]

Command( [View] Menu)
Change the Display Magnification of the Figure Window interlocking to the measurement length and the
measurement range of the measurement condition.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Figure Window interlocks to the
measurement condition and is displayed.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

[Real time display] Command( [View] Menu)

Calculate [Point Measurement], [Line Measurement], [Circle Measurement], [Position/Difference],
[Distance/Angle], using the mouse position data, and display the results in Real Time.

When the menu command check mark is displayed, the calculation result is displayed in real time.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Displaying Calculation Result in

Real Time]

[Vertical Reading] Command( [View] Menu)

Read the vertical value of profile/graph of roughness analysis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 24 of 93

Move the cursor to the reading position on Figure Window, and click the left button.

To cancel the reading operation, press the ESC key or execute the other command.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Reading Value of Profile/Graph of Roughness Analysis]

[Horizontal Reading] Command( [View] Menu)

Read the horizontal value of profile/graph of roughness analysis.

Move the cursor to the reading position on Figure Window, and click the left button.

To cancel the reading operation, press the ESC key or execute the other command.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Reading Value of Profile/Graph of Roughness Analysis]

[Clear Reading] Command( [View] Menu)

Clear the reading result of profile/graph of roughness analysis.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Reading Value of Profile/Graph of Roughness Analysis]

[Display Auxiliary Line] Command( [View]

Menu)
Displays the parameter auxiliary line of roughness analysis command.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the auxiliary line is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 25 of 93

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Display Method] - [Displaying Auxiliary Line of Roughness

Parameter]

[All-Section-Result] Command( [View] Menu)

Change the result displaying of roughness parameter.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, All-Section-Result is displayed.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Display Method] - [Changing Result Displaying of Roughness

Parameter]

[Comparison Result Details] Command( [View]

Menu)
Change the tolerance comparison result displaying of roughness parameter.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the detail result of tolerance comparison is
displayed.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Display Method] - [Changing Result Displaying of Roughness

Parameter]

[0 tab0 ] Command( [View] Menu)

Displays the specified tab data to the current area.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 26 of 93

[Processing Results] - [Displaying Other Tab Data]

[Display Data] Command( [View] Menu)

Displays the specified tab data to the current area.

Displays the [Display Data] dialog box. Select the display tab.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Displaying Other Tab Data]

[Release] Command( [View] Menu)

The data of other tab is released and the former data is displayed.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Displaying Other Tab Data]

[Contour Tol Result] Command( [View] Menu)

Displays the [Contour Tolerancing Result] dialog box to confirm the numerical values of the tolerance
comparison result of each nominal point.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing]

[Polar Coordinate Development] Command

( [View] Menu)
The center of the circle is the origin of the polar coordinate system. And the measured point on the
circumference develops along the X axis of a Cartesian coordinate system.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 27 of 93

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Displaying Polar Coordinate Development]

[Part Program] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Part Program Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Part Program Window is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Window]

[Meas Result] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Measurement Reuslt Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Measurement Reuslt Window is
displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Measurement Reuslt Window]

[Operation Message] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Guidance Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Guidance Window is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 28 of 93

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Guidance Window]

[Overall Display] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Overall Display Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Overall Display Window is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Overall Display Window]

[3D View] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the 3D View Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the 3D View Window is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [3D View Window]

[Meas Condition] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Measurement Condition Window.

Displays the setting value of the main item of the measurement condition.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Measurement Condition Window is
displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Measurement Condition Window]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 29 of 93

[Evaluation Condition] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the Evaluation Condition Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Evaluation Condition Window is
displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Evaluation Condition Window]

[Analysis Graph] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Analysis Graph Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Analysis Graph Window is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Analysis Graph Window]

[All Contour Tab] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the [All Contour] tab of the Figure Window.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [All Contour] tab is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Figure Window]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 30 of 93

[Split Horizontally] Command( [View] Menu)

Splits the Figure Window horizontally.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Figure Window is horizontally divided.

Shortcut

Figure Window :

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Figure Window]

[Split Vertically] Command( [View] Menu)

Splits the Figure Window vertically.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Figure Window is vertically divided.

Shortcut

Figure Window :

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Figure Window]

[Figure Window Expansion] Command( [View]

Menu)
Expands the Figure Window temporarily.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Figure Window is expanded.

Shortcut

Figure Window :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 31 of 93

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Figure Window]

[Arrangement] Command( [View] Menu)

Initializes the display position and size of the Part Pro Window, the Measurement Result Window, the
Guidance Window, and the Overall Display Window.

The window of non-display is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Operation Screen]

[Tool Bar] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Standard Toolbar.

The [Standard] Toolbar contains buttons that are shortcuts to some commonly used menu items.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, The [Standard] Toolbar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Standard Toolbar]

[Status Bar] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Status bar.

Displays the guidance and status information in Status bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Status bar is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 32 of 93

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Status Bar]

[Manual Operation Bar] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Manual Operation] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Manual Operation] bar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Manual Operation Bar]

[Measurement Toolbox] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Measurement] toolbox.

When there is a check mark at the side of this coomand, the [Measurement] toolbox is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Measurement Toolbox]

[Meas/Procedure Bar] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Measurement/Procedure] bar.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 33 of 93

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Measurement/Procedure] bar is
displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Measurement/Procedure Bar]

[Level Meter] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Level Meter.

Displays Z axis position of the detector in Level Meter.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Level Meter is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Level Meter]

[Stylus Position] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Stylus Position.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the triangle mark that shows the Stylus
Position is displayed in Figure Window.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Stylus Position]

[Display Magnification Bar] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Display Magnification] bar.

The [Display Magnification] bar includes the command([Zoom-In], [Zoom-Out], [Overall Display] etc. )

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 34 of 93

to change the display magnification.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Display Magnification] bar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Display Magnification Bar]

[Part Program Run Bar] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Part Program Run] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Part Program Run] bar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Bar]

[Part Program Run Conditions Bar] Command

( [View] Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Part Program Run Condition] bar.

You can easily validate or invalidate the function of Part Program by [Part Program Run Conditions]
bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Part Program Run Condition] bar is
displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Part Program Call Bar] Command( [View]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 35 of 93

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Part Program Call] bar.

You can easily call the registered Part Program from [Part Program Call] Bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Part Program Call] Bar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Call Bar]

[Run mode Toolbar] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the [Run Mode] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Run Mode] bar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Run Mode Bar]

[Part Program Create Bar] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Part Program Creation] bar.

The [Part Program Creation] bar includes the command registered to Part Program or N-Parts Part
Program.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Part Program Creation] bar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Creation Bar]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 36 of 93

[Part Program Status Bar] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Run Mode Display] bar.

The [Run Mode Display] bar displays the current run mode.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Run Mode Display] bar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Run Mode Display Bar]

[Custom Toolbar] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the [Custom] Toolbar.

In [Custom] toolbar, the calculation command added by [Custom Toolbox Settings] command is
included.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Custom] toolbar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Custom Toolbar]

[Calculation ToolBox] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the Calculation Toolbox.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Calculation Toolbox is displayed.

Shortcut

Toolbar :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 37 of 93

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Calculation Toolbox]

[Data History Select Bar] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the [Data History] bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Data History] bar is displayed.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Data History Bar]

[Arrangement] Command( [View] Menu,

[Toolbar/Toolbox])
Arranges the toolbar or toolbox.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Operation Screen]

[Do not save Toolbar position upon exiting]

Command( [View] Menu, [Toolbar/Toolbox])
When exiting this program, the position of the toolbar is switched to save or not to save.

When the position of the toolbar is saved, the toolbar is displayed to the same position at the next
initiation.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the position of the toolbar is discarded.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 38 of 93

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Operation Screen]

[Counter] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Counter. Set the counter type and the display method.

The Counter displays the position of Scale Coordinate in Measurement Screen. And the counter displays
the position of the mouse in Calculation Screen.

Displays the [Counter] dialog box. Set the display method of Counter.

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Counter]

[Error Display] Command( [View] Menu)

Shows or Hides the Error Display.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Error Display is displayed.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing]

[Color Stripe Display] Command( [View]

Menu)
Shows or Hides the Color Stripe.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Color Stripe is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 39 of 93

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing]

[Japanese] Command( [View] Menu)

Changes the display language to Japanese.

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [Changing Language]

[English] Command( [View] Menu)

Changes the display language to English.

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [Changing Language]

[Display Bestfit Reference Data] Command

( [View] Menu)
Shows or Hides the Bestfit Reference Data.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Bestfit Reference Data is displayed.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Preparing Bestfit Reference Data]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 40 of 93

[Show Bestfit Calculation Result] Command

( [View] Menu)
Displays the calculation result of Bestfit in the [Bestfit Calculation Results] dialog box.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Displaying Bestfit Calculation

Result]

[Work Coordinate Information] Command

( [View] Menu)
Displays the [Information on current work coordinate] message box to display the present work
coordinate system information.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Displaying Work Coordinate System Information]

[Select Display Section] Command( [View]

Menu)
Select the contour to calculate or display, when there are two or more contours.

Displays the [Section Select] dialog box. Select the display section.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Section]

[Set Output] Command( [Settings] Menu)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 41 of 93

Change the output condition of the measurement result.

Displays the [Measurement Result Output Condition Setup] dialog box. Set the output condition of each
measurement result.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of

Measurement Result]

[Set Display] Command( [Settings] Menu)

Change the display condition of measurement result.

Displays the [Display Setup] dialog box. Set the display tyle and color and font of the measurement
result.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition]

[Data Display] Command( [Settings] Menu)

Set the grid display condition and the auto ratio display and the numeric notation.

Displays the [Display settings of data] dialog box. Set the display method of all display section(Tab) or
each display section(Tab).

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition]

[Graph Display] Command( [Settings] Menu)

Changes the display condition of the analysis graph.

Displays the [Display settings of graph] dialog box. Set the display method of graph data or auxiliary

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 42 of 93

line or grid.

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition]

[Set Polar Coordinate Development] Command

( [Settings] Menu)
Change the method of Polar Coordinate Development Display.

Displays the [Polar Coordinate Development Display] dialog box. Change the display method.

Shortcut

Toolbar :

See Also

[Processing Results] - [Displaying Polar Coordinate Development]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Polar Coordinate Development Display]

[Set Calculation Method] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Change the calculation method of geometrical tolerance limit.

Also, when applying by the least squares method, the influence of abnormal data can be reduced.

Displays the [Calculation Method Setup] dialog box. Set the calculation method.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Calculation Method]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 43 of 93

[Set Automatic Circle/Line Conversion]

Command( [Settings] Menu)
Set the condition of Automatic Circle/Line Conversion.

Displays the [Automatic Circle/Line Conversion Setup] dialog box. Set the condition of Automatic
Circle/Line Conversion.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Automatic Circle/Line

Conversion]

[Set Fairing Conditions] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Set the default value of Fairing condition.

Displays the [Default Setting for Fairing Conditions] dialog box. Set the condition of Fairing.

The set value is the initial value displayed in the [Default Setting for Fairing Conditions] Dialog Box
and the [Fairing Detail Setup] Dialog Box.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Fairing Condition]

[Set Filter Conditions] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Set the Filter condition.

Displays the [Filter Condition Setup] dialog box. Set the filter type and the Cutoff condition.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 44 of 93

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Filter Condition]

[Settings for Polar Coordinate Development]

Command( [Settings] Menu)
Set the condition of Polar Coordinate Development.

Displays the [Polar Coordinate Development Option] dialog box. Set the condition of Polar Coordinate
Development.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Polar Coordinate

Development]

[Set Range Specification Mode] Command

( [Settings] Menu)
Changes the range specification mode.

Displays the [Range Specification Mode Setup] dialog box. Change the range specification mode.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Range Specification

Mode]

[Roughness Calculation Method] Command

( [Settings] Menu)
Usually, the roughness parameter is calculated in accordance with the definition of the
standard.However, allows you to calculate by using non-standard condition or the original condition.

Set such the calculation method of roughness analysis.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 45 of 93

Displays the [Calculation Method Setup] dialog box. Set the calculation method.

See Also

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Calculation Method of Roughness Analysis]

[Select Contour to Analyze] Command

( [Settings] Menu)
Select the analyzing contour from the contours measured by 3D.

Displays the [Contour Selection Setup] dialog box. Select the analyzing contour.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Selecting Contour of 3D

Measurement]

[Set Display Section] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Set minimum θ1 angule difference to judge the different section to be the same section.

Displays the [Section Select Settings] dialog box. Change the Angle Difference of T1.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Setting Minimum T1 Angle

Difference]

[Set Comment] Command( [Settings] Menu)

Set the item of the comment and the input method.

Displays the [Comment Setup] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 46 of 93

The content set here is reflected at the time of comment input.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Comment]

[Set Run Conditions of Part Program]

Command( [Settings] Menu)
Set Run Condition about measurement.

Displays the [Set run condition of the Part Program] dialog box. Set Run Condition of each procedure.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Perform Measurement] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Perform the measurement at the time of Part Program running.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the measurement is performed at the time of
Part Program running.

And the [Measurement] button of [Part Program Run Condition] bar is pushed down.

Shortcut

[Part Program Run Condition] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 47 of 93

Measurement]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Perform Bestfit] Command( [Settings] Menu)

Perform the Bestfit at the time of Part Program running.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Bestfit is performed at the time of Part
Program running.

And the [Bestfit] button of [Part Program Run Condition] bar is pushed down.

Shortcut

[Part Program Run Condition] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
Bestfit]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Perform Edit the Data] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Perform the Data Edit at the time of Part Program running.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the Data Edit is performed at the time of Part
Program running.

And the [Data Edit] button of [Part Program Run Condition] bar is pushed down.

Shortcut

[Part Program Run Condition] Bar :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 48 of 93

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Data
Edit]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Perform Calculation] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Perform the calculation procedure at the time of Part Program running.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the calculation procedure is performed at the
time of Part Program running.

And the [Calculation] button of [Part Program Run Condition] bar is pushed down.

Shortcut

[Part Program Run Condition] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
Calculation Procedure]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Perform Print the results] Command

( [Settings] Menu)
Perform the print at the time of Part Program running.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the print is performed at the time of Part
Program running.

And the [Print] button of [Part Program Run Condition] bar is pushed down.

Shortcut

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 49 of 93

[Part Program Run Condition] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
Print]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Perform Output the results] Command

( [Settings] Menu)
Perform the result output at the time of Part Program running.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the result output is performed at the time of
Part Program running.

And the [Output] button of [Part Program Run Condition] bar is pushed down.

Shortcut

[Part Program Run Condition] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
Result Output]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Register to EasyStat] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Register to EasyStat at the time of Part Program running.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the statistic data is registered to EasyStat at
the time of Part Program running.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 50 of 93

And the [EasyStat] button of [Part Program Run Condition] bar is pushed down.

Shortcut

[Part Program Run Condition] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
EasyStat]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Run Condition Bar]

[Set Equipment] Command( [Settings] Menu)

Set the information of the measuring machine.

Displays the [Measuring Instrument Property] dialog box. Set the Measuring Instrument.

When the setting of Measuring Instrument is changed, perform the calibration.

Shortcut

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar :

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Roughness Detector]

[Set Meas. Condition] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Roughness Measurement Mode

Sets the Roughness Measurement Condition.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 51 of 93

Contour Measurement Mode

Sets the Contour Measurement Condition.

Shortcut

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar :

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition]

[Set Comp. Condition] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Set the compensation condition of the measurement.

Displays the [Comp Condition] dialog box. Change each compensation condition.

Shortcut

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar :

See Also

[Measuring]-[Setting Compensation Condition]-[Setting Compensation Condition]

[Set CNC condition] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Sets the conditions about the teaching and the machine coordinate system that using by the CNC
function.

Displays the [Set CNC condition] dialog box. Sets the conditions of the teaching and the machine
coordinate system in the CNC function.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 52 of 93

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Setting CNC Function]

[Set Home Position] Command( [Settings]

Menu)
Set the home position.

Displays the [Home Position] dialog box. Set the home position of each axis.

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Home Position]

[Set run condition of the Part Program for N-

Parts] Command( [Settings] Menu)
Set Run Condition about the measurement of N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Run condition of the Part Program for N-Parts] dialog box. Set run condition of each
procedure.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program]

[Set Comment for N-Parts] Command

( [Settings] Menu)
Set the comment item and the input method of N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Set Comment for N-Parts] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 53 of 93

The content set here is reflected at the time of comment input.

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Setting Comment of N-Parts Part Program]

[Single Measurement Mode] Command( [View]

Menu)
Chang to Single Measurement Mode.

Shortcut

[Run Mode] Bar :

See Also

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To Single Measurement Mode]

[Teaching Mode] Command( [Part Program]

Menu)
Chang to Teaching Mode.

Shortcut

[Run Mode] Bar :

See Also

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To Teaching Mode]

[Repeat Mode] Command( [Part Program]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 54 of 93

Menu)
Chang to Part Program Run Mode.

Shortcut

[Run Mode] Bar :

Keyboard : F5

See Also

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To Part Program Run Mode]

[N-Parts Part Program Run Mode] Command

( [View] Menu)
Chang to N-Parts Part Program Run Mode.

Shortcut

[Run Mode] Bar :

See Also

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To N-Parts Part Program Run Mode]

[Read Part Program from the file] Command

( [Part Program] Menu)
Read the Part Program from the file.

Displays the file selection dialog box. Select the measurement data file.

When the connected measuring instrument and the measuring instrument that specified for Part Program
are different, the [Confirmation of Meas Instrument] dialog box is displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 55 of 93

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Calling Part Program] - [Reading Part Program From File]

[Register/Delete Part Program] Command

( [Part Program] Menu)
Register or delete Part Program.

Displays the [Register/Delete Part Program] dialog box. Register the measurement data file and delete
Part Program.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Calling Part Program] - [Registering/Calling Part Program]

[Call Part Program] Command( [Part Program]

Menu)
Call the registered Part Program.

Displays the [Call Part Program] dialog box. Select Part Program.

If there is a change in Part Program used now, the confirming message of discarding is displayed.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Calling Part Program] - [Registering/Calling Part Program]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Call Bar]

[Run Part Program] Command( [View] Menu)

Execute Part Program.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 56 of 93

To change Run Condition of Part Program, perform [Set Run Conditions of Part Program] command of
the [Settings] menu.

Shortcut

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program]

[Step Run Mode] Command( [Part Program]

Menu)
Change to Step Run Mode.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the mode is Step Run Mode.

Shortcut

[Run Mode] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Step Run of Part Program]

[Register Zoom to Fit] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers the automatic magnification display command to Part Program.

The automatic magnification display command is executed when reaching this command while
executing Part Program.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 57 of 93

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Automatic Magnification Display
Command]

[Register Pause] Command( [Part Program]

Menu)
Registers the pause command to Part Program(or N-Parts Part Program).

The message is displayed and Part Program pauses when reaching this command while executing Part
Program or N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Pause Setup] dialog box. Set the condition of the pause.

To register this command to Part Program, Select [Part Program] tab of Part Program Window.

To register this command to N-Parts Part Program, Select [N-Parts] tab of Part Program Window.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Pause Command]

[Register Measurement] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers the measurement command.

The measurement is executed when reaching this command while executing Part Program.

Shortcut

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 58 of 93

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Measurement Command]

[Register Movement for 1-axis] Command

( [Part Program] Menu)
Registers the movement(1-axis) command.

The movement(1-axis) is executed when reaching this command while executing Part Program.

Displays the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box. Set the condition of the movement(1-axis).

Shortcut

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Movement(1-axis) Command]

[Register Movement] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers the movement command.

The movement is executed when reaching this command while executing Part Program.

Displays the [Regist Movement] dialog box. Set the condition of the movement.

Shortcut

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Movement Command]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 59 of 93

[Register Ref. Position] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers the reference position command to Part Program.

The counter value is set as the calculation result when reaching this command while executing Part
Program.

You can refer this value as the calculation result of movement(1-axis) command or movement
command.

Displays the [Ref. Position] dialog box. Set the condition of the reference position.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Reference Position Command]

[Register Leveling] Command( [Part Program]

Menu)
Registers the leveling command.

The leveling is executed when reaching this command while executing Part Program.

Displays the [Register Leveling] dialog box. Set the condition of the leveling.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Leveling Command]

[Register Master Ball measurement] Command

( [Part Program] Menu)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 60 of 93

Registers the master ball measurement command.

The master ball measurement is executed when reaching this command while executing Part Program.

Displays the [Register Master Ball measurement] dialog box. Set the condition of the master ball
measurement.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Master Ball Measurement
Command]

[Register Stylus Change] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers the stylus exchange command to Part Program.

The stylus exchange is executed when reaching this command while executing Part Program.

Displays the [Stylus exchange] dialog box. Select a stylus.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Stylus Exchange Command]

[Register N-Section Measurement] Command

( [Part Program] Menu)
Registers the procedure of N-sections measurement to Part Program.

The N-sections measurement or the N-sections measurement of column direction is executed when
reaching this command while executing Part Program.

Displays the [Set Measurement Condition] dialog box. Set the condition of N-sections measurement.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 61 of 93

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering N-Sections Measurement] - [About
N-Section Measurement]

[Register Detector exchange] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers the procedure of Detector exchange to Part Program.

Exchange the detector when stepping-into [Detector Exchange] command, while running a part
program.

Set up the conditions in the [Register Detector exchange] dialog box to be displayed.

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Replace the detector]

[Register Scale Coord offset] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers the scale coordinate offset command to Part Program(or N-Parts Part Program).

The scale coordinate offset is executed when reaching this command while executing Part Program or
N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Register Scale Coord Offset] dialog box. Set the condition of the scale coordinate offset.

To register this command to Part Program, Select [Part Program] tab of Part Program Window.

To register this command to N-Parts Part Program, Select [N-Parts] tab of Part Program Window.

Shortcut

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 62 of 93

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Scale Coordinate Offset Command]

[Register Move Coord. System] Command

( [Part Program] Menu)
Registers the coordinates system movement command to Part Program(or N-Parts Part Program).

The coordinates system movement is executed when reaching this command while executing Part
Program or N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Register Move Coord. System] dialog box. Set the condition of the coordinates system
movement.

To register this command to Part Program, Select [Part Program] tab of Part Program Window.

To register this command to N-Parts Part Program, Select [N-Parts] tab of Part Program Window.

Shortcut

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Coordinate System Movement
Command]

[Register Calibration(Z-Gain)] Command

( [Part Program] Menu)
Registers the calibration(Z-Gain) command.

The calibration(Z-Gain) is executed when reaching this command while executing Part Program.

Displays the [Registering a Z-axis Gain Calibration] dialog box. Set the condition of the calibration(Z-
Gain).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 63 of 93

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Calibration(Z-Gain) Command]

[Register Calibration(Batch calibration)]

Command( [Part Program] Menu)
Registers the calibration(Batch Calibration) command.

The calibration(Batch Calibration) is executed when reaching this command while executing Part
Program.

Displays the [Register Batch Calibration Measurement] dialog box. Set the condition of the calibration
(Batch Calibration).

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Creating Part Program] - [Registering Calibration(Batch Calibration)

Command]

[Register part program] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers Part Program to N-Parts Part Program.

The Part Program is executed when reaching this command while executing N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Regist Part Program] dialog box. Specify a measurement data file.

Shortcut

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Registering Part Program]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 64 of 93

[Register Loop Start] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers Loop Start Command to N-Parts Part Program.

The procedure to Loop End is repeatedly executed when reaching this command while executing N-
Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Loop Start] dialog box. Set the loop condition.

Shortcut

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Registering Loop Start/Loop End Command]

[Register Loop End] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Registers Loop End Command to N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Loop End] dialog box. Set the label name of the command.

Shortcut

[Part Program Creation] Bar :

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Registering Loop Start/Loop End Command]

[Run Part Program for N-Parts] Command

( [View] Menu)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 65 of 93

Execute N-Parts Part Program.

To change Run Condition of N-Parts Part Program, perform [Set run condition of the Part Program for
N-Parts] command of the [Settings] menu.

Shortcut

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar :

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Run N-Parts Part Program]

[Clear N-Parts Part Program Run] Command

( [Part Program] Menu)
Clears the result of procedure for multiple components.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar :

See Also

[Processing N-Parts Part Program] - [Run N-Parts Part Program]

[Contour Measurement] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Change to Contour Measurement Mode.

See Also

[Measuring] - [About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 66 of 93

[Roughness Measurement] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Change to Roughness Measurement Mode.

See Also

[Measuring] - [About Roughness Measurement and Contour Measurement]

[Meas Start] Command( [Measurement] Menu)

Execute the measurement.

Shortcut

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar (Single Measurement Mode(Without Auto-set)) :

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar (Single Measurement Mode(With Auto-set)) :

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar (Teaching Mode) :

See Also

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

[Stop] Command( [Measurement] Menu)

Abort the measurement.

Shortcut

[Measurement/Procedure] Bar :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 67 of 93

See Also

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

[Calibrate] Command( [Measurement] Menu)

To compensate the installation error or the dimensional error of the measuring instrument and more
accurately measure, execute the calibration.

Execute the Calibration according to the guidance.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Calibrating]

[Abort Calibration] Command( [Measurement]

Menu)
Interrupts the calibration measurement or the calibration calculation, and returns to the state before the
measurement of the calibration.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Calibrating]

[Batch Calibration] Command( [Measurement]

Menu)
To compensate the installation error or the dimensional error of the measuring instrument and more
accurately measure, execute the calibration.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 68 of 93

Executes the Batch Calibration of the Z Gain Adjustment/Symmetric Comp Measurement/Stylus Radius
Measurement by using accessory calibration kit(as shown below).

Displays the [Batch Calibration] dialog box. Set the condition and Perform Batch Calibration.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Executing Batch Calibration]

[Meas. the Angle between X1-axis and Y-axis]

Command( [Measurement] Menu)
The angle between X1Y axes is measured with a hemispherical calibration gauge.

Displays the [Measurement angle between the X1 and Y axes] dialog box. Set the condition and perform
the measurement.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Measuring X1Y-axis Angle]

[Movement(1-axis)] Command( [Measurement]

Menu)
Moves using the Movement(1-axis) Command.

Displays the [Movement(1-axis)] dialog box. Set the movement position and the movement method.
Then start the movement.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 69 of 93

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement(1-axis) Command]

[Movement] Command( [Measurement] Menu)

Moves using the Movement Command.

Displays the [Movement] dialog box. Set the movement position and the movement method. Then start
the movement.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement Command]

[Return] Command( [Measurement] Menu)

Returns the measuring instrument.

Displays the [Return] dialog box. Set the condition and perform the return.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Returning]

[Leveling] Command( [Measurement] Menu)

Executes the leveling by using the inclination of workpiece calculated by the pre-measuring.

Displays the [Leveling] dialog box. Set the condition and perform the leveling.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 70 of 93

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

[3-Axial Adjustment Calibration] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Perform 3-Axial Adjustment Calibration of cylinder workpiece (Outside Diameter and Inside Diameter).

Please setup 3-axis Adjustment Table.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [3-Axial Adjustment Calibration]

[Squareness Alignment] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Perform Squareness Alignment of cylinder workpiece (Outside Diameter and Inside Diameter).

Please setup 3-axis Adjustment Table.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 71 of 93

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Squareness Alignment]

[Detect Peak/Valley] Command( [Measurement]

Menu)
Detect the peak/valley point of the workpiece.

Displays the [Peak/Valley Being Detected] dialog box. Move the detector and detect the peak/valley
point.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Detecting Peak/Valley Point]

[Customizing] - [Peak/Valley Detection]

[Masterball measure] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Executes the pre-measuring of the sphered workpiece(Convex/Concave). Then, moves to the top
position. And sets the top position to the coordinate system origin point.

Displays the [Ball Meas.] dialog box. Set the condition and perform the masterball measurement.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Measuring Master Ball]

[Align Work Coord. System] Command

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 72 of 93

( [Measurement] Menu)
Calculates the origin point and the inclination of the cylinder workpiece or the rectangular parallelepiped
workpiece by the pre-measuring, and moves/rotates the Work Coordinate System.

Displays the [Align Work Coord. System] dialog box. Set the condition and execute the [Align Work
Coord. System] Command.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Aligning Work Coordinate System]

[Rotate Work Coord. System] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Rotates the Work Coordinate System by the rotation of T1-axis Table.

Displays the [Rotate Work Coord. System] dialog box. Set the condition and perform the [Rotate Work
Coord. System] Command.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Rotating Work Coordinate System by T1-axis
Table Rotation]

[Scale Coord. Offset] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Move Scale Coordinate Origin.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 73 of 93

Displays the [Scale Coord. Offset] dialog box. Move the Scale Coordinate Origin.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Move Scale Coordinate Origin]

[Move Coord. System] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Move the Scale Coordinate or the Work Coordinate System.

Displays the [Alignment] dialog box. Move the coordinate system.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Moving Work Coordinate System]

[Designate Origin] Command( [Measurement]

Menu)
Detect the mechanical origin of each axis.

The [Detection of the Origin] dialog box is displayed. Select the axis to detect the mechanical origin and
perform the designate origin.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 74 of 93

[Before Using Measuring Instrument] - [Detecting the mechanical origin]

[Software Limit] Command( [Measurement]

Menu)
To limit range of motion according to the workpiece and tools, set the Software Limit.

Displays the [Software Limit] dialog box. Set the software limit of each axis.

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Software Limit]

[Device parameter measurement] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Measures the Master Ball and sets the position of the Machine Coordinate System Origin Point.

Displays the [Device parameter measurement] dialog box. Perform the master ball measurement
according to the guidance.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Measuring Device Parameter]

[End] Command( [Measurement] Menu)

Terminates the measurement and changes to the calculation.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

Keyboard : CTRL+SHIFT+X

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 75 of 93

See Also

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

[Back to Screen of Measure] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)
Aborts the calculation and returns to the measurement.

Shortcut

[Standard] Toolbar:

See Also

[Measuring] - [Measuring]

[Detector exchange] Command( [Measurement]

Menu)
Replace the detector using [Detector exchange] command.

When the [Detector Exchange] dialog box is displayed, replace the detector according to the instruction
displayed.

Shortcut

[Measurement] Toolbox :

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Replace the detector]

[Re-Connect Measuring Instrument] Command

( [Measurement] Menu)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 76 of 93

Re-Connects Measuring Instrument.

See Also

[Before Using Measuring Instrument] - [Re-Connecting Measuring Instrument]

[New Measuring and Calculating Procedure]

Command( [Part Program] Menu)
Delete all the calculation procedures including the measurement command without deleting the
measurement points.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Creating New Calculation Procedure]

[New Calculating Procedure] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Delete the calculation procedure(calculation command only) without deleting the measurement points.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Creating New Calculation Procedure]

[Read Calculation from File] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Read the calculation procedure from the file.

Displays the [Read Calculation] dialog box. Select a measurement data file.

When there is a calculation procedure in the data currently used, the message box is displayed in order
to confirm discarding of the calculation procedure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 77 of 93

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Calling Part Program] - [Reading Calculation Procedure From File]

[Run Calculation] Command( [Part Program]

Menu)
Executes the current calculation procedure.

Shortcut

Keyboard: CTRL+F5

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Calculation Procedure]

[Cancel Calculation Run] Command( [Part

Program] Menu)
Stop the running of the calculation procedure.

Shortcut

Keyboard : CTRL+BREAK

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Calculation Procedure]

[Execute Saved Repeat Command] Command

( [Calculation Procedure] Menu)
Executes the calculation commands saved in the file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 78 of 93

Displays the [Call Command File] dialog box. Select a command file.

The commands are added to calculation procedure. Then, perform the step run.

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Command File]

[Layout] Command( [Layout] Menu)

Initiates the Layout Edit Program.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Measurement Condition] Command( [Layout]

Menu [Paste to Layout])
Paste to Page Layout the measurement condition displayed in Measurement Condition Window.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Evaluation Condition] Command( [Layout]

Menu [Paste to Layout])
Paste to Page Layout the evaluation condition of the roughness analysis command displayed in
Evaluation Condition Window.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 79 of 93

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Meas Result Geo Data] Command( [Layout]

Menu [Paste to Layout])
Paste to Page Layout the measurement result geometric data displayed in Figure Window.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Measured Result] Command( [Layout] Menu

[Paste to Layout])
Paste to Page Layout the measurement result displayed in Measurement Result Window.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Graph] Command( [Layout] Menu [Paste to

Layout])
Paste to Page Layout the roughness analysis graph displayed in Analysis Graph Window.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Property] Command( [Layout] Menu [Paste to

Layout])

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 80 of 93

Paste the comment to Page Layout.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Comment]

[Parameter Summary Sheet] Command

( [Layout] Menu [Paste to Layout])
Paste the Parameter Summary Sheet to Page Layout.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Outputting Parameter Sum Table of Roughness Analysis]

[Measured Data] Command( [Layout] Menu

[Paste to Layout])
Paste the coordinate value of the measurement points to Page Layout.

Allows you to specify the range of the measurement points by [Attribute Setting] dialog box of Layout

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Meas Data List] Command( [Layout] Menu

[Paste to Layout])
Paste to next page of Page Layout the list of the measurement points.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 81 of 93

Allows you to specify the range of the measurement points by [Attribute Setting] dialog box of Layout

The coordinate value of the measurement points is inserted in several pages according to the range of the
measurement points specified with [Item Selection].

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Meas Result List] Command( [Layout] Menu

[Paste to Layout])
Paste to next page of Page Layout the list of the measurement results.

The list is inserted in several pages according to the number of measurement result.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Print] Command( [Layout] Menu)

Print the measurement data according to the print condition.

Shortcut

Keyboard: CTRL+P

See Also

[Printing] - [Setting Print Condition]

[Printing] - [Printing By System Layout Printing]

[Printing] - [Printing By Page Layout]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 82 of 93

[Force Print] Command( [Layout] Menu)

The Page Layout is printed before the paragraph counter reaches the number of paragraphs while
printing the paragraph.

The paragraph counter is reset by this command.

See Also

[Printing] - [Printing By Paragraph Layout]

[Paragraph Skip] Command( [Layout] Menu)

The paragraph counter increases one while printing the paragraph. And the next paragraph is indicated.

No item is printed on the skipped block.

When the paragraph counter reaches the number of paragraphs, the Page Layout is automatically
printed.

See Also

[Printing] - [Printing By Paragraph Layout]

[Paragraph Back Skip] Command( [Layout]

Menu)
The paragraph counter decreases one while printing the paragraph. And the previous paragraph is
indicated.

See Also

[Printing] - [Printing By Paragraph Layout]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 83 of 93

[Reset Paragraph Counter] Command

( [Layout] Menu)
Resets the paragraph counter.

See Also

[Printing] - [Printing By Paragraph Layout]

[Page Setup] Command( [Layout] Menu)

Set the print condition.

Displays the [Page Layout] dialog box. Set the print condition.

See Also

[Printing] - [Setting Print Condition]

[Measurement Condition] Command( [Layout]

Menu [Copy to Clipboard])
Copy the measurement condition to clipboard.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Set the item.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Evaluation Condition] Command( [Layout]

Menu [Copy to Clipboard])

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 84 of 93

Copy to clipboard the evaluation condition of roughness analysis command displayed in Evaluation
Condition Window.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Set the item.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Meas Result Geo Data] Command( [Layout]

Menu [Copy to Clipboard])
Copy to clipboard the measurement result geometric data displayed in Figure Window.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Set the item.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Measured Result] Command( [Layout] Menu

[Copy to Clipboard])
Copy to clipboard the measurement result displayed in Measurement Result Window.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Set the item.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Graph] Command( [Layout] Menu [Copy to

Clipboard])

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 85 of 93

Copy to clipboard the analysis graph displayed in Analysis Graph Window.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Set the item.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Property] Command( [Layout] Menu [Copy to

Clipboard])
Copy the comment to clipboard.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Set the item.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Parameter Summary Sheet] Command

( [Layout] Menu [Copy to Clipboard])
Copy the Parameter Summary Sheet to the clipboard.

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Set the item.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Measured Data] Command( [Layout] Menu

[Copy to Clipboard])
Copy the coordinate value of the measurement points to clipboard.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 86 of 93

Displays the [Attribute Setting] dialog box. Set the item.

Specify the range of the measurement points in [Item selection].

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Using Clipboard]

[Layout Information] Command( [Layout]

Menu)
Allows you to confirm the layout file name.

When the layout file is not opened, the [Layout Information] is displayed.

See Also

[Printing] - [Creating Page Layout]

[Create Statistic File] Command( [Tool] Menu)

Outputs the statistic data by K3 Format (CSV Format).

Displays the [Save As] dialog box. Enter the appropriate file name and save to the file.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of

Measurement Result]

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data]

[Output Calc Result] Command( [Tool] Menu)

Outputs the measurement result to the text file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 87 of 93

Displays [Calc Result Output] dialog box. Enter the appropriate file name and save to the file.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Measurement Result]

[Output Meas Data] Command( [Tool] Menu)

Output the measurement points to the text file.

Displays the [Meas Data Output] dialog box. Set the file format.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Measurement Point]

[CAD Export] Command( [Tool] Menu)

Outputs the measurement data, the result geometry, the dimensions, the labels, and etc. to the readable
file by the external CAD system.

Displays the [CAD Export] dialog box. Set the output type and the output item.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Measurement Data to CAD System]

[Output Calibration Result] Command( [Tool]

Menu)
Outputs the history of the calibration result to the text file.

Displays the [Calibration Result Output] dialog box. Select the output calibration result.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 88 of 93

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Outputting History of Calibration Result]

[Output Nominal Data] Command( [Tool]

Menu)
Saves the nominal data to the file.

When there is multiple nominal data, displays the [Output Nominal Data] dialog box. Select the nominal
data.

Displays the [Nominal Data File(*.DE2)Create] dialog box. Input the nominal data file name and click
[Save] button.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing] - [Processing Contour Tolerance File] - [Saving
Nominal Data]

[Output Test Contours Result Details]

Command( [Tool] Menu)
Outputs the tolerance judgment result to the file.

Displays the [Save As] dialog box. Save the results by changing the file name and the directory.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing] - [Processing Contour Tolerance File] -

[Outputting Tolerance Judgment Result]

[Customize] Command( [Tool] Menu)

Change the settings of controlling the measurement operation and toolbar and dialog box.

Displays the [Customize] dialog box. Change the operation environment.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 89 of 93

See Also

[Customizing]

[Custom Toolbox Settings] Command( [Tool]

Menu)
Change the calculation command button of the custom toolbar and custom toolbox.

Displays the [Customize Calculation Command] dialog box. Add or delete the calculation command
button.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Using Custom Toolbox]

[Memorize [Designation]/[Input] Toolbox

Operation] Command( [Tool] Menu)
Each time a calculation command is executed, the operations of the specification toolbox buttons and
input toolbox buttons that are selected at that time are saved in memory. When the same next calculation
command is executed, the same button is automatically selected.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the button operation is memorized.

The button operation is memorized at the time of the end of the calculation command.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Registering Calculation Command]

[User Information] Command( [Tool] Menu)

Displays the login user information.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 90 of 93

Allows you to logoff. Or allows you to login by other user.

Beforehand, make the security system effective.

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [Log on]

[Connect MeasurLink] Command( [Tool]

Menu)
Connect MeasurLink System.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R) System]

[Disconnect MeasurLink] Command( [Tool]

Menu)
Disconnect MeasurLink.

See Also

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R) System]

[Create MeasurLink header] Command( [Tool]

Menu)
The command name and label name and tolerance information of statistic data is output to MeasurLink.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 91 of 93

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of

Measurement Result]

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R) System]

[Output MeasurLink data] Command( [Tool]

Menu)
Output to the MeasurLink the statistic data of the measurement result.

Displays the [Send Data to MeasurLink] dialog box. Enter the inspection routine name.

Beforehand, create the header information of the same measurement result by [Create MeasurLink
header] command.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of

Measurement Result]

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R) System]

[Create MeasurLink header for N-Parts]

Command( [Tool] Menu)
The command name and label name and tolerance information of statistic data is output to MeasurLink.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of

Measurement Result]

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R) System]

[Output MeasurLink data for N-Parts]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 92 of 93

Command( [Tool] Menu)

Output to the MeasurLink the statistic data of the measurement result of N-Parts Part Program.

Displays the [Send Data to MeasurLink] dialog box. Enter the inspection routine name.

Beforehand, create the header information of the same measurement result by [Create MeasurLink
header for N-Parts] command.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of

Measurement Result]

[Using Other Application] - [Outputting Statistic Data to MeasurLink(R) System]

[Displays EasyStat] Command( [Tool] Menu)

Displays the [EasyStat] Dialog Box. The result of EasyStat and the registered statistic data is displayed.

See Also

[Using EasyStat] - [Displaying EasyStat]

[Tool] Command( [Tool] Menu)

Create the nominal data file by Nominal Data Creation Utility.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Contour Tolerancing] - [Processing Contour Tolerance File] -

[Creating Nominal Data File]

[Search] Command( [Help] Menu)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
[New] Page 93 of 93

Displays the first page of Help. You can read the help page by clicking the index.

See Also

[Using Help]

[Tip of the day] Command( [Help] Menu)

The hint is displayed.

When the [Next Tip] button is clicked, the following hint is displayed.

When being start from next time, [Tip of the day] is not displayed when [Show Tips at startup] is non-
selected.

See Also

[About FORMPAK for Windows] Command

( [Help] Menu)
Displays the version and the Copyright.

Shortcut

Toolbar :

See Also

[Using Help]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhE194.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 1 of 55

Outline of ASLPAK
ASLPAK is an option program to be added onto the data processing program, FORMTRACEPAK series, of Mitutoyo Contour Measuring Machines.

The aspheric form analysis function will be added to the FORMTRACEPAK series main program by installing ASLPAK.

See Also

Adding ASLPAK option

To add ASLPAK options, go to [Add options] in the [Tool] menu.

How To:

1. Click on [Add options] in the [Tool] menu.

Displays the [Option adding and user ID registration] dialog box.

2. Checkmark the option to be added (ASLPAK in this case), and enter the user ID..

[Option adding and user ID registration] Dialog Box:

a. [Option] --- Checkmark the option to be added (ASLPAK in this case).

b. [User ID] --- Register the exclusive user ID to add ASLPAK.*1).

*1) To add ASLPAK option, an exclusive user ID is required.

See Also

Vertex/centering measurement by [Ball measurement]

The program moves the stylus to the vertex/center by fitting curved surface.

How To:

1. Click [Ball Measurement] command of the [Measurement] menu.

Or, click [Masterball measure] in the [Measurement] toolbox.

Displays the [Ball Meas.] dialog box.

2. Click the [Ball Meas.] button when the setting is done.

[Ball Meas.] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 2 of 55

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [Measuring method] Group
i. [3D-Measuring] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring.
ii. [Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring] --- Executes the pre-measuring by measuring the Y-axis direction and the X-axis direction.
Notice:
When [Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring] is selected, the program performs Z2-axis tracing measurement.

3D Measurement(Usually: 3 lines) Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring

c. [Aspheric] --- To define conditions based on the currently specified aspheric nominal data, click [Aspheric] button.

Displays the [Aspheric] dialog box.

d. [X1] --- Input the measurement length of X1-axis.

e. [Y] --- Input the measurement length of Y-axis.
f. [X1 = Y] --- Sets the Y-axis measurement length to the X1-axis measurement length.
g. [Measure at Max Speed] --- Sets the measurement speed to maximum.
h. [Perform Push Pull measurement] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring by the push pull measurement.
i. [Move to the Ball top after meas.] --- Moves to the top position of the measurement result after the pre-measuring.
j. [Check ball diameters] --- Judges the diameter of the measurement result after the pre-measuring.
k. [Diameter] --- Input the diameter for the judgment of the measurement result.
When the difference between the diameter of the measurement result and the diameter of the judging standard is the value within the range of +20% from -20%, the
diameter of the measurement result is OK.
Doesn't move to the top position, when the result is NG.
l. [Concave] --- Judges the measurement result as concave.
m. [Checking whether the top position is the range of measurement or not.] --- Judges whether the top position is within the range of the pre-measurement or not.
When the top position of the measurement result is within the rectangle range of X1-axis and Y-axis, the top position is OK.
Doesn't move to the top position, when the result is NG.

n. [Counter Reset] --- Sets the top position of the measurement result to Coordinate System Origin Point after the pre-measuring.
Select the coordinate system after the pre-measuring.
o. [Display measurement results] --- Displays the measurement result after the pre-measuring.
After the pre-measuring, displays [Results of the master ball meas.] dialog box in next figure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 3 of 55

p. [Escape Z2-axis] --- The Z2-axis escapes.

Input the escape length of Z2-axis.
q. [State of Stylus] Group
i. [Move with Height Held] --- Moves the stylus without changing the state.
ii. [Move after Raising] - -- Raises the stylus and moves.
iii. [Move Stylus with Holding at Midpoint] --- Holds the stylus at the middle position and moves.
iv. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis Position of the middle holding of the stylus.
r. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.
s. [Ball Meas.] --- Executes the Masterball Measurement.

[Aspheric] Dialog Box:

a. [Set Measurement Length by Aspheric nominal data] --- Check this box to define the measuring length based on the aspheric nominal data range.

b. [Ratio] --- Select this button to define the measuring length based on the percentage of the aspheric nominal data range.
Enter the percentage of the aspheric nominal data range.
The available values are 10 % to 200 %.

c. [Addition length] --- Select this button to specify the adding length to the aspheric nominal data range.
Specify the adding length to the aspheric nominal data range.
The negative number can be specified, but it has to be within 10 % to 200 % in percentage calculation.

d. [Set Measurement Speed and Pitch by Aspheric nominal data] --- Check this box to define the measurement pitch and the measuring speed automatically based on
the aspheric nominal data range.

e. [Check asperity by Aspheric nominal data] --- Check this box to check for the unevenness of the work according to that of aspheric nominal data.

Notice:

In the case of your measuring instrument model, this button might not be able to be used.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Using CNC Functions] - [Measuring Master Ball]

Leveling measurement by aspheric measurement

The program performs leveling by aspheric surface (or 2D curved surface) best fit and moves the stylus to the vertex/center.

How To:

1. Click on the [Aspheric Meas.] command in the [Measure] menu.

Displays the [Asphric measure] dialog box.

2. Click the [Asphric measure] button when the setting is done.

[Asphric measure] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 4 of 55

a. [Label Name] --- Enter the label name displayed in Part Program tree.
b. [Use Aspheric Nominal Data and Bestfit Conditions] --- To use the aspheric nominal value and the best-fit condition, select the check box of [Uses Aspheric
Nominal Data and Bestfit Conditions]. If this check box is deselected, a 2D curved surface is used for fitting
If an aspheric nominal value is not used, the program performs bestfit of a 2D curved surface.
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]
c. [Measuring method] Group
i. [3D-Measuring] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring.
ii. [Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring] --- Executes the pre-measuring by measuring the Y-axis direction and the X-axis direction.
Notice:
When [Y-dir. and X-dir. Measuring] is selected, the program performs Z2-axis tracing measurement.

d. [Aspheric] --- To define conditions based on the currently specified aspheric nominal data, click [Aspheric] button.

Displays the [Aspheric] dialog box.

e. [X1] --- Input the measurement length of X1-axis.

f. [Y] --- Input the measurement length of Y-axis.
g. [X1 = Y] --- Sets the Y-axis measurement length to the X1-axis measurement length.
h. [Measure at Max Speed] --- Sets the measurement speed to maximum.
i. [Auto Define Y-Condition] --- The condition of Y-Direction is decided automatically.
j. [Number of Profiles] --- Specify the number of profiles.
k. [Start Position Centering] --- To locate the measurement start point at the center of the measuring range, select the [Start Position Centering] check box.
l. [Meas. Circular area] --- To specify a circle for the measuring range, select the [Meas. Circular area] check box.
m. [Perform Push Pull measurement] --- Executes the 3D pre-measuring by the push pull measurement.
n. [Perform Auto-return] --- Returns after the pre-measuring.
o. [Speed] --- Changes the movement speed.
p. [Move to Top, after meas.] --- To move the stylus to the vertex after measurement, select the [Move to Top, after meas.] check box.
q. [Consider X-Y pos error] --- Considers the error (X1-axis) of Return Position caused by Leveling.
r. [Check top position] --- Judges whether the top position is within the range of the pre-measurement or not.
When the top position of the measurement result is within the rectangle range of X1-axis and Y-axis, the top position is OK.
Doesn't move to the top position, when the result is NG.

s. [Escape Z2-axis] --- The Z2-axis escapes.

Input the escape length of Z2-axis.
t. [State of Stylus] Group
i. [Move with Height Held] --- Moves the stylus without changing the state.
ii. [Move after Raising] - -- Raises the stylus and moves.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 5 of 55

iii. [Move Stylus with Hold at Midpoint] --- Holds the stylus at the middle position and moves.
iv. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis Position of the middle holding of the stylus.
u. [Perform Auto-leveling] --- Executes the leveling by using the inclination of workpiece calculated by the pre-measuring.
v. [Display measurement results] --- Displays the measurement result after the pre-measuring.
After the pre-measuring, displays [Aspheric Meas.] dialog box in next figure.

w. [State of Stylus] Group

i. [Leveling with Height Held] --- Leveling without the stylus changing the state.
ii. [Leveling after Raising] - -- Raises the stylus and leveling.
iii. [Leveling with Hold at Midpoint] --- Holds the stylus at the middle position and leveling.
iv. [Z1-axis Pos.] --- Input the Z1-axis Position of the middle holding of the stylus.
x. [Register in Part Program] --- Registers in Part Program.
y. [Aspheric measure] --- Executes the Aspheric Measurement.

[Aspheric] Dialog Box:

a. [Set Measurement Length by Aspheric nominal data] --- Check this box to define the measuring length based on the aspheric nominal data range.

b. [Ratio] --- Select this button to define the measuring length based on the percentage of the aspheric nominal data range.
Enter the percentage of the aspheric nominal data range.
The available values are 10 % to 200 %.

c. [Addition length] --- Select this button to specify the adding length to the aspheric nominal data range.
Specify the adding length to the aspheric nominal data range.
The negative number can be specified, but it has to be within 10 % to 200 % in percentage calculation.

d. [Set Measurement Speed and Pitch by Aspheric nominal data] --- Check this box to define the measurement pitch and the measuring speed automatically based on
the aspheric nominal data range.

e. [Check asperity by Aspheric nominal data] --- Check this box to check for the unevenness of the work according to that of aspheric nominal data.

Tip:

Use the [Leveling] command in the [Measurement] menu, when leveling on a flat surface such as on the flange section.

Please refer to [Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing 3D Measurement Condition of Contour Measurement Condition]

Moves to start position of aspheric surface workpiece

The program moves the stylus to the start position of aspheric surface workpiece, taking into account the arc error of the arm.

How To:

1. Click the [Move to Start Pos. of Asp Surface of Workpiece] in the [Measurement] menu.
Displays the [Move to Start position on Aspheric Work] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 6 of 55

2. Click the [Move Start] when the setting is done.

3. A dialog to check for the movement will be displayed.

4. Click the [OK] to start moving to the start position of aspheric surface workpiece.

[Move to Start position on Aspheric Work] Dialog Box:

a. [Ratio] --- Select this button to define the measuring length based on the percentage of the aspheric nominal data range.
Enter the percentage of the aspheric nominal data range.
The available values are 10 % to 200 %.
b. [Add length] --- Select this button to specify the adding length to the aspheric nominal data range.
Specify the adding length to the aspheric nominal data range.
The negative number can be specified, but it has to be within 10 % to 200 % in percentage calculation.
c. [Z-range Option] --- Set the Z-range option.
To measure so that the arm contacts equally on upper and lower side, select the "Z = 0.0 center, equal on top and bottom" radio button.
To measure in the full range of the Z1-range, select the "Upper limit (or Lower limit)" radio button.
d. [Registers in Part Program] --- To register in the Part Program, check this box..

Tip:

The calculation is processed assuming that the stylus tip locates on the optical axis of the aspheric workpiece when the arm comes to horizontal position.

Notice:

This menu is valid when vertex/centering is done after ball measurement.

See Also

Measurement to obtain measured data

Measurement to obtain measured data.

How To:

1. Click the [Meas Start] to start measuring.

Tip:

Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [Setting the Measuring Conditions] - [Setting the condition of an aspheric nominal values for

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 7 of 55

measuring] for detailed information about measurement conditions.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [Setting the Measuring Conditions] - [Setting the condition of an aspheric nominal values for measuring]

Setting the condition of an aspheric nominal values for measuring

Setting the condition of an aspheric nominal values for measuring.

How To:

1. Click the [Contour Measurement] command in the [Measurement] menu.

2. Click on the [Set Meas. Condition...] command in the [Setup] menu.

Or, click [MeasSet] button in the [Measurement/Procedure Bar] bar.

The [Meas Condition] dialog box will be displayed.

3. Click the [Aspheric nominal data] tab in the [Meas Condition] dialog box.

[Aspheric nominal data] tab in the [Meas Condition] Dialog Box:

a. Check the [Auto-define meas length from Aspheric Nominal Data] box to define the measuring length automatically referring to the aspheric nominal data.
i. [Ratio] --- Specify the measuring length in percentage of the aspheric nominal data range.
Available values are 10 to 200 %.

ii. [Adding length] --- Specify the adding length to the aspheric nominal data range.
The negative number can be specified, but it has to be within 10 % to 200 % in percentage calculation.

b. Check the [Auto-define meas. pitch/speed from Aspheric Nominal Data] box to define the measuring pitch and measuring speed automatically referring to the
aspheric nominal data.
c. To use the aspheric nominal data when operating 3D measurement, check the [Use Aspheric Nominal Data for 3D Meas Analysis] box.

Tip:

To set the aspheric nominal values, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]
Please refer to [Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] for setting the measuring conditions other than the
aspheric-related items.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 8 of 55

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition]

Specifying aspheric nominal values

The aspheric nominal data currently being specified is displayed on top of the Part Program window.

These nominal values will be referred in subsequent measurement or calculation.

Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value] for how to specify the aspheric nominal values.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

Shifting measured data by best fit

Perform best fit calculation between the aspheric nominal value and a measured data, then shift the measured data following the procedure below.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Meas. point shift by bestfit] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Select the button of [Specification] toolbox to set the calculation target range of the best fit.
If [All Data Specification] button is selected, all measurement points are included in the best-fit calculation range.
4. Set a best-fit calculation method in the Calculation (Best-fit) dialog box.
5. Set the Robust conditions in [Robust] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
6. Measurement Results --- X-axis direction displacement, Z-axis direction displacement, and rotation angle are obtained.

[Bestfit] tab in the [Edits Measured Points] Dialog Box:

a. [Bestfit Parameters]
i. [No. of iteration] --- The maximum number of repeating times for performing best-fit calculation to obtain a part coordinates position and angle so as to further
reduce a residual error.
This value is the maximum number of repeating times. Therefore, if the following conditions are met during the best-fit calculation, calculation is terminated even
if the number of times is less than the maximum one.
1.Current residual error < Last residual error * EPS
2.Current residual error - Last residual error|< Last residual error * EPS
where EPS = 10-10

ii. [Parameter] --- The program obtains the optimal position of a part coordinate system according to the parameters specified in combination with arbitrary
coordinates from the following three.
X: Translates a part coordinate system in the X-axis direction.
Z: Translates a part coordinate system in the Z-axis direction.
A: Rotates a part coordinate system around the origin.
R: Optimizes the radius simultaneously.

b. [Bestfit evaluation function] --- By changing parameters, select the minimum values.
Minimum distance: Make minimum of the sum of squares of minimum distance between aspheric nominal value and meas point.
Z-direction distance: Make minimum of the sum of squares of distance in Z-direction between aspheric nominal value and meas point.
PV Value: Make minimum of the maximum error between the aspheric nominal value and meas point.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 9 of 55

c. [Bestfit Evaluation Zone] --- pecify the valid zone for the best-fit calculation in percentage based on the design radius. The data points for the best-fit calculation are
inside of the zone center on the optic axis. All data points are used for the best-fit calculation, when set 100%. Set an evaluation range so as not to exceed the effective
diameter specified for aspheric nominal values.
d. [Detail Setup] --- Best-fitting Control
Where, the allowable deviation is equal to the inverse of the data weight.
Wight = 1.0 / deviation
The acceptable value for “radius basis range” is 0.1-100.0%, and the acceptable value for “allowable deviation” is 0.0-100000.0.
When the value 0.0 as the allowable value is set, the corresponding data points are dropped form the best-fit calculation.

How To:

1. Coordinate System Translation with X and Z Parameters.

2. Coordinate System Rotation with A Parameter.

[Robust] tab in the [Edits Measured Points] Dialog Box:

a. [Robust] --- When the [Robust Estimate] box is checked, each confidence level of the data points is automatically estimated by M-estimators based on Tukey's
biweight. Then influence by the abnormal poits, such as spike noises, contained in the measured data will be reduced by best-fit calculation.
b. [Set Tolerance] --- When the [Set Tolerance] box is checked, the threshold level to exclude abnormal points can be set based on M-estimators. The upper and the lower
limit of the given aspheric nominal data shall be set as the threshold level. The measured data points which are out of the limits will be considered as abnormal points,
and they will be excluded from best-fit calculation.

Notice:

The Robust Estimate function may not be available depending on your selected options.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 10 of 55

See Also

Error calculation referring to aspheric nominal values

Obtain an error between a measurement data and the aspheric nominal value according to the procedure below.
After calculation, the measured points are displayed with error correction reflected.

How To:

1. Click [Edits Measured Points] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.

2. Click [Error cal. referring to nominal value] button of [Edits Measured Points] toolbox.
3. Click [All Data Specification] button of [Specification] toolbox.
4. Set an error calculation method in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
5. Set the behavior of the measured points after error calculation in [Measured Data] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.
6. Measurement Results --- The sum of squares of residual errors, maximum error, and minimum error are obtained.

[Calculation Option] tab in the [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Error calculation method]Group

i. [Minimum distance] --- The minimum distances from each measurement point to the nominal value are assumed as the error components.
The components are developed as the circumference length for the nominal value.

ii. [Z-dir difference value] --- The Z-direction distances from each measurement point to the nominal value are assumed as the error components.
The X-axis position of each component will not change even after development.

b. [Move to the Peak/Valley to the Origin] --- After error reflection, the Z-coordinate of the point of which X-coordinate is "0.0" will be shifted to "0.0" automatically.

[Measured Data] tab in the [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Measured Data Processing]Group

i. [Overwrite Exist Contour] --- Overwrite the existing measured points..

ii. [Addition as a New Contour] --- Add the measured points as new profile, not making changes to the existing points.
The set of measured points added by executing the [Error Calculation] command will be displayed in the [Data Edit] tab.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 11 of 55

Tip:

Before executing the [Error Calculation], execute the [Shift meas point] command to position the nominal value and the measured point.
When referring to the optimized value ([ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating an aspheric optimal value]), refer to the
optimized value again and execute [Shift meas point] command.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating an aspheric optimal value]

Calculating an aspheric optimal value

Obtain such a value that further reduces an error between a measurement point and the aspheric nominal value by changing parameters of the nominal value.

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.Select

2. Click [spheric optimal value cal.] button of [Extensions] toolbox.
3. Select the button of [Specification] toolbox to set the calculation target range of an aspheric optimal value.
If [All Data Specification] is selected, all measurement points are included in the aspheric optimal value calculation range.
4. Select optimized calculation targets (Optimizing target) in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

[Calculation Option] tab in the [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Optimizing target] --- Radius (Curvature) and/or Conic Curve Constant can be selected as optimized calculation targets.

b. [Setting Calculation Range]Group

i. [Refer to Aspheric Data] --- When specifying [All Data Specification] for the calculation range, the range can be specified by percentage of the
aspheric nominal data.

Also, best-fit setup can be performed on the Bestfit tag page.

Measurement point will not be moved. Moving parameters will add to optimizing target.

5. Measurement Results --- A radius, curvature, the sum of squares of residual errors, maximum error, and minimum error are obtained. If best-fitting is specified, an X-
direction displacement, Z-direction displacement, and a rotation angle are also obtained.
(Unless the radius, curvature, and conic curve constant are selected as optimized calculation targets, the original nominal value is displayed.)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 12 of 55

6. Reference of a Calculated Optimal Value --- It is possible to reference a result obtained by the [Aspheric Optimal Value Cal.] command as aspheric nominal data when
using the [Meas. data shift by bestfit] or [Error Calculation] command.
Select the [Uses optimized Value] check box in [Aspheric nominal data] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

[Aspheric nominal data] tab in the [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [Use optimized Value] --- If multiple [Aspheric Optimal Value Cal.] commands exist in the procedure, reference the result calculated most recently by using the
[Aspheric Optimal Value Cal.] command.

See Also

Calculating an aspheric pseudo roughness parameter

Obtain some values from an error between a measurement point and the aspheric nominal value according to the procedure below.

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [Aspheric pseudo roughness parameter calculation] button of [Extensions] toolbox.
3. Select the button of [Specification] toolbox to set the calculation target range of pseudo roughness parameters.
If [All Data Specification] is selected, all measurement points are included in the aspheric optimal value calculation range.
4. Select the calculation items in [Display] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

[Display] tab in the [Calculation] Dialog Box:

a. [ARa] --- Arithmetic mean of the absolute values of errors (corresponding to roughness parameter Ra)
ARa = 1/nΣ| Zi |
b. [ARt] --- Height between the maximum and minimum values of errors (corresponding to roughness parameter Rz)
ARｔ = |max(Zi)| + |min(Zi)|
c. [AFig] --- Z value of an error curve at X = 0.0
d. [AXp] --- X-direction distance from Z-direction peak point (maximum value of errors) to X = 0.0
e. [AXv] --- X-direction distance from Z-direction bottom point (minimum value of errors) to X = 0.0
f. [AXt] --- X-direction distance from the first measurement point to X = 0.0
g. [ASmx] --- Maximum slope
max{tan-1((Zi+1-Zi)/(Xi+1-Xi))}、i = 1 ~ n-1(unit of angle)
h. [ASmn] --- Arithmetic mean slope
Σtan-1{(Zi+1-Zi)/(Xi+1-Xi)}/n、(unit of angle)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 13 of 55

i. [Atilt] --- Rotation angle under best-fitting

where Zi is a value of error (i = 0 ~ n-1), and Xi is X value of each Zi.
j. [RMS] --- Root Meas Squre
RMS = √(1/n∑Zi2)
k. [R Ratio] --- Best fit R ratio to Nominal value R(%)*1)
R Ratio = Best fit R / Nominal value R * 100.0
l. [Curvature Error] --- The value obtained by the following formulas. *1)
Curvature Error = (Best fit R - Nominal value R) / ((2.0*Nominal value R / Effective diameter)2 *550*10-6)

Notice:

Mean line compensation will not be performed.

*1) Calculation will be executed when the optimal radius is calculated by the [Aspheric Optimal Value Cal.] command, or "R" is specified in the parameter by the [Meas. data
shift by bestfit] command.

See Also

Calculating aspheric accuracy evaluate value/F', A', S'

Obtain aspheric accuracy evaluate value/F', A', S' from error calculation referring to aspheric nominal data.

How To:

1. Click [Extensions] button of [Calculation] toolbox.

Displays the [Extensions] toolbox.

2. Click [aspheric accuracy evaluate value/F', A', S' calculatio] button of [Extensions] toolbox.

3. Select [All Data Specification] so as to calculate aspheric pseudo roughness parameter for all the measured data.

4. Set a calculation method in [Calculation Option] tab of Calculation Dialog Box.

5. Measurement Results --- Each value for the aspheric accuracy evaluate value/F', A', S' is obtained.

[Calculation Option] tab in the [Calculation] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 14 of 55

a. [Calculation target]Group
i. [Whole] --- Calculates from left to right within the calculation range.

ii. [Tums at center and mean] --- Averages the points which position in a same distance from X=0.0, and calculate from X=0.0 toward both ends.

b. [Number of splits]・・・ A number to divide the points in the specified calculation range.
Available values are 10 to 500 points.
Dividing error reflected data is calculated by processing constant pitch.
Enter a even number. (Odd numbers are not available.)

Tip:

The split number + 1 is calculated from the error reflected data by constant pitch calculation. The data of each point is F i.
where, i=0, 1, 2

F’ = |Fi|Max with its sign attached

Ai = Fi+1 – Fi
A’ = |Ai| Max with its sign attached
Si = Ai+1 – Ai
S’ = |Si| Max with its sign attached

See Also

Setting the default values

Setting the default values.

How To:

1. Click [Set Aspheric Analisis Conditions...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Displays the [Aspheric Analysis settings] dialog box.

2. About values set here

The aspheric nominal values set here will be reflected when newly creating a part program.
(Reflection will be executed by the [New] command in the [File] menu.)
The settings other than aspheric nominal values will be reflected when a relevant command is executed next.

[Aspheric Analysis settings] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 15 of 55

a. [Aspheric Analysis Condition Settings] --- Click on the items in the tree displayed on top left of the [Aspheric Analysis settings] dialog to show each setting dialog.
The default values contained in the calculation dialog box shall be set in this dialog.

Tip:

[Setup]-[Output Item setting] - When the [Display calculation dialog box] is checked in the [Disp Measurement Result Output Setup] dialog box, the calculation dialog box
will be displayed every time calculation is executed.
Please refer to [Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of Measurement Result].

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Changing Default Condition of Calculation] - [Changing Output Condition of Measurement Result]

Aspheric surface best fit

Perform best-fit calculation between the aspheric nominal value and a measurement point, then shift the measurement point using the following procedure.

How To:

1. Click [Set Aspheric Surface Best-fitting] command of the [Set] menu.

Displays the [Aspheric Bestfit Condition Setup] dialog box.

[Aspheric Bestfit Condition Setup] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 16 of 55

a. [Bestfit Evaluation Zone]Group --- Specify the valid zone for the best-fit calculation in percentage based on the aspheric nominal radius. The data points for the best-
fit calculation are inside of the zone center on the optical axis.
The measurement points which exceed the above range will be out of target.

i. [Detail setup] --- Check the [Detail setup] box, and then the allowable deviation for best-fitting is possible.
The best-fit calculation is done under the condition of the data points are within the allowable deviation range.
Averages the points which position in a same distance from X=0.0, and calculate from X=0.0 toward both ends.
Where, the allowable deviation is equal to the inverse of the data weight.
Weight = 1.0 /Deviation
The acceptable value for “radius basis range” is 0.1-100.0%, and the acceptable value for “allowable deviation” is 0.0-100000.0.
When the value 0.0 as the allowable value is set, the corresponding data points are dropped form the best-fit calculation.
ii. [Robust Estimate] --- Each confidence level of the data points is automatically estimated by M-estimators based on Tukey's biweight. Then influence by the
abnormal poits, such as spike noises, contained in the measured data will be reduced by best-fit calculation.
iii. [Set Tolerance] --- i. When the [Set Tolerance] box is checked, the threshold level to exclude abnormal points can be set based on M-estimators.
The upper and the lower limit of the given aspheric nominal data shall be set as the threshold level. The measured data points which are out of the limits will be
considered as abnormal points, and they will be excluded from best-fit calculation.

b. [Bestfit Control]Group
i. [Max. Iteration Count] --- The maximum number of repeating times for performing best-fit calculation to obtain a part coordinate position and angle so as to
further reduce a residual error.
ii. [Allow all control parameters] --- The program translates a part coordinate system for all X, Y, and Z axes and rotates the system around each axis.
iii. [Specify control parameters] --- The program translates and rotates a part coordinate system separately for the X, Y, or Z axis as follows.
iv. [Delta X] --- Translates a coordinate system in the X-axis direction.
v. [Delta Y] --- Translates a coordinate system in the Y-axis direction.
vi. [Delta Z] --- Translates a coordinate system in the Z-axis direction.
vii. [Delta Alpha] --- Rotates a coordinate system around the X axis.
viii. [Delta Beta] --- Rotates a coordinate system around the Y axis.
ix. [Delta Gamma] --- Rotates a coordinate system around the Z axis.
x. [R] --- Optimizes the Radius R.

Notice:

The Robust Estimate function may not be available depending on your selected options.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 17 of 55

See Also

Aspheric shape analysis

The program obtains errors between each measurement point and the aspheric nominal value after bestfit and displays the errors in different colors depending on the quantity.

Error calculation method:

How To:

1. An error calculation method can be selected from among the following.

Minimum Distance Direction: The minimum distance from each measurement point to the nominal value after best-fitting is assumed as the quantity of error.
Z-axis Direction: The Z-axis distance from each measurement point to the nominal value after best-fitting is assumed as the quantity of error
The default setting is Minimum Distance Direction.
From the pop-up menu that appears by right-clicking on graphics, select [Error Calculation Direction] – [Minimum Distance Direction] or [Z-axis Direction].

Error display:

How To:

1. Obtained errors are displayed in different colors depending on the quantity of error. At the default setting the program performs color-coding display on the design
surface contour depending on each quantity of errors. However, according to the menu selection, it is possible to perform spread-out display with the Z axis being set
for error calculation direction.
To perform spread-out display, select the [Error Spread-out Display] menu from the pop-up menu that appears by right-clicking on graphics. If spread-out display is
performed, a check mark is applied to the menu.

See Also

Constant pitch data output

The program calculates the constant pitch of the measured data, and outputs in the text file.

How To:

1. Click [Export] command of the [File] menu.

Displays the [Fixed Pitch Condition] dialog box.

2. Set the conditions in the [Fixed Pitch Condition] dialog box, and click the [OK] button. As setting method, either [Data Number Setup] or [Data Pitch Setup] can be
selected.
3. Enter a destination file name for storing data, and click [Save] button.
4. Also, options for CSV file format can be set in the following procedure.
5. Click [csv format] command of the [File] menu.
Displays the [csv format] dialog box.

[Fixed Pitch Condition] Dialog Box : Data Number Setup

Executes pitch calculation by specifying X-direction data number and Y-direction data number.

a. [Number of data] --- Enter the number of data points in each X- and Y-direction.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 18 of 55

[Fixed Pitch Condition] Dialog Box : Data Pitch Setup

Executes pitch calculation by specifying pitch in each X- and Y-direction.

a. [Base Point Pitch] --- Enter the coordinate of the reference point and pitch in each X- and Y-direction.
The calculating point is obtained per pitch from the specified reference point in both positive and negative direction of each Y- and X-axis, as reference point
coordinate .
b. [Range of fixed pitch calculation] --- Specify the range for calculating constant pitch.
Auto-setting: Automatically sets all data to be included in the calculation range.
Arbitrary setting: The calculation range can be set arbitrarily.

[csv format] Dialog Box:

Options for CSV file format can be set in the following procedure.

a. [Accordance with Unit Setup] --- Outputs the numbers following the unit setting.
To output numbers as it is, deselect this check box.
b. [Accordance with Local Property] --- Outputs the CSV file using the symbols specified in the Regional Settings. To output numbers using ". (period)" as decimal
point, and ", (comma)" as digit grouping separator, deselect this check box.
c. [Check CSV file Format Each Time] --- This dialog box will be displayed every time CSV file is output..

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 19 of 55

The following is an example of a text file output.

See Also

Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 20 of 55

The aspheric nominal data currently being specified is displayed on top of the Part Program window.
When referring to the nominal values in the measurement or calculation, these values are referred.

How To:

1. Select the [Aspheric Nominal Data] in the Part Program window.

2. Click on the [Change Part Program...] command in the [Edit] - [Edit Part Program] menu.
Or, click on the [Change Part Program...] command in the selected Part Program (Aspheric Nominal Data) pop-up menu.
3. The [Aspheric Nominal Data Settings] dialog box is displayed.
4.
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Direct Entry of Each Parameter]
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying by File Name]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Direct Entry of Each Parameter]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying by File Name]

Direct Entry of Each Parameter

This method is to specify an aspheric nominal value by entering its various parameters directly.

How To:

1. Display the [Aspheric Nominal Data Settings] dialog box.

Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]
2. Click [Input Numeric Value]

[Aspheric Nominal Data Settings] Dialog Box:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 21 of 55

a. [Input Numeric Value] --- To specify an aspheric nominal value through direct entry of each parameter.
b. [Clear all] --- To clear all the compensation items.
c. [+ / - all] --- To invert the sign of all the compensation terms.
d. [Save to File] --- To save the aspheric nominal data input in the [Aspheric Nominal Data Settings] dialog box.
e. [Read from File] --- To read individual parameters from the existing aspheric nominal data file.
The [Open Aspheric Nominal Data File] dialog box will appear and displays the content of the file.

[Open Aspheric Nominal Data File] Dialog Box:

Notice:

If the [Aspheric Nominal Data Settings] button is clicked in the Calculation dialog box (Aspheric Nominal Data tag page) that appears when each command is executed, it is
possible to change the aspheric nominal data there.

Tip:

File format of Aspheric nominal data can be defined by user. Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Customizing the File Format] for detail.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 22 of 55

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Customizing the File Format]

Specifying by File Name

This method is to specify an aspheric nominal value by entering a file name.

How To:

1. Display the [Aspheric Nominal Data Settings] dialog box.

Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]
2. Click [Specify by file name]
To specify the aspheric nominal value by entering a file name.
When specifying by a file name ASLPAK does not store the parameter settings of the aspheric nominal data, but stores only the file name.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

File Format
The file format of the aspheric nominal data files are text files, those of extensions are "AS2".

The following table lists the AS2 file format.

The following shows an example of .AS2 file.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 23 of 55

For detailed information about an aspheric surface design formula, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Expression of an Aspheric Surface Contour] - [Aspheric Surface
Contour and K/K+1 Mode]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Expression of an Aspheric Surface Contour] - [Aspheric Surface Contour and K/K+1 Mode]

Customizing the File Format

If aspheric nominal values are saved in the csv (comma separated value) format with spreadsheet software, those can be read anytime as nominal values.
If this is the case, specify which nominal values exist in which file in a directory by using a template file. If a template file is customized according to the environment of a
customer who uses this software, it is possible to input and output nominal values in the customized format.
The sample of a template file is AspTemplate_jp.csv in the Template folder under the Formtracepak-installed folder. (The sample directory is normally C:\Program
Files\MitutoyoApp\Formtracepak\Template\AspTemplate.csv.)
After opening the sample template file with your spreadsheet software, customize the template file according to your environment and save it in an appropriate folder. Specify
the saved template file with the [Open Asp Design Data] dialog.

The contents of the sample template file are explained below.

1. The rows in which the character string of column A data starts with # are comment rows. Therefore, SKIP, C, and RRef will not be specified.

2. The first column (column A) includes a keyword indicating a value to be designated. A keyword is an alphanumeric character string and not case-sensitive.

3. The second column (column B) includes an item name. The item for which an item name has been designated is given data from the nominal data file.

4. The third column (column C) includes a fixed value designated from the nominal data file. The value in this column is validated if the second column is blank. CR (a
keyword indicating whether the items in the nominal data file are arranged in columns or rows) must always be a fixed item.

5. Since the contents in the fourth column (column D) or later are excluded from read data, it does not matter what is written in the column.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 24 of 55

In the above template file the nominal value data is arranged in columns as shown below.

The following is the [Open Aspheric Nominal Data File] dialog that appears when the CSV file is opened.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 25 of 55

[Open Aspheric Nominal Data File] Dialog Box:

a. [Including item name] --- Specifies whether the cell indicated with the following start row and start column includes an item name. If this check box is deselected, the
start cell position is default- set to the beginning of the nominal value data.
i. [Start Row] --- Specifies the row of a start cell.
ii. [Start column] --- Specifies the column of a start cell.

b. [Browse] --- Click on the [Browse] button to specify a template file for which the line-up of design data is displayed.
c. [Open] --- Click on the [Open] button to load these data as nominal values.

See Also

Aspheric Surface Contour and K/K+1 Mode

An aspheric surface contour can be given by the following general formula.

K mode

K+1 mode

(1)Basic contour of an aspheric surface

(2)Aspheric correction term

Parameter entry items

R: Radius, C: Curvature
R<0, C<0 Convex type aspheric surface contour
R=INF, C =0 No term (1)
R>0, C>0 Concave type aspheric surface contour
K:Conic constant
Ai:Polynomial expression of each order where Ai is adaptable to [i = 1 to 20].

There are two expression methods in which the conic curve constant at the denominator of a formula expressing an aspheric surface contour is assumed as “K”, or “K+1”. The
former is referred to as the K mode and the latter is as the K+1 mode.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 26 of 55

See Also

Expression of a Conic Curve

The following express a conic curve with standard formulas.

In the above standard formulas the coordinate system is translated so that the H axis comes into contact with each graphic. After translation of the coordinate system formulas
1 to 4 are given by the following.

The above ± sign in X ± r and X ± b depends on which side of a conic curve the target data exists on (the right hand side or left hand side).

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 27 of 55

The sign of C is in the same sequence as that of the composition of X ± r or X ± b in formulas 1a to 4a.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 28 of 55

See Also

About Aspheric Surface Contour Orientations

If an aspheric surface contour is to be created, it is provided that a radius be entered under the condition of R (radius) > 0 for plane A and R < 0 for plane B according to the
custom.
If an aspheric surface contour is created for planes A and B based on this premise, each contour will be in the following state.

However, both surface contours on Surface A and Surface B are assumed as shown below according to each data.

In this case, the orientation of measurement data on Surface A is not consistent with that of the nominal data.
To make both orientations of measurement data and nominal data consistent for the later measurement and analysis by ASLPAK, invert the sign of aspheric nominal values of
"Radius/Curvature" and "Correction term"s.

Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Apheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

Aspheric Basic Program Creation

ASLPAK is equipped with a function to create aspheric analysis specific measurement procedure.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 29 of 55

The measurement procedure is referred to as "Part Program" or simply "Program".

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. Set the following items.

click on the [Aspheric Data]

click on the [Move to Work Top]
click on the [Z1-axis auto-set]
click on the [Peak / Valley Detect]
click on the [Leveling]
click on the [Peak / Valley Detect]
click on the [Move to Meas Start Position]
click on the [Measurement]
click on the [Filter]
click on the [Bestfit]
click on the [Design R Analysis]
click on the [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter]
click on the [Bestfit R Analysis]
click on the [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter]
click on the [F',A',S']
click on the [File Output]
click on the [Print]
click on the [Escape]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 30 of 55

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Aspheric Data (Aspheric nominal values)]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Move to Work Top]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Z1-axis auto-set]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Peak/Valley Detect (Vertex/centering measurement)]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Leveling]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Vertex/centering measurement]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Moving to the measuring start position]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Measurement]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Filter]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Bestfit (Shifting measurement data by bestfit)]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 31 of 55

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Design-R Analysis]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Bestfit-R Analysis]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Aspheric accuracy evaluate value/F', A', S']

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [File Output]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Print]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Escape]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

Aspheric Data (Aspheric nominal values)

Input aspheric nominal values.
The aspheric nominal values specified in this page are used in various calculations, such as leveling, measuring length, or travel length to the Start Pos.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Aspheric Data]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 32 of 55

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For details about how to input the nominal values, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

Tip:

When any of the nominal value is changed, it may affect the other items settings. Therefore, it is required to fix the aspheric nominal values first, and then set the following
items.
Or, make sure that all the settings are adequate after making changes to the aspheric nominal values.
The aspheric nominal data is registered on top of the Part Program window as [Aspheric Data].

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

Move to Work Top

Move the stylus to near the vertex of the work with [Move] command.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 33 of 55

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Move to Work Top]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For details about how to input the nominal values, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Nominal Value] - [Specifying Aspheric Nominal Value]

Tip:

The [Move] command is enabled for 3-axis simultaneous control. The stylus movement can be divided into two-sets, depending on the work setting or jig conditions.
The vertex/centering measurement and the leveling measurement is operated subsequently, therefore precise positioning to the vertex is not necessary at this moment.

For the details about settings, Please refer to [Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement Command]

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement Command]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 34 of 55

Z1-axis auto-set
Contact the stylus to the work with [Move (single axis)] command.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Z1-axis auto-set]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement(1-axis) Command]

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 35 of 55

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement(1-axis) Command]

Peak / Valley Detect (Vertex/centering measurement)

Perform vertex/centering measurement with [Ball Meas.] command.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Peak / Valley Detect]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [Vertex/centering measurement by [Ball measurement]]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 36 of 55

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [Vertex/centering measurement by [Ball measurement]]

Leveling
Perform leveling measurement with [Aspheric Meas.] or [Plane Meas.] command.
Normally, perform a leveling by aspheric measurement.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Leveling]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box : Aspheric Meas.

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [Procedures from Workpiece Setting to Measurement] - [Leveling

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 37 of 55

measurement by aspheric measurement]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box : Plane Meas.

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

Use the [Plane Meas.] command, when leveling on a flat surface such as on the neighboring flange section, not using an aspheric work.

For the details about settings, Please refer to [Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

Tip:

Leveling is not required here if leveling is done using a specialized jig.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [Procedures from Workpiece Setting to Measurement] - [Leveling measurement by aspheric measurement]

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

Peak / Valley Detect (Vertex/centering measurement)

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 38 of 55

After a leveling measurement, the work position will be shifted. Perform again a leveling by Ball Measurement.

Tip:

When leveling measurement is not performed, the second vertex/centering measurement is not required.

See Also

Moving to the measuring start position

The displacement of the stylus, at the time of executing [Move (single axis)] command, from a vertex/centering position (optical axis pos.) of the aspheric work to the
measuring start position is displayed.
This value cannot be changed, since the displacement is calculated based on the measuring length, arm length, stylus, or others.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Move to Meas Start Position]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 39 of 55

Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.

Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

The [Escape Z2- axis] is set in the case of using deeply concaved works and if it remains possible that the stylus may collide with the work when moving the X1-axis with the
stylus raised.

Tip:

Three displayed values will each have "Move (single axis)" command in the course of the Part Program.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

Measurement
Set the conditions of the [Measure] command, which obtains measured data.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Measurement]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 40 of 55

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [Setting the Measuring Conditions] - [Setting the condition of an
aspheric nominal values for measuring]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [Setting the Measuring Conditions] - [Setting the condition of an aspheric nominal values for measuring]

Filter
Filter the obtained measured data with the [Filter] command.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 41 of 55

2. click on the [Filter]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

Notice:

Filtering, as its characteristics, may deform the measured data.

Tip:

By error calculation, vertical magnification will be enlarged. It may show up the distortion in the same magnification. In such cases, select the [Just after the Error
Calculation] in the [Exec Position].

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

Bestfit (Shifting measurement data by bestfit)

Shift the measured data by aspheric bestfit with the [Bestfit] command.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 42 of 55

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Bestfit]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Shifting measured data by best fit]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Shifting measured data by best fit]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 43 of 55

Design-R Analysis
Perform error calculation of the measured data referring to the aspheric nominal value, with the [Error cal. referring to aspheric nominal value] command.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Design R Analysis]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Error calculation referring to aspheric nominal
values]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 44 of 55

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Error calculation referring to aspheric nominal values]

Aspheric Pseudo Parameter

Obtain aspheric pseudo roughness parameters from the error curve generated based on aspheric nominal value and the measured point, with the [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter]
command.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating an aspheric pseudo roughness
parameter]

Notice:

The [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter] may not be added to the Part Program in the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] depending on the options you purchased.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 45 of 55

In such cases, this item will not be displayed.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating an aspheric pseudo roughness parameter]

Bestfit-R Analysis
Calculate errors between the optimized aspheric nominal vales and the measured data.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Bestfit R Analysis]

3. Obtain the optimal aspheric nominal value with the [Calculate aspheric optimal value] command.

4. Click the [Shift meas data by Bestfit] command to shift the measured data again, by aspheric bestfit based on the optimal aspheric nominal value.

5. Click the [Error cal. between aspheric nominal data and meas. data] command to perform error calculation of the measured data based on the above aspheric nominal
value.

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 46 of 55

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Error calculation referring to aspheric nominal
values],[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating an aspheric optimal value]

Tip:

Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Bestfit (Shifting measurement data by bestfit)] for the condition of the [Shift meas data by Bestfit]
command.
The condition of the [Error cal. between aspheric nominal data and meas. data] command is same as that of [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] -
[Design-R Analysis].

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Error calculation referring to aspheric nominal values]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating an aspheric optimal value]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Bestfit (Shifting measurement data by bestfit)]

ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Design-R Analysis]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 47 of 55

Aspheric Pseudo Parameter

Obtain aspheric pseudo roughness parameters from the error curve generated based on the aspheric nominal value and the measured point, with the [Aspheric pseudo
parameter] command.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating an aspheric pseudo roughness
parameter].

Notice:

The [Aspheric Pseudo Parameter] may not be added to the Part Program in the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] depending on the options you purchased.
In such cases, this item will not be displayed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 48 of 55

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating an aspheric pseudo roughness parameter].

Aspheric accuracy evaluate value/F', A', S'

Obtain aspheric accuracy evaluate value/ F', A', S' from the error curve generated based on the optimized aspheric nominal value and the measured data, with the [Aspheric
Pseudo Parameter] command.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [F',A',S']

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 49 of 55

c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].

Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating aspheric accuracy evaluate value/F',
A', S'].

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Surface Analysis Function] - [2D Analysis] - [Calculating aspheric accuracy evaluate value/F', A', S']

File Output
Set the file output of the results.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [File Output]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 50 of 55

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Result Output].

Tip:

This item will be saved as a part of the Part Program executing conditions. It will not be added to the Part Program list.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Result Output]

Print
Set the printing conditions.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Print]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 51 of 55

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Result Output].

Tip:

This item will be saved as a part of the Part Program executing conditions. It will not be added to the Part Program list.

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About Result Output]

Escape
After measurement, move the stylus away from the work with the [Move] command.

How To:

1. Click [Aspheric Basic Program Creation...] command of the [Settings] menu.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 52 of 55

Or, click on the [Aspheric] button

Displays the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog box.

2. click on the [Escape]

[Aspheric Basic Program Creation] Dialog Box :

a. [Run conditions] --- Click item name that exists in left Tree View to open the setting dialog.
Or, click [ Up ] or [ Down ] to select the items.
Check the items to execute.
b. [Reset all] --- Initialize all based on the current ASLPAK conditions.
c. [Procedure Creation] --- Create a Part Program with [Procedure Creation].
Please refer to [ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

For the details about settings, Please refer to [Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement Command]

See Also

[ASLPAK(Option)] - [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] - [Creating Part Program]

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement Command]

Creating Part Program

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 53 of 55

Creating Part Program.

How To:

1. Create a new Part Program with [Procedure Creation].

When a Part Program is created, it will be added to the Part Program window.

Tip:

Once a Part Program is created, the settings in the [Aspheric Basic Program Creation] dialog at the time of creation will be saved.

See Also

Part Program Run Mode

Part Program Run Mode

How To:

1. Select the [Part Program Run Mode(R)] in the [Part Program(P)] - [Mode change] menu.
Or, click on the [Part Program Run] button in the [Op. mode] bar.

For the details about operations, Please refer to [Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To Part Program Run Mode]

See Also

[Changing Run Mode] - [Changing To Part Program Run Mode]

Execute Part Program

Execute Part Program.

How To:

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 54 of 55

1. Click the [Part Program Run(R)] in the [Part Program(P)].

Or, click on the [Part Program Run] button in the [Part Program] bar.

For the details about operations, Please refer to [Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program]

See Also

[Processing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program] - [Executing Part Program]

Substitute "Move" for "Vertex/centering" when running Part Program

repeatedly
Substitute "Move" for "Vertex/centering" when running Part Program repeatedly.

How To:

1. Click [Vertex/&Centering Bar] command of the [View] - [Toolbar / Toolbox] menu.

Shows or Hides the [Vertex/&Centering] Bar.

When the check mark of the menu command is displayed, the [Vertex/&Centering] bar is displayed.

[Vertex/Centering condition in Part Program execution] bar:

When measuring the same work repeatedly, after the 2nd measurement, it is possible to substitute [Move] command for [Ball Meas.] command (the vertex/centering
measurement). It will reduce the operation time for [Ball Meas.] in executing Part Program.

a. [Substitute Move for centering] --- To replace [Ball Meas.] with [Move] command in an executing Part Program, check-mark the [Substitute Move for centering] in
the [Vertex/Centering condition in Part Program execution] bar.
b. [X=] --- Perform X-direction move.
c. [Y=] --- Perform Y-direction move.

Where to move will be memorized in the first execution of the Part Program. The memorized position will be deleted when a Part Program is changed, modified, or newly
created.

Notice:

This function may not be available depending on the options you purchased.

See Also

List of setting items and commands

@

Title/Setting items Command Label

Aspheric Data Aspheric Nominal Data <AspNominal>
Move to Work Top Move <Move_X>
<Auto-set /0[mm]
Z1-axis auto-set Move (single axis)j >
Peak/Valley Detect Ball Meas <Meas_X>
Leveling Aspheric Meas. / Plane Meas <Leveling>
Peak/Valley Detect Ball Meas <Meas_X>
Move to Meas Start Position @ @
@@@@@Z2-axis (Column)
Move (single axis) <Escape /.[mm]>
evacuation@
@@@@@X1 axis relative displacement Move (single axis) <Move_X>
@@@@@Auto-set Z1-axis Pos. Move (single axis) <Move_X>
Measurement Measure <Meas_X>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
Outline of ASLPAK Page 55 of 55

Filter Filter Meas. Points <DataEdit_X>

Bestfit Meas. data shift by bestfit <DataEdit_X>
Error cal. referring to aspheric <Design R>
Design R Analysis
nominal value
Aspheric pseudo roughness <AspParam_X>
Aspheric Pseudo Parameter
parameter
Bestfit R Analysis Aspheric Optimal Value Cal <AspParam_X>
@ Meas. data shift by bestfit <DataEdit_X>

@ Error cal. referring to aspheric <Bestfit R>

nominal value
Aspheric pseudo roughness <AspParam_X>
Aspheric Pseudo Parameter
parameter
Aspheric accuracy evaluate value/ F', Aspheric accuracy evaluate value/ <AspParam_X>
A', S' F', A', S'
File Output [Part Program executing condition] @
Print [Part Program executing condition] @
Escape Move <Move_X>

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhC826.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 1 of 91

C0012
<No.>

C0012
<Message>

No measured point.

<Possible causes>

The calculation that used the measurement point was executed without the measurement point.

The following causes are possible.

1. The measurement point might have been not able to acquire enough number of point due to the
failure of the measurement at the time of Part Program running.
2. The measurement might have been not correctly executed by using Part Program of different
workpiece.

<Remedies>

1. Confirm that the measurement is correctly executed at the time of Part Program running.
2. Perform the calculation after the correct measurement.
3. Perform the calculation after reading of the measurement points.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Importing Measurement Points]

[Menu] - [File] - [Read Measured Points from File]

C0013
<No.>

C0013

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 2 of 91

<Message>

No intersection with the measured point.

<Possible causes>

There is no intersection with the cursor at the time of specifying of measurement point by using [X
Value Specification] or [Z Value Specification] of [Designation] toolbox.

The following causes are possible.

1. The measurement point might have been not able to acquire enough number of point due to the
failure of the measurement at the time of Part Program running.
2. The measurement position might have been different by the difference of the setup position of
workpiece.
3. The measurement might have been not correctly executed by using Part Program of different
workpiece.
4. The coordinate system command(Origin Setup or Rotation) might have been deleted.

<Remedies>

1. Confirm that the measurement is correctly executed at the time of Part Program running.
2. Setup the workpiece to the setup position that has been setting to Part Program at the time of Part
Program running. Or, align the position by using the Bestfit or the coordinate system setup.
3. If you deleted the coordinate system command, create new procedure and calculate from the
beginning. Because the deleted calculation command cannot be restored.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Designation Toolbox]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Setting Calculation Coordinates System]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Joining Two Measurement Points]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Performing Bestfit of

Measurement Points]

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
Bestfit]

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Creating New Calculation Procedure]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 3 of 91

C0015
<No.>

C0015
<Message>

No measured point within the specified range.

<Possible causes>

There is no measurement point within the specified range.

The following causes are possible.

1. The measurement point might have been not able to acquire enough number of point due to the
failure of the measurement at the time of Part Program running.
2. The measurement position might have been different by the difference of the setup position of
workpiece.
3. The measurement might have been not correctly executed by using Part Program of different
workpiece.
4. The coordinate system command(Origin Setup or Rotation) might have been deleted.
5. The area that is narrower than the measurement pitch might have been specified.

<Remedies>

1. Confirm that the measurement is correctly executed at the time of Part Program running.
2. Setup the workpiece to the setup position that has been setting to Part Program at the time of Part
Program running. Or, align the position by using the Bestfit or the coordinate system setup.
3. If you deleted the coordinate system command, create new procedure and calculate from the
beginning. Because the deleted calculation command cannot be restored.
4. You might have specified the position between the measurement points in [Poly-Line Display]
mode. Change the mode to [Point display] mode, and specify the range so that the measurement
point is included.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Setting Calculation Coordinates System]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 4 of 91

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Creating New Calculation Procedure]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Editing Measurement Point] - [Joining Two Measurement Points]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Performing Bestfit of Measurement Points] - [Performing Bestfit of

Measurement Points]

[Processing Part Program] - [Setting Part Program Run Condition] - [Setting Run Condition About
Bestfit]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Measurement

Point]

C0019
<No.>

C0019
<Message>

No measurement result.

<Possible causes>

The measurement result cannot be referred correctly.

The following causes are possible.

1. The clicked position and the measurement result position might be far away.
2. The measurement result that is not able to be referred might have been referred to.

<Remedies>

1. Select the measurement result of Part Program Window.

2. Select the figure or label of the measurement result on Figure Window.
3. Move the mouse cursor near the figure or label of the measurement result. The figure and label
and dimension line of the measurement result is displayed by the color that is set in [Options] of
[Input Option] tab.
The measurement result can be selected by clicking the figure or label.
4. The measurement result that is able to be referred is displayed in Guidance Window.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 5 of 91

See Also

[Operation Screen] - [Figure Window]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Window]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Input Option]

[Operation Screen] - [Guidance Window]

C0020
<No.>

C0020
<Message>

No selectable measured point.

<Possible causes>

The referred measurement result is improper.

The following causes are possible.

1. The calculation that needed the different measurement result might have referred to the same
measurement result.

<Remedies>

1. Select the measurement result of Part Program Window.

2. Select the figure or label of the measurement result on Figure Window.
3. The figure or label of the measurement result that was selected again on Figure Window is
displayed by using the color that is set in [Selected Status] of [Input Option] tab.
Select the measurement result except the above-mentioned result.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 6 of 91

[Operation Screen] - [Figure Window]

[Operation Screen] - [Part Program Window]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Input Option]

C0164
<No.>

C0164
<Message>

Calculation cannot be performed since the identical points are

specified.

<Possible causes>

The line to calculate the intersection cannot be defined, because the same point was specified.

The following causes are possible.

1. The mouse might have been double-clicked at the same position.

2. The same point might have been specified as the measurement point was a little.

<Remedies>

1. Specify two measurement points away.

2. You might have specified the same measurement point in [Poly-Line Display] mode.
Change the mode to [Point display] mode, and specify the different measurement point.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Point] - [Calculating Intersection]

[Processing Results] - [Changing Display Condition] - [Changing Display Condition of Measurement

Point]

C0165

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 7 of 91

<No.>

C0165
<Message>

No intersection exists since the two lines are parallel.

<Possible causes>

The intersection doesn't exist because two lines are parallel when the intersection in two lines is
calculated.

The following causes are possible.

1. The specified two lines might be parallel.

2. Two lines might have become parallel because the measurement point is different from the
measurement point that has been set to Part Program.

<Remedies>

1. Re-calculate the line in order to calculate the intersection.

2. Re-define the range of the line in order to calculate the intersection.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Point] - [Calculating Intersection]

C0183
<No.>

C0183
<Message>

The inflection point was not determined.

<Possible causes>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 8 of 91

Within the range to calculate inflection point, the point to satisfy the condition of Distance, Angle, and
Angle Variation is not found.

The Inflection Point Command is the function that calculates the first point to satisfy the condition.
Therefore, when all the points satisfy the condition or all the points do not satisfy the condition, the
inflection point cannot be calculated.

The following causes are possible.

1. The distance between the measurement point (within the range of the calculation of inflection
point) and the reference line might be shorter than the specified length.
2. The distance between all measurement points (within the range of the calculation of inflection
point) and the reference line might be longer than the specified length.
3. The angle between the measurement point (within the range of the calculation of inflection point)
and the reference line might be smaller than the specified angle.
4. The angle between all measurement points (within the range of the calculation of inflection point)
and the reference line might be larger than the specified angle.
5. The angle variation between the measurement point (within the range of the calculation of
inflection point) and the reference line might be smaller than the specified angle.
6. The angle variation between all measurement points (within the range of the calculation of
inflection point) and the reference line might be larger than the specified angle.
7. The pitch of the measurement point to calculate the angle might be improper.

<Remedies>

1. Change the condition of the inflection point(Distance, Angle, Angle Variation, Pitch) and
calculate again.
2. Specify the range again to calculate the inflection point.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Point] - [Calculating Inflection Point(Distance)]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Point] - [Calculating Inflection Point(Angle)]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Point] - [Calculating Inflection Point(Angle Difference)]

C0213
<No.>

C0213
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 9 of 91

Insufficient pieces of data. There are not 2 or more points of data.

<Possible causes>

Two or more data doesn't exist because two or more same points were specified.

The following causes are possible.

1. The same point or the very near point might have been specified.
2. The same point might have been input by mistake.
3. Does not check whether the same point was input by using [Multi-Input] mode.

The check is performed at the time of calculating, and The C0213 error is notified.

<Remedies>

1. Input the point to calculate the line again.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Line] - [Calculating Line]

[Operation Screen] - [Calculation Toolbox]

C0314
<No.>

C0314
<Message>

Insufficient pieces of data. There are not 3 or more points of data.

<Possible causes>

Three or more data doesn't exist because multiple same points were specified.

The following causes are possible.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 10 of 91

1. The same point or the very near point might have been specified.
2. The same point might have been input by mistake.
3. Does not check whether the same point was input by using [Multi-Input] mode.

The check is performed at the time of calculating, and The C0314 error is notified.

<Remedies>

1. Input the point to calculate the circle again.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Circle] - [Calculating Circle]

[Operation Screen] - [Calculation Toolbox]

C0361
<No.>

C0361
<Message>

No tangent circle exists.

<Possible causes>

A Tangent Circle(Meas Point) to satisfy the specified calculation option cannot be determined in the
measurement point range.

The following causes are possible.

1. The area in where the measurement point decreases or increases by constant rate might have been
specified.
2. The retrogression measurement point might exist.
3. The [Smoothing] Option might not have been used appropriately.
4. The Calculation Option might not have been used appropriately.
5. The measurement pitch might be wide than the diameter of the circle.

<Remedies>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 11 of 91

Specify the range again to calculate Tangent Circle(Meas Point).

1. Confirm the calculation option of Tangent Circle(Meas Point).

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Circle] - [Calculating Tangent Circle (Meas Point)]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculation Dialog Box]

C0564
<No.>

C0564
<Message>

The number of peeks for determining pitches is insufficient.

<Possible causes>

The number of measurement points for calculating of pitch is insufficient.

The following causes are possible.

1. The specified range might be fewer than four. Because one line is calculated within one range,
four ranges or more are necessary.
2. The specified point might be fewer than eight. Because one line is calculated with two points,
eight points or more are necessary.

<Remedies>

1. Input the data.

See also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Distance/Angle] - [Calculating Pitch]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 12 of 91

C0565
<No.>

C0565
<Message>

The number of measured points in the specified range is

insufficient.

<Possible causes>

The number of measured points in the specified range is insufficient.

The following causes are possible.

1. The measurement point might be a little. The line calculation for determining pitches cannot be
performed.
2. The specified point might be fewer than eight. Because one line is calculated with two points,
eight points or more are necessary.

<Remedies>

1. Change the input range so that more measurement points are included.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Distance/Angle] - [Calculating Pitch]

C0566
<No.>

C0566
<Message>

The number of circles for determining pitches is insufficient.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 13 of 91

<Possible causes>

The number of measurement points for determining pitche(Circle Center) is insufficient.

The following causes are possible.

1. The specified range might be fewer than two. Because one circle is calculated within one range,
two ranges or more are necessary.

<Remedies>

1. Input the data.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Distance/Angle] - [Calculating Pitch(Circle Center)]

C0584
<No.>

C0584
<Message>

The specified point is identical to the intersection of two lines.

<Possible causes>

The specified area for calculating of angle is wrong.

The following causes are possible.

1. You might have clicked a position extremely near to the intersection of two lines, when you select
one from four corners of two lines.

<Remedies>

1. Click a position away from intersections of two lines.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 14 of 91

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Distance/Angle] - [Calculating Angle]

C0585
<No.>

C0585
<Message>

The specified points are on the two lines.

<Possible causes>

The specified area for calculating of angle is wrong.

The following causes are possible.

1. You might have clicked a position extremely near to the line, when you select one from four
corners of two lines.

<Remedies>

1. Click a position away from intersections of two lines.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Distance/Angle] - [Calculating Angle]

C0711
<No.>

C0711

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 15 of 91

<Message>

There are too many intersections of lines that form closed areas.

<Possible causes>

There are too many intersections of the measurement points and the lines that form closed areas.

The following causes are possible.

1. There might be a lot of big noises in the measurement points.

2. You might have measured the workpiece of extremely complex shape.

<Remedies>

1. Specify the range for calculating of the area again.

2. Create the line newly so that the intersection may decrease.
3. Reduce the X range to calculate the area.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Calculating Area]

[Analyzing Contour] - [Calculating Line] - [Calculating Line]

C0712
<No.>

C0712
<Message>

The line that forms closed area is a perpendicular.

<Possible causes>

The following causes are possible.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 16 of 91

1. The line that forms closed area might be a perpendicular.

Perpendicular line cannot be specified for the line that forms closed area.

<Remedies>

1. Specify the line excluding perpendicular line.

2. To cut the area of the area calculation vertically, specify the cutting position at the time of
specifying the X range.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Calculating Area]

C0713
<No.>

C0713
<Message>

There is no measured point in the specified X-range.

<Possible causes>

There is no measured point in the specified X-range.

The following causes are possible.

1. The measurement point might have been not able to acquire correctly measurement point due to
the failure of the measurement at the time of Part Program running.
2. There might be no measurement point because the coordinate system command(Origin Setup or
Rotation) was deleted.

<Remedies>

1. Confirm that the measurement is correctly executed at the time of Part Program running.
2. If you deleted the coordinate system command, create new procedure and calculate from the

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 17 of 91

beginning.
Because the deleted calculation command cannot be restored.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Calculating Area]

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Creating New Calculation Procedure]

C0714
<No.>

C0714
<Message>

The specified position is not a closed area.

<Possible causes>

The closed area was not specified.

The following causes are possible.

1. The measurement point might have been not able to acquire correctly measurement point due to
the failure of the measurement at the time of Part Program running.
2. The specified area might not be a closed area because the coordinate system command(Origin
Setup or Rotation) was deleted.

<Remedies>

1. Specify a closed area enclosed by the line and the measurement point.
2. Confirm that the measurement is correctly executed at the time of Part Program running.
3. If you deleted the coordinate system command, create new procedure and calculate from the
beginning.

Because the deleted calculation command cannot be restored.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 18 of 91

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Extension Function] - [Calculating Area]

[Processing Part Program] - [Editing Part Program] - [Creating New Calculation Procedure]

C0732
<No.>

C0732
<Message>

No data is registered.

<Possible causes>

There is no data for statistic calculation.

The following causes are possible.

1. The measurement results that are registered for the statistic calculation might have been deleted.
2. The calculation of the measurement result that is registered for the statistic calculation might have
failed.

<Remedies>

1. Register the data for the statistic calculation again.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Executing Calculation/stat] - [Calculation/Stat Toolbox]

WC0001
<No.>

WC0001

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 19 of 91

<Message>

This operation discards all measurement results. Execute now?

<Possible causes>

If some measurement results have already been obtained, an attempt to modify the measured points will
result in this message being displayed.

<Remedies>

To discard the measurement results and to modify the measured points, click the [Yes] button.

To cancel modification of the measured points, click the [No] button.

See Also

[Analyzing Contour] - [Filtering Measurement Points]

WC0002
<No.>

WC0002
<Message>

There are multiple pieces of measured points data. Output all

pieces of data?

<Possible causes>

In Aspheric Surface Optimizing Program, all measurement points are uniformly treated.

When the measurement points acquired by the separate measurements are input to Aspheric Surface
Optimizing Program, this message is displayed.

<Remedies>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 20 of 91

To cancel the text file output, click [Cancel] button.

To output the text file, click [OK] button.

To delete the unnecessary measurement point, use [Deleting Measured Points] command in [Edit
Measurement Point] of Calculation Toolbox.

See Also

WC0003
<No.>

WC0003
<Message>

Stylus Radius Compensation has not been performed for some

data. Output the data?

<Possible causes>

In Aspheric Surface Optimizing Program, the Stylus Radius Compensation is not performed.

When the measurement points to which the Stylus Radius Compensation is not performed are input to
Aspheric Surface Optimizing Program, this message is displayed.

<Remedies>

To cancel the text file output, click [Cancel] button.

To output the text file, click [OK] button.

To perform the Stylus Radius Compensation for the current measurement points, use [Change Meas
Points] command in [Meas Points] menu of [Edit] menu.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 21 of 91

M0001
<No.>

M0001
<Message>

The specified measuring operation cannot execute. Check the

state of the instrument.

<Possible causes>

This may be caused due to such that the detector has reached the traverse limit, or before the operation
on the measuring instrument side is complete, the personal computer (PC) instructed the next measuring
operation.

<Remedies>

Check the operating state of the instrument. If the measuring operation in not end, use the PC for the
next instruction after the instrument has completed the operation.

See Also

M0002
<No.>

M0002
<Message>

Instrument Error: The communication I/F cannot be opened.

<Possible causes>

The communication I/F linking between the control unit and the PC may be used by another application.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 22 of 91

<Remedies>

Check the state of the application which has opened this device. Use the communication I/F after it is
freed from the busy state.

See Also

M0003
<No.>

M0003
<Message>

Instrument Error: The communication I/F does not exist.

<Possible causes>

The communication I/F device linking between the control unit and the PC may not have been installed
or may have been set up incorrectly.

<Remedies>

If measurement needs to be performed, resolve the problem, then reboot this program.

Unless measurement is required, continue using the system.

See Also

M0004
<No.>

M0004
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 23 of 91

This measuring instrument cannot be detected. The power may

not be turned on or instrument may not be connected properly.

<Possible causes>

When failed to detect the instrument, the system displays this message.

<Remedies>

If measurement needs to be performed, resolve the problem, then reboot this program.

Unless measurement is required, continue using the system.

See Also

M0005
<No.>

M0005
<Message>

Instrument Error: The connected measuring instrument model is

wrong.

<Possible causes>

The measuring instrument type specified at installation differs from that actually used.

<Remedies>

Reinstall this program.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 24 of 91

M0006
<No.>

M0006
<Message>

Instrument Error: Reception error.

<Possible causes>

Failed to receive data from the measuring instrument.

The measuring instrument was turned off during communication, or the connection between the control
unit and the PC may be unstable.

<Remedies>

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0007
<No.>

M0007
<Message>

Measuring instrument Error: Transmission error.

<Possible causes>

Failed to transmit the instruction to the measuring instrument.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 25 of 91

The measuring instrument was turned off during communication, or the connection between the control
unit and the PC may be unstable.

<Remedies>

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0008
<No.>

M0008
<Message>

Measuring instrument Error: Reception buffer overflow.

<Possible causes>

The RS-232C setup may differ between the control unit and the PC.

Otherwise, the connection between the control unit and the PC may be unstable.

<Remedies>

Check the RS-232C setup.

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0009

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 26 of 91

<No.>

M0009
<Message>

Measuring instrument Error: Transmission buffer overflow.

<Possible causes>

The RS-232C setup may differ between the control unit and the PC.

Otherwise, the connection between the control unit and the PC may be unstable.

<Remedies>

Check the RS-232C setup.

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0010
<No.>

M0010
<Message>

RS-232C Overrun Error: Check for RS-232C connection.

<Possible causes>

The RS-232C setup may differ between the control unit and the PC.

<Remedies>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 27 of 91

Check the RS-232C setup.

See Also

M0011
<No.>

M0011
<Message>

RS-232C Framing Error: Check for RS-232C connection.

<Possible causes>

The RS-232C setup may differ between the control unit and the PC.

Otherwise, the connection between the control unit and the PC may be unstable.

<Remedies>

Check the RS-232C setup.

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0012
<No.>

M0012
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 28 of 91

RS-232C Parity Error: Check for RS-232C connection.

<Possible causes>

The RS-232C setup may differ between the control unit and the PC.

Otherwise, the connection between the control unit and the PC may be unstable.

<Remedies>

Check the RS-232C setup.

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0013
<No.>

M0013
<Message>

Communication Error: Check the state of connecting cable

between the electronic control unit and a PC.

<Possible causes>

This message is displayed if the data the PC cannot recognize is received, although the communication
between the control unit and the PC is performed properly.

The connection between the control unit and the PC may be unstable.

<Remedies>

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 29 of 91

See Also

M0014
<No.>

M0014
<Message>

Leveling measurement result cannot be determined.

<Possible causes>

Because the measurement points are a little, the inclination might not be correctly calculated.

<Remedies>

Measure the linear section on a workpiece as widely as possible.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Auto-Leveling of Contour

Measurement Condition]

M0015
<No.>

M0015
<Message>

Cannot measure no more.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 30 of 91

<Possible causes>

This may be caused due to such that the usable memory is insufficient, the space capacity in the disk is
insufficient, and an error occurred in the measuring instrument.

<Remedies>

Restart this program and the measuring instrument.

If the problem is not solved after that, it may be derived from operating environments (memory capacity
and disk space capacity).

See Also

M0016
<No.>

M0016
<Message>

Cannot travel any more.

<Possible causes>

The detector has reached the traverse limit.

<Remedies>

If this message is displayed within the range specified for your measuring instrument, the measuring
range may be limited by the stopper pin on the detector.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 31 of 91

M0017
<No.>

M0017
<Message>

The Z-axis zero position cannot be detected. The power to the

measuring instrument may be turned off.

<Possible causes>

The measuring instrument needs to detect the Z1-axis zero-position prior to use according to the
following procedure.

This message is displayed if the Z1-axis zero-position data is lost during use of the instrument. The
power to the measuring instrument may be turned off.

<Remedies>

1. Click [OK] button.

2. The message "Measurement cannot be performed unless the Z-axis zero position is detected.
Detect the Z-axis zero position?" is displayed.
Click [Yes] button.
Click [No] button only if no measurement is required.

See Also

[Before using Measuring Instrument ] - [Detecting Z1-axis Zero Point]

M0018
<No.>

M0018
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 32 of 91

Z-axis zero position cannot be detected. There may be an

obstruction within the traveling range of the detector or the set
measuring direction may be different from the actual direction.

<Possible causes>

The measuring instrument needs to detect the Z1-axis zero-position prior to use according to the
following procedure.

This message is displayed if the measuring instrument failed to detect the Z1-axis 0-position.

This may be caused mainly because the stylus comes in contact with an obstacle including a workpiece
or the Z1-axis 0-position is detected in the reverse direction to the stylus tip direction.

<Remedies>

1. Click [Retry] button.

Click [Cancel] button only if no measurement is required.
If the [Retry] button is clicked, the system advances to step 2.
If the [Cancel] button is clicked, the system advances to step 4.
2. If the stylus comes in contact with a workpiece, etc., drive the Z2-axis from the measuring
instrument side, remove the obstacle out of the detector travel range, then click the [OK] button.
When the detecting direction is the opposite direction to the stylus tip, click [OK] button after
changing the setting.
3. The measuring instrument starts to detect the Z1-axis zero-position again.
4. The message "Measurement cannot be performed unless the Z-axis zero position is detected.
Detect the Z-axis zero position?" is displayed.
Click [Yes] button.

Notice:
If the [No] button is clicked, measurement cannot be performed.
Click [Yes] button except that no measurement is required.

If the [Yes] button is clicked, the system advances to step 2.

See Also

[Before using Measuring Instrument ] - [Detecting Z1-axis Zero Point]

M0019

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 33 of 91

<No.>

M0019
<Message>

The number of measured points is less then specified.

<Possible causes>

Two or more measured points are required for leveling measurement.

<Remedies>

Change the measurement conditions so that two or more points can be measured.

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Auto-Leveling of Contour

Measurement Condition]

M0020
<No.>

M0020
<Message>

Set the measuring direction downward.

<Possible causes>

In straightness compensation measurement, symmetric measurement, and stylus radius measurement,

the measuring direction must be downward.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 34 of 91

<Remedies>

Set the measuring direction to downward by selecting the [Set Equipmen] command in the [Settings]
menu.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Straightness Compensation]

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Symmetric Compensation

Measurement] - [Executing Symmetric Compensation Measurement]

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Measuring Stylus Radius]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Measurement Direction of

Stylus]

M0021
<No.>

M0021
<Message>

The obtained Z-axis gain adjustment ratio exceeds the available

range. Selectable range: xxxxxx to xxxxxx

<Possible causes>

The setup of the measuring instrument may differ from the actual setup or a correct value may not be
input as the reference step.

<Remedies>

Check if the correct arm and stylus are selected and if the stylus mounting direction is set correctly by
selecting the [Set Equipmen] command in the [Settings] menu.

Also, check if a correct value is set as the reference step.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 35 of 91

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Z-axis Gain Adjustment] - [Executing

Z-axis Gain Adjustment]

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Z-axis Gain Adjustment] - [Executing

Static Calibration]

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Z-axis Gain Adjustment] - [Executing

Dynamic Calibration]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour

Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Measurement Direction of

Stylus]

M0022
<No.>

M0022
<Message>

The obtained symmetric compensation value exceeds the

available range. Selectable range: xxxxxx to xxxxxx

<Possible causes>

The setup of the measuring instrument may differ from the actual setup.

<Remedies>

Check if the correct arm and stylus are selected and if the stylus mounting direction is set correctly by
selecting the [Set Equipmen] command in the [Settings] menu.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Symmetric Compensation

Measurement] - [Executing Symmetric Compensation Measurement]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 36 of 91

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Symmetric Compensation

Measurement] - [Executing Symmetric Compensation Measurement By Circle Method]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour

Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Measurement Direction of

Stylus]

M0023
<No.>

M0023
<Message>

The obtained stylus radius differs greatly from the nominal

value.

<Possible causes>

Although the determined stylus radius can be registered, the setup of the measuring instrument may
differ from the actual setup.

Also, a correct value may not be input as the pin gage diameter.

<Remedies>

Check if the correct arm and stylus are selected and if the stylus mounting direction is set correctly by
selecting the [Set Equipmen] command in the [Settings] menu. Also, check if a correct value is set as the
pin gage diameter.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Measuring Stylus Radius]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour

Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Measurement Direction of

Stylus]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 37 of 91

M0024
<No.>

M0024
<Message>

The obtained stylus radius is less than 0.0.

<Possible causes>

The setup of the measuring instrument may differ from the actual setup or a correct value may not be
input as the pin gage diameter.

<Remedies>

Check if the correct arm and stylus are selected and if the stylus mounting direction is set correctly by
selecting the [Set Equipmen] command in the [Settings] menu.

Also, check if a correct value is set as the pin gage diameter.

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Measuring Stylus Radius]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour

Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Measurement Direction of

Stylus]

M0025
<No.>

M0025
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 38 of 91

The set-up straightness data file does not exist. xxxxxx

<Possible causes>

The straightness data file that has been set may be moved or deleted.

<Remedies>

Set the straightness data file again or set the straightness compensation to "OFF" by selecting the [Set
Comp. Condition] command in the [Settings] menu.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Compensation Condition] - [Changing The Condition of Straightness

Compensation]

M0026
<No.>

M0026
<Message>

The stylus operation is not complete. Check if the stylus get

caught by the workpiece, etc.

<Possible causes>

The stylus may be caught by the workpiece, etc.

<Remedies>

Move the obstacle including the workpiece so that the stylus can operate.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 39 of 91

M0027
<No.>

M0027
<Message>

Measurement cannot start.

<Possible causes>

The detector may reach the traverse limit and may not be able to traverse in the measuring feed
direction.

<Remedies>

If this message is displayed within the range specified for your measuring instrument, the measuring
range may be limited by the stopper pin on the detector.

See Also

M0028
<No.>

M0028
<Message>

X-Axis Scale Abnormality.

<Possible causes>

The cable between the control unit and the detector may not be connected correctly.

<Remedies>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 40 of 91

Check the cable connection.

See Also

M0029
<No.>

M0029
<Message>

Z-Axis Scale Abnormality.

<Possible causes>

The system may not be able to recognize the status of the stylus or the cable between the control unit
and the detector may not be connected correctly.

<Remedies>

Operate the stylus, if possible, from the measuring instrument side.

If the stylus is not operative, check the cable connection.

See Also

M0030
<No.>

M0030
<Message>

X-Axis Overspeed.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 41 of 91

<Possible causes>

While the stylus is moved up with the Stylus Up/Down knob, it may operate abnormally in the X-axis
direction.

<Remedies>

Turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot this program.

See Also

M0031
<No.>

M0031
<Message>

Z-Axis Overspeed.

<Possible causes>

An abnormal load may be exerted on the stylus.

<Remedies>

It is necessary to detect the Z1-axis zero-position.

See Also

[Before using Measuring Instrument ] - [Detecting Z1-axis Zero Point]

M0032

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 42 of 91

<No.>

M0032
<Message>

Buzzer On.

<Possible causes>

The stylus may reach the traverse limit or may be caught by the workpiece, etc. Otherwise, the detector
bottom may come in contact with the workpiece or an obstacle.

<Remedies>

Move the obstacle including the workpiece so that the stylus can operate.

If there is no problem in the stylus, check if the detector bottom comes in contact with the workpiece or
other obstacle.

See Also

M0033
<No.>

M0033
<Message>

Cannot move to the set measurement start point on the Z axis.

<Possible causes>

The set Z1-axis coordinate value exceeds the allowable moving range in the Z1-axis direction.

<Remedies>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 43 of 91

The counter value is always the value for which the Z-axis calibration and arc compensation have been
performed, therefore the allowable moving range in the Z1-axis direction varies according to the Z-axis
gain calibration rate and symmetricity compensation value of the compensation conditions.

Change the Z1-axis coordinate using the [Set Meas. Condition] command in the [Settings] menu, or set
the measurement start point on the Z1 axis to "OFF".

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Position of Contour

Measurement Condition]

M0034
<No.>

M0034
<Message>

The position of origin cannot be detected.

<Possible causes>

Failed to detect the position of origin. There may be an obstruction (i.e. a workpiece, etc.) within the
traveling range.

<Remedies>

Remove the obstruction (i.e. a workpiece, etc.) to operate the stylus/detector.

If the stylus/detector is locating at the position of origin, remove it from this position, then perform the
detection again.

See Also

[Before using Measuring Instrument] - [Detecting the mechanical origin]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 44 of 91

M0035
<No.>

M0035
<Message>

The position of X-axis origin cannot be confirmed. The power to

the measuring instrument may be turned off.

<Possible causes>

This instrument cannot be used for measurement if the position of origin is not confirmed.

The power to the measuring instrument may be turned off or the connecting cable among the measuring
unit, the control unit and the detector may not be connected properly.

<Remedies>

Check the power, the cable connection, etc. then perform the detection of the position of origin again.

See Also

M0036
<No.>

M0036
<Message>

The position of Column-axis origin cannot be confirmed. The

power to the measuring instrument may be turned off.

<Possible causes>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 45 of 91

This instrument cannot be used for measurement if the position of origin is not confirmed.

The power to the measuring instrument may be turned off or the connecting cable among the measuring
unit, the control unit and the detector may not be connected properly.

<Remedies>

Check the power, the cable connection, etc. then perform the detection of the position of origin again.

See Also

M0037
<No.>

M0037
<Message>

Column-Axis Scale Abnormality.

<Possible causes>

The power to the measuring instrument may be turned off or the connecting cable among the measuring
unit, the control unit and the detector may not be connected properly.

<Remedies>

Check the cable connection, then perform the detection of the position of origin again.

See Also

M0038
<No.>

M0038

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 46 of 91

<Message>

Column-Axis Overspeed.

<Possible causes>

An abnormal load may be exerted on the Z2-axis.

<Remedies>

Turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot this program.

See Also

M0039
<No.>

M0039
<Message>

The temperature compensation unit cannot be detected.

<Possible causes>

The power to the temperature compensation unit may be turned off or the connecting cable among the
measuring unit, the temperature compensation unit may not be connected properly.

<Remedies>

Check the power, the cable connection.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 47 of 91

M0040
<No.>

M0040
<Message>

Failed to get measured point for Surface Roughness Analysis.

<Possible causes>

This may be caused due to such that the usable memory is insufficient, the space capacity in the disk is
insufficient, and an error occurred in the measuring instrument.

<Remedies>

Restart this program and the measuring instrument.

If the problem is not solved after that, it may be derived from operating environments (memory capacity
and disk space capacity).

See Also

M0041
<No.>

M0041
<Message>

Failed to set the Z1-axis range.

<Possible causes>

There is a possibility that an applicable Z1-axis range have not been selected.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 48 of 91

<Remedies>

Set a correct Z1-axis range again.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Range of Contour

Measurement Condition]

M0042
<No.>

M0042
<Message>

Failed to start stylus operation. Check the hold position.

<Possible causes>

Since the current Z1-axis position is higher (lower) than the specified hold position, the stylus cannot
start operation.

<Remedies>

Displace the Z2-axis or adjust the hold position.

See Also

M0050
<No.>

M0050
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 49 of 91

The key mask error occurred.

<Possible causes>

The cable between the control unit and the Remote Box may not be connected correctly.

<Remedies>

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0051
<No.>

M0051
<Message>

The origin not detected.

<Possible causes>

The cable between the control unit and the detector may not be connected correctly.

<Remedies>

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0052

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 50 of 91

<No.>

M0052
<Message>

Communication error (ARCNET) occurred.

<Possible causes>

The cable between the control unit and the detector may not be connected correctly.

<Remedies>

After checking the cable connection, turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0053
<No.>

M0053
<Message>

The software limit was detected.

<Possible causes>

The moving axis has reached the software limit.

<Remedies>

Move to the range of the limit by using Remote Box.

If necessary, adjust the software limit position.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 51 of 91

See Also

M0054
<No.>

M0054
<Message>

Accidental touch error occurred.

<Possible causes>

The stylus might have collided with the obstacle(i.e. a workpiece, etc.) while moving the detector.

<Remedies>

Move the detector by using Remote Box.

See Also

M0055
<No.>

M0055
<Message>

The tracking/synchronization error occurred.

<Possible causes>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 52 of 91

An abnormal load may be exerted on the detector or each axis.

<Remedies>

Confirm the measuring instrument. Turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0056
<No.>

M0056
<Message>

The scale error occurred.

<Possible causes>

The power to the measuring instrument may be turned off or the connecting cable among the measuring
unit, the control unit and the detector may not be connected properly.

<Remedies>

Check the cable connection, then perform the detection of the position of origin again.

See Also

M0057
<No.>

M0057
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 53 of 91

The detector protection error occurred.

<Possible causes>

The detector may come in contact with the workpiece or an obstacle.

<Remedies>

Confirm the measuring instrument. Remove the obstacle and move the detector by using Remote Box.

See Also

M0058
<No.>

M0058
<Message>

An overage error occurred.

<Possible causes>

The stylus position might exceed the range of movement.

<Remedies>

Confirm the measuring instrument. Remove the obstacle and move the detector by using Remote Box.

See Also

M0059
<No.>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 54 of 91

M0059
<Message>

Z2-axis deflection error occurred.

<Possible causes>

An abnormal load may be exerted on the detector or Z2-axis.

<Remedies>

Confirm the measuring instrument. Turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0060
<No.>

M0060
<Message>

The limit error occurred.

<Possible causes>

The moving axis has reached the limit position.

<Remedies>

Move to the range of the limit by using Remote Box.

Confirm the measuring instrument. Turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 55 of 91

See Also

M0061
<No.>

M0061
<Message>

The emergency stop was detected.

<Possible causes>

The emergency stop button may be pushing.

<Remedies>

Release the emergency stop button.

Confirm the measuring instrument. Perform the detection of the position of origin again.

See Also

M0062
<No.>

M0062
<Message>

The amplifier error occurred.

<Possible causes>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 56 of 91

An abnormal load may be exerted on the detector or each axis.

<Remedies>

Confirm the measuring instrument. Turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0063
<No.>

M0063
<Message>

Communication error (USB) occurred.

<Possible causes>

The cable between the control unit and the detector may not be connected correctly.

<Remedies>

Check the cable connection.

See Also

M0064
<No.>

M0064
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 57 of 91

Communication error (JS) occurred.

<Possible causes>

The cable between the control unit and the Remote Box may not be connected correctly.

<Remedies>

Check the cable connection.

See Also

M0065
<No.>

M0065
<Message>

Stopped Tracing Measurement.

<Possible causes>

Failed to perform Tracing Measurement. Z1-axis and A-axis might be away from 0.0.

Also, Tracing Measurement might not have been able to be executed by the steps etc. of the workpiece.

<Remedies>

Confirm Z1-axis and A-axis are at the position of about 0.0.

Change the measurement condition to correspond to the step etc. of the workpiece.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 58 of 91

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Setting Option of Contour Measurement

Condition]

M0066
<No.>

M0066
<Message>

Interlock error (A) occurred.

<Possible causes>

Interlock error (A) was detected.

<Remedies>

Release the Interlock error (A).

Confirm the measuring instrument. Turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0067
<No.>

M0067
<Message>

Interlock error (B) occurred.

<Possible causes>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 59 of 91

Interlock error (B) was detected.

<Remedies>

Release the Interlock error (B).

See Also

M0068
<No.>

M0068
<Message>

Interlock error (C) occurred.

<Possible causes>

Interlock error (C) was detected.

<Remedies>

Release the Interlock error (C).

See Also

M0100
<No.>

M0100
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 60 of 91

Y-Axis Scale Abnormality.

<Possible causes>

The cable between the control unit and the Y-axis may not be connected correctly.

<Remedies>

Check the cable connection. Perform the detection of the position of origin again.

See Also

M0101
<No.>

M0101
<Message>

Y-Axis Overspeed.

<Possible causes>

An abnormal load may be exerted on the Y-axis.

<Remedies>

Confirm the measuring instrument. Turn off and on the power to the measuring instrument and reboot
this program.

See Also

M0102

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 61 of 91

<No.>

M0102
<Message>

Failed to obtain the result of a pre-measurement.

<Possible causes>

The calculation result of an angle between planes cannot be obtained from preliminary measurement
data.

The number of pieces of measurement data may not be sufficient, or some abnormal data may be
included in the measured data.

<Remedies>

Confirm the selection of the arm and stylus.

Dust and the wound of Stylus Tip and Calibration Gage might be causes.

Confirm the dust and the wound.

See Also

M0103
<No.>

M0103
<Message>

Failed to complete the leveling table operation.

<Possible causes>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 62 of 91

The leveling table may detect the limit switch, or the table may come into contact with an obstacle, etc.

<Remedies>

Remove the obstacle.

Use within the range of moveable.

See Also

M0200
<No.>

M0200
<Message>

The batteries of the "main unit startup system" need to be

replaced. Replace the batteries with reference to the User's
Manual.

<Possible causes>

The voltage of the battery of the "main unit startup system" might decreased.

<Remedies>

When the "main unit startup system" operates due to the decrease in the voltage of the battery, you
might not be able to use the measuring instrument.

Please refer to the User's Manual (Hardware Guide) and replace the batteries.

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [About the [Main Unit Startup System]]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 63 of 91

M0201
<No.>

M0201
<Message>

The "main unit startup system" was activated. You cannot use
the measuring system. Contact the Mitutoyo service center, the
nearest Mitutoyo sales office, or the dealer immediately.

<Possible causes>

The "main unit startup system" was activated. The measuring instrument cannot be used.

<Remedies>

Contact the Mitutoyo service center, the nearest Mitutoyo sales office, or the dealer immediately.

Please refer to the User's Guide(For Hardware).

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [How to Start]

[Start and Exit] - [About the [Main Unit Startup System]]

M0202
<No.>

M0202
<Message>

The "main unit startup system" has been activated. Contact the
Mitutoyo service center, the nearest Mitutoyo sales office, or the

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 64 of 91

dealer immediately. If you do not turn off the power to the

measuring system, you will be able to use the measuring system
normally for the next XX days (YY hours).

<Possible causes>

The "main unit startup system" has been activated.

<Remedies>

When the displayed time passes, the measuring instrument cannot be used.

Contact the Mitutoyo service center, the nearest Mitutoyo sales office, or the dealer immediately.

Please refer to the User's Guide(For Hardware).

See Also

[Start and Exit] - [About the [Main Unit Startup System]]

WM0001
<No.>

WM0001
<Message>

Improper combination of the stylus and arm. Set up as is?

<Possible causes>

If measurement instrument setup is attempted although the arm and stylus are not applicable, this
message is displayed.

<Remedies>

To repeat setup again, click [No].

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 65 of 91

To leave the setup as is, click [Yes].

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour

Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Selecting Arm of Contour Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Selecting Stylus of Contour Detector]

WM0002
<No.>

WM0002
<Message>

Measuring speed is out of the applicable range. Change it to the

nearest value in the applicable range.

<Possible causes>

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the measurement speed that can be set might be
different according to the measurement magnification and the roughness measurement.

When the measurement magnification and the roughness measurement are set after the measurement
speed is set, this message might be displayed.

<Remedies>

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Speed of Contour

Measurement Condition]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 66 of 91

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measuring Magnification of

Contour Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Pitch of Contour

Measurement Condition]

WM0003
<No.>

WM0003
<Message>

Measurement pitch is out of the applicable range. Change it to

the nearest value in the applicable range.

<Possible causes>

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the measurement pitch that can be set might be
different according to the measurement speed, the measurement magnification, and the sampling
method.

When the measurement speed and the measurement magnification and the sampling method are set after
the measurement pitch is set, this message might be displayed.

<Remedies>

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Pitch of Contour

Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Speed of Contour

Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measuring Magnification of

Contour Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Sampling Method of Contour

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 67 of 91

Measurement Condition]

WM0004
<No.>

WM0004
<Message>

Roughness Pitch is out of the applicable range. Change it to the

nearest value in the applicable range.

<Possible causes>

In the case of your measuring instrument model, the roughness measurement pitch that can be set might
be different according to the measurement speed.

When the measurement speed is set after the roughness measurement pitch is set, this message might be
displayed.

<Remedies>

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Pitch of Contour

Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Speed of Contour

Measurement Condition]

WM0005
<No.>

WM0005

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 68 of 91

<Message>

YNo. of Y-axis Meas. is out of the applicable range. Change it to

the nearest value in the applicable range.

<Possible causes>

The number of measurements of Y axis that can be set might be different according to the measurement
length of the X direction when the range of 3D measurement is set to the circle.

When the measurement length of the X direction is set after the 3D measurement is set, this message
might be displayed.

<Remedies>

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing 3D Measurement Condition of

Contour Measurement Condition]

[Measuring] - [Setting Contour Measurement Condition] - [Changing Measurement Length of Contour

Measurement Condition]

WM0006
<No.>

WM0006
<Message>

The positioning target value is out of the traversing range. Set the
stylus within the range between xxxxxx and yyyyyy.

<Possible causes>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 69 of 91

When the outside position of moveable range of the detector was set, this message might be displayed.

<Remedies>

Confirm the position of the detector. Set the target position within the range of moveable.

See Also

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement(1-axis) Command]

[Driving Measuring Instrument] - [Using Movement Command]

WM0007
<No.>

WM0007
<Message>

The setup of the measuring instrument has been changed. It

requires the calibration again.

<Possible causes>

Perform the calibration again when you changed the setting of the measuring instrument machine.

<Remedies>

See Also

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Arm/Stylus of Contour

Detector]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Roughness Detector] - [Changing Stylus of Roughness

Detector]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 70 of 91

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Stylus Attachment

Direction]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Changing Measurement Direction of

Stylus]

[Setting Up Measuring Instrument] - [Setting Contour Detector] - [Selecting Arm of Contour Detector]

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Calibrating]

WM0008
<No.>

WM0008
<Message>

Y-axis Meas. Length is out of the applicable range. Change it to

the nearest value in the applicable range.

<Possible causes>

When the length exceeding the Y-axis measurement length that can be set to the measurement command
was set, this message might be displayed.

<Remedies>

See Also

[Setting Up Workpiece] - [Leveling]

WM0009
<No.>

WM0009

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 71 of 91

<Message>

Step val. is out of the applicable range. Change it to the nearest

value in the applicable range.

<Possible causes>

When the Step val. exceeding the Step val. that can be set to Z-Gain Calibration was set, this message
might be displayed.

<Remedies>

See Also

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Calibrating] - [Executing Z-axis Gain Adjustment] - [Executing

Z-axis Gain Adjustment]

[Calibrating Measuring Instrument] - [Executing Batch Calibration]

S0001
<No.>

S0001
<Message>

The program is running.

<Possible causes>

Two or more programs cannot be activated at the same time. When you start two or more programs, this
message is displayed.

<Remedies>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 72 of 91

Please use this program that is starting already.

See Also

S0002
<No.>

S0002
<Message>

The path xxxxxx is invalid. The tool cannot be run.

<Possible causes>

The application cannot be found at the initial installation destination.

<Remedies>

Restore the application to the initial installation destination or reinstall it.

See Also

S0003
<No.>

S0003
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 73 of 91

The system file is damaged. Reinstall the program.

<Possible causes>

The system file of this program is damaged.

<Remedies>

Reinstall the program.

See Also

S9999
<No.>

S9999
<Message>

Program error

<Possible causes>

An error has occurred inside this program.

<Remedies>

Please take a note of the part program that generated the error and the error message, then please contact
the vendor.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 74 of 91

See Also

E_10001
<No.>

E_10001
<Message>

As the data or the conditions is unsuitable, parameter calculation

failed in some sampling lengths.

<Possible causes>

Because the data point was insufficient, the calculation was not able to be executed in a part of section.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition, or set the evaluation section again excluding
the section of Over Range by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again, or set the evaluation
section again excluding the section of the deletion by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 75 of 91

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

E_10002
<No.>

E_10002
<Message>

As the number of peaks or valleys is short, parameter calculation

failed in some sampling lengths.

<Possible causes>

Peaks and Valleys necessary for the calculation were not able to be calculated in a part of section.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

In addition, the following causes are possible.

1. The form of a measurement curve is flat.

2. The conditions which obtain peaks or valleys are too severe.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition, or set the evaluation section again excluding
the section of Over Range by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again, or set the evaluation
section again excluding the section of the deletion by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
3. When the form of the measurement curve is flat, set the evaluation section with the longer
sampling length again by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box, or measure again by using the
measurement condition of the longer sampling length.
4. To ease the calculation condition of the Peak and Valley, set the condition of the Calculation
Definition Dialog Box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 76 of 91

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Calculation Condition and Tolerance Comparison Condition] -

[Changing Calculation Condition of Roughness Parameter]

E_20001
<No.>

E_20001
<Message>

As the data or the conditions is unsuitable, parameter calculation

failed.

<Possible causes>

Because the data point was insufficient, the calculation was not able to be executed in all sections.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 77 of 91

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

E_20002
<No.>

E_20002
<Message>

As the number of peaks or valleys is short, parameter calculation

failed.

<Possible causes>

Peaks and Valleys necessary for the calculation were not able to be calculated in all sections.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

In addition, the following causes are possible.

1. The form of a measurement curve is flat.

2. The conditions which obtain peaks or valleys are too severe.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 78 of 91

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Calculation Condition and Tolerance Comparison Condition] -

[Changing Calculation Condition of Roughness Parameter]

E_20003
<No.>

E_20003
<Message>

As the number of local peaks is short, parameter calculation

failed.

<Possible causes>

In parameter of OLDMIX of "S" or "HSC" etc., Local peaks necessary for the calculation were not able
to be calculated in all sections.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

In addition, the following causes are possible.

1. The form of a measurement curve is flat.

2. The conditions which obtain peaks or valleys are too severe.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 79 of 91

3. When the form of the measurement curve is flat, measure again by using the measurement
condition of the longer sampling length.
4. To ease the calculation condition of the Peak and Valley, set the condition of the Calculation
Definition Dialog Box.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Changing Calculation Condition and Tolerance Comparison Condition] -

[Changing Calculation Condition of Roughness Parameter]

E_20004
<No.>

E_20004
<Message>

Conditions for determining Rk value resulted in error.(1)

<Possible causes>

The difference of mr value became to 40% on BAC (bearing area curve). And the mr=0% value of the
straight line that connected two points of the smallest inclination became negative.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 80 of 91

The parameter(Rk, etc.) using BAC is assuming the surface of the Plateau structure described in ISO-
13565-1,2,3 and JISB0671-1,2,3, etc.
The surface might not be an assumed surface.
Please refer to the above Standard.

<Remedies>

See Also

[About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Parameter] − [Description of Each Parameter]−[OLDMIX]

−[Rk : Core roughness depth]

E_20005
<No.>

E_20005
<Message>

Conditions for determining Rk value resulted in error.(2)

<Possible causes>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 81 of 91

The difference of mr value became to 40% on BAC (bearing area curve). And the mr=100% value of the
straight line that connected two points of the smallest inclination exceeded 100%.

The parameter(Rk, etc.) using BAC is assuming the surface of the Plateau structure described in ISO-
13565-1,2,3 and JISB0671-1,2,3, etc.
The surface might not be an assumed surface.
Please refer to the above Standard.

<Remedies>

See Also

[About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Parameter] − [Description of Each Parameter]−[OLDMIX]

−[Rk : Core roughness depth]

E_20006
<No.>

E_20006
<Message>

Number of local peaks for roughness motif is less than 2.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 82 of 91

<Possible causes>

During calculating of the roughness motif, the roughness motif was not able to be created because the
local peaks which constitute a roughness motif was insufficient.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

In addition, the following causes are possible.

1. The form of a measurement curve is flat.

A roughness motif is required in order to obtain a waviness motif. Therefore, this error is generated also
to the parameter of a waviness motif.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition, or set the evaluation section again excluding
the section of Over Range by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again, or set the evaluation
section again excluding the section of the deletion by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
3. When the form of the measurement curve is flat, set the evaluation section with the longer
sampling length again by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box, or measure again by using the
measurement condition of the longer sampling length.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]−[Motif]−[How to Obtain Roughness Motifs]

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]−[Motif]−[How to Obtain Waviness Motifs]

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 83 of 91

E_20007
<No.>

E_20007
<Message>

Some of initial roughness motifs exceeded A.

<Possible causes>

During calculating of the roughness motif, the roughness motif was not able to be created because some
of initial roughness motifs exceeded A.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

In addition, the following causes are possible.

1. The form of a measurement curve is flat.

A roughness motif is required in order to obtain a waviness motif. Therefore, this error is generated also
to the parameter of a waviness motif.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition, or set the evaluation section again excluding
the section of Over Range by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again, or set the evaluation
section again excluding the section of the deletion by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
3. When the form of the measurement curve is flat, set the evaluation section with the longer
sampling length again by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box, or measure again by using the
measurement condition of the longer sampling length.

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 84 of 91

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]−[Motif]−[How to Obtain Roughness Motifs]

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]−[Motif]−[How to Obtain Waviness Motifs]

E_20008
<No.>

E_20008
<Message>

Number of peaks for waviness motif is less than 2.

<Possible causes>

During calculating of the waviness motif, the waviness motif was not able to be created because the
local peaks which constitute a waviness motif was insufficient.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

In addition, the following causes are possible.

1. The form of a measurement curve is flat.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition, or set the evaluation section again excluding
the section of Over Range by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again, or set the evaluation
section again excluding the section of the deletion by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 85 of 91

3. When the form of the measurement curve is flat, set the evaluation section with the longer
sampling length again by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box, or measure again by using the
measurement condition of the longer sampling length.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]−[Motif]−[How to Obtain Roughness Motifs]

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]−[Motif]−[How to Obtain Waviness Motifs]

E_20009
<No.>

E_20009
<Message>

Some of initial waviness motifs exceeded B.

<Possible causes>

During calculating of the waviness motif, the waviness motif was not able to be created because some of
initial waviness motifs exceeded B.

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

In addition, the following causes are possible.

1. The form of a measurement curve is flat.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 86 of 91

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition, or set the evaluation section again excluding
the section of Over Range by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again, or set the evaluation
section again excluding the section of the deletion by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
3. When the form of the measurement curve is flat, set the evaluation section with the longer
sampling length again by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box, or measure again by using the
measurement condition of the longer sampling length.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]−[Motif]−[How to Obtain Roughness Motifs]

[About 2D Roughness Analysis]−[Motif]−[How to Obtain Waviness Motifs]

E_20010
<No.>

E_20010
<Message>

As the number of motifs is less then 3, parameter calculation

failed.

<Possible causes>

In the parameter calculated from a roughness motif or a waviness motif, there is what cannot be
calculated when the number of motifs becomes less than three. In these parameters, the number of
motifs became less than three.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 87 of 91

The following causes are possible.

1. The number of points might have been insufficient because there were a lot of parts of Over
Range.
2. The invalid points might have increased too much by the data deletion.

In addition, the following causes are possible.

1. The form of a measurement curve is flat.

<Remedies>

1. When there is the point of the Over Range too much, measure again by changing [Stylus Start
Position] or [Range] of the measurement condition, or set the evaluation section again excluding
the section of Over Range by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
2. When the invalid points increased too much, set the range of deletion again, or set the evaluation
section again excluding the section of the deletion by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box.
3. When the form of the measurement curve is flat, set the evaluation section with the longer
sampling length again by Evaluation Section Setup Dialog Box, or measure again by using the
measurement condition of the longer sampling length.

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Motif] - [How to Obtain Roughness

Motifs]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Motif] - [How to Obtain Waviness Motifs]

E_20011
<No.>

E_20011
<Message>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 88 of 91

Defining approximate hyperbola failed.The composite machining

plane may be out of the specified range of the standards.

<Calculation process>

Fitting hyperbola to BAC failed. Therefore, the later process ceased.

<Cause>

This error occurs when the measuring plane is out of the specified composite machining planes of the
standards.

<Error generating parameter>

Rpq, Rvq, Rmq

See Also

E_20012
<No.>

E_20012
<Message>

Defining UPL, LPL, UVL, LVL failed.The composite machining

plane may be out of the specified range of the standards.

<Calculation process>

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 89 of 91

The calculation of the intersection change between the bisector of the asymptote of the hyperbola fitted
to BAC and BAC failed. Therefore, the later process ceased.

<Cause>

This error occurs when the measuring plane is out of the specified composite machining planes of the
standards.

<Error generating parameter>

Rpq, Rvq, Rmq

See Also

E_20013,E_20014
<No.>

E_20013
E_20014
<Message>

Defining UPL, LPL, UVL, LVL failed.The composite machining

plane may be out of the specified range of the standards.

<Calculation process>

Calculation of UPL, LPL, UVL and LVL failed. Therefore, the later process ceased.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 90 of 91

<Cause>

This error occurs when the measuring plane is out of the specified composite machining planes of the
standards.

<Error generating parameter>

Rpq, Rvq, Rmq

See Also

[Measuring] - [Setting Roughness Measurement Condition] - [Setting Roughness Measurement

Condition]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Setting Evaluation Section of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [Processing data] - [Executing Data Deletion of Roughness Analysis]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Motif] - [How to Obtain Roughness

Motifs]

[Analyzing Roughness] - [About 2D Roughness Analysis] - [Motif] - [How to Obtain Waviness Motifs]

E_20015
<No.>

E_20015
<Message>

Parameter calculation failed.The composite machining plane may

be out of the specified range of the standards.
<Calculation process>

Since the obtained Rpq and Rvq values do not meet the requirement specified by the standards, it is
considered an error.

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021
C0012 Page 91 of 91

<Cause>

This error occurs when the minimum Rvq specified in item 5, ISO13565-3 (JIS B0671-3) is met.

<Error generating parameter>

Rpq, Rvq, Rmq

See Also

file:///C:/Users/admin/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh45F1.htm 6/2/2021